I esq 
 
 CORNELL 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 GIFT OF 
 Alfred Barnes 
 
Cornell University Library 
 BS2695 .E46 1884 
 
 St. PM'.»...eB!Sfl£..^S,,,.*,Sif!iiir/RiiMiiil'iii^^ 
 
 olln 
 
 3 1924 029 294 240 
 
 DATE DUE 
 
 MAY fi n 
 
 <isiuu. 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CATLORO 
 
 
 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tliis book is in 
 tlie Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924029294240 
 
ST PAUL'S EPISTLE TO THE 
 EPHESIANS: 
 
 WITH A CRITICAL AND GRAMMATICAL 
 
 COMMENTARY, 
 
 AND A REVISED TRANSLATION, 
 
 CHARLES J. ELLICOTT D.D. 
 
 BISHOP OF oiiOnOBSTEB AND BRISTOL. 
 
 THE FIFTH EDITION, CORRECTED. 
 
 
 LONDON: v' /^ ^' '^ 
 
 LONGMANS, GREEN & CO. /''' \ 
 
 \ % 
 
 1884 V^ '^'^ :, / ,| 
 
(Taiuiribge : 
 
 FEINTED BY C. J. CLAY, M.A. & SOK, 
 AT THH UNIVERSITY PRESS. 
 
ADVERTISEMENT TO THE FIFTH EDITION. 
 
 TT was stated in tlie Advertisement to the 4th edition 
 that the revision of this volume for the 3rd and 4th 
 editions introduced no important change in the Text and 
 Notes. A few alterations in reading were made especially- 
 in chap. i. i, the then newly discovered Codex Sinaiticus 
 having in some cases altered the balance of critical judg- 
 ment. The Translation was corrected, and its Notes care- 
 fully verified and revised. The whole in short was brought 
 up to the standard finally adopted in the 3rd edition of 
 the Pastoral Epistles, to which all the parts of this Com- 
 mentary have now been conformed. 
 
 To this standard, after mature consideration, it has been 
 judged best to adhere. The writer was then able to give 
 close and undivided attention to the subject, and has not 
 since found reason to modify the general principles and 
 conclusions that were then finally adopted. Citations have 
 been given in the notes to the Translation from the Revised 
 Version, but the Translation, being professedly a Version 
 " for the closet," remains as originally drawn up. 
 
 Bkisiol, 
 
 December, 1883. 
 
PKEFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 THE second edition of the present Epistle is in all respects 
 similar to the second edition of the Epistle to the Gala- 
 tians which appeared a few months since, and is brought up, 
 I sincerely hope, fully to the same standard. 
 
 It is perhaps right to say that little has been substantially 
 altered, and that the reader of the first edition will scarcely 
 find more than half a dozen passages where the opinions 
 formerly maintained are either retracted or modified; still 
 the additions are great, and the number of notes that have 
 been recast or rewritten by no means inconsiderable. By 
 this means space has been obtained for the introduction of 
 new matter; weaker arguments in contested passages have 
 been made to give place to what might seem to put in a 
 clearer light the stronger argument ; logical and grammatical 
 observations have been more grouped, and the links of 
 thought that connect clause with clause or sentence with 
 sentence more studiously exhibited. In this last respect the 
 additions will be found great, and will I trust, by the blessing 
 of God, be of no little use to the reader in properly pursuing 
 the train of sublime thought that runs through this tran- 
 scendent Epistle. This alas ! is the point most commonly 
 neglected in our ordinary study of Scripture : we trust to ge- 
 neral impressions and carry away general ideas, but the exact 
 sequence of thought in the mind of the inspired writer is 
 what I fear is only too frequently overlooked. It is useless 
 to disguise that this close analysis of the sacred text is very 
 
VI 
 
 PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 difficult ; that it requires a calm judgment and a disciplined 
 mind, no less than a loving and teachable heart ; that it is 
 not a power we can acquire in a week or in a month : yet 
 if Scripture be, what I for one believe it to be, the writing 
 of men inspired by the third Person of the adorable Trinity, 
 then we may well think that no labour in this direction can be 
 too severe, no exercise of thought too close or persistent. Let 
 it also be not forgotten that no intelligent reader can now 
 fairly say that he is without proper assistance, that the well is 
 deep and he has nothing to draiu with. 
 
 Setting aside all mention of the general improvement in 
 the Commentaries of the day, and supposing the tacit objector 
 to be either unable or unwilling to face the labour of reading 
 the great Patristic expositors, let him still remember that the 
 science of grammar is now so much advanced^, that syntax 
 and logic are liow so well and so happily combined, that no 
 one who is really in earnest, and to whom God has given a 
 fair measure of ability, can for a moment justly plead that an 
 accurate knowledge of the Greek of the New Testament is 
 beyond his grasp, and a power of analysing the connexion of 
 its weighty sentences not abundantly ministered to him. I 
 studiously limit myself to saying the Greek of the New Testa- 
 ment: individual industry, however steadily exercised, may 
 sometimes fail in making a student a good general Greek 
 scholar ; he may have no natural power of appreciating those 
 felicities of expression, no ready ability for discriminating be- 
 tween those subtle uses of particles, which mark the best age 
 of Attic Greek ; but the language of the New Testament, its 
 plain, hearty, truly simple, but truly Greek diction is I am 
 confident above the reach of no one who will soundly study 
 the general rules of thought and langiiage, as they are now 
 put before us by the grammarians of our own time. And this 
 I say, partly to encourage the humbler reader who might 
 
 1 1 may liere remark that the Greek parts, and so felicitous in its combina- 
 Grammar of Dr Donaldson, noticed tion of logic with grammar, as to form 
 in the Preface to the Galatians, has a most important contribution to the 
 now reached a second and enlarged accurate study of the Greek Ian- 
 edition, and is so complete in all its guage. [[859] 
 
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. vii 
 
 have thought such acquirements decidedly out of his reach, 
 partly for the sake of augmenting the kind and considerate 
 company of students who have given these Commentaries a 
 hearing, and have borne patiently with the constant notice 
 and repetition of grammatical details. I venture thus to dwell 
 upon this topic — a topic in part alluded to in the preface to 
 the first edition — as four years of hard study since that was 
 written, and, what is more valuable for testing opinions, one 
 year of responsible teaching, have convinced me that a really 
 accurate knowledge of the language of the Greek Testament 
 may be acquired far more easily than might at first have 
 been imagined ; and have further confirmed me in the belief 
 that it is by these accurate investigations of the language of 
 the Inspired Volume, that we are enabled really to penetrate 
 into its deeper tnysteries, and thence to learn to appreciate 
 the more convincing certainty of our highest hopes, and the 
 more assured reality of our truest consolations. 
 
 But to return to the present volume. The student will 
 find a great, and I trust a welcome addition, in the constant 
 citations from nine Ancient Versions, viz. the Old Latin, the 
 two Syriac Versions, the Vulgate, the Coptic, the Gothic, the 
 two Ethiopic Versions, and the Armenian^. .All these have 
 been carefully studied, their opinions maturely considered, 
 and their views of debated passages exhibited in brief and 
 unpretending, but (if labour may be allowed to make me 
 hopeful) in correct and trustworthy enumerations. 
 
 Considerable additions have been made in the way of 
 short critical notes, especially in those cases in .which the Tex- 
 tus Receptus differs from the reading which I have thought it 
 right to follow. Here I have received some welcome assistance 
 from the last, the so-called seventh edition of Dr Tischendorfs 
 JTew Testament, though I regret to say I am still obliged to 
 
 1 1 may take this opportunity of menaicce Qrammatica (Berl. 1841) of 
 
 noticing, for the benefit of those who J. H. Petermann. It is furnished 
 
 may be disposed to study this interest- with a good ohrestomathy and a use- 
 
 ing and not very difficult language, ful glossary, and has the great advan- 
 
 that I have derived much useful as- tage of being perspicuous and brief. 
 sistanoe from the Brevls Lingua Ar- 
 
viii PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 reiterate the opinion which I have formerly expressed, that 
 at any rate in the citations from the Ancient Versions 
 Tischendorf is not always to be depended on. His own 
 preface, though marked by great assumption of tone, will 
 indeed itself confirm this ; as he has by his own admissions 
 depended nearly entirely on Leusden and Schaaf for the 
 Peshito-Syriac ; on the incorrect edition of Wilkin s for the 
 Coptic Version of the Epistles, to the complete neglect of the 
 more recent edition of Botticher; on a collator for Piatt's 
 Ethiopic; and for the Armenian on the edition of Dr 
 Scholz whose general inaccuracies he has unsparingly de- 
 nounced. The subjective criticisms mixed up in the notes 
 cannot be called either very useful or very satisfactory, 
 and will serve to show how hard it is to find in one and 
 the same person the patient and laborious palaeographer 
 and the sound and sagacious critic. Still we owe much to 
 Dr Tischendorf, and it is probable shall have to owe much 
 more; his unwearied labours command our highest respect, 
 and may only the more make us regret that they are not set 
 off by a greater Christian courtesy in his general tone, and 
 by more forbearance towards those who feel it their duty to 
 differ from him. 
 
 The last addition to the present edition which it is here 
 necessary to specify is perhaps the most important, syste- 
 matic reference to the sermons and treatises of our best 
 English Divines. This, it will be remembered, appeared to 
 some extent in the first edition, and has always formed a 
 feature of these Commentaries ; still I am now enabled to 
 give to the reader the results of a wider reading, and to 
 entertain the hope that he will find but few really valuable 
 illustrations from our best Divines overlooked in the present 
 volume. All I have done however is only in the way of 
 reference. I much regret that neither space, nor the general 
 character of the Commentary, enable me to make long quota- 
 tions: still I will repeat what I have said elsewhere, that 
 as the references have been made with great care and 
 consideration, I venture to think that the reader who will 
 take the trouble of consulting the writers in the places 
 
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION, ix 
 
 referred to will find himself abundantly rewarded for his 
 labour. I have already received many kind recognitions of the 
 service which this class of references has rendered to students 
 in Theology; and 1 now continue them with renewed interest, 
 feeling day by day more assured that in these latter times 
 it is to our own great Divines ^of the sixteenth and seven- 
 teenth centuries that we must go for our Theology; and that 
 it is from them alone that we can provide ourselves with pre- 
 servatives against the unsound, vaunting, and humanitarian 
 theosophy, that is such a melancholy and yet such a popular 
 characteristic of our own times. 
 
 Nothing now remains for me, except to notice briefly the 
 works of fellow-labourers that have appeared since the pub- 
 lication of the first edition. 
 
 A new edition has recently appeared by Harless, but is, 
 as the author himself apprizes us, too little changed to need 
 any further notice than what has already appeared in the 
 original Preface to this work. A very useful edition for the 
 general reader has also appeared in America, from the pen 
 of the estimable Dr Turner, but is too different in its prin- 
 ciples of interpretation to have been of much use to me in 
 a critical and grammatical Commentary such as the present. 
 To two Commentaries however which have appeared in this 
 country during the interval I have alluded to I have paid 
 very great attention. The first is the Third Volume of my 
 friend Dean Alford's Commentary; the second is the Third 
 Part of Canon Wordsworth's Commentary; works which both 
 deserve and have received the high approbation of all bibli- 
 cal students: the former for its able and attractive exegesis, 
 the latter for its valuable citations from Patristic and English 
 Divinity; and both for their accurate scholarship, and sound 
 and intelligent criticism. 
 
 I now commend myself to the kind judgment of my 
 readers; and with the hope that some time in the course 
 of the following year, if God be pleased to give me health 
 and strength, I may be enabled to complete another portion 
 of my laborious undertaking, I here bring to its close a work 
 that has claimed my incessant attention for some months. 
 
X PEEFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 May the blessing of God rest on this reappearance of a 
 lowly tribute to His Honour and Glory, may its errors and 
 shortcomings be forgiven, and its broken and partial glimpses 
 of Divine Truth be permitted to excite in others a deeper 
 reverence for the Eternal Word, and a more earnest longing 
 for the full and perfect Day. 
 
 Cambbidgk, 
 
 August, 1859. 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 THE following pages form the second part of a Comment- 
 ary on St Paul's Epistles, founded on the same prin- 
 ciples and constructed on the same plan as that on the 
 Epistle to the Galatians. 
 
 As I explained somewhat at length in the preface to that 
 Epistle the general principles, critical, grammatical, and exe- 
 getical, \ipon which this Commentary has been attempted, I 
 will now only make a few special observations on this present 
 portion of the work, and record my obligations to those ex- 
 positors who have more particularly devoted themselves to 
 this Epistle. 
 
 With regard to the present Commentary, I must remind 
 the reader, that as in style, matter, and logical connexion, 
 this sublime Epistle differs considerably from that to the 
 Galatians, so the Commentary must necessarily in many 
 respects reflect these differences and distinctions. Several 
 points of grammatical interest which particularly character- 
 ized the former Epistle are scarcely perceptible in the pre- 
 sent ; while difficulties which made themselves but slightly 
 felt in the vivid, argumentative, expostulatory language of 
 Ihe Epistle to the Galatians, are here, amidst the earnest 
 hortatory comments, the deeper doctrinal expositions, and 
 the more profound enarrations of the primal counsels of God, 
 ever maintaining a distinct and visible prominence. In the 
 Epistle to the Galatians, for example, the explanation of the 
 uses of the cases did not commonly involve many points of 
 interest: in this Epistle, the cases, especially the genitive, 
 present almost every phase and form of difficulty ; the uses 
 are most various, the combinations most subtle and signi- 
 ficant. In the Epistle to the Galatians again, the particles, 
 causal, illative, or adversative, which connected the clauses 
 were constantly claiming the reader's attention, while the 
 subordination or co-ordination of the clauses themselves and 
 the inter-dependence of the different members and factors of 
 the sentence were generally simple and perspicuous. In the 
 present Epistle these difficulties are exactly reversed, the use 
 of the particles is more simple, while the intertexture of 
 sentences and the connexion of clauses, especially in the 
 
xii PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION, 
 
 earlier portions of the Epistle, try the powers and principles 
 of grammatical and logical analysis to the very uttermost. 
 
 In the first chapter more particularly, when we are per- 
 mitted as it were to gaze upon the evolution of the arche- 
 typal dispensation of God, amidst those linked and blended 
 clauses that, like the enwreathed smoke of some sweet- 
 smelling sacrifice, mount and mount upwards to the very 
 heaven of heavens, in that group of sentences of rarest har- 
 mony and more than mortal eloquence, these diflSculties are 
 so great atid so deep, that the most exact language and the 
 most discriminating analysis seem, as they truly are, too poor 
 and too weak to convey the force or connexion of expressions 
 so august, and thoughts so unspeakahly profound. 
 
 It is in this part that I have been deeply conscious that 
 the system of exposition which I have adopted has passed 
 through its sorest and severest trial; and though I have 
 laboured with anxious and unremitting industry, though I 
 have spared neither toil nor time, but with fear and trem- 
 bling, and not without many prayers, have devoted every 
 power to the endeavour to develop the outward meaning and 
 connexion of this stupendous revelation, I yet feel from my 
 very heart how feeble that effort has been, how inexpressive 
 my words, how powerless my grasp, how imperfect my de- 
 lineation. 
 
 Still, in other portions of this Epistle, I trust I am not 
 presumptuous in saying that I have been more cheered and 
 hopeful, and that I have felt increased confidence in the 
 system of exposition I was enabled to pursue in the Com- 
 mentary on the preceding Epistle. I have thus (especially 
 after the kind notices my former work has received) studiously 
 maintained in the present notes the same critical and gram- 
 matical characteristics which marked the former Commentary. 
 The only differences that I am aware of will be found in the 
 still greater attention I have paid to the Greek Expositors, a 
 slight decrease in the references to some modern Commen- 
 tators in whom I have felt a diminishing confidence, and in the 
 larger number of references to our best English Divines which 
 the nature of this profound Epistle has seemed to require. 
 I deeply regret that the limits which I have prescribed to 
 myself in this Commentary have prevented my embodying the 
 substance of these references in the notes, as I well know 
 the disinclination to pause and consult other authors which 
 every reader, save the most earnest and truth-seeking, is 
 certam to feel. Yet this I will say, that I think the student 
 will not often regret the trouble he may have to take in 
 readmg those few portions of our great English Divines to 
 
PKEFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. xiii 
 
 which I have directed his attention, and which, for his sake, 
 I could wish had been more numerous. Such as they are, 
 they are the results of my own private reading and observation. 
 
 In the grammatical portion of the Commentary I must 
 entreat the. reader to bear with me, if, for the sake of brevity, 
 and I might even say perspicuity, I have been forced to avail 
 myself of the current forms of expression adopted by modem 
 grammatical writers. They will all be found elucidated in the 
 treatises to which I have referred, and of these every one, to 
 the best of my belief, is well known and accessible, and will 
 probably occupy a place in the library of most scholars. 
 
 I must now briefly notice the authors to whom, in addition 
 to those mentioned in the preface to the Galatians, I am 
 indebted in the present Epistle. 
 
 Of the Patristic Commentators I have derived great benefit 
 from some exceedingly valuable annotations of Origen, which 
 are to be found in Cramer's Gatence, and which have hitherto 
 scarcely received any notice from recent expositors, though 
 they most eminently deserve it. 
 
 Of modern Commentators on this Epistle, I am deeply 
 indebted to the admirable exposition of Hariess, which, for 
 accurate scholarship, learning, candour, and ability, may be 
 pronounced one of the best, if not the very best Commentary 
 that has ever yet appeared on any single portion of Holy 
 Scripture. 
 
 The exposition of this Epistle by Dr Stier under the title 
 of Die Gemeinde in Ghristo Jesu, is very complete and compre- 
 hensive, but so depressingly voluminous as to weary out the 
 patience of the most devoted reader. When I mention that 
 it extends to upwards of 1050 closely printed pages, and that 
 some single verses {e.g. ch. i. 23, ii. 15) are commented on 
 to the extent of nearly thirty pages, I may be excused if I 
 express my regret that a writer so earnest, so reverential, and 
 so favourably known to the world as Dr Rudolph Stier, should 
 not have endeavoured to have confined his Commentary to 
 somewhat more moderate dimensions. The chief fault I ven- 
 ture to find with Dr Stier 's system of interpretation is his 
 constant and (in this work) characteristic endeavour to blend 
 together two or more explanations, and, in his earnest and 
 most praiseworthy attempt to exhibit the many deeper mean- 
 ings which a passage may involve, to unite what is often dis- 
 similar and inharmonious. Still his Conimentary is the 
 production of a learned and devout mind, and no reader will 
 consult it in vain. A review of it may be found in the 
 seventy-ninth volume of Reuter's Repertorium. 
 
 The third special Commentary I desire to mention is the 
 
xiv PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 full and laborious work of Professor Eadie. I have derived 
 from it little directly, as it is to a great degree confessedly a 
 compilation from existing materials, and these I have in 
 all cases thought it my duty to examine and to use for my- 
 self; still I have never failed to give Professor Eadie's de- 
 cisions my best consideration, and have in many cases felt 
 myself edified by the devoutness, and not unfrequently the 
 eloquence of his expositions. I trust however the learned 
 author will excuse me when I say that I do not think the 
 grammatical portion of the Commentary is by any means so 
 well executed as the exegetical, and that I cannot but regard 
 this otherwise able work as to a certain degree an example 
 of the truth of an opinion which I ventured to express in the 
 preface to the Galatians, viz. that theological as well as gram- 
 matical learning is now so much extended, that it is hard to 
 find a commentator who is able satisfactorily to undertake, at 
 one and the same time, a critical, grammatical, exegetical, and 
 dogmatical exposition of any portion of the New Testament. 
 In his cumulative representation of the opinions of other 
 Commentators, as my notes will occasionally testify, Professor 
 Eadie is also not always exact: with these abatements how- 
 ever, which candour compels me to make, I can heartily and, 
 conscientiously recommend this Commentary as both judicious 
 and comprehensive, and as a great and important addition to 
 the exegetical labours of this country. 
 
 I need hardly add that the last edition of the accurate, 
 perspicuous, and learned Commentary of Dr Meyer has been 
 most carefully consulted throughout, and I must again, as in 
 the preface to the Oalatians, avow my great obligations to 
 the acumen and scholarship of the learned editor. In many 
 doctrinal questions I differ widely from Dr Meyer, but as a 
 critical and grammatical expositor he deserves the respect of 
 all thoughtful readers. 
 
 I have now only to commit my work to the reader with 
 the humble prayer to Almighty God, through Jesus Christ, 
 that it may receive a blessing from above ; and, though feebly 
 and imperfectly, may still be permitted to minister somewhat 
 to the more accurate knowledge of His blessed word, and to 
 the clearer perception of the outward forms and expressions 
 of His everlasting Truth. 
 
 Cambhidge, 
 
 June, 1855. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 THE sublime Epistle to the Ephesians was written by St Paul 
 during his first captivity at Rome (Acts xxviii. i6), and stands 
 second or more probably third in the third of the four groups into 
 which the Epistles of St Paul may be conveniently divided. The 
 Ep. to the Colossians (Meyer, Einleit. p. i8, Wieseler, Ghronol. 
 p. 450 sq.), and also that to Philemon, appear to have immediately 
 preceded, while that to the Philippians seems to have succeeded 
 after an interval of perhaps a year, when the Apostle's confine- 
 ment assumed a harsher character, and his prospects seemed in 
 some measure more cheerless (Phil. i. zo). 
 
 It was thus written about the year A. D. 62, and was conveyed 
 to the Church of Ephesus by Tychicus (Eph. vi. 21), either while 
 on his way to deliver the Epistles addressed respectively to the 
 Colossians and to Philemon, or, as has been thought more proba-^ 
 ble (Meyer, Einleit. p. 17), on his return after having performed 
 that duty. 
 
 The belief that the Epistle was addressed to the Christians of the 
 important city of Ephesus is not open to very serious doubt. The 
 critical arguments (see note on ch. i. i), and the nearly unanimous 
 consent of the early Church (Iren. Har, v. 2. 3 ; Clem. Alex. 
 Strom, iv. 8, Vol. i. p. 592, ed. Potter; Orig. Gels. iii. 20, Vol. i. p. 
 458, ed. Bened.) are generally in favour of such a destination. StUl 
 ^s the critical arguments have to some extent been modified by the 
 evidence of the Codex Sinaiticus, and as the omission of greetings and 
 personal notices in an Epistle sent from the founder of the Church 
 of Ephesus (Acts. xix. i sq., comp. xviii. 19) to converts with whom 
 he had dwelt nearly three years (Acts xx. 31) is certainly striking 
 and noticeable, we may now the more confidently adopt the opinion 
 of Usher {Annul, ann. 4068) and of several recent expositors, that 
 this Epistle, if addressed primarily to the Christians at Ephesus, 
 
xvi INTRODUCTION. 
 
 was still designed for circulation in all the churches near to 
 or dependent on that city, and was thus left studiously general 
 in form, and free from distinctive notices. Individual greetings 
 and other messages of aflfeotion might well have been entrusted 
 to a bearer who was specially commissioned to inform the receiv- 
 ers of the Epistle upon all points connected with the personal state 
 of the Apostle (ch. vi.- 21). 
 
 The Epistle does not appear to have been called forth by any 
 particular circumstances, nor to have involved any warning against 
 the peculiarities of Jewish or Eastern Philosophy, but was de- 
 signed to set forth the origin and development of the Church of 
 Christ, and to display to the Christian dweller under the shadow of 
 the great temple of Diana the unity and beauty of that transcend- 
 ently more glorious spiritual temple (ch. ii. 20) of which Christ 
 Himself was the chief corner stone, and the saints portions of the 
 Superstructure. That it should also contain many thoughts nearly 
 identical with those expressed in the Epistle to the Colossians is 
 readily accounted for by the fact that both were written nearly at 
 the same time, and both addressed to Churches which were suffi- 
 ciently near to each other to have had many things in common, 
 especially in the relations of social and domestic life. 
 
 The genuineness and authenticity admit of no reasonable doubt. 
 The testimonies of the Early Church are unusually strong and per- 
 sistent (see reflf. above, and addTertuU. de Prcescr. ch. xxxvi; [Hip- 
 pol.] Contra Hcer. p. 193 [284]), and have never been called in 
 question till comparatively recent times. The objections are purely 
 of a subjective character, being mainly founded on imaginary 
 weaknesses in style or equally imaginary references to early Gnos- 
 ticism, and have been so fairly and fully confuted that they can no 
 longer be considered to deserve any serious attention : see esp. 
 Meyer, Eirdeit. p. 19 sq., Davidson, Introd. Vol. 11. p. 352 sq., 
 Alford, Prolegom. p. 8. 
 
 The arguments in favour of the Epistle having been written 
 at Csesarea will be found in Meyer, Einleit. § 2, but are far from 
 convincing. 
 
nPOS E^ESIOYS. 
 
 .Apostolic address 
 and salutation. 
 
 nAYAOS dxoo-ToXoj "Kpiarov 'Ijj- I. 
 crov oia OeXijfjLaTOi Qeov TO?g dyioti 
 
 I. dirooToXos X. '!.] 'an Apostle 
 of Christ Jesus:' gen. not of ablation 
 (the source from which his commission 
 proceeded; eomp. Stier in loc), but 
 simply of possession, in reference to 
 the Master whose servant and minis- 
 ter he was; see Acts xxvii. 23,ovcl/d; 
 Eom. i. I, SovXos'J. X.: and comp. 
 notes on Col. i. i. The distinction 
 between these forms of the gen. (which 
 Eadie appears not to have fully felt) 
 is often faintly marked (compare 
 Scheuerl. Synt. § i6, 17); stiU Har- 
 less seems quite correct in saying that 
 the idea of authorisation does not 
 depend simply on the gen., but on 
 the modal clauses, as xar' itnTayiiv, 
 I Tim. i. I, which are commonly at- 
 tached: comp. Gal. i. i, where the 
 nature of the relations between the 
 Apostle and his converts suggests 
 language of unusual precision. The 
 order Xp. 'It/it. rests on BDE ; al. 
 {Lachm., Tisch.): Bee. gives '1170-. X/j. 
 withAFGKLK; all mss.; al. 
 Sid 9eXii|j,aTos 06ov] 'iy the will of 
 God;' modal clause appended to the 
 preceding words, not so much to en- 
 hance his apostolic authority (comp. 
 Alf.), as in that thankful remem- 
 .brance of God's power and grace 
 which any allusion to his ministerial 
 office was sure to awaken in the Apo- 
 stle's heart: comp. i Cor. xv. 10, 
 GaJ. i. 15. These and the preceding 
 
 words occur in the same order and 
 connexion in 2 Cor. i. i. Col. i. ij 
 1 Tim. i. I ; comp. i Cor. i. i. Though 
 ftisnot possible to doubt that theApo- 
 stle, in addressing different Churches 
 or individuals, designedly adopted the 
 same or different modes of salutation, 
 still it is not in all cases easy to trace 
 from external considerations the rea- 
 sons for the choice; comp. notes ore 
 Col. i. I. Euckert, who has slightly 
 touched on the subject (ore Gal. i. i), 
 refers the Apostle's present specificaf 
 tion of his authority, 5i4 ScX. 9., to 
 the encyclical character of the Epistle. 
 As this character, though probable 
 (see crit. note), is merely hypothe- 
 tical, it wUl be safer, and perhaps 
 more natural, to adopt the more gene- 
 ral explanation above alluded to ; see 
 Meyer ore i Cor. i. 1. 
 Tois d'yCois] ' to the Saints,' Christians 
 are appy. called ayioi in the N. T. in 
 three senses : (a) generally, as mem- 
 bers of a visible and local conununity 
 devoted to God's service (Acts ix. 32, 
 xxvi. 10, Kom. XV. 25), and, as such, 
 united in a common outward profes- 
 sion of faith (i Cor. i. 2 ; see Chrys. 
 ore Rom. i. 7) ; (6) more specifically, as 
 members of a spiritual community 
 (Col. iii. 12, I Pet. ii, 9); and (c) as 
 also in many cases having personal 
 and individual sanctity; comp. ver. 
 4, see Fell in loc. The context will 
 
 B 
 
2 EPOS E*E2I0Y2. 
 
 rots oZa-iv [ev 'Ed)ecra)l Koi vicrrois ev 'KpicTTiS ''Irjcrov. 
 
 I , [iy 'B0^(ry] In consequence of the omission of these words in the newly 
 discovered K we are now perhaps at length justified in placing them in brackets. 
 The facts of the case are as follows : I. As far as our present collations can be 
 depended upon, all the MSS., mss., and Vv. are unanimous in favour of the 
 insertion ; except B, where the words are supplied on the margin by a second 
 hand {Tisch.), X, where the words are added by the fourth hand (Tischendorf 's 
 C), and 67, where they appear in the text, but with diacritical marks indica- 
 tive of suspicion. II. Basil, whom we have reasons for believing to have been 
 careful as a critic {see Georg. Synoell. Chron. p. 203, ed. Paris, 1651), certainly 
 did not find the words Iv tois iroKaioti tu>v avriypatpuv, Eunom. 11. 19. Bp 
 Middleton supposes Basil only to appeal to the ancient Manuscripts as contain- 
 ing Tois o5(ric h 'E(p., not simply rois ii>'E<j>. -. comp. Wiggers, Stud. u. Krit, 
 for 1 84 1, p. 423 ; this opinion however has no diplomatic support of any kind, 
 and cannot fairly and logically be deduced from the words of Basil ; see Meyer, 
 Einleit. p. i, note. HI. TertuUian {Marc. v. 11, 17) possibly was not aware of 
 their existence ; it is uncritical to say more. His words ' Veritas Eoolesise ' do 
 not necessarily imply an absence of diplomatic evidence, nor can 'interpolare' 
 (comp. llarc. iv. i, v. 21) be pressed. IV. Origen {Oaten. Vol. h. p. 102) 
 appears to have accepted the omission, as he comments on the peculiarity of 
 the expression tois dylots rols o^aiv, see Tiseh. (ed. 7). The internal evidence, 
 such as absence of greetings and personal notices, is of more importance. StiU 
 both combined do not as yet seem quite suifioieut entirely to overthrow the 
 preponderance of external authority, and the appy. unanimous tradition of the 
 early Church, that this Ep. was addressed to the Ephesians (Iren. Har. v. 2, 3 ; 
 Clem. Al. Strom, iv. 8; TertuU. I.e.; Origen, Gels. iii. p. 458, ed. Ben.). 'We 
 therefore now place the words in brackets, but retain them in the text, feeling 
 it still possible that their omission in B and K may be due to an early exercise 
 of criticism founded on supposed internal evidence, traces of which are found 
 in Theodoret, Prcef. in Eph. : comp. Wieseler, Chronol. p. 442 sq. The different 
 theories and attempts to reconcile conflicting evidence wiU be found in Meyer, 
 Einleit. § i; Wieseler, Chronol. p. 432 sq.; and Davidson, Introd. Vol. 11. 
 p. 328 sq. Of the many hypotheses, that of Harless {Einleit. p. 57)— that the 
 Ep. was designed not only for the Ephesians, but for the Churches dependent 
 on Ephesus, or the Christians who had already been converted there— is per- 
 haps the most plausible. 
 
 generally show which of these ideas involving these different ideas are 
 
 predominates. In salutations like the grouped round aijrois ayloir. comp. 
 
 present 07105 appears to be used in Thorndike, Review, i. 33, Vol. i. p. 
 
 its most comprehensive sense, as in- 656 (A.-C. L.), and Davenant on Col. 
 
 volvmgtheideaofaOTsi6ie(hencethe i. 2. irio-Tots Iv Xp 
 
 local predicate), and also (as the com- 'I,,o-.] 'faithful, sc. believing in Christ 
 
 phmentary clause ™i „,rro?, h Xp. 1. Jesus: ni<rrJs stands here not in its 
 
 suggests) that of a spiritual and holy general and classical sense, ' qui fidem 
 
 community: see Col. i. 2, and esp. prjestaf (Grot., Alf.), but in its par- 
 
 I Cor. 1. .., where defining clauses ticular and theological sense, 'qui 
 
I. 2, 3. J 
 
 )(a^tj vfiiv KOI elpfivtj avo Qeov irarpoi fifimv /cat Kvpiou 2 
 l^CTOV Xpi(7ToO. 
 ?St^S''"u^to°'Sf; EJAoy^TcJf 6 Qedi kuI irar^p rov 3 
 
 ^option of sons, redeemed us by Ckrnt's blood, revealed to us 
 His eternal purpose of uniting all in Hini, and commenced its 
 falfllment by sealing with His Spirit both Jew and Gentile. 
 
 fidem habet' (comp. Syr.), a meaning 
 which it indisputably bears in several 
 passages in the N. T.; e.g. John xx. 
 27, 2 Cor. vi. 15, Gal. iiL 9, i Tim. 
 iv. 3 (not I Tim. i. 12, Eadie), Titus 
 i. 6, <j^c. : comp. Ecclus. i. 14, Psahn 
 ci. 6, and see Suicer, Thesaur. s.v. 
 Vol. II. p. 741. tv Xpi<rr§ 
 
 implies union and fellowship with 
 Christ (see notes on Gal. ii. 17), qua- 
 lifying only the more restricted term 
 vurrds, not a'7ios (Phil. i. i) together 
 ■with tio-tSs (Harl., Meyer). The 
 clause is not however, on the one 
 hand, a mere epexegesis of 07^01$ 
 ^Beza), nor, on the other, a specifi- 
 cation of another and separate class 
 (Stier) ; but completes the description 
 of the 07101, by the addition of a 
 second and more distinctive predica- 
 tion: see Meyer in loc. nioris {r 
 Xp- thus approximates in meaning 
 to TricTeiuni els Xp. (Gal. ii. i6), ex- 
 cept that the latter involves a closer 
 connexion of the verb and the prep. 
 {mffT. els...Xp.), and points rather to 
 an act of the will, while the former 
 involves a closer connexion of the 
 prep, and the noun (wi.iTT....iv Xp.), 
 and marks a state and condition : see 
 Fritz. Marc. p. 175, and Eadie in loc, 
 where the full force of the preposition 
 is eloquently expanded. 
 
 2. \<ipis vfiiv Kal elpi^vi)] 'Grace 
 to you and peace ;' scil. etrj, not Iffra 
 (Meyer, Holzh.), which, though not 
 untenable (Bemhardy, Synt. xi. 5, p. 
 392 ; comp. 2 Chron. ix. 8), is far less 
 suitable and even less usual than the 
 optative; see i Pet. i. 2, 2 Pet. i. 2, 
 Jude 2 ; and comp. i John 3, where 
 
 however laTai gives the wish the cha- 
 racter of a definite expectation. The 
 suggestion of Stier that x"^?" s™'i *'" 
 p-qini refer respectively to the 07101 and 
 irio-rol does not seem tenable, as the 
 formula is so common without any 
 such antecedents (Bom. i. 7, i Cor. i. 
 3, 2 Cor. i. 2, al.); still they must not 
 be diluted into mere eqnivalentsof the 
 ordinary forms of salutation (Fritz. 
 liom. i. 7, Vol. I. p. 23). Xdpis ex- 
 presses God's love toward man; el- 
 pijm} the state of peace and blessed- 
 ness which results from it; elpipifia 
 yap vpis rbv 0eiv 6 TTp> eiayyeKiK^v 
 &<nraffdfjiejfOS TroKiTday, Theod. on Rom, 
 i. 8 ; see notes on Gal. i. 3. It may be 
 observed that as this form is regularly 
 maintained in all St Paul's Epp. to 
 Churches (Philem. 3 is no exception, 
 being addressed also rg kot' oIkov ix- 
 K\riaiq), while in t Tim. i. i, 2 Tim. 
 i. 2, Tit. i. 4 (Bec.yLachm.), the more 
 personal term ?\eos is added, the latter 
 might seem the form addressed to 
 in(2CTid«ak,theformer to communities; 
 comp. too Eev. i. 4, 2 John 3, but 
 consider Jude 2, Gal. vi. 16, and ob- 
 serve that in Titus l. c. x^P''^ "^"^ ^ 'p^J- 
 vtj is the reading best supported. St 
 James alone adopts the usual formula 
 Xalpetv. in 3 John r, 2, the salutation 
 passes into a prayer. koI 
 
 KvpCov] Scil. Kal iiri Kvplov, k.t.\. : 
 so expressly Syr., Arm., both of which 
 repeat the preposition. The Socinian 
 interpretation, Kal {iraTpbs) Kvp., is 
 grammatically admissible, but in a 
 high degree forced and improbable: 
 see esp. Tit. i. 4, and compare i Theas. 
 iii. II, 2 Thess. ii. i5. 
 
 B 2 
 
nPOS E$ESIOYX 
 
 K.vpLOU fjiJLWv 'Ir]<rov "KpierTOv, 6 evXoyticra^ ^/^a? ev Traa-ij 
 
 3. EuXoynTos] 'Blessed,' soil. Jcrrw 
 (2 Chron. ix. 8), or etrj (Job i. 2J, 
 Psalm cxiii. 2) : the verb is however 
 commonly omitted in this and similar 
 forms of doxology; oomp. 2 Cor. i. 3. 
 In this solemn ascription of praise 
 eiXoyr/Tds (iirtuveiaBai Koi BaviiA^caBai, 
 afios, Theod. -Mops.), as its position 
 shows, has the principal emphasis, the 
 rule of Fritz. (Rmn. ix. 5, Vol. 11. ■274) 
 l?eing appy. reasonable, viz. that eiXo- 
 yrfrhs or eiXoyrj/j^os will occupy the 
 first or some succeeding place in the 
 sentence, according as the emphasis 
 rests on the predicate (as it commonly 
 does) or on the substantive; comp. 
 I Kings X. 9, 2 Chron. I. c. Job I. c. 
 and esp. Psalm I. c. which are thus 
 more satisfactorily explained than by 
 a supposed limitation of position in 
 consequence of the inserted copula 
 (Alf. on Bom. ix. 5). It has 
 
 been remarked by Steiger ore i Fet. i. 
 3 (comp. Harless), that in the N. T. 
 ei)Xo7ijT6s is only applied to God, ii\o- 
 yofiivos to man : it may be added that 
 in the IXX the latter is occasionally 
 applied to God, the former but seldom 
 to man, appy. only in Gen. xxvi. 29 
 {Alex.), Deut. vii. 14, i Sam. xv. 13, 
 XXV. 33. ^or a good analysis of the 
 present paragraph, in which the rela- 
 tions of the Church to the three 
 persons of the blessed Trinity are dis- 
 tinctly unfolded, see Alford in loc. 
 6 ©eis Kttl iraTtip k.t.X.] 'God and 
 the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ.^ 
 It is doubtful whether in this formula 
 (which Eiick. needlessly terms 'pau- 
 linisch,' see i Pet. i. 3) the gen. de- 
 pends (a) on both (Theoph.), or (6) 
 only on the latter (Syr., ^th. , Theod.- 
 Mops. I, Theodoret) of the two nomi- 
 natives. Chrys. leaves it undecided. 
 Grammatical considerations do not 
 assist us; for, on the one hand, the 
 
 position of the article before Qebs 
 rather than Trarijp (Olsh.) does not 
 invalidate the latter interpretation- 
 (comp. Winer, Gr. § 19. 3, p. 1 15 note), 
 nor the omission of re before (ca! (Har* 
 less) the former ; the usual ' prepara- 
 tive' force of re (Hartung, Partih. 
 Vol. I. p. 98; Klotz, Devar. Vol. ii.^ 
 p. 730) being here obviously out of 
 place. To the former interpretation,- 
 Qebs /xiv lis aapKuBivTos, iraT-ijp Si 01s 
 QeoO Xi7ou, there can be no doctrinal 
 objections (see ver. 17, John xx. 17, 
 and comp. Olsh. on Matth. xxi. 31 , 32)^ 
 but from the considerations suggested 
 on Gal. i. 4, as well as from the fact" 
 that except in ver. 17 St Panllias not 
 elsewhere so designated the Father, 
 thelatter construction seems decidedly 
 preferable. On £he most suitable 
 
 translation, see notes ore Gal. i. 4 
 (Transl.), & evXoyijo-tts iilias] 
 
 'wlio hlessedus;^ 'antanaclasis; aliter 
 nobis benedixit Deus, aJiter nos bene- 
 dioimus Uli,' Bengel, The aorist^iar- 
 ticiple (where the aoristic force is al- 
 ways least obscure ; Bemhardy, Synt'. 
 X. 9, p. 383) refers to the counsels of 
 the Father as graciously completed in 
 the Eedemption, and is thus neither 
 used (a) for a pres. (Holzh.), an un- 
 tenable position, except in a sense and 
 under limitations (Soheuerl. Syntax^ 
 § 32. 2, p. 331) which would here be 
 doctrinally unsuitable; nor (6) aS 
 marking 'a customary or repeated 
 act' (Eadie), a meaning which the 
 aorist appears never to bear in the 
 N. T. ; see Winer, Gr. § 40. 5. i, p. 
 248. The reference of ri/ias can 
 scarcely be doubtful : it cannot refer 
 to St Paul (Koppe), — for comp. 
 Kayu>, ver. 15— but, as the inclusive 
 nature of the context (ver. 4, 11, 12) 
 distinctly implies, must be extended 
 to Christians generally. Ko fixed rules 
 
I. 3. i 
 
 evXoyia irvevfjLariKrj ev roii eTTOupavloif ev Xpicrtw^ ; 
 
 can be laid down as to the reference 
 of the plural pronoun: this must al- 
 ways be determined by the context. 
 iv ircto-T) EvXo7(f irveunaTiK'g] ' with 
 every b leasing of the Spirit ; ' agency by 
 which the blessing was imparted, iv 
 here being appy. instrumental (see 
 notes on i Thess. iv. i8), and perhaps 
 not without some parallelism to the 
 Hebrew 3 'T|'13 ; comp. the analogous 
 construction, Tobityiii. 15, and James 
 iii. 9, where however the instrumental 
 sense is much more distinct. The 
 meaning and force of TvevnariK-rj is 
 slightly doubtful. Chrys. and Theod.. 
 Hops, find in it an antithesis to the 
 blessings of the Old Covenant {r^v 
 'lovdaXxTJi' ivToSBa alvlmrai, evKoyla 
 fiiv yap riv, dXX' ou irfev/iaTiK^, Chrys. ; 
 comp. Schoettg. Hor. Hebr. Vol. i. p» 
 756) ; so distinctly Syr. , ^ th. , and, with 
 a detailed enumeration of the bless^ 
 ings, Theod, in loc. It seems 
 
 however much more in accordance 
 both with the present context and with 
 the prevailing usage of the N. T. (see 
 Bom. i. 1 1, xii/""'/''' TrvevixaTiK6v, and 
 X Cor. xii. r, twv TrvevfiatiKuv^ com- 
 pared with ver. 1 1), to refer the epithet 
 directly to the Holy Spirit (Joel ii. 
 iSBq., Acts ii. 17), Bengel has not 
 failed to notice the allusion to the 
 Trinity, which (as Stier has clearly 
 showja, VqI, I. p. 57) pervades the 
 whole of this sublime Epistle. 
 4v Tots eiroupavCois] 'in the heq,venly 
 regions;' ] . Vn » «-^ [i" ccelo] Syr., 
 
 'in coelis,' Mila. The exact meaning 
 of these words is doubtful. Many of 
 the ancient and several modem ex- 
 positors explain toi iirovpinia as ' hea-,. 
 venly blessings' {ivovpavia yap tA, 
 Supa raOra, Theodoret), 'heavenly 
 institutions' (J. Johnson, Unbl. Sacr. 
 yol, r. p. 198, A.-C.L.), and thus 
 
 as standing in ethical contrast to to, 
 iirlyeia (Chrys.), see John iii. 12; but 
 comp. I Cor, xv. 40, where the same 
 words are in physical contrast. This 
 is not grammatically untenable, and 
 would not require the omission of j-ofs 
 (EUck.jEadie, al.), as the article wpuld 
 thus only correctly designate the class ; 
 see Middleton, GreeJc Art. iii, z. i, p. 
 40, and comp. Winer, Gr.% i8. 3, p. 
 99. As however such a specification, 
 of the sphere, and thence of the spi- 
 ritual character of the action, would 
 seem superfluous after the definite, 
 words immediately preceding ; as in, 
 the four other passages in this Bp, (i,_ 
 20, ii. 6, iii. 10, and vi. 12, but oontr. 
 Chrys.) the expression seems obviously 
 local; and lastly, as throughout St 
 Paul's Epp. (even 2 Tim. iv. .18) iirov- 
 pantos lias that local or physical force 
 which the preposition iirl (Harless) 
 would, also seem further to suggest, it; 
 will be best, both on contextual and. 
 lexical grounds , to retain that meaning 
 in the present case. 'Bk tois iirovp. 
 must then here be referred as a local, 
 predication to ei\oy. irvev/i,.,, defining 
 broadly and comprehensively the re- 
 gion and sphere where our true home 
 is (Phil. iii. 20), where our hope is 
 laid up (Col, i. s). and whence the 
 blessings of the Spirit, the -q Sapcd, ■q 
 irovpavios (Heb. vi. 4), truly come: 
 see notes to Transl. «v 
 
 Xpio-T^] Not for Sio, Xpia-Tov (Chrys., 
 Hamm.), but, as in ver. i,'in Christ; ' 
 ' in quo uno spirituali et sanctifioS 
 benedictione donamur,' Beza, Thus 
 i6\oy/l(ras contains the predication of 
 time (Donalds. Gr. § 574sq.),^c jr. ei\. 
 jrceuyK. the predication oi manner, more 
 exactly defined by the local predication 
 h roi^ iirovp., while ^c Xp. is that 
 jnystical predication which, as Stier 
 ■well observes, ' is the very soul of this 
 
nPOS E*E2I0YS. 
 
 4 Ka6ws e^eXe^aro ^fias eV uvtm vpo /cara^oX^? Kocrfiou, 
 eTvat ^fnas dylovi kuI a/nw/uovs KaTevwiriov avrov, ev 
 
 Epistle,' and involves all other con- 
 ceptions in itself. For a good example 
 of this species of analysis of clauses 
 and sentences, see Donalds. Crat. § 
 304. Steph. (not Bee.) omits iv. 
 
 4. KaBws]'«wraas."sicut,'Vulg., 
 Clarom., Copt., al.; explanation and 
 expansion of the preceding ei\oy^- 
 o-as K.T.X., the particle Kaffds, which 
 in most cases has a purely modal, 
 appearing here to have also a slightly 
 explanatory or even causal force ('in- 
 asmuch as'), and to mark not only 
 the accordance, but the necessary 
 connexion of the eiXoyla with the 
 ii{\oy/i; see Eom. i. 28, i Cor. i. 6, 
 and compare Ka0in (used only by St 
 Luke), which has both a modal (Acts 
 ii. 45, iv. 55) and a causal (Acts ii. 
 24) meaning. The form Kadus is not 
 found in the older Attic writers, or in 
 Lucian; see Lobeck, Fhryn. p. 426, 
 and notes on Gal. iii. 6. 
 l|EX^|aTo i^iiitts] 'He ehose tis out for 
 Himself; ' 'elegit,' Vulg., Clarom., al., 
 but with some sacrifice of the fullest 
 meaning. Without entering into the 
 profound dogmatical questions con- 
 nected with the meaning of this verb 
 (only used by St Paul here and i Cor. 
 i. 27 his, 28), it may be simply ob- 
 served that in ^{eWfaro three ideas 
 are suggested: (a) selection (not neces- 
 sarily of tndiuid«afe,seeEbrard,Do(7m. 
 § 560) from, out of, others not chosen 
 (^/c roO KbaiMV, John xv. 19 ; contr. 
 Hofmann, Schriftb. Vol. 1. p. 198), 
 suggested by the plain meaning of the 
 word. (6) Simple unrestricted preter- 
 ition of the act (alike irrespective of 
 duration or relation; Bernhardy, Syn- 
 tax, X. 8, p. 380, and esp. Fritz, de 
 Aor. p. 17 sq.), conveyed by the tense, 
 and further heightened by the ' time- 
 lesfnesB' (Olsh.) of theqtiasi-temporal 
 
 predication tt/jA «caTO;8oX^s; compare 
 2 Thess. ii. 13, et\aro ir ipxv^'- God 
 is Kd\uiy (i Thess. ii. 13) as well as 6 
 KoXiffas (Gal. i. 6), but not 6 iic\e- 
 y6iievos. (c) Beflexive action (for 
 Himself; compare Eph. v. 27, Bev. 
 xxi. 2), implied by the voice. While 
 the primary meaning oiiKXiyea-Baiani 
 similar words is undoubtedly to be 
 looked for in their general andnational 
 references in theO.T.(Usteri,icftr&ejr. 
 II. 2. i, p. 271 ; Knapp, Seript. Var. 
 Arg. p. 556), the modal clauses with 
 which they are combined show the 
 deeper and more distinctive sense in 
 which they are used in the New Tes- 
 tament. On this profound subject, 
 and on the estates of man (the estate 
 of wrath, of reconciliation, and of 
 election), see esp. Jackson, Creed, x. 
 37. II sq., Vol. IX. p. 312 sq., and 
 comp. Hammond on God's Grace, VoL 
 I. p. 667 sq. (Lond. 1674), and Lau- 
 rence, Bam,pt. Lect. for 1804. 
 iv ovT^] Not for 81' avTDV, scil. Sia ttjs 
 els auTbii Tr/ffTeus (Chrys., Haimn.),nor 
 for els aMv (comp. ^th.), nor yet 
 with an instrumental force (Arm.), 
 but, as Olsh. correctly and profoundly 
 explains it, HnHim;' in Christ, as the 
 head and representative of spiritual, 
 as Adam was the representative of 
 natural humanity ; comp. r Cor. xv. 
 22. irpo KaTaPoXijs K6ir|iov] 
 
 This expression, used three times in 
 the N. T. (John xvii. 24, 1 Pet. i. 20), 
 here serves to define the archetypal 
 character of the New Dispensation, 
 and the wide gulf that separated the 
 Tpddeirts Tpb XP^*'^^ cUuvtuv (2 Tim. 
 i. g) of God with respect to Christians, 
 from His temporal ixXoyii of the Jews; 
 see Neander, Planting, Vol. i. p. 522 
 (Bohn), clvai '•jl^as 
 
 K.T.X.] 'that we should he holy and 
 
I- 4, 5- 
 
 ayairtj irpooplcrai ^/ua? eiy vioQealav Sia 'IticroO I^pia-Tou 5 
 
 6Zamftes;'o'bjeotcontemplatedbyGod 
 in His gracious ^k\o7t}, the infin. being 
 that of intention; sail. M Tomif tva 
 07101 Siiiev Kal diiafioi, Chrys. : oomp. 
 t Cor. xi. 2, Col. i. 22, and see Winer, 
 Gr. § 44. 1, p. 284, Donalds. Gr. § 607. 
 ^t P- 5 98. 017(011$ Kol 
 
 d)u«|iovs] ' Jwly and blameless; ' posi- 
 tive and negative aspects of true Chris- 
 tian life. The meaning of o/iu/nos (ci- 
 /ie/iiTTos, Kadapii, aijieKTos, Hesych. ) 
 is slightly doubtful; it may he (a) 
 ' incuLpatus,' i drevlXriirTov piov ^X"" 
 (Chrys.), in accordance with its deri- 
 vation {jxu/io!, ini/uponai) ; or (6) ' im- 
 maculatus' (Vulg., Clarom., Arm.; 
 oomp. Syr., Goth.), with possible re- 
 ference to its application in the LXX 
 to victims. Lev. i. 10, xxii. 19; comp. 
 I Mace. iv. 42, lepeTs a/j.iifi.ovs, and see 
 Tittm.S</non. p. 29. The latter mean- 
 ing is strongly supported by i Pet. i. 
 ig, dfivoG a/iiSfiov Kal a<r7rl\ov, and 
 Heb. ix. 14: still, as there is here no 
 sacrificial aUusion direct or indirect 
 (comp. ch. V. 27),itseemsbesttoretaiu 
 {a) the simple etymological meaning; 
 see Col. i. 22, aylovs xal d/id/iovs Kal 
 dveyKk-lirovs, and comp. Wisd. x. ^is, 
 liabv Hcrtov Kal crir^pfAa d/ie/j.TTOi'. It 
 
 is more doubtful whether these epithets 
 point to a moral condition, i.e. to the 
 righteousness of sanctification (Chrys. 
 Hamm.), or to the imputed righteous- 
 ness of Christ (Olsh., Mey.). The 
 former reference seems most conso- 
 nant both with St Paul's general 
 teaching (t Thess. iv. 7), and the 
 obvious inferences that may be drawn 
 from other passages in the N. T., 
 : Pet. i. 16, Eev. xxii. 11 ; see Stier 
 in loc, and on the distinction between 
 sanctifying and justifying righteous- 
 ness, the excellent remarks of Hooker, 
 Serm. 11. 6, Vol. iii. p. 611. 
 KUTcviiiriov a«ToC] 'before Him;' 'id 
 
 est vere, sincere,' Beza; ayiwaivTiv fi)- 
 rei rjv o Tov 6eou d^0a\ii,is opg,, Chrys. 
 The form airov is here to be preferred, 
 as the reference to the subject is ob- 
 viously remoteandunemphatic; oomp. 
 Bremi, Jahrb. der Philol. ix, p. 171 
 (Winer) . The distinction however be- 
 tween the proper use of these two 
 forms cannot be rigorously defined; 
 see Buttm. Mid. Excurs. x. p, 140, 
 and Tiach. Prolegom. p. lviii. 
 iv a.ya,v<s\ may be joined with ^JeX^laro: 
 more probably with 017. Kal dpui/i, 
 (Vulg., Copt.); but appy. most pro- 
 bably with irpooplaas (Syr., Chrys., 
 Theod.), as St Paul's object seems 
 here not so much to define the nature 
 of the required ayiaaii/r) and anepupla 
 on the part of man, as to reveal the 
 transcendent principle of Love which 
 (if we may so speak) was the moving 
 principle of the TrpoopuriJ.hs of God; Kal 
 irpoeTSev ripSs Kal riyAirifde, Theod., 
 comp. Theod. -Mops. The arguments 
 derived from the coUooation of the 
 words are not decisive, for iv dydirT) 
 could as well be joined with 07. koX 
 d/ii. here, as ii/ ayitoffOvri with a/i^/x- 
 TTous in I Thess. iii. 13; and again 
 couldas easilyprecede emphasis gratiS, 
 irpooplaas here, as it does ippi^wiUvoi, 
 ch. iii. 18. Lastly, it cannot be said 
 that the second modal clause Kari. 
 ttp* euS. is thus superfluous (Meyer) ; 
 the two clauses point to two different 
 attributes; hi iydirii to the loving 
 Mercy, KarA, Tipi euS. to the sovereign 
 Power of God. For a good defence 
 of the second form of connexion see 
 Alford in loc. 
 
 5. irpoopto-as lipids] 'having fore- 
 ordained ns;' i.e. not 'prisdestinans,' 
 Beng. , but 'quumpnsedestinasset',' Syr.- 
 Phil., the participle being most natu- 
 rally regarded as temporal, nctt modal, 
 aud its action as prior to, not syn- 
 
nPOZ Ei>E2I0YS. 
 
 CIS avTOV, Kara Trjv 
 
 ' evSoklav rod 6e\vk<^T09 ■ qvTOV, 
 
 clironous with (as in ver. 9) that of 
 ^|cX^|aTo: comp. Eom. yiii. 29, 30,and 
 see Bernhardy, Synt. iii. 9, p. 383, 
 Donalds. Or. § 674 sq. With regard 
 to the prep, it would certainly seem 
 that wpi does not refer to others 
 (Banmg.), nor appy. to existence he- 
 fore time (Eadie), but simply to the 
 realization of the event; the decree 
 existed before the object of it came 
 into outward .manifestation; oomp, 
 TT/joi/XTTiKOTas in ver, 12, and see Olsh. 
 on Bom. ix. 1. The distinction be- 
 tween ^/cXo7i; and wpoopurfiiis is thus 
 drawn by. Scherzer {cited by Wolf) ; 
 ' differunt tantum ratione ordinativi 
 et objectiva,' the iic of the former 
 referring to the mass from whom the 
 selection was made, the vpo of the 
 latter to the pre-existence and prio- 
 rity of the decree. On Trpooptfffios, 
 <&c. see Petavius, Tlieol. Bogm. ix. i, 
 Vol. I. p. 565 sq., and Laurence, 
 Bampt. Led. viii. p. 169 sq. 
 els vioBeorCav] 'for adoption,' soil, foa 
 avTOv viol \eyoi[(Jli]iieSa Kal xpiM""?"- 
 fiev, Theod.-Mops.; vio0e(TLa however 
 not being merely sonsMp (Ust. Lehj'b. 
 II. I. 2, p. 186) but as usual 'adopr 
 tionem filiorum,' Vulg.; see notes on 
 Gal. iv. 5, and Neander, Planting, 
 Vol. I. p. 477 (Bohn). 
 els avTov] 'unto Him;' comp. Col. 
 i. 20, diroKaToKXa^fu ri iravra els 
 avTov. As the exact meaning of these 
 words is slightly obscure, it vrill be 
 best to premise the following state- 
 ments, (o) E/s vlo8. , . els avrov 
 must be regarded as a single com- 
 pound clause expressive of the manner 
 and nature of the irpoopiaiubs, SC 'l-qo: 
 and els air. being separate sub-clauses 
 further defining the prominent idea 
 els vlodefflav. (h) Xvtov (not airov) 
 is not to be referred to Christ (De 
 W.), but, with the Greek expositors, 
 
 to God. (c)- Ms avTov is not merely 
 equivalent to iv avri} (Beza), or- 
 ■•^^, scil. in^ns'? (Holzh.) ; nor is the 
 favourite transl. of Meyer, ' in refer- 
 ence to Him' (oomp. Buck.), though 
 grammatically tenable (Winer, Gr. § 
 49. a, p. 354), by any means sufficient. 
 In these deeper theological passages 
 the prep, seems to bear its primary, 
 {els = lt's, Donalds. Crat. § 170) and 
 most comprehensive sense of ' to and 
 into' (see Eost u. Palm, Lex. s.v.) ; 
 the idea of approach (r^v els avrov 
 av&yovixav, Theoph .) being also blended 
 with and heightened by that of in- 
 ward union ; comp, notes on Gal. iii, 
 ■27. We may thus paraphrase, 
 
 'God predestinated us to be adoptecl 
 as His sons; and that adoption came 
 to us through Christ, and was to lead 
 us unto, and unite ua to God.' Stier 
 compares what he terms the bold eXf 
 pression in 2 Pet. i. 4. Kard 
 
 Ti\v ciJ8oK£av, K.T.X-] ' according to the 
 good pleasure of His will,' 'secun- 
 dum placitom (propositum, Vulg.) 
 voluntatis suse,' Clarom. ; the prep. 
 Karct, as usual marking 'rule, mea- 
 sure, accordance to,' Winer, Gr. § 49, 
 ^i P- 357- "^^^ exact meaning of 
 evSoxla is here doubtful. The Greek 
 expositors (not Chrys. ) refer it to the 
 ienevolentia (^ iir evepyeirlg, pov\T)ins, 
 (Eoum.), the Vulg., Syr., Goth, ('lei- 
 kainai') al. to the voluntas Uberrima 
 of God. The latter meaning rarely if 
 ever (not even in Ecclus. i. 2 7,xxxii. 
 5) occurs in the LXX; in the N.T.. 
 however, though there are decided' 
 instances of the former meaning, e.g. 
 Luke ii. 14 (not 'Isetitia,' J?ritz.), 
 Phil. i. 15 (5i evS. opp. to 5ia (f>86vov), 
 stiU there isno reason to doubt (Harl.) 
 that the latter occurs in Matth, xi. 
 26 (9Ai)<ri.s Kal apiaKeia, Thepph.), 
 Luke X. 21, and probably PhU. ii. 13.. 
 
I. 5. 
 
 eiV eiratvov So^rii t?? j^djOtTO? avTod, ev ^ e-^apiTOXTsv 6 
 
 6. h ij] So Tiscft. (ed. 2, 7) with DE(F om. i?)GKL ; great majority of 
 mss. ; Clarom., Vulg., Goth., Syr. -Phil., Arm., al. ; Bas,, Chrys., Theod., al. 
 and rightly ; for ^s, though found in ABN ; mss. ; Syr., MWa. ; Orig. (Cat.), 
 Chrys. (i), al. {Lachm., Mey., Alf.), and thua well supported, on internal 
 grounds, as a grammatical correction, seems very suspicious. The statement 
 of Alf., that a 'relative following a substantive is as often in a different 
 case as the same,' certainly cannot be substantiated ; see Winer, Crri § 24. 1 , 
 p. 148.. 
 
 Thus the context must decide. As 
 here and in ver. 9 eiSoda seems to 
 refer exclusively to the actor (irpoopl- 
 aasy'fvaplaas,) not to the objects of the 
 action, it seems best with De Wette 
 (mis-cited by Eadie). to adopt the 
 latter meaning, though not in the 
 extreme sense, t6 (r<poSpbv 6iKr)fji,a, as 
 advocated by Chrys, In this the idea, 
 of goodness (?; apiiTTT) koI KoKKlaTri 
 Tov eeov iKoia-ios flATjiris, Etym. M.) 
 ia of course necessarily involved, but 
 it does not form the prominent idea. 
 Tor further detaUs, see esp. Fritz. 
 on Bom, x. i, Vol. n. p. 369 sq., and. 
 Wordsw. in loc. 
 
 ■ 6. tls ?irai.vov K.T.X.] 'for the 
 praise of the glory of His grace,' 
 'in [or rather ad, Clarom. ; see Mad- 
 vig, Opusc. Acad. p. 167 sq. ; comp. 
 Hand, TitrscZZ. Vol. in. p. 3i7]laudem 
 glorisB gratis suae,' Vulg.; iva, ij ttjs 
 xdptTos airoO di^a 5etx^5> Chrys. : di- 
 vine purpose of the Tpoopi<rfii6s, eh 
 here denoting the 'finis primarius' 
 (Phil, i.ii), not 'consequens aliquid' 
 (Orot.), as in i Pet. 1, 7. It is scarcely 
 necessary to say that neither is twai-^ 
 w)j S4|r)S for liraivos ^i/Sofos (Grot.)^ 
 nor di^a rijs x^P^ros for Ivdo^os X'^P^^ 
 (-Beza) ; both of them weak and, espe, 
 ciaUy-here, wholly inadmissible solu- 
 tions. As Chrys. appears rightly to 
 have felt, 'Sd^ijs is a pure subst., and 
 serves to specify that peculiar quality 
 or attribute of the xi^P^^ which forms 
 the subject of praise ; cbmp. Wiufir, 
 
 <?''• ^ 34- 3) oils. p. 21 r. Thus 
 
 then of the three genitives, the first 
 is that ' of the object,' or more strictly 
 speaking, ' of the point of view ' 
 (.Scheuerl. Synt. § 18, p. 129), while 
 the last two are united (Winer, Gr. 
 § 30. 3. I, p. T72), and form a com- 
 mon possessive, genitive. Owing to 
 the defining gen., the article is not 
 indispensable ; see Winer, Gr. § ig, 
 ■i. b, p. 113, and compare Madvig, 
 Synt. § 10. 2. Iv fj] 'in qu&,' 
 
 Vulg., Clarom., not 'e qui,' Beza, 
 or ?quS,' Arm. (instrum. case) ; the- 
 antecedent here much more naturally! 
 marking the state in which, than the 
 means by which God showed us His 
 favour. IxapCruo-ev i]|i.] 'He 
 
 imparted His grace to us,' ' gratifica^ 
 vit,' Vulg., Clarom., 'largitus est,' 
 jEth. The exact meaning of xapiT6(o 
 is doubtful. From the analogy of 
 verbs in 6u," whether in. reference to 
 what is material {e.g. x/JwiSw, <^'c.) or 
 what is immaterial (e. 3. Bava.Tbw,^e., 
 see Harless), x^i^'i^i^w must mean 
 'X'i.ptTi aliquem afficio.' As however 
 Xapis is indeterminate, and may mean' 
 either the subjective state of the indi- 
 vidual or the objective grace of God, 
 ixaplroKTe may still have two mean- 
 ings: (a) iirepoffTovs iirotrjae, Chrys., 
 'gratia sibi aoceptos effecit,' Beza;. 
 comp. a somewhat similar use in Bc-i 
 clus.xviii. 1,7, Psalm xviii. 26 (Symm.),. 
 and see ^cer, Thesaur, fi.v. Vol, 11. 
 p. 1504 ; or (b) gratid, amplexus est,. 
 
10 
 
 nPOS E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 dia rod alfxaTO'i avTOv, t^v a<pecnv twv TrapairToofiaTuiv, 
 
 Beng., sim. Syr., 'gratis, quam efiu- 
 cTit ;' comp. Luke i. 28. Both the con- 
 text (oomp. Alf.) and the prevaUing 
 meaning of x«P's ™ S* Paul's Epp. 
 seem distinctly in favour of the latter 
 meaning. On the use of the aor., 
 comp. note on i^cXi^aro, ver. 4. 
 Iv T<p iJ7airt||Uv<s>] 'in tlie Beloved;' 
 see Matth. iii. i7,andcomp. Col.i. 13. 
 'Be is not here interchangeable with 
 5ia (oomp. Chrys.), or equivalent to 
 propter (Grot., Locke), but retains its 
 full primary meaning. Christ, asOlsh. 
 well observes, is regarded not only aa 
 the mediator, but as the true repre- 
 sentative of mankind. 
 
 7. ev 4] ' ™ whom;' further illus- 
 tration and expansion of the preceding 
 ixapiroxrev. Here again h is neither 
 instrumental (Arm.), nor identical in 
 meaning with Sio (Vatabl.). Fritzsche 
 indeed (Opmc. p. 184) adduces this 
 passage as an instance of this identity, 
 and regards 5ii toG aX/j,. airoO as a sort 
 of epexegesis oiiv <?, 'per quem, i.e. eo 
 quod sanguinem effudit ; ' but such an 
 explanation falls greatly short of the 
 true meaning. As usual, 4y has here 
 its primary and fullest theological 
 meaning : it implies more than union 
 with (Riick., Eadie); it points to 
 Christ as the living sphere of redemp- 
 tion, while Sia k.t.X. refers to the 
 outward means of it ; comp. Eom, iii. 
 24. As Olsh. profoundly observes : 
 'we have not redemption in His work 
 without His person, but in His person 
 with which His work forms a living 
 unity;' see Winer, Or. § 48. a, p. 
 347 note. ^oiuv] ' we are 
 
 having;' present, and not without 
 emphasis; 'we are ever needing, and 
 are ever having it,' Eadie. tI^v 
 
 diroXtiTpaxriv] 'tlie (not our, Conyb.) 
 redemption; ' Bcil. the long promised, 
 
 and now known and realized redemp- 
 tion. The use of this word is thus 
 briefly but perspicuously elucidated 
 by TJsteri in loc. : 'Who is ran- 
 somed ? Man, from the punishment 
 he deserved. What is the Xirpov 
 (Matth. XX. 28, Mark x. 45, i Tim. 
 ii. 6)? The blood of Christ. To whom 
 is it paid? To God. Who pays it? 
 Christ in the first place; though 
 strictly God who sent Him ; so, God 
 through Christ ; ' Lehrb. 11. r. i, p. 107: 
 see collection of texts, Waterl. Doc- 
 trine of Euch, IV. 3, Vol. rv. p. 513. 
 We must not however too much 
 limit the application of this important 
 word. As the art. renders it impos- 
 sible to explain it merely metonymice, 
 'a redeemed state' (comp. Com. a 
 Lap.), so it presents to us the con- 
 ception of 'redemption' in its most 
 general and abstract sense, alike from 
 Satan, sin, and death: comp. Mid- 
 dleton, Greek Art. v. i, p. 90 (ed. 
 Eose). Sia tou atjiaros avroi] 
 
 ' through His blood; ' closer definition 
 of the 4v (J, by a notice of the 'causa 
 medians,' the blood of Christ, that 
 without which there could have been 
 no £0eiris: comp. Heb. ix. 22, and see 
 the soundremarksof Alf . and Wordsw. 
 ill h. I, TT^v tt()>«<riv Tiov iropairr.] 
 
 ' the forgiveness of our transgressions;' 
 in apposition to the preceding dxoXi5- 
 TptiXTis, and a specification of its essen- 
 tial character. The distinction between 
 iipeffis (oondonatio) and wapeffLS (prsB- 
 termissio, Eom. iii. 25) is noticed by 
 Trench, Synon. § 33 ; more briefly 
 but most acutely by Fritz. Rom. Vol. 
 I. p. 199. Too much stress need not 
 here be laid on the distinction between 
 vapaTTiifiaTa and huaprloA,, for com- 
 pare Col. i. 14. Still the former so 
 naturally point to sins on the side of 
 
I. 7, 8, 9. 
 
 11 
 
 Kara to ttXovtoj rijy ■^apiros avTOu, ^y evepia-aevaev ei? 8 
 tjfAai ev •Kaa-rt (ro(pin Koi (ppov^uei, •yvaipia-ai fi/uv to 9 
 
 commission, sinful acts, the latter to 
 sins as the result of a state, sinful 
 conditions, that it seems best (with 
 Beza) to preserve the distinction in 
 translation; comp. notes on ch. ii. i, 
 where the distinction is more fully 
 discussedr ri irXovTos ttjs \a.?. 
 
 ovToi] 'the riches of His grace;' cer- 
 tainly not per Hebraismimi for 'abun- 
 dans bonitas' (Grot.), bnt with the 
 usual meaning of the possessive gen., 
 the riches which appertain to, are the 
 property of His xapis. On the form 
 rd 7rXoCro5, here rightly retained by 
 Tisch., see Winer, Gr. § 9. 1. 2, p. 61. 
 It occurs again in Eph. iii. 8, 16 
 (strongly supported), Eph. ii. 7, Phil, 
 ir. 19, Col. i. 27, ii. 1 (well), 2 Cor. 
 viii. 2; (doubtfully) ; comp. Tisch. Pro- 
 Ufjo/m. p. LV. Bee. has rhv rXoSrov. 
 
 8. lifs eirepto-o-tvo-ev] 'which he made 
 to abound;' 'ufarassau ganohida' 
 [abundanter concessit], Goth., ' abun- 
 dare fecit,' ^th. Though irepuT<Te6<a 
 is used intransitively by St Paul no 
 less than twenty two times, yet as it 
 is certainly transitive in 2 Cor. iv. 15, 
 ix. 8, I Thess. iii. 12 (comp. Athen. 
 Deiprit 11. 16 [43], irepiTreiei ris 
 <5po$), and as there is no satisfactory 
 instance in the N. T. of attraction 
 in the case of a verb joined with a dat. 
 (Fritzsche's explanation of Bom.iv. 17 
 is more than doubtful, and in i Tim. 
 iv. 6, ^s [Lachm. ed. min.] is only 
 supported by A in opp.to CDPGKLS), 
 it seems better to adopt the latter 
 meaning with Theod. {vfias wepi- 
 /cXufci) and the Vv. above cited, 
 than the intrans. with Syr., Vulg., 
 Arm., and appy. Chrys. in loc. On 
 the apparent violations of the law of 
 attraction in the N.T., see Winer, 
 Gr. §24. 1, p. 148. evirdo-n 
 
 o-oc^Cf Kal i^povijcrEi] 'in all wisdom 
 
 and intelligence; ' sphere and element 
 in which the iirepla-ireva-ev is evinced 
 and realized. As there is some di£B- 
 cixlty in (i) the meaning, (2) reference, 
 and (3) connexion of these words, it 
 will be best to consider these points 
 separately, (r) Uacra ao(fiia can only 
 mean 'all wisdom,'' i.e. 'every kind 
 of, all possible wisdom,' not 'summa 
 sapientia' (Eosenm., Eadie); jrSs, as 
 Harless correctly observes, always 
 denoting extension rather than inten- 
 sion, and thus often giving a con- 
 crete application to abstract nouns ; 
 comp. Col, iv. 12, and see Winer, 
 Gr. % 18. 4, p. loi. The exx. ad- 
 duced by Eadie (Matth. xxviii. 18, 
 Acts V. 15 [23], I Tim. i. 25) do not in 
 any way invalidate this principle. 2o- 
 0IO and (ppbvi}(ns are not synonymous 
 (Homb. ; comp. Plato, Symp. p. 202 a), 
 but may be thus distinguished : o-o 1 a 
 (cognate with a-acfeijs, sapio) denotes 
 'wisdom' in its general sense, koivus 
 airavrtjiv fiAd-qaiv, Suid. (see 4 Mace. 
 i. 16); tfipivTiffis is rather 'intelli- 
 gentia,' 'a right application of the 
 0/)^v ' (r4 iiva<T0ai. koXus §ov\ei(raa6ai, 
 irepl ri airrif AyaSd, Kal avp.<j>ipovTa, 
 Aristot. ), — in a word, an attribute or 
 result of <ro0/a (^ 8^ troipla. ivSpl 
 rUrei tjipivqau', Prov. x. 23), thus 
 serving here (like airoKoKv^K ver. 1 7, 
 aiveais Col. i. 9) to define and hmit 
 the reference of the more general and 
 comprehensive word. That tro^fo is 
 theoretical, ijipbvria is practical (Krebs; 
 comp. Aristot. Ethic, vi. £. 7, and 
 Cicero, Off. 11. 2), is too bald a distinc- 
 tion; for cotpla in its Christian appli- 
 cation necessarily wears a practical 
 aspect, and may in this respect be as 
 much contrasted with yvQais (r Cor, 
 viii. i), as tppbvritrii with the more 
 nearly synonymous <rvvt<ns (Col, i. 9) ; 
 
12 
 
 nPOS E^ESIOYS. 
 
 f*.v(7T^piov Tou BeXijfJiaTOi avTov, Kara t^v evSoKiav au- 
 10 Tov, rfv irpoiQero ev avriS ets oiKovofxiav rov irXtjpcafia-r 
 
 see notes to Transl., Trench, Synon. 
 Part II. § 25, andoomp. Beck, Seelenl. 
 II. ig, p. 61. (2) The reference ia 
 
 to man, not God (Alf.), for though 
 <pp6yritrit might be applied to God (see 
 Prov. iii. ig, Jer. x. 12, i Kings iii. 
 a8), and iv <ro(p, rai ippov. might, sym- 
 metrically with iv iyaTTii ver, 4, de- 
 note the principle in which God was 
 pleased to act, yet (a) vdcrTj seems 
 incompatible with such a reference ; 
 (6) the introduction of these attributes 
 IB reference to God disturbs the per- 
 vading reference to the Divine X"/"' > 
 (c) the analogy of Col. i. 9, urged by 
 Glsh., forcibly suggests the reference 
 to man. (3) The connexion (left un- 
 decided by Lachm., Tisch.) must then 
 be that of the text. If the arguments 
 a, b, c, be not considered valid, iv 
 icaurjj K.T.'K. must be joined with 7('w. 
 ptaas, as Theod. {fierd, iroWijs tro^lai 
 eyvibpurev), Griesb., al. The reference 
 ix> God, if the ordinary punctuation 
 be retained (De Wette), is in the high- 
 est degree unsatisfactory. 
 
 9. 'YvupCo-as] ' having made known,' 
 or, more idiomatically, 'in making 
 known;' participle explanatory of the 
 preceding iirepi(raev<rev...iv ira^-g aotjilq, 
 KoX (ppov., esp. of the latter words, and 
 appy. denoting an act coincident, and 
 terminating synchronously with the 
 finite verb : see Bernhardy, Synt. x. 
 g, p. 383, Donalds. Gr. § 575 ; and 
 esp. Herm. Viger, No. 224, Stallbaum, 
 Plato, Plusdo, p. 62 D. The ' ut notum 
 faceret' of Vulg. (comp. Clarom., 
 Goth.) is due to the reading yvuplaat 
 found in FG; 76; Hil., and some 
 Latin Ff,. tA |jiv(mjpioii 
 
 K.T.X.] ' the mystery of His will;' not 
 '•Hebrteo loquendi genere ' for consi- 
 lium arcanum, Grot., but ' the mys- 
 tery pertaining to it ;' toO 9eX^/<. being 
 
 neither a gen. of apposition (t4 iwo- 
 KeKpvfifj^vov airoO BiXriiM koX iJSijXov 
 TOis Iran /ivim^piov airi koKwv, Theod. - 
 Mops.), nor a gen. subjecti (' as it has 
 its origin in,' Eadie), but simply a gen. 
 objecti ('concerning His will,' Meyer) - 
 marking that to which the. mystery 
 was referred, and on which it turned r 
 see Kriiger, Sprachl. § 47, 7. i, and 
 Scheuerl. Synt. § 17. i, p. 127. The 
 incarnation of Christ and the redemp^ 
 tion He wrought for us, though an 
 actual revelatiop considered as a mat- 
 ter of fact, was a nvariipiov consi- 
 dered with reference to the depths 
 of the divine will: see Theod.-Mops. 
 cited above, and comp. Olsh. in loc. 
 Karan^v ev8oK. ovT.] 'according to His 
 good'pleasure ; ' specification of the yvw- 
 plaas as having taken place in strict 
 dependence both in time and manner 
 on the will of God; comp. ver. 5. To 
 refer this to what follows ('to wit, 
 His intention according to His good 
 pleasure to gather,' Eadie) seems ob- 
 viously incorrect, involved, and out of 
 harmony with ver. 5 ; as kot5 k.tX 
 formed a modal clause to wpooplaai 
 there, so it naturally qualifies yvapla-as. 
 here. 
 
 irpo^6«To] 'purposed;' 'proposuit,' 
 Vulg., not 'prsestituerat,' Beza. Tha- 
 verb irporWeffBai only occurs in the. 
 N. T. in two other passages,, viz. 
 Bom. i. 13 (ethical, as here), and 
 Eom. iii. 25 (quasi-local, 'set forth'); 
 the force of the prep, in both cases 
 being local rathei; than temporal 
 (Eisner, Obs. Vol. n. p. 20), and ana^ 
 logons to the use of the prep, in, 
 irpoaipciffSai (2 Cor. ix. 7) and Trpoxet-, 
 plieadai, (Acts iii. 20), It may indeed 
 be doubted whether any instance can 
 be found of TpoTlffeaSau in a purehji 
 temporal sense; Polyb. Hist, viii. 13» 
 
I. to. 
 
 13 
 
 to? Tftii' KOtpioVi avaKe^aXaiwcraaOai ra "jrdvra ev tw 
 
 1 , is not in point. 
 
 4v a{iT$] 'in Himself;'' not air^ as 
 Tisch. (ed.2,7),'ineo,'Vulg. Though 
 it is often difficult to decide between 
 the reflexive and non-reflexiye pro- 
 noun (see Buttm. Mid. Exciu:a. x. 
 p. 140), yet as a, general rule, where 
 the attention is principally directed to 
 the subject, the former is most natu- 
 ral; where it is diverted by the im- 
 portance of the details, the latter. 
 Thus in ver. 5, vloBeaLa is so distinctly 
 the important word thtit 0^61' is suf- 
 ficiently explicit ; here the connexion 
 ■with irpoidero is so immediate that the 
 reflexive form alone seems admissible. 
 10. els olKovo|i.Cav] 'for, with a 
 view to, the dispensation ;' els being 
 "not for ?>> (Vulg., Auth.), or tem- 
 poral, 'usc[ue ad,' Erasm. (a more 
 justifiable translation), but simply in- 
 dicative of the purpose, intention, of 
 the irpSSens: comp. Winer, Gr. § 49. 
 ■^> P- 354- ^^ meaning of 
 
 "olKovoiila has been much debated. It 
 occurs nine times in the N.T.; (a) in 
 the simple sense of stewardship. Lute 
 xvi. 2 sq., a meaning which "Wieseler 
 (Ghron. p. 448) maintains even in this 
 place ; (6) in reference to the apostolic 
 office, to the oXkos GeoO, i Cor. ix. r7. 
 Col. i. 25, and (more remotely) i Tim. 
 i. 4; (c) in reference to the Divine 
 government of the world, disposition, 
 ■dispensation, here, and ch. iii. 2, 9; 
 see exx. in Eost u. Palm, Lex. s. v. 
 Vol. II. p. 417, and esp. Sohweigh. 
 Lex. Polyb. s. v. The special mean- 
 ings, 'dispensatio gratise,' 'redemp- 
 ■tionis mysterium,' scil. Christi ivav- 
 •0pit>Tri<ris (Suicer, Thesaur. s. v.; 
 ■comp. Valesius, Euseb. Hist. i. i, 
 ■Petav. de Incarn. 11. 1, Vol. iv. p. 
 110), which were probably deduced 
 from the vrhole clause, cannot be ad- 
 mitted as explanations of the simple 
 
 word. The article is not required, as 
 the governing substantive is suffi- 
 ciently defined by the gen. which fol- 
 lows; see Winer, Gr. % 19. 4. b, p. 
 I13 sq. ToB ir\r]p(o|i,aTos riov 
 
 Kaipuv] ' of the fulness of the seasons;' 
 •soil, that moment which completeSi 
 and as it were fills up the ordained 
 KixLpol (time estimated in reference to 
 the epochs in the Divine government) 
 of the Gospel dispensation: compare 
 the somewhat similar expression, irMi- 
 pdMTis iinepQv, Dan. x. 3 {Thiod.), 
 Ezek. V. 2, where however the -com- 
 pletion is estimated relatively to' the 
 act rather than to the exact moment 
 that made the remaining temporal 
 void full ; see notes on Gal. iv. 4. The 
 genitival relation of these words to 
 olKovo/iia is very obscure. It would 
 certainly seem that roO ir^Tipiifi. k.t.'K. 
 cannot be (a) a gen. of the ohject 
 (Theod.-Mops.), for, as Meyer justly 
 observes, the irX^pa/j-a may be said 
 iXOeiv (Gal. I.e.), but not olKovo/MeTirSai: 
 nor again (6) can it be an explanatory 
 gen. or gen. of Menitii/ (Harless; comp. 
 Scheuerl. Synt. § 12. i,p. 82), for an 
 essentially temporal conception can 
 scarcely be used in explanation of an 
 ethical notion: it may however be 
 plausibly considered as (c) a gen. of 
 the characterizing quality (Scheuerl. 
 § 16. 3, p. 115), which, especially in 
 local and temporal reference, admits 
 considerable latitude of application ; 
 comp. Jude 6, splais /jteydX-ris rj/x^pas, 
 and see exx. in Winer, Gr. § 30. -2, p. 
 168 sq., and in Hartung, Casus, p. 27; 
 The difficult expression oIkov-tov irKripi 
 K.T.\. will thus seem to imply not 
 merely 'the fuU-timed dispensation' 
 (Eadie), but more exactly 'the dis- 
 pensation that was characterized hy-, 
 that was to be set forth in, the fuhiess 
 of time' ('propria plenitudini temp.,' 
 
14 
 
 nPOS E*E2I0Y2. 
 
 Xpiarcf, TO iv rots ovpavoii Koi tu ewi T^y y^s ev 
 
 lo. ii> Tots oi>/)a»ois] TiscA. is perhaps right in maintaining this reading with 
 APUK; appy. majority of mss.; Copt. ; Chrys., Theodoret (i), Theophyl., al, 
 (Rec, Grieali., Scholz, Harless, De W.)\ against ^iri rois oipaveh even with 
 BDELX; about 40 mss.; Goth.; Theodoret (i), Dam., CEc, al. {Laehm.,Buck., 
 Meyer, Alf.): for, conoeding that it may be grammatically correct (comp. exx. 
 Best u. Palm, Lex. iirl, 11. i, Yol. i. p. 1035), we must still s&y that the internal 
 objections, that M is never joined in the N. T. with oipavbi or oipavol, and 
 that ^v oipavQ and iTrl yrjs (probably not without significance) are inrarjably 
 found in antithesis, are of very great weight; see Harless in loc. 
 
 Calov.) ; and must be referred not only 
 to the period of the coming of Christ 
 (ed. J ; Ust. Lehrb. 11. i, p. 83 ; comp. 
 Tr\iipwp,a tS>v Kaipwv ij irapovo'la airoO 
 riv, Chrys.), but appy., as the more 
 extended ref. of the context seems to 
 suggest, the whole duration of the 
 Gospel dispensation (Alf.) : see Stier 
 in loc. (p. 96), and contrast Gal. iv. 
 4, where, as the context shows, the re- 
 ference is more restricted. The use 
 and meaning of the term is noticed 
 by Hall, Bampt. Led. for 1797. 
 avaKC(|>a\ai(£o-a(r6ai] ' to sum up 
 again together,' 'restaurare,' Clarom., 
 'summatim reooUigere,' Beza; not 
 dependent on irpoiBero, but an expla- 
 natory infinitive, defining the nature 
 and purpose of the Tpi6e<ns: comp. 
 I Thess. iv. 4, and see notes on Col. 
 i. 22. The article is not necessary: 
 see Winer, Gr. § 44. 2. obs. p. 286 ; 
 notes on i Thess. iii. 3; and comp. 
 Madvig, Syntax, § 144. The 
 
 meaning of this word, connected as it 
 here is with the counsels of Omnipo- 
 tence, must be investigated with the 
 most anxious care. Viewed simply, 
 K€ipa\aLw(T(ii (o'vvTOfiws <7i;i'a7a7et^, 
 Hesych.) means 'summatim colligere,' 
 Thucyd. in. 67, vi. 91, viii. 53; &va- 
 Ke4iaK<uii(ra<r8ai. 'summatim (sibi) re- 
 colUgere ;' comp. avyKecfraXaiova-Sat ( 'in 
 brevem summam contrahere '), Polyb. 
 Hist. HI. 3. I, I. 66. 11, die.; see 
 Schweigh. Lex. Polyb., apd Eaphel in 
 
 loc. But viewed in oonne»ou with 
 the context, it gives rise to two import- 
 ant questions: (i) Is there any allu- 
 sion to Christ as the /ce^aXij (Chrys.)? 
 In a writer so profound as St Paul 
 this is far from impossible. The deri- 
 vation of the word however {Ke^dXaiov 
 not K€<pa.\^), St Paul's use of it in its 
 common meaning in Eom. xiii. 9, and 
 most of all the context, which points 
 to a union 'in Christo,' not 'sub 
 Christo ' (Beng.), to His atonement ra- 
 ther than His sovereignty (Col. ii. 10), 
 render it improbable. (2) What 
 
 is the force of dcd? From Eom. I. c, 
 (see Fritz.) it has plausibly been con- 
 sidered latent; still, as even there 
 this is very doubtful (see Meyer in 
 loc.) it must not here be Ughtly passed 
 over. What then is this force? Ob- 
 viously not simple repetition; nor 
 again (fromreasonsabove) summation 
 upwards, in reference to Christ as the 
 Head ((rivSeaixov avw8ei> {iriKei/jihov, 
 Chrys.), but re-union recollection, a 
 'partium divulsarum conjunotio,' iu 
 reference to a state of previous and 
 primal unity: so far then, but so /ar 
 only, a, 'restoration' (Syr.,Vulg.) to 
 that state; comp. Beng. in loc., the 
 editor's Destiny of the Creature, p, 
 162, and see an excellent discussion 
 on the word in Andrewes, Serm. xvi. 
 
 p. 265, 270 (A.-C. L.). The 
 
 Vol. 
 
 force of the middle voice must also 
 
 appy. not be overlooked. 
 
I. II. 
 
 15 
 
 avTcp, ev ft) Kai eKXtipwOifiev vpoopKrOefre^ Kara vpoQe- 1 1 
 
 xd irovra may imply 'all intelligent 
 beings' (comp. notes on Gal. iii. 22), 
 but, on account of tlie clauses which 
 follow, is best tEiken in its widest 
 sense, ' all things and beings,' Meyer; 
 comp. Andrewes, Serm. xvi. Vol. i. 
 p. 269. TO, Iv TOis ovpavols 
 
 K.T.X.] ' the things in heaven and the 
 things upon earth; ' widest expression 
 of universality designed to show the 
 extent of the preceding to vivra 
 (Andr.) ; comp. Col. i. 20, and see 
 notes in loc. Without entering into 
 the profound questions which have 
 been connected with these words, it 
 may be said that as on the one hand 
 all limiting interpretations — e.g. Jews 
 and Gentiles (Schoettg.), d.-yyi\ovs koX 
 dvBpiiirovs (Chrys.), the world of spirits 
 and the race of men (Meyer), — are 
 opposed to the generalizing neuter 
 (Winer, Gr. § 27. 5, p. 160) and the 
 comprehensiveness of the expressions ; 
 so, on the other hand, any reference 
 to the redemption or restoration of 
 those spirits (Crellius) for whom our 
 Lord Himself said rb irSp to aliivLov 
 (Matth. XXV. 41) was prepared must 
 be pronounced fundamentally impos- 
 sible: comp. Bramhall, Gastigations, 
 ifec. Disc. II. Vol. IV. p. 354 (A.-C.L.), 
 Hofmann, Schriftb. Vol. i. p. 192, 
 and the editor's Destiny of the Crea- 
 ture, p. 91 sq. The reading iirlr. oip. 
 (Lachm., Alf.) is strongly supported. 
 Bee. reads ri rh iv with N^ ; al. 
 kv auTw] 'in Him;' not added merely 
 'explicationiscausll'(Herm. Viger, 123. 
 b. 5), but as re-asseverating with great 
 solemnity and emphasis (see Jelf, Gr, 
 § 658) the only blessed sphere in which 
 this avaKe(p. can he regarded as opera- 
 live, and apart from which, and with- 
 out which, its energies cannot be con- 
 ceived as acting: see Destiny of tlie 
 Creature,'^. 8g. It forms also an easy 
 
 transition to the following relative. 
 
 II. Iv u Kal IkXi]pu9.] ' in whom we 
 were also chosen as His inheritance;' 
 Kal obviously qualifying iK\i^p., not 
 the unexpressed pronoun (Auth.), and 
 specifying the gracious carrying out 
 and realization of the divine TpiBens, 
 ver. 9. This ascensive force may some- 
 times be expressed by 'really,' see 
 Hartung, Partilc. Kai, 2. 7, p. 132 sq.; 
 the exact shade of meaning however 
 wlU be best defined by a consideration 
 of the exact tenor and tacit compari- 
 sons of the context ; see Klotz, Devar. 
 Vol. n. p. 636. The exact 
 
 meaning of iKXripuB. is very doubtful. 
 Passing over the more obviously un- 
 tenable interpretations of Bretsch., 
 Wahl, Koppe, and others, we find 
 fourtranslations which deserve atten- 
 tion : (a) Pass, for middle ; ' we have ob- 
 taineddn inheritance,' Auth., Conyb.; 
 comp. Eisner, Obs. Vol. 11. p. 204: 
 this however is not fairly substantiated 
 by the citations adduced, and is dis- 
 tinctly at variance with the significant 
 passiveswideh prevail throughout this 
 profound paragraph in reference to 
 man; even jrpo(reK\r!pi!>0ri(rav, Acts 
 xvii. 4, is best taken passively; see 
 Winer, Gr. § 39. 2, p. 234. (6) Simple 
 pass.; 'sorte vocati sumus,' Vulg., 
 Syr., Goth.; comp. i Sam. xiv. 41, 
 and see exx. in Eisner, I. c; i. e. 'as 
 though by lot,' in allusion to the sove- 
 reign /rccdom of God's choice ; K\ripou 
 yci/o/iivov ■Ij/ms i^eXi^aro, Chrys. : this 
 however is seriously at variance with 
 St Paul's modes of thought and the 
 regular forms of expression (xaXeo', 
 iK\4ye(TSai,) which he uses on this 
 subject: see Harless and Meyer in 
 loc. (c) Passive, used like 7r«rrEj5o/ioi, 
 fiaprupovfiai (comp. &iropov/j.aL, Gal. 
 iv. 20, and see Winer, Gr. § 39. j, 
 
IC 
 
 nP02 E*E2I0YS. 
 
 triv Toy Ta Traira evepyovvTOS Kara tijv ppvXijv toS 
 12 Qe\^fxaTO$ avTov, els to eivai ^/xas 6jy eTraivov S6^>]i 
 
 p. 233), -with an implied aocus., soil, 
 ' in hcereditatem adsciti sumus,' Grot. 
 •2, Harl., Meyer ('were enfeoffed,' 
 Eadie), with allusion to Josh. xiv. i 
 sq., and reference to the K\ripos tu>v 
 kylav, Col. i. 12. (d) Pass., in a spe- 
 cial sense; 'eramus facti fuereditas 
 (Domini),' Beng., Hamm. [mis-cited 
 by De W.], i.e. Xa6s lyKXitpos, Deut. 
 iv. 20, see ch. ix. 29, xxxii. 9. Be- 
 tween (c) and (d) it is somewhat hard 
 to decide. While both present some 
 difficulties, (c) in point of structure, 
 (d) in the special character of its 
 meaning,, both harmonize well with 
 the context, the former in its allusioij 
 to KK-qpovoida, ver. 14, the latter with 
 reference to mpiwotria-ts, ib. As how- 
 ever (c) is doubtful in point of usage, 
 and as the force of Kal is well main- 
 tained by {d) in the gentle contrast 
 it suggests between the general iK\o- 
 yri and the more specially gracious 
 kXtIPuxtis, this latter interpr. is cer- 
 tainly to be preferred ; ' we were not 
 only chosen out, but chosen out as a 
 Xads '^yKXTjpos'.' elTev e^eX^^aro ij^as 
 dvoiripoj, ivTovdd (prjffiv iK'KTjpwdrjfxei', 
 Chrys. The reading iKX'qdrjp.ev, 
 
 though found in ADEFG; Clarom., 
 Sang., Boern., al. (Lachm.), seems 
 almost certainly a sort of gloss for the 
 more difficult and appy. ill-understood 
 iKk'qpiiB'qp.ev . ttJv Pav\i)v Tov 
 
 SeX'niJ.. avToil] ' the counsel of His will,' 
 ' consilium voluntatis suae,' Vulg. , Cla- 
 jom. ; assertion of the unconditioned 
 ftnd sovereign will of God appropriate- 
 ly introduced after iKk-ripiidrinev : uiore 
 ,oi)k ^jreiS?) 'louSaioi oi irpoireixov, Sii, 
 TOVTO Ti, iBvq iKd\e(Tev, oiSi avayKa- 
 trOeh, Ghrys. The expression ;8ouXt) 
 SeXTj/iaTos is not either pleonastic, or 
 expressive of ' consilium liberrimum ' 
 (Beng.), but solemnly represents the 
 
 Almighty Will as displaying itself in 
 action ; BiXij/ia designating the will 
 generally, ^oi/XiJ the more special ex- 
 pression of it. The distinction of 
 Buttmann (Lexil. s. v. § 35, comp. 
 Tittm. Synon. p. 124 sq.) that '/3ou- 
 Xo/tai is confined to the inclination, 
 iS^Xoi to that kind of wish in which 
 there lies a purpose or design,' does 
 not seem generally appUcable to the 
 N. T. (see Matth. i. 19, and comp. 
 I Cor. iv. s with Eph. ii. 3), and pro- 
 bably not always to claEsical Greek ; 
 see Pape, Xea:. s. v. ^o6\ofj.aL, Yol. 1. 
 p. 383; Donalds. Crat. § 463. Por 
 further illustrations see notes on j 
 Tim. v. 14. 
 
 12. els "ri (Ivai k.t.X.] Hhat we 
 should be to the praise of His glory ; ' 
 final cause of the (cXijpuiris on the 
 part of God mentioned in the pre- 
 ceding verse, e(s rb k.t.X. depending 
 on iKXri/r,, and roils TrporjXmK. forming 
 an opposition to ijpa^. To refer thi? 
 clause to TrpoopicdivTes, and to connect 
 etvat with irpoTjXTTiKOTas (Harl.), is 
 highly involved and artificial; see 
 Meyer in loc. The reference of 
 
 the pronoun is somewhat doubtful. 
 TJp to the present verse imeis has der 
 signated the community of believers, 
 Jews and Gentiles. It would seem 
 most natural to continue it in the 
 same sense; the meaning however 
 assigned to ^KX7}p., that of TrpoiiXir., 
 and most of all the opposition Kal 
 ip.ei:! (which De Wette does not inva- 
 lidate by ref. to ch. ii. i, Col. i. 8). 
 seem convincingly to prove that vi^e'^ 
 refers especially to Jewish Christians, 
 v/ieU to Gentile Christians. Chrys, 
 has not expressed this, but the citation 
 above (on ^/cXijp.) would seem to imply 
 distinctly that he felt it. It may 
 
 be observed that the insertion of the 
 
I. 12, 13. 
 
 17 
 
 avTOv, Touy irpo^XiriKOTai iv to5 Xpicrrw' ev w ku< vfJieii, 13 
 
 art. Trjs before Sijijs, with A; many 
 mss. ; Chrys., al. (Rec), is opposed to 
 all other uncial MSS. and rejected by 
 all recent editors. Tois 
 
 irpotiXiriK.] 'we, Ismj, who have before 
 hoped; ' [lai faura venjandans [hi ante 
 sperantes], Goth. ; the article with 
 the part, standing in distinct and 
 emphatic apposition with -^/iSs, and 
 defining more folly their spiritual at- 
 titude; comp. Winer, Gr. § lo. i. c, 
 p. rai, but observe that the transl. 
 ' quippe qui speravimus' (Winer, Mey., 
 al.) is inexact, as this would imply a 
 part, toithout, not as here with the 
 article ; on these distinctions of pre- 
 dication, see esp. Donalds. Grat. § 304 
 sq., Gr. § 492 sq. The prep, vpb has 
 received many different explanations, 
 several of which (e. g. irplv -Ij iwurr^ 
 fiiWav aiiiv, Theoph. ; 'qui priores 
 speravimus,' Beza; 'already, prior to 
 the time of writing,' Eadie) appear to 
 have resulted rather from preconceived 
 opinions of the reference of ^/ieis, than 
 from a simple investigation of the 
 word. As vpoopl^u) in ver. 5 implies 
 an opur/iis before the object of it 
 appeared, so vpoeXtrl^a seems to imply 
 an exercise of iXvls before the object 
 of it, i.e. Christ, appeared. The per/, 
 part., as usual, indicates that the ac- 
 tion whichis described as past stillcon- 
 tinues, see exx. in Winer, Gr. § 40. 4. a, 
 p. 244. ev XpioTcy denotes 
 
 .the object in whom the hope was 
 placed ; comp. i Cor. xv. 19, and see 
 notes on i Tim. iv. 10, Beuss, Theol. 
 Ghret. iv. 22, Vol. 11. p. 212. The 
 preceding reference of the fore-hope in 
 the Messiah to the Jews (comp. Acts 
 xxviii. 20) ia in no way incompatible 
 with the use of h X/JiffTijj rather than 
 of eis XpurToi/ (Holzh., Eadie) : to have 
 hopedm Christ was a higher character- 
 istic than to have directed hope towards 
 
 Cftrisi, and designated them as mora 
 worthy exponents of thepraiseof God's 
 glory; comp. Stier in loc. p. 112,114. 
 13. Iv If Kol inets K.T.X.] The 
 construction of this verse is somewhat 
 doubtful. A finite verb is commonly 
 supplied, either from eKk-iiptlidriiitv, 
 ver. 1 1, or wpoT/XinKliTm. If from the 
 former (Harless), the ^kXtjp. would 
 now be limited to the Gentile Chris- 
 tians, though it formerly referred to 
 both them and Jewish Christians : the 
 regression too would seem unduly 
 great. If from the latter, irpojjXiri- 
 Kare (not TJKv. Beza, Auth.) must be 
 supplied, which wouldimplywhat was 
 contrary to the fact. Others (Mey., 
 Alf., al.) supply the verb subst., 'in 
 whom ye are,' but thus introduce a 
 statement singularly frigid and out of 
 harmony with the linked and ever- 
 rising character of the context. It 
 can scarcely then be doubted that we 
 have here a form of the ' oratio sus- 
 pensa ' (Beng.), according to which the 
 second in ^ does not refer to a fresh 
 subject (Mey.), but is simply resump- 
 tive of the first. The full force and 
 meaning of this anacoluthon have 
 scarcely been sufficiently expanded. 
 Koi i/j-ets [vi^ets, AKL and N^ prima; 
 mss., but with no probability] directs 
 the attention to the contrast between 
 the pronouns; ixoiiravTes k.t,\. sug- 
 gests a further reference to those who 
 had hopedon lessconvincingevidence. 
 This might have been foUowedat once 
 by the finite verb la-^pay. k.t.\. : but 
 was so important a clause to follow at 
 once on iKoiffavres ? Surely d/co-i; 
 must be expanded into something more 
 vital before it could be so blessed. 
 Kal TiffT. is thus intercalated with all 
 the ascensive force of Kat (01) yap /id- 
 vov ijKoOtraTe dXXi Kal iirL<rTe}j(rare, 
 Theod.), and thus, far from becoming 
 
 C 
 
18 
 
 nP02 E$E2I0YS. 
 
 aKova-avrei rov Xoyov t?? aXtjOeiai, to evayyeXiov Tijs 
 (TWTtjptas v/xoop, ev w Koi viaTeua-avres ecrcppayicrQrjre tw 
 
 superfluous (Mey.), ia traly a neces- 
 sary and vital member of the sentence . 
 So appy. Syr., Copt., Goth., Mth., 
 which, though suppressing the Kat, and 
 converting the participles into finite 
 verbs, retain substantially the correct 
 structure. 'Ei' (^ may be joined 
 
 ■with nffTsda-avres (Mark i. 15) as well 
 as l<T<(ipay. (Scholef.), but as TTLareieiv 
 Iv nvi is not used by St Paul, and as 
 iv y in ver. 1 1 is joined with the finite 
 verb (not the part.), it seems best to 
 preserve the same construction in this 
 somewhat parallel verse; see Eiiok., 
 and Harl. in loc. riv \o-yov 
 
 Ti)S dX.] 'the word of the truth;' comp. 
 notes 071 I Ihess. i. 6 : not the gen. of 
 apposition (Harless), but the gen. sub- 
 stantim: see Soheuerl. Synt. § 12. i, p. 
 82, Hartung, Casus, p. 21. The 
 truth did not only form the subject 
 (Mey.), but was the very substance 
 and essence. The remark of Chrys. is 
 thus perfectly in point, t^s iXTjBeias, 
 oiiKiri rhv toO tiSttov, ovS^ rhv ttjs €Ik6- 
 yos. See notes on Col. i. 5. t& 
 
 liay. K.T.X.] ' the Gospel of your salva- 
 tion;' not a gen. of apposition, nor 
 exactly, as above, a, gen. of the sub- 
 stance, but rather a gen. of the 
 (spiritual) contents or subject-matter 
 (Bemhardy, Synt. iii. 44, p. 161, 
 Scheuerl. Synt. % 17. i, p. 126), soil. 
 ' the Gospel (t4 Kripvy/ia, Chrys. ) which 
 turns upon, which reveals salvation ;' 
 thus forming one of that large class of 
 genitives of remoter reference (see exx. 
 in "Winer, Gr. § 30. 2. /3, p. 169 sq.), 
 and belonging appy. to the general 
 category of the genitive of relation; 
 seeDonalds. Gr. §463,p.475sq. For 
 thesubstantiveswithwhichei)o77^Xiow 
 is associated see esp. Beuss, Th4ol. 
 Chr4t. IV. 8. Vol. 11. p. 81. A list may 
 be of use : rd eiayy. ttjs ^ttcriXefas, 
 
 Matt. iv. 23, ix. 35, xxiv. 14, Mark i. 
 14; Oeov, Bom.i. i, sv. 16, al. ; roy i/iou 
 airoO, Eom .1.9; ^purroO, Eom. xv. 
 19, Gal. i. 7, al.; rfi^xdptTos toO GeoO, 
 Acts xs. 24 ; TTis d6^7]s rou Xp. 2 Cor. 
 iv. 4 ; TTJs So^Tjs rou fiaKaplov GeoD, 
 I Tim. i. 11; TTJs dp-fivris, Eph. vi. 
 15. irKrT6u<rav«s is not present 
 
 (Eadie) and contemporaneous with ia- 
 (ppay. (Harl.), but antecedent ; oomp. 
 Acts xix. 2, and see Usteri, Lehrb. 11. 
 2. 2, p. 267 : the ordinary sequence, 
 as Meyer observes, is (a) Hearing ; 
 (6) Faith, which of course implies pre- 
 venting grace ; (c) Baptism ; {d) Com- 
 munication of the Holy Spuit : com- 
 pare together esp. Acts ii. 38, a, c, <J ; 
 viii. 6, 12, 17, a, b, 1!, d; xix. 5, 6, 
 c, d; Acts X. 44, d, c, and perhaps ix. 
 17, are exceptional cases. On the 
 divine order or method mercifully used 
 by God in our salvation see the brief 
 but weighty remarks of Hammond, 
 Pract. Catech. i. 4, p. 83 (A.-C. L.). 
 |o-(|>paYC(r6i]Te] 'were sealed;' t^v /3e- 
 paiuxTiv iSi^atrBe, Theod.-Mops. : see 
 Suicer, Thes. 3. v. Vol. 11. p. 1197. 
 The seal of the Spirit is that blessed 
 hope and assurance which the Holy 
 Spirit imparts to our spirit in iap-iv 
 TiKva 9eoC, Bom. viii. 16 : see esp. 
 BuU, Disc. III. p. 397 (Engl. Works, 
 Oxf. 1844). Any purely objective 
 meaning in ref. to heathen (Grot.) or 
 even to Jewish customs (Schoettg. 
 Hor. Hebr. Vol. 11. p. 508 ; comp. 
 Chrys.) seems here very doubtful : ij 
 crtftpayU is undoubtedly used by eccl. 
 writers simply for Baptism (Grabe, 
 Spicil. Vol. I. p. 331 sq., comp. Eom. 
 iv. 11), but such a reference would 
 hardly be in harmony with the con- 
 texti Tip IIvEV|i. TTJs eiray.] 'the 
 
 Spirit of promise' 2.0CT1 ]'"^ » \ Vo< 
 
1. 14. 
 
 19 
 
 Hvevfiart t?? eirayyeXlai tw dytu), 09 eariv appa^lov 1/^ 
 Ttjs K\>]povofiiai tifi.5>v, ei'y air okiTpwcriv rrji Trepnrot^- 
 (rewy, eh etraivov t^v So^tjs avToO. 
 
 [qui promisBus erat] Syr., 'quern 
 promisit,' ^th. The genitival rela- 
 tion has here again received different 
 explanations. The simple meaning 
 derived from the most general use 
 of the gen. as the case of ablation 
 (Donalds. Gr. § 451; the 'whenoe- 
 case, ' Hartung, Casus, ■p. 12) requires 
 but little modification. T6 II;'. rijs 
 lir. is ' the Spirit which came from, 
 i. e. was announced by, promise ; ' Srt 
 Kark iirayy. airh iXd^o/iev, Chrys., 
 or as Theoph. i, still more literally, 
 Sn i^ iirayy. iSoSij, So in effect Syr. 
 The active sense, Sn ^e/Saioi t^v 
 i-irayyeX. (Theoph. 2) is grammati- 
 cally doubtful, as there is no such 
 verbal basis in IlveS/jia, compare 
 Scheuerl. Synt. § 17. i, p. 126; and 
 is exegetically unnecessary, as the 
 idea of /3e/3a/wffis lies in itr^paylaSriTe. 
 See Suicer, Thesaur. Vol. n. p. 1767, 
 and comp. notes on Gal. iii. 14. 
 T^ ayCa marks, with solemn emphasis, 
 Him by whom they were sealed, Him 
 whose essence was holiness, the per- 
 sonal Holy Spirit of God. For a 
 weighty and practical sermon on this 
 verse, see Usher, Serm. xn. Vol. xin. 
 p. 175 (ed. Elringt.), and for three 
 discourses of a more general character 
 Barrow, Serm. xm. xiv. xv. Vol. i. 
 P- I— 59 (O^f- 1830). 
 
 14. os] As the noun in the expla- 
 natory clause {is...iiiJi,iov) gains a pro- 
 minence by being not only an eluci- 
 dation or amplification (ch. i. 23), but 
 a definition and specification of that in 
 the antecedent, the relative agrees 
 with it in gender: see esp. Winer, 
 Gr. § 24. 3, p. 150, Madvig, Synt. 
 § 98. b. 'Os need not therefore be 
 referred to Christ, nor indeed to the 
 
 personal nature of the Holy Spirit 
 (John xiv. i6), as t4 Tit>. in its most 
 distinct personal sense is invariably 
 used with the neuter relative ; com- 
 pare the eoUeetion of exx. in Bruder, 
 Concord, s. v. Ss, 11. p. 619. The 
 reading S, adopted by Lachm. [with 
 ABFGL; 15 mss. ; Athan. (2), al.], 
 may be a grammatical gloss. 
 appaPuv] 'earnest,' Auth., Arm. : a 
 word used in the N. T. only here and 
 2 Cor. i. 22, V. 5 ; comp. )'n"1t! Gen. 
 xxxviii. I7sq.; 'arrhabo,' Plant. Most. 
 III. I. 3, and Bud. Prol. 45. It is a 
 term probably of Phoenician origin 
 (Gesen. Lex. s.v.), and denotes (i) a 
 portion of the purchase money, an 
 earnest of future payment, jrpoSo/M, 
 Hesyoh. ; i] iirl rais OinaU irapd, t&v li- 
 voviiAvuv SiSojjArq TpoKara^oX^, Etym. 
 M.: (2)pipnus, Vulg., Clarom., 'vadi,' 
 Goth. ; see esp. Kypke, Obs. Vol. 11. 
 p. 239. The word has here its pri- 
 mary meaning: the gifts and vlo&ea-ta, 
 of which the Spirit assures us now, 
 are the earnest, the airapxv (Basil) of 
 the KKtipovoula {iv ry ^airCKelq, tov 
 Xp. KoX 9eou, ch. v. 5) hereafter ; see 
 Eom.viii.23, andcomp. Eeuss, Thiol. 
 Ghr4t. IV. 22, Vol. 11. p. 248. Christ 
 is termed somewhat similarly the S,pp. 
 T^s SiKaiocivris Tj/iGiv, Polyc. Phil. cap. 
 8; TTJsdvatTTdffeuis'rjfJ.SJv, Constit.Apost. 
 V. 6: see Suicer, Thesaur. s. v. Vol. i. 
 p. 512. els diroXilTpwcriv 
 
 TTis irspiTT.] 'for the redemption 0/ the 
 
 purchased possession,' (J-QJO-S^ 
 
 __>(jo> — .b^j|> [in redempt. eo- 
 
 rum qui vivunt, sc. servantur]Syr., 'in 
 redemptionem adquisitionis,' Vulg. ; 
 first of the two final clauses, expressive 
 
 C 2 
 
20 
 
 nP02 E$ESI0Y2. 
 
 15 Ata 
 
 ta TOVTO Kayw, axova-ai Trjv Ka 
 
 B I ever give thanks, 
 and pray that yon may 
 be enUghtencd to know the hope of His calline, the riches of His 
 inheritance, and the greatness of His power, which was especially 
 displayed La the Eesurrection and supreme escaltation of Christ. 
 
 of the divine purpose involved in the 
 4(T4>pa.yla-Br]Te k.t.X.; see below (2). 
 The explanations of these difficult 
 clauses are very varied. Passing over 
 those founded on questionable con- 
 structions, whether by participial solu- 
 tion (Koppe, Wahl), apposition (aTro- 
 XiJr/). scU. TepiTT., comp. Chrys., Theo- 
 phyl. i), conjunction (diroX. KalirepiT., 
 comp. Holzh.), or virtual interchange 
 (wspiir. T-ijsdiroX.Beza; Steph.TftcsaMr. 
 S.V. TrepiTT.), we will notice (i) the pro- 
 h&hlemeaning of the words, (2) the pro- 
 bable connexion of the clause with the 
 sentence. (i) diroXuTpoKTis, 
 
 a word always (e.g. oh. iv. 30, Eom. 
 viii. 23), and here especially, modified 
 by the context, appears to denote the 
 final and complete redemption (tJ 
 KaBapk &To\., Chrys.) from sufferings 
 and sins, from Satan and from death: 
 see Usteri, Lehrb. 11. i. i, p. 106, 
 Neand. Planting, Vol. 1. p. 456, and 
 comp. Eeuss, TMol. ClirU. iv. 17, 
 Vol. II. p. 183 sq., who however is 
 appy. unduly restrictive. 
 ircpitroCiicris is much more obscure; 
 while its etymological form and syn- 
 tactic use (comp. i Thess. v. 9, 2 
 Thess. ii. 14, Heb. x. 39) suggest an 
 active and abstract interpretation 
 (Beng.), the genitival relation with 
 &wo\vTp. renders this in the present 
 case wholly untenable. The same 
 may be said of the concrete passive 
 explanation ' hsereditas acqnisita ' 
 (Calov.), even if that explanation be 
 lexically demonstrable. The most 
 ancient interpretation (Syr.), accord- 
 ing to which Ti Trepfjr.=ol TrepLwoLTj- 
 B4i'T€S, soil. Xa6s Ws Tvepuir. i Pet. ii. 
 9 (comp. Isaiah xliii. 21, and esp. 
 Mai. iii. 17), and is a Christian appli- 
 cation of the nin* n?3D, the XaJs 
 
 Trepiovaios (LXX) of the Old Testa- 
 ment, is on the whole the most satis- 
 factory. The objection that 7repi?r. is 
 never absolutely so used is of weight, 
 and is not to be diluted by a forced 
 reference to airov (Mey.) ; still, while 
 the exx. adduced show such a mean- 
 ing to be possible, the context, and 
 esp. the genitival relation, render it 
 in a high degree probable. The dis- 
 cussions of the other interpretations 
 by Harless, and the comments o£ 
 Stier (p. 129) on diroXirp. wiU repay 
 perusal. (2) Connexion : els may 
 
 be joined with Ss itrnv k.t.\. (Tisch., 
 Eiick.) in a temporal sense, 'until' 
 (Auth.), but much more probably 
 belongs to ia<j>payl(r8iire. Eis ciTroX. 
 is thus a clause co-ordinate with efe 
 ivaaiov K.T.\., the former expressing 
 the final clause in reference to man, 
 the latter in more especial and ulti- 
 mate reference to God. 
 
 15. Aid toSto Ka^u] 'On this ac- 
 count I also ; ' ref . to the preceding 
 verses as a reason for thanks to God 
 for the spiritual state of the Ephe- 
 sians, with a prayer (ver. 17) for 
 their further enlightenment. The ex- 
 act reference of these words is doubt- 
 ful. Harless (after Chrys.) refers Sii, 
 TOVTO to the whole paragraph ; as how- 
 ever the Ephesians are first specially 
 addressed in ver. 13 {Kal ip-cts), it 
 seems best, with Theoph., to con- 
 nect 5ict Touro only with ver. 13, 14 
 ' on acooimt of thus having heard, 
 believed, and having been sealed in 
 Christ.' Kd7<!) {'I also, I too,' not 
 'I indeed,' Eadie) is thus faintly 
 corresponsive with koX vfids, and hints 
 at the union in prayer and praise 
 which subsisted between the Apostle 
 and his converts. De Wette refers 
 
I. 15, 16. 
 
 21 
 
 vfiai iricTTiv ev raS K.vpi(fi 'ItjcroO koi t^v ayairi]i> rhv 
 c«s TravTas rovi dylovs, ov vavofjiai ev^^apia-Toiv vTtepl6 
 
 Kal to Sii, toSto, adducing Col. i. 9, 
 but this example (oomp. ver. 4 with 
 ver. 9) certainly confirms the strict 
 union of particle and pronoun; see 
 notes in Joe . E adie and Bretsohneider 
 cite Eom. iii. 7, i Cor. vii. 8, xi. i. 
 Gal. iv. 12, I Thess. iii. 5, al., but in 
 all these instances Kal has its full and 
 proper comparative force : see Klotz, 
 Devar. Vol. ir. p. 635. 
 aKoiJiras] 'having heard,' All histo- 
 rical arguments (tis /itjS^ttu Beatri- 
 f-ems airovs, — noticed, but rejected by 
 Theodoret) derived on the one hand 
 from pressing the meaning of the 
 verb (De W.), or on the other from 
 the improbable (see Winer, Gr. § 40. 
 5. b. I, p. 248, comp. notes on Gal. v. 
 24) frequentative force of the tense 
 (Eadie), must be pronounced extreme- 
 ly precarious, St Paul certainly uses 
 anoiffavTes in Col. i. 4 with refer- 
 ence to converts he had not seen ; 
 but this alone would not have proved 
 it, and thus does not prevent our here 
 referring d/coiiiras to the progress the 
 Ephesians had made in the four or 
 five years since he had last seen them: 
 see Wieseler, Chronol., p. 445, Wig- 
 gers. Stud. u. Krit. 1841, p. 431 sq. 
 ■n^v Ko9' iSfJias irCcmv] this is com- 
 monly regarded as a mere periphrasis 
 for Triv v/ierdpav ir. , or rather rijv t. 
 viJMv, the possessive viiirepos (comp. 
 ■tiiiir.) being used sparingly (only 4 
 times) in St Paul's Epp. It must be 
 admitted that later writers appear to 
 use Karh, with ace. as equivalent to 
 possess, pronoun or gen. (see Bern- 
 hardy, Synt. V. 20. b, p. 241, Winer, 
 Gr. § 22. 7. obs. p. 139), still, as St 
 Paul uses ^ Trior. iiiZv at least 16 
 times, and ri xaff ifi,. ir. only once, 
 there would seem to be a distinction ; 
 the latter ((cari distributive) probably 
 
 denoting the faith of the community 
 viewed objectively, ' tJie faith which is 
 among you,' the former the subjective 
 faith of individuals : see Harless and 
 Stier in loc, and comp. John viri. 
 17, Tip vofiip T(p vfier^pip (addressed to 
 Plmrisees), with Acts xviii. 1 5, ro/ioO 
 ToD KaB' v/iS.s (in reference to Jews in 
 Achaia), which seem to convey a 
 parallel distinction, and at any rate to 
 invert the supposition of Eadie, that 
 ^ KaB' i/i. IT. denotesmore distinctively 
 characteristic possession than the for- 
 mer. Iv T(S KvpCi^ 'Xt\a-.1, 'in 
 tlie Lord Jesus ; ' definition of the holy 
 sphere and object of the ;r£<rns, the 
 omission of the article giving a more 
 complete unity to the conception, as it 
 were 'Christ-centered faith,' 'fidem 
 erga Deum in Domino Jesu,' Beng. ; see 
 notes on Gal. iii. 26. It is instructive 
 to compare with this the subsequent 
 clause, TTjv dyaTTTjif t^v k.t.\., where 
 the second article [but Lachm. omits 
 T^i" (17. with ABNi; 17; al.] seems 
 inserted to convey two momenta of 
 thought,lovegenerally,further defined 
 by that amplitude (0^ toi>s iiri.x<^ploiis 
 <jn)irl ii.6vov, Chrys.) which is its true 
 Christian characteristic; see Fritz. 
 JSom.iii. 25,Yol.i.p.i95. Asageneral 
 rule it may be observed, that when 
 the defining prepositional clause is so 
 incorporated with (e.g. ch. il 11), 
 appended to (Col. iv. 7), or, as here, 
 structurally assimilated (iricrns or «- 
 areiia ip, comp. eh. iii. 13, Eom. vi. 
 4) with the subst. it defines as to 
 form only a single conception, the 
 article is correctly omitted ; see Har- 
 less in loc. , and Winer, Gr. § 20. 2, 
 p. 123. els TravTas toiis a.y(.- 
 ovs], 'towards all the Saints;' objects 
 towards whom the love was direct- 
 ed; 'omnes character Christianismi,' 
 
22 
 
 nP02 E$ESIOYS. 
 
 vfjLWV, fJLVe'iav v/jlwv iroiovf^evos eiri rtcv 7rpocrev)(U)V fxov, 
 I J "va 6 Geo? Tov Kvplov ^fxwv 'Itjcrov \pi(TTOv, 6 iramp 
 
 i6. livelav v/iwv Totoinevos] So Tisch. witliD'EKLfFG, Boern. , transpose, 
 v/xui- and mtoi/ji.) great majority of mss.; Sangerm., Aug., Vulg., Syr. (both), 
 Copt., al.; Chrys., Theod., Dam., al. {Rec. Griesb., De W. e sil., Alf., Wordsw.). 
 The omission of vnaiv is strongly supported by external evidence, viz. ABD^K 
 (not C, Eadie; this is one of its lacuna); about lo mss.; Clarom., Goth.; 
 Hil. (Ruck; Lachm,, Mey., approved by Mill, Prolegom. p. 144?), but is per- 
 haps slightly less probable ; esp. as an omission of i/iap owing to the preceding 
 ifiuv is more likely than an explanatory insertion, where the meaning is so 
 obvious, and as i Thess. i. 2 (where ABX' similarly omit C/i.wf) is appy. an 
 instructive parallel. 
 Bengel: comp. ch. vi. 18, Philem. 5. 
 On the meaning of ayiovs, see notes 
 on ch. i. I. 
 
 16. ou iraiiojiai rf)^.] 'I cease not 
 giving thanks.' In this simple and 
 well-known formula the participle 
 points to a state supposed to be al- 
 ready in existence : see Winer, Gr. 
 § 45- 4> P- 308 sq., Scheuerl. Synt. 
 § 45- 5. P- 481- lu many verbs {e.g. 
 aiu'xiij'o/iai, Luke xvi. 3) this dis- 
 tinction between part, and inf. may 
 be made palpable; in others, as in the 
 present case, the verb is such as rarely 
 to admit any other idiomatic struc- 
 ture: see Herm. Viger, No. 218; 
 Donalds. Gr. § 591; and for a good 
 paper on the general distinction be- 
 tween these uses of the participle and 
 of the infin., Weller, Bemerk. z, Gr. 
 Synt. virip v|i.] on the use of 
 
 iw^p (Eom. i. 8, cCc.) and Tepl (i Cor. 
 i. 4, <£c. ) in this formula, see notes on 
 ch. vi. ig and on Gal. i. 4. 
 |xvcCav ifiiuv iTOioii|i.] 'making men- 
 tion of you;' limitation, or rather 
 specification of the further direction 
 of the eixOifii-iTTla, comp. i Thess. i. 2, 
 Philem. 4, and see notes in locc. 
 Iirl Tuv irpoo-. |i,ou] 'in my prayers,' 
 'in orationibusmeiSj'Vulg., Clarom., 
 Goth. ; ^Tri here being not simply and 
 crudely temporal, ' at the time of my 
 prayers' (Eadie), but retaining also 
 that shade of local reference of which 
 
 even the more distinctly temporal ex- 
 amples are not wholly divested: see 
 Bernhardy, Synt. v. 23. a, p. 246, 
 and especially notes on i Thess. i. z. 
 The prep, thus serves to express the 
 concurrent circimistanoes and rela- 
 tions, in which and under which an 
 event took place; see Winer, Gr. § 47. 
 
 g. P- 336. 
 
 17. iva K.r. X.'i'tliat the God &c.;' 
 subject of the prayer blended with 
 the purpose of making it. The exact 
 meaning of this particle both here 
 and in similar passages requires a 
 brief notice. The uses of Xva in the 
 N.T. appear to be three: (r) Final, 
 indicative of the end, purpose, or 06- 
 ject of the action, — the primary and 
 principal meaning, and never to be 
 given up except on the most distinct 
 counter-arguments:(2)Sa6-j(?)!(i!, — oc- 
 casional force, especially after verbs of 
 entreaty (not of command), the subject 
 of the prayer being blended with, and 
 even in some cases obscuring thejpur- 
 pose of making it; see esp. Winer, 
 Gr. § 44. 8, p. 299, and notes on Phil. 
 i. 9: (3) Eventual, or indicative of 
 result, — appy. in a few cases, and due 
 perhaps more to what is called 'He- 
 brew teleology' {i.e. the reverential 
 aspect under which the Jews regarded 
 Prophecy and its fulfilment) than 
 grammatical depravation; compare 
 Winer, Gr. § 53. 6, p. 406 sq. After 
 
I. 17, 18. 
 
 23 
 
 t5? So^tji, Swtj vfjLiv Tivevfia o'o^lai /cat a7roKaXi5'\|re«oy 
 ei> eTTiyvdxrei avToO, "jrecptaTia-fxivovs Toyy o^OaXfiovi rijs 1 8 
 
 maturely weigliing the evidence ad- 
 duced by Winer and others, few 
 perhaps will hesitate to characterize 
 Fritzsohe's and Meyer's strenuous 
 denial of (2) and (3) as perverse, and 
 the criticism of Eadie, who admitting 
 (3), denies (2) after verbs of entreaty, 
 as somewhat illogical. In the 
 
 present case, independent of the paral- 
 lelism afforded by numerous similar 
 passages (ch. iii. 16, Phil. i. 9, Col. 
 i. 9, iv. 3, I Thess. iv. 1, ^ Thess. i. 
 11), the presence of the opt. 81^17 after 
 the pres. (hoped for, dependent reali- 
 zation, Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 622, 
 Bernhardy, Synt. xi. 11, p. 407) in- 
 clines us distinctly to this sub-final or 
 secondary teho use; comp. Winer, 
 § 41. I. obs. p. 260. On the late and 
 incorrect form 5^1; for 50J17, see Lo- 
 beck, Phryn. p. 345, and Sturz, de 
 Dial. Maced. p. 52. o Qehs toO 
 
 KvpCov ijii.] ' the Godof our Lord;' see 
 John XX. 17, Matth. xxvii. 46. 'Deua 
 ejus est quia ex eo natus in Deum 
 est,' Hilar, de Trin. iv. 35, p. 96. 
 The somewhat contorted explanations 
 of this and the following clause cited 
 by Suicer {Thes. Vol. i. p. 944) may 
 be dispensed with if this only be 
 observed, that 'the word God was 
 never looked upon as a word of office 
 or dominion, but of nature and sub- 
 stance,' Waterlarid, Sec.Def., Qu. 11. 
 Vol. II. p. 399. The admirably per- 
 spicuous distinctions of the same 
 author, in Answer to Pref. Vol. 11. 
 p. 415, deserve perusal. 
 6 irar^p Trjs 86fi]s] ' the Father of 
 glory;' comp. Paalm xxviii. 3, Acts 
 vii. 2, I Cor. ii. 8, Heb. is. 5 ; gen. 
 of the characteristic quality: see 
 Scheuerl. Synt.§ 16.3, p. 115, Winer, 
 Gr. § 34. 2. b, p. 211. It is singular 
 that a mere adjectival resolution 
 
 (Biickert), or a poetical and less usual 
 meaning of irarrip (sc. ' auctor,' Job 
 xxxviii. 28, probably James i. 17, and 
 perhaps Heb. xii. 9, but see context; 
 not 2 Cor. i. 3 [Eadie], see De W., 
 and Mey.) should so generally have 
 been adopted instead of this simple 
 and grammatical explanation. The 
 use of iraTvp was probably suggested 
 by the foregoing mention of our Lord, 
 while the qualifying gen. Sdfijs serves 
 appropriately to carry on the reference 
 to the eternal glory of God which per- 
 vades the whole of thefirst paragraph. 
 The reference then of d6^a to the 
 glorified humanity (Stier), or to the 
 divine nature of Christ (A than . , Greg.- 
 Naz., see Suicer, Thesaur. Vol. i. p. 
 944), is by no means necessary. 
 IIvEv|ia <ro<f>Cas k.t.X..] ' the Spirit of 
 wisdom and revelation; ' the charac- 
 terizing genitives denoting the special 
 forms and peculiar manifestations in 
 which the Apostle prayed for the 
 gift of the Spirit to his converts; 
 compare 2 Cor. iv. 13, 2 Tim. i. 7, 
 see notes on Gal. vi. i, and on the 
 omission of the article with TlveS/ia, 
 notes on Gal. v. 5. The favourite 
 subjective and objective distinctions 
 of Harl. , viz. that ffo<p. is the subjec- 
 tive state, airoKiiX. the objective me- 
 dium, are not necessary, nor even, as 
 the order (state before means, not vice 
 vers&) suggests, logically satisfactory ; 
 ffo(pla is simply the general gift of 
 illumination, diroKdX. the more spe- 
 cial gift of insight into the divine 
 mysteries: see further remarks in 
 notes on 2 Tim. i. 7. 
 Iv hnyvdira avToiJ] 'in the full 
 knowledge of Him,' 'in agnitioue [or 
 rather cognitione] ejus,' Vulg., Cla- 
 rom. ; iv not being for els (Grot., 
 Wolf), or diA (Beza), but, as usual, 
 
24 
 
 nP02 Ea>E2I0Y2. 
 
 KapSlai vfim, eti to eiSevai v/xas ti'j e<TTiv jJ eXTrJs T^y 
 
 marldng the sphere or element in 
 which the action taltes place; the 
 knowledge of God (not Christ, Calv., 
 who is not referred to before ver. •20) 
 was to be the sphere, the circumam- 
 bient element in which they were to 
 receive wisdom and revelation ; comp. 
 2 Pet. i. -i, and see esp. Winer, Gr. § 
 48. a, p. 345. 'Bk iinyi/. thus belongs 
 to the whole preceding clause, not 
 specially to dirojcaX., stUl less to what 
 follows (Chrys., Lachm., aJ.), both of 
 which connexionswouldinterfere with 
 the parallelism of ver. 15 and 16; 
 in'eSiJ.a k.t.\. corresponding to 7re0uT. 
 K.r.\., and iv ivvyv. to els to elii- 
 vai. The iiil in iirlyvuffis 
 
 may be either additive (Eadie), in 
 ref. to the increments of knowledge 
 continually received, or more proba- 
 bly, simply intensive, soil, 'cognitio 
 accurata et certa,' Eretschn., crkennt- 
 niss; comp. i Cor. xiii. 12, see Eost 
 u. Palm, Lex. s. v. iirl, iv. c. 5, and 
 Delitzsch, on Heb. x. 26. 
 
 18. ireclxuTwriJi^vous Toiis o«J>9aX- 
 [lovs K.T.X.] ' having the eyes of your 
 lieart enlightened.' Three construc- 
 tions are here possible : (a) Accus. ab- 
 solute, ire^oTurfii^i'ovs agreeing with 
 (i0SaX|UoiJs,Peile, Eadie: (6)Aecusatival 
 clause after dtfri, Kal being omitted to 
 give the clause an emphatically appo- 
 gitional aspect; see Harless and Stier: 
 (c) Lax construction of part. ; impon: 
 referring to i/ur, and roils 6<t>8a\iJ.oM 
 being accus. of limiting reference; 
 Winer, Gr. % 32. 5. 6, p. 205, Madvig, 
 Synt. §31; comp. Hartung, Casus, 
 p. 62. Of these (a) is grammatically 
 doubtful, for though such accusatives 
 undoubtedly do exist, esp. in later 
 writers (see Wannowski's elaborate 
 treatise de Construct. Abs. iv. 5, p. 
 146 sq.), still they far more generally 
 admit of an explanation from the 
 
 context; see Winer, § 32. 7, p. 206, 
 comp. Bernh. Synt. iii. 30, p. 133. 
 Again (&) is somewhat doubtful gram- 
 matically, on account of the article (see 
 Beng.), and certainly exegetically un- 
 satisfactory, 'enlightened eyes' rather 
 defining the effect of the Spirit than 
 forming any sort of apposition to it ; 
 see Meyer in loc. In (c) the con- 
 nexion of the accusatives is less sim- 
 ple, but the other syntactic difficul- 
 ties are but slight, as a permutation of 
 case, esp. in participial clauses, is not 
 uncommon in the N.T. {e.g. Acts xv. 
 22 ; Winer, Gr. § 63. i. i, p. 500), nor 
 without distinct parallel in classical 
 Greek: see exx. in Wannowski, iv. 
 6, p. 169 sq., Jelf, Gr. § 711. This 
 then seems the most probable constr. : 
 ire^uT. K.T.X. serves to define the 
 result of the gift of the Spirit (comp. 
 Phil. iii. 21 [notEec], i Thess.iii. 13; 
 Winer, Gr. § 66. 3, p. 549 sq.), and 
 owing to the subsequent inf. {els rb 
 ilSivai) which expresses the purpose of 
 the illumination, not unnaturally 
 lapses into the accusative. Tois 
 
 6<|>B. Trjs KapSCas iji..] ' the eyes of yowr 
 heart; ' a somewhat unusual and figu- 
 rative expression, denoting the inward 
 iuteUigenoe of that portion of our im- 
 material nature (the ypuxn) of which 
 the KapSla is the imaginary seat; 
 comp. Acta Thorn. % 28, toi>j rrjs xjiv- 
 X^s iijiBaXiiois, and see esp. Beck, 
 Seelenl. iii. 24. 3, p. 94 sq., and notes 
 0)1 I Tim. i. 5. On the use and mean- 
 ing of 0w7-ife(i' here, 'to illuminate 
 with the brightness of inner light,' see 
 esp. Harl. in loc, and contrast Bph. 
 iii. 9, where, as the context shows, the 
 illumination is somewhat less inward 
 and vital ; comp. Beck, Seelenl. 11. 13. 
 2,p.37. The reading of iJ«c., 6^0. 
 
 Trjs diavotas i/x. has only the support 
 of some cursive mss.; Theod. , CEcum., 
 
1. 19. 
 
 25 
 
 kXijaewi avTov, koi Ti'y 6 itXovtos t^j So^rjj t?? kXijoo- 
 vofMiai avTOv ev to?? a'y/otf, (caJ t/ to virep^aWov 1 9 
 
 al. tCs] 'what.' There appears 
 
 no reason to adopt in this verse either 
 a qualitative ('cujusnam naturae,' 
 Wahl, Harl.), or, what is appy. more 
 questionable, a quantitative {iroTa-n-ii, 
 
 vbari, Holzh., Stier) translation; the 
 ordinary meaning 'what' ('quffl... 
 spes,' Vulg.) is fully sufficient, and in- 
 cludes all more special interpretations. 
 The articles with iXirU and itXoDtos 
 only serve to point them out as well- 
 known and recognised, and as indi- 
 rectly alluded to throughout the pre- 
 ceding paragraph : comp. Bernhardy, 
 Synt. VI. 27, p. 324, Stallb. Plato, Crit. 
 43 0. 1^ IXirCs K.T.X.], 'the hope 
 
 of His calling,' i.e. the hope which 
 the caUing works in the heart; 
 KK-qaews being the gen. of the causa 
 ejiciens, Scheuerl. Synt. § 17, p. 125. 
 'BXirJs is thus not objective, to i\Ti^6- 
 /K£j'oi'(01sh.,Eadie),ameaning scarcely 
 fully substantiated even in Col. i. 5 
 (oomp. notes in loc), and here cer- 
 tainly unnecessary, but as usual sub- 
 jective; iirl irotcus i\irl<n KCKX'^/j.eSa 
 Trap' avToS, Theod. Like jrlam, it 
 is probably occasionally used in an 
 objective aspect ('objectivict'), as 'the 
 grounds, the state of hope,' but just as 
 irlffTLs is not used in the N. T. for 
 'religio Christiana' (see ore Gal. i. 23), 
 BO it is very doubtful whether i\-irls 
 ever fully amounts to 'res separata,' 
 as asserted by Suicer, Thesaur. s.v. 
 Vol. I. p. 1095. t£s 6 irXowTos 
 
 K.T.X.] 'what the riches of the glory of 
 His inheritance ;' a noble accumula- 
 tion of possessive genitives, setting 
 forth the K\ripovofi,la on the side of its 
 glorj', and that glory on the side of its 
 riches. All adjectival solutions, it 
 need scarcely be said, are wholly in- 
 admissible; see notes on ver. 6, and 
 Winer, Gr. § 30. 3. r, p. 171 sq. 
 
 The prefixed xal is omitted by Lachm. 
 withAEDTGNi; 59; Clarom., San- 
 germ., Amiat., Goth., al., but perhaps 
 rightly retained by Tisch., Mey., al., 
 with D'EKLX^; nearlyallmss.;Copt., 
 Syr. (both), Vulg., al.; Orig. cat., 
 Chrys., Theod.; as the koI in the 
 third member (ver. 19) might have 
 so easily suggested an omission in the 
 second. iv toIs 017(015] 
 
 'among the saints;' a semilocal clause 
 appended to rk [icmv) 6 TrXoDros 
 K.T.X., defining the sphere (the whole 
 community of the faithful, comp. 
 Acts XX. 32, xxvi. 18) in which the 
 ttXoOtos t% So^. TTJs Kk-qp. is peculiarly 
 found, felt, and realized: oomp. Col. 
 i. 27, and see Meyer, h. I. Harless 
 connects iv rots aylois with KXripov. 
 aiiTou, an interpretation exegetically 
 tenable (see Stier in loc. p. 161 sq.), 
 but, on account of the omission of the 
 article, by no means so grammatically 
 admissible, even in Hellenistic Greek, 
 as the somewhat sweeping language of 
 Alf. in loc. would lead us to conclude. 
 For as the former clause contains a 
 defined and self subsistent idea (not 
 merely kXtipov. iv k.t.X, Job xlii. 15, 
 (&c., but K}^Tjpov. auTou, sc. Qeou, a 
 very distinct expression), the latter 
 cannot easily be regarded as supple- 
 mental, and thus, as legitimately anar- 
 throus; see notes on ver. 15. If 
 however ir rots ay. be immediately 
 connected with the unexpressed iffrl, 
 the omission of the article will be less 
 sensibly felt (comp. Winer, Gr. § 19. 2. 
 b, p. 114), and the harmony in the 
 three clauses fully preserved: the first, 
 iXvls K.T.X. being stated generally; 
 the second, ttXoStos k.t.X. more nearly 
 specialized by iv toIs 07., the sphere 
 in which it is found; the third, ri 
 iireppdXXov k.t.X. by els ■rip.as, the 
 
26 
 
 nP02 E^ESIOYS. 
 
 fAeyeOoit T?? Suvdfietoi avToO ek ims roiis iria-TeoovTai 
 20 Kara Ttjv evepjeiav tov Kpa-rovs Tfl? iVxi5o9 avrov, nv 
 
 living objects towards wkom it is and 
 will be exeriased. 
 
 19. Kal tC t6 vTr«pP. k.t.X.] 'and 
 «??iat t/!« exceeding greatness of His 
 power is; ' specification of that by wMoh 
 hope becomes quickened and realized ; 
 Sarj tIs TrepUarai KTrjffis Ayadup Tols 
 TOV Qeov dyioLS iTrl tov f/AWovTos 
 alQi/os, Theod.-Mops. Chrys., 
 
 Theoph. , and CEcum. refer this clause 
 simply to the present life. This is 
 doubtful, as the foregoing expressions 
 iXTrls and KKtipovoula (ch. v. 5, comp. r 
 Cor.vi. 9, Gal. v. 21), and the reference 
 in the following verse, seem to point 
 primarily to the power of God which 
 shall hereafter quicken us even as it 
 did Christ, and shall install us in our 
 inheritance as it enthroned Him on the 
 right hand of God. There is thus a 
 kind of chmax, — the hope which the 
 calling awakens, — theexhaustless and 
 inexpressible glory (Chrys.) of that in- 
 heritance to which hope is directed, — 
 the limitless power that shall bestow 
 it. Still the individualizing els ■q/ios 
 seems to show that a secondary refer- 
 ence to the present quickening power 
 in the hearts of believers (oh. ii. 1,5) 
 is by no means to be excluded. 
 «ls ijnos rovs irioT.] ' to tcs-ward who 
 are believing;' objects towards whom 
 the exceeding greatness of the power 
 is displayed: the els rj/xas not being 
 dependent on t^s Suv6.11. avroS (Harl,, 
 citing 1 Cor. xiii. 4, where however 
 els u/ias is most probably to be joined 
 with j^tifro/ier , Bee Mey. in loc.), but, as 
 in the preceding member, on tI {i(rTl) ; 
 and e/s having its regular and primary 
 sense of ethical direction, admirably 
 expressed by 'to us-toard,' A. V. from 
 Tynd.; comp. Winer, Gr. § 49. a. 0. 5, 
 P- 35.3' The second and third clauses, 
 tIs tXoutos k.t.X. and tL t6 vjrepjS. 
 
 K.T.X., are thus perfectly symmetrical, 
 the substantival sub-clauses forming a 
 parallelism to each other, and the pre- 
 positional sub-clause els tJ/ms being 
 structurally parallel to the preceding 
 iy Tois aylois, while at the same time 
 it prepares us for thelatent apposition 
 suggested by the iv Xp. which follows; 
 see Stier in loc, p. 155. kotcL 
 
 Ti)v kvipyeiav does not refer to all 
 three clauses (Harl.), but, as the cor- 
 respondence of ideas and language dis- 
 tinctly suggests, to that immediately 
 preceding ; not however especially to 
 iruTTeioPTas (Buck.), for such a con- 
 nexion, though doctrinally unexcep- 
 tionable (see Col. ii. n), is exegetically 
 unsatisfactory fromits interpolation of 
 an unlooked-for idea, viz. the origin 
 and antecedents of faith. The refer- 
 ence then is simply to the whole 
 clause, not however as an explana- 
 tion (Chrys.) or amplification (Calv.) 
 of this power, but, in accordance with 
 the full ethical force of xord ('mea- 
 sure,' 'proportion,' Bernhardy, Synt. 
 v. 20. b, p. 239), as a definition of its 
 mode of operation (Eadie), a mighty 
 measure, a stupendous exemplar by 
 which its infinite powers towards the 
 believing, in its future, yea, and its 
 present manifestations, might be felt, 
 acknowledged, estimated, and rea- 
 lized; comp. Ignat. Trail. 9, where 
 however the o/iolaiM of the lyepcris is 
 more alluded to than in the present 
 passage. As the meaning of kotA 
 here falls short of 'propter' (comp. 
 Griesb. Opiiscula., 11. 5), so it certainly 
 transcends that of mere similitude. 
 
 TOW KpoiTOVS TTJS l^TXTJOS aVToO] 't/lfi 
 
 strength of His might,' 'robur poten- 
 tise,' Mih., soil, the strength which 
 appertains to, is evinced by His Iktxvs : 
 neither a Hebraism (Holzh.), nor a 
 
I. 20, 21. 
 
 27 
 
 eviipyt]<rev ev rw Xpiarw, iyeipa? avrov ex veKpwv, koi 
 exaQicrev ev oe^ia avToO ev to?s eirovpavioi's {nrepava 21 
 
 mere cumulative lonn of i 
 (Kiittn.), but a specifioatiou of fhe 
 outcoming and exhibition of that 
 powei: which is the divine attrihute; 
 see ch. vi. 10, Dan. iv. 27. Each 
 word has thus its distinct and proper 
 force : tffxvs, as its derivation (?irxu, 
 l^w) implies, refers rather to passive 
 inherent power, Marlt xii. 30; xpiros 
 (KPA, KAP, cogn. with xApa, comp. 
 Benfey, Wurzellex. Vol. 11. 178) to 
 power evinced in action ; see Luke i. 
 51. The striking force of the expres- 
 sions here used to specify this ' emi- 
 nent act of God's omnipotenoy' is 
 well illustrated by Pearson, on the 
 Greed, Art. v. Vol. 11. p. 222 (ed. 
 Burton). 
 
 20. i^v (VT^pyr\<rev] 'which He 
 wrought,' soil, ■qv hi4pyeiav, which act 
 of omnipotence God, as the princi- 
 pal cause (see Pearson, Creed, Art. v. 
 Vol. i. p. 301, ed. Burt.), displayed 
 in Christ, and in Him in us {'innuit 
 ef&caciam Dei in credentibus,' Cocc.) 
 who share the humanity He vouch- 
 safed to take, and are spiritually risen 
 with our risen Lord; see Stier in loe. 
 p. 172. The reading MipyijKev (AB; 
 Cyr., Procop.) is adopted by Lachm., 
 Mey.; but appy. on insufficient evi- 
 dence. Iv Tm XpwTT^] ' in 
 Christ,' in Him as our spiritual 
 Head; it> here being no mere 'nota 
 dativi,' a construction now exploded 
 in the N. T. (see Winer, Gr. § 31. 
 8, p. 19s), hut correctly indicating 
 the substratum of the action; see 
 notes on Gal. i. 24. It is scarcely 
 necessary to recapitulate the caution 
 of Theodoret and Theophyl., S^Xoc S^ 
 Sti ravra Trdvra (is irepl avBpdnrov 
 rideiKe (Theod.), rb yap dvaffT&v &v- 
 Spuvos, el Kal Oey tjvuto (Theophyl.). 
 
 in this passage, Phil. ii. 6 — 11, and 
 Col. 5- 14 — rg, as Olsh. well ohserveB, 
 we find the entire Christologyx)! Bt 
 Paul. iytlpai airov] 'when He 
 
 raised Him,,' Auth. or perhaps better 
 'in that He raised Him,' Arm. ; con- 
 temporaneous act with iv-qpy-qaev, see 
 notes on yvupto-as, ver. 9. 
 Kol «Ka9iirev] 'and He set Him;' 
 change from the participial structure 
 to the finite verb, especially designed 
 to enhance the importance of the truth 
 conveyed by the participle ; see exx. 
 in Winer, Gr. § 63. -z. h, p. 505 sq. 
 The distinctive and emphatic mention 
 of the consequent and connected acts 
 heightens the conception of the al- 
 mighty Mpyeia of God (Father, Son, 
 and Spirit: Pearson, on the Greed, Art. 
 V. Vol. I. p. 302), displayed in the Re- 
 surrection of Christ from the dead. 
 On the session of Christ at the right 
 hand of God, see Knapp, Script. Var. 
 Argum. Art. 11. ; let these words of 
 Bp. Pearson's however never be for- 
 gotten, ' He shall reign for ever and 
 ever, not only to the modificated eter- 
 nity of His mediatorship, but also to 
 the complete eternity of the duration 
 of His humanity, which for the future 
 is coeternal to His Divinity:' Art. vi. 
 Vol. I. p. 335. 'E/cdffi(7e» is found 
 
 in DEFGKL; most mss. ; Clarom., 
 Boern., Goth., Copt., Syr.; Chrys., 
 Theod. (Ecc. , Tisch.). But KaBiam 
 [Lachm.) has the strong support of 
 ABK; about 14 mss.; Aug., Vulg. ; 
 Eus., Cyr.: aMv is added by AN; 
 4 mss.; Eus., Procop. Iv toIs 
 
 eirovpavCois] 'in the heavenly places ;' 
 
 • p 7 7 
 
 I . ^ ■ '•^ [in ccelo] Syr., Goth., 
 
 ^th. ; see notes on ver. 3. It is 
 scarcely possible to doubt that these 
 
28 
 
 EPOS E*E2I0Y2. 
 
 Taatii apx'ii xat e^ova'ia^ /cat Suvd/xeWi Kai KvptoT^TOi 
 
 words have here a local reference. 
 The distinctly local expressions, iKd- 
 Biaev, iv 5eji$, — the Scripture doc- 
 trine of Christ's literal and local as- 
 cent (Mark xvi. rg, al.), — His regal 
 session in heaven in His glorified and 
 resplendent Body (Acts vii. 56, e^Tuh-a 
 iK de^iQi', al., see Phil. iii. 20, 21), — 
 His future literal and local judiciary 
 descent (Acts i. 11, Sv Tpbirov idti,- 
 (raade airbv TropevSfievov), — all tend to 
 ihvahdate the vague and idealistic 
 'status oEelestis' urged by Harless in 
 loe. The choice of the more general 
 expression, iv ro:s inovp.y Hn the hea- 
 venly regions ' (comp. oh. iv. 10), rather 
 than the more specific iv rots ovpavois 
 was perhaps suggested by the nature 
 pf the details in ver. 21. The 
 
 reading ovpmi6t% [Lachm. (non marg.) 
 with B ; al.] has weak external sup- 
 port, and seems an almost self-evident 
 gloss. 
 
 21. iircpava] 'over above,' 'supra,' 
 Tulg., Clarom., 'ufaro,' Goth.; not 
 'longe supra,' Beza, and 'far above,' 
 Auth., Alf., al.: specification of the 
 nature and extent of the exaltation. 
 The intensive force which Chrys. and 
 Theophyl. find in this word, ina rh 
 iKpirarov v^os SriXumjj, and which has 
 recently been adopted by Stier and 
 Eadie, is very doubtful ; as is also the 
 assertion (Eadie) that this prevails 'in 
 the majority of passages ' in the LXX : 
 see Ezek. i. 26 (Alex.), viii. 2, x. 19, 
 xi. 22, xliii. 15, and even Deut. xxvi. 
 19, xxviii. i. Such distinct instances 
 as Ezek. xliii. 15, and in the N. T., 
 Heb. ix. 5, the similarly unemphatic 
 use of the antitheton viroKdroi in John 
 1.51, Luke viii. 1 6, and the tenden- 
 cies of Alexandrian and later Greek 
 to form duplicated compounds (see 
 Peyron, ad Pap. Taurin. Vol. i. p. 89), 
 make it highly probable that vwepluiu, 
 
 both here and ch. iv. 10, implies little 
 more than simple local elevation. So 
 too Syr. and appy. all the ancient Vv. 
 irdoTis apxis k.t.X.] 'all (every) rule 
 and authority and power and lord- 
 ship .•' no parenthesis, but a fuller ex- 
 planation of ip Tois iirovpanlois, see 
 Winer, (Jr. § 64. i. 2, p. 614 (ed. 5). 
 The context and the illustrations af- 
 forded by ch. iii. 10, Col. i. 16, and 
 I Pet. iii. 22, seem to preclude any 
 mere generic reference to all forms of 
 power and dominion (Olsh.), or any 
 specific reference to the orders of the 
 Jewish hierarchy (Sohoettg.), or the 
 grades of authority among men (see 
 ap. Pol. Syn.). The abstract words 
 [duvdfieiav tlvwv 6ji6fiaTa T}/ui' affrjpAX, 
 Chi-ys.) seem to be designations of the 
 orders of heavenly Intelligences, and 
 are used by St Paul in preference to 
 any concrete terms (dYy^XoK, Apxay- 
 yiXun K.T.X.) to express with the 
 greatest amplitude and comprehen- 
 siveness the sovereign power and 
 majesty of Christ; el n iajlv iy 
 Tip ovpaft^, irdvTuv ivdrrepos yiyove, 
 Chrys., see Calv. in loc. As this 
 verse relates to Christ's exaltation in 
 heaven rather than His victory over 
 the powers of hell (i Cor. xv. 24, 
 comp. Eom. viii. 38), reference is pro- 
 bably made exclusively to good Angels 
 and Intelligences, i Tim. v. 21, Any 
 attempt to define more closely (see 
 authors cited in Hagenbaeh, Hist, of 
 Doctr. § 131, Petavius, de Angelis, ii. 
 
 I, Vol. III. p. loi sq.) is aUke pre- 
 sumptuous and precarious: see the 
 excellent remarks of Bp. HaU, Invi- 
 sible World, Book i. § 7. On the 
 nature of Angels, consult the able 
 treatise by Twesten, Dogmatik, Vol. 
 
 II. esp. § I. 4, the essay by Staart, 
 Bibliotheca Sacra for 1843, pp. 88 — 
 154, Ebrard, Dogmatik, § 228 sq. 
 
I. 22. 
 
 29 
 
 Kai iravToi ovofJiaTO^ ovofiaCpfxevov ov /jlovov iv tw 
 aiwvi TovTtp aWa kui ei/ to) /xsWovti, kui iravra 2 2 
 
 Vol. I. p. 2j6, and tlie remarks of 
 Lange, Leb. Jes. Part ii. p. 41 sq. 
 Kal irovTos ov6|j.oTos 6vo|Ji.] 'and, in a 
 word, evei-y name named;' concluding 
 and comprehensive designation ; Kal 
 having here that species of adjunctive 
 force according to which a general 
 term is appended to foregoing details : 
 see Winer, Gr. § 53. 3, p. 388, notes 
 on Phil. iv. 12, Fritz. Matth. p. 786. 
 naK ^KO/ua is not 'every title of 
 honour' (Grinf. Scholl. Hell.), a par- 
 ticular explanation to which dvo/ia^. 
 (which has always its simple meaning 
 in the N. T., even in Eom. xv. 20, 
 see Fritz.) is distinctly opposed, — nor 
 is it used in reference to Heavenly 
 Powers which are iKaTovb/iaaToi 
 (Theophyl.), — ^nor even as a generic 
 representation of the foregoing abs- 
 tract nouns (Wahl, Harless), but 
 simply with reference to everything 
 'in existence ('quicquid existit,' Beza), 
 personal or impersonal, 'everything 
 bearing a name and admitting desig- 
 nation;' comp. Col. i. 16, where a 
 similar latitude is implied by the four 
 times repeated efre, and see notes in 
 loc. ov [lovov K.T.X.] clause ap- 
 
 pended not to iK6.9ur€ii (Beza, Koppe), 
 but to Travrbs 6v6fi,. 6vofj,a!^., to which 
 it gives a still further expansion, 
 both in respect of time and locality, 
 i. e. everything named whether now or 
 hereafter, in the present state of things 
 or the world to come ; Tavrbs p-qrov 
 Kal 6voiia<TTOV, oi5 jibvov rov ivravBa 
 dvojia^oiiivov, dXX4 Kal tov iKeiBer 
 Swafiivov p7]Brivai KoX dvofiaaBrfvai, 
 CEcum. ev t^ aluvi tovtcji] 'in 
 
 this world,' soil, 'this present state of 
 things,' 'systemarerum,'Beng. With 
 regard to the meaning of aliiv it may 
 he observed that in all passages where 
 it occurs a temporal notion is more 
 
 or less apparent. To this, in the 
 majority, an ethical idea is united, so 
 that 6 aliiv ovto%, as Olsh. has observed, 
 is ' the temporary and terrestrial order 
 of things in which sin predominates ' 
 (comp. Gesen. Lex. s. v. uyW, b), to 
 which alCiv fUWuv (=^a<n\eia 6eoO), 
 the holy state of things founded by 
 Christ, is the exact contrast ; see his 
 Comment, on Matth. xii. 31, 32, and 
 Neander, Planting, Tol. i. p. 500, 501 
 (Bohn). In a few passages like the 
 present a semi-local meaning seems 
 also superadded, causing al&v to ap- 
 proach in meaning to Koa-fjios, though 
 it still may be always distinguished 
 from it by the temporal and (com- 
 monly) ethical notions which ever 
 form its background ; see notes on ch. 
 ii. i. 
 
 22. Kal irovTa iirira^fv k.t. X.] 
 'and put all things under His feet;' 
 further specification of the majesty 
 of Christ, — not only the highest con- 
 ceivable exaltation (ver. 21), but the 
 most unbounded sovereignty. The 
 strong similarity of the language 
 scarcely leaves a doubt that here and 
 in Heb. ii. 8 there is a distinct a llusion 
 to Psalm viii. 7, Trdvra vTi-a^as vtto- 
 Kdrw Tuv iroSuJv a&rov, comp. Gen. i. 
 28. No* is this due to any ' rabbinisch- 
 typischerIuterpretationsweise'(Mey.) 
 on the part of St Paul, but to a direct 
 reference under the guidance of the 
 Spirit to a passage in the 0. T. which 
 in its primary application to man in- 
 volves a secondary and more profound 
 application to Christ. In the grant of 
 terrestrial sovereignty the Psalmist 
 saw and felt the antitypical mystery of 
 man's future exaltation in Christ, yet 
 more fully than Tholuck and even 
 Hengstenberg in loc. appear to admit. 
 The reference thus is less to the 
 
30 
 
 EPOS E*E2I0Y2. 
 
 virera^ev vvo roug iroSai avTOv, Kat avTov eSccKev 
 
 23 K£(paXiiv virep vavra t§ eKKXtjcria, ^t/j ia-Tiv ro 
 
 oomp. Jelf, Gr. § 893. c. ; or (6) aa 
 an aoous. of further predication, serv- 
 ing to complete the notion of the verb, 
 and forming a species of tertiary pre- 
 
 subjugation of foes, as in i Cor. xv. 27 
 (Hamm., Stier), than to the limitless 
 nature of Christ's sovereignty, which 
 the words utto toiJs k.t.X. (^ iax^''"'! 
 iiroray-i], Chrys.) still more heighten 
 and enhance. On this and the 
 
 next verse see a sound sermon by 
 Beveridge, in which the three points, 
 Christ's headship over all things, His 
 headship to the Church, and His rela- 
 tion to it as His body, are well dis- 
 cussed; Serm. xxxii. Vol. n. p. 124 
 sq. (A.-C. L.). 88uK6v is not 
 
 synonymous with jnj, iB-qKev, Iittt}- 
 aev (Wolf, Holzh., and even Harl.), 
 either here or ch. iv. 11, but (as the 
 dat. iKKK7i<Tlq, and the emphatic posi- 
 tion of ainv seem to suggest) retains 
 its primary and proper sense. The 
 meaning then seems to be, 'Though 
 He was so exalted and so glorified, 
 yet even Him did God, out of His 
 boundless mercy and beneficence, jijjc 
 to the Church to be its head.' 
 KcijjaX'ijv vTrlf iravTo] 'head over all 
 things.' The exact construction and 
 immediate reference of these words 
 is not perfectly clear. 'Tirip trdvTa 
 evidently qualifies Ke0. , not however 
 as an immediate and adjectival epi- 
 thet (' summum caput,' Beza, Conyb.), 
 but as an accessory and quasi-parti- 
 cipial definition, i. e. iirepixovira!' irav- 
 Tuv, TTiura being used in exactly the 
 same general sense as before, without 
 any limiting reference to tj iKiik. 
 (Harl.), or any implied contrast to 
 other subordinate heads. Apostles, 
 Prophets, c&c. (Olsh.). The aocus. 
 KKJi. may be regarded either as [a) a 
 simple appositional accus. to the 
 preceding airov, a second ke^. being 
 supplied (per brachylogiam) before 
 TB AkkK., — 'He gave Him, Head 
 over all, (aa Head) to his Church;' 
 
 dicate (Donalds. Gr. § 489); 'He gave 
 Him as Head over aU,' i.e. 'in the 
 capacity of Head over all:' comp. 
 Madvig, Symt. § 24. a, and see the 
 various exx. in Donalds. Gr. § 490. Of 
 these (a) was adopted in ed. i (so also 
 Stier, Mey. ), and it coincides in mean- 
 ing with the ungrammatical order 
 (iSiuK^v aiiTOv [SvTo] virip irivra K€(t>. 
 TV iicK\.) of Syr., ^th.-Platt, Chrys., 
 al., but is, grammatically considered, 
 less simple than (6), and, considered 
 exegetically, but little different in 
 meaning: if God gives Christ to the 
 Church, and Christ at the same time 
 is Head over all things (tertiary predi- 
 cation), He becomes necessarily Head 
 to the Church. It seems best then, 
 with Syr.-Phil. (appy.), Vulg. ('ca- 
 put supra omnem ecclesise'), Clarom., 
 Arm. , to adopt the latter view ; comp. 
 Alf. ire loc. 
 
 23. Tim] ' which indeed :' not ex- 
 actly 'ut quae,' Meyer, but 'qu(s 
 quidem,' the force of the indef. relative 
 being here rather explanatory than 
 causal, and serving to elucidate the 
 use and meaning of KecpaXi) by the in- 
 troduction of the corresponding term 
 aSiia. On the uses of Sans, see notes 
 on Gal. iv. 24. to ir<a\UL avroii] 
 
 'His body; ' not in any merely figura- 
 tive sense, but reaUy and truly; the 
 Church is the veritable body of Christ 
 mystical (oh. iv. 12, 16, esp. v. 30), no 
 mere institution subject to Him as to a 
 Ke(pa\^ used in any ethical sense, but 
 united to Him as to a Kc#aX^ used 
 in its simple and literal sense ; tva ykp 
 p,-^ iKoixras Ke^aK^r ipX'i" ''"''' ""-^ 
 i^owtav coju/trjs, (rupanKws ijyiialv 
 
I. 23. 
 
 31 
 
 aw/jLa avTov, to TrXiJpw/ta tov to vavra ev iraaiv 
 irXrjpovfievov, 
 
 TIIX.UV iarl K€(pa\q, CEcnm. This great 
 and vital trutli, and the nature of 
 onr union with Christ which it in- 
 volves and implies, is well illustrated 
 in the beautiful treatise of Bp. Hall, 
 Christ Mystical, esp. oh. vii. 
 TO xXi]pii>|ia K.T.X.] 'tlie fulness, 
 &c. : ' apposition to the preceding 
 TO ffCjfia adrov, designed still more to 
 expand the full meaning of the pre- 
 ceding identification of the Church 
 with the Lord's body, the general 
 truth conveyed being rb xXiipw^a toD 
 X/)t(rrou 7} iKK\T]<ria, Chrys, The spe- 
 cial meaning and reference of these 
 mysterious words has been greatly 
 contested. This however seems clear 
 (esp. after the long and careful note 
 of Fritz. Bom. xi. 12, Vol. n. p. 469), 
 that irk-Qpoifia is here used pas- 
 sively, and that of its two passive 
 meanings, (a) id quod impletum est, 
 and (6) id quo res impletur (see notes 
 on Gal. iv. 4), the former, sc. t4 
 ireir\r]piafi.hoii, though less common 
 (comp. liueian, Ver. Hist. n. 37, 81/0 
 TtK-qpaiiaTwv, 'manned ships '), is here 
 alone applicable. The Church then 
 is TO iriirktipiaixivov, not however in 
 the sense 'plenum Christi agmen,' 
 'hominum a Christo impletorum ca- 
 terva,' as Fritz, paraphrases ; but in a 
 simple and almost local sense, ' that 
 which is filled up by Christ,' ' the re- 
 ceptacle' (Eadie), as it were, of all the 
 gifts, graces, and blessings of Christ : 
 comp. PhUo, de Proem, et Pcen. p. 920, 
 where the soul is called a irX-^pwfui 
 aperwi/, and contrast the opposed ni- 
 yafia, as used by the Gnostics to ex- 
 press the void world of sense: Baur, 
 Gnosis, p. 157, 462 (cited by Mey.). 
 Toii TO irdvTO k.t.X.] 'of Him who 
 filleth all things with all things,' 'qui 
 rerum nniversitatem omnibus rebus 
 
 [sibi] implet,' Fritz. ; iv being here 
 used in its instrumental sense (see 
 notes on i Thess. iv. 18), as serving to 
 specify that with which the filling 
 takes place (see ch. v. 18), and irSaiv 
 being used with an equal latitude to 
 t4 travTa (ver. 22) as implying not 
 only 'all blessings' (Eadie), but 'all 
 things' unrestrictedly; for by Christ 
 was the whole Universe made, and all 
 things therein: see Col. i. 16, and 
 comp. in ref. generally to the terms 
 of the expression, Philo, Sacrif. Cain, 
 § 18, Vol. 1. p. 175 (ed. Mang.), 
 ireirXijptiiKt^s iravTa fiti irdvTWV. It 
 has been doubted whether jrXijpouo-ffot 
 is (a) passive, as Vulg., Clarom., 
 Chrys., al. ; or (ft) middle, as Syr., 
 Copt., Goth., Arm., whether in a 
 purely active sense (Xen. Hell. vi. 2. 
 14, 35, see exx. in Bost u. Palm, 
 Lex. s. V. Vol. 11. p. 956), or perhaps, 
 as this unique use of the middle in 
 the N.T. suggests, in a specially re- 
 ciprocal sense ' sibi implere.' Of these 
 the latter alone seems admissible, as 
 the idea of Christ receiving completion 
 in His members (Est., comp. Harl.) 
 implies restrictions little accordant 
 with the inclusive rd, wivra. The 
 meaning then of the whole would 
 seem to be, that the Chmch is the 
 veritable mystical Body of Christ, yea 
 the recipient of the plenitudes of Him 
 who filleth all things, whether in hea- 
 ven orin earth, with aU the things, ele- 
 ments, and entities, of which they are 
 composed. And this, as both theparal- 
 lelism of rb trw/ia avrov and Tb TrKr/p. 
 K.T.X. and the absence of any hint of 
 a change of person seem distinctly to 
 suggest, must be referred, not to God 
 (Theod., Alf.), but to Christ; see esp. 
 ch. iv. 10. On the doctrine of 
 
 the omnipresence of Christ, an eternal 
 
32 
 
 nP02 E*E2I0y2. 
 
 II. Kal ifJiUi Svrat veicpobi roll -^apa- J°:^^\(S'^i,Z^^ 
 
 quickened, raised, and even enthroned with and in Christ, to show all ages 
 the riches of His grace and love. Your salvation Is by grace not works. 
 
 truth of vital importance (Bull, Bef. 
 Fid. Nic. § 4. 3. I sq., Waterland, 
 Sermons, vii. 3, Vol. 11. p. 164), to 
 which this verse seema to allude, see 
 notes on ch. iv. 10, Jackson, Creed, 
 Book XI. 3. 10 sq., and the calm and 
 conciliatory observations of Marten- 
 sen, Bogmatih, § 177 sq. Well and 
 clearly has it been said by Andrewes, 
 ' Christ is both in Heaven and earth : 
 as He is called the Head of His Church, 
 He is in Heaven, but in respect 
 of His body which is called Christ 
 He is on earth,' Serm. xii. Vol. v. 
 p. 407. The omission of ri 
 
 (Ree.) is opposed to all the MSS. 
 and to the majority of mss., and 
 adopted by none of the best recent 
 editors. 
 
 Chapteh n. I. KoV i|ias] 'And 
 you also,' 'you too;' special address 
 and application of the foregoing to the 
 case of the readers; koX neither (a) 
 simply connecting the versewith what 
 precedes, sc. koI bwira^ev . . ,Kal HaKev 
 ...Kal u/iSs K.T.\. (Lachm.), as ver. 23 
 is plainly a conclusion of the foregoing 
 clause ; nor (6) serving to introduce a 
 special exemplification of the general 
 act of grace in ver. 23 (Peile), as the 
 force of the correlation between ve- 
 Kpoiii and avvetuitnr. is thus seriously 
 impaired; but rather (c) applying what 
 has been said to the iim^, to which 
 word it gives emphasis and promi- 
 nence. The Ephesians are reminded 
 how they also had experienced in their 
 moral death the energy of the same 
 quickening power which raised Christ 
 from physical death (oh. i. 20), the 
 asoensive force of /calbeing just percep- 
 tible in the implied parallelism be- 
 tween the DiKpoKTis tj/vxiKi] in the case 
 of the Ephesians (see next note), and 
 
 the viKpuxns ffw/ocari/cjj on the part 
 of Christ; comp. Klotz, Devar. Vol. 
 II. p. 636. The connexion 
 
 has also its difficulties. According to 
 the most simple view, ver. 1, after 
 having its structure interrupted by the 
 two relatival sentences, ver. 2, 3, is 
 renewed in ver. 4 (not ver. 5, Schott) 
 by means of Si resumptive (Herm. 
 Viger, No. 544), and there further 
 elucidated by the interpolated nomi- 
 native Oeds, expanded in application 
 by the more comprehensive ^fuSs, and 
 concluded in ver. 5; see Theoph. in 
 loc. 6'vTas vcKpovs] ' being 
 
 dead,' so. spiritually; c^/tpuo-is oix 
 ■q ffUfmriicrj 1} iic tov 'Adi,/i dpfa- 
 fi4vri, dWd ■^ tf/vxi-Kij 7) i^ ■^/j.uv 
 (Tvvi.<TTaiJ,ivri, Theophyl. ; compare 
 Bramhall, Castig. iii. 2, Vol. iv. 
 233 (A.-C. L.). The proleptic refer- 
 ence to physical death, scil. 'oerto 
 morituri' (Mey.), seems irreooncile- 
 able with the context. The ttXoiJo-io! 
 Civ iv iXiei, which seems to specify 
 God's mercy in extending the exercise 
 of His resurrectionary power, would 
 thus lose much of its appropriateness, 
 and the particle xal (ver. 5) its proper 
 asoensive force. On this and the 
 two following verses, see a good prac- 
 tical sermon by Usher, Serm. iv. Vol. 
 xm. p. 45 (ed. Elringt.). 
 Tots irapairT<o|ia(riv k.t.\.] 'bij the 
 trespasses and sins which ye had com- 
 mitted,' 'delictia et peccatis vestris, ' 
 Vulg., Goth.; not 'in delictis,' d:c. 
 Arm. ; the dat. being appy. that of the 
 causa instrumentalis: see H!artung, 
 Casus, p. 79, Winer, Gr. § 31. 7, p. 194. 
 In the closely parallel passage Col. ii. 
 13, veKpois 6vTas iv rots rapawrdna- 
 <nv, the same general sentiment is ex- 
 pressed under slightly different rela- 
 tions: here sin is conceived as that 
 
IT. I, 2. 
 
 33 
 
 VT(Cfi.a(Tiv Kai Tttjs afiapriai'S vfAcov, ev a'n irore irepie- 2 
 iraTrjcraTe Kara tov alwva tov Kocrfiov tovtov, Kara tov 
 
 I. vfiav] This-wordwasomittedined. I withBcc. andTtscft.(ecl. 2) on the 
 authority of KL; great majority of mss.; Chrys., Dam., al. : but in spite of 
 the variation of A [iavrwv), is now restored on the greatly preponderating 
 authority of BDEFGK; 15 mss.; nearly all Yv.; Theod., al. So Lachm., 
 and Tiseh. (ed. i, and 7). 
 
 which kills (Olsh.), there itis described 
 astheelementor state in which the c^/c- 
 puxris shows and reveals itself; comp. 
 notes in loc. It is doubtful whe- 
 
 ther the distinction drawnbyTittmanu 
 {Synon. p. 45) between irapairT., sins 
 rashly ('a nolente facere injuriam'), 
 and afiaprtai, sins designedly com- 
 mitted, can be fully substantiated; 
 both equally referring to 'peccata 
 actualia, ' whether in thought, word, 
 or deed, and differing more in the 
 images ('missing,' 'stumbling') imder 
 which they are presented to our con- 
 ceptions, than in the degree of inten- 
 tion ascribed to the perpetrator ; see 
 Fritz. Eom. v. 15, Vol. i. p. 324, 
 comp. Mailer, Doctr. of Sin, i. i. 2, 
 Vol. I. p. 92 (Clark). Perhaps we 
 may say generally, that jrapairTii/iaTa, 
 as its derivation suggests, is the more 
 limited term, viz. particular, special 
 acts of sin; afiapriat [d fUpos, fieipta, 
 Buttm. Lexil. No. 15, note] the more 
 inclusive and abstract, embracing aU 
 forms, phases, and movements of sin, 
 whether entertained in thought or con- 
 summated in act ; see Trench, Synon. 
 Part II. § 16, and comp. notes on Col. 
 ii. 13. 
 
 1. iv ats] ' in which ; ' not so much 
 with ref. to the prevailing direction 
 (De Wette), as the sphere in which 
 they habitually moved. It does not 
 however seem necessary to press the 
 meaning of irepnra.ruii ('sphere in 
 which they trod^ Eadie), this being 
 one of those words in the N.T. which 
 
 are used with so strong a Hebraistic 
 colouring (see the list, Winer, Gr. § 3, 
 p. 31), that in several passages it 
 denotes little more than 'vivere:' see 
 Fritz. 'Rom. xiii. 12, Vol. iii. p. 141, 
 Suioer, Thesaur. s.v. Vol. 11. p. 679. 
 KoTct TOV aluva, k.t.X.] ^according 
 to the course of this world,' Auth., 
 
 1(71 |li3Xl>)(7l /n .VnXv [mun- 
 
 danitatemmundi hujus] Syr.; the eth- 
 ical meaning of aXw here appy. pre- 
 dominating; seeon oh. i.21. Insuoh 
 cases as the present the meaning seems 
 to approach that of ' tendency, spirit, 
 of the age' (Olsh.), yet stUl not without 
 distinct trace of the regular temporal 
 notion, which, even in those passages 
 where aliiv seems to imply little more 
 than our 'world' (comp. 2 Tim. iv. 10), 
 may stUl be f elt in the idea of the (evil) 
 co«?-se,development, andprogress('ubi 
 ietas mala malam excipit'), that is 
 tacitly associated with the term; see 
 Beng. in Joc.,andcomp. Eeuss, Thiol. 
 Ghret. iv. 20, Vol. 11. p. 228. Any 
 Gnostic reference (Baur, Faulus, p. 
 433), as St Paul's frequent use of the 
 word satisfaotorilyproves, is complete- 
 ly out of the question. Kara tov 
 oipXovTtt K.T.\.] 'according to the 
 prince of the power or empire of the 
 air,' soil, the devil ; climax to the 
 foregoing member, the contrast being 
 Kara Qebv, ch. iv. 24. Without en- 
 tering into the various interpretations 
 these difBoult words have received, we 
 will here only notice briefly, (i) the 
 D 
 
34 
 
 nPOS E*E2IOY2. 
 
 apyovra t?9 e^ovcriai rov aepoi, tov Trvevfiaroi tov vvv 
 
 simple meaning of the ■words ; (2) their 
 grammatical connexion; (3) their pro- 
 bable explanation. (i) The two 
 cardinal words are i^ovffla and drip. 
 The former, like many words in -la 
 (Bemhardy, Synt. i. 2, p. 47), seems 
 to be used, not exactly for ^lowlat, 
 soil, as an abstract implying the con- 
 crete possessors of the i^ov<rla (comp. 
 Dionys. Hal. viii. 44), but as a collec- 
 tive designation of their empire and 
 sovereignty; see esp. Lobeok, Phryn. 
 p. 469. *Ai)p is used thrice by St 
 Paul besides this place, thrice iu the 
 rest of the N.T.; (a) 'the air' simply 
 and generally, Acts xxii. ^s, i Cor. ix. 
 26, xiv. g, and appy. Eev. ix. 2 ; (/3) 
 as 'the air,' probably with strict phy- 
 sical reference, Bev. xvi. 17; (7) as 
 'the air or sky,' appy. tacitly corre- 
 lative to 7^ (the seat of the wepiKei- 
 irbnivot), I Thess. iv. 17. We seem 
 then bound to reject all partial inter- 
 pretations,c.^.(rKOTos(Heiusius,Kuttn. 
 ap. Peile), TrveS/jia (Hofm. Schriftb. 
 Vol, I. p. 403), and to leave the con- 
 text to define the specific meaning and 
 application of the word. (2) The 
 geu. iipos is not a gen. objecti, 'cui 
 potestas est aeris,' Beza; nor qiiali- 
 tatis, scil. i4pios, dcii/iaTos (so Chrys. 
 appy., but not the Gk. Fathers gene- 
 rally), but a gen. of place, denoting 
 their haipiov diarpi§riv (CEcum.), the 
 seat of their spiritual empire ; ovx "' 
 TOV d^poi detrirb^ovTa, dXK tos ctvTtp 
 ilMt>i.\oxi>>po\)VTa • Theoph. : compare 
 Bemhardy, Synt. iii. 33. a, p. 137. 
 (3) The eaipJanotion really turns on the 
 latitude of meaning assigned to a-^p. 
 Without venturing to deny that the 
 word may mysteriously intimate a 
 near propinquity of the spirits of evil, 
 it may still be said that the limitation 
 to the physical atmosphere (Mey.) is 
 as precarious in doctrine, as the refer- 
 
 ence to some ideal 'atmospherebelting 
 a death-world' (Badie), or to 'the com- 
 mon parlance of mankind' (Alf.), is 
 too vague and undefined. The natural 
 explanation seems to be this ; that as 
 ovpavhi is used in a limited and par- 
 tial (Matth. vi. 26), as well as an un- 
 cireumscribed meaning, so conversely 
 dij/), which is commonly confined to 
 the region of the air or atmosphere, 
 may be extended to all that supra- 
 terrestrial but sub-celestial region (d 
 ivovpi.vi.oi ToTTos, Chrys.) which seems 
 to be, if not the abode, yet the haunt 
 of evil spirits; see esp. Job i. 7 LXX, 
 i/iirepnaT'^ffas r^v iif oipav6v : comp. 
 Olsh. in loc, and Stuart, Bibl. Sacra 
 for 1843, p. 139; see also Hagenbaoh, 
 Stud.u.Krit.'Voi.i.-p. 479. Quotations 
 out of Babbinioal writings and Greek 
 philosophers will be found in Wetst. 
 and Harl. in loc, but that St Paul 
 drew his conceptions from the former 
 (Mey.) or the latter (Wetst.) we are 
 slow indeed to believe: see the re- 
 marks on Gal. iv. 24. toii 
 irvEv)i,aT05] 'the spirit;' scil. the evil 
 principle of action, more specially de- 
 fined by the succeeding words. The 
 explanation of this gen. is not easy, 
 as exegesis appears to suggest one 
 construction, grammar another. The 
 most convenient assumption, an ano- 
 maly of case (gen. for acous. in appo- 
 sition to rbv apx- k.t.X., Heinichen, 
 Euseb. Hist. Eccl. v. 20, Vol. 11. p. 
 99), is so doubtful, that it seems best 
 with Winer [Gr. § 67. 3, p. 558) to re- 
 gard the geu. as dependent on tov 
 dpXovTa, and in apposition with i^ov- 
 alas: irvevp.a not referring like ^|oii(r/a 
 to the aggregate of individual vvev/iaTa 
 (iroKTos ivaeplov wev/j.aTos, Theoph. ; 
 comp. Eadie, Alf.), a very doubtful 
 meaning, owing to the difference of 
 termination, but to the evil principle 
 
II. 3. 
 
 35 
 
 evepyoufTOi ev to(S vioii t^? 
 TravTej ave<TTpa(b^fJi,ev irore ev 
 
 wliioh animated the empire, and ema- 
 nated from Satan the ruler of it. 
 There is confessedly an exegetical 
 difSculty in the expression rbv apx. 
 rod TTveifi. : this however may he re- 
 moved, either by supplying a similar 
 hut more appropriate substantive out 
 of Toy dpx-t or (what is in effect the 
 same) by observing that tou weifiaros 
 has a species of objective meaning 
 reflected on it from the words with 
 which it is in apposition. There is 
 probably, as Harless and Meyer sug- 
 gest, a tacit antithesis in toC tit. to 
 the Tlveufia t6 iK tou Geou : comp, i 
 Cor. ii. 12. iKiv is commonly re- 
 
 ferred to the period since the redemp- 
 tion, the time of increased Satanic 
 energy and of hottest strife (De W. ) ; 
 comp. Eev. xii. 12. This however 
 is more than the words seem intended 
 to convey. As wor^, ver. 2, is again 
 repeated in ver. 3, we find the natu- 
 ral antithesis vvv...iroT4 : the Apostle 
 specifying thepresent active existence 
 in one class, the children of disobedi- 
 ence, of the same spirit whidh formerly 
 wrought not only in his readers but 
 in aU : sim. Hammond, and Harless 
 in loc. Tots vtots Tijs 
 
 aireiS.] ' the sons of disobedience ; ' a 
 Hebraistiocircumlocutionnearlyequi- 
 valent to ol ^f direiBelas (comp. Fritz. 
 Eom. ii. 8, Vol. i. p. 105), and serving 
 to mark, more vividly than the adjec- 
 tival construction, the essential and 
 innate disobedience of the subjects, a 
 disobedience to which they belong as 
 children to a parent : comp. ch. v. 6, 
 Col. iii. 6, I Thess. v. 5 (notes), 2 
 Thess. ii. 3 ; and see "Winer, Gr. § 34. 
 3. b, note 2, p. 2 13, and GurUtt, Stud. 
 u. Krit. 1829, p. 728. 'AirMua, as 
 in Col. iii. 6 (see critical note in loc.), 
 is neither 'diffidentia' (Vulg., Clarom., 
 
 aTTfiflem?, ev oh Kat rjnieti 3 
 TOis iiridu/xiaii t?? aapKOS 
 
 'ungalaubeinais, ' Goth. ; comp. JEth.), 
 nordx(£TT;(Chrys.), but 'disobedience' 
 
 (IZoJ-Caj-Sl^ALD ]J J [inobedien- 
 
 tise] Syr., Arm.), whether to the mes- 
 sage of the Gospel or the mandates of 
 the conscience ; — sin, in fact, in its 
 most enhanced form, the violation of 
 the dependence of the creature on the 
 Creator : see Miiller, Doctr. of Sin, i. 
 I. 2, Vol. I. p. 91 (Clark). 
 
 3. Iv ots] 'among whom,' Auth., 
 scil. tSv Kdl airol 6vT€s, Buck. ; not 
 iv ots sc. irapa.irTii/ji.iKrai' (Syr., Jer.), 
 in which case ver. 2 would illustrate 
 the i/xapT., ver. 3 the irapawr. The 
 parallelism (iv ah... iv oTs) is a specious 
 argument for such a reference (see 
 Stier in loc, p. 252) ; still, gramma- 
 tical perspicuity, the studied change 
 to dveffrpdiprifiev, and even more the 
 very general nature of the distinction 
 between irapairTiiimTa and duaprlai, 
 axe seriously opposed to it : comp. 2 
 Cor. i. 12, where avearp. is similarly 
 used with a double iv, the first here 
 (semi-local) referring to the surround- 
 ing objects, I Tim. iii. 15 ; the second 
 (ethical) to the element in which they 
 moved, 2 Pet. ii. 18. koV ■!\f.ivs 
 
 irdvTes] 'even we all;' Jews and Gen- 
 tiles, not Jews alone (Mey.). As ip.eh 
 (ver. 1, 2) denotes the Gentile world, 
 so it might be argued iiixm would 
 seem naturally to refer to the Jews. 
 To this however the addition of wdpres 
 presents an insuperable objection, as 
 being almost obviously designed to 
 preclude any such limitation, and to 
 expand to both classes the reference 
 {(TvnTdTTei Koi eaxirbv, Theod.) : we 
 all, both called and reclaimed Jews 
 and converted Gentiles, were once 
 members of that fearful company, the 
 vld TTji direieelas : comp. Alf. in loc. 
 D 2 
 
86 
 
 nPOS, E$E2I0YS. 
 
 ^fxu>v,voiovi/Tei Ta 6e\ij/jiaTa rtji aapKOS Kai ruiv oiavoiuiv, 
 4 Koi rifiev TeKva (huarei opyrj?, iis Ka\ oi Xonrol' 6 oe Oeoy, 
 
 ri 6e\i]|j.aTa ttjs o-opKos] 'ifte [various) 
 desires of the flesh. ' The plural is not 
 elsewhere found in the N.T. (Acts 
 xiii. 22 is a quotation), though not 
 unusual in the LXX ; Psalm oxi. i, 2 
 Chron. ix. 12, Isaiah xliv. 28, Iviii. 13, 
 al. It here probably denotes the va- 
 rious exhibitions and manifestations 
 of the win, and is thus symmetrical 
 with, but a fuller expansion of 4m6ii- 
 /ilcus. On the true meaning of o-opj, 
 'the life and movement of man in the 
 things of the world of sense,' see Miil- 
 ler, Doctr. of Sin, 11. i, Vol. i. p. J52 
 sq., and esp. notes on Gal. v. 16. 
 Tcov Siavoiiov] 'of the thoughts,' seU. 
 'of the evil thoughts' (eomp. SiaXo- 
 yicriiol irovTipol, Matth. xv. 19); the 
 ethical meaning however not beiug 
 due to the plural ('die sohwaukenden 
 wechselnden Meinungen,'Harl.), but, 
 as Mey. justly observes, to the con- 
 text ; eomp. rh Stavo-^fmTa, Luke xi, 
 17. It is added, not to strengthen the 
 meaning of o-a/jf (Holzh.), but to in- 
 clude both sources whence our evil 
 desires emanate, the worldly sensual 
 tendency of our life on the one hand, 
 and the spiritual sins of our thoughts 
 and intentions on the other: so Theod. 
 in loc, except that he too much limits 
 the meaning of trapf. Onthemeaniug 
 of SLoyoiai, as usually marking the 
 motions of the thoughts and will on 
 the side of their outward manifesta- 
 tions, see Beck, Seelenl. 11. 19, p. 58. 
 Ktti tj|iev] 'and we were;' with great 
 definiteness as to the relation of time, 
 the change of construction from the 
 {present) part, to the oratio directa 
 being intended to give emphasis to 
 the weighty clause which follows (see 
 notes, ch. i. 20), and also to disoou- 
 neot it from any possible relation to 
 the present; 'we were children of 
 
 wrath by nature, — it was once our 
 state and condition, it is now so no 
 longer.' T^Kva ^vira opYTJs] 
 
 ^children by nature — of wrath.' This 
 important clause can only be properly 
 investigated by noticing separately (i) 
 the simple meaning of the words ; (2) 
 their grammatical connexion; (3) their 
 probable dogmatical application. 
 (i) We begin with (a) riKi/a, which is 
 not simply identical with the Hebra- 
 istic ii!o£, ver. -.:, but, as Bengel felt, 
 is obviously more significant and sug- 
 gestive ; see Steiger on 1 Pet. i. 14. 
 The word arouses the attention ; 'we 
 were riicva,' — that bespeaks a near 
 and close relation; — but of what? Of 
 God? No, — 'of wrath;' its actual 
 and definite objects : see Stier in loc. 
 p. 256, and eomp. Hofiu. Schriftb. 
 Vol. I. p. 497. (6) 'Opyri has its pro- 
 per meaning, and denotes, not n/iapia 
 or K6\a.ffis itself (Suicer, Thesaur. s.v. 
 Vol. II. p. 505), but the moving prin- 
 ciple of it, God's holy hatred of sin, 
 which reveals itself ia His punitive 
 justice ; eomp. Rom. i. 18. (c) The 
 meaning of ipvfrei has been much con- 
 tested. The general distinction of 
 Waterlaud [Second Defence, Qu. xxiv. 
 VoL II. p. 723) seems perfectly satis- 
 factory, that 0uffet in Scripture relates 
 to something inherent, innate, fixed, 
 and implanted from the first, and is in 
 opposition to something aooessional, 
 superinduced, and accidental ; or, as 
 Harl. more briefly expresses it, 'das 
 Gewordene im Gegensatz zum Ge- 
 maohten :' eomp. Thorndike, Covenant 
 of Grace, ii. 10, Vol. 111. p. 170 (A.-C. 
 Libr. ). The more exact meaning must 
 be determined by the context : eomp. 
 Gal. ii. 15, Eom. ii. 14, Gal. iv. 8, 
 where 0u(7-ei respectively means, (a) 
 transmitted, inborn nature; (|8) inhe- 
 
II. 4, 5. 
 
 37 
 
 TrXoi/ffJoy o)v ev eXeet, eta rrjv TroXXtjv aya.vijv avrov 
 t}v fiyairtiarev rif).ai, Koi ovrag ^jway veKpovi tois -jrapa- 5 
 
 rent nature; (7) essential nature. The 
 connexion must here guide us. (2) 
 Connexion. Haei is to be joined with 
 riKva, not (ipy^s (Holzh., Hofm. 
 Schriftb. Vol. i. p. 497), and defines 
 the aspect under which the predicate 
 shows itself (see Madvig, Synt. § 40) ; 
 the unusual order [with BKX : ADE 
 FGL reverse it but appy. by way of 
 emendation] appearing to have arisen 
 from a limitation of a judgment which 
 St Paul was about to express unlimit- 
 edly : the Jews were the covenant 
 people of God; Jews and Gentiles 
 {rinas) could not then equally and 
 unrestrictedly be called riiaia. dpy^s : 
 see Miiller, Doctr. of Sin, iv. 2, Vol. 
 II. p. 306. (3) The doctrinal reference 
 turns on the meaning of <pv(rei. This 
 the limiting connexion seems to show 
 ■must imply what is innate ; for if it 
 implied 'habitual or developed cha- 
 racter' (e.g. ^lian, Var. Sist. ix. i, 
 0v(rei (piXapyvpos : see exx. in Wetst., 
 and comp. Pritz. Bom. Vol. i. p. 1 16), 
 there would be little need of the limi- 
 tation, and little meaning in the as- 
 sumed contrast to 'fiUi adoptione,' 
 Estius ap. Poll Syn. This is further 
 confirmed by the tense (see above) and 
 the argument 'ex simUi' in ils xal ol 
 \omoi (riaav), for it must have been 
 some universal state to have applied 
 to all the rest of manMnd. Still it 
 must fairly be said that the unem- 
 phatic position of 0i)<r« renders it 
 doubtful whether there is any special 
 contrast to x«/""> o"^ *^y direct asser- 
 tion of the doctrine of Original Sin ; 
 but that the clause contains an in- 
 direet, and therefore even more con- 
 vincing assertion of that profound 
 truth, it seems impossible to deny. 
 The very long but instructive note of 
 Harless in loc. may be consulted with 
 
 profit. 
 
 4. 6 S^ 0«6s] 'hut God.' Ee- 
 sumption of ver. i after the two rela- 
 tival sentences, h ah ver. a, and iv 
 oXs ver. 3 ; Si being correctly used 
 rather than oiv, as the resumption 
 also involves a contrast to the pre- 
 ceding verse. The declaration of the 
 ?\eos of God forms an assuring and 
 consoling antithesis to the foregoing 
 statement that by nature all were 
 the subjects of His 6py!i. On the use 
 of Si after a parenthesis, see Klotz, 
 Devar. Vol. 11. p. 377, Hartung, Tar- 
 tile. Si, 3. 2, Vol. I. p. 173 : the use of 
 ' autem ' in Latin is exactly similar, 
 see esp. Hand, Tursell. s.v. § 9, Vol. 
 I. p. 569 ; Beza's correction of the 
 ' autem ' of the Vulg. to ' sed ' is there- 
 fore not necessary. 
 irXovo-ios <Sv K.T.X.] 'heing rich in 
 mercy,' scarcely 'ut qui dives sit,' 
 Beza (comp. Madvig, Lat. Gramm. 
 § 366. 1), as the participial clause 
 does not here so much assign the 
 reason, as characterize (in the form of 
 a secondary predicate of time, ' being 
 as He is ;' comp. Donalds. Or. § 442. 
 a) the general principle under which 
 the divine compassion was exhibited. 
 The ■oioxs particular motive (De W.) 
 is stated in the succeeding clause. 
 The expression TrXoucrios iv [oix airXfis 
 iXeVfiav, Chrys.) occurs James ii. 5, 
 and points to the object or sphere in 
 which the richness is apparent ; comp. 
 I Cor. i. 5. On the distinction be- 
 tween ?Xeos and oUTipfids, the former 
 being more generic, the latter more 
 specific and stronger, see Fritz. Eoni. 
 ix. 15, Vol. n. p. 315. ■^v 
 
 iJYdirrio-ev '/\\i'S,s] 'wherewith He loved 
 us;' cognate aocus., serving to add 
 force and emphasis to the meaning 
 of the verb; see exx. in Winer, Gr. 
 
38 
 
 nP02 E$E2IOYS. 
 
 iTTUifiacnv crvve^woTTolija'ev riS Hpia-TcS (^■)(apiTi ecrre 
 6 erearcocrfjLevoi), koc a-wi^yeipeu, Ka) crvveKaQiaev ev rots 
 
 % 32. 2, p. 200, and in Donalds. Gr. 
 § 466. The pronoun rj/jias obviously 
 includes both Jewish and Gentile 
 Christians, and is co-extensive with 
 ^fjLEii irdpTes, ver. 3. 
 
 5 . Kal cfvTos ■^ |J.as viKp.]' even while 
 we were dead;' Kal not being otiose 
 (oomp. Syr., Mth.), nor the simple 
 copula (Mey.), nor a mere repetition of 
 Kal from ver. i, but qualifying Svras 
 (Syr. -Phil.), and suggesting more for- 
 cibly than in ver. i (where it quali- 
 fies ifias) the might of the quickening 
 power of God which extended even to 
 a state of moral death. Kal veKpois 
 K.T.\. would certainly seem a more 
 natural order (Fritz. Conject. inN.T., 
 p. 45 ; comp. Chrys. nis veKpois . . . 
 Toirovs ij^aoT.), but as St Paul seems 
 to wish to make their state of death, 
 its permanence and its endurance, 
 more felt than the mere fact of it, the 
 ascensive particle is joined with the 
 participle rather than with the pre- 
 dicate ; see Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. 
 p. 638. (ruvE^(iioiroCT]o-ev 
 
 T(J Xp.] 'He together quickened with 
 Christ,' not 'in Christ,' Copt., Arm., 
 Vulg., perhaps following the reading 
 ffwff. if, B ; 17, al.; but 'with Christ,' 
 
 W 1 aV* i^li Syr., al.; i^uo- 
 
 ■^ r 
 
 irolr]<re KiKciyov Kal 17/tas' Chrys. The 
 previous statement of the spiritual 
 nature of their death, and the similar 
 (but, owing to the mention of baptism, 
 not wholly parallel) passage. Col. U. 1 3, 
 seem to show that awe^. has reference 
 to spiritual life, the life of grace. It 
 is thus not necessary to consider the 
 realization as future (Theod.), nor 
 even with Theoph. (ijjuos Swdfjiei pvy, 
 /icr' iXlyov Si Kal ivepyelf) to limit 
 the present degree of it: the aorist 
 has its proper and characteristic force; 
 
 what God wrought in Christ He 
 wrought 'ipso facto' in aU who are 
 united with Him. Meyer aptly cites 
 Fritz. Bom. Vol. 11. p. 206, 'ponitur 
 aoristus de re, quae quamvis futurasit, 
 tamen pro peracta recte censeatur 
 . . . cum alii re jam facta continea- 
 tur.' It is then just possible that 
 o-uvef. matj include also a future and 
 physical reference (Rom. viii. 10, 11, 
 see notes ver. 6), but that its primary 
 reference is to an actually existent 
 and spiritual state, it seems very diffi- 
 cult to deny. xdLpirC 
 lirre irtirairfUvoi] 'by grace ye have 
 been {and are) saved;' see notes on 
 ver. 8. This emphatic mention of 
 grace (grace, not works) is to make 
 the readers feel what their own hearts 
 might otherwise have caused them to 
 doubt, — the real and vital truth, that 
 they have present and actual fellow- 
 ship with Christ in the quickening, 
 yea and even in the resurrectionary 
 and glorifying power of God ; see esp. 
 Origen (Cram. Oaten.), and comp. 
 Bp. Hall, Christ Mystical, oh. v. i, 
 ad init. 
 
 6. imviJ7cipEV . . . cn)v«K<£9iir£v] 
 'He raised its with (Him), He en- 
 throned us with {Him).' The simple 
 meaning of these verbs, and esp. of 
 the latter, seems to confine the refer- 
 ence to what is future and objective. 
 Still, as avpejyiOTolrjtrev, though pri- 
 marily spiritual and present, may have 
 a physical and future reference, — so 
 here conversely, a present spiritual 
 resurrection and enthronement may 
 also be alluded to; as Andrewes truly 
 says, ' even now we sit there in Him, 
 and shaU sit with Him in the end ; ' 
 Serm. vii. Vol. i. p. 115 (A.-C. Libr.). 
 This may be referred (a) to the close 
 nature of our union with Christ, so 
 
11. 6, 7. 
 
 39 
 
 eirovpavioti ei'XjotffToI'IijoroUjti'a ivSei^ijTai ev tojj aiSixriv J 
 Toig evep^^ofiivoti to {nrep^aWov •vrXouro? t^? j^ojOitoJ 
 
 that His lesurreotion and exaltation 
 may be said to be actually ours in 
 Him (ice^aXJ) yi,p ij/uuv 6 <rweSpeia», 
 avapx^ rinav 6 (rv/tfianXeiav Theod.); 
 or more simply, (6) to that divine 
 efficacy of the quickening power of 
 God -which extends itself to issues 
 spiritually indeed present (Phil. iii. 
 20, Eev. i. 6), but strictly speaking 
 future and contingent : compare esp. 
 Bom. viii. 30, where the aorists are 
 used with equal significance and ef- 
 fect, iv Tots lirovpavCois] 
 'f» the heaienJy places;' see notes on 
 ch. i. 3, 20. Bengel has noticed how 
 appropriately St Paul omits the spe- 
 cific iv ScfiJ of ch. i. 20; 'non dicit 
 1)1 dextrd; Christo sua manet excel- 
 lentia:' comp. Est. in loc. 
 4v Xp. 'Iijiroii must not be connected 
 simply with iv tois iwovp. (Peile, 
 Eadie), but with <rwi^cipev and irvve- 
 KiBurev iv tois iirovp.: comp. ch. i. 3. 
 At first sight the clause might seem 
 superfluous, but, when more attentive- 
 ly considered, it wiU be found to define 
 the deep mystical nature of the union: 
 God TJyeipEV, iKd$urev, ■^/iSs, not only 
 iriv Xp., but iv Xp.: not only with 
 Christ by virtue of our fellowship, but 
 ire Christ by virtue of our mystical, 
 central, and organic union with Him. 
 On the nature of this union, see 
 Hooker, Serm. in. Vol. iii. p. 762 (ed. 
 Keble),Ebrard,I>o(?7natii,§445,Vol.ii. 
 p. 323, Martensen, Dogmatik, § 1 76.obs. 
 7. tvo 4v8££fqTai] 'in order that 
 He might show forth;' divine purpose 
 of the gracious acts specified in ver. 
 5, 6. The middle voice ivSel^curdai 
 is not used (either here or Bom. ii. 
 IS, ix. 17, 22, i Cor. viii. 24) with 
 any reference to 'a sample or spe- 
 cimen of what belonged to Him' 
 (Buck., Eadie), but either simply 
 
 implies 'for Himself, i.e. for His 
 glory' (comp. Jelf, ffr. § 363. i), 'let 
 be seen' (Peile); or, still more pro- 
 bably, is used with only that general 
 subjective reference, ' show forth his, 
 &c.' (the 'dynamic' middle of Eruger, 
 Sprachl. § 52. 8. 5; see Kuster de 
 Verb. Med. § 58, and exx. ia Eost u. 
 Palm, Lex. s.v.), which, owing to the 
 following airrov, can hardly be re- 
 tained in translation. The word oc- 
 curs eleven times in the N. T. (only 
 in St Paul's Epp. and Heb.), always 
 in the middle voice. In fact, as 
 Selrniu is but rarely used in the 
 middle voice, though in a few formulsB 
 (see Ast, Lex. Flat, s.v.) it involves a 
 middle sense ; so ivSEUvvfiai, which is 
 not common in the act. except in 
 legal forms, may in the middle in- 
 volve little more than an active mean- 
 ing; comp. Donalds. Gr. % 434, p. 
 447, Iv rols alwo-iv rots 
 
 eirepX.] 'in the ages which are coming.' 
 These words have been unduly limited. 
 Any special references to the then 
 present and immediately coming age 
 ('per omne vestrum tempus,' Mor.), 
 or to the stiU future kingdom of 
 Christ, the alOiv 6 /iiWav, ch. i. 21 
 (Harl. , Olsh.), seem precluded respec- 
 tively by the use of the plural and 
 the appended pres. part, inepxa/i. The 
 most simple meaning appears to be 
 'the successively arriving ages and 
 generations from that time to the 
 second coming of Christ,' 'tempora 
 iade ab apostolicis illis ad finem 
 mundi secutura:' Wolf. Such expres- 
 sions as the present deserve especial 
 notice, as they incidentally prove how 
 very ill-founded is the popular opinion 
 adopted by Meyer and others, that 
 St Paul believed the Advent of the 
 Lord to be close at hand; see on i 
 
40 
 
 nPOS E*E2I0Y2. 
 
 8 avTOv ev vpijcrTOTtiTt i(p^ ^fJi.as iv Xpt<rT(f 'Iri(rov. r^ 
 yap vapiTi eVre o'eaaxTfj.evoi Sta Tr/o-recoy' Kai tovto ovk 
 
 8. 5ii via-reuis] So Lachm. witli BD^FGK; 4 mss.; Ghrys., aJ. In ed. i, 2, 
 the reading adopted was dii, ttjs iriarews with AD'BKL: nearly all mss.; 
 Theod., Dam., al. (Tisch.); now however the addition of N seems in the pre- 
 sent case sufficient just to turn the critical balance. 
 
 Tftess. iv. 15. t6 weppdWov 
 
 itXoJtos] ' the exceeding riches;' an 
 especially and studiedly strong ex- 
 pression designed to mark the 'satis 
 Buperque' of God's grace in our re- 
 demption by Christ; oomp. ch. iii. 
 20, I Tim. i. 14, and see Andrewes, 
 Serm. 1. Vol. 11. p. 197 (A.-C. Libr.). 
 The neuter tXoStos is adopted with 
 ABD'FGN^ (Ki omits the verse); 17 
 67**; Orig. {i),a,n6.hj Lachm.,!risch., 
 and most recent editors. 
 Iv \p'<i\<rr6'nYri, l<|>' ■l[[Las Iv Xp. 'Iio-.] 
 'in goodness towards us in Christ Je- 
 sus;' a single compound modal clause 
 appended to IvSd^. : iv xp- ^0' W- being 
 closely connected (comp. Luke vi. 35 ; 
 the art. is not necessary, see notes on 
 ch. i. 16), and defining accurately the 
 manner in which God displays ' the 
 riches of His grace,' while iv X. 'I. 
 ('in,' not 'through Christ Jesus,' 
 Auth.; see Winer, Gr. § 48. a, p. 347, 
 note 3) specifies, as it were, the ever- 
 blessed sphere to which it^ manifes- 
 tations are confined, and in which 
 alone its operations are felt. Well do 
 Calvin and Stier call attention to this 
 ' notanda repetitio nominis Christi' 
 contrast the melancholy want of ap- 
 preciation of this in De W. ), and the 
 reiteration of that eternal truth which 
 pervades this divine epistle, — 'nur 
 in Christo Jesu das alles, und anders 
 nicht,' Stier, p. 273 ; see notes on 
 oh. i. 3. On the meaning of 
 
 XpijiTTiTijs see notes on Gal. v. 22. 
 
 8. T^yap\dp<.T\,]'For by grace;' 
 confirmatory explanation of the truth 
 and justice of the expression to iwepp. 
 
 K. T. X.lby a recurrence to the statement 
 made parenthetically in ver. 5. The 
 article is thus not added merely be- 
 cause x'^pi-^ 'expresses an idea which 
 is familiar, distinctive, and monadic 
 in its nature' (Eadie), but because 
 there is a retrospective reference to 
 XopiTi in ver. 5, where the noun, being 
 used adverbially, is properly anar- 
 throus : see Middleton, GreeTc Art. v. 
 ■i, p. 96 (ed. Eose). It may be ob- 
 served that the emphasis rests on tj 
 X^pi-Ti; the further member Sia. wl- 
 o-Tewsbeing added to define theweighty 
 ecTTe (TCffufffiivoi. x"^/"' ^3 the objec- 
 tive, operating, and ins trumental cause 
 of salvation; ir/cms the subjective 
 medium by which it is received, the 
 causa apprehendens, or to use the lan- 
 guage of Hooker, 'the hand which 
 putteth on Christ to justification,' 
 Serm. 11. 31 ; comp. Waterland, Justif. 
 Vol. VI. p. 22, and a good sermon by 
 Sherlock, Vol. i. p. 323 sq. (ed. Oxf.). 
 (<m <ror(i>(r|i,lvoi] 'ye have been {and 
 are) saved.' It is highly improper to 
 attempt to dilute either the normal 
 meaning of the verb ('salvum faoio,' 
 'ad etemam vitam perduco,' see 
 Suicer, Thesaur. s.v.) or the proper 
 force of the tense. The perfect indi- 
 cates 'actionem plane prseteritam, 
 quffl aut nunc ipsum seu modo finita 
 est, aut per effectm suos durat' (Poppo, 
 Progr. de emend. Matth. Gramm. p. 
 6); and in short serves to connect 
 the past and the present, while the 
 aorist leaves such a connexion wholly 
 unnoticed; see esp. Sohmalfeld, Synt. 
 § 56, and oomp. Soheuerl. Synt. § 32. 
 
II. 8, 9, 10. 
 
 41 
 
 e^ vfiSiv, GeoO to Swpov ovk e^ epymv, 'Iva /j.^ tis kov- 9 
 T^iJcrijTai* avTOv yap icrnev iroDjfAa, KTicrOevTei ivl^piarTM 10 
 
 5, p. 342. Thus tlieu l(tTk ireauan. 
 denotes a present state as well as a 
 terminated action; for, as Eadie 
 justly observes, 'Salvation is a pre- 
 sent blessing, though it may not be 
 fully realized.' On the other hand, 
 i(rii8iiiiev (Bom. viii. 24) is not iv toTs 
 (rato/iiiiois iff/ihi (Peile), but simply 
 'we were saved,' the context iXirldi. 
 supplying the necessary explanation. 
 810L irCoTews] 'through faith;' sub- 
 jective medium and condition; see 
 above, and comp. Hammond, Pract. 
 Catech. p. 42 (A.-C. Libr.). It is not 
 necessary to adopt here the modifica- 
 tion suggested by Bull: ' per fidem hie 
 intelliglt obedientiam evangelio prte- 
 siitam, cujus fides specialiter sic dicta 
 non tantum initinm est sed et radix 
 et fundamentum,' Harm. Apost. 1. 1 2. 
 8. The contrast with i^ Ipyuv, and 
 connexion with x"*/""! seem to show 
 that irUrns is 'reliance on the divine 
 grace' (Waterland, Jvstif. Vol. vi. 
 p. 37), 'the living capacity,' as it is 
 termed by Olsh., 'for receiving the 
 powers of a higher world;' xop" being 
 thus identical with imparting^ jrlaris 
 with receiving love; see Olshaus. on 
 Bom. iii. 2 1 , and comp. Usteri, Lehrb. 
 II. 1. i, p. 151. 
 
 Kol toSto] 'and this,' so. to o-etrdxr^. 
 etvai (Theoph. 2), not 'nempe hoc 
 quod oredidistis,' Bull, loc. cit., with 
 Chiys., Theod., Theoph. i, aL, see 
 Suicer, Thesaur. VoL u. p. 728. 
 Grammatically considered, xal toOto 
 ( = Koi raOra, Bost u. Palm, Lex. s.v. 
 ovros, Vol. II. p. 599) might be referred 
 to a verbal notion (to iriffreiJeiv) de- 
 rived from irUrns, but the logical diffi- 
 culty of such a connexion with i^ 
 Ipywp (parallel and explanatory to 
 i^ vfuiv) seems insuperable. Still it 
 may be said that the clause koX tovto 
 
 K.T.}i. was suggested by the mention 
 of the subjective medium ttIo-tis, 
 which might be thought to imply some 
 independent action on the part of the 
 subject (comp. Theod.): to prevent 
 even this supposition, the Apostle has 
 recourse to language stUl more rigor- 
 ously exclusive. ©coO to 
 Supov] 'of God is the gift,' scil. Geou 
 S&pov TO S&pov iffH: the gen. Qeov, 
 emphatic on account of the antithesis 
 to viiiSr, being thus the predicate ; to 
 d&pov (' the peculiar gift in question,' 
 TO <re<ru}<rii. etvai 8i4 ttjs ttUtt.) the 
 subject of the clause : see Euckert in 
 loc. Harl., Lachm., and De W. in- 
 close these words in a parenthesis, but 
 certainly without reason: the slight 
 want of connexion seems designed to 
 add force and emphasis. 
 
 9. OVK e| ipyav] 'ru>t of works;' 
 more exact explanation of the pre- 
 ceding oiK ^1 v/iSp, and thus standing 
 more naturally in connexion with Kal 
 Tovro than with to Sdpov [^o-W] (Mey.). 
 The sense however in either case is 
 the same. The grammatical meaning 
 of i^ Ipiwv is investigated in notes on 
 Gal. ii. 16; its doctrinal applications 
 are noticed by Neander, Planting, 
 Vol. I. p. 419 (Bohn). ivo. f,r[ tis 
 
 KovX'] 'that no man should boast;' 
 purpose of God, involved in and in- 
 cluded in the 'lex suprema' aUuded 
 to in the foregoing ovk i^ Ipyav, 
 comp. Bom. iii. 27. The repression 
 of boasting was not the primary and 
 special object of God's appointment of 
 salvation by grace through faith 
 (comp. Maokn.), stiUless was it merely 
 the remit (PeUe), but was a purpose 
 ifva eiyvd/iovas irepl rip/ xApi.v iroiiff-g, 
 Chrys.) that was necessarily insepa- 
 rable from His gracious plan of man's 
 salvation. On the force and use of 
 
42 
 
 riP02 E*E2I0Y2. 
 
 'li]<rov eirl epyon ayaOoh, oh Trpotjrolfiaa'ev 6 Qeoi ha 
 if avToh TrepnraT>]cru)/xev, 
 
 foa, see notea on oh. i. 17. 
 
 10. ovToB 7ap K.T.X.] 'for we are 
 His handiwork,' 'ipsius enim sumus 
 faotura,' Vulg.; proof of tlie fore- 
 going sentences Kal TovTo...SSipov and 
 oiK i^ Ipyay; the emphatic airov 
 pointing to the positive statement that 
 the gift of salvation comes from God, 
 and the assertion of our being His 
 (spiritual) volyiiia to the negative 
 statement that salvation is not i^ 
 vfiCiv, or as further explained, oiK i^ 
 ipyuv. If we are God''s iroliiiia., our 
 salvation, our all, must be due to Him 
 (comp. Bramhall, Castig. Tol. iv. ■233, 
 A.-C. Libr.) : if we are a spiritual 
 irotrjfia {Trjv dvay^vvTjcrti' hravBa al- 
 plTTerai, Chrys.), spiritually formed 
 and designed for good works, our sal- 
 vation can never be i^ Ipyav (whether 
 of the natural, moral, or ritual law) 
 which preceded that avaKruris: see 
 Neander, Planting, Vol. i. p. 476 
 note (ed. Bohn). KTio-S^vres 
 
 ,lv Xp. 'Irio".] 'created in Christ Jesus;' 
 defining clause, explaining the true 
 appKoation and meaning of the pre- 
 ceding TTolriiia: compare ver. 15, and 
 the expression Kaivri ktIctis, 2 Cor. v. 
 17, Gal. vi. 15, with notes i«ioe. That 
 the reference of trol-qixa is not to the 
 physical, and that of ktmB. to the 
 spiritual creation ('quantum ad sub- 
 stantiam fecit, quantum ad gratiam 
 oondidit,' TertuU. Marc. v. 17), but 
 that hoth refer to the spiritual 
 imKTLns, not only appears from the 
 context, but is asserted by the best 
 ancient (oil (fori tiJ? irpiTifv "Kiyei 
 Sr)li,i.ovpylav, iXKi, Kark ttjv Sevripav, 
 Theod., comp. CEcum.), and accepted 
 by the best modern commentators; 
 still it does not seem improbable that 
 the more general and inclusive word 
 Tolrjiia was designed to niggest the 
 
 analogy (Harl.) between the physical 
 creation and the spiritual re-oreation 
 of man. For a sound sermon on this 
 text see Beveridge, Serm. iv. Vol. 11. 
 p. 417 sq. (A.-C. Libr.). 
 eirl ^pYois dvaflots] 'for good works,' 
 i.e. 'to do good works;' itrl denoting 
 the object or purpose for which they 
 were created: see Winer, Gr. § 48. c, 
 p. 351, notes on Gal. v. 13, i Thess. 
 iv. 7, and exx. in Eaphel, Annot. Vol. 
 n. p. S46. On the doctrinal an4 
 practical aspects of the clause, see 
 Beveridge, Serm. iv. Vol. 11. p. 418. 
 ots irpoTiToC(io<r«v] 'which God afore 
 
 prepared,' «*^ 1 (j ^ 1, D ^^> 
 
 [ab initio paravit] Syr., ' prius paravit,' 
 Copt., ^th., 'praeparavit,' Vulg., Cla- 
 rom. The construction, meaning, and 
 doctrinal significance of these words, 
 have been much discussed. We may 
 remark briefly, (i) that owing to the 
 absence of the usual accus. after 
 irporiTol/i.. (Isaiah xxviii. 24, Wisdom 
 ix. 8, Kom. ix. 23), oh caimot be 'the 
 dative of the object,' 'for which God 
 hath from the first provided,' Peile, 
 but is simply (by the usual attraction) 
 for o : see Winer, Gi: § 24. 1, p. 147, 
 and § 22. 4. obs. p. 135. So Vulg., 
 Syr., Copt., al., and the majority of 
 commentators. (2) lipoTirol^. 
 
 is not neuter (Beng., Stier): the simple 
 verb is so used, Luke ix. 52, 2 Chron. 
 i. 4 (?), but there is no evidence of a 
 similar use of the compound. Nor is 
 it equivalent (in regard to thiugs) with 
 irpoopiiiii (in regard to persons), Harl., 
 a paraphrastic translation rightly con- 
 demned by Fritz. Horn. ix. 23, Vol. 
 II. p. 339, 'aUud est enim parare hoi.- 
 fia^ei-v [to make Srot/io, ft-o, see Eost 
 u. Palm..ica;. s.v. #toi/*os], aliud de- 
 finire bpl^ew' Lastly, neither here 
 
II. II, 12. 
 
 43 
 
 Aio ixvrifioveiere on Trore v[j.eii tu 1 1 
 eQvri ev uapKi, ol \eyofievoi aKpo^varla 
 VTTO Tiji Xeyofievrji; TreptTOfxiji ev ffapKi ■^eipoTroirjTOV, oti 12 
 
 Bemember that ye 
 'were once aliens, 
 but have now been 
 brought nigh. 
 
 nor Eom. I.e. must the force of wpo be 
 neglected: compare Philo, de Of if. 
 § 2S> Vol. I. P- i8 (ed. Mang.), us 
 olKeL0T6,T({j . . . t^djifi TcLif K6(rfi{{} Trdvra 
 TporjToL/idffaTo, rightly translated by 
 Fritz., 'ante paravit quam conde- 
 ret.' (3) Thus then we adhere to 
 the simplest meaning of the words, 
 iising the latter part of the clause to 
 explain any ambiguity of expression 
 in the former : ' God, before we were 
 created in Christ, made ready for us, 
 pre-arranged, prepared, a sphere of 
 moral action, or (to use the simile of 
 Chrys.) a road, with the intent that 
 we should walk in it, and not leave it; 
 this sphere, this road, was Ipya AyaOd : 
 comp. Beveridge, Serm. I.e. p. 428. On 
 the important doctrinal statement 
 fairly deducible from this text, — 'bona 
 opera sequuntur hominem justifica- 
 tum non prascedunt in homine justifi- 
 cando,' see Jackson, Greed, xi. 30. 6. 
 II. Ai(5] 'Wherefore,' since God 
 has vouchsafed such blessings to you 
 and to all of us ; not in exclusive re- 
 ference to ver. 10, 8ti ixTia-Brj/iev iir 
 Ipyois d-yaffofs, Chiys., nor alone to 
 ver. 4 — 10 (Mey.), but, as the use of 
 ifieh (comp. ver. i) suggests, to the 
 whole, or rather to the declaratory 
 portion of the foregoing paragraph, 
 ver. I — 7 ; ver. 8 — 10 being an argu- 
 mentative and explanatory addition. 
 On St Paul's use of Sio, comp. notes 
 on Gal. iv. 31. The construction, 
 which is not perfectly clear, is com- 
 monly explained by the introduction 
 of ovres before ri SBi/rj (Fuld.), or ^re 
 before (Syr.) or after (Goth.) iv a-apd. 
 This is not hecessary: the position of 
 iroT^ (as rightly maintained by 
 Laehm., Tascft., with ABPiENi; Cla- 
 rom., Sangerm., Aug., Vulg., al.) 
 
 seems to suggest that rd ISvt) k.t.X. 
 is simply in apposition to i/neTs. "On 
 and xorjare then respeotivelyresumed 
 by 8ti and rip fcaip^ iselpifi in ver. 12 ; 
 see Meyer in loc. xd 'i9vr\ Iv 
 
 o-apKC] ' Gentiles in the flesh.' On the 
 correct insertion of the article before 
 IBv-q (to denote class, category), see 
 Middl. Gr. Art. iii. 2. 1, p. 40 (Bose); 
 and on its equally correct omission 
 before iv (rd Wv. iv a. forming only 
 one idea), see Winer, Gr. % 30. 2. p. 
 123, notes ch. i. 15, and Fritz. Rom. 
 iii. 25, Vol. I. p. 195. ''Elv o-apd is 
 riot in reference 'to their natural 
 descent ' (Hamm.), nor to their cor- 
 rupted state (ouK ivirveifian, Theoph., 
 '.unregenerate Gentiles,' Peile; comp. 
 Syr.), but, as the use of thewordbelow 
 distinctly suggests, to the corporeal 
 mark; 'prseputium profani hominis 
 indicium erat ; ' Calv. . They bore the 
 proof of their GentOism in their flesh 
 and on their bodies. 01 \EY6)i.6vai 
 aKpoPvcrrCa k.t.X.] 'who are called 
 contemptuously the Uneireumcision 
 6y the so-called Circumcision. ' Both 
 d/cpojS. and xe/jir. are used as the dis- 
 tinctive names or titles of the two 
 classes, Gentiles and Jews. On the 
 omission of the art. before aKpo^var. 
 (a verb 'vocandi ' having preceded), 
 see Middl. Gr. Art. iii. 3. 2, p. 43 
 (Eose) ; and on the derivation of the 
 word (an Alexandrian corruption of 
 aKpoTTo<r0ia), Fritz. Rom. ii. 26, Vol. i. 
 p. 1 36. Iv o-apKl XEipo- 
 
 iroiTJTov] 'wrought Tn) hand in the 
 flesh,' 'et est opus manuum in came,' 
 Syr. ; a tertiary predication (see Do- 
 nalds. Gr. § 489 sq., and observe the 
 idiomatically exact transl. of Syr.), 
 added by the" Apostle reflectively 
 rather than descriptively: 'the cir- 
 
44 
 
 nPOS E*E2I0Y2. 
 
 jjre T(p Kaipw eKcifw ■)(a)ph XpicrTov, aTrtiWoTpiooftevoi 
 
 oumoision, — yea, hand- wrought in the 
 flesh ; only a visible manual operation 
 on the flesh, when it ought to be a 
 secret spiritual process in the heart; 
 only KaraTOfATi, not irepiTo^ri : ' comp. 
 Bom. ii. 28, 29, Phil. iii. 3, CoL ii. 
 II. Thus then, as Calvin rightly 
 felt, the Apostle expresses no con- 
 tempt for the outward rite, which he 
 himself calls a ff<ppaylda ttjs Sikuuo- 
 ffiicijs, Eom. iv. II, but only (as the 
 present words suggest) at the assump- 
 tion of such a title (observe t^s X£7o/i., 
 not Tuv Xeyo/i.) by a people who had 
 no conception of its true and deep 
 significance. The Gentiles were call- 
 ed, and reaUy were the iucpo^vaTla : 
 the Jews were called the irepiro/j,-^, 
 but were not truly so. 
 
 12. oTt iqTe] 'that ye were;' re- 
 sumption of the Sti in ver. 11, and 
 continuation of the suspended sen- 
 tence; see notes on ver. 11. t^ 
 Kaip^ IkcCvio] 'at that time; ' 'in your 
 heathen state.' The prep, ir (here 
 rightly omitted hy Lachm,.,Tisch., with 
 ABDiFGK; mss. ; Clarom., Sang., 
 Aug., al. ; (Chrys.), though occasion- 
 ally omitted (2 Cor. vi. 2 quotation, 
 Gal. vi. 9), is more commonly, and in- 
 deed more correctly, inserted in this 
 and similar forms: comp. Eom. iii. 26, 
 xi. 6, 2 Cor. viii. 13, 2 Thess. ii. 6; 
 and see Wannowski, Gonstr. Abs. in. 
 I, p. 88, Madvig, Synt, § 39, and 
 comp. ib. Lat. Gr. § 276. ijre 
 ...XuplsXpio-Tov] 'ye were... without 
 Christ;' xm/sJs Xp. forming a predi- 
 cate (Syr. ; 'et nesciebatis Christum,' 
 jEth.), not a limiting clause to fjre 
 ...airriWoTp. (De W., Eadie), which 
 would be a singularly harsh construc- 
 tion. The Ephesians, whom St Paul 
 here views as the representatives of 
 Gentilism (Olsh.), were, in their hea- 
 then ante-Christian state, truly ^u/iis 
 
 Xp., without the Messiah, without 
 the promised Seed (contrast Bom. 
 ix. 4SC1.); now however 'eum possi- 
 detis non minus quam ii quibus pro- 
 missus fuerat : ' Grot, in loc. The two 
 following clauses, each of two parts, 
 more exactly elucidate the signifi- 
 cance of the expression. On 
 the distinction between avev (' absence 
 of object from subject') and xupis 
 ('separation of subject from object'), 
 see Tittmann, Synon. p. 94. This 
 distinction however does not appear 
 to be perfectly certain (comp. Phil. ii. 
 14, with I Pet. iv. 9), and must at all 
 events be applied with caution, when 
 it is remembered that xwpis is used 40 
 times in the N.T., and aveu only 3 
 times, viz. Matth. x. 29, i Pet. iii. i, 
 iv. 9. Where, in any given writer or 
 writers, there is such a marked pre- 
 ference for one rather than another 
 of two perfectly simple words, it is 
 well not to be hypercritical. 
 dn-t|XXoTpi(i))i^voi K.T.X.] ' being aliens, 
 or in a state of alienation, from the 
 commonwealth of Israel;' in opp. to 
 (Tu/tTToXiTat T&v aytav, ver. 19. There 
 is a slight difficulty in the exact 
 meaning and application of the words. 
 Eeversing the order, for the sake of 
 making the simpler word define the 
 more doubtful, we may observe that 
 'Io-poTi\ is clearly the theocratic name 
 of the Jewish people, the title which 
 marks their religious and spiritual, 
 rather than their national or political 
 distinctions; see Bom. ix. 6, t Cor. 
 X. 18, Gal. vi. 16. From this it 
 would seem to follow that iroXircCa, — 
 which may be either (a) 'reipublica 
 forma, status,' tiSv rriv iroKai oIkovvtuv 
 Td|is TH, Aristot. Pol. in. i. i (comp. 
 ponlfiovs TToXtreias opp. to irapavonovs 
 iBiffnois, 2 Maco. iv. 11, irpoyoviKr) 
 iroXireia, viii. 17); or (6) 'jus civi- 
 
II. 12. 
 
 45 
 
 eTrayyeXlai, eXiriSa fxij ej^ovTey koi aQeoi eV r^ Koa-juKp. 
 
 tatis,' comp. Acts xxii. 28, 3 Maoe. 
 iii. 21; or (c) ' Vivendi ratio,' oomTp. 
 'conversatione,' Vulg., Clarom., see 
 Theoph. on ver. 13, and Suicer, The- 
 saur. s.v. Vol. 11. p. 795, — ^is here 
 used only in the first sense, and with 
 a distinctly spiritual application ; so 
 ^th.-Platt, Arm., and most modern 
 commentators. The gen. is thus, not 
 that of the 'identical notion,' e.g. 
 amv 'AffijKtoi' (Harl.), but a simple 
 possessive gen., — the 'reipubhcsB sta- 
 tus' which belonged to Israel. 
 din|XXoTpiu|i,^voi is a noticeable and 
 emphatic word (ovk etire Kexapi^cf^noi 
 ...iroXXij T(3y prifmruv i) t/i^aais 7ro\6v 
 SeiKvvffa TOW xapiff/iov, Chrys.), which 
 seems to hint at a state of former 
 unity and fellowship, and a lapse or 
 separation (dx6) from it; see oh. iv. 
 18, Col. i. 21, Ecclus. xi. 34, 3 Mace. 
 i. 3, and comp. Joseph. Antiq. xi. 5. 
 4, exx. in Kypke, Obs. Vol. 11. p. 295, 
 and in Sehweigh. Polyb. Lex. s. v. 
 This union, though not historically 
 demonstrable, is no less spiritually 
 true. Jew and Gentile were once 
 under one spiritual iroKirela, of which 
 the Jewish was a, subsequent visible 
 manifestation. The Gentile lapsed 
 from, it, the Jew made it invahd 
 (Matth. XV. 6, comp. Chrys.); and 
 they parted, only to unite again (^fl;/)? 
 Kal Xaoi 'Iffpa57\, Acts iv. 27) in 
 one act of uttermost rebellion, and 
 yet, through the mystery of redeem- 
 ing Love, to remain thereby (ver. 15, 
 1 6) united in Christ for ever. 
 Jftioi Tuv 8ia9i|Kuv] 'strangers from 
 the covenants; ' second and more spe- 
 cializing part of the first explanatory 
 clause. The gen. after I^tos is not 
 due to any quasi-participial power 
 (Eadie), but belongs to the category 
 of the (inverted) ^JOssessiVe gen. (Bern- 
 
 hardy, Synt. ni. 49, p. 171), or per- 
 haps rather to the gen. of ' the point 
 of view ' (' extraneos quod ad pac- 
 torum promissiones attiuet,' Beza); 
 see Soheuerl. Synt. % 18. 3. a, p. 135. 
 The use of the plural SiaeiJKai must 
 not be limited, either here or Eom. 
 ix. 4, to the two tables of the law 
 (Elsn., Wolf), nor again unnecessarily 
 extended to God's various covenant- 
 promises to David and the people 
 (comp. DeW.), but appears simply to 
 refer to the several renewals of the 
 covenant with the patriarchs: see 
 esp. Wisd. xviii. 22, Sxpovs irariptiiv 
 Kal SiaB'^Kas: 2 Mace. viii. 15, rij 
 irpbs ToOs Trar^joas avTwv Siad'^Kas: 
 comp. Eom. xv. 8. The great Mes- 
 sianic promise (Gen. xiii. 15, xv. 18, 
 xvii. 8; Chrys., Theoph.) was the 
 subject and substratum of all. 
 cKiriSa |m] Jxo'Tre] 'not having hope,' 
 Auth., 'spem non habentes,' Vulg., 
 Clarom., comp. Syr. ; general conse- 
 quence of the alienation mentioned in 
 the preceding member; not however 
 with any special dependence on that 
 clause, soil. liWe /t-J) ^x"** ^Xt/So, ' so 
 that you had no (covenanted) hope, ' 
 ' spem promissioni respondentem ' 
 (Beug., comp. Harl.) ; — for (a) the ab- 
 sence of the article shows that iXirlSa 
 cannot here be in any way limited, 
 but is simply 'hope' in its most gene- 
 ral meaning; and (6) lirj can be no 
 iiurther pressed than as simply refer- 
 ring to the thought and feeling of the 
 subject introduced by livinxoveiere, 
 ver. II, 'having (as you must have 
 felt) no hope;' comp. Winer, Gr. § 
 55. 5, p. 428, Herm. Viger, No. 267, 
 and the good collection of exx. in 
 Gayler, Fartic. Neg. ch. ix. p. 275 sq. 
 On the general use in the N.T. of ,uj) 
 with participles see notes on i Thess. 
 
46 
 
 nPOE E*E2I0Y2. 
 
 13 vw] Se ev Xpta-T^ 'Ii](rov ufxeci 01 vore ovrei fiaKpav 
 
 14 eyyvij ejev^drjre ev tm al/xaTi tov ^piarov. avTOi yap 
 
 ii. 15. dSeoi ev rif 
 
 Koo-|i(>>] 'without God in the world;' 
 objective negation (o being here eqni v. 
 to oi with an adj., Harl. ; see how- 
 ever Gayler, Partic. Neg. p. 35), 
 formingthe climax and accumulation 
 of the misery involved in x"p'' 
 XpiffToC: they were without church 
 and without promise, without hope, 
 and were in the profane wicked world 
 (^i' T(^ Ko(r/i£fj being in contrast to tto- 
 \iT. ToO 'lap., and like it ethical in its 
 reference), — ^without God. "Affeosmay 
 be taken either with active, neuter, 
 or passive reference, i.e. either deny- 
 ing (see exx. Suicer, Thes. s. v.), ig- 
 norant of (Gal. iv. 8; 'nesoiebatis 
 Deum,' ^th. ; f/aij/iot t^s deoyvufflas, 
 Theod. ; comp. Clem. Alex. Protrept. 
 14), or forsaken by God (Soph. (Ed. 
 Bex, 661, affeos S(fii\osi) : the last 
 meaning seems best to suit the pas- 
 sive tenor of the passage, and to en- 
 hance the dreariuess and gloom of the 
 picture. On the religious aspects of 
 heathenism, see the good note of Ear- 
 less in loc. 
 
 13. vvvl Se] 'But now;' in anti- 
 thesis to Ttfjcatpt^ exdvif, ver. 12. 
 Iv Xp. 'Irio-oC] 'in Christ Jesus;' 
 prominent and emphatic ; standing in 
 immediate connexion with vvvl (not 
 iyevriffrp-e, Mey.), which it both qua- 
 lifies and characterizes, and forming 
 a contrast to x^p's Xp., ver. ii. The 
 addition of 'It/ctoC, far from being an 
 argument against such a contrast 
 (Mey.), is in fact almost confirma- 
 tory of it. Such an addition was 
 necessary to make the circumstances 
 of the contrast fully felt. Then they 
 were x"/''' -^P-i separate from and 
 without part in the Messiah; now 
 they were not only ii/ Xpiarlp but iv 
 XpuTTip 'Iijirou, in a personal Saviour, 
 
 — in One who was no longer their 
 future hope, but their present salva- 
 tion. The personal reference is appro- 
 priately continued by iv ry atfiwn, — 
 not merely ouroO, but tov Up.; He 
 who poured out His blood, Jesus of 
 Nazareth, was truly Christ, 
 lyyis eY6viiflT|T6] 'became nigh,' were 
 brought nigh to God's holy and spi- 
 ritual TToXiTela : ot fuixpav 6vres rij^ 
 TToKir. TOV 'Iffp., T7JS KOTct Qeitv iyyi/s 
 iy(vqd-qT€- CEoum. On the passive 
 form iyevijB. see notes on ch. iii. 7, 
 and on the use of the words ixaKpb,v 
 and iyyis in designating Gentiles and 
 Jews (compare the term irpoariXvTOi), 
 gee the very good illustrations ot 
 Schoettgen, Hor. Heh. Vol. i. p. 761 
 sq., and of Wetst. in loc; comp. also 
 Isaiah Ivii. 19, Dan. ix. 7 (T7»co(Z.),and 
 Valck. ore Acts ii. 39, cited by Grin- 
 field, Schol. Hell, on this verse. The 
 order iyev, iyyvs is adopted hjLachm, 
 with ABN ; mss.; Aug., Yulg., Goth., 
 al., but seems due to a mistaken cor- 
 rection of the emphatic juxtaposition 
 fiaKpav iyyvs. Iv tw 
 
 atpiaTi] 'by the blood;' iv having 
 here appy. its instrumental force ; sea 
 Winer, Gr. § 48. a, p. 346. No very 
 precise distinction can be drawn be- 
 tween this use and 5id tov afy. ch. 
 i. 7. We may perhaps say the lat- 
 ter implies mediate and more simple, 
 theformer,i7remanc?iJinstrumentality: 
 comp. Jelf, Gr. § 622. 3, Winer, I.e. 
 p. 347 note, and notes on i Thess. iv. 
 18. 
 
 14. avris vap] 'For He, and 
 none other than He : ' confirmatory 
 explanation of ver. 13, the emphasis 
 resting, not on elprivrj r/fiav (De W.), 
 but (as the prominent position of iv 
 Xp. 'I9;(r. and repetition of Xptarov, 
 ver. 13, seem decisively to show) on 
 
II. 13, 14, 15- 
 
 47 
 
 ia-Tiv ^ eip^vtj rinwv, 6 irot^aai ra afx^orepa ev Koi to 
 fj.ea-6TOi)(^ov rov (ppajfiov Xvo-as, rt]v 'i-)(Qpav, ev t§ a-apKi 1 5 
 
 airrSs, which is thus no mere otiose 
 pronoun (eomp. Thiersch, de Pentat. 
 p. 98), but is used with its regular 
 and classical significance; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 23. 4. ohs. p. 135, ^.nd eomp. 
 Herm. de Pronom. airSs, ch. x. 
 1^ clpijvT] ■/\)i.av] 'our Peace.' Though 
 the context, and defining participle 
 6 TToiiJo-as, seem very distiactly to 
 prove that elp'^vni is here used in some 
 degree 'per metonymiam' (eomp. i 
 Cor. i. 30, Col. i. 27), and so in a sense 
 but little differing from clp7;voiroi.6s 
 (Usteri, Lehrb. 11. 2, p. 253), the abs- 
 tract subst. still has and admits of 
 a fuller and more general application. 
 Not only was Christ our 'Pacificator,' 
 but our 'Pax,' the true Di'?E' "W 
 (Isaiah ix. 6), the very essence as well 
 as the cause of it ; eomp. Olsh. in loe. 
 Thus considered, elfyfivq seems to have 
 here its widest meaning; not only 
 peace between Jew and Gentile, but 
 also between both and God. In ver. 
 15 the context limits it to the former 
 reference; in ver. 17 it reverts to its 
 present and more inclusive reference. 
 TO. d|u{>0TEpa] 'iot/i,' Jews and Gen- 
 tUes; explained by toi)s Sio and rois 
 &l>,<poTipovs, ver. 15, 16. We have 
 here no ellipsis of 7^x17, ISnij k.t.'K., 
 but only the abstract and generalizing 
 neuter; see exx. in Winer, Gr. § 27. 
 S, p. 160. kolC] 'and,' sc. 
 
 'namely;' the particle having here 
 its explanatory force: see Pritz. Bom. 
 ix. 23, Vol. II. p. 339, Winer, Gr. § 53. 
 3. obs. p. 388, and notes on Phil. iv. 
 II. TO ne<roToixov tou 
 
 ■f>pa7|i.ov] ' the middle wall of the fence 
 or partition,' scU. between Jew and 
 GentUe. The genitival relation has 
 been difierently explained. There is 
 of course no real (Pise.) or virtual 
 (Beza) interchange of words for rbv 
 
 (pp. Tou fieffoT., nor does toC ^payixov 
 appear to be here either (a) a gen. 
 of the characterizing quality, soil. t6 
 Sia^piaaov, rb Siareixttov (Chrys. i, 
 Harl. ; eomp. Clem. Alex. Strom, vi. 
 13, p. 793, rb /ifffdroixov rb Siopll'ov), 
 or (6) a gen. of identity, 'the middle- 
 wall which was or formed the if>pay/i,6s! 
 (Mey.) ; but either (c) a gen. of origin, 
 TO OTTO (ppayfiov (Chrys. 2), or still 
 more simply (d) a common possessive 
 gen., ' the wall which pertained to, 
 belonged to the fence,'— a use of the 
 case which is far from uncommon in 
 the N. T. , and admits of some latitude 
 of application ; eomp. Donalds. Gr. 
 § 454. aa, p. 481 sq. The 
 
 exact reference of the tppay/ios (JJD 
 Buxtorf, Lex. s.v. p. 1447) is also 
 somewhat difScult to fix, as both 
 eip^vij and ^6pa (ver. 15), and indeed 
 the whole tenor of the passage, seem 
 to imply something more than the 
 relations of Jews and Gentiles to each 
 other, and must include the relations 
 of both to God ; eomp. Alf. in loc. 
 If this be so, the ^paypios would seem 
 to mean the Law generally (Zonaras, 
 Zex. p. 1822), not merely the cere- 
 monial law (Neander, Planting, Vol. 
 
 1. p. 49, ed. Bohn), nor the 'disori- 
 men prseputii' (Beng.), but the whole 
 Mosaic Law, esp. in its aspects as a 
 system of separation; eomp. Chrys. 
 in loc, who appositely cites Isaiah v. 
 
 2. Whether there is any direct refer- 
 ence to the ipdov Spvipixrov "KiBlvov 
 (Joseph. Antiq. xv. 11. 5) between 
 the courts of the Jews and Gentiles 
 (Hamm.) is perhaps doubtful; see 
 Meyer. We may well admit how- 
 ever, as indeed the specific and so to 
 say localizing ^pay/ibs seems to sug- 
 gest, an allusion both to this and to 
 the veil which was rent (Matth. 
 
48 
 
 nPOS E^ESIOYS. 
 
 avTOv, Tov vo/xov Twv ivToXmv ev Soy/J-aa-iv Karapy^crai, 
 
 xxvii. 51) at our Lord's crucifixion ; 
 the former illustrating the separation 
 between Jew and Gentile, the latter 
 between both and God. As has been 
 well remarked, the temple was as it 
 were a material embodiment of the 
 law, and in its very outward struc- 
 ture was a symbol of spiritual distinc- 
 tions j see Stier in loo. p. 322, 3.23. 
 
 15. Ti\v ?x*pov] 'the enmity;' 
 'ponenda hie iiroo-Tiy/i'n,' Grot. ; in 
 apposition to, and a further explana- 
 tion of TO /ieff, Tou ^Pt to wit, the 
 root of the enmity ('parietem, qui 
 est odium,' ^th.) between Jew and 
 Gentile, and between both and God. 
 The exact reference of ix^pav has 
 been greatly debated. That it cannot 
 imply exclusively (a) 'the enmity of 
 Jews and Gentiles against God' 
 (Ohrys.) seems clear from the fore- 
 going context (comp. i iroi'^iffa! tA 
 anipbrepa h, ver. 14), in which the 
 enmity between Jew and Gentile is 
 distinctly alluded to. That it can- 
 not denote simply (6) 'the reci- 
 procal enmity of Jew and Gentile' 
 (Meyer, comp. Usteri, Lehrb. 11. 2. i, 
 p. 253) seems also clear from its 
 appositional relation to /neff. rov <pp., 
 from the preceding term dprjvri, and 
 from the subsequent explanation 
 afforded by tov v6fwv tGiv ivT, K.r.\. 
 The reference then must be to lotli, 
 so. to the Ix^P'^ which was the result 
 and working of the law regarded as a 
 system of separation, — the enmity 
 due not only to Judaical limitations 
 and antagonisms, but also and, as the 
 widening context shows, more espe- 
 cially to the alienation of both Jew 
 and Gentile from God ; iKaripav 
 ixBpav KoX iKirepov jueo-iToixoK l\iia-e 
 XptffTos 6 Oeos ii/idv Phot. ap. CEoum. 
 This though not distinctly put forward 
 in ed. i, and peremptorily rejected by 
 
 De W. and Mey., seems, on reconsi- 
 deration, the only explanation that 
 satisfies the strong term ^x^pa, and 
 the very inclusive context. 
 Iv T'n (rapKV owToS] ' in His crucified 
 flesh;' comp. Col. i. 22, ^c r^ ailifiwri 
 T7JS ffapKos airov 5iA tov OavaTov, 
 These words cannot be connected with 
 TTif^xSp'iv (Arm., Chrys., Cocc), as in 
 such a case the article could not be 
 dispensed with even in the dialect of 
 the N.T., but mast be joined as a 
 specification of the manner, or perhaps 
 rather of the instrument, — either (a) 
 with KaTapyTJ(ras, to which this clause 
 is emphatically prefixed (ed. i, De 
 W., Mey.), or perhaps more naturally 
 (6) with XiVos (Syr., Mih.., Theod., 
 Theoph. , CE cum .) , to which it subj oin 3 
 an equally emphatic specification. 
 &tier (comp. Chrys.) extends the ref. 
 of ffAfI to Christ's incarnate state 
 and the whole tenor of His earthly life 
 ('Fleisches-lebens'); comp. Schulz, 
 Ahendm. p. 95 sq. This is doubtful : 
 the context appears to refer alone to 
 His death; comp. ver. 13, iv ti} 
 aXiian ; ver. 16, 5ict tov OTOvpov. On 
 the distinction between the o-otp^ and 
 the adiM (the ahpi SoBSaa) of Christ, 
 eomp. Liicke on John vi. 51, Vol. n. 
 p. 149 sq. TOV v6|jiov T&v 
 
 hrr. iv 8o-y(i..] 'the law of ordinances 
 expressed in decrees,' scil. ' the law of 
 decretory ordinances;' comp. Col.ii. 14. 
 The Greek commentators join iv Sby/i.. 
 with Korraprj. , referring 807/^0x0 (scil. 
 T^v irlanv, Chrys. ; t^ iiwyiiKiK'tpi 
 SiSaffKoXlav, Theod.) to Christian doc- 
 trines: this meaning of doy/jia how- 
 ever is untenable in the N.T. Har- 
 less (comp. Syr.) retains the same 
 construction, but regards iv 867/11. as 
 definingthe sphere in which the action 
 of Christ's death was manifested, 'on 
 the side of, in the matter of decrees.' 
 
II. i6. 
 
 49 
 
 iva Toyj auo KTiati ev eavT^) ets eva Katvov ai/dpanrov, voiu>v 
 eif^.j.tjv, Kat airoKaTaWa^ri rovi a/j.(poTepovi in evi <rwfiaTi 1 6 
 
 This is plausible, and muelito be pre- 
 ferred to Fritzsohe's expl., 'novaprie- 
 cepta stabUiendo' (Dissert, ad 2 Cor. 
 p. 168); still the article (tois Siy/j..) 
 seems indispensable, for, as "Winer 
 observes (ffr. p. 250, ed. 5), both the 
 law and the side or aspect under which 
 it is viewed are fairly definite. "We 
 retain therefore the ordinary expla- 
 nation, according to which iv S6yii. is 
 closely united with tui' ^i'toXwi', and 
 therefore correctly anarthrous; see 
 "Winer, Gr. § 20. 2, p. 123, and notes 
 on ch. i. 15. The gen. ^itoX. thus 
 serves to express the contents (Bern- 
 hardy, Synt. III. 45, p. 163), iv Sby/i. 
 the definite mandatory /oras ('legem 
 imperiosam,' Erasm.) in which the hi- 
 ToXol were expressed; see Tholuck, 
 Beitrdge, p. 93 sq., and esp. "Winer, Gr. 
 § 31. lo.obs. I, p. 196, ed. 6, but more 
 fully in ed. 5, p. 250. 
 tva Tois Suo K.T.X.] 'tliat He might 
 make the two in Himself into one new 
 man;' purpose of the abrogation; 
 peace between Jew and Gentile by 
 making them (oi//t etire lieTa^aK-g, 
 tva. Bei^y rb ivepy^s toO yevo/jL^voVt 
 Chrys.) in Himself, in His person (not 
 ii' iavToO, Chrys.), into, not merely 
 one man, but one new man ; ha ar^- 
 yeyKe Baviioarbv, airis toSto TpuTov 
 yevS/ievos, Chrys. Meier's assertion 
 that KaLvis has here no moral signifi- 
 cance is obviously untenable : eomp. 
 ch. iv. 24, and notes in loc. The 
 
 reading is slightly doubtful. Lachm. 
 adopts ofirij) with ABFNi; 10 mss.; 
 Procop. ; a more difficult reading, 
 and quite as strongly attested as 
 iavTif [DEGKLN* ; mss. (Rec.)], but 
 not improbably due to the frequent 
 confusion between the oblique cases 
 of aMs and those of the reflexive 
 pronoun. iroiwv tlpi^vriv] 
 
 'making peace,' soil, between Jews 
 and Gentiles, and between both and, 
 God, TrpJs rhv Geix /to! irp6s &\\i/j\ovs, 
 Chrys. ; contrast rriv ^x^pcw, ver. 15. 
 It may be observed that the aorist is 
 not used (as in ver. 16), but the pre- 
 sent: the 'pacificatio' is not mention- 
 ed as in modal or causal dependence 
 on the 'creatio,' but simply as ex- 
 tending over and contemporaneous 
 with the whole process of it : eomp. 
 Scheuerl. Synt. § 31. 2. a, p. 310. 
 
 16. Kal diroKaroWali) tovs a|xcf>.] 
 'and might reconcile ns both;' parallel 
 purpose to the foregoing, and stated 
 second in order, though really from 
 the nature of the case the first ; the 
 divine procedure being, as De "W. ob- 
 serves, stated regressively, ha ktIct). . . 
 [ifca] aTOKaT. . . . airoKTeivas. The double 
 compound owokot-. is used only here 
 and Col. i. 20, 21. In both cases iwi 
 does not simply strengthen (e.g. diro- 
 davii&^io, direpyd^o/iai, Meyer, Eadie), 
 but hints at a restoration to a primal 
 unity, 'reduxerit in unum gregem,' 
 Calv.; eomp. ver. 13, and Winer, de 
 Verb. Gomp. iv. p. 7, 8. Chryg. 
 
 gives rather a different and perhaps 
 doubtful turn, SeiKvis Sti irpb roirov 
 T] ip0pUTrlvi] ipvffis euKariWaKros TJv, 
 otov M Twi/ aylav /col irpb tou vb/iov. 
 The profound dogmatical considera- 
 tions connected with /coTaXXa7ij (alike 
 active and objective, and passive and 
 subjective, eomp. 2 Cor. v. 18 with 
 ib. 20) are treated perspicuously by 
 Usteri, Lehrb. 11. i. i, p. 102 sq. : see 
 also Jackson, Creed, Book x. 49. 3, 
 Pearson, ibid, "Vol. i. p. 430 sq. (Bur- 
 ton), iv iv\ <r(6|j.aTi] 
 'in one corporate body,' scil. in the 
 Church. The reference to the human 
 (Twyno ToO Xp. (Chrys.) is plausible, 
 but on nearer examination not tenable. 
 
 E 
 
50 
 
 nPOS E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 T9J 6ew Sta Tou aravpov, airoKTelvag rhv exOpav ev 
 I J avTw. Kul eXOoav evriyyeXlaaro eip^vijv vftiv Tois (laKpav 
 
 Had this been intended, the order 
 (oomp. the position of h ry trapd 
 airoC) would surely have been differ- 
 ent, if only to prevent this very con- 
 nexion of Tois i/i^oT. and ii> ivi (nifi. 
 which their present juxtaposition so 
 obviously suggests. Moreover the 
 query of B.-Crus. why Christ's human 
 body should be here designated Iv 
 crG/ia has not been satisfactorily an- 
 swered, even by Stier: the application 
 of it to the mystical body is intelli- 
 gible and appropriate, comp. ch. iv. 4. 
 'Ed does not thus become equivalent 
 to els, but preserves its proper mean- 
 ing: they were KTurBivrai els ha avBp., 
 thus KTicrBipTas Christ reconciles them 
 both iv ivl a-iifi. {sail, tyras, Olsh.) to 
 God: see Winer, Gr. § 50. 5, p. 370. 
 diroKTetvas] 'having slain,' i.e. 'after 
 He had slain;' temporal participle, 
 standing in contrast with iroiHv, ver. 
 15. The use of the particular word 
 has evidently been suggested by SiA 
 Tov aravpov: not Xiitras, not 6,vehhv, 
 but iiroKTelvas, 'quia crux mortem 
 adfert,' Grot. ; and thus in the words, 
 though not the application of Chrys., 
 Coffre fJi/rjKiTi airTTjv dvafTTTJvaL. The 
 ix^P"- ^^^^ specified is not merely and 
 exclusively the enmity between Jew 
 and Gentile, but also, as in ver. 15, 
 and here even still more distinctly 
 and primarily, the enmity between 
 both and God; /jiSXhov vpis tov Qe6v, 
 TO yhp i^rfs TovTo 5tjXo?, Chrys., comp. 
 Alf. in loc. Iv airif] 
 
 'in it,' scil. 'upon it,' Hamm., not 
 •in corpore suo,' Bengel; see Col. ii. 
 15 and notes in loc. In FG; Vulg. 
 ('in semet ipso'), Syr.-Phil., and 
 several Latin Ff., we find iv iavrQ, — 
 a reading probably owing its origin 
 and support to the reference of iv ivl 
 
 aJili. to Christ. 
 
 I jr. Kal eX9»v] 'And liaving come, 
 &e. :' not 'and came and' (Auth.), as 
 this obscures the commencement of 
 the new sentence (see Soholef. Hints, 
 p. 100), nor 'and coming' (Eadie), as 
 the action described by iXdCbv is not 
 here contemporaneous with, but prior 
 to that of evr)yye\l(raTo: comp. Bern- 
 hardy, Synt. X. 9, p. 382. This verse 
 seems clearly to refer back to ver. 14, 
 ou7-6s ydip K.T.X., there being, as B.- 
 Crus. suggests, a faint apposition be- 
 tween X/). iffTiv T) elp-fivq ij/i., ver. 14, 
 and eiJijyyeX. elp-fjvtjv, ver. 1 7 ; still, as 
 ver. 15 and 16 cannot be considered 
 parenthetical , the connexion is carried 
 on by Kal, and the verse is linked with 
 what immediately precedes. 'E\9i)v 
 thus following dwoKrelvas will more 
 naturally refer to a spiritual advent 
 (see esp. Acts xxvi. 23), or a mediate 
 advent in the person of His Apostles, 
 than to our Lord's preaching when on 
 earth. The participle i\di>v (no mere 
 redundancy, Kaphel. Annot. Vol. 11. 
 p. 471) in fact serves to give a reaUstio 
 touch to the whole group of clauses ; 
 ' Christ is our peace ; yes, and He came, 
 and by His Spirit and the months of 
 His Apostles He preached it;' see 
 Hofm. Schriftb. Vol. 11. i, p. 338. 
 clpijvi)v] 'peace,' not only riiv rpos 
 Toi" Qe6v (Chiys.), but also Trjv vpos 
 dXX^Xous, see notes on ver. 14. Rec. 
 omits the second cZpijfijc. It is right- 
 ly maintained by Lachm., Tisch., with 
 ABDEFGN; mss.; Vv. (except Syrr.); 
 Ff. It gives an emphasis and solemnity 
 to the passage, which is here (though 
 denied by Stier, p. 370, comp. Ben- 
 gel) especially appropriate. Meyer 
 compares Eom. iii. 31, viii. 15. 
 
II. 17, i8, 19. 
 
 51 
 
 Kat eip^i tjv TOjj e^yuy, on Si avrov e^oftev Ttjv irpotja- 1 8 
 ymyrjv ol aficporepoi ev ev\ TlveufiaTi Trpbi tov iraTepa. 
 apa out/ 0VK6TI ia-Te ^evoi Kal TrdpoiKoi, aXX iare a-vv-^ 1 9 
 
 18. oTi 81 avTov] 'seeing that 
 through Him,' not merely explana- 
 tory, 'to wit that we have' (B.-Crus.), 
 nor yet strongly causal, 'because we 
 haye' (Beng.), but with somewhat 
 more of a demonstrative or confirma- 
 tory force, 'as it is a fact that we 
 have;' comp. 2 Cor. i. 5, and see 
 notes on 2 Thess. iii. 7. The ' proba- 
 tio,' as Calvin observes, is ' ab effectu ;' 
 the principal moment of thought how- 
 ever does not rest on ^xo/^f 1 ou the 
 reality of the possession (Harl.), or on 
 any appeal to inward experience (' for 
 — ^is it not BO?' Stier) ; but, as the order 
 suggests, on Si airov, on the matter 
 of fact that it was 'through Him, and 
 none but Him' that we have this 
 wpoa-ayuyrj. For a sound sermon on 
 this text see Sherlock, Serm. xvi. Vol. 
 I. p. 288 sq. (ed. Hughes). 
 Exo)!^] 'we are having,' -pTesent; the 
 action is stUl going on : contrast iffxn- 
 Ka/tev, Bom. v. 2, where the reference 
 is to the period when they became 
 Christians, and where consequently 
 the irpoaaytiiyri is spoken of as a thing 
 past. Tijv irpo<ra7(i)7tjv] 
 
 'our introduction, admission,' 'quia 
 ipse adduxit,' Mth,; not intransitive- 
 ly either here or Eom. v. 2, scil. 
 'access,' Auth., 'aocessum,' Vulg., 
 'adventum' (dshini), Copt., 'atgagg,' 
 Goth. ; but transitively, ' adeundi co- 
 piam,' 'admissionem,'thelatter being 
 the primary and proper meaning of the 
 word; see Meyer on Bom. v. 2, and 
 comp. (appy.) Xen. Cyrop. vii. 5. 45, 
 Tois ffiois iplXovs Seo/Jihovs Trpo(raya- 
 7^!: ib. I. 3. 8, and the various appli- 
 cations of the word in Polybiua, e. g. 
 Mist. I. 48, -i, Tuv /irixwriiidrav rp. ; 
 XIV. 10. 9, Tfic Spydytiit'. Christ is thus 
 
 our -irpocayuyci! to the Father; ovk 
 eiTreK Trp6<ro5ov dWd, rpoaayoiyqy, 
 Qvylipatf iavrdv irpoari\dofi€V,d\'K iw 
 avTov irpoarixSriiier, Chrys. on ver. 2 1 ; 
 see I Pet. iii. 18, tva i)fiS,s irpojaydyji 
 Tijj Qetf. There may possibly be here 
 (less probably however in Rom. v. 2) 
 an allusion to the irpoaayaytbs (' ad- 
 missionalis,' Lampridius, Sever. 4) at 
 Oriental courts, Tholuok, Horn. I. c, 
 and Usteri, Lehrb. 11. i. i, p. loi ; at 
 any rate the supposition does not 
 merit the contempt with which it has 
 been treated by Euokert, The uses 
 of vpoaaywyri are well illustrated by 
 Wakefield, in Steph. Thes.s.\. Vol.ii. 
 p. 86 (ed. Valpy), and by Bos, Obs. 
 Misc. 35, p. 149 sq. 
 Iv Ivl nv6u(j.aTi] ' in one Spirit, com- 
 mon to Jew and Gentile;' not for Sid 
 (Chrys.; comp. OiJcum., Calv., al.), 
 but as usual, 'united in' (Olsh.) ; 
 comp. I Cor. xii. 13. The Holy Spirit 
 is, as it were, the vital sphere or ele- 
 ment in which both parties have their 
 common Tpoaayayii to the Father. 
 The mention of the three Persons in 
 the blessed Trinity, with the three 
 prepp. Sid, iv, rp6s, is especially no- 
 ticeable and distinct. 
 
 19. apa oiy] 'Accordingly then,' 
 ' so then;' ' rebus ita comparatis igitur: ' 
 conclusion and consequence from the 
 declarations of ver. 14 — 18, with a 
 further expansion of the ideas of ver. 
 13. On the use of fipa ovv, see notes 
 onGal. vi. 10, and comp. Eom. v. 18, 
 yii. 3i 25, viii. 12, ix. 16, 18: in all 
 these oases the weaker ratiocinative 
 force of apa is supported by the col- 
 lective ovv. This union of the two 
 particles is not found in classical 
 Greek, except in the case of the inter- 
 E 2 
 
52 
 
 nP02 E$E2I0YS. 
 
 20 TroXirat toov dylcov /cat oiKeiot rod Qeov, eTroiKoSofjujOei/- 
 
 rogative form apa: see Herm. Viger, 
 Ko. 292. I^voi KaV irdp- 
 
 oiKoi] 'strangers and sojourners;' 'pe- 
 regrini atque inoolse,' Cio. OJie. i. 34. 
 125. The two expressions seem toeon- 
 stitute a full antitliesis to avvToXhai, 
 and to include all who, whether by 
 national and territorial demarcation, 
 or by the absence of civic privileges, 
 were not citizens. Ild/ioiKos then is 
 here (comp. Acts vii. 6, 29, i Pet. ii. 
 11) simply the same as the classical 
 /jLhoiKos (a form which does not occur 
 in the N. T. , and only once, Jer. xx. 
 3, in the LXX), and was probably 
 its Alexandrian equivalent. It is 
 used frequently in the LXX, in 11 
 passages as a translation of 1 j, and ia 
 10 of aK'irt: 'accolasfuissedicit gen- 
 tiles quatenus multi ex illis mora- 
 bantur inter Judzeos, ...non tamen 
 iisdem legibns aut moribus ant reli- 
 gione utentes,' Estius. Harless (after 
 Beng.) regards irdp. as in antithesis to 
 okeToi, f^coi to ffvvToKiTai, the former 
 relating to domestic, the latter to civic 
 privileges: this is plausible — see Lev. 
 xxii. 10 sq.,Ecolus. xxix. 26 sq.^ — but 
 owing to the frequent use of irdpoixos 
 simply for /ihoiKos, not completely de- 
 monstrable. An allusion to pros- 
 elytes (Whitby) is certainly contrary 
 to the context : see ver. 11 sq. Bee, 
 omits liTTi (2) with D'EL. 
 oTiviroXiTai, though partially vindi- 
 cated by Baphelius, Annot. Vol. n. 
 p. 472, belongs principally to later 
 Qieek.e.g. Mli&n, Far. Hist. 111.44, 
 Joseph. Antiq. xix. i. 2, but also 
 Eur. Heracl, 826 ; see Lobecli, Phryn. 
 p. 172. The tendency to compound 
 forms without an adequate increase of 
 meaning is a characteristic of 'fatis- 
 cens Grsecitas;' comp. Thiersch, de 
 Pentat. n. i, p. 83. With regard to 
 the orthography we may observe that 
 
 the form o-vKTroX. is adopted by Tisch. 
 with ABiCDEFGN, and must be re- 
 tained, as it is supported by so clear 
 a preponderance of uncial authority; 
 see Tisch. Prolegom. p. xlvii. 
 T(3v d'^lav] ' the saints;' not inclusive- 
 ly the holy 'of all times and lands' 
 (Eadie), for the mention of the ttoXi- 
 Teia Tov'lap., ver. 12, is distinct and 
 specific ; nor exclusively the Jews as 
 a nation (Hamm. ), or the saints of the 
 Old Testament (Chrys.), for this the 
 nature of the argument seems to pre- 
 clude; but the members of that spiri- 
 tual community in which Jew and 
 Gentile Christians were now united 
 and incorporated, and to which the 
 external theocracy formed a typical 
 and preparatory institution. The ex- 
 pression is further heightened and de- 
 fined by oUem tov 9co5. On this use 
 of olxeios, see notes on Gal. vi. 10, and 
 for a good sermon on this text, Beve- 
 ridge, Serm. xlviii. Vol. 11. p. 381 sq. 
 20. liroiKoSo|j.T]6cvTEs] ' built up, ' 
 'sMp«r£Edi;icoti,'Vulg.; the preposition 
 being not otiose, but correctly mark- 
 ing the super-position, superstructure; 
 comp. I Cor. iii. 10, 12, 14, Col. ii. 7. 
 The aoous. is not used with iiri here 
 (as in I Cor. iii. 1 2) because the idea 
 of rest predominates over that of mo- 
 tion or direction. That the dat. rather 
 than the gen. of rest is here used, can 
 hardly be said to be ' purely acciden- 
 tal' (Meyer), as the former denotes 
 absolute and less separable, the latter 
 partial and more separable super-posi- 
 tion : see esp. Donalds. Gr. § 483. a, 
 Krager,Si)rocftJ.ii.§68.4i. i. Though 
 this distinction must not be over- 
 pressed in the N.T. (see Lukeiv. 29), 
 or even in classical writers (see exx. 
 in Eost u. Palm, Lex. s. v. M, 11. Vol. 
 1- P- 103s), it still appears to have 
 been correctly observed by St Paul. 
 
II. 20, 21. 
 
 53 
 
 rej eiri to3 OejueXio) twv cnroa-ToXcav Kal '7rpo(pt]TZv, ovros 
 aKpoywviaiou avroO 'Itja-oO Xpicrrov, iv to Traera otKoSo/jiri 2 1 
 
 20. T9;(rou Xpio-ToC] So CDEFGKL; several Vv.; Orig. (i) and many Ff. 
 (Bee, Griesb., ScJiolz, De W., Meyer) : Ni reads simply tov Xpiirrov for aiV. 'Iijir. 
 Xp., and Chrys. (text) omits 'Itjct. rfscft. has Xp. 'Iijo-off, with ABK"; Vulg., 
 Goth., Copt. ; Orig. (2), Theophyl. ; Ambrosiast., August, (frequently), and 
 many others (Ruck., Lachm., Alf.). 
 
 The reading Ivl toTs oipavois, ch. i. 10 
 {Lachm.), which would apparently 
 form an exception in this very Ep. , 
 is still (though now supported by N^) 
 of somewhat doubtful authority. 
 T<3v dirocTToXiov koI itpo^rfrav] 'of 
 the Apostles and Prophets.' Two ques- 
 tions of some interest present them- 
 selves, (i) the nature of the gen., (2) 
 the meaning of irpoiprrriiv. With re- 
 gard to (i) it may be said, that though 
 the gen. of apposition (deiJ.ih.oi ol 
 iirb(rT. Kal ol ■irpo<j>., Chrys., comp. 
 Theoph., CEcum.)is tenable on gram- 
 matical grounds (comp. Winer, Gr. § 
 59. 8, p. 470), and supported by the 
 best ancient commentators, aU exe- 
 getical considerations seem opposed to 
 it. The Apostles were not themselves 
 the foundations (Eev. xxi. 14 is not, 
 
 like the present, a dogmatical passage, 
 
 see Harl.), but laid them; see i Cor, 
 
 iii. 10. The gen. will therefore more 
 
 probably be a gen. subjecti, not how- 
 
 everin apossessive sense (Calv. 2, Coco., 
 
 Alf.), as this seems tacitly to mix up 
 
 the Be/iiXios and the &Kpoyo)v. (comp. 
 
 Jackson, Greed, xi, j. 2), but simply 
 
 as a gen. of the agent or originating 
 
 cause (Scheuerl. Synt. § 17, i, p. 125; 
 
 see notes on i Thess. i. 6) : what the 
 
 Apostles and Prophets preached form- 
 ed the 6e/ii\ios, comp. Bom. xv. 20, 
 
 Eeb. vi. I. Thus all seems consis- 
 tent, and in accordance with the ana- 
 logy of other passages: the doctrine 
 
 of the Apostles, i.e. Christ preached, 
 
 is the Bep-iXios ; Christ personal (air. 
 
 'IijffoO Xp.) the &KpoyuviaTos; Christ 
 
 mystical the TrXiJpuyua: comp. ch. i. 
 23. (2) That the Prophets of 
 
 the New (Grot., al.) and not of the 
 Old Testament (Chrys., Theod.) are 
 now alluded to seems here rendered 
 highly probable, by the order of the 
 two classes (arbitrarily inverted by 
 Calv., and insufBciently accounted for 
 by Theod.), — by the analogous pas- 
 sages, eh. iii. 5, iv. 1 1, — by the kuowii 
 Prophetic gifts in the early Church, 
 I Cor. xii. 10, al., — and stiU more by 
 the apparent nature of the gen. sub- 
 jecti; see above. No great stress can 
 be laid on the absence of the article: 
 this only shows that the Apostles and 
 Prophets were regarded as one class 
 (Winer, Gr. § 19. 4. d, p. 116), not 
 that they were identical (Harl.): 
 Sharp's rule cannot be regularly ap- 
 plied to plurals; see Middleton, .4rt. 
 III. 4. 2, p. 65 (ed. Bose). This pro- 
 minence of ' Prophets ' has been urged 
 by Baur (Paulus, p. 438) as a proof 
 of the later and Moutanist origin of 
 this Ep. ; surely Seirepov irpo^'^ai, 
 I Cor. xii. 28, is an indisputable proof 
 that such a distinct order existed in 
 the time of St Paul. On the nature 
 of their office, see notes on ch. iv. ir. 
 aKpoYuvuiCov] 'chief comer stone;' 
 &Kpoy<iii'. soil. \lSm; 'summus angu- 
 laris lapis is dicitur qui in extremo 
 angulo fundamentipositusduosparie- 
 tes ex diverso venientes conjungit et 
 coutinet,' Bstius: comp. Psalm cxviii. 
 22, Jer. li. (xxviii.) 26, Isaiah xxviii. 
 16, Matth. xxi. 42, i. Pet, ii, 6., In 
 I Cor, iii. 1 1, Christ is represented as 
 
54 
 
 nP02 E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 2 2 (TvvapfioKoyovixevi} av^ei eii vaov uytov Ev K.vpi(i), iv <p 
 
 the Be/x(\ios: the image is slightly 
 changed, but the idea is the same, — 
 Christ is in one sense the substratum 
 and in another the binding-stone of 
 the building ; 6 \Wos o ixp. xal rois 
 Tolxovs irw^x^t Kal Tois 6ene\lovs, 
 Chrys. ; see Suioer, Thesaur. s. v. and 
 Vol. n. p. 242, On the doctrinal 
 meaning and application of this attri- 
 bute of Christ, see the excellent dis- 
 cussion of Jackson, Creed, xi. 5, Vol. 
 X. p. 88. avTov 'Irjo-. Xp.] 
 
 'Jesus Christ Himself,' no human 
 teachers; the pronoun being obviously 
 referrednottoSe/iie\(ij)('aDgulariejus,' 
 Beng.), or to iKpoyuv. (as possibly 
 Vulg., 'ipso summo angulari lapide 
 Chr. Jesu'), but to Christ: so rightly 
 Auth. , Syr., Clarom., andappy. Goth.; 
 Copt., .asth., Arm. omit. The art. 
 before 'It/o-. X/j., the absence of ■which 
 is pressed by Beng., may not only be 
 dispensed -with (see Luke xx. 42), but 
 would even, as Harl. suggests, be here 
 incorrect; it would strictly then be 
 'He Himself, viz. Christ' (see Fritz. 
 Matth. iii. 4, p. 1 1 7), and would imply 
 a previous mention of Christ ; whereas 
 Christ is here mentioned for the first 
 time in the clause, and in emphatic 
 contrast with those who laid the foun- 
 dations; see Stier in loc., p. 394. 
 
 21. iv <Si] 'in whom;' further and 
 more specific explanation of the pre- 
 ceding clause; the pronoun referring, 
 not to &Kpoyanalif (CEoum.), but to 
 Iijff. X/). ; t4 irav e\ivix'^>' i<rTli> 6 
 Xpta-ris, Chrys. Trao-a 
 
 oIko8o[i.i{] 'all the building;' Ol^D 
 
 1 ■" 
 
 P 1 1.a [totum ledificium] Syr., 
 
 'omne illud led.,' Copt., Arm. (with 
 the distinctive n), Syr.-Phil. There is 
 here some difficulty owing to the 
 omission of the article; the strictly 
 
 grammatical translation of ircura oUo5. 
 (soil, 'every building') being wholly 
 irreeoncileablewith the context, which 
 clearly implies a reference to one 
 single building. Nor can it be readily 
 explained away; for iroo-a oIk. can 
 never mean 'every part of the build- 
 ing' (Chrys.), nor can oUoS. per se 
 be regarded as implying 'a church' 
 (Mey.). We seem therefore compelled 
 either to adopt the reading of Bee. 
 vaaa i] oIk. [with ACS' ; many mss. ; 
 Chrys. (text), Theoph.: but opp. 
 to BDEFGKLNi; majority of mss.; 
 Clem., al.], or, with more probability, 
 to class olKo5o/i^ in the present case 
 with those numerous nouns (see the 
 list in Winer, Gr. § 19) which, from 
 referring to what is well known and 
 defined {e.g. irocro 7^, Thucyd. n. 43, 
 see Poppo in loc. p. 233), can, like 
 proper names, dispense with the art. : 
 comp. TToo-a ^TTKTToXi}, Ignat. Eph. §12, 
 Pearson, Vind. Ignat. a. 10. i, and 
 Winer, Gr. § 18. 4, p. 101. It must 
 be admitted that there appears no 
 other equally distinct instance in the 
 N.T. (Matth. ii. 3, Luke iv. 13, Acts 
 ii. 36, vii. 22, cited by Eadie, are not 
 in point, as being either exx. of proper 
 names or abstract substt.), nor appy. 
 even in the Greek Pentateuch (most 
 of the exx. of Thiersch, Pentat. in. 2, 
 p. 121, admit of other explanations); 
 still in the present case this partial 
 laxity of usage can scarcely be denied. 
 The late and non- Attic form oiraJo/ti} 
 (Lobeok, Phryn. p. 421, 487), used 
 both for olKoSbpajiia and otKoS6piri(ns 
 (Eost u. Palm, Lex. s. v.), is here per- 
 haps used in preference to oUos as less 
 distinctly implying the notion of a 
 completed building; see Harl. in loc. 
 trvvapiioXoYovn^VT]] 'fitly framed to- 
 gether,' Auth., 'compaginata,' Jerome 
 (not Vulg.); present part, ; the process 
 
II. 22. 
 
 55 
 
 Kat vfieis a-vvotKoSofieiirOe eh KaTOiKtjr^piov tow Qeou ev 
 HvevfjiaTt. 
 
 was still going on. The rare verb 
 (Twap/iaXoy. ( = o-wap/ijfetv) is only 
 found here and iv. i6. Wetst. cites 
 Anthol. III. 32. 4, ■ipij,o\6yria-e Ti(pov, 
 ovgei] 'groweth;' the present mark- 
 ing not only the actual progress, hut 
 the normal, perpetual, unconditioned, 
 nature of the organic increase; see 
 Scheuerl. Synt. § 32. 4, p. 339, 340. 
 Xhis increase must undoubtedly be 
 understood as extensive (opp. to Harl.) 
 as well as intensive, and as referring 
 to the enlargement and development 
 of the Church, as well as to its purity 
 or holiness; comp. Thiersch, Apostol. 
 Church, p. 52 sq;. (Transl.). The 
 
 pres. offfw (more common in poetry) 
 is only found once in the LXX (yijv 
 aS^ovcrav, IsaiaJi Ixi. 11), and in the 
 N.T. only here and Col. ii. 19. 
 Iv Kvp£(j>] 'in the Lord Jesus Christ,' 
 the usual meaning of Kip. in St Paul's 
 Epp. ; see Winer, Gr. § 19. i, p. 113. 
 It is difScult to decide how these 
 words are to be connected; whether 
 (a) Vfith a#|ei, Meyer ; (J) with 1x7101', 
 Harl., TJsteri, Lehrb. 11. i, p. 249; 
 or (c) with vain d'ytoc (comp. Stier), 
 to which it is to be regarded as a kind 
 of tertiary predicate; comp. Donalds. 
 Gr. § 489 sq. Of these, (a) seems 
 tautologous; (ii)givesperhapsagreater 
 prominence to the special nature of 
 the holiness than the context requires; 
 (c) on the contrary, as the order shows 
 {vaiv 07. not 07. vcUi!', comp. Gers- 
 dorf, Beitrdge, v. p. 334 sq.), gives no 
 special prominence to the idea of holi- 
 ness, but almost defines, as a further 
 predication of manner, how the whole 
 subsists and is realized; — 'and it is a 
 holy temple in the Lord, and in Him 
 alone:' comp. notes on ver. 11. On 
 this account, and from the harmony 
 with iv Xive6/iaTi, ver. 22, (c) is to be 
 
 preferred. 
 
 22. Iv ^ Kal vfieCs] 'in whom ye 
 also;' further specification in ref. to 
 those whom the Apostle is addressing; 
 iv V ^ot being temporal (' dum,' Syr. , 
 but not Syr. -Phil.), nor referring to 
 the more remote vaiv k.t.X. (Eadie); 
 but, as in ver. 21, to the preceding iv 
 Kvplij), Kal with its ascensive and 
 slightly contrasting force (comp. notes 
 on Fhil. iv. 12) marking the exalted 
 nature of the association in which the 
 Ephesiaus shared; they also were liv- 
 ing stones of the great building : comp. 
 Alf. in loc. <rvvoiKo8o|JiEi<r6e] 
 
 'are builded together;' clearly not im- 
 perative (Calv.), as St Paul is evi- 
 dently impressing on his readers what 
 they are, the mystical body to which 
 they actually belong, not what they 
 ought to be. The force of <riv appears 
 to be similar to that in avviKKeurcv, 
 Gal. iii. 22 (see notes), and to refer to 
 the close and compact union of the 
 component parts of the building. 
 Meyer aptly cites Philo, de Pram. § 
 20, Vol. II. p. 427 (ed. Mang.), oldav 
 e5 <rwtjjKoSoiniiJ.ivijv Kal <rvvijpp.otrp4vriv. 
 The comma after awoiKoS. (Griesb.), 
 which would refer eh KaroiK. to aS^ei, 
 does not seem necessary. 
 Iv nvev|«.aTt] 'in the Spirit;' tertiary 
 predication ('and it is in the Spirit') 
 exactly similar and parallel to iv Ku- 
 plif, ver. 21. Two other translations 
 have been proposed : (a) 'through the 
 Spirit,' Auth., Theoph., Meyer ;-{i) 
 'in a spiritual manner,' opp. to iv 
 aapxl: i.e. the KaroiK. is irvev/jtaTtKov, 
 not x^'^po^olriTov, see Acts vii. 48 
 (Olsh.). Of these (a) violates the ap- 
 parent parallelism with iv Kvp., and 
 presupposes, in order to account for 
 the position of iv Uv., an emphasis in 
 it which does not seem to exist; while 
 
56 
 
 nP02 E*E2I0YS. 
 
 TTT m » » • ' ' TT -\ • ?' So I pray for you, 
 
 liJ. iouTOU yapiV e-yo) llai/AOS O Oe- believing that you 
 
 '*■ ' ' , , , „ know how God re- 
 
 cr^l,OV ToO XpicrroO IrjTOV Virep V^UIV vealed^to ^ me the 
 
 of the Gentiles, and gave me grace to preach it, that men and Angela 
 might learn God's manifold wisdom, faint not then at my troubles. 
 
 again (6) introduces an idea not hinted 
 at in the context, and obscures the re- 
 ference to the Holy Trinity, which 
 here can scarcely be pronounced doubt- 
 ful. It has been urged by Meyer that 
 in the interpretation here adopted 
 the ' continens ' and ' contentum ' are 
 confounded together ; but see Bom. 
 viii. 9, and observe that the second iv 
 refers rather to the act of KaroiKijais 
 involved in the verbal subst. ; ' we are 
 built in Christ, form a habitation of 
 God, and so are inhabited in and by 
 the influence of the Spirit ; ' see Alf. 
 in loc, and comp. Hofm. Schriftb. 
 Vol. n. 2, p. 105 sq. Lastly, no ar- 
 gument in favour of (6) can be founded 
 on the absence of the article, as UpeS/io. 
 is used with the same latitude as 
 proper names : see notes on Gal. v. 5. 
 The opinion also there expressed a- 
 gainstthe distinction of Harless {h.l.) 
 between the ' subjective ' and ' objec- 
 tive ' Holy Spirit seems perfectly valid. 
 For a practical sermon on this verse 
 ('the essence of religion a disposition 
 to God'), see ■Whiohcote, Serm. XLviii. 
 Vol. II. p. 383. 
 
 Chapteb hi. I. To«To« X'*P''V] 
 
 ' For this reason,' ' hujus rei gratis,' 
 Vulg., Clarom. ; sc. ' because ye are so 
 called and so built together in Christ.' 
 The exact meaning of these words will 
 of com-se be modified by the view 
 taten of the construction. Out of the 
 many explanations of this passage, 
 two deserve attention, (a) That of Syr. 
 and Chrys. (followed by Tynd., Cran., 
 Gen.), according to which ti/ii is sup- 
 plied after d^a/i. toO Xp. 'Iijo-., 54- 
 ff/iios being the predicate, ' I am the 
 prisoner of Chr. Jesus,' the prisoner 
 /car' i^oxf/v ('multa enim erat istiua 
 
 captivitatis celebritas,' Beza) ; roirov 
 xiptv then being 'for the sake of this 
 edification of yours,' ch. ii. 22. (6) 
 That of Theodoret, al., according to 
 which d Siaiuos is in apposition, and 
 the construction resumed in ver. 14 ; 
 roirov X"'/'"' ^^^ implying ' on this 
 account,' 'because ye are so built 
 together' (De W.), or more probably, 
 as above, with a wider ref . to the whole 
 foregoing subject; iKpipHs eiriora/ie- 
 vos Kal rives rjre Kal ttws iKkridip-e Kal 
 iirl rlffiv inX'qBTire, Siofiai. Kal iKereia 
 t6i> rQv S\wv Qebv /3e/3otwffot u/ras t^ 
 ■n-lcrrei, Theod. The interpretation 
 ' perbrachylogiam,' according to which 
 difffi. elfu is to be supplied (Wiggers, 
 Stud. u. Krit. p. 841, p. 431 note, 
 Meyer, ed. i), is so clearly untenable, 
 that Meyer (ed. 2) has now given it 
 up in favour of (a). This former in- 
 terpr. deserves consideration, but on 
 account of the virtual tautology in 
 roir. x^P- ^^^ virkp vfiuv, the analogy 
 of ch. iv. i, and still more the impro- 
 bability that St Paul would style him- 
 self Si(rfuos when, as he well knew, 
 others were suffering like himself (i 
 Cor. iv. 9 sq.), the latter is to be pre- 
 ferred ; see Winer, Gr. § 62. 4, p. 499. 
 The recent explanation of Wieseler, 
 which makes Siff/uos to be in apposi- 
 tion, but dispenses with all assumption 
 of a parenthesis or of an abbreviated 
 structure, is not very satisfactory or 
 intelligible; see Chron. Synops. p. 
 446. Tov Xp. 'lT|(rov] ' of 
 
 Christ Jesm,' soil. ' whom Christ and 
 His causehavemade a prisoner,' Olsh.; 
 gen, of the author or originating cause 
 of the captivity: comp. Philem. 13, 
 Seajiol ToO eiayyeKlov, and see Winer, 
 Gr. § 30. i. |8, obs. p. 170, Hartung, 
 Casm,^. 17, and notes on i These, i. 6. 
 
III. I, 2, 3. 
 
 57 
 
 Tuv eOvwv — uye ^KOv(raTe rtiv oiKovofilav T^y ■^dptros 2 
 rod QeoO t?? So9ei(Tr]t fioi eit vfia^, on Kara airoKci- 3 
 Xw'^ti/ iyveopta-Qij fioi to fiv(TT^piov, ko^wj wpoiypay^a 
 
 iirjp if,. TMV l9vo5v] 'in behalf of yoti 
 Gentiles;' iutroduoing the subject of 
 the Apostle's calling as an Apostle of 
 the Gentiles, which is resumed ver. 8. 
 2. €f76] 'if indeed,' 'as I may 
 suppose,' ' on the assumption that ; ' 
 gentle appeal, expressed in a hypothe- 
 tical form, and conveying the hope 
 that his words had not been quite for- 
 gotten. Bfye is properly 'si quidem,' 
 and if resolved, ' turn certe si ' (see 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. n. p. 308) ; it does 
 not in itself imply the rectitude of the 
 assumption made (' etyc usurpatur de 
 re quae jure sumpta creditur,' Herm. 
 Viger, No. 3 10), but derives that shade 
 of meaning from the context; see notes 
 on Gai. iii. 4. In the present case there 
 could be no real doubt ; ' neque enim 
 ignorare quod hie dicitur poterant 
 Ephesii quibus Paulus ipse evange- 
 lium plusquam biennio prsedicaverat,' 
 Estius; comp. ch. iv. 21, 2 Cor. v. 3, 
 Col. i. 23. No argument then can 
 be fairly deduced from these words 
 against the inscription of this Ep. to 
 the Ephesians (Mill, Prolegom. p. 9 ; 
 De Wette), nor can the hypothetical 
 form be urged as implying that the 
 Apostle was personally unknown to 
 his readers. ti^v olKOVo|iCav 
 
 K.T.X.] ' the dispensation of the grace 
 of God which was given to me, &o.' 
 In this passage two errors must be 
 avoided ; first, t^s Sodelffijs must not 
 be taken virtually or expressly ' per 
 hypallagen' for rrjv BodeTaav, comp. 
 Col. i. 25 : secondly, no special mean- 
 ings must be assigned either to oIko- 
 vo/da or X'^P"" OlKovoida is not ' the 
 apostolic office' (Wieseler, Synops.-p, 
 448), but, as in ch. i. 10 (see notes), 
 ' disposition,' ' dispensation ; ' t^s x^- 
 (siTOj being the gen. — not subjecti. 
 
 ((Ecum., who reads iyvupiffe, as in 
 Eec), but as the pass, iyvapla-dri seems 
 rather to suggest, — objecti, or still 
 better the gen. of ' the point of view,' 
 which serves to complete the concep- 
 tion, so. ' the dispensation in respect of 
 the grace of God, (&c. ;' — see Scheuerl. 
 Synt.% 18, p. 129, comp. Winer, Gr. 
 § 30. 2. |8, p. 170. This is further 
 explained by Sti Kard, diroK., ver. 3 ; 
 oUovoiilav xdpiTos tpijal ttjv avoKaXv- 
 yj/iv, Chrys. There is thus no need 
 to depart from the strict meaning of 
 Xiip'S : it is not ' munus Apostolicum' 
 (Estius), but the assisting and qualify- 
 ing grace of God for the performance 
 of it. els Vilas 
 
 is well translated ' to you-ward, ' Auth. 
 from Tynd. ; it is not ' in vobis,' Vulg., 
 or even ' for you ' (dat. commodi), but 
 with the proper force of els (ethical 
 direction), 'toward you,' ' to work in 
 you : ' comp. ch. i. 19, and Winer, 
 Gr. § 49. a, p. 3S4. 
 
 3. oTi K.T.X.] 'that by way of 
 revelation ; ' objective sentence (Don- 
 alds. Gr. § 584) dependent on the pre- 
 ceding ■^Koiffare k.t.X., and explana- 
 tory of the nature and peculiarity of 
 the olKoyofi., the emphasis obviously 
 falling on the predication of manner 
 KOTct aTOKdXvfj/iii, These latter words 
 are used in a very similar though not 
 perfectly identical manner in Gal. ii. 
 2 (comp. 2 Cor. viii. 8, Gal. iv. 29 and 
 note, Phil. ii. 3) : there however the 
 allusion is rather to the norma or rule, 
 here to the manner, ' by way of reve- 
 lation, ' ' revelation- wise ; ' comp. Bern- 
 hardy, Synt. V. 20. b, p. 239. 
 TO iiuoTtipiov] 'the mystery,' not of 
 redemption generally, nor of St Paul's 
 special caU, but, in accordance with 
 the context, of that which is the evi- 
 
68 
 
 nPOS E$E2I0YS. 
 
 4 ev oXlyo), irpos o SuvarOe avayivuxTKOVTe^ votjcrai Ttiv 
 
 dent subject of the passage, — Vhs ad- 
 mission of the Gentiles to fellowship 
 and heirship with Christ in common 
 with the Jews ; iivaTTipiov ydp ian rb 
 tA Idini i^altpvrjs els fid^ova rwy 'lou- 
 Salav eiyiveiap dvayayeiv, Chrys. ; see 
 Usteri, Lehrb. p. 252. On the use 
 and meaning of the word iivarripiov 
 see notes on ch. v. 32. The read- 
 ing iyvapi.(Te[Eec. with D'EKL ; many 
 mss. ; ^th. (both); Dam., Theoph., 
 al.] is distinctly inferior to the text 
 [ABCDiPGK; many mss. ; Syr. (both), 
 Yulg., Clarom., Goth., Copt., al.] in 
 external authority, and seems to have 
 been an intended emendation of struc- 
 tm:e. irpo^Ypaij/a] ' have afore 
 
 written' Hamm. ; a translation here 
 preferable to the aoristio 'wrote afore ' 
 (Auth.), as serving better to define 
 that the reference does not relate to 
 any earlier (Chrys., but not Theod., 
 Theoph.), but simply to the present 
 Epistle ; oomp. eh. i. 9 sq., ii. 13 sq. 
 The clause seems introduced to con- 
 firm the readers, the ref. being, as 
 ver. 4 clearly shows, neither to Kurk 
 dTTo/cdX. nor to p.var'fip. but to iyva- 
 plffSri ptoi rb piVffT. It was the fact of 
 this knowledge having been imparted, 
 not the manner in which he attained 
 it, or the precise nature of it, that the 
 Apostle desires to specify and reite- 
 rate. To enclose this clause and ver. 
 4 in a parenthesis {Wetst., Griesh.) is 
 thus obviously unsatisfactory. 4v 
 
 «j\C7o>] jA .iin v]»-i [iupauois]Syr., 
 
 p 7 
 
 'in brevi,' Vulg., did, Ppaxiuv, Chrys. ; 
 see Kypke, 06s. Vol. n. p. 293. The 
 meaning 'a short time before,' 'just 
 now' (comp. Theod.) is distinctly un- 
 tenable: this would be irpb oXlyov: 
 iv dXlyip in a temporal sense can only 
 mean, as Mey. and Harl. correctly 
 observe, 'in a short space of time:' 
 
 see Acts ixvi. 28, where however, as 
 in the present case, the meaning 
 'briefly,' 'with a compendious form 
 of argument' (not 'lightly,' Alf. ; see 
 Meyer in loc), is appy. more tenable. 
 Stier alludes to the common epistolary 
 expression ' a few lines.' 
 
 ^.irpbs&yinaccordancewithwhich,^ 
 ' agreeably to which,' Boil. the vpoye- 
 ypafiptimv, not h> 6\ly<p (Kypke) : from 
 what the Apostle had written in this 
 Epistle his insight into the mystery 
 of Christ was to be inferred by his 
 readers; 'ex ungue leonem,' Beng. 
 The remark of Harl., that irpbs (with 
 ace.) in its ethical use denotes the 
 relation of con/ormits/ to, seems correct 
 and comprehensive. Whether this be 
 in reference to cause and effect ( ' owing 
 to,' Herod, iv. 161, oomp. Matth. 
 xix. 8; see exx. in Eost u. Pabn, 
 Lex. s.v. b. aa. Vol. ir. p. 1157); de- 
 sign and execution ('in order to,' 1 
 Cor. xii. 7, al.); simple comparison 
 (Eom. viii. 18; Herod, iii. 34, vpos 
 Toj" waripa, cited by Bernhardy, Synt. 
 v. 31, p. 265); or, as here, rule and 
 measure (see notes on Gal. ii. 14), 
 must be determined by the context. 
 If we add to these the indication of 
 simple mental direction ('in regard to,' 
 ' in reference to,' Heb. i. 7, see Winer, 
 Gr. % 49. h, p. 360, comp. notes on 
 ch. iv. 12), the ethical uses of jt/oos 
 with ace. will be sufficiently deline- 
 ated. For a good and comprehensive 
 list of exx. see Host u. Palm, Lex. 
 s.v. Vol. II. p. 1156 sq. 
 Svvao-SE dva^iv. vofjoxii] 'you can 
 while reading, or as you read, per- 
 ceive;' the temporal participle ex- 
 pressing the contemporary act, comp. 
 Donalds. Gr. § 576. The aor. vorjcai 
 is appy. here used as marking, not 
 exactly the sudden and transitory na- 
 ture of the act (Alf. ; contrast Bern- 
 
III. 4, 5- 
 
 59 
 
 (TvvetTiv fiov ev too (xvcrt'jplifi to5 XpKTTov, S erepaii 5 
 'yeveati ovk eyvwplcrdi] rot? 11/0?? tu>v avQpmirwv, wy vvv 
 
 hardy, Synt. x. 9, p. 383), but the 
 distinct manifestations of it, the sin- 
 gle act being regarded as, so to say, 
 the commencement of a continuity : 
 see esp. Schmalfeld, Synt. § 173. 4, 
 Donalds. Gr. % 427. d. The student 
 must be careful in pressing the aor. in 
 this mood, as so much depends on 
 the context, and the mode in which 
 the action is contemplated by the 
 ■writer: see Bemhardy, Synt. I.e., 
 Kriiger, Spraehl. 53. 6. 9 ; and ob- 
 serve that Siva/iai and similar verbs, 
 ?X") Swards elfM, 8i\w, are often idio- 
 matically followed by the aor. rather 
 than the present; see Winer, § 44. 7, 
 p. 298, and the note of Matzner in his 
 ed. of Antiph. p. 153 sg. t^v 
 
 <nJv£<rCv HOI) K. T. X.] 'my insight, 
 my understanding, in the mystery of 
 Christ.' The article is not needed be- 
 fore the prep., as aiveais iv ry /ivvt. 
 forms a single composite idea; comp. 
 3 Esdr. i. 33, TTJs trvyitrews airov ivrQ 
 rd/ufi Kvpiov (Harl.), and see notes on 
 ch. i. 15. The formula amiivM iv (or 
 eh) occurs several times in the LXX, 
 2 Chron. xxxiv. 12, Nehem. xiii. 7, 
 al., and thus justifies the omission of 
 the article with the derivative subst. ; 
 see Winer, § 20. 2, p. 123. The dis- 
 tinction between avvUvai. (' to under- 
 stand,' 'verstehn') and voCiv ('to per- 
 ceive,' 'merken') is noticed by Titt- 
 mann, Synon. p. 191. rovXpi- 
 
 o-Toi is commonly taken as a gen. oh- 
 jecti, ' the mystery relating to Christ,' 
 so. of which His reconciliation and 
 union of the Jews and Gentiles in 
 Himself formed the subject : oomp. 
 Theoph. in loc. By comparing how- 
 ever the somewhat difficult passage 
 •Col. i. 27, Tov iwarqplov...6i ianv 
 Xpiffris tc ii/uji, it would certainly 
 seem that it is rather a species of gen. 
 
 vmtena, or of identity: 'Christus 
 selbstistdas Concretum deSgottlichen 
 Geheimnisses,' Meyer; comp. Stierin 
 loc. and see exx. in Soheuerlein, Synt. 
 § 12. 1, p. 82, 83. 
 
 5. 6] 'which,' soil, which fivtrT^- 
 pwv ToO Xp. ver. 4 ; there being no 
 parenthesis (see above), but that sim- 
 ple linked connexion by means of rela- 
 tives which is so characteristic of this 
 Epistle. CT^pais veveats] 
 
 ' in otlier generations, ages' ' anfiaraim 
 aldim,' Goth.; dative of time; see 
 Winer, Gr. § 31, 9, p. 195, comp. 
 notes onoh.ii. 12. Meyer, maintaining 
 the usual meaning of yevei, explains 
 the dat. as a simple dat. commodi, and 
 rots viois as a further explanation. 
 This is unnecessary precision, as in 
 Col. i. 26, d7r6 Tuv altbvav koL d/irb Twv 
 yeve&v, the less usual meaning 'age' 
 can scarcely be denied : see Acts xiv. 
 16, and probably Luke i. 50. In the 
 LXX, yeveh is the usual translation of 
 ^11, which certainly (see Gesen. Lex. 
 s. V.) admits both meanings. In one 
 instance, Isaiah xxiv. 22, even D^D* 
 
 ' • T 
 
 is so translated. The insertion 
 
 of iv before Mpcus (Bee.) rests only on 
 the authority of a few mss. ; Copt., 
 and Syr. -Phil. toIs diois 
 
 Twv dv6p.] 'to the sons of men;' 'latis- 
 simaappeUatio, causamexprimens ig- 
 norantiiB, ortum naturalem;' soBeng., 
 who however proceeds less felicitously 
 to refer the expression to the ancient 
 Prophets. This is neither fairly de- 
 monstrable from the use of D1S"t3 
 
 T T I V » 
 
 (Ezek. vii. i, al.), nor by any means 
 consonant with the present passage, 
 where no comparison is instituted be- 
 tween the Prophets of the Old and 
 of the New Test., but between the 
 times, — the then and the now. The ex- 
 pression viol tS>v diiffp. seems chosen 
 
60 
 
 nPOS E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 aveKa\v(^Qri rott dyioi^ airoarToXon avrov Kai irpo^riTtui 
 6 ev Y[vevfjLaTi, eivat ra eOvt] a-uvK\t]pov6na Kal arvva-at/xa 
 
 to make the contrast with the 07101 
 oTriffr. airov Kal ttjoo^., the QeoD 
 avOpuToi {2 Pet. i. 21, Deut. xxxiii. i), 
 more fully felt. 
 
 lis] Observe the comparison which the 
 particle introduces and suggests : ^7- 
 vwphdii fUv Tois TiiXai vpoip'fyrais, a\X 
 ovx i^s vvv' o\] yap ra Tpdy/iara eldop 
 [comp. I John i. i] dWd rois irepl 
 TUi> irpayiioroiv Trpoiypa^f/av '\6yovs, 
 Theod. Tots dY^ois diroo-roXois 
 
 avTou] 'to His holy Apostles.' The 
 epithet aylois has been very unreason- 
 ably urged by De Wette as a mark of 
 the post-apostoUo date of the epistle. 
 It is obviously used to support and 
 strengthen the antithesis to the viol 
 Tuv avBp, The Apostles were 07101 
 in their office as God's chosen messen- 
 gers, 07101 in their personal character 
 as the inspired preachers of Christ : 
 comp. Luke i. 70, Acts iii. 21, 2 Pet. 
 i. 21 (Laclim.), where the Prophets are 
 so designated. The meaning of vpo- 
 {pTJTcu is here the same as in ch. ii. 20, 
 the ' N.T. Prophets ; ' see notes on oh. 
 iv. II. iv IIveiliittTi] ' hy the 
 
 Spirit;' Auth., Arm. (instrumental 
 case) ; the Holy Agent by whom the 
 diroKdXwj/iS was given, iv having here 
 more of its instrumental force : cl (nJj 
 ycLp TO Xlvevfia iSida^e tov liirpov 
 ovK &v TOV iBviKov KopcijXioi' nerd tuv 
 avv ouTiJ trapeSi^aro, Theoph. ; comp. 
 Chrys. , who certainly appears errone- 
 ously cited (by De W., Eadie) as join- 
 ing iv III', with Tpo<p., ' Prophets in the 
 Spirit,' sc. deoTveia-Tovs. This latter 
 construction, though fairly admissible 
 (comp. Winer, Gr. § 20. 4, p. 126), is 
 open to the decisive exegetical objec- 
 tion that it is an ' idem per idem : ' if 
 Prophets were not divinely inspired, 
 'Prophets in the Spirit,' the name 
 would be misapplied, On the omis- 
 
 sion of the art. see ch. ii. 22. The 
 traces of Montanism which Baur 
 (Paulus, p. 440) finds in these words 
 are so purely imaginary as not 
 to deserve serious notice or confuta- 
 tion. 
 
 6. etvai rd ^flvrj] ' to wit that the 
 (renting are," gentes esse,' Vulg.,Cla- 
 rom., Goth.; not 'should be,' Auth., 
 Eadie ; the objective infin. here ex- 
 pressing not the design but the subject 
 and purport of the mystery : toi?t' 
 
 ^CTTi TO llVffTTJpLOV TO elpai TO ^OvTj tFvy- 
 
 K\7jpov6fia T(fi 'Itrpar/X ttjs iirayye- 
 \las, Kal (Tv/i/iiToxa, Theoph. ; comp. 
 Donalds. Gr. § 584. 
 (nivKXr|pov6|ia k. t. X.] 'fellow-heirs 
 and fellow-menibers and fellow-par- 
 takers of the promise.' It does not 
 seem correct to regard these three epi- 
 thets on the onehand as merely cumu- 
 lative and oratorical, or on the other 
 as studiedly mystical and significant 
 (comp. Stier, who here finds a special 
 allusion to the Trinity). The general 
 fact of the cvvKkripovoida is re-asserted, 
 in accordance with the Apostle's pre- 
 vious expressions, both in its outward 
 and inward relations. The Gentiles 
 were feUow-heirs with the believing 
 Jews in the most unrestricted sense : 
 thfey belonged to the same corporate 
 body, the faithful; they shared to the 
 full in the same spiritual blessings, the 
 ^7ro77eWa: see Theod. in loc. The 
 compounds o-iiwuynos ('concorporalis,' 
 Vulg., see Suioer, Thes. s.v. Vol. n. p. 
 1191) and (Tuxjit^Toxos (' comparticeps,' 
 Vulg. ; ch. V. 7) appear to have been 
 both formed by St Paul, being only 
 found in this Ep. and the Ecclesias- 
 tical writers. The verb ffvp.p.eT4x<^ 
 occurs in classical Greek, e.g. Eurip. 
 Suppl. 684, Plato, Thecet. p. 181 c. 
 Tiscft. (ed. 7) now adopts the forms 
 
III. 6, 7. 
 
 61 
 
 Kai avvfxeTO^^a rtji eTrayyeXlai eV XjOKxto) 'Iijarov Sia toO 
 evayyeXiov, ov eyev^Oijv SiaKovog Kara t^v Saspeav r^y 7 
 X'^P^'^oi Tov Qeou T^y SoOeianji fioi Kara Ttjp evepyeiav 
 
 7. ^^i SoBdatjt] So Laehm. with ABCDiFGN; 10 mss. ; Clarom., Vulg., 
 Copt. The reading is so strongly supported that it cannot but be adopted, 
 though it may have arisen from a conformation to ver. 2. ttJv SoBetcrar is 
 found in DSEKL; most mss.; Syr. (both), Goth., al. ; Chrys., Theod., al. 
 (Bee, Tisch.). 
 
 avvK\ir}p. and aivaaix. [AB'DEFGX], 
 and (Tuvfih-. [AS^GDWGii], appy. on 
 right principles ; see his Prolegom. p. 
 XLVii. TTJs eiraTYcXCas] 
 
 'the premise of salvation,' not merely 
 of the Holy Spirit (Eadie) ; for though 
 the promise of the Spirit was one of 
 the prominent gifts of the New Cove- 
 nant (Gal. iii. 14), it would here be 
 not only too restricted, but even 
 scarcely consonant with the foregoing 
 avvKKfipovofia. The addition 
 
 of ouTou after rrji iirayy- (Hec.) is 
 supported by D^DSEFGKL; many 
 mss.; Vulg. (not aU codd.), Goth., 
 Syr.-Phil. ; Theod., al., but is not 
 found in ABCD^K ; mss. ; Clarom., 
 gang., Amiat., Copt., Syr. ; and thus 
 is rightly rejected by the best recent 
 editors. iv Xp. 'Iijir. and Sid 
 
 Toi Evayy. both refer to the three fore- 
 going epithets. The former points to 
 the objective ground of the salva- 
 tion. Him in whom it centred, the 
 latter to the medium by which it was 
 to be subjectively applied (Mey. ) : t^ 
 •trefitpBilvat Kcd irpbs aureus, /cat t(^ 
 wiffrevffcu^ ov yap aTrXwff, a'Wa 5ta 
 TOV evayyeXlov, Chrys. On the dis- 
 tinction between ei> and Sia in the 
 same sentence, see Winer, Or. § 48. 
 a, p. 347 note, and comp. ch. i. 7. 
 The reading of Eec. iv rif Xp. [DEF 
 GKL; most mss.; Clarom,, Sang., 
 Boern. ; Orig. (3), al.] is rejected by 
 most recent editors in favour of iv Xp. 
 'Iriff. which is found in ABCK ; some 
 mss.; Aug., Vulg., Goth., Copt., al. 
 
 7. 47evijflr|v] 'Jficcame;' this less 
 usual form is rightly adopted by 
 Laehm., Tisch., al. ,on the authority of 
 ABDiFGN, against CD^EKL which 
 read^7ei'o^5;i' (iJcc). Thepassiveform 
 howeverimplies no corresponding dif- 
 ference of meaning (Eiiok., Eadie) : 
 ylyvopLtu in the Doric dialect was a 
 deponent pass., iyevriBriv was thus 
 usedinitfor^ei'o/iT;;', andfrom thence 
 occasionally crept into the language 
 of later writers: seeButtmann, Irreg. 
 Verhs, s. v. TEN-, Lobeck, Phryn, 
 p. 108, 109, and comp. notes on Col. 
 iv. ir. SicCkovos] 'a 
 
 minister;' so Col. i. 23, 2 Cor. iii. 6. 
 Meyer rightly impugns the distinction 
 of Harless, that didx. points more to 
 activity in relation to (fte service, iin)p- 
 irris to activity in relation to the mas- 
 ter. This certainly cannot be substan- 
 tiated by the exx. in the N. T. ; see 
 2 Cor. vi. 4, xi. 23, 1 Tim. iv. 6, where 
 Smk. is simply used in reference to the 
 master, and Luke i. 2, where iirripiTris 
 refers to the service. On the deriva- 
 tion of Sti,K. (SiijKia), see Buttm. Lexil, 
 B. V. SiaKTopos, § 40. 3 : for its more 
 remote affinities [ak- apk- 'bend'], 
 Benfey, Wurzellex. Vol. 11. p. 22. 
 ■rijv 8ci»p. Tijs x^piTos] ' the gift of the 
 grace ; ' gen. of identity, that of which 
 the gift, i.e. the ApostoKc office, the 
 office of preaching to the Gentiles, 
 consisted ; comp. Plato, Leg. viii. p. 
 844 D, Sirras 8apeds Xflp"""'! ^.nd see 
 Scheuerl. Synt. § 12. i, p. 82, Winer, 
 Gr. § sg. 8, p. 470.. rffi 
 
62 
 
 nP02 E*ESIOYS. 
 
 8 T^y Suva/neaif aurov' efiol to? e\a)(icrTOT£p[p iravroov 
 dylwv eSoOr/ fi \apiq avTij ev TOii edvecrtv evayyeXtaao'dai 
 
 9 TO ave^i)(vlacrTov TrXoi/TOS roiJ ICptarov, ko). (pcoTia-ai 
 
 So6ilirr\i [loi] ' which was given to me; ' 
 not a mere reiteration of the pre- 
 ceding Siiipedti, but associated closely 
 with the following words which define 
 the manner of the Sio-ts. 
 Kara Tijv k.t.X.] 'according to the 
 working or operation of His power ; ' 
 defining prepositional clause, depend- 
 ent, not on iyerr)6-qv (Mey.), but on 
 tt\s SoBelffTis /Jioi, which would other- 
 wise seem an unnecessary addition : 
 ' the mention of the power of God is 
 founded on the circumstance that St 
 Paul sees in his change of heart from 
 a foe to a friend of Christ an act of 
 omnipotence,' Olsh. On the proper 
 force of Kard, see notes on oh. i. ig. 
 
 8, Ijiol Tu IXttxuTToTepip] 'unto 
 me who am less than the least,' Auth. ; 
 a most felicitous translation. No ad- 
 dition was required to the former 
 period ; the great Apostle however so 
 truly, so earnestly, felt his own weak- 
 ness and nothingness (ef nal oiSiv eiftt, 
 1 Cor. xii. ii), that the mention of 
 God's grace towards him awakens 
 within, by the forcible contrast it sug- 
 gests, not only the remembrance of his 
 former persecutions of the church (i 
 Cor. XV. 9, lo), but of his own sinful 
 nature (i Tim. i. 15, diil, not riv), and 
 unworthiness for so high an ofiioe. 
 Calvin and Harl. here expound with 
 far more vitality than Est. , who refers 
 thiSTa7reti'o0po(7iJvi7Si^7repj8oX^i'(Chrys.) 
 solely to the memory of his for- 
 mer persecutions. It is perfectly in- 
 credible how in such passages as these, 
 which reveal the truest depths of Chris- 
 tian experience, Baur (Paulus, p. 447) 
 can only see contradictions and argu- 
 ments against the Apostolic origin of 
 the Epistle. On the form iXaxiffr. 
 see Winer, Gr. § 11. 2, p. 65, and the 
 
 exx. collected by Wetst. in loc, out 
 of which however remove Thucyd. iv. 
 118, as the true reading is kAXKiov, 
 Rec. reads rffic 07. with a few mss. 
 iv Tots ?flv. evoyyeX.] ' to preach among 
 the Gentiles;' explanatory and partly 
 appositional clause, the emphatic iv 
 Tols Wveaw marking the Apostle's dis- 
 tinctive sphere of action, and the inf. 
 defining the preceding ^ X"^/"' avTr\: 
 see Kruger, Sprachl. § 57. 10. 6, 
 Schmalfeld, Synt. % 192, Winer, Gt. 
 § 44. I, p. 284. To make this clause 
 dependent on Sapeav in ver. 7, and to 
 regard ifwl...avrri as parenthetical 
 (Harl.), seems a very improbable con- 
 nexion, and is required neither by 
 grammar nor by the tenor of the pas- 
 sage. Lachm. omits iv with 
 ABCX; 3 mss.; Copt.; (Alf.): but 
 the authority for retaining it [DEFG 
 KL; nearly all mss.; Syr. (both), 
 Clarom., Vulg., Goth., al.; Chrys., 
 Theod., al.] is deserving of considera- 
 tion. T^.-.TrXoBros Toii Xp.] 
 'riches of Christ,' i.e. the exhaustless 
 blessings of salvation; compare Bom. 
 xi. 33. It is dve^ixvlaiTTov (LXX, 
 Job V. 9, ix. 10, Heb. 1150 |i{<) both in 
 its nature, extent, and application. 
 
 9. Kal ^arrla-a.1 irovras] ' and 
 to illuminate all, make all see;' 
 
 ■ . 1 \A\ jcjulo [«t "1 luoeni 
 
 proferam omni homini] Syr. ; expan- 
 sion of the foregoing clause as to the 
 process (the Apostle had grace given 
 not only outwardly to preach the Gos- 
 pel, but inwardly to enlighten), though 
 appy. not as to the persons, as owing 
 to its nnemphatio position the TrayTas 
 can scarcely be thought more inclusive 
 than the foregoing to (8vri : see Meyer. 
 The significant verb ^wrfo-ai must not 
 
III. 8, 9, lo. 
 
 63 
 
 iravrai th ij oiKovOfiia tow fivo'Tiptov rou uTroKeKovn- 
 ixevov airo twv almwv ev tw Ge^ t(S ra vavra KTiaravTt, 
 iva yvooptcrd^ vvv rais apj(aii koI rati e^ovcriati ev rati lO 
 
 be explained away as if it were syno- 
 nymous with SiSafai (De W.): this 
 derivatiye meaning is found in the 
 LXX, see Judges xiii. 8 {Alex.), t 
 Kings xii. i, xvii. 27, 28, but not in 
 the N.T., where the reference is al- 
 ways to Ught, either physical (Luke 
 xi. 36), metaphorical (i Cor. It. 5), 
 or spiritual (Heb. vi. 4, al.); comp. 
 Eeuss, Theol. Chr4t. iv. 15, Vol. n, 
 p. 156 note. Christ is properly d ipw- 
 tI^iov (John i. 9) ; His Apostles illnmi- 
 nate ' participatione ao ministerio,' 
 Estius. On the use of the word in 
 ref. to baptism, see Suicer, Thesaur. 
 VoL n. p. 1491. Tisch. (ed. 7) omits 
 Kal apparently by mistake. 
 Lachm. brackets ir&ros as being 
 omitted by A, 2 mss.; Cyr., Hil., al. ; 
 to these K is now added. 
 olKovo|i.Ca K.T.X.] ' the dispensation of 
 the mystery, &c.' 'dispositio sacramen- 
 ti absconditi,' Vulg., Clarom. ;— scil. 
 thedispeusation(arrangement, regula- 
 tion) of the mystery (the union of Jews 
 and Gentiles in Christ, ver. 6), which 
 was to be humbly traced and ac- 
 knowledged in the fact of its having 
 secretly existed in the primal counsels 
 of God, and now having been revealed 
 to the heavenly powers by means of 
 the Church, On the meaning of oIko- 
 vo/ila, see notes on ch. i. 10. 
 The reading Komiavla {Eec.) has only 
 the support of cursive mss., and is a 
 mere explanatory gloss. 
 dird T(5v al<6vo)v] 'from the ages,' sciL 
 'since the ages of the world began;' 
 comp. D7il?t? Gen. vi. 4 ; terminus a 
 quo of the concealment. The counsel 
 itself was formed jrpo rav aldvuv, 
 I Cor. ii. 7; the concealment of it dated 
 avl) tUv alilivav, from the commence- 
 ment of the ages when intelligent 
 
 beings from whom it could be concealed 
 were called into existence; comp. Eom. 
 xvi. 25, fiVffTTiplov xpoi'ots aiuvtoK ae- 
 a-iyiiiiivov. t^ rd irdvxo 
 
 KT£o-avTi] 'who created all things,' 
 ' qui omnia creavit,' Vulg. , Clarom. ; 
 certainly not ' quippe qui omnia cre- 
 avit,' Meyer, — a translation which 
 would require the absence of the arti- 
 cle; comp. notes on ch. i. 12, and see 
 esp. Donalds. Cj-ai. § 306. The exact 
 reason for this particular designation 
 being here appended to rif Se^i has 
 been somewhat differently estimated. 
 The most simple explanation would 
 seem to be that it is added to enhance 
 the idea of God's omnipotence ; the 
 emphatic position of ra Tavra. (' nullft 
 re prorsus except^,' Est.) being de- 
 signed to give to the idea its widest 
 extent and application; — 'who created 
 aU things,' and so with His undoubtr 
 ed prerogative of sovereign and crea- 
 tive power ordained the very |Uuo-ti}/9ioi' 
 itself. A reference to God's omniscience 
 would more suitably have justified the 
 concealment, the reference to His 
 omnipotence more convincingly vindi- 
 cates the eiSoda according to which 
 it was included in and formed part 
 of His primal counsels. It is not ne- 
 cessary to limit TO iravra, but the tense 
 seems to show that it refers rather 
 to the physical (oiSiv ydp x^pis avrov 
 TrejTofijKe, Chrys.), than to the spiri- 
 tual creation (Calv.) . This latter view 
 was perhaps suggested by the longer 
 reading kt/o-. Sia 'IriaoS Xp. [Rec. with 
 D'EKL ; most mss. ; Syr.-Phil. with 
 asterisk; Chrys., Theod., al.], which 
 however is rightly rejected by most 
 recent editors with ABCDiPGN; a 
 few mss. ; Syr., Vulg., Goth., al. ; 
 Basil, Cyr., and many Ff. 
 
64 
 
 nP02 E$ESI0Y2. 
 
 eTTOvpavioii Sia Tijs eKK\>](riai fj -KoKviroLKiXoi crocpia toO 
 II Qeov, Kara irpoQecriv tuv alwvutv ijv eTroitjerev iv Xpitrrw 
 
 10. iva yvapurS^ vSv] 'in order 
 that there might be made known now ; ' 
 divine object and purpose of the gene- 
 ral dispensation described in the two 
 foregoing verses ; not of either of the 
 facts specified in the two participial 
 clauses immediately preceding, for 
 neither the concealment of the mys- 
 tery (Meyer), nor the past act of 
 material creation (Harl.) , could be pro- 
 perly said to have had as its purpose 
 and design i\ie present (vvi> opp. to diro 
 Twi'aMj'wi'Jexhibition of God's wisdom 
 to Angels. The Apostle (as Olsh. well 
 remarks), in contrasting the greatness 
 of his call with the nothingness of 
 his personal self, pursues the theme 
 of his labour through all its stages : 
 the iXaxicTorepos has grace given him 
 (vayyeXlaaaBai k.t.X., nay more, 0u- 
 rtffai iravTas k.tJ^., and that too that 
 heaven might see and acknowledge 
 the iroXu7ro(/ci\os ao<pla of God; see 
 Neander, Planting, Vol. i. p. 518 
 (Bohn), Tais dpxats k.t.X.] ' to 
 
 the principalities and to the powers in 
 the heavenly regions ; ' sc. to the good 
 Angels and intelligences; a ref. to 
 both classes (Hofm. Schriftb. Vol. i. 
 p. 315) being excluded, not so much 
 by ip Tois iirovp. (Alf., for comp. ch. 
 vi. 12), as by the general tenor of the 
 passage ; evil Angels more naturally 
 recognise the power, good Angels the 
 wisdom of God. On the term dpxais 
 (CO J i^ova-., each with the art. to add 
 weight to the enumeration, see notes 
 on ch. i. 2 1 , and on rois ivovp. notes 
 on ch. i. 3, 20. 8id Trjs 
 
 4KK\i](rCas] 'through tlie Church,' sell., 
 'by means of the Church;' 5ia t'^s 
 irepl tV iKK\iialav olxovofitas, Theod. 
 The Church, the community of be- 
 lievers in Christ (Col. i. 24), was the 
 means by which these ministering 
 spiritswereto behold and contemplate 
 
 God's wisdom: comp. Calvin in loc., 
 'ecolesia... quasi speculum sit in quo 
 oontemplautur Angeli mirificam Dei 
 sapientiam;' ire Ti/ieis i/mSofiev tore 
 Kaxecpoi Si rip-uv, Chrys. That the 
 holy Angels are capable of aspecific in- 
 crease of knowledge, and o^ a deepen- 
 ing insight into God's wisdom, seems 
 from this passage clear and incontro- 
 vertible; comp. I Pet. i. 12, efe a iiri- 
 BufioOffiv SyyeXoi Trapaioi^ai, and see 
 Petavius, Theol. Dogm. Vol. m. p. 44 
 sq., Suicer, Thesaur. Vol. i. p. 46. 
 iroXwirotKiXos] ' manifold,' ' multi- 
 formis,' Vulg., Clarom. ; see Oiph. 
 Hymn. vi. 11, lxi. 4. This character- 
 istic of God's wisdom is to be traced, 
 not in the irapaSoiov, by which issues 
 were brought about by unlooked-for 
 means (Sia tuv ivavrluv rd ivarrla 
 KaTwp0di0ri, Sici BavaTov fo?^, St aaBe- 
 velas Swa/MS, Si' arifitas Sofa, Greg.- 
 Nyss. ap. Theoph.), but in the iroXi- 
 rexvov (Theoph.), the variety of the 
 divine counsels, which nevertheless all 
 mysteriously co-operated toward a 
 single end, — the call of the Gentiles, 
 and salvation of mankind by faith in 
 Jesus Christ. The use of ttoXwoIk. 
 in reference to Gnosticism (Irenseus, 
 Hcer, I. 4. I, ed. Mass.) does not give 
 the slightest reason for supposing 
 (Baur, Paulas, p. 429) 'that the use 
 of the word here arose from any such 
 allusions. 
 
 II. Kard 7rp69. t«5v oWvwv] 'ac- 
 cording to the purpose of the ages; ' 
 modal clause dependent on tva. yva- 
 picrd-Q, specifying the accordance of the 
 revelation of the divine wisdom with 
 God's eternal purpose; mv niy ipiicrl 
 yiyoveir, ov vvv Si wpurro aXK dvadev 
 irpoTerAiruTo, Chrys. The gen. ran 
 aliiuuv is somewhat obscure: it can 
 scarcely be (a) a gen. objecti ('the fore- 
 ordering of the ages,' Whitby, comp. 
 
III. II, 12, 
 
 65 
 
 Itia-ov Tip Kvplcp fiixHiiv, ev w ej^O/Uei/ r^v vapprjeriav Koi 1 2 
 T^v irpocraywytiv ev ireiroiOriiTei Sia t?? ir/o-Tewj avTou. 
 
 Peile), or even (B) a gen. of the poiiU 
 o/wiew (Soheuerl. Si/nt. § i8. i, p. 129), 
 — for the Apostle is not speaking of 
 God's purpose in regard to different 
 times or dispensations, but of His 
 single purpose of uniting and saving 
 mankind in Christ, — but will be most 
 naturally regarded as (c) belonging to 
 the general category of the gen. of 
 possession (' the purpose which pertain- 
 ed to, existed in, was determined on 
 in the ages'), and as serving to define 
 the general relation of time; comp. 
 Jude 6, KpliTiv /leyaXris ■q/i.ipa!, and see 
 Winer, Or. % 30. 2, p. 169. The mean- 
 ing is thus nearly equivalent to that 
 of the similar expression irpoBeaiv... 
 irpo xpi""^" alavliDV , 2 Tim. i. 9; God's 
 purpose existed in His eternal being, 
 and was formed in the primal ages 
 ('a sseouUs,' Syr.) before the founda- 
 tion of the world; comp. ch. i. 4. 
 i\v 4iroCT|o-«v] 'which he wrought,^ 
 •quam fecit,' Vulg., Clarom., Copt., 
 'gatavida, ' Goth. The exact meaning 
 of iirol-riaev is doubtful. The mention 
 of the eternal purpose would seem to 
 imply rather ' constituit' (Harl., AH.) 
 than 'executus est' (De W., Mey.), as 
 the general reference seems more to 
 the appointment of the decree than 
 to its historical realization (see Calv. ; 
 Hofm. Schriftb. Vol. i. p. 204): still 
 the words kv Xp. 'li\<ro\> t$ KvpC^ 
 i^pav seem so clearly to point to the 
 realization, the carrying out of the 
 purpose in Jesus Christ, — the Word 
 made flesh (compare Olsh. ),^— that the 
 latter (Matth. xxi. 31, John vi. 38, 
 I Kings V. 8, Isaiah xliv. 28) must be 
 considered preferable. As however 
 St Paul has used a middle term, 
 neither vpoiBera nor iireT^Xeae, a mid- 
 dle term («. g. 'wrought,' 'made,' — 
 not 'fulfilled,' Conyb.) should be re- 
 
 tained in translation. The read? 
 
 ing is slightly doubtful. Lachm. and 
 Tisch. (ed. i and 7) insert riy before 
 Xp. with ABC^; 37. 116. al.: as how- 
 ever the title Xp. 'Iijir. i Kip, •q/iwi' 
 does not appy, occur elsewhere (Col. 
 ii. 6 is the nearest approach to it; see 
 Middl. Gr. Art. Append. 11. p. 495, ed. 
 Eose), and the omission is weU sup- 
 ported [C^DEKLK; most mss.; Ath., 
 Chrys., Theod.], we still retain the 
 reading of Rec, Tisch. (ed. 2), and the 
 majority of editors. 
 
 12. ev ^ ?xoiJi.«v] 'in whom 
 (founded in whom) we have ; ' appeal 
 to, and proof drawn from their 
 Christian experience, the relative ^ 
 having here a, slightly demonstrative 
 and explanatory force (oti SJ Sia rov 
 Xp. y^YOce!/ aTroc, Iv if ^xo/iev (firial 
 K.T.\. Chrys., comp. Theod.), and 
 being nearly equivalent to iv airif 
 ydp ; see Jelf, Gr. § 834. 2, Bernhardy, 
 Synt. VI. 12, p. 293, and note on ols 
 ore Col. i. 27. T11V irappT|- 
 
 erCav] ' our boldness,' ' fiduciam,' Vulg., 
 Clarom. ; not here 'libertatem oris,' 
 whether in ref. to prayer (Beng.), or 
 to preaching the Gospel (Vatabl.) ; 
 for, as in many instances (Lev. xxvi. 
 13 /KETi ira;5(5. Jl-l'IOOip, i Mace. iv. 
 18, Heb. iii. 6, i John ii. 28, al.), the 
 primitive meaning has here merged 
 into that of ' cheerful boldness ' (Bafi- 
 pos, Zonar. Lex. p. 1508; 'Freudig- 
 keit,' Luth.) ; that 'freedom of spirit' 
 ('freihals,' Goth.) which becomes 
 those who are conscious of the re- 
 deeming love of Christ ; Aytdaas y&p 
 ■q/iSs dii, Tou IBtov af/tOTos vpoffriyaye 
 BapjioCvras' CBoum. ; see notes on r 
 Tim, iii. 13. "rfp/ irpotrayayrfv] 
 
 'our admission;' ovx «s alxiiaKiaroi, 
 (pTial, IT poiTriX^''lf'^''j o^' <"' "■"7" 
 yviiiiTjS d^ioinevoi' Chrys., and sim. the 
 
66 
 
 IIP OS E^ESIOYS. 
 
 13 Sto aiTOvfxai nn evKOKeiv ev rais 6\i-dfeeriv fiov iirep 
 vf/Lwv, ^Tis eVrJi/ S6E,a vfiwv. 
 
 other Greek commentators; comp. 
 ^th., 'duotorem nostrum,' and see 
 notes on oli. ii. 18. The transitive 
 meaning there advocated is appy. a 
 little less certain in the present case, 
 on account of the union with the in- 
 trans. iva^prialav, still both lexical au- 
 thority and the preceding reference to 
 our Lord seem to require and justify 
 it; comp. Suicer, Thesaur. s. v. Vol. 
 II. p. 850. How ' the use of the article 
 before both nouns signalizes them as 
 the twin elements of an uuiijue privi- 
 lege' (Eadie), is not clear; see on the 
 contrary Winer, Gr. § 19. j, p. 117. 
 Lachm. omits the second art., with 
 AB^i; 2 mss. ; but in opp. to CDS 
 (D^E rvv trpoa. k. t. xa/5^)FG(FG 
 riiv irpocr. els t. ira/3/5.)KLK*; nearly 
 all mss.; Ath., Chrys., Theod., al.; — 
 authority appy. preponderant. 
 Iv Tr«Troi6r]o-{i] 'in confidence,' fteri, 
 Tov $a^^eti>, Chrys. , — a noble example 
 of which is afforded by St Paul him- 
 self in the sublime words of Eom. viii. 
 38, 39 (Mey.). The present clause 
 does not qualify wpoa-aywyli ('no 
 timorous approach,' Eadie), but is the 
 predication of manner, and defines the 
 tone and frame of mind ('alacriter 
 libenterque,' Calv.) in which the Tpon- 
 071071) is enjoyed and realized. Thus 
 then iv Xp. marks the objective 
 ground of the possession, Sick rris irla-r. 
 the subjective medium hy which, and 
 iv Teiroi.0. the subjective stateira which 
 it is apprehended: 'tres itaquegradus 
 sunt faoiendi, nam primum Dei pro- 
 missionibus credimus, delude his ac- 
 quiescentes concipimus fiduoiam ut 
 bono simustranquilloque animo : hinc 
 sequitur audaoia, qua faoit ut profli- 
 gate metu intrepide et constanter nos 
 Deo oommendemus:' Calv. XleroWri- 
 m {2 Kings xviii, J 9) is only used in 
 
 the N.T. by St Paul (2 Cor. i. 15, iii. 
 4, viii. 22, X. •/, Phil. iii. 4), and is a 
 word of later Greek: see Enstath. on 
 Odyis. III. p. 114. 4i,Lobeck, Fhryn. 
 p. 394 sq. TTJs irCo-Teios auToii] 
 
 'faith on Him;' gen. oijecti, virtually 
 equivalent to jrfor. els avT&v: see Eom. 
 iii. 22, Gal. ii. 16, and comp. notes 
 in loc. It is doubtful whether the 
 deeper meaning which Stier (comp. 
 Matth.) finds in the words, sc. 'faith 
 of which Christ is not only the object, 
 but the ground,' can here be fully 
 substantiated. On the whole verse, 
 see three posthumous sermons of 
 South, Serm. xxix. sq. Yol. iv. p. 
 413 sq. (Tegg). 
 
 13. 8kJ] 'On which account,' 
 'wherefore,' so. since my charge is so 
 important and our spiritual privileges 
 BO great ; Si.6n iniya to fivffTrjpiov ttjs 
 /cXiJiTews rifidv, Kal /leyaKa d iveincrTev- 
 Stjv iyio- Theoph. The reference of 
 this particle has been very differently 
 explained. Estius and Meyer with 
 some plausibility connect it simply 
 with the preceding verse ; ' cum igitur 
 ad tantam dignitatem vocati sitis, 
 ejusque consequend£e fiduoiam habea- 
 tis per Christum ; rogo vos, c&c' Est. 
 As however ver. 8 — 11 contain the 
 principal thought to which ver. 12 is 
 only subordinate and supplementary, 
 the former alluding to the nature and 
 dignity of the Apostle's commission, 
 the latter to its effects and results, 
 in which both he and his converts 
 (?Xo/ie>') share, the particle will- much 
 more naturally refer to the lohole 
 paragraph. The union of the Apo- 
 stle's own interests and those of his 
 converts in the following words then 
 becomes natural and appropriate. The 
 use of 5io by St Paul is too varied to 
 enable as safely to adduce any gram- 
 
III. 13, 14. 
 
 67 
 
 ?a7)*I pray "o God ToJtOU X^P'" ICafiTTTO) TO. yovard ftOV 1 4 
 
 the Fa&er to give you strength within, and teach you the in- 
 
 comprehensible love of Christ, and fill you with God's fulness. 
 
 matical considerations: see notes on 
 Gal. iv. 31. alrovpiai, |j.tj 
 
 cvKaKctv] 'I entreat you not to lose 
 heart;' ifuis (^th.) not tov GeoV 
 (Theod.) being supplied after the verb; 
 comp. 2 Cor. v. 20, Heb. xiii. 19 (2 
 Cor. vi. I, X. 2, cited by De W., are 
 less appropriate), where a similar sup- 
 plement is required. Such construc- 
 tions as 'I pray (God) that ye lose 
 not heart,' or 'that I lose not heart ' 
 (Syr.), are both open to the objection 
 that the object of the verb and subject 
 of the inf. (both unexpressed) are thus 
 made different without sufficient rea- 
 son. Moreover such a prayer as that 
 in the latter interpretation would here 
 fall strangely indeed from the lips of 
 the great Apostle who had learnt in 
 his sufierings to rejoice (Col. i. 24), 
 and in his very weatness to find 
 ground for boasting ; comp. 2 Cor. xi. 
 30, xii. J. On the form IvKaKelr, 
 not ^KKHKetp, see notes on Gal. vi. 9. 
 iv Tats 6XC<|f«<riv k.t.X.] 'in my tribu- 
 lations for you,' 'in (not 'ob,' Beza) 
 tribulationibus meis,' Vulg., Clarom.; 
 ^i* as usual denoting the sphere as it 
 were in which the faint-heartedness 
 of the Bphesians might possibly be 
 shown; see Winer, Gr. § 48. a, p. 345. 
 So close was their bond of union in 
 Christ, that the Apostle felt his afflic- 
 tions were theirs ; they might be faint- 
 hearted in his, as if they were their 
 own. The article is not necessary be- 
 fore xiirip, as ffXltj/effc can be considered 
 in structural union with inr^p ifMv: 
 comp. 6\ipe(r8ai virip nvos, -l Cor. i. 
 6; see notes on ch. i. 15. 
 t|'tis IotVv S6|a viiuv] 'inasmuch as it 
 is your glory;' reason (v/ieripa y&p 
 doia K.T.\. Theod.), or rather expla- 
 nation, why they were not to be faint- 
 hearted; the indef. relative being here 
 
 explanatory (comp. ch. i. 23, notes on 
 Gal. iv. 24, and Hartung, Casus, p. 
 286), and referring to B\i\j/e(Tiv on the 
 common principle of attraction by 
 which the relative assumes the gender 
 of the predicate; see Winer, Gr. § 24. 
 3, p. 150, Madvig. Synt. § 98. The 
 way in which St Paul's tribulations 
 could be said to tend to the glory of 
 the Ephesians is simply but satisfac- 
 torily explained by Chrys., in oiV&is 
 avTois ijfyixTiaev 6 6eo's, affre Kal rhv 
 vlov vvip avTuv 8ovifcu Kal roi)s dovXovs 
 KaKovV iva ykp ovtoi rvxaai roaovTuv 
 ayaB&v [see ver. 6] IlaCXos iSeap^Xn. 
 The personal reason, 'quod doctorem 
 habetis q.ui nuUis oalamitatibus fran- 
 gitur,' Calixt. (compare Theod.), in 
 which case rim must refer to /4<; iv- 
 KaK&v, seems wholly out of the ques- 
 tion. Glory accrued to the Ephesians 
 from the official dignity, not the per- 
 sonal fortitude {Kaprepla, Theod.) of 
 the sufferer. 
 
 14. TouTO« X'^P''"] 'On this ac- 
 count,' so. 'because ye are so called 
 andsobuilttogether in Christ,' resump- 
 tion of ver. I (roOro irdyra ii> p.4(rif 
 TeBeiKiis, dpoKa/i^avei tov irepl irponev- 
 X?! "Koyov' Theod.) ; tovtov xapiv re- 
 ferring to the train of thought at the 
 end of ch. ii., and to the ideas paral- 
 lel to it in the digression; in brief, 
 iiret^ OVTUS ijyaw^drjre irapci, Oeov' 
 CEoum. Kdf,wra r& 70- 
 
 vara k.t.X.] 'I bend my knees {in 
 prayer) to;' expression indicative of 
 the earnestness and fervency of his 
 prayer; rrjv /leri, xaTavi^eois Siriiriv 
 iffi^/iave, Theoph., comp. Chrys. Kd/t- 
 TTav yovv (usually k. M yivv in the 
 LXX) is joined with the dat. in its 
 simple sense (Eom. xi. 4, xiv. 1 1, both 
 quotations); but here, in the meta- 
 phorical sense of irpoaeix^aSai, ia ap- 
 
 F 2 
 
68 
 
 nPOS E*ESIOYS. 
 
 15 vpo9 Tov TJarepa, e^ ov iracra irarpia ev ovpavoii Kat 
 
 16 IttJ 7?? dvo/xd^erai, "iva Sw vp.iv Kara to TrXovTO? 
 
 16. dv] So ABCFGS; 3 mss.; Orig. {Cat.), Bas., Method., al. {Lachm., 
 Mey., al.). In ed. i and 2 the rarer form S^-q was adopted with DBKL ; great 
 majority of mss.; Ath., Chrys., Theod., al. {Bee, Tisch. ed. 2, 7), and on the 
 evidence then extant probably rightly. The addition of K seems however now 
 just sufficient to turn the scale; comp. critical note on ch. ii. 8. 
 
 propriately joined with vphs to denote 
 the object towards whom (as it were) 
 the knees were bowed, — the mental 
 direction of the prayer; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 49. h, p. 360. On the postm-e 
 of kneeling in prayer, see Bingham, 
 Antiq. xiii. 8. 4, and esp. Suicer, 
 Thesaur. Vol. r. p. 777. 
 The interpolation of the words tov 
 Kvplov ijiMV 'I. X. after iraripa, though 
 undoubtedly ancient, and well support- 
 ed [DEFGKLX^; nearly all mss.; 
 Syr. (both), Vulg.,Goth., al.; Chrys., 
 Theod., al.], is rightly rejected in 
 favour of the text [ABCX^ ; 2 mss. ; 
 Demid., Copt., iEth. (both), al.; Orig., 
 Cyr., al.] by nearly all modern editors 
 except De "Wette and Eadie. 
 
 15. e| oi] 'from wliom,' 'after 
 whom;' ix pointing to the origin or 
 source whence the name was derived; 
 see notes on Gal. ii. 16, and comp. 
 Xen. Mem. iv. 5. 13, ?0i) 5k Kal to 
 SioKiyeffBai, dpo/iaaSrivai ix tov ervviov- 
 Tas KoiKH povXeveffBaC Horn. II. x. 68, 
 irarpoffev 4k yeve^s dvo/j.di^ai'. Less 
 direct origination is expressed by a.Tr6 ; 
 comp. &o/iaf. OTri, Herod, vi. 130. 
 TToo-tt irarpid] 'every race, family,' 
 not 'the whole family,' Auth. ; see 
 Middleton in loc, p. 361 (ed. Bose). 
 The use of the particular term Trar/iick 
 is evidently suggested by the preced- 
 ing vaT^pa ; its exact meaning however, 
 and stUl more its present reference, 
 are both very debateable. With re- 
 gard to the first it may be said that 
 vaTpi.il, does not imply (a) 'paternitas,' 
 Vulg.jSyr., al. (Kuplat iraTijp, Kal 
 
 aXrjBQs Tarrip 6 Ocos, Theod.; comp. 
 Tholuck, Bergpr. p. 394),— a transla- 
 tion defensible neither in point of ety- 
 mology or exegesis, but is either used 
 in (6) the more limited sense of ' fanulia' 
 {metiot, Copt.; oomp. Arm.), or more 
 probably (c) that of the more inclusive 
 'gens' (Heb. nnSE^D, less commonly 
 n'UX IT'S, oomp. Gesen. Lex. s.v. 
 njS, 10); see Herod, i. 200, elal Sk 
 airQp {Ba^vXavtavJ irarpial rpeis, and 
 compare Acts iii, 25 with Gen. xii. 
 3, where iraTpia and 0u\^ are inter- 
 changed. If then, as seems most cor- 
 rect, we adopt this more inclusive 
 meaning, the reference must be to 
 those larger classes and communities 
 into which, as we may also infer from 
 other passages (comp. ch. i. 2 1 notes. 
 Col. i. 16 notes), the celestial hosts 
 appear to be divided, and to the races 
 and tribes of men (' quEeque regionum,' 
 .Sith.), every one of which owes the 
 very title of irarpib. by which it is de- 
 fined to the great Tlarrip of all the 
 Tarpial both of angels and men : this 
 title odK dtp' T^/jLuv ojirjXdev &v(ti, aKh^ 
 avudev ^\6ev els ij/ias ' Severian ap. 
 Cramer, Caten. in loc; see Schoettg. 
 Hor. Hebr. Vol. i. p. 1238, and Suicer, 
 Thesaur. s.v. Vol. 11. p. 637. 
 (Svo^idjerai is thus taken in its simple 
 etymological sense, 'is named, bears 
 the name of,' scU. of irarpia, 'dicitur,' 
 Copt, al., 'namnajada,' Goth.; see 
 Meyer in loc. All special interpo- 
 lations, e.g. 'nominantur filii Dei' 
 (Beug., comp. Beza), or arbitrary in- 
 terpretations of dco/jdf., e.g. 'esistit. 
 
III. 15, i6, 17. 
 
 69 
 
 t5? 00^;;? avTou Suvd/ji.ei KpaTatu)6t]vai Sia tou Tlvev- 
 fiaroi avTov eh top earn avQpwxov, KaroiK^crai rov 1 7 
 
 origiaem accipit' (Estius, al. ; oomp. 
 Eiick.), — meanings wliioli even KoKei- 
 adai (Eadie) never directly bears, — 
 are wholly inadmissible. 
 
 16. iva, 8^ v^iv\ 'that he would 
 grant you; ' subject of the prayer being 
 blended with the purpose of making 
 it; see notes on eh. i. 17. On the 
 •reading see critical notes. 
 Kara to irXovTOS k.t.X.] 'according to 
 the riches of His glory,' according to 
 the abundance and plenitude of His 
 own perfections ; see notes on oh. i. 7. 
 Suva|tei] 'with power,' 'with (infused) 
 strength;' 'ut virtute sen fortitudine 
 ab eo accepts corroboremini : ' Estius. 
 This dative has been differently ex- 
 plained; it cannot be (a) the dat. of 
 ' reference to ,' or more correctly speak- 
 ing, of ' ethical locality ' (see notes on 
 Gal.i. 22, andexx.inKruger,Sp?-acW. 
 § 48. 15, e^g, xPV/'^f^^ duvarol eTvat, 
 (&c.), for it was not one particular fa- 
 culty, power, as opp. to knowledge, &a. 
 but the whole ' inner man, ' which was 
 to be strengthened. Harl. cites Acts 
 iv. 33, but the example is inapplicable. 
 Nor again (6) does it appear to be 
 used adverbially (dat. of manner, Jelf, 
 Gr. § 603. 2), for this interpr., though 
 more plausible (see Buck.), is open to 
 the objection of directing the thought 
 to the strengthener rather than to the 
 subject in whom strength is to be in- 
 fused; see Meyer in he. It is thus 
 more correctly regarded as (c) the 
 simple instrumental dat. (Arm. ) defin- 
 ing the element or influence of which 
 the Spirit is the 'causa medians;' 
 eomp. if Svv&im, Col. i. 11. 
 els T&v 'ia-ia ovflpoHrov] 'into the inner 
 man; ' direction and destination of the 
 prayed for gift of infused strength; 
 the clause being obviously connected 
 with Kparaiue. (Vulg., Goth.,— appy.) 
 
 not with KaroLKija-ai (Syr., Copt., 
 iEth., and Gr. Ff.) ; and els not being 
 for ill (Beza), nor even in its more lax 
 sense 'in regard of (Mey. ; oomp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 49. a, p. 354), but in its 
 more literal and expressive sense of 
 'to and into:' the 'inner man' is the 
 recipient of it (6 x'^P'^") Sehol. ap. 
 Cram. Gaten.), the subject into whom 
 the Sipa/iis is infused ; comp. notes ore 
 Gal. iii. 27. The expression 6 laoi 
 wBp. (Bom. vii. 22) is nearly identical 
 with, but somewhat more inclusive 
 than 6 KpvirTbs ttjs Kapdtas avBpmroi 
 (1 Pet. iii. 4), and stands in antithesis 
 to 6 ?|u avdpawos (2 Cor. iv. 16) ; the 
 former being practically equivalent to 
 the vovs or higher nature of man 
 (Bom. vii. 23), the latter to the ahp^ 
 or the pAXri: see Beck, Seelenl. in. 
 21. 3, p. 68. It is within this ^o-u 
 avBpunros that the powers of regenera- 
 tion are exercised (Harless, Ohristl. 
 Ethik, § 22. a), and it is from their 
 operation in this province that the 
 whole man (' secundum interna speo- 
 tatus,' Beng.) becomes a vios cifBpoi- 
 TTos (as opp. to a former state), or a 
 jctuvbs dvBpoiiros (as opp. to a former 
 corrupt state, ch. iv. 24) , and is either 
 6 /cari Geoy KTiaBeis (ch. iv. 24), or 
 6 avaKaiVoT^/ievos els iwlyviijjtv kclt 
 elKbya, rov Kriffavros airhv (Col, iii. 
 10), according to the point of view 
 under which regeneration is regarded; 
 see Harless, Ethih, § 24. c. The dis- 
 tinction between this and the partially 
 synonymous terms TveO/jia and coCs 
 may perhaps be thus roughly stated : 
 wveviM is simply the highest of the 
 three parts of which man is com- 
 posed (see notes on i Thess. v. 23) ; 
 fovs the iri/ev/Ma regarded more in its 
 moral and intellectual aspects, 'qua- 
 tenus intelligit, cogitat, et vult ' (see 
 
70 
 
 nP02 E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 18 XpicTTov Sia Tijt vla-Teoot ev rats KapSlaif vficov, eu 
 
 notes on Phil. iv. 7) ; 6 ^ffa avBp. the 
 irveviia, or rather the whole imma- 
 terial portion, considered iu its theo- 
 logical aspects, and as the seat of the 
 inworking powers of grace: comp. 
 Olsh. ore Eom. vii. 22, Opme. Theol, 
 p. 143 sq., Beck, Seelenl. 11. 13, p. 35, 
 and on the threefold nature of man 
 generally. Destiny of the Creature, 
 Serm. v. p. 103 sq. (ed. 3). The at- 
 tempt to connect St Paul's inspired 
 definitions with the terminology of 
 earlier (0 ii>Tos dv9p., Plato, RepuU. 
 IX. p. 589 a) or of later Platonism (d 
 ivSov avBp., Flot. Ennead. i. i. 10), as 
 in Fritz. Mom. Vol. 11. p. 63, will be 
 found on examination to be untenable. 
 The dissimilarities are marked, the 
 supposed parallelisms illusory. 
 
 17. KaroiKijo-ai tov Xp.] 'that 
 Christ may dwell.. .in your hearts; ' is- 
 sue Skudresult (wa-re KaroiK^aai, Orig.), 
 not purpose (Eadie), of the inward 
 Strengthening ; the present clause not 
 being parallel to Swdfiei Kparaioiff. 
 (Mey.), and dependent on dip, but, as 
 the emphatic position of /caroiK^trot 
 seems clearly to show, appended to 
 KparaA-oidrivai with a partially climac- 
 tic force, but a somewhat lax gram- 
 matical connexion: see Winer, Gr. 
 § 44- I. p. 284, comp. Madvig, Synt. 
 § 153- The meaning is thus perfectly 
 clear and simple; the indwelling of 
 Christ, the taking up of His abode 
 (KWToiKT)(jai., Matth. xii. 45, Luke xi. 
 26, Col. i. 19 and notes, 2 Pet. iii. 13; 
 the simple form is however used in 
 Eom. viii. 9, i Cor. iii. 16) is the 
 result of the working of the Holy 
 Spirit on the one side, and the subjec- 
 tive reception of man (Sia t^j irlar.) 
 on the other; 'non procul intuendum 
 esse Christum fide, sed recipiendum 
 esse animaa nostrBS oomplexu:' Calv. 
 riv XpioTiSv] The attempt of Fritz. 
 
 (Bom. viii. 10, Vol. 11. p. 118) to show 
 that Xpc(TTos is here merely 'mens 
 quam Christus postulat,' bycomparing 
 such passages as Arist. Acham. 484, 
 KaramiJbp 'EipiirlSijv, is as painful as it 
 is unconvincing. What a contrast is 
 the vital exegesis of Ohrys., wuis Si 
 X.p. KaroiKet iv rats Kapdiais; oKove 
 aiTov XiyovTos rou 'X.purTov, 'BXeutr^- 
 fieffa iyib Kcd 6 var^p Kal vij/iov trap 
 aiT(p iroiriiToii.ev. iv Tais KopSCats] 
 
 'in your hearts;' 'partem etiam de- 
 signat ubi legitima est Christi sedes, 
 nempe cor: ut sciamus non satis esse 
 si in linguS versetur, aut in cerebro 
 volitet : ' Calv, On the meaning of 
 KapSia (properly the imaginary seat of 
 the ^vxn, and thence the seat and 
 centre of the moral life viewed on the 
 side of the affections), see DeUtzsoh, 
 Sil)l. Psychol, rv. 11, p. 203 sq., and 
 notes on Phil. iv. 7. 
 
 18. iv aYaiTD k.t.X,] 'ye having 
 teen rooted and grounded in love;' 
 state consequent on the iudweUing of 
 Christ, viz. one of fixedness and foun- 
 dation in love, the participle reverting 
 irregularly to the nominative for the 
 sake of making the transition to the 
 following clause more easy and natu- 
 ral : SoKit HOI cra^us rb, ^|^s iv o-oXoi- 
 k£<p elpriirBai, us rpos t^v ^pdfriV 
 irpos y&p TO Sip 71 vp.tv aKS\ovBov ijv 
 elirelv ifi^ij^a/iivois Kal TcBep.e\t(ii- 
 li.ivois...i Si 6i\wv diroKaraaTTiau 
 rb, Karh tov rdirov x'^P^^ ffoXoix/as, 
 CKi^ai el p.^ |8tdireTOi ovtio Trjv (ppaffiv 
 aTTOKtiTaa-Tas' Orig. Cat. The as- 
 sumed transposition of Iva {tva ifip. 
 Kal Ted. eftffx., Auth., Winer, Mey. ; 
 — but adopted by none of the ancient 
 Vv. except Goth.), which Origenthus 
 properly rejects, cannot be justified by 
 any necessity for emphasis, or by the 
 passages adduced by Fritz. (Rem. xi. 
 31, Vol. n. p, 541), viz. Acta xix. 4, 
 
III. i8. 
 
 71 
 
 KaToXajSea-Qai a-iiv iraaiv Toii dyloif, ti to ■jrAaroj Kai 
 
 John xiii. 29, i Cor. ix. ig, 2 Cor. ii. 
 4, Gal. ii. 10, 2 Thess. ii. 7 ; as in all 
 of them (except Thess. I. c. which is 
 not analogous) the premised ■words axe 
 not as here connected with the sub- 
 ject, but form the objective factor of 
 the sentence. The only argument of 
 any real weight against the proposed 
 interpr. is not so much syntactic (for 
 see the numerous exx. of similar irre- 
 gularities in Winer, Gr. § 63. z, p. 
 505, Ertiger, Sprachl. % 56. 9. 4) as 
 exegetical, it being urged that the perf. 
 part . which points to a completed state 
 is inconsistent with a prayer which 
 seems to refer to a state of progress, 
 and to require the present part, (see 
 Mey.). The answer however seems 
 satisfactory, — ^that the clause does ex- 
 press the state which must ensue upon 
 the indwelling of Christ, before what 
 is expressed in the next clause {iva 
 i^iffx-) can in any way be realized, 
 and that therefore the perf. part, is 
 correctly used. The Apostle prays 
 that they may be strengthened, that 
 the result of it may be the indwelling 
 of Christ, the state naturally conse- 
 quent on which would be fixedness in 
 the principle of Christian love. We 
 now notice the separate words. 
 Iv aYairri] 'in love,' — ^not either of 
 Christ (eomp. Chrys. ayd-nri] airoS), 
 or of God (Wolf), either of which re- 
 ferences would certainly have required 
 some defining gen., but the Christian 
 principle of love, — ^love 8 iimv irvvSe- 
 (T/tos rrjs TeXetArsjTos, Col. iii. 14. This 
 was to be their basis and foundation, 
 in which alone they were to be fuUy 
 enabled to realize all the majestic pro- 
 portions of Christ's surpassing love 
 to man; oomp. i John iv. 7 sq. 
 The absence of the article is unduly 
 pressed both by Meyer ( = ' in amando') 
 
 and Harl. {'subjective love,' 'man's 
 love to Christ'), such omissions in the 
 case of abstract nouns, esp. when pre- 
 ceded by prepp., being not uncommon 
 in the N.T. ; see exx. Winer, Gr. § 19. 
 I, p. 109, and comp. Middleton, Greek 
 Art. VI, 1, p. 98 (ed. Bose). 
 I^pij. Kal teOe)!,.] It has been said 
 that there is here a mixture of meta- 
 phors; comp. Olsh., Mey., al. This 
 is not strictly true : pij;iu is abundant- 
 ly used both with an ethical (Herod. 
 I. 64, Plutarch, Mor. 6 e) and a phy- 
 sical (Horn. Od. XIII. 163) reference, 
 without any other allusion to its pri- 
 mitive meaning than that oi fixedness, 
 firmness at the hase or foundation; see 
 exx. in Eost u. Palm, Lex. s. v. Vol, 
 "• P- i337> ai"i Wetst. in loe. 
 tva l|i<rxw<niT«] ' in order that ye may 
 he fully able; ' object contemplated in 
 the prayer for Christ's indwelling in 
 their hearts, and their consequent fix- 
 edness in love: efitrxuirire tpriHv, 
 uore ^ffxuos ttoXX^s 5ft' Chrys. : comp. 
 Ecclus, vii. 6, /it^ ou/c i^icrxv<reis i^apcu 
 iSidas. KaraXa- 
 
 P^<r6ai] 'to comprehend;' the tense 
 perhaps implying the singleness of the 
 act (see exx. Winer, Gr. § 44. 7, p. 
 296, but see notes on ver. 4), and the 
 voice the exercise of the mental power : 
 see esp. Donalds, fir. § 432. 66, where 
 this is termed theap^rqpriafOTemiddle, 
 and Kriiger, Sprachl. § 52. 8. i sq., 
 where it is termed the dynamic middle, 
 as indicating the earnestness or spirit- 
 ual energy with which the action is 
 performed. The meaning of the verb 
 {KaravoetaBai, Hesych.) can scarcely 
 be doubtful: the meaning 'occupare' 
 (eomp. Goth., 'gafahan;' Copt., tefto), 
 adopted by Eypke (06s. Vol. n.p. 294), 
 but supported only by one proper 
 example, is here plainly untenable, 
 
72 
 
 EPOS E*E2I0YS. 
 
 1 9 fxtiKos Kal pdOos Kal i/'\|/oy, yvmal re rhv vvep^aX- 
 
 as the middle voice only occurs in 
 the N.T. in reference to the mental 
 powers; see Acts iv. 13, x. 34, xxv. 
 25. t£ to irXotros k.t.X.] 
 
 ' what is the breadth and length and 
 depth and height;' certainly not 'lati- 
 tudinem quandam, (&c.,' Kypke (Obs. 
 Yol. II. p. 294), such a use of H im- 
 plying a transposition, and assigning 
 a meaning here singularly improbable. 
 The exact force and application of 
 these words is somewhat doubtful. 
 Without noticing the various spiritual 
 applications (see Corn, a Lap., and 
 Pol. Syn. in loc.) all of which seem 
 more or less arbitrary, it maybe said 
 (i) that St Paul is here expressing 
 the idea of greatness, metaphysically 
 considered.by the ordinary dimensions 
 of space ; Sii, yap roO fi-^K. Kal ttX. Kal 
 pdd. Kal V'//. t4 /liyeOos TrapeS^Xunev, 
 iireiiTiTavTa ixeyiBovs SrfKwTi,Ki,' Theod. 
 It is however more difficult (2) to 
 specify what it is of which the great- 
 ness and dimensions are predicated. 
 Setting again aside all arbitrary refer- 
 ences (i^i Tov (rravpoO <j>ij<ris, Orig., Se- 
 -ver.; ' contemplatio Ecclesiie,' Beng., 
 Badie), we seem left to a choice be- 
 tween a reference to (a) i/ AyAwri tov 
 6eou irds wavraxov iKriraTai, Chrys. , 
 T^s X'ipii'os t4 niyedos, Theod.-Mops., 
 or (6) ij ovdirT; rou Xp., Calv., Meyer. 
 If the preceding aydirri had referred 
 to the love of God, (a) would have 
 seemed most probable: as it does not, 
 and as its generalmeaning there would 
 be inapplicable here, Ifi) seems themost 
 natural explanation. Thus then the 
 consequent clause, without being de- 
 pendent or explanatory, stiU practi- 
 cally supphes the defining gen.: St 
 Paul pauses on the word if^os, and 
 then, perhaps feeling it the most 
 appropriate oharaoteristio of Christ's 
 ,love, he appends, without finishing 
 
 the construction, a parallel thought 
 which hints at the same conception 
 {vireppdXKovirav), and suggests the re- 
 quired genitive. The order jSaOos 
 K. vfos has the support of AKLX; 
 most mss.; Syr.-Phil.; Orig., Chrys., 
 Theod., al. (iJcc, TJscTi.,— whobothin 
 ed. 2 and 7 has by some oversight 
 reversed the authorities) ; and is appy . 
 rightly maintained, even in opp. to 
 BODEFG; mss.; Vulg., Clarom., 
 Syr., Goth., Copt.; Ath., Maced. 
 (Lachm.), which adopt the more natu- 
 ral, and for this very reason the more 
 suspicious order. 
 
 19. YvuvaC T6] 'and to know;' 
 supplemental clause to KaraXapiaSai 
 K.T.X., the former referring to the 
 compreheusivekuowledgeof essentials 
 (Olsh.), the latter further specifying 
 the practical knowledge arising from 
 religious experience. It may be re- 
 marked, that though the union of sen- 
 tences by re is characteristic of later 
 Greek (Bemhardy, Synt. xx. 17, p. 
 483), it is comparatively rare in the 
 Gospels. In the Epistles, but most 
 especially in the Acts, it is of more 
 common occurrence. Te is to be dis- 
 tinguished from Kal as being adjunc- 
 f£j;e rather than conjunctive: like 'que,' 
 it appends to the foregoing clause 
 (which is to be conceived as having a 
 separate and independent existence, 
 Jelf, Gr. % 754. 6) an additional, and 
 very frequently a new thought; — a 
 thought which, though not necessary 
 to (Herm. Viger, No. 315), is yet 
 often supplemental to, and a further 
 development of the subject of the first 
 clause; oomp. Acts ii. 33, Heb. i. 3, 
 and see Winer, Gr. § 57. 3, p. 517 
 (ed. 5). n^v {iircppdXX. ttjs 
 
 7Vucr«Ds dy-l ' the knowledge-surpass- 
 ing love;' the gen. YccOo-eus being due 
 to the notion of comparison involved 
 
III. 19. 
 
 73 
 
 Aovcrav t^s yvdxrewt ayairtiv tov 'Xoicttou, 'iva irXtjpa 
 0?Te ejff Trav to TrXiJow/ua tow Qeov. 
 
 in uxcp/SdXXeii/: comp. ^sch. Prom. 
 923, ^povTTjs iirep^aXkovTa kt&itov 
 Arist. Poi. III. 9; and see Jelf, Gr. 
 § 504, Bemhardy, Synt. iii. 48. b, p. 
 169. The words can scarcely be twist- 
 ed into meaning 'tbe exceeding Iotb 
 of God in bestowing on us tbe know- 
 ledge of Christ ' (Dobree, Advers. Vol. 
 1. p. 573), nor can the participle virep^. 
 be explained in an infinitival sense, 
 'to know that the love of Christ is 
 an^iXvlatfTov (comp. Harl.), — a trans- 
 lation untenable in point of grammar 
 (Winer, Gr. § 45. 4, note, p. 309), and 
 nnsatisfactoryin exegesis, — but, as its 
 position shows, must be regarded as 
 simply adjectival. The sentence then 
 contains an oxymoron or apparent 
 paradox (comp. i Cor. i. 21, 25, 2 Cor. 
 Tiii. 2, Gal. ii. 19, i Tim. v. 6), thus 
 simply and satisfactorily explained by 
 Chrys. (ed. SayUe) and CEcum., el Kal 
 vircpKCiTOi jrcunjs yvwireas avSpoTrlviis 
 [this is too restricted] i) dydmj tov Xp., 
 ofitas vfieh yvtaffeade el rbv Xp. trxoi^lTe 
 ipotKOvvTa- comp. Theoph. Tvavai 
 is thus contrasted with y»w(ns; the 
 former being that knowledge which 
 arises from the depths of religious ex- 
 perience (to Tvtji'at dvrl tov dwoKavffcu. 
 \iya, Theod.-Mops.), the knowledge 
 that is ever allied with love, Phil. i. 
 9; the latter abstract knowledge, not 
 merely djiOpiairltrq (Chrys.), and most 
 xwrtainly not \jiev&iivviioi (Holzh.), but 
 knowledge without reference to reli- 
 gious consciousness or Christian love ; 
 comp. I Cor. viii. i sq., xiii. 8. 
 a-ydiniv to5 Xp.] 'love of Christ to- 
 wards us,' gen. subjecti; not 'love to- 
 ward Christ,' gen. oijecti, as appy. in 
 I John ii. 5, 15. iva, irXcopueiiTe 
 
 jt.T.X.] 'tliat ye may be filled to all the 
 fulness of God;' object and purpose of 
 ififfxileiy KaTfiKapMat, soil, wo-re ttXij- 
 
 povaSai Traffijs dpeTijs ijs 7r\iipi;s iarlv 
 6 QeAs' Chrys. (ed. Sav.). There is 
 some little difficulty in these words, 
 arising from the ambiguity of the 
 meaning of TrX'gpwjtttt. If we adhere 
 (o) to the more strict meaning, 'id 
 quo res impletur' (see Fritz. Eom. 
 Vol. II. p. 469 sq., notes on Gal. iv. 4), 
 the words must imply 'that ye may 
 be so filled as God is filled' (Olsh.), 
 • ToC Beou being the possessive gen., and 
 TO irXiip. referring, not to the essence, 
 still less to the So^a (Harl.), but to the 
 spiritual perfections of God. Owing 
 to the somewhat obvious objection, 
 that such a fulness could never be 
 completely realized in this present 
 state of human imperfection (i Cor. 
 xiii. gsq.), De W. and Meyer adopt 
 (6) the secondary meaning of irXTJpa/jia, 
 son. irXovTos, irXijBos (see Fritz. Bom. 
 Vol. II. p. 471), the translation being 
 either, 'ut pleni fiatis usque eo ut 
 omnes Dei opes animis vestris recipia- 
 tis' (Fritz. i5.), or 'ut omnibus Dei 
 donis abundetis' (Est.), according as 
 0eo5 is regarded more as a possessive 
 gen. , or as a gen. of the originating 
 cause (notes on i Thess. i. 6). Both 
 these latter interpretations are how- 
 ever so frigid, and so little in harmony 
 with the climactic character of the 
 passage (Su^'o/iei KpaTaiaBijvai Sih tov 
 
 II>'...KaToiic5o'ai rdy Xp ha irKtipiaB. 
 
 els irav to irX-^p. tou GeoO), and with 
 the apparently weU considered use of 
 eU (not ^^z instrumental, or an ablatival 
 dat.), that we do not hesitate to adopt 
 ■(a), and urge, with Olsh., that where 
 Christ the hving Son of God dwells, 
 there surely irav to w\rip. tov Gcou is 
 already; comp. Col. ii. 9. 
 £13 irov t6 irXijp.] ' to all the fulness; ' 
 ' in omnem plenitudinem,' Vulg. , Cla- 
 rom. ; els not implying 'aeoordance 
 
74 
 
 nP02 Ea)E2I0YS. 
 
 20 Taj ^e §vvaiJ.iv(p vTrep vavra voirjcrai Doxoiogy. 
 virepeKTreptcraov uv atrovfieOa ^ voov/iev, Kara t^v Svi/a- 
 
 21 fitv rijv evepyovfievi]!/ iv >jfiiv, avT<p ^ So^a ev rp eKKXijcrla 
 
 21. iv tJ iKKKri(Tl<f Kal If XpijTip 'IijffoC] So ABCN; 73. 80. 213; Vulg., 
 Copt., Arm.; Dam. [Lachm.], and perhaps rightly. In ed. i and 2 the more 
 familiar reading Iv rg e/cKXijir/f ii> Xp, 'Iijtr. was retained, though only with D" 
 [B, Xp. 'I. ^i< TB iKKX.JKL; great majority of mss. ; Syr. (both), Goth., al.; 
 Chrys., Theod., Dam. (text), Theoph., CEomn.; Vig. (Bee, Tisch.); it being 
 easy to account satisfactorily for the variations (see note in ed. i and i). 
 Though the text is thus not wholly free from suspicion, this is still one of those 
 cases in which the testimony of K seems a sufficient addition to lead us cau- 
 tiously to withdraw a former opinion. 
 
 to' (Eadie), but with its usual and 
 proper force, denoting the ejid (here 
 quantitatively considered) or limit of 
 the irX^puffis: see Eost u. Palm, Lex. 
 s.v. els, III., Vol. I. p. 803, andcomp. 
 Bernhardy, Synt. v. 11. b, p. 218. 
 
 20. T^ 8J 8iivo(i,^v<i)] 'Now to Him 
 that is able;' concluding doxoiogy, not 
 without some antithesis (Si) between 
 Him who is the subject of the present 
 yerse, and the finite beings who are 
 the subjects of the preceding verses, 
 virip irdvTa n'oiTJo'ai] 'to do (effect, 
 complete) beyond all things;' 'peri- 
 phrasis Dei Patris emphatioa : ' Vorst, 
 That iirip cannot here be taken adver- 
 bially seems almost self-evident; the 
 order would then be needlessly arti- 
 ficial and the sentence tautological: 
 comp. Winer, Gr. § 50. 7, note 2, p. 
 376. iircpeiflrepia-irou (Sv 
 
 K.T.X.] 'superabundantly beyond what 
 we ask or think;' second member ex- 
 planatory of the preceding, uk not 
 referring to irama, but forming with 
 alroi/i. and mov/j,. a fresh and more 
 specific subject: Spa Si Sio virep^oXds' 
 TO virip Ttlvra voiTJffai ra elprjfJL^va, Kal 
 iirepeKvepis'jov srocijffni ot Troiei" (vi y&p 
 Kal irXelova ttoioCvto tuv alryiSivrw 
 Ke^oXaia fiij irKovirlus /n^re Sa\j/i\i3s 
 tKavTov iroiijaac CEcum. The cumula- 
 tive compound uirtpeic. occurs i Thesa. 
 
 iii. 10 (comp. notes), v. 13 (i?ec.), and 
 belongs to a olassof compounds (those 
 with itrip) for which the Apostle seems 
 to have had a somewhat marked pre- 
 dilection ; comp. virepviKdu, Kom. viii. 
 37 ; virfpircpuraeib), Rom. V. 20, 2 Cor. 
 vii. 4 ; vrepXtav, ib. xi. 5 ; virepvipiui, 
 Phil. ii. 9; vTrepav^dva, 2 Thess. i. 3; 
 vTTcpTXeova^, I Tim. i. 14: see Fritz. 
 Rom. V. 20, Vol. I. p. 351. It is 
 
 noticeable that iirip occurs nearly 
 thrice as manytimes in St Paul'sEpp. 
 and the Ep. to the Heb. as in the rest 
 of the N. T. ; and that of the 28 words 
 compounded with iirip, 22 are found 
 in these Epp. , and 20 of these there 
 alone. The gen. iSv is governed 
 
 by iwepeKir. as yvw<reii>s by iirep^dX- 
 \omav, ver. 19; comp. Bernh. Synt. 
 III. 34, p. 139 sq. alToi)i,e6a 
 
 ir| voo£p.cv] 'we ash or think;' not only 
 the requests we actually prefer, but 
 all thai it might enter into the mind 
 to conceive; 'cogitatio latins patet 
 qaampreces,' Beng. : comp. PhU. iv. 7. 
 ri\v IvepY. iv i^(Jitv] 'which worketh in 
 us, so. iu our souls,' 'quie operatur in 
 nobis,' Vulg., Clarom.; hiepy. being 
 here notpassive (Hamm. ; Bull, Exam. 
 II. 3) but middle (Syr., Goth., ^th., 
 Arm.), as in Gal. v. 6, where see 
 notes. On the constructions of <i'c/)7^(tf, 
 see notes on Qal, ii. 8; and on the 
 
III. 20, 21. 
 
 75 
 
 Kai ev XjOKTTft) lijcrov, «f iracraj ray "yei'eaf tou alwvos 
 
 Twi» a( 0)1/0))/ ■ 
 
 afxriv. 
 
 distinotion between the uses of act. 
 (mainly in personal ref.) and middle 
 (mainly in non-personal ref.), Winer, 
 Gj% §38. 6, p. 231. The Swa^ttis whioh 
 so energizes is the power of the Holy 
 Ghost; oomp. ver. 16, Bom. viii. 26. 
 21. ovTi^] 'to Him;' rhetorical re- 
 petition of the pronoun; — nothowever 
 in aooordanoe with 'Hebrew usage' 
 (Eadie), but in agreement with the 
 simple principles of emphasis; see 
 Bernhardy, Synt. vi. 11. 0, p. 290. 
 1^ 8a|a] ' the glory that is due to Him, 
 and redounds to Him from such gra- 
 cious dealings towards us ; ' see notes 
 on Gal. i. 5. ivTQ IkkK. Kal 
 
 iv Xp. "Itjit.] 'in the Church and in 
 Christ Jesus ;' the first member denot- 
 ing the outward proyince, the second 
 the inward and spiritual sphere in 
 ■which God was to be praised. With 
 the reading now adopted this seems 
 the clear distinction ; but it may be 
 added that even if the xal be omitted 
 (see crit. note) the explanation will 
 mostprobablybe the same: iv Xp.'Iijo-. 
 wUl be neither for Sia Xp. (Theoph.), 
 nor for (riv Xp. ((Ecum.), but will re- 
 tain its proper meaning, specifying, 
 not exactly the manner (De W.), but 
 the true element in which alone praise 
 was duly to be ascribed to God; 'it 
 any glory come from ua to God it is 
 by [in] Christ,' Sanderson (cited by 
 Wordsw. in loc). The ordinary expla- 
 nation of the more familiar reading, 
 'the Church (which is) in Christ Jesus,' 
 is objectionable, not so much on ac- 
 count of the absence of the article (for 
 oomp. I Thess. i. i, 2 Thess. i. i), as 
 on account of the then appy. super- 
 fluous character of the words (the 
 iKK\. here mentioned could only be 
 the Christian Church), which in our 
 present interpr. echo the preceding 
 
 Tou XpuTTov (ver. 19) with special and 
 appropriate force: contrast Alf. in loc, 
 who still partially connects the two 
 members; but comp. Syr., which by 
 its omission of the relative here, and 
 its insertion in Thess. II. cc, seems 
 not obscurely to favour the opinion 
 here expressed. tls irdo-as rds 
 
 7cvcds K.T.X.] 'to all the generations 
 of the age of the ages;' comp. Dan. 
 vii. 18, ?us TOU alwvos tup atuvtaf 
 3 Esdr. iv. 38, els tov aluva rod alQvos, 
 andseenotesonGaZ. i. 5. The cumu- 
 lative expression is somewhatpeculiar. 
 It is not improbable, as Grotius sug- 
 gests, that the twoformulee expressive 
 of endless continuity, yeveal yevewv, 
 Luke i. 50 (iJcc), Isaiah xxxiv. 17, 
 and aliSves rav aliJivuv, are here blended 
 together. The use of yeveal suggests 
 the use of the singular aldp, as the 
 conception of the successive genera- 
 tions composing the entirety of the 
 alav is thus more clearly presented; 
 while again the subjoined plural shows 
 aluiv also to be composed of a series of 
 almies (gen. of the content) of which it 
 is the sum and aggregation. Harless 
 finds a difference between the two ex- 
 pressions aliaves TUK aliiviav and alar 
 t3v aliiviiv, the former being rather 
 extensive, and conveying the idea of 
 ircwTes alwves, the latter being rather 
 intensive, ' sseoulum sseculorum, quod 
 omnia sajcula in se continet' (Drus.), 
 and more strictly in accordance with 
 the Hebrew superlative. This is in- 
 genious, but apparently of doubtful 
 application, as in actual practice the 
 difference between the two expressions 
 is hardly appreciable. Baur (Paulus, 
 p. 433) finds in this expression distinct 
 traces of Gnosticism: it is unnecessary 
 to refute such utterly foregone con- 
 clusions. 
 
76 
 
 nPOS BCPE2I0Y2. 
 
 IV. UapaKaXSi oSi/vuas iyu) 6 Secruioi ev "fl'aik woMhjf of 
 
 r ' / • your vocation in 
 
 Kvp!u>, a^lm irepLirarJjcrai rT,, K^aecixs ^9 rd"espoc'aVy"ir; 
 
 unity ; tliero Is but one body, one Spirit, one Lord, and one God. 
 
 Chapteh IV. I. IlapaKaXu k.t.X.] 
 
 'I exhort you then;' oommeucement 
 of the practical portion of the Epistle 
 (oomp. Bom. xii. i), following natu- 
 rally, and with an appropriate retro- 
 spective reference {ovv) to what hoa 
 preceded; ovtois outois indel^as ttjs 
 Betas evepyeo-tas rov TrKovrov, tirl ra 
 etStj irpoTpiirei ttJs aper^s' Theod, The 
 meaning of irapaKoKu will thus be 
 both here and in Eom. I. c. more natu- 
 rally 'hortor' {vapaK, to vpoTpiiru, 
 ws i-nl TO TToXti' Thom. M. p. 684, ed, 
 Bern.) than 'obseoro' (Vulg., Clarom., 
 Arm., and most Yv.), — a meaning 
 which it sometimes bears, but which 
 would seeminapplioableinthe present 
 context; see Fritz. Rom. Vol. iii. p. 
 4, and for a general notice of the 
 word, Knapp, Script. Va/r. Arg. p. 127 
 sc[. ; oomp. also notes on i Thess, v. 1 1, 
 The exact reference of oSv is more 
 doubtful: Meyer refers it to the verse 
 immediately preceding, Winzer and 
 Alford {Rom. I. c.) to the whole doc- 
 trinal portion of the Ep. ; the former 
 view however seems too narrow, the 
 latter too vague. The more natural 
 ref. is appy. to those passages in the 
 preceding chapter which relate to the 
 spiritual privileges and calling of the 
 Ephesians, e.g. ver. 6, 12, but espe- 
 cially to 14 sc[., in which the tenor of 
 the prayer incidentally discloses how 
 high and how great that calling really 
 was. On the true force of this particle, 
 see IQotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 117, 
 Donalds. Gr. § 548. 31, and oomp, 
 potes on Phil. ii. i. 
 6 8io-|ji.tos iv KypCu] 'the prisoner in 
 the Lord' i. e. ' ego vinctus in Christi 
 castris,' as paraphrased by Fritz. ; not 
 jrapaK, in Kup., a construction at va- 
 riance both with the grammatical 
 
 order of the words, and the apparent 
 force of the exhortation: see Winer, 
 Gr. § 20. 2, p. 123. St Paul exhorts 
 not merely as the prisoner, but as the 
 prisoner in the Lord; 'a vincuUs ma- 
 jorem sibi auctoritatem vindicat,' 
 Calv. comp. Gal. vi. 17. Thus Iv Kvp. 
 is not for Sid Kvp. (Chrys., Theod.), or 
 ail/ Kvp. (CEcum.), but denotes the 
 sphere in which captivity existed, and 
 out of which it did not exist ; ' in Do- 
 mini enim vinculis constrictus est, qui 
 iv Kvplip uv vinctus est,' Fritz. Rom, 
 viii. I, Vol. II. p. 84 ; comp. notes on 
 Gal. i. 24. The distinction between 
 this and 6 iicp.. toC Xp. (ch. iii. i) 
 seems to be that in the latter the cap- 
 tivity is ref erred immediately to Christ 
 as its author and originator, in the 
 former to the union with Him and 
 devotion to His service. It must be 
 conceded that occasionally iv Kvpitp 
 appears little more than a kind of 
 qualitative definition (comp. Eom. xvi. 
 8, 13, 1 Cor. iv. 17, Phil. i. 14, al.); 
 still the student cannot be too much 
 put on his guard against the frigid and 
 even unspiritual interpretations into 
 which Fritz, has been betrayed in hia 
 elaborate note {Rom. viU. i, Vol, 11. 
 p. 82 sq.) on this and the similar ex- 
 pression tV XptcTifi. On the nature of 
 this union with Christ, comp. Hooker, 
 Serm. in. Vol. in. p. 762. 
 ijs 4K\T]6TjTe] 'wherewith ye were call- 
 ed,' 'qua vocati estis,' Vulg., Clarom., 
 Goth. ; ^s here appy. standing for j 
 (comp. dat. 2 Tim. i. 9, but not i Cor, 
 vii. 20 [De W.], as there iv precedes), 
 and so violating slightly the usual law 
 of attraction, unless, following the 
 analogy of such phrases as kX^o-iv m- 
 Xe'iv, 7rap&KKy]<nv irapaK., we suppose 
 the relative to stand as usual for thq 
 
IV. I, 2. 
 
 77 
 
 eicXijflj/Te, fiera Trao-ij? raireivo(ppo(rw}]i Kal irpairt]- 2 
 TOj, /xera /xaKpoOvfxtai, avey^ofievoi aXXi/Xwi/ ei/ ayaxp, 
 
 nccMs. ijx : oomp. Winer, Gr. § 24. i, 
 p. 148. De W. indeed denies the 
 existence of such a phrase as K\ij<yii> 
 KoXerK, hut see Airian, Epict. p. 112 
 (Eaphel), Karaiffxiyeiv •njK icX^irii' ijv 
 
 2. [icTa. irdtnis Tttir.] 'with all 
 lowliiu'ss;' dispositions with which 
 their moral walk was to be associated, 
 comp. Col. iii. 12 ; /ierd ('cum,' Vulg., 
 Goth., — not 'in,' Copt.) being used 
 with ref. to the mental powers and 
 dispositions with which an action is 
 as it were accompanied; comp. Luke 
 i. 39, 2 Cor. vii. ij, and see Winer, 
 Gr. § 47. h, p. 337. 2i>v denotes 
 rather coherence (Kruger, Sprachl. 
 % 68, 13. i), not uncommonly with 
 some collateral idea of assistance; 
 oomp. I Cor. v. 4. On the use 
 
 of rdaris, comp. notes on ch. i. 8 ; and 
 on the meaning of the late word ra- 
 ■ircivo4>po(7vvTi, ' the esteeming of om-- 
 selves small because ice are so,' 'the 
 thinking truly, and because truly 
 therefore lowlily, of ourselves,' see 
 Trench, Synoii. § 42, and Suicer, The- 
 saur. a. v., where seveial definitions of 
 Chrysostom are cited. Most of these 
 openly or tacitly ascribe to the roTrei- 
 vlxppav a consciousness of greatness 
 (tott, etrriv orav fj.eya.\a Tts iavri^ 
 ffvveidCjs firjdiv fi^ya irepl avToD tpav- 
 rajyiTat) ; this however, as Trench ob- 
 serves, is alien to the true sense and 
 spirit of the word. irpavTuros] 
 
 ' iiu\'K-iu;i.i,' in respect of God, and in 
 the face of men ; see Trench, Synon. 
 § 42, Tholuck, Bergpr. (Matth. v. 5), 
 p. 82 sq., and notes on Gal. v, 23. 
 The less definite meaning of 'gentle- 
 ness' is appy. maintained by some of 
 the Vv. (Vulg. 'mansuetudine,' Goth, 
 'qairrein' [comp. Lat. oicu?-], Arm., 
 al.), and also by the Greek commenta- 
 
 tors (fao rairctvii o^o^u: Si Kal wpao!, 
 (<rTi yd,p TaTTdviv p.h ehai, 6^ii> Sk Kal 
 ipylXov Chrys. ; oomp. Theoph. on 
 Gal. V. 3) ; the deeper and more bibli- 
 cal sense however is distinctly to be 
 preferred. A good general definition 
 will be found in Stobieus, Floril, i. i 
 (18). The reading rpadriiTos, 
 
 though only supported by BOX ; mss., 
 is appy. to be preferred to TrpodrijTos 
 (Eec, Lachm., with ADEFGL; ma- 
 jority of mss.), as the best attested 
 form in the dialect of the New Test.; 
 Tisch. Prolegom. p. L. \utA 
 
 |iLaKpa6v|i(as] Hoith long-suffering;' 
 separate clause more fully elucidated 
 by the following words, dpcxopttfoi 
 K.T.X. Two other constructions have 
 been proposed; (a) the connexion of 
 iU€tA piaxp. with avex- (Est., Harl.) so 
 as to form a single clause; (b) the 
 union of all the clauses in one single 
 sentence. The objections to (a) are, 
 ( I ) that oxex. is the natm-al expansion 
 of pierd, puiKpoB. — (2) that undue em- 
 phasis must thus, owing to the po- 
 sition, be ascribed to ^erd p,aKpo8. — 
 (3) that the parallelism of the partici- 
 pial clauses would be needlessly vio- 
 lated: to (6) that the passage of the 
 general (ajius repiw.) into the special 
 (avexop.. ttXX.) becomes sudden and 
 abrupt, instead of being made easy and 
 gradationalby means of the interposed 
 prepositional clauses ; oomp. Mey. in 
 loc. The fine word pkanpodvpla 
 
 ('long-suffering,' 'forbearance;' 'us- 
 beisnai' Goth.), implies the reverse of 
 6^v8vfda, and is well defined by Fritz. 
 (Rom. u. 4, Vol. I. p. 98) as 'demen- 
 tia, quS irca temperans delictum non 
 statim vindices, sed ei qui peooaverit 
 pceuitendi locum reUnquas.' The gloss 
 of Chrys. on i Cor. xiii. 4, p,aKp6$vp.os 
 Stct TOVTO X^erat,- ^ireiS^ paKpiv rma 
 
78 
 
 IIPOS E^ESLOYS. 
 
 3 o'trovSa^ovres Trjpctv rtiv ev6r>]Ta tov HvevfAaTog ii/ T(p 
 
 Kal/JieydXriv ?x^i i'vxv" (Clarom., ' mag- 
 nanimitate'), is too inclusive and ge- 
 neral, that of Beza, 'usb cohibitione,' 
 too limited and special. On the senti- 
 ment generally, comp. James i. ig. 
 dvEx6|x(voi K.T.X.] 'forbearing one an- 
 other in love; ' manifestation and exhi- 
 bition of the iinKpoBvixla: oomp. Col. 
 iii. 13. The relapse of the participle 
 from its proper case into the nom. is 
 here so perfectly intelligible and natu- 
 ral, that any supplement of iari or 
 ■ylye<r8e (Heins., al.) must be regarded 
 as wholly unnecessary ; see notes on 
 oh. iii. 18, and Eisner, Obs. Vol. 11. 
 p. 211 sq. Iv d-ydiTTi is referred 
 
 by Lachm. and Olsh. to jirovSdtovTes. 
 Such a punctuation, though supported 
 by Origen {Caten.), seems wholly in- 
 admissible, as it disturbs the symme- 
 try of the two participial clauses, and 
 throws a false emphasis on iv dydrrri. 
 3. <nrov8dJ. nipetv] 'using dili- 
 gence to keep ;' participial member pa- 
 rallel to the foregoing, specifying the 
 inward feelings (Mey.) by which the 
 dj-^X^ o-ffai is to be characterized, and 
 the inward efforts by which it is to be 
 promoted ; ouV aTripus l(Txi<yoiJi^v elpri- 
 veieiv • Theoph. For two good discus- 
 sions of this verse, though from some- 
 what different points of view, see 
 Laud, Serm. vi. Vol. i. p. 155 sq. 
 (A.-C. Libr.), and Baxter, Works, 
 Vol. XVI. p. 379 (ed. Orme). 
 Ti)v lv<!TtiTO ToC IIv.] 'the unity of 
 the Spirit,' soil, 'wrought by the 
 Spirit' (tV iv6T. riv rh UpcO/ia (dwKer 
 ■fl/MV Theoph.; comp. Chrys., CEcum.), 
 TOV Uv. being the gen. of the origi- 
 nating cause (Soheuerl. Synt. § 17. i, 
 p. 125), not the possessive gen. (as 
 appy. Orig. Caten.), or both united 
 (as Stier, see Vol. n. p. 18), neither 
 of which seem here so pertinent: see 
 notes on i Thesa, i. 6, and on Col, i. 
 
 23. That the ref. is to the personal 
 Holy Spirit seems so clear, that we 
 may wonder how such able commen- 
 tators as Calvin and Estius could re- 
 gard rov ITi'. as the human spirit, 
 and accLuiesce in an interpr, so frigid 
 as 'animorum Concordia,' 'animo- 
 rum inter vos conjunotio.' De Wette, 
 ^whose own interpr., 'die Binheit 
 des Mrehlichen Gemeingeistes' (comp. 
 Theod. -Mops., Hvevfi., to dvayevviiaav 
 (rwfia), is very far from satisfactory, — 
 urges ivirris irlarem, ver. 13 (comp. 
 Origen), but the two passages are by 
 no means so closely analogous as to 
 suggest any modification of the simple 
 personal meaning here assigned to 
 JlveZim ; see Laud, Serm. vi. Vol. i. p. 
 162 (A.-C. Libr.). Iv tu 
 
 irvvSI(r|i,<>> TTJs clprjvTis] 'in the bond 
 of peace;' element or principle in 
 which the unity is maintained, viz. 
 'peace;' ttj^ elpiv. not being the gen. 
 objecti ('that which binds together, 
 maintains, peace,' Eiickert; 'vinculum 
 quo paxretinetnr,' Beng. ; soil, dydirrj. 
 Col. iii. 14), but the gen. of identity 
 or apposition; see Scheuerl. Synt. § 
 12. I, p. 82, Winer, Gr. % 59. 8, p. 
 470. The former interpretation is 
 plausible, and appy. as ancient as the 
 time of Origen (t-^s dydirijs (rvvdeovtrtjs 
 /card tA Hvevfw, ii>ov/jUvovs' ap. Cram. 
 Caten. p. 165), but derives very 
 doubtful support from Col. I. c, where 
 aydirri is specified, and was perhaps 
 only due to the assumption that iv 
 was here instrumental ( = Sid, (Ecum.), 
 and that (rvvd, rijs elp. was a peri- 
 phrasis for the agent {dydirri) supposed 
 to be referred to. 'Ei' however cor- 
 rectly denotes the sphere, the element, 
 in which the iv6rris is to be kept and 
 manifested (see Winer, Gr. § 48. a, p. 
 345). tliiis preserving its parallelism 
 with iv in ver. 2, and conveying a 
 
IV. 3, 4, 5. 
 
 79 
 
 trvvoetrfum t5j eip^viji. ev erSifjLa koi tv Tlvevfia, tcaQom 4 
 Kai eK\j^9ijTe eu fiia eXiriSi Tijr jfXjJo-ecoj v/xoSv' els 5 
 
 very simple and perspieuous meaning : 
 the Ephesiaus were to evince their for- 
 bearance in love, and to preserve the 
 Spirit-given unity in the true bond of 
 union, the ' irrupta copula ' of peace. 
 The etymological identity of <rivde<r //.os 
 and elpyvTi must not he pressed (Eein- 
 ers, ap. Wolf), as the derivation of 
 eifrqvT] from EIPQ 'necto' is less pro- 
 bable than from eipq 'dico;' see Ben- 
 fey, Wurzellex. Vol. 11. p. 7, Eost u. 
 Palm, Lex. a. v. Vol. i. p. 799. 
 
 4. %v (r<i>|ia] 'There is one bodyj' 
 declaration asserting the unity -which 
 pervades the Christian dispensation, 
 designed to illustrate and enhance the 
 foregoing exhortation ; the simple verb 
 ia-ri, not yiveaBe or lari (ol'irep ^ari. 
 Gamer.), being appy. the correct sup- 
 plement ; see Winer, Gr. § 64. 2, p. 
 516. The connexion of thought be- 
 tween ver. 3 and 4 is somewhat doubt- 
 ful. That the verse is not directly hor- 
 tatory, and connected with (Lachm.), 
 dependent on ('ut sitis,' Syr.; Est. 2), 
 or in apposition to (' existentes.'Est. 
 I ) what precedes, seems clear from the 
 parallelism with ver. 5 and 6: still 
 less does it introduce a reason for the 
 previous statement by an ellipse of 
 yap (Eadie), all such ellipses being 
 wholly indemonstrable; 'nulla in re 
 magis pejusque errari quam in eUipsi 
 particularum solet ;' Herm. Vi^er, Ap- 
 pend. II. p. 701 (ed. Valpy). It seems 
 then only to contain a simple asser- 
 tion, the very unoonnectedness of 
 which adds weight and impressiveuess , 
 and seems designed to convey an echo 
 of the former warning; 'remember, 
 there is one body, t&c. ;' comp. Hofm. 
 Schriftb. Vol. 11. p. 108. In 
 
 the explanation of the sentiment the 
 Greek commentators somewhat vacil- 
 late ; we can however scarcely doubt 
 
 that the o-u/io implies the whole com- 
 munity of Christians, the mystical 
 body of Christ (oh. ii. 16, Eom. xii. 5, 
 Col. i. 24, al.), and that the liveS/na is 
 the Holy Spirit which dwells in the 
 Church (Badie), and by which the 
 a-u/j,a is moved and vivified (i Cor. xii. 
 13) : comp. Jackson, Creed, xii. 3. 4, 
 Usteri, Lehrh. 11. 2. i, p. 249, and 
 Wordsw. in loe. On this text, see the 
 discourse by Barrow, Works, Vol. vii. 
 p. 626 sq. (ed. Oxf.). 
 Ka6us] 'evenas;' illustration and proof 
 of the unity, as more especially afford- 
 ed by the unity of the hope ia which 
 they were called. On the later form 
 KaOiis, see notes on Gal. iii. 6. 
 KaX lKXii6t|T£ Iv (11.$ eXir.] '«/« were 
 also called in one hope, ' ' vooati estis 
 in unfi spe,' Vulg., Clarom., Arm.; 
 Kol marking the accordance of the 
 calling with the previously-stated uni- 
 ty ('unitas spiritus ex uuitate spei 
 noBcitur,' Cooc), and h being neither 
 equiv. to ittl (Chrys.) or eh (Eiick.), 
 nor even instrumental, but simply spe- 
 cifying the moral element in which as 
 it were the kX^(7is took place ; comp. 
 Winer, Gr, § 50. 5, p. 370. Meyer 
 adopts the instrumental sense ; as 
 however there are not here, as in Gal. 
 i. 6 (see notes), any prevailing dog- 
 matical reasons for such an interpre- 
 tation, and as the two remaining pas- 
 sages in which KoXeiv is joined with ^y 
 (i Cor. vii. IS, i Thess.iv. 7) admit of 
 a similar explanation, it seems most 
 correct to adhere to the strict, and so 
 to say theological meaning of this im- 
 portant preposition: we were caUed 
 eir iXevSeptf (Gal. v. 13), and ets fwiiV 
 aliliviov {i Tun. vi. 12), but iv elprjuri 
 (i Cor. vii. 15), Iv ayicur/iif (i Thess. 
 iv. 7), and ev AttWi; comp. Eeuss, 
 Th4ol. Chrit. iv. ig, p. 146. 
 
80 
 
 nPOS E*ESIOYS. 
 
 6 Kvpioi, fiLia irla-Tii, ev ^avTicrna- eh Oeog Kal irarhp 
 
 Trjs KXrfo-eios inmv] ' of your calling' 
 so. arising from your calling ; KK-qaeus 
 being notthe gen. of possession (Eadie, 
 Alf.), but of the origin or originating 
 cause; Koivrj iarlv rm&v i\TU iK Tijs 
 (cX^crew! yevoiximj ' CEoum. : see notes 
 on I Tliess. i. 6. 
 
 g. «ts Kvpios] 'one Lord,' so. 
 Christ; placed prominently forward 
 as the Head of His one body the 
 Church, and the one divine object to- 
 ward whom faith is directed and into 
 whom all Christians are baptized ; 
 comp. Eom. vi. 8, Gal. iii. 27 ; and for 
 a good sermon on this text, Barrow, 
 Serm, xxii. Vol. v. p. 261 sq. 
 liCa irCoTis] 'one faith;' notthe 'fides 
 qua creditur, ' and still less the ' regula 
 fidei,' Grot., — ^thia meaning in the 
 N. T. being extremely doubtful, see 
 notes on Gal. i. 23, — but the 'fides qua 
 creditur,' the 'fides salvifiea,' which 
 was the same in its essence and qua- 
 lities for all Christians (Mey.). That 
 this however must not be unduly limit- 
 ed to the feeling of the individual, so. 
 to faith in its utterly subjective aspect, 
 seems clear from the use of /ila, and 
 the general context. As there is one 
 Lord, so the ij,la vl(ms is not only a 
 subjective recognition of this eternal 
 truth (Usteri, Lehrb. 11. j.. 4, p. 238), 
 but also necessarily involves a com- 
 mon objective profession of it : comp. 
 Eom. X. 10, and see Stier, Vol. i. p. 
 33, Pearson, Creed, Art. ix. Vol. 1. 
 p. 399 (ed. Burt.). iv Pctir- 
 
 Tio-|j.o] 'one baptism;' a still further 
 ' oonsequentia' to eh Kipios : as there 
 was one Lord and one faith in Him, 
 BO was there one and one only bap- 
 tism into Him (Gal. iii. 27), one and 
 one only inward element, one and one 
 only outward seal. Commentators 
 have dwelt, perhaps somewhat unpro- 
 fitably, upon the reasons why no men- 
 
 tion is made of the other sacrament, 
 the ds apros (i Cor. x. 17) of the 
 Holy Communion. If it be thought 
 necessary to assign any reason, itmust 
 certainly not be sought for in the 
 mere historical fact (Mey.) that the 
 Holy Communion was notat that time 
 so separate and distinct in its admi- 
 nistration (comp. Bingham, Antiq. xv. 
 7. 6, 7, Waterland, Eucharist, Ch. i. 
 Vol. IV. p. 475) as Holy Baptism,^ 
 for the words of inspiration are for all 
 times, — but must be referred to the 
 fundamental difference between the 
 sacraments. The one is rather the 
 symbol of union (Usteri, Lehrb. 11. 2, 
 p. 284), the other, from its single cele- 
 bration and marked individual refer- 
 ence, presents more clearly the idea of 
 unity, — the ideamost in harmony with 
 the context ; see Kahnis, Abendm. p. 
 249, 276. 
 
 6. els OeAs Kal iroTijp] 'one God 
 and Father;' climactic reference to 
 the eternalFatfter(observe the distinct 
 mention of the three Persons of the 
 blessed Trinity, ver. 4, 5, 6) in whom 
 unity finds its highest exemplification; 
 ' etiamsi baptizamur in nomen Patris, 
 Filii, et Spiritus Sanoti, et filinm 
 imum Dominum nominamus, tameu 
 non credimus nisi in unum Deum : ' 
 Coco. On this solemn designation, see 
 notes on Gal. i. 4; and for a discus- 
 sion of the title 'Father,' see Pearson, 
 Creed, Art. i. Vol. i. p. 35 sq. (ed. 
 Burt.), Barrow, Creed, Serm. x. Vol. 
 IV. p. 493 sq, o lirl ircivTwv] 
 
 'who is over all;' Kipios xal iiranoi 
 TriivTiiiv Chrys.;the relation expressed 
 seems that of simple sovereignty, not 
 only spiritual (Calv.), but general and 
 umversal(Seirjror£laycr5//io(;'ei,Theod.); 
 comp. Eom. ix. 5, and see Winer, Gr. 
 § 50. 6, p. 372, — where the associated 
 reference to 'protection' (ed, jj.is now 
 
IV. 6, 7. 
 
 81 
 
 iravTODv, o eiri iravTiav icai Ota iravrwv Kai iv tracriv,- 
 
 to each, as the Sciipture testifies. 
 
 rightly excluded : this would havebeen 
 more naturally expressed by i-wtfi : see 
 Kriiger, Spi-achl. § 68, 28. It is un- 
 necessary to remark that the three 
 clauses are no synonymous formulte 
 (Koppe),but that the prepositions mark 
 with scrupulous accuracy the threefold 
 relation iu which God stands to His 
 creatures ; see notes on Gal. i. i , and 
 Winer, Gr. I. c, and Stier, Vol. i. 
 p. 44. The gender of ir&vTdiv is 
 
 doubtful. It seems arbitrary (Vulg., 
 Clarom.) to regard ^Tri irdvTiav and iv 
 vatxtv \7i^v\ as masc, and dia iravTwv 
 as neuter, as there is nothing ia the 
 context or in the meaning of the 
 prepp. to reciuire such a limitation : 
 the gender of one may with propriety 
 fix that of the rest. As iraaiv then cer- 
 tainly seems masculine, iravTov may 
 be assumed to be of the same gender; 
 so Copt., which by the omission of 
 hob seems to express a definite opinion. 
 In Eom. ix. j, iravToiv is commonly 
 (and properly) interpreted as neuter 
 (opp. to Fritz, in loc. Vol. n. p. 272), 
 there being no limitation or restriction 
 implied in the context. The' 
 
 reading is very doubtful : ■qfuv (Bee. 
 vjuv with mss. ; Chrys. comment., al.) 
 is added to Tratriv with DEFGKL ; 40 
 mss.; Clarom., Vulg., Syr. (both), 
 Goth. ; Iren. int., Dam., al. : but 
 seems rightly omitted with ABCN; 
 10 mss.; Copt., iEth. (both); Ath., 
 Greg.-Naz., Chrys. (text), al., as a 
 not improbable gloss; so Lachm., 
 Tiseh., and appy. the majority of 
 recent editors. 8ia 
 
 irdvTwv Kal Iv iroo-iv] 'through all 
 and in all.' These two last clauses 
 are less easy to interpret, on account 
 of the approximation in meaning of 
 the two prepositions. Of these SA ia 
 
 referred (a) by the Greek expositors 
 to God tlw Father,, in respect of His 
 providence (0 Tpovouv Kal diotKuv, 
 Chrys.); (6) by Aquinas (ap. Est.), al., 
 to God the Son, 'per quem omnia 
 facta sunt' (comp. Olsh.), — a very 
 inverted interpretation ; (c) by Calvin, 
 Meyer, al. 'to the pervading charis- 
 matic influence and presence of God 
 by means of the Holy Spirit.' This 
 last interpretation seems at first sight 
 most in unison with the strict meaning 
 of both prepp., Sio pointing to the in- 
 fluence of the Spirit which passes 
 through (' transcurrit, ' Jerome) and 
 pewades all hearts [operative motion}, 
 iv His indweUiug (d- oIkuv, • Chrys^) 
 and informing influence [operative 
 rest]; see ed. i : still as the three 
 Persons of the blessed Trinity have 
 been so lately specified, as references 
 to this holy Truth seem very notice- 
 ably to pervade this Ep. (see Stier, 
 Eph. Vol. X. p. 35), and as the ancient 
 interpr. of Irenseus ' super omnia (?) 
 quidem Pater.. .per omnia (?) autem 
 Verbum...in omnibus autem nobis 
 Spiritus,' II<er. v. 18 (comp. Athan. 
 ad Serap. § 28, Vol. 11. p. 676, ed., 
 Bened.), seems to have a just claim 
 on our attention, it seems best and" 
 safest to maintain that allusion in the 
 present case (opp. to Hofm. Schriftb. 
 Vol. i. p. 184), and to refer Sid irap- 
 Toiv to the redeeming and reconciling 
 influences of the Eternal Son which 
 pervade all hearts, while iv iraxnv, as 
 above, marks the indwelling Spint ; 
 see Stier in loc, and comp. Waterl. 
 Def. of Queries, Vol. i. p. 280. 
 
 7. 'Evl Bi iKaoTtp '^jj.uv] 'But to 
 eachofus,' 'to each one individually:' 
 further inculcation of this unity in 
 what might at first sight have seemed 
 
 O 
 
82 nPOS E*E2I0YX 
 
 8 TO /JLerpov T>ji ootoeay tou XpKTTOv, oio Ae'yei 'Ai/a- 
 
 to militate against it ; Si neither being 
 transitional (eomp. Eadie), nor en- 
 countering any objection (Grot., comp. 
 Theopb.), but merely suggesting the. 
 contrast between the individual and 
 the Tonres previously mentioned, ver. 
 6. In the general distribution of 
 gifts, implied in the d ScAs iy trainv, 
 no single individual is overlooked (i 
 Cor. xii. 1 1, SMipoOv ISlq. iK^artf) ; each 
 has bis peculiar gift,each can and ought 
 to contribute his share to preserving 
 ' the unity of the Spirit : ' bo in effect 
 Chrys., who in the main has rightly 
 felt and explained the connexion, tA 
 iravTwy K€ipa\aLUjdiffrepaf ^Tjtrtf Koiv^ 
 irivToiv iart, rb ^ajrTi<r^a k.t.\. ei di 
 n 6 deiya irXioy ?X" ^'' '"'? Xop/ir^iaT(, 
 ;u5j aXyei, See also Theod.-Mops. in 
 loc. ISoSt] ^ x''P''S] ' the 
 
 grace was given,' sc. by our Lord after 
 His ascension; x^ip's however not 
 being simply equivalent to xap'ff/ia 
 (='gift of grace,' Peile), but, as De 
 W. rightly observes, retaining some 
 shade of a transitive force, and denot- 
 ing the energizing grace which mani- 
 fests itself in the peculiar gift ; comp. 
 Eom. xii. 6. The omission 
 
 of the art. (LacJim. with BDiFGL ; 
 S mss. ; Dam.) is due appy. to an error 
 in transcription, caused by the preced- 
 ing )7, by which it became absorbed, 
 and is retained by Tisch. (with ACD" 
 EKN; great majority of mss.; Chrys., 
 Theod., al.), and most recent editors. 
 Kara rd [i^rpov k.t.X.'] ' according to 
 the measure of the gift of Christ,' scil. 
 'in proportion to the amount of the 
 gift which Christ gives,' aaeHis rfiv 
 iavTov SbjpeSiy ^/catrry ymuv 6 8eaT6TTjs 
 iwe/idrpiio-e Xpicrris • Theod. -Mops, ; 
 Sapcas being thus a simple possessive 
 gen. (the measure which the gift has, 
 which belongs to and defines the 
 gift), and XpumO the gen, of ablation 
 
 (Donalds. Gr. § 451), or more specifi- 
 cally, of the agent, the giver (compare 
 Suipehs x^'ros, Plato, Leg. viii. 844 d, 
 and see notes ore i These, i. 6) ; not of 
 the receiver (Oeder ap.Wolf), — auidea 
 which is in no sort of harmony with 
 the context, ISaxey dd/iara, ver. 8; see 
 a Cor, ix. I g. Stier very infelioitously 
 (in point of grammar) endeavours to 
 unite both. 
 
 8. Sto Myei] ' On which account He 
 saithj ' on account of this bestowal of 
 the gift of Christ, and that in differing 
 measures; — ori, ^rjaty, tj x^pts dujpel 
 icrn ToO X/3. koI airos ixerpTiaat ISukcv, 
 &Kove, <l>r]trl, toS AaviS' CEcum. The 
 diificulties of this verse, both in regard, 
 to the connexion, the source, and the 
 form of the citation, are very great, 
 and must be separately, though briefly 
 noticed. {i)Gonnexion. There is clear- 
 ly no parenthesis ; verse 8 is to be 
 closely connected with verse 7, and 
 regarded as a scriptural confirmation 
 of its assertions. These assertions in- 
 volve twoseparatemomentsof thought, 
 (a) the primary, that each individual 
 has his peculiar and appropriate gifts, 
 further elucidated and exemphfied in 
 ver. II ; (S) the secondary, that these 
 gifts are conferred hy Christ. The in- 
 trinsic rather than the contextual im- 
 portance of (6) induces the Apostle to 
 pause and add a special confirmation 
 from Scripture. The cardinal words 
 are thus so obviously iS69ri, Sapea, 
 and ISuKey S6/MTa, that it is singular 
 how so good a commentator as Olsh. 
 could have supposed the stress of the 
 citation to be on toTs ayffp. 
 (2) The source of the citation is not 
 any Christian hymn (Storr, Opusc. in. 
 p. 309), but Psalm Ixviii.,— a psalm of 
 which the style, age, purport, and al- 
 lusions, have been most differently 
 estimated and explained (for detaUs 
 
IV. 8. 
 
 53 
 
 ^ay els v^Oi »;;(^aXcoTeucrei/ at-)(^fjLa\a)(Tiav, eScoKev So/xara 
 
 8. eSuKev] The reading here is somewhat doubtful. Tisch. (ed. 7) prefixes 
 KaiwithBCiC'D'KLN*; nearly aU mss. ; Goth. , Syr. (both),al.; Orig., Chiys., 
 Theod., al. (Bee, Alf.): Lachm. on the contrary omits with AC^DiEFGNi; 
 mss.; Vulg., Clarom., Copt.; Iren. (interpr.), Tertull., al. (TiscTi. ed. 2); and 
 appy. rightly, as an insertion for the sake of keeping up the connexion seems 
 more probable than a conformation to the LXX, where the Kal is omitted. 
 
 see Eeuss on Ps. Ixviii,), but which 
 may with high probability be deemed 
 a hymn of victory in honour of Jeho- 
 vah, the God of battles (Hengst. opp. 
 to J. Olsh.), of high originality {Hitzig 
 opp. to Ewald), and composed by Da- 
 vid on the taking of Eabbah (Hengst. 
 opp. to Eeuss, J. Olsh.). "We have 
 therefore no reason whatever to enter- 
 tain any doubt of its inspired and 
 prophetic character ; comp. PhiUips, 
 Psalms, Vol. n. p. 79. (3) The 
 
 form of citation is the real difficulty ; 
 the words of the Psalm are Rng? 
 DnS3 nwne, in LXX, SlajSts S6fiara 
 
 ly dvSpiiircp [-Troir, Alex., Compl., Aid.]. 
 The difference in St Paul's citation is 
 palpable, and, we are bound in candour 
 to say, does not appear diminished by 
 any of the proposed reconciliations ; 
 for even assuming that ng? = ' danda 
 sumsit,' 'he took only to give' (comp. 
 Gen. XV. 9, xviii. 5, xxvii. 13, and see 
 Snrenhus. B//3X. KaraXX. p. 585), stiU 
 the nature of the gifts, which in one 
 case were reluctant (see Hengst.), in 
 the other spontaneous, appears essen- 
 tially different. We admit then 
 frankly and freely the verbal difference, 
 but remembering that the Apostle 
 wrote under the inspiration of the 
 Holy Ghost, we recognise here nei- 
 ther imperfect memory, precipitation 
 (Eiick.) ,arbitrary change (Calv. ; comp. 
 Theod.-Mops.), accommodation (Mo- 
 ms), nor Eabbinical interpretation 
 (Mey.), but simply the fact that the 
 Psahn, and esp. ver. 18, had a Mes- 
 
 sianic reference, and bore within it a 
 further, fuller, and deeper meaning. 
 This meaning the inspired Apostle, by 
 a slight change of language, and sub- 
 stitution of iSuKi for the more dubious 
 np7, succinctly, suggestively, and au- 
 thoritatively unfolds: compare notes 
 ore Gal. iii. 16. We now proceed to 
 the grammatical details. 
 Xfyei] 'He saith,' so. 6 9e6s, not ■q ypa- 
 <pr). This latter nominative is several 
 times inserted by St Paul (Eom. iv. 3, 
 ix. 17, X. II, Gal. iv. 30, i Tim. v. 18), 
 but is not therefore to be regularly 
 supplied whenever there is an ellipsis 
 (Bos, Bllips. p. 54), without reference 
 to the nature of the passage. The 
 surest, and in fact only guide, is the 
 context: where that affords no certain 
 hint, we fall back upon the natural 
 subject, d 9eo's, whose words the Scrip- 
 tures are; see notes on Gal. iii. 16. 
 dvaPcls cls vi|#os] 'Having ascended 
 on high;' not 'ascendens,' "Vulg., Cla- 
 rom., but 'qumn ascendisset,' Beza;— 
 thereferencebeingobviouslytoChrist's 
 ascent into heaven (Barrow, Creed, 
 Vol. VI. p. 358, Pearson, Creed, Art. 
 VI. Vol, X. p. 323, ed. Burt.), and the 
 aor. part, here being temporal, and, 
 according to its more common use, de- 
 noting an action preceding (never in 
 the N. T. subsequent to, see Winer, Gr. 
 § 45. 6. b, p. 316) that of the finite 
 verb: see Bemhardy, Synt. x. 9, p. 
 383, Kruger, Sprachl. § 56. 10. i. Our 
 Lord, it may be urged, gave the Holy 
 Spirit before His ascension (John xx. 
 32) ; but this was only an ' arrha Pen- 
 
 G 2 
 
84 
 
 nP02 E*E2I0Y2. 
 
 9 Toh avOpanroii. to Se ave^ij Ti eo-Tif ei /x^ OT^ Ka\ 
 lO KaTe/3>} 6JJ ra KUTwrepa t?? 7?? ; 6 Kara^ag avroi 
 
 teoostes, ' Beng. , a limited (Alford) and 
 preparatory gift of the Holy Spirit ; 
 see Liioke in loc. On this text, as 
 cited from Psalm Ixviii., see a good 
 sermon by Andrewes, Serm. vii. Vol. 
 in. p. 221 (A.-C. Libr.). VXV-"^' 
 
 \(uT. alxii'dXaxrCav] 'He led captivity 
 captive,' 'captivam duxit oaptivita- 
 tem,' Vulg., Clarom.; the abstract 
 alxf-oKbxr. being used for the concrete 
 alxin^oKi^Tovs (comp. Numb. xxxi. 12, 
 2 Chron. xxviii. 11, 13, and see exx. 
 Jelf, Gr. % 353), and serving by its 
 connexion with the cognate verb to 
 enhance and slightly intensify itj 
 comp. Winer, Gr. % 32. 2, p. 201, and 
 see the copious list of exx. in Lobeck, 
 Paralip. p. 498 sq. Wlio constituted 
 this alxp-a^uo-la has been much dis- 
 cussed. That the captives were not 
 {a) Satan's prisoners (dvdpiiTom iirh rrjv 
 ToQ 5tap6\ov Tvpavvlba Karexofi^vovs, 
 Theod.-Mops. ; comp. Just. Mart. 
 Trypho, § 39, Vol. n. p. 128 [ed. Otto], 
 and Theod. in Zoc .) seems clear from the 
 subsequent mentionofacSpiiTTois, which 
 (though not so in the original) seems 
 here to refer to a different class to the 
 captives. Nor (6) can they be the 
 souls of the righteous in Hades (Es- 
 tius;comp.£t)a72p.Mcod.§24,inThilo, 
 Codex Apocryph. p. 747), as, setting 
 aside other reasons (' captives non duci 
 in libertatem, sed hostes in captivita- 
 tem,' Calov.), the above interpr. of 
 the part, dvapas seems seriously op- 
 posed to such a view. If however (c) 
 we regard 'the captivity' as captive 
 and subjugated enemies (Meyer, De 
 W.), the enemies of Christ,— Satan, 
 Sin, and Death, — we preserve the an- 
 alogy of the comparison (comp. Alf.), 
 and gain a full and forcible meaning: 
 so rightly Ohrys., alxiioKwrov yhp top 
 ripavvov fXo/Se (not Kariipyriae, which 
 
 with regard to Death is mainly future, 
 I Cor. XV. 26) Tov SiojSoXoy X^u koX 
 TOP Bavarov Kol tijv dp&v Kal tt]v ap-ap- 
 rlav: comp. CEcum. -i, Theoph. 
 ihaKiv 86|ioTo] 'He gave gifts,' sc. 
 spiritual gifts; comp. iSoBrj ri x^P"! 
 ver. 7, and as a special and particular 
 illustration, Acts ii. 33. 
 
 9. TO Sk dv^Prj] 'Now that He as- 
 cended,' sciL 'now the predication of 
 His ascent,' not 'the word avi^ri,' as 
 dvapis, not dvi^rj, precedes ; 5^ here 
 marking a slight explanatory transi- 
 tion; Hartung, Partik. S^, vs. 3, Vol. i. 
 p. 165. To evince stiU more clearly 
 the truth and correctness of the Mes- 
 sianic application of the words just 
 cited, St Paul urges the antithesis im- 
 plied by dv^pr), viz. Karipij, a predica- 
 tion only applicable to Christ; comp. 
 Hofm. Schriftb. Vol. n. r , p. 344, where 
 this and the preceding verses are fully 
 investigated. t£ Iotiv el |iii 
 
 K.T.X.] 'what is it, wliat doth it imply 
 (Matth. ix. 13, John xvi. 17; comp. 
 notes on Gal. iii. 19), except that He 
 not only ascended but also descended?' 
 the tacit assumption, as Meyer ob- 
 serves, being clearly this, that He who 
 is the subject of the citation is One 
 whose seat was heaven, — no man, but 
 a giver of gifts to men; especially 
 comp. John iii. 13. The insei'- 
 
 tion of irpCiTov after KaT^^rj {Eec. with 
 BC^KLN^; most mss. ; Aug., Vulg., 
 Goth., Syr. (both); Theod., al.) seems 
 clearly to have arisen from an expla- 
 natory gloss ; and that of /Upri after 
 Karwrepa, though strongly supported 
 (Rec, Lachm., with ABCD'KLN; near- 
 ly all mss. ; Vulg., al. ), to be still fairly 
 attributable to the same origin, 
 els rd KaTurepaTijs Trjs] 'to the lower 
 (parts) of the earth,' 'in loca quae sub- 
 ter terram,' Copt., 'subter terram,' 
 
IV. 9, 10. 
 
 85 
 
 ecTTii' Kai o avapai virepavoo iravTMV Toov ovpoLvwv, iva 
 
 ^th. This celebrated passage has re- 
 ceivedseveraldifEerentinterpretations, 
 two only of which however deserve 
 serious consideration, and between 
 whichitis eajtrcmeJ?/ difficult to decide: 
 (a) the ancient explanation, accord- 
 ing to which TO. Kart^epa TTJt yrjs = ret 
 KwraxBovia, and imply 'Hades' (iroB 
 5^ Kar^^Tj; €ls rbu p5i;''> tovtov yap 
 KaTtirrepa p^ptj ttjs yijs X^yeL Kara rr/v 
 KOLV'rjvvTrovoi.av' Theoph.), the gen. not 
 being dependent on the comparative 
 (Eiick., — still less compatible with his 
 insertion of lUpTi), but being the regu- 
 laxpossessive gen. : (6) the more modern 
 interpretation, adopted by the majo- 
 rity of recent commentators, according 
 to which Trj% yTJs is regarded as the 
 gen. oiapposition (see esp. Winer, Gr. 
 § 59- 8, p. 470), and the expression as 
 equivalent to efs ttiv Karuripav y^v. 
 Both sides claim the comparative ica- 
 Tilrrepa, — the f'lXn nVFlPIPI pressed 
 by Olsh. is at least eijually indetermi- 
 nate with the Greek, — the one as sug- 
 gesting a comparison with the earth, 
 'a lower depth than the earth,' the 
 other as suggested by the comparison 
 with the heaven (Acts ii. 19, John viii. 
 23, — ^but in this latter passage Kara 
 reaches lower than the earth; Stier, 
 Reden Jem, Vol. iv. p. 447 sq.); comp. 
 Hofm. Schriftb. Vol. 11. i, p. 345. 
 These arguments must be nearly set 
 off against one another, as the positive 
 would have been most natural in the 
 latter case, the superlative perhaps in 
 the former. As however the superl. 
 would have tended tp fix the locality 
 (comp. Nehem. iv. 13) more definitely 
 than was suitable to the present con- 
 text, and as the use of the term #5i)s 
 would have marred the antithesis {yij 
 opp. to oipavos), it does not seem im- 
 probable that the more vague com- 
 parative was expressly chosen, and 
 
 that thus its use is more in favour of 
 (a) than (6). When to this we add 
 the fuU antithesis that seems to lie in 
 iiTepavoj Twv ovpavQv, ver. 10 (*subli- 
 miora esBlorum' opp. to 'inferiora ter- 
 rarum,' Tertull.), surely more than a 
 mere expansion of eis v\(ioi (Winer, 
 Mey.), and also observe the sort of 
 exegetical necessity which tva irXripiitrri 
 Tdirdvra (ver. 10) seems to impose 
 on us of giving the fullest amphtude 
 to every expression, we still more in- 
 cline to (a) ; and with IrcnsBUS {Har. 
 V. 31, comp. IV. 22, ed. Mass.), Tertul- 
 lian {deAnimd, c. 55), and the principal 
 ancient writers (see Pearson, Creed, 
 Art. V. Vol. I. p. 269, and reff. on 
 Vol. II. p. 195, ed. Burt.), recognise 
 in these words an allusion, not to 
 Christ's death and burial (Chrys., 
 Theod.), but definitely to His descent 
 into hell: so also Olsh., Stier, Mt, 
 Wordsw., and Baur (Paulus, p. 431); 
 but it is to be feared that the judgment 
 of the last writer is not unbiassed, as 
 he urges the reference as a proof of 
 the gnostic origin of the Epistle. 
 On this clause and on ver. 10 see a 
 good sermon by South, Serm. (Posth.) 
 I. Vol. III. p. 1 69 sq. (Lond. 1 843) ; and 
 for a general investigation of the doc- 
 trine of Christ's descent into heU, and 
 its connexion with the last things, 
 Guder, Lehre von der Erscheinimg J. 
 C. water den Toiiten, Bern, 1853. 
 
 10. 6 Karapcis] 'He that de- 
 scended;' emphatic, as its position 
 shows : the absence of any connecting 
 or illative particle gives a greater force 
 and vigour to the conclusion. It may 
 be observed that ouTosisnot ' the same, ' 
 Auth., — as no instance of an omission 
 of the article occurs in the N. T., 
 though it is occasionally dropped in 
 the earlier (Herm. Opusc, Vol. i. p. 
 332), and frequently in Byzantine 
 
86 
 
 nPOS E$E2I0YS. 
 
 till we all come to the unity of faith, and in truth and love 
 grow up into Christ, the head of the living body, the Church. 
 
 authors, — but is simply the emphatic 
 'He;^ oi y&p oAXos KwreK-^XvSe Kcd 
 dWos aveXilXvSev Theod. ; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 22. 4. obs. p. 135. 
 irdvTcoy tov oipttvwv] ' all the heavens' 
 'cffilos omnes penetravit asoendendo, 
 usque ad summum caelum,' Est. ; v\p7i- 
 Xorepos tSv oipavwv, Heb. vii. 26, 
 comp. ib. iv. 14. There is no neces- 
 sity whatever to connect this expres- 
 sion with the 'seven heavens' of the 
 Jews (oomp. Wetst. ore a Gor. xii. -i, 
 Hofm. Schriftb. Vol. 11. 1, p. 387) : 
 the words, both here and in Heb. U. 
 ec, have only a simple and general 
 meaning, and are well paraphrased by 
 Bp. Pearson, — 'whatsoever heaven is 
 higher than all the rest which are 
 called heavens, into that place did He 
 afecend:' Creed, Art. vi. Vol. i. p. 320 
 (od. Burton). 
 
 Iva irXripcJo^ ra irdvTa] 'in order 
 that He might fill all things;' more 
 general purpose involved in the more 
 special ISaKev Sofiara tois afSpdnrms 
 (ver. 8), though structurally depend- 
 ent on the preceding participle. The 
 subjunctive with tya after a past tense 
 is correctly used in the present case 
 to denote an act that stiU continues ; 
 see Herm. Viger, No. 350, and esp. 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 618, who has 
 treated this and similar uses of the 
 Bubj. with Xva after preterites with 
 considerable acumen: for exx. see 
 Gayler, Fartic. Neg. p. 1 76, who has 
 also correctly seized the general prin- 
 ciple, 'subjunotivum usurpari si prte- 
 valet consilium, aut respcctus ad even- 
 turn, liahendus; ' p. 165. Great caution 
 however must be used in applying 
 these principles to the N. T., as the 
 general and prevailing use of the subj. 
 both in the N. T. and in later writers 
 makes it very doubtful whether the 
 
 finer distinction of mood was in all 
 such cases as the present distiactly 
 felt and intended. 
 
 It is not necessary either to limit 
 irdyra ttXripovv, the solemn predicate 
 of the Deity (Jerem. xxiii. 24, see 
 Schoettg. Sor. Heb. Vol. i. p. 775), 
 to the gift of redemption (Buck.), or 
 to confine the comprehensive to Tain-a 
 to the faithful (Grot.), or tothechurch 
 of Jews and Gentries (Meier): the 
 expression is perfectly unrestricted, 
 and refers not only to the sustaining 
 and ruling power {ttjs Seo-iroTelas airoG 
 Kal ivepryelas, Chrys.), but also to the 
 divine presence ('prsesentiS at opera- 
 tione BuS, se ipso,' Beng.) of Christ. 
 The doctrine of the ubiquity of 
 Christ's Body derives no support from 
 this passage (Form. Concord, p. 767), 
 as there is here no reference to a dif- 
 fused and ubiquitous corporeity, but 
 to a pervading and energizing omni- 
 presence; comp. Ebrard, Dogrruxtik, 
 % 390, Vol. II. p. 139, and notes on 
 ch. i. 23. The true doctrine may 
 perhaps be thusbriefly stated : — Christ 
 is perfect God, and perfect and glori- 
 fied man ; as the former He is present 
 everywhere, as the latter He can bo 
 present anywhere : see Jackson, Creed, 
 Book XI. 3, and comp. Stier, Beden 
 Jesu, Vol. VI. p. 164. 
 
 II. Kal avTos] 'And He,' 'jah 
 silba,' Goth.; iji^ariKus dk elTre t6 
 ouTo's, Theoph. There is here no 
 direct resumption of the subject of 
 ver. 7, as if ver. 8 — 10 were merely 
 parenthetical, but a regression to it, 
 while at the same time the auros is 
 naturally and emphatically Unked on 
 to the avTos in the preceding verse. 
 This return to a subject, without dis- 
 turbing the harmony of the immediate 
 connexion or the natural sequence of 
 
IV. 
 
 II, 12. 
 
 87 
 
 avTos eSwKev tou? fj.ev airocTToXovi, tov9 Se wpocp^Taf, 
 Tovs Se evayyeXta-Taf, tow? Se iroifievai Kai SiSaarKd\ov(!, 
 TTpoi rov KaTapTia-fiQv twv dyioav, eh epyov 
 
 thought, constitutes one of the high 
 excellences, but at the same time one 
 of the chief difficulties, in the style of 
 the great Apostle. SSokcv] 
 
 'gave,' 'dedit,' Vulg., Clarom., al. ; 
 not merely Hebraistic QTji, Olsh.) 
 and equivalent to leero (Acts xx. 28, 
 I Cor. xii. 28), 'dedit EcclesisB id est 
 posuit in Eecl.' (Est.), but in the 
 ordinary and regular meaning of the 
 word, and in harmony with idoB'i;, 
 ver. 7, So/mra, ver. 8; comp. notes on 
 ch. i. 22, airoo-ToXous] 
 
 • Apostles,' — in the highest and most 
 special sense ; comp. notes on GalA. i. 
 The chief characteristics of an Apostle 
 were an immediate call from Christ 
 (comp. Gal. i. i), a destination for all 
 lands (Matth. xxviii. 19, 2 Cor. xi. 28), 
 and a special power of working mira- 
 cles (3 Cor. xii. 12) ; see Eadie ire ioc, 
 who has grouped together the essential 
 elements of the Apostolate with proof 
 texts. irpo(|>i)'Ta$] 
 
 ' Prophets,' — not only in the more spe- 
 cial sense (as Agabus, Acts xi. 28), 
 but in the more general one of preach- 
 ers and expounders, who spoke under 
 the immediate impulse and influence 
 of the Holy Spirit, and were thus to 
 be distinguished from the SiSaa-KoKoi : 
 
 lA^Jt 7rp0^7]T€ViilU iraVTO. ttTTO TOV H^'eu- 
 
 fiaros <p6^yeTat, 6 5^ SiSacTKav iffrlv 
 Sttov Kal i^ oiKeias Stavoias StaXdyerac* 
 Chrys. on i Cor. xii. 28 : see Thorn- 
 dike, Eelig. Assemblies, ch. v. i sq. 
 Vol. I. p. 182 sq. (A.-C. Libr.), and 
 comp. notes on ch. ii. 20. 
 riayyAio-Tos] ' Evangelists, ' — not rois 
 rh e^a,yy^\Lov ypa^f/iivTas (CEcum., 
 Chrys. 2), but rois evayye\il^ofUiious 
 (Chrys. i), preachers of the Gospel, 
 who TrepuovTes iK'^pvTTOv (Theod.), and 
 yet, as jxrl irepuovTesTravTaxov (Chrys.), 
 
 SiaKovia?, 1 2 
 
 were distinguished from the Apostles, 
 to whom they acted as subordinates 
 and missionaries : comp. Acts viii. 14, 
 and see Thomdike, Relig. Assembl. iv. 
 37, Vol. r. p. 116, ih. Bight of Church, 
 II. 30, Vol. I. p. 451, Hofm. Schriftb. 
 Vol. II. 2, p. 249. 
 
 Toijt^vas Kol SiSoo-KoXovs] 'Pastors 
 and Teachers.' It has been doubted 
 whether these words denote different 
 classes, or are different names of the 
 same class. The absence of the dis- 
 junctive rolls 5f (arbitrarily inserted in 
 Syr., but altered in Syr.-Phil.) seems 
 clearly to show that both toiij.. and 
 SiSdcK. had someoommou distinctions, 
 — probably that of being stationai-y 
 rather than missionary, ol xaO-Qnevoi. 
 KoX veplha tottop ■^a'xoXrj/j.^vot, Chrys., 
 —which plainly separated them from 
 each of the preceding classes. Thus 
 far they might be said to form one 
 class ; but that the individuals who 
 composed it bore either or both names 
 indifferently, is very doubtful. The 
 TTOL/iives (a term probably including 
 twlffKOToi and Tpe<rl3&rcpoi, Eritz. 
 Fritzsch. Opusc. p. 43 sq.) might be, 
 and perhaps always were SiSdaxaXoL 
 (comp. I Tim. iii. 2, Tit. i. 9, Martyr. 
 Polye. § 16, see Thomdike, Relig. 
 Assembl. rv. 40, Vol. i. p. 170), but it 
 does not follow that the converse was 
 true. The xop'o'/'"' of xu/S^/jyijins is so 
 distinct from that of SidcuTxaKla, that 
 it seems necessary to recognise in the 
 Sidairic. a body of men (scarcely a dis- 
 tinct class) who had the gift of SiSax^, 
 but who were not invested with any 
 administrative powers and authority; 
 see esp. Hooker, Eccl. Pol. v. 78. 8, 
 and comp. Neander, Planting, Vol. i. 
 p. 149 (Bohn). 
 
 1 2. irpis t4v KttTapTKruiv k.t.X.] 
 
88 
 
 nP02 E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 13 e/f otkoSo/xrjv Tov arw/j.aTOi rov XpiiTTdv' fie^p^ Karav- 
 
 ' with a view to the perfecting of the 
 saints, for the work of ministration, 
 for the building up of the body of 
 Christ;' more ultimate and more im- 
 mediate end of the gifts specified in 
 the preceding verse. It is extremely 
 difficult to fix the exact shade of mean- 
 ing which these prepp. are intended 
 to convey. It seems clear however 
 (a) thatthere is no ' trajection,' Grot.; 
 — ^nor again (i) thatthethree members 
 are to be regarded as merely parallel, 
 and co-ordinately dependent on SSoikc 
 {sKacTTOs, oUodofieL, ^Kocr, Kdrapri^et, 
 txacTT. dmKovei, Chrys.), for Ttpbs and 
 ei's must thus be regarded as synony- 
 mous (Syr., Goth., Arm.); and though 
 St Paul studied prepositional varia- 
 tions (see Winer, Gr. § 50. 6, p. 372), 
 it still does not appear from the exx. 
 usually cited that he did so except for 
 the sake of definition, limitation, or 
 presentation of the subject in a fresh 
 point of view; see notes on Gal. i. i. 
 Moreover, as Me,y. justly observes, 
 the second member, els ipyov k.t.X., 
 would thus much more naturally and 
 logically stand first. It also seems 
 
 (c) nearly equally unsatisfactory, with 
 Mih. (6xpressly;Yulg. , Clarom. , Copt, 
 are equally ambiguous with the Greet), 
 De W., al., to connect els... els closely 
 with irpos, as we are thus compelled 
 to give SiaKovla the less usual, and 
 here (after the previous accurate defi- 
 nitions) extremely doubtful meaning 
 of 'ohristhoheDienstleitung,'De W., 
 'genus omnium f unotionum in Ecole- 
 sia,' Aret.; see below. It seems then 
 
 (d) best and most consonant with the 
 .fundamental (ethical) meaning of the 
 prepositions to connect eis...e(s with 
 (SuKe, and, — as eis, with the idea of 
 destination, frequently involves that 
 of attainment (see Jelf, Or. § 625. 3, 
 Kriiger, Sprachl. § 68. 21. 5, and 
 
 comp. Hand, Tursell. 'in,' m. 23, 
 Vol. ill. 23), — to regard els.. .els as 
 two parallel members referring to the 
 more immediate, wpis to the more ulti- 
 mate and final purpose of the action; 
 comp. Bom. xv. 2, opeffKiru els rh 
 iyadbv irpbs olKo8o/ji.rjy, which seems to 
 admit a similar explanation, and see 
 notes on Philem. 5. For distinc- 
 
 tions between els, irpis, and M, see 
 notes on 1 Thess. iii. 4, and between 
 els, trpbs, and koto, notes on Tit. i. I. 
 We may thus paraphrase : 'He gave 
 apostles, c&c. , to fulfil the work of the 
 ministry, and to build up the body of 
 Christ, His object being to perfect His 
 saints;' comp. Hofm. Schriftb. Vol. 
 II. z, p. 109, where the same view is 
 practically maintained. 
 TOV KaTapTi(r(i.6v] 'the perfecting,' r-n' 
 Te\elaa-tv, Theophyl. ; comp. Kardp- 
 Ticris, 2 Cor. xiii. 9: the nature of thi^ 
 (definite) perfecting is explained ver. 
 13. The primary (ethical) meaning 
 ot Karaprll'ei.y, 'reconoinnare' (Eost u. 
 Palm, Lex. s. v.), appears only in Gal. 
 vi. I (comp. notes): in all other pas- 
 sages in the N.T. of ethical reference 
 (e.g. Luke vi. 40, i Cor. i. 10, 2 Cor. 
 xiii. 11, Heb. xiii. 21, 1 Pet. v. 10), 
 the secondary meaning, 'to make ap- 
 Tios,' ' to make perfect, complete ' (re- 
 Xeiouj/, Hesych.), appears to be the 
 prevailing meaning : comp. KarapHl^eiv 
 Tptiipeis, Diod. Sio. xiii. 70, see exx. . 
 in Schweigb. Lex. Polyb. s.v. Any 
 allusion to 'the accomplishment of 
 the number of the elect,' Pelag. 
 (comp. Burial Service), would here be 
 wholly out of place. 
 Spyov SiaKovCas] 'the vxirk of (the) 
 ministry;' scil. 'for the duties and 
 functions of Std/covoi in the Church.' 
 As the meaning of both these words 
 has been unduly strained, we may re- 
 mark briefly that (pr^av is not pleo- 
 
IV. 
 
 89 
 
 T^crwfjLev 01 iravrei et? tiji/ epoTtjra tiji iricrTeoDi koi 
 
 nastic (see Winer, Gr. % 6;. 7, p. 541), 
 or in the special sense of 'building' 
 (comp. I Cor. iii. 13), but has the 
 simple meaning of 'business,' 'func- 
 tion' (i Tim. Ui. i), — not 'res per- 
 fecta,' but 'res gerenda,' in exact 
 parallelism with the use of oIkoSoij.-^. 
 Again, SiaxovCa is not 'service ' gene- 
 rally, but, as its prevailing usage in 
 theN. T. (Bom. xi. 13, 2 Cor. iv. 1, 
 al. ) and especially the present context 
 suggest, ' spiritual service of an official 
 nature;' see Meyer in loc, Hofm. 
 Schriftb. Vol. II. 2, p. 109. The ab- 
 sence of both articles has been pressed 
 (Eadie, Peile), but appy. unduly: 
 diaxovla may possibly have been left 
 studiedly anarthrous in reference to 
 the different modes of exercising it 
 alluded to in ver. 1 1 , and the various 
 spiritual wants of the Church 
 (Hamm.) ; ^/jyo;/ however seems clearly 
 definite in meaning, though by the 
 principle of correlation (Middleton, 
 Art. ni. 3, 6) it is necessarily anarthrous 
 in form. oIkoS. toiI <rca|jiaTos] 
 
 'building up of the body,' parallel to, 
 but at the same time more nearly de- 
 fining the nature of the Ipyoy. The 
 article is not required (as with Karapr.), 
 as it was not any absolute, definite 
 process of edifying, but edifying gene- 
 rally that was the object. The ob- 
 servation which some commentators 
 make on 'the confusion of metaphors' 
 is nugatory : as t6 aufia toO Xp. has 
 a distinct metaphorical sense, so has 
 olKo5oii,i]. On the nature of Christian 
 oUoSofi-n, see Nitzsch, Tlieologie, § 39, 
 Vol. I. p. 205. 
 
 13. ii^xpL KaTttvTi]<r<i)nev] 'until 
 ■we come to, arrive at;' specification of 
 the time up to which this spiritual 
 constitution was designed to last. 
 Several recent commentators (Harli, 
 Mey.,' al.) notice the omission of dv 
 
 as giving an air of less uncertainty 
 to the sub].; see notes on Gal. iii. ig. 
 As a general principle this is of course 
 right (see Herm. Partic. &v, 11. 9, 
 p. 109 sq., Hartung, Fartilc. dv, 3, 
 Tol. II. p. ■jpi sq.) ; we must be cau- 
 tions however in applying the rule in 
 the N. T., as the tendency of later 
 Greek to the nearly exclusive use of 
 the subj., and esp. to the use of these 
 temporal particles vrith the aor., with- 
 out dv, is very discernible : see Winer, 
 Gr. § 41. 3, p. 265. The use of the 
 subj. (the mood of conditioned but . 
 objective possibility), not fut. (as 
 Chrys.), shows that the Karavrav is 
 represented not only as the eventual, 
 but as the expected and contemplated 
 result of the IduKev; see Scheuerl. 
 Synt. % 36. r, p. 393, Jelf, Gr. § 842. 2, 
 and comp. Schmalfeld, Synt. § 128, p. 
 280. This use of the subj. deserves 
 observation. The meaning of 
 
 KcLTavTav with iirl or els (only the 
 latter in the N. T.) has been unduly 
 pressed : it has no necessary reference 
 to former wanderings or diverse start- 
 ing-Tpoiats (Zanch., Vatabl. ap. PoU 
 Syn.), but simply implies 'pervenire 
 ad' ('occurrere in,' Vulg., Clarom.), 
 with ref. only to the place, person, or 
 point arrived at ; see notes on Phil. 
 iii. II, and comp. exx. in Schweigh. 
 Lex. Polyb. s.v. 
 
 bi irttVT€s] 'we all,' 'the whole of us;' 
 soil, all Christians, implied in the tmc 
 dylav, ver. 12. It is difficult to agree 
 with EUendt {Lex. Soph. s.v. Tras, iii. 
 I, Vol. II. p. 519) in the assertion 
 that in the plural the addition or 
 omission of the article, 'cum sensus 
 fert,' makes no difference. The dis- 
 tinction is not always obvious (see 
 Middleton, Art. vii. i), but may 
 generally be deduced from the funda- 
 mental laws of the article. 
 
90 
 
 nPOS E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 T^j eTTiyvuxTiWi Tou vlou Tov Qeov, etf auSpa TeAe(oi', 
 14 «? fMerpov iJXoc/ay toO -TrXtipci/JLaTOS tov ^plcnod, Iva 
 
 €lS TT]]/ €v6Tl]Ttt TTJS irtcTT.] * (O f^C 
 
 tiTO'(y 0/ Sfte faith;' 'that oneness of 
 faith' (Peile, see Words w.) which was 
 the aim and object towards which the 
 spiritual efforts of the various forms 
 of ministry were all directed ; ?ws av 
 SaxSwiiev irdvTss /ilav [rather, Tiii> 
 fiiav] iriarLV ^xo^7"fS' tovto ydp ^utip 
 cvSttjs TT^errews Srav irdvres ?** cSfxev, 
 orav irdcres bixolm rhv ffivSeff/iov iiri- 
 yivd)<TKti:fj.€v' Chrys. 
 KttV TTJs Iiriyvwo-Effls K.T.X.] 'and of 
 the (true) knowledge of the Son of God;' 
 further development, — not only faith 
 in the Son, but saving knowledge of 
 Him ; the gen. tov vloS toO GcoO being 
 the gen. oijecti (Winer, Gr. § 30. obs. 
 p. 168), and belonging to both sub- 
 stantives. The Kol is thus not 'exe- 
 getice positum' (Calv.), but simply 
 copulative; theformerinterpr., though 
 grammatically admissible (see ore Gal. 
 vi. 16), would here be oontextually 
 untenable, as tIo-tis and iirlyvoiais 
 (see notes on ch. i. 1 7) obviously con- 
 vey different ideas (Mey.), and are 
 terms by no means mutually explana- 
 tory ; ' cognitio perf ectius guiddam^^iJe 
 sonat :' Beng. Such sentences 
 
 as the present may serve to make us 
 careful in obtruding too hastily on 
 every passage the meaning of Triims 
 'IijiroO Xp. alluded to on oh. iii. 12, 
 and noticed in notes on Gal. ii. 16. 
 tls avSpa tAsiov] 'to a perfect, full 
 grown, man;' metaphorical apposition 
 to the foregoing member, the concrete 
 term being probably sfeledted rather 
 than any abstract term (^ reXetoripa 
 Ttav Soyfidrti}V [better tov Xpurrov'l 
 yv&(ri.s, Theoph.), as forming a good 
 contrast to the following yijTriot (ver. 
 14, oomp. I Cor. xiii. 10, 11), and as 
 suggesting by its 'singular' the idea 
 of the complete unity of the holy per- 
 
 sonahty, further explained in the next 
 clause, into which they were united 
 and consummated. Instances of a 
 similar use of rAeios are cited by 
 Baphel. Annot. Vol. 11. p. 477 ; see 
 esp. Polyb. Hist. v. 29. 2, where wai- 
 Slov vriinov and tAeiov avSpa stand in 
 studied contrast to each other, 
 els |i^pov K.T.X.] 'to the measure of 
 the stature of Christ's fulness,' i.e. 'of 
 the fulness which Christ has,' tov Xp. 
 being the gen. suhjecti; see esp. notes 
 on ch. iU. ig, and on the accumula- 
 tion of genitives, Winer, Gr. § 30. 3, 
 obs. 1, p. 172; eomp. 2 Cor. iv. 4. 
 It' is doubtful whether r/XtKla is to be 
 referred (a) to age (John ix. 21, so 
 clearly Matth. vi. 27), or (6) to stature 
 (Luke xix. 3), both being explana- 
 tions here equally admissible ; seeBos, 
 Exercit. p. 183. In the former case 
 TOV TrXrjp. r. Xp. will be the quali- 
 fying, or rather characterizing gen. 
 (ScheuerL Synt. § 16. 3, p. 1 15, and 
 notes on ch. i. 10), and will more 
 nearly define t^s rfKLK., — 'the age 
 when the fulness of Christ is received :' 
 in the latter the gen. is purely posses- 
 sine. The antithesis (TAfioi...yi}irioi) 
 seems in favour of (a) ; still, — as both 
 words are metaphorical, — as liirpov is 
 appropriately used in reference to 
 ' stature ' (see esp. Lucian, Iniag. 6, 
 cited by Wetst. ; even in Horn. Od. 
 XVIII. 216, ^/3?)s lUrp. is associated 
 with the idea of size), and still more, 
 as the separate words irXiJpw/io, aii-q- 
 a-a/iiv, <&c. no less than the context 
 yer. 16, all suggest ideas of matured 
 growth in respect of magnitude, — the 
 latter interpr. (6) seems most probable 
 and satisfactory; so Syr., Goth, ('vah- 
 Staus'), Copt, (mail), appy. ^th., and 
 our own Auth. Version. It has 
 
 been considered a question whether 
 
IV. 14. 
 
 91 
 
 fUlKETi . wfjLBV v^irioi, KkvSwvt^ofJievoi KOI veptcpepofjievoi 
 iravri ave/xw t?? SiSaaKoXiai if t^ Kv^etti tS>v avQpw- 
 
 the Apostle is here referring solely to 
 present (Chrys.), or to future life 
 (Theod.). The mention of tUttis, and 
 the tenor of ver. 14, 15, incline us to 
 the former view: still it is probable 
 (see OlBh.)that no special distinction 
 was intended. St Paul regards the 
 Church as one ; he declares its issue 
 and destination as eciri?! and TcXenS- 
 Tijs: on the realization of this, when* 
 soever and wheresoever, the functions 
 of the Christian ministry will cease. 
 14. Iva |JiT|K^Ti K.T.X..] Hn order 
 that we may be no longer children;' 
 purpose contemplatedin the limitation 
 as to duration of the gifts specified in 
 ver. 1 1 sq. The connexion is not per- 
 fectly clear. Is this verse (a) co-ordi- 
 wate with ver. 13, and. immediately de- 
 pendent on II, 12 (Harl.), or (6) is it 
 subordinate to it, and remotely depen- 
 dent on ver. 11, 13? The latter seems 
 most probable: ver. 13 thus defines 
 the 'terminus ad quem 'which charac- 
 terizes the functions of the Christian 
 ministry; ver. 14 explains the object, 
 viz. our ceasing to be v^inoi, contem- 
 plated in the appointment of such a 
 ' terminus, ' and thence more remotely 
 in the bestowal of a ministry so cha- 
 racterized ; see Meyer in loc, who has 
 ably elucidated the connexion. 
 For a sound sermon on this text in 
 reference to the case of 'Deceivers and 
 Deceived,' see Waterl. Serm. xxix. 
 Vol. V. p. 717 sq. [it)K^Ti] 'no 
 
 longer;' ri fitiKiri SeUvvtri TrcJXat 
 TOWTo ■7raB6vras- Chrys. This is not 
 however said in reference to the Ephe- 
 sians only, but as the context (■n-Ai'Tes, 
 ver. 13) suggests, in ref. to Christians 
 generally. Eadie somewhat singularly 
 stops to comment on the use of 'ix7ik4' 
 n not oiisiri.:' surely to ha in its 
 present sense 'paxticula m'7 conseib- 
 
 tanea est;' Gayler, Partik. Neg. p. 
 168. uXuStiiviSoiievoi] ' tossed 
 
 about Ute waves' ('usvagidai,' Goth., 
 comp. Syr., Arm.), — not 'by the 
 waves.' Stier, assuming the latter 
 to be the true meaning of the pass. 
 ( 'metaphor from a ship lying at hull,' 
 Bramh. Catching Lev. ch. 3, Vol. iv. 
 p. 59-2), adopts the middle (comp. 
 'fluctuantes,' Vulg.) to avoid the then 
 incongruous k\v5. avifM^. The exx. 
 however adduced by Wetst. and Krebs 
 (K\vSmiL^e<Tdai iK toC irdSov, Aristsen. 
 Epist. I. 27, TapaffaS/ieiios Kal kXvSuci- 
 fVe^os, Joseph. Antiq. ix. 11. 3) con- 
 firm the passive use and the former 
 meaning ; comp. James i. 6. 
 d.vi]uf TTJs SiSao-KoXtas] 'wind ofdoc- 
 tnne.' The article does not show ' the 
 prominence which teaching possessed 
 in the Church' (Eadie), but specifies 
 SiSouTKoKla in the abstract, every kind 
 and degree of it : see Middleton, Art. 
 V. I, p. 8g sq. (ed. Eose). On the pro- 
 bable distinction between diSaaKaXia 
 and SiSaxv, see on 2 Tim. iv. 2. 
 iv Trf Kv^tCt^ K.T.X.] 'in the sleight 
 of men, ' — of men, not the faith and 
 knowledge of the Son of God, ver. 13. 
 'El' may be plausibly considered in- 
 strumental (Arm., Mey.) ; as however 
 this would seem pleonastic after the in- 
 strumental, or what Kriiger {Sprachl. 
 § 48. 151 sq.) more inclusively terms 
 the dynamic dat. Avi/iifi (see Heb. 
 xiii. 9), and would mar the seem- 
 ing parallelism with iv dydirTi (ver. 
 15), the prep, appears rather to de- 
 note the element, the evil atmosphere 
 as it were, in which the varying cur- 
 rents of doctrine exist and exert their 
 force; so Vulg., Clarom., Copt., ^th.- 
 Pol., and perhaps Goth., but see De 
 Gabel. in loc. The term 
 
 Kvpda (K^ilp Heb.) properly denotes 
 
92 
 
 nPOZ E<I)E2I0Y2. 
 
 15 TTODv, if iravovpyla Trpos rijv fjieOoSelav Tiji ■}r\avi]i, a\>}- 
 
 ' playing with dice' (Plato, Phcsdr. 
 274 D, Trerreias Kal Kvfieias: see Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 3. 2), and thence, by an easy 
 transition, 'sleight of hand,' 'fraud' 
 {wamvpyta, Suid. ; comp. Kv^eieiv, 
 Arrian, Epict. 11. ig, iii. 21, cited by 
 Wetst.): I'SioK Si tuv Kvpev6vTiiiv rb 
 TTJSe K^Keicre fiera^^puv Tods ^tj^ovs 
 Kal wavoOpyus tqvto itoluv' Theod. ; 
 see Suioer, Thesaur. s. v. Vol. 11. p. 
 181, Schoettg. Hor. Heb. Vol. i. p. 
 775. (V iravovpYC^j. irpds k.t.X.] 
 
 'in craftiness tending to the deliberate 
 system of error,' 'in astutia ad circum- 
 ventionem erroris,' Vulg. ; appositio- 
 nal and partly explanatory clause to 
 the foregoing. The Auth. Ver. (comp. 
 Syr.) is here too paraphrastic, and 
 obscures the meaning of both vpbs 
 and neBodeta. The former is not equi- 
 valent to /card, Eiick., 'with,' Peile, 
 but denotes the aim, the natural tend- 
 ency, of iravovpyla. (comp. notes ore 
 Tit. i. i); the /ieSodela Trjs tK. is that 
 which iravovpyla has in view (comp. 
 irpos Tov Karaprr. ver. 12), and to 
 which it is readily and naturally dis- 
 posed. As iravovpyla is anarthrous, 
 the omission of the art. before irpos 
 (which induces Eiioli. incorrectly to 
 refer the clause to ipepifievoi) is per- 
 fectly regular; see Winer, Gr. § 20. 
 4, p. 126. The somewhat rare 
 
 term /ieSoSda, a 51s X676|«.in theN.T. 
 (see ch. vi. 11), must have its mean- 
 ing fixed by /ieSodeia. This verb de- 
 notes, 'the pursuit, d;c. of a settled 
 plan' — (a) honestly (Diod. Sic. i. 81, 
 ytt. T^K iXi/Beiav iKTijs ipiweiplas), or (6) 
 dishonestly (Polyb. Fr. Hist, xxxvm. 
 4. 10), and hence comes to imply 'de- 
 ception,' 'fraud,' with more or less of 
 plan (2 Sam. xix. 27); comp. Chrys, 
 onBph.yi, n. fieSoSevcral {(rrt t6 diro- 
 T^trat Kal Sid, cvvrd/iov (/Jtrixaviji, Sav.) 
 i\e7v: see also Miinthe, 06s. p. 367. 
 
 Thus then pieSoSela is 'a deliberate 
 planning or system' (Peile; ri/v iiij- 
 XavTjv iKd\eiTev, Theod.), the further 
 idea of 'fraud' {t^x^'V V SdXos, Suid., 
 iiri.^ov\ri, Zonar.) being here expressed 
 in irKivris : see Suicer, Thesaur. e. v. 
 Vol. II. p. 329. The reading is doubt- 
 ful: Tisch. (ed. 7) adopts the form 
 IxeBoSlav with BiDTGELN, and seve- 
 ral mss., but appy. without sufficient 
 reason; as changes in orthography 
 which maybe accounted for by itacism 
 or some mode of erroneous transcrip- 
 tion must always be received with 
 caution; comp. Winer, Gr. § J. 4, 
 p. 47. irXtivris has not here (nor 
 Matth. xxvii. 64, 2 Thess. ii. 11) the 
 active meaning of 'misleading' (De 
 
 W., comp. Syr. ^Ol^gJ) ut sedu- 
 eant), nor even necessarily that of 
 'delusion' (Harl.), but its simple, 
 classical, and regular meaning, 'error,' 
 — 'erroris,' Vulg., 'airzeius,' Goth. 
 The gen. is obviously not the gen. 
 objecti (Ruck.), but subjecti, — it is the 
 irXdvtj which p^edoSeiet, — and thus 
 stands in grammatical parallelism 
 with the preceding gen. rue dvBp. The 
 use of the article must not be over- 
 looked : it serves almost to personify 
 ir\dvii, not however as metonymically 
 f or ' Satan ' (Beng. ) , but as "Error ' inits 
 most abstract nature, andthusrenders 
 the contrast to •^ dX^fleia, implied in 
 dXriSeiovTes, more forcible and signi- 
 ficant. 
 
 15. d\r|9cvovT6$ 84] 'but holding 
 the truth, walking ti-uthfully ;' parti- 
 cipial member attached to ai^aio/iev, 
 find with it grammatically dependent 
 on iva (ver. 14), — the whole clause, as 
 the use of Si (after a negative sentence) 
 seems distinctly to suggest (comp. 
 Hartung, Partik. Si, 2, n, Vol. 1. p. 
 171), standing in simple and direct op- 
 
IV. 15. 
 
 93 
 
 OevovTei de iv ayairri av^^croo/xev eiy avrov ra TravTa, o? 
 
 position to the whole preceding verse 
 (esp. to the concluding irXdyijs.DeW.), 
 ■without however any reference to the 
 preceding negation, which would ra- 
 ther have required iXKd: see esp. 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. ii. p. 3, 361, Do- 
 nalds. Cratyl. § 201. The meaning of 
 a\7ideieiv is somewhat doubtful. On 
 the one hand, such translations as 
 'veritati operam dare' (Calv.) and 
 even 'Wahrheit /esihalten' (Euck.) 
 are lexically untenable (see Eost u. 
 Palm, Lex. s. v. d\i)B. Vol. i. p. 97) ; 
 on the other, the common meaning, 
 ' veritatem dicere' (Gal. iv. 16), seems 
 clearly exegetically unsatisfactory. It 
 isbest then to preserve an intermediate 
 sense, 'walking in truth' (Olsh.), or 
 (to preserve an antithesis in transl. 
 between irXdi'ijs and oKijB.) 'holding 
 the truth,' Scholef. {Hints, p. 100),-^ 
 which latter interpr., if 'holding' be 
 not unduly pressed, is almost justified 
 ■by Plato, Ihecet. 101 b, aX7)Biiav t-^v 
 ^irjcnv ['verum sentire,' Ast] ire pi 
 airi : SO in effect, but somewhat too 
 strongly, Vulg., Clarom., Goth., 've- 
 ritatem facientes,' and sim. Copt. 
 iv a^oirij] The connexion of these 
 words has been much discussed. Are 
 they to be ioined-^(a) with the parti- 
 ciple (Syr., Mth., Theoph., CEcum.), 
 or — (6) -with the finite verb (Theod., 
 who however omits a\r]6. , and appy. 
 Chrys., rf dydirr; trvvSeSe/iivoCj? It 
 must fairly be conceded that the order, 
 the parallelism of structure with that 
 of ver. 14, and stiU more the vital 
 association between love and the truest 
 form of truth (see Stier in lac.), are 
 arguments of some weight in favour 
 of (a) ; still the absence of any clear 
 antithesis between iv 07. and either of 
 the preposit. clauses in ver. 14 forms a 
 negative argument,and the concluding 
 words of ver. 16 (whether 4v ay. be 
 
 joined immediately with aii^aa/ Troiei- 
 rai May., or with olKodo/xiip] supply a 
 positive argument in favour of (6) of 
 such force, that this latter connexion 
 niust be pronounced the more proba- 
 ble, and certainly the one most in 
 harmony with the context ; oomp. ch. 
 i. 4. The order may have arisen from 
 a desire to keep avrbp as near as pos- 
 sible to its relative. els airdv] 
 'into 3im,,' Auth. Ver.; els not im- 
 plying merely ' in reference to ' (Mey .) , 
 — a frigid and unsatisfactory interpre- 
 tation of which that expositor is too 
 fond (comp. notes ore Gal. iii. 27), nor 
 'for' (Eadie), nor even simply 'unto,' 
 'to the standard of ^Conyb. ; comp. 
 els ivdpa rikeiov, ver. 13), but retain- 
 ing its fuller and deeper theological 
 sense 'into' so that auf. ■with els con- 
 veys both ideas, ' unto and into.' The 
 growth of Christians bears relation to 
 rChrist both asits centre and standard : 
 while the hmits of that gro-wth are 
 defined by ' the stature of the fulness 
 of Christ,' its centre is also, and must 
 be, ire Him ; comp. some profound re- 
 marks in Ebrard, Dogmatik, § 445 sq. 
 TO irdvTa] 'in all the parts in which 
 we grow' (Mey.), 'in all the elements 
 of our growth ; ' the article being thus 
 most simply explained by the context. 
 It now need scarcely be said that no 
 'supplement of kotA' (Eadie, Stier) 
 is required ; tA vdvra is the regular 
 accus. of what is termed the quantita- 
 tive object (Hartung, Gasus,^. 46), and 
 serves to characterize the extent of the 
 action; seeMadvig, Gr. § 27, Kriiger, 
 Sprachl. § 46. 5. 4. os scrnv 
 K.T.X.] 'mho is the Head, even Christ.' 
 There is here neither transposition 
 (Grot., comp. Syr»), nor carelessness 
 of construct, for els aiTdv tov Xp. 
 (Pise). Instead of the ordinary form 
 of simple, orwhat is ietmediparathetie 
 
94 
 
 nPOS E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 l6 iffTiv fi Ke<pd\ij, Xpia-TOf, e^ oil ttUv to crwua avvap- 
 fjioXoyov/xevov Koi arvv/St^a^ofieiiov Sia iraa-rji dcprji riji 
 
 apposition (see exx. Kriiger, Sprachl. 
 § 57- 9)1 '^^ Apostle, not improbably 
 for the sake of making ^J off, ver. 16, 
 perfectly perspicuous (De W.), adopts 
 the relatival sentence, with the struo- 
 ture of which the apposition is assimi- 
 lated; see exx. Winer, Qr. § 48. 4. p. 
 424 (ed. 5), and Stallb.Plat. Apol. 41 a. 
 The reading is somewhat doubtful : 
 Rec. prefixes the art, to Xp. with DEP 
 GKLN^; mostmss.; Chrys., Theod. 
 (DeW.jMey.), — ^butappy. on authority 
 inferior to that for its omission, viz. 
 ABCNi; 3 mss.; Did., Bas., Cyr., al. 
 {Lachm., Tiscli., Alf,). Internal argu- 
 ments cannot safely be urged, as the 
 preponderance of instances of real 
 omission (53) over those of insertion 
 {31) is not very great; see the table 
 drawn up by Bose in his ed. of Mid- 
 dleton, Gr. Art. Append. 11. p. 490 sq., 
 and Gersdorf, Beitrdge, iii. p. ■272 sq. 
 Under any circumstances the position 
 of the word at the end of the verse 
 gives it both force and emphasis. 
 
 16. i% oS] 'from whom,' Auth., 
 'ex quo,' Syr., Vulg., Clarom.,— not 
 ,'in quo,' Mih.. (both); iff off, as the 
 ijnstructive parallel, Col. ii. 19, clearly 
 puggests, being joined with av^Tjm/ 
 ^iro^elrai, and (k, with its proper and 
 primary force oi origin, source, denot- 
 ing the origin, the 'fons augmenta- 
 tionis,' Beng. ; see notes on Gal. ii. 16. 
 It is not wholly uninteresting to re- 
 mark that the force of the metaphor 
 is enhanced by the ofipar«?it physiolo- 
 gical truth, that the energy of vital 
 power varies with the distance from 
 thehead: see Bch.-aheit,Gesch.derSeele, 
 § 22, p. 270 (ed. i). (r«vop|*oXo- 
 
 yoif-fvov] ' heing fitly framed together;' 
 pres. part., the action still going on: 
 see notes on oh. ii. 21, o-vvPi.- 
 
 Pal6[ktvov] 'compacted,' ^.^ASOO 
 
 7 ■» 
 
 [etcolligatum]Syr.,'connexum,'Vulg., 
 Clarom., ' gagahaflit,' Goth.,-ormore 
 literally and with more special refer- 
 ence to derivation [ba-, ^a(yu], 'put 
 together; ' comp. Col. ii. ig, and in a 
 figurative sense. Acts ix. 22, xvi. 10. 
 The difference of meaning between 
 ffvvap/j., and irw/3. has been differently 
 stated. According to Bengel, the first 
 denotes the harmony, the second the 
 solidity and firmness of the structure. 
 Perhaps the more exact view is that 
 which the simple meanings of the 
 words suggest, viz. that o-ui'/S. refers 
 to the aggregation, (rwapfi. to the in- 
 fcr-adopiafionoftheoomponentparts. 
 The external authority for the form 
 <rvi>pi^. [AB(?)CDiFGN] is appy. suf- 
 ficient to warrant the adoption of this 
 less usual form ; see Tisch. Prolegom. 
 p. XLVii. 8 id irda-r]s d4iTJs] 
 
 ' hy means of every joint,' 'per omnem 
 juncturam,' Vulg., Clarom., and sim. 
 all the ancient Vv. Meyer still re- 
 tains the interpr. of Chrys., Theod., 
 i0)7 = at(r6ri<ris, and connects the clause 
 with atfj. ToieiTai; but the parallel 
 passage. Col. ii, 19, twv cupQv xal avv- 
 Siap-iiiv (observe esp. the omission of 
 the 2nd article, Winer, § ig. 4, p. nfi) 
 leaves it scarcely doubtful that the 
 meaning usually assigned (oomp. A- 
 then. III. 202 Ej Plut, Anton. 27) is 
 correct, and that the clause is to be 
 connected with the participles. 
 TTJs 4irixopT|7Cas] 'of the {spiritual) 
 supply;' the article implying the spe- 
 cific iwixop. which Christ supplies, rijs 
 Xop'nyti-s Twv xo^P'-'^H'^'Tdni, Chrys. ; on 
 the meaning of the word comp. notes 
 on Qal. iii. 5. The gen. is not the gen. 
 of apposition (Biick., Harl.), nor a 
 
IV. 1 6. 
 
 95 
 
 6Trt)(^optiyias kut eiepyeiav ev fxerpip evos emcrrov fxepovg 
 T>]v avt,>](nv Tov au>/j.aTOi Troieirai eis oiKoSo/Jiijv eavroO 
 ev ayairt]. 
 
 mereHebraisticgen.ofguaZiij/, 'joint 
 ofnimistry'--'mmisteringioint'(Peile, 
 Green, Gramm. N. T. p. 264; oomp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 34. 3. b, p. i\i), but a 
 Mnd of gen. dejinitivus, by wbioh the 
 predominant use, purpose, or destina- 
 tion of the a(j>ri is specified and cha- 
 racterized; see Heb. ix. 21, aKeiri t%s 
 XeiTovpytas, and comp. the exx. cited 
 by Winer, Gr. § 30. 2. j3, p. 170. The 
 suggestion of Dobree {Advers. Vol. x. 
 V- 573). partly adopted by Scholef., 
 that iirix. may be 'materia suppedi- 
 tata, ' is not very satisfactory or tena- 
 ble; see Phil. i. 19. Kar 
 svipyaav k.t.X.] 'according to energy 
 in the measure of (sc. commensurate 
 with) each individual part;' tQ /iiv 
 Svvaixhxf irKiov Si^a<rffai. irKiov, ri} di 
 i\dTT(a ^aTToV Chrys. These words 
 may be connected either (o) with 
 iwixoprjylas, — ^the omission of the art. 
 is no objection (Riick.), as i) imx- nar 
 ivipy. may form one idea (Winer, Gr. 
 § 20. 2, p. 123), or (6) with the parti- 
 ciples, or yet again (c) with the finite 
 verb. As the expressions of the clause 
 far more appropriately describe the 
 nature of the growth than either the 
 mode of compaction or the degree of 
 the supply, the latter construction is 
 to be preferred. Kar hipy. is then 
 a modal predication, appended to 
 TToieiroi, defining ihenature oi the aC|- 
 5)(ris : this growth is neither abnormal 
 nor proportionless, but is regulated by 
 a vital power which is proportioned to 
 the nature and extent of the separata 
 parts. Dobree {Advers. Vol. i. p. 573) 
 strongly condemns this translation, 
 but, as it would seem, without suffi- 
 cient reason. His own translation, 
 which connects kkt hipy. with iybs 
 
 Ik. tiip. and isolates Iv jj-irptp, impairs 
 the force of the deep and consolatory 
 truths which the ordinary connexion 
 suggests. For a good practical appli- 
 cation see Eadie in loc. The 
 reading ^Aousis fairly supported [AC ; 
 Vulg., Copt., Syr., al.; Cyr., Chrys., 
 al.], but is appy. rightly rejected by 
 most recent editors, as a gloss on ni- 
 povs suggested by the preceding aSfM 
 and the succeeding o-ii/iaros. 
 Tijv a«|. To« irw|JiaTOS Trowirai] 'pro- 
 motes, carries on, the growth of the 
 iody,' — ff{JiiMTos being probably added 
 for the sake of perspicuity, and so 
 practically taking the place of the re- 
 ciprocal pronoun ; comp. Winer, Gr, 
 I 22. 2, p. 130, Kriiger, Xen. Anab. 
 p. 27. Stier, perhaps not incorrectly, 
 finds in the repetition of the noun an 
 enunciation of a spiritual truth, echoed 
 by iavTov, — that the body makes in- 
 crease of the body, and so is a liviug 
 organism ; — that its growth is not due 
 to aggregations from without, but to 
 vital forces from within; compare 
 Harless. The middle voteirai 
 is perhaps not to be insisted on as 
 confirming this (as Alf.), this form 
 appy. being not so much reflexive 
 (Wordsw.) as intensive and indicative 
 of the energy with which the process 
 is carried on; see Kriiger, Sprachl. 
 § 52. 7. 1, oomp. Donalds. Gr. 432. 
 2. els olKo8opii]V eavTov iv 
 07.] 'for building up of itself in love;' 
 
 aiJ_.JLs :»q1^/L&j )£}aj->.2? 
 
 » -n 7 7 It 
 
 [ut in caritate perficiatur tedificium 
 ejus] Syr. ; end and object of the ai)^- 
 ijaiv iroieiTai : love is the element in 
 which the edification takes plaoe.Meyer 
 connects iv Aydwn with aO^nv Troiei- 
 
96 
 
 nP02 E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 Do not walk as dark- 
 ened, hardened, and 
 feelingless heathens. 
 Put off the old, and 
 put on the new man. 
 
 1 7 TovTo ovv Xeyai koI fiaprupo/xai ev 
 
 Kvplo), fxtjKeTi vfx.as irepnrareiv KaQm kui 
 
 17. TO Idiiri] So Lachm. -with ABDiFGNi; 5 mss.; Clarom., Sang., Aug., 
 Boern., Vulg., Copt., Sahid., JEth. (both).; Clem., Cyr., al.,-^and appy. 
 rightly, as the addition of N' may be considered more than sufficient to coun- 
 terbalance the probability of Xoitto having been left out as being imperfectly 
 understood (ed. i, -i). The authorities for ri \onrd, IBvri are D^D'EKLN*; 
 great majority of mss. ; Syr. (both); Goth., al.; Chrys., Theod. {fiec, Tisch. 
 ed. 2 and 7). ' 
 
 Toi, to harmonize with ver. 15, but 
 without sufficient reason, and in opp. 
 to the obvious objection that aH^Tjirtv 
 iroietTat is thus associated with two 
 limitingprepositional clauses, and the 
 unity of thought proportionately im- 
 paired; comp. Alf . in loc. 
 
 17. ToIto oSv X^-y<i>] 'This I say 
 then;' this, so. what follows; connect- 
 ing the verse with the hortatory por- 
 tion commenced ver. I — 3, by resump- 
 tion on the negative side {/iriK^Ti, irepi- 
 ■n-areh) of the exhortation previously 
 expressed on the positive side, ver. 
 I — 3 (wapaK. dftos TrepiTrar^o-ai), but 
 interrupted by the digression, ver. 4 
 — 16; irdXii' dvAa/Sc rijs irapaiviaeas 
 rh irpoolfuov Theod. On this resump- 
 tive force of 0^, see Klotz, Devar. 
 Vol. II. p. 718, and notes on Gal. iii. 
 5. The illative force advocated by 
 EadieafterMeyer(ed.i) is here impro- 
 bable, and rightly retracted by Meyer 
 (ed. 2) ; comp. Donalds. Gr. § 548. 31. 
 f,a.pripofjaxiv^vpiia\' testify , solemn- 
 ly declare ('c[uasi testibus adhibitis'}, 
 ire the Lord,' — not 'per Domiuum' 
 {/idpTvpa Si Tov Kipiov Ka\u, Chrys. ; 
 teee Fritz. Rom. ix. i. Vol. 11. p. 241), 
 nor even as specifying the authority 
 upon which (' tanquamChristidisoipu- 
 lus,' Fritz. Rom. Vol. 11. p. 84), but, 
 as usual.definingtheelement or sphere 
 inwhichthe declaration ismade:comp. 
 Bom. ix. i, dXijSeiai' Xiyca iv Xp.; 2 
 Cor. ii. !•}, ii'Xp.'\a\oD/iev, — scarcely 
 correctly translated by Fritz, 'ut ho- 
 
 mines cum Christo nexi;' r Thess. iv. 
 I, irapaKaXovfLey iv Kvplif, and see 
 notes in loc. By thus sinking his own 
 personality, the Apostle greatly en- 
 hances the solemnity of his declara- 
 tion. Onthisuseof (napr. seenotes on 
 Gal. V. 3, and comp. Eaphel. Annot. 
 
 Vol. II. p. 478, 595. )l.T)K^I. v(i.ds 
 
 irepiiroTftv] ' that ye no longer (must) 
 walk;' subject and substance of the 
 hortatory declaration; see Acts xxi. 
 21, \eyav p.Ti irepiTe/iveiv airois t& 
 TeKva. In objective sentences of this 
 nature (see esp. Donalds. Gr. § 584 sq.) 
 the infinitive frequently involves the 
 same conception that would have been 
 expressed in the direct sentence by the 
 imperative, and is usually (but incor- 
 rectly) explained by an ellipsis of Seh : 
 see Winer, Gr. § 44. 3. b, p. 288, Lo- 
 beck, Phryn. 753 sq., and compare 
 Heindorf on Plato, Protag. p. 346 e. 
 Kal Td?6vt]] Hhe Gentiles also;' with 
 tacit reference to their own former 
 state when unconverted; the koX intro- 
 ducing a comparison orgentle contrast 
 between the emphatically expressed 
 vixai, and the idvT) of which but lately 
 they formed a part ; see notes on Koi, 
 verses 4, 32, and ore Phil. iv. 12. If 
 Xoijrd be retained it would imply that 
 theEphesians, though Christians, still 
 fell under the general denomination of 
 Gentiles : it would also appy. convey a 
 hint reminding them what they once 
 were, and what they now ought not to 
 be; see Wolf in loc. 
 
IV. 17, li 
 
 97 
 
 Ta eflcJj vepivarei ev fxaraioTijTi tov voo'S avTcov, 
 ecTKOTiafievoi r^ oiavola ocre?, airriWoTpiwixeiOi t>]<s i8 
 
 €V iiaraioTTiTi k.t.X.] 'in the vanity 
 of their mind:' sphere of their moral 
 walk; compare Bom. i. 21, i/iaraiii- 
 ByjtTav ip to?s BiaXoyifffioh avTuv, 
 Chrys. rightly explains the words by 
 t4 Trepi tA imraia. ■/jffxoXTJiTBai, but 
 is probably not correct in restricting 
 them to idolatry, as imraios and jua- 
 raioui do not necessarily involve any 
 such reference ; compare Fritz. Rom. 
 Vol. I. p. 65. The reference seems 
 rather to that general depravation of 
 the vovi (the higher moral and intel- 
 lectual element), which was the uni- 
 versal characteristic of heathenism; 
 see Usteri, Lehrb. 1. 3, p. 35 sq., and 
 notes on i Tim. vi. 5, 2 Tivi. iii. 8. 
 
 18. 6<rKOTi.<r|i«voi...ovT€s] 'being 
 darkened: ' participial clause defining 
 their state, and accounting for the pre- 
 ceding assertion (Donalds. Gr. § 616); 
 iaKOT, (opp. to ^((puTurfiJvoi, ch. i. 
 18; comp. Eom. i. 21, xi. 10, i Thess. 
 V. 4) referring to their state of moral 
 darkness, and fores (rightly referred 
 by Tisch. and Laehm. to ia-Kor., not 
 to amiW. [Eadie], — a punctuation 
 which mars the emphatic parallelism 
 of the initial perf. participles) mark- 
 ing, somewhat pleonasticaUy after the 
 perf. part., its pei-manent and endur- 
 ing state; comp. Winer, Gr. § 45. 5, 
 p. 311. The apparently conjugate 
 nature of the clauses (comp. 6vTes... 
 ov<rav) has led Olsh. and others to 
 couple together kaKor. k.t.X. and Sia 
 tV dyv. as relating to the intellect, 
 AtttjW. k.t.X. and StA t7]V Trc&p. as re- 
 lating to the feelings. This however, 
 though at first sight plausible, will not 
 be found logically satisfactory. Their 
 being ia-Kor. k.t.X. could scarcely be 
 said to be the consequence of their 
 ayvoia ('ignorance' simply, Acts iii. 
 17, xvii. 30, and appy. i Pet. i. 14), 
 
 but rather vice versa; whereas it seems 
 perfectly consistent to say that their 
 alienation was caused by their igno- 
 rance, and still more by the ensuing 
 irJ/paa-is. Hence the punctuation of 
 the text. The reading i(7KOTur/ji4voi 
 is not perfectly certain ; the more clas- 
 sical fdKOTwixivoi is found in ABX ; 
 Ath. (Lachm., Tisch. ed. 7), but has 
 scarcely sufficient support to warrant 
 its reception in the text. 
 T^ SiavoCi;,] 'in their understanding,' 
 ' in their higher intellectual nature,' 
 Sii^odos Xorym'-fi, Orig., comp. Beck, 
 Seelenl. 11. 19, p. 58 ; see ch. ii. 3, and 
 Joseph. Antiq. ix. 4. 3, ttjv ii.6.voi.av 
 iTeiTKOTia_ii.ivovi. The dat. (' of ref er~ 
 ence to ') denotes the particular sphere 
 to which the ' darkness ' is limited ; 
 see notes on Gal. i. 22, Winer, Gr. 
 § 31. 6, p. 193. The distinction be- 
 tween this dat. and the ace, as in 
 Joseph. Z.c, is not very easy to define, 
 as such an acous. has clearly some of 
 the limiting character which we pro- 
 perly assign to the dat. ; see Hartung, 
 Casus, ^.62. Perhaps the ace. might 
 denote that the darkness extended 
 over the mind, the dat. that it has its 
 seat in tlie mind; seeKriiger, Sprachl. 
 § 46. 4. I. din]XXoTpi<i)|i^voi]. 
 
 ■''being dlienated from,' aXXdrpioi Ka- 
 Seo-Tures, Theod.-Mops. ; see notes on 
 ch. ii. IT!. TTJs Jwijs ToS 0{ov] 
 
 'the life of God^' This is one of the 
 many cases (see Winer, Gr. § 30. 
 1. obs. p. ^68) where the nature of 
 the gen., whether objecti or subjecti, 
 must be determined solely from exe- 
 getical considerations. As fuij ap- 
 pears never to denote ' course of life ' 
 [e.g. TTfi tv iperS fwi^c, Theod.) in 
 the N.T., but 'the principle of life'. 
 as opp. to $dmTos (comp. Trench, 
 Synon, § 27), toi) 9eoC will more natu- 
 
 H 
 
98 
 
 nPOS E*E2I0Y2. 
 
 tw?y Tov Oeov Sia TrjV ajvoiav rrjV oSaav ev avTOts, via 
 
 19 TtjV vwpw(Tiv t5j KupStai avTwv, oiTivei airtiXyiiKOTef 
 
 eavToiig TrapeSaiKav Tjy aaeXyela «y epyaalav aKa6aptTia<t 
 
 rally be the gen. suhj. or auctoris, ' the 
 life which God gives;' comp. 5i.Kai.o- 
 <rvi>7i Beov, Rom. i. 1 7, with i) iK 9. Slk., 
 Phil. iii. 9. It is however probable 
 that we must advance a step farther, 
 and regard the gen. as possessive. 
 This unique expression will then de- 
 note not merely the 7raXi77ece(rio, but 
 In the widest doctrinal application, 
 'the life of God' in the soul of man; 
 comp. Olsh. and Stier in loc, and see 
 esp. the good treatise on fwij in Olsh. 
 
 OpUSC. p. 185 Sq. T1]V 
 
 ofo-av Iv avToIs seems intended to 
 point out the indwelling, deep-seated, 
 nature of the &yvoi.a, and to form a 
 sort of parallelism to rris xapS. avTuv. 
 Meyer (compare Peile) conceiving that 
 the words indicate the subordination 
 of 8tcL T-ijv TTttJp. to 8ia rriv a/yv. re* 
 moves the comma after aiTots. This 
 IS certainly awkward : St Paul's more 
 than occasional use of co-ordinate 
 clauses [e.g. Gal. iv. 4) leads us to re- 
 gard both members as dependent on 
 dwrjW. (Orig.), and structurally inde- 
 pendent of each other; though, aa the 
 context seems to suggest, the latter 
 maybe considered slightly explanatory 
 of the former, and (like oTnjXX.) ex- 
 pressive of a state naturally conse- 
 quent: see esp. Orig. Oaten, p. 175. 
 ircopwo-iv] ^callousness,' 'hardness,' — 
 not 'C£eoitatem,' Syr. (both), Vulg., 
 Clarom., Mih. (both). Arm. (TriipdJcris, 
 Tl Ti(jiKa<rLi, Suid.), but 'obduratio- 
 nem,' Copt. (Sftom,— which however 
 includes both significations), 'dau- 
 bi|30S,' Goth,, — i) iffxdTTi avaKy-qaia, 
 Theod. The word iriiponns is not de- 
 rived from irapbs 'ca3cus' ('vox, ut 
 videtur, a grammaticis ficta,' Fritz. 
 jRom. xi. 7, Vol. II. p. 452), and cer- 
 tainly not from ir6/)os (Sia^pdrreii'), 
 
 as appy. Chrys., but from irtSpos ' tuil- 
 stone, ' and thence from the similarity 
 of appearance, a 'morbid swelling' 
 (Aristot. Hist. An. m. 19), the ' callus' 
 at the extremity of fractured bones 
 (Med. Writers). The adject. irupAs, 
 in the sense of ToKatirapos (Hesych.), 
 is cognate with Trijpis, and derived 
 from IIAfi, vdirxij; comp. Phavor. 
 Eclog. T50. b, p. 396 (ed. Dind.). 
 
 19. o?Tiv£s] 'men who;' explana- 
 tory force of 5<TTLt ; see notes on Gal. 
 ii. 4, iv. 24. airqXYiiKoTes] 
 
 ' being past feeling, ' Auth. , — an admi- 
 rable translation. The use of the 
 semi-teohnioal term iriipiaai.^ suggests 
 this appropriate continuation of the 
 metaphor. There is then no reference 
 to mere ' desperatio ' (comp. Polyb. 
 Hist. IX. 40. 9, aTToKyovvTes rats ^X- 
 iriffj, and exx. in Eaphel, Annot. Vol. 
 II. p. 479), as Syr., Vulg., Goth., — 
 h-aipossibly with the reading of DEFG, 
 al., dTDjXTTi/coTcs, — nor even to that 
 feelingless state which is the result of 
 it (Cicero, Epist. Fam. 11. 16. i, 'des- 
 peratione obduruisse ad dolorem no- 
 vum,' aptly cited by Beng.) ; but, as 
 the context shows, to that moral apa- 
 thy and deadness which supervenes 
 when the heart has ceased to be sen- 
 sible of the ' stimuli ' of the conscience; 
 t6 dk awTjXyTjKdTes (jjffirep tujv dirb Td- 
 
 $OVS Tivbs fl^prj TToXXd/CiS rod fT(b^TO% 
 
 vev^KpiapAvijJV, oTs 0X70? oithv iKeiBcv 
 Ifylvercu.- Theod. -Mops. The gloss 
 of Theoph. KaTe^paSvuriKbres (comp. 
 Chrys.), adopted by Hamm. ore Bom. 
 i. 29, but appy. retracted here, is 
 untenable, as it needlessly interrupts 
 the continuity of the metaphor, 
 lavroijs] 'themselves,' as Meyer well 
 says, with frightful emphasis. It has 
 been observed by Chrys. and others 
 
IV. 1 9, 20. 
 
 09 
 
 vaartji iv TtXeave^ia. vfJLeis Se ov'^ o'vruis e/JLaOere tov 20 
 
 that there is no opposition here with 
 Rom. i. 26, irapiSaKev airois 6 6e4s. 
 The progress of sin is represented 
 under two aspects, or rather two 
 stages of its fearful course. By u, 
 perverted exercise of his free will man 
 plunges himself into sin ; the deeper 
 demersiou in it is the judicial act (no 
 mere myx^pw-s, Chrys.) of God ; 
 comp. Wordsw. in loc. 
 T^ do-cXYcC^] ' Wantonness.' On the 
 meaning and derivation of this word, 
 see notes on Gal. v. ig, and comp. 
 Trench, Synon. § 16. 
 els lp7ao-Cav] 'to working;' conscious 
 ohject of the fearful self- abandonment : 
 ^pyaa. ^TjcriVj ^^evro rb irpayfLa'... 
 op^s TTws avToiis aToiTTepei ffvyypiat/JtrfS' 
 Chrys. iracrris] ' of every 
 
 kind, ' whether natural or unnatural ; 
 fiOLxeia, iropveia^ iratdepaaTta, Chrys. 
 As St Paul most commonly places 
 ■was before, and not, as here, after the 
 abstract (anarthrous) subst*, it seems 
 proper to express in transl. the full 
 force of TrdffTjs: comp. notes on eh. i. 
 8. €V irXeove^fa] 'in (not 'with') 
 
 covetousness ; ' iv marking the condi- 
 tion, the prevailing state or frame of 
 mind in which they wrought &e draS. 
 The word irXeove^ia {' amor habendi,' 
 Fritz., 'bonum alienum ad se redigit,' 
 Beng. on Bom. i. 29) is here explained 
 by Chrys. and appy. some Greek Ff. 
 (see Suicer, Thesaur. Vol. n, p. 750, 
 but comp. p. 748), followed by Ham- 
 mond (in a valuable note on Eom. i. 
 29), and by Trench, Synon. § 24, as 
 ainerpla, 'immoderate, inordinate de- 
 sire.' In support of this extended 
 meaning the recital of TrXcovcfio with 
 sins of the flesh, iCor. v. 1 1, Eph. v. 
 3, Col. iii. 5, is popularly urged by 
 Trench and others, but appy., as a 
 critical examination of the passages 
 will show, without fall conclusiveness. 
 
 For example, in i Cor. v. 10, rots 
 ir6pvoLS ri Tois wXeoviKrais Kal dpTra^iif 
 {Lachm., Tisch.), the use of the dis- 
 junctive ij between w6pv. and ttXeox. 
 opp. to the conjunctive xal between 
 irXeov. and apir. , and esp. the omission 
 of the art. before apw. (Winer, Gr. § 19, 
 4. d, p. 116), tend to prove the very 
 reverse. Again in Eph. v. 3, iropvela 
 is joined with dsaBapirla by Kal, whUe 
 xXeove^. is disjoined from them by ■q : 
 see notes. Lastly in Col. iii. 5, the 
 preceding anarthrous, unconnected 
 nouns, TTopv., aKad., iraB. , have no very 
 close union with koI t^k irXeove^iav 
 K.T.X., from which too they are separat- 
 ed by iin8v/iiav Kax'/jv : see notes in loc. 
 While therefore we may admit the 
 deep significance of the spiritual fact 
 thatthissinis mentioned in connexion 
 with strictly carnal sins, we must also 
 deny that there are grammatical or 
 contextual reasons for obliterating the 
 idea of covetousness and self-seeking 
 which seems bound up in the word ; 
 see esp. Miiller, Doctr. of Sin, 1.. i. 3. 
 ■z. Vol. I. p. 169 (Clark). 
 
 20. v(ji6is 8^] 'But you,' emphatic, 
 with distinct and marked contrast 
 to these unconverted and feelingless 
 heathen. ov\ oBtus ifiaien 
 
 TOV Xp.] 'did not thus learn Christ,' 
 — but on principles very different ; 
 the ovTus obviously implying much 
 more than is expressed ('litotes'); ra 
 TOV Seairdrou yLpLffrov iravTanaaiv hav- 
 ria- Theod. This use of /i.av6. with 
 an accus. 'personm is somewhat difficult 
 to explain, and is probably unique. 
 Eaphel {Anrmt. Vol. 11. p. 480) cites 
 Xeu. Hell. II. I. I, but the example 
 is illusory. The common interpr. 
 Xptffrbs = ' dootrina Christi ' (Grot. , 
 Turner) is frigid and inadmissible, and 
 the use of ifiadere in the sense of 
 'learnt to know,' scil. 'who He is and 
 H 2 
 
100 
 
 nP02 E*E2IOY2. 
 
 21 Xpjo-Toi/, eiye avrov ^Kovcrare KUt ev avTW eSiSa'^O^te 
 2 2 KaOcos ia-Tiv aX^Oeia ev tw IrjT-oo, airoQeaOai vfiag 
 
 what He desires' (Buck.), has not 
 appy. any lexical authority. We can 
 only then regard Xp. as the object 
 which is learnt (or heard, ver. 21), the 
 content of the preaching, so that the 
 hearer, as it were, ' takes up into him- 
 self and appropriates the person of 
 Christ Himself ' (Olsh.) : compare the 
 similar but not identical expression, 
 Trapa\aiJ,pdi>eiv rhv X/jhttJi' 'Itjo"., Col. 
 ii. 6; see notes in loc. 
 
 ■21. Syt] ' if indeed,' ' turn certe si;' 
 not ' since,' Eadie : see notes, ch. iii. ■2, 
 Hartung, Partik. Vol. i. p. 407 sq. 
 The explanation of Chrys. oiK aiitfu- 
 ^dWovTos itrrif aXKd Kal tytpodpa Sta- 
 pe^aiovfihov, is improved on by 
 CEcum., wffel eTireVf a/i^tjSaXXw yap 
 e? Tis rbv Xp. dxoiffas Kal SiSnx^^'s ^f 
 aiiTifi TotaOra TTjoarret. 
 airo V ■qKovo-are] ' ye heard Him ; ' 
 airbv being put forward with empha- 
 sis; — 'if indeed it was Him, His divine 
 voice and divine Self, that you really 
 heard.' Alf. pertinently compares 
 John X. 27, but observe that the aiTdii 
 is here used in the same sort of inclu- 
 sive way as tJx Xpta-rov, ver. 20. No 
 argument can fairly be deduced from 
 this that St Paul had not himself in- 
 structed the readers (De W.); see on 
 ch. iii. i. iv airia\'in Him:' 
 
 not 'by Him,' Auth., Arm., or 'illius 
 nomine,' Beng., but, as usual, 'in 
 union with Him ;' see Winer, Gr. § 48. 
 ^i P- 345- Meyer calls attention to 
 the precision of the language, avrbv 
 riKoiaare pointing to the first recep- 
 tion, iv aiT<f iSiSax- to the further 
 instruction which they had received 
 as Christians. Both are included in 
 the foregoing i/idOere rhv XpLarov. 
 Ka6(is Jo-Tiv aXiiB. k.t.X.] ^as, or ac^ 
 cording as, is truth in Jesus' The 
 meaning and connexion of this clause 
 
 are both obscure, and have received 
 many different interpretations, most 
 of which involve errors affecting one 
 or more of the following particulars, 
 — the meaning of KojBiis (Riick.), the 
 position of iariv (Olsh.), the meaning 
 of dX^Seia (Harl.), the absence of the 
 art. before it (Auth.), the designation 
 of Christ by His historical rather than 
 official name (Mey.), and finally the 
 intertion of v/iSs (DeW.). It is ex- 
 tremely diiEcult to assign an inter- 
 pretation that shall account for and 
 harmonize all of these somewhat con- 
 flicting details. Perhaps the following 
 will be found least open to exception. 
 The Apostle, having mentioned the 
 teaching the Ephesians had received 
 (^5i5t£x^-), notices first (not parenthe- 
 tically, Beza) the form and manner, 
 and then the substance of it. Kaflws 
 K.T.\. is thus a predication of manner 
 attached to ^5iS., and implies, not 'as 
 truth is in Jesus' (Olsh.), which de- 
 parts from the order and involves a 
 modification of the simple meaning of 
 aKT)9. ; nor (as it might have been ex- 
 pressed) 'as is truth,' abstractedly,^ 
 but, 'as is truth — ^in Jestjs,' embodied, 
 as it were, in a personal Saviour, and 
 in the preaching of His cross. The 
 substance of what they were taught is 
 then speciiied, not without a faint 
 imperative force, by the infin. with 
 umSs; the pronoun being added either 
 on account of the introduction of the 
 new subject 'l-qaov (Winer, Gr. § 44. 
 3, p. 288), or more probably to mark 
 their contrast, not only with the Gen- 
 tiles before mentioned, but with their 
 own former state as implied in ttjk 
 wporipav &va<7Tpotj>T]v. Meyer, follow- 
 ing CEoum. 1, connects the inf. with 
 iorlv dX-qd. , a construction not gram- 
 matically untenable (Jelf, Gr. § 669, 
 
IV. 21, 22, 23- 
 
 101 
 
 Kara tijv irporipav ai/aaTpo(p>]v rov Tra\aiop av6pwKov 
 Tov (pQeipofJievov Kara ray iiridu/xiai t?? airdrt]?, ava- 23 
 
 eomp. Madvig, Synt. § 164. 3), but 
 somewhat forced and unsatisfactory. 
 Stier, after Beng., regards ottoS. as 
 a resumption of ij.tik. ire/)i7r., ver. 17, 
 but yet is obliged to admit a kind of 
 connexion with idid. k.t.X. 
 
 22. airoS^o-Sai v|i,ds] ' that ye put 
 off; ' objective sentence (Donalds. Gr. 
 § 584) dependent on i5iS., and specify- 
 ing the pw-port and substance of the 
 teaching ; see Winer, Gr. § 48. a. obs. 
 p. 349, and comp. Orig. Caten. The 
 metaphor is obviously 'a vestibus 
 sumpta,'Beza(Eom.xiii. i2,Col.iu.8), 
 and stands in contrast to ivSi<y. ver. 
 24; see TJsteri, Lehrb. 11. i. 3, p. 220. 
 The translation of Peile, 'that you 
 have put off,' is very questionable, as 
 the aor. is here only used in accord- 
 ance with the common law of suc- 
 cession of tenses (Madvig, Synt. § 171, 
 sq.), and perhaps with reference (ob- 
 serve iviiffaaBai ver. 24, as compared 
 with draj-eoOo-ffoi) to the speedy, single 
 nature of the act ; but comp. notes on 
 ch. iii. 4, and on i Thess. v. I'j. 
 Equally untenable is the supposition 
 that the inf. is equivalent to the imper. 
 (Luther, Wolf) ; not however because 
 v;ms is attached to it (Eadie, for see 
 Winer, Gr. § 44. 3. b, p. 288), but be- 
 cause this usage is only found (ex- 
 cluding Epic Greek) in laws, oracles, 
 <&c. or in clauses marked by special 
 warmth or earnestness ; comp. Bern- 
 hardy, Synt. IX. 3, p. 358. But few 
 certain instances, e.g. Phil. iii. 16 (see 
 notes), are found in the language of 
 the N. T. Kara ti)v irpor. 
 
 dvacTTp.] 'as concerns your former 
 conversation,' 'quo ad pristinam Viven- 
 di, concupiscendi, et peooandi consue- 
 tudinem,' Corn, a Lap. ; specification 
 of that with regard to which the dTro- 
 9i<r6ai. tov va\. S,p9p. was especially 
 
 carried out ; Karb, here not having its 
 more usual sense of measure, but, as 
 the context seems to require, the less 
 definite one of reference to; comp. 
 Eom. ix. 5, and see Eost u. Palm, 
 Lex. s. V. Vol. I. p. 1599. The con- 
 struction Tin TraX. av9p. Kari k.t.'K. 
 (Jerome, (Eeum.) is opposed to the 
 order, and to all principles of perspi- 
 cuity, — not however positively to ' the 
 laws of language,' Eadie, for comp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 20. 2, p. 123, — and is 
 distinctly untenable. The expressive 
 word Avaa-TpcKpii is confined (in its 
 present sense) to the N.T. (Gal. i. 13, 
 r Tim. iv. 12, al.), to the Apocrypha 
 (Tob. iv. 14, 2 Maoc. v. 8), and to 
 later Greek (Polyb. Hist. iv. 82, Ar- 
 rian, Epict. i. 9) ; compare Suicer, 
 Tlies. Vol. I. p. 322. riv 
 
 ira\ai.6v avBpwirov] ' (fte old man,' i.e. 
 our former unconverted self : personi- 
 fication of our whole sinful condition 
 before regeneration (Eom. vi. 6, Col. 
 iii. 9), opposed to the Kaivhs or vios 
 avdpairos (ver. 24, Col. iii. 10) and the 
 Kaiv^ KTi'ffis (Gal. vi. 15), or, if re- 
 garded in another point of view (oomp. 
 Chrys.), to the la-oi Sjidp., ch. iii. 16, 
 Eom. vii. 22 : see Harless, Ethih, § 22, 
 p. 97, and oomp. Suicer, Thesaur. 
 Vol. I. p. 352. t6v <|)8eipo- 
 
 |i6vov] 'which waxeth corrupt,' del 
 <j>6dperai., Orig. Oaten.; further de- 
 finition and specification of the pro- 
 gressive condition of the TraXaios avBp. , 
 — not however with any causal force 
 (ed. i), as this would be expressed 
 either by a relative clause (see ore 
 I Tim. ii. 4), or a part, without the 
 article. The tense of the part. (pres. , 
 — not imperf., Beng.) must here be 
 noticed and pressed, as marking that 
 inner process of corruption and moral 
 disintegration which is not only the 
 
102 
 
 nPOS E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 24 veovaOai <5e rw TlveufxaTt tov vobi vfiwv Koi evSv- 
 
 eharaoteristio (Auth.) but the steadily 
 progressive condition of the iraX. avBp.; 
 contrast KTiadivra ver. 24. Meyer 
 refers (fiBiip. to 'eternal destruction' 
 (oomp. Hows.), regarding the pres. as 
 involving a future meaning. This is 
 tenable (see Bernhardy, Synt. x. i, p. 
 371), but seems inferior to the fore- 
 going, as drawing off attention from 
 the true present nature of the pro- 
 gressive ipBopi : comp. Gal. vi. 8, and 
 see notes in loc. 
 
 Kara has here no direct reference to 
 instrumentality (so. = 5ia,CEcum.,i)7r4, 
 Theoph., oomp. Syr.), but, as the par- 
 tial antithesis Karh Qihv (ver. 24) sug- 
 gests, its usual meaning of 'accordance 
 to ; ' in which indeed a faint reference 
 to the occasion or circumstances con- 
 nected with or arising from the ac- 
 cordance may sometimes be traced; 
 see notes on Phil. ii. 3, and ore Tit. iii. 
 5. Kari T&s iiriB. is however here 
 simply 'in accordance with the lusts,' 
 
 'secundum desideria,' Vulg., y-*\ 
 
 ,j [secimdum ooncupisoen- 
 
 1 
 
 tias] Syr.-Phil., i.e. just as the nature 
 and existence of such lusts imply and 
 necessitate : comp. Winer, Gr. % 49. d, 
 p. 358. TTJs dirdTT]s] '0/ 
 
 Deceit; ' gen. subjecti, i) dirarri being 
 taken so abstractedly (Middleton, Gr. 
 Art. V. 1 , 2) as to be nearly personified 
 (Mey.). The paraphrase iviBviilai. oTra- 
 TijKal (Beza, Auth.) is very unsatis- 
 factory, and mars the obvious anti- 
 thesis to Tijs a\i)96/as ver. 24. 
 
 ■23. dvaveo{ia-8ai 8e] ^and that ye 
 be renewed; ' contrasted statement, on 
 the positive side (' Sk alii rei aliam ad- 
 jioit, ut tamen ubivis qutedam opposi- 
 tio deolaretur,' IClotz, Devar. Vol. n. 
 p. 362), of the substance of what they 
 had been taught, which had been 
 
 previously specified on its negative 
 side, ver. 23. It has been doubted 
 whether ajtamoOirSads pass, or middle. 
 The act. is certainly rare (Thom. M. 
 p. 52, ed, Bern. ; comp. Psalm xxix. 
 2, Aq.); still, as Harless satisfactorily 
 shows, the middle, both in its simple 
 and metaphorical sense, is so com- 
 pletely devoid of any reflexive force 
 (comp, even duoyeoC treavrov, Antonin. 
 IV. 3), and is practically so purely 
 active in meaning, that no other form 
 than the passive (opp. to Stier) can 
 possibly harmonize with the context ; 
 comp. avaKHivovaSai, 2 Cor. iv. 16, 
 Col. iii. 10, and see Hofm. Sehriftb. 
 Vol. n. i, p. 269. The meaning of 
 dm, restoration to a former, not neces- 
 sarily a primal state, is noticed by 
 Winer {de Verb. c. Prcep. in. p. 10); 
 and the distinction between ai'aceou- 
 adtu ('recentare,' — more subjective, 
 and perhaps with prevailing ref. to 
 renovation) and ivaKOLfovadai ('reno- 
 vare,' — more objective, and perhaps 
 with prevailing ref. to regeneration) 
 by Tittmann, Synon, p. 60; comp. 
 Trench, Synon. § 18, and see notes on 
 Col. iii. 10. T<S IIvcv|j.aTi. 
 
 ToC voos v(ji.] 'by the Spirit of your 
 mind.' In this unique and somewhat 
 ambiguous expression, the gen. toos 
 may be explained either as — (a) appo- 
 sitive, 'spiritus quas mens vooatur,' 
 August, de Trill, xiv. xvi. ; so appy, 
 Taylor, Duct. Dub. 1. 1.7, comp. ib. 
 onBepent. 11.1. 12: — {b)partitii'e,'ihe 
 governing spirit of the mind,' De W., 
 Eadie, ttjv opfiTjV tov vohs TrvevixaTLKrfv, 
 Theod. ; — or (c) possessive, 'the (Di- 
 vine) Spirit united with the human 
 irvevfm (comp. Hooker, Bed. Pol. i. 7. 
 i), with which the vom as subject is 
 endued, and of which it is the recep- 
 taculiim;' r:} Uv. Tip ^i* rtf c^J, Chrys. 
 Of these (a) is manifestly, as Bp Bull 
 
IV. 24. 
 
 103 
 
 <ra<r9ai toi' Kaivov avOpwirov tov Kara Qeov KTifrOivra 
 ei> oiKato(Tvvri koi octiotijti t^? aXijOelai. 
 
 designates it, ' a flat and dull inter- 
 pretation;' (5) even if not metaphy- 
 sically or psychologically doubtful, is 
 exegetically unsatisfactory ; while on 
 the contrary (d),now adopted byMey., 
 has a full scriptural significance : 
 rd He. is the Holy Spirit, which by 
 its union with the human TfeS/ia be- 
 comes the agent of ivaKnlviji(Ti.s toS 
 roas, Bom, xii. i, and the vovs is the 
 seat of His working, — where /jtaraioTTis 
 (ver. 17) once was, but now Kofxorijs. 
 The dat. is thus not, as in (a) and {b), 
 a mere dat. 'of reference to' (ver. 17), 
 but a dat. irutruinenti, — scil. 5ick IIi'. 
 ^(7TLv avaKalvi(riSt CEcum., oirep dfaveoc 
 V/iSis, Orig. Oaten.; see Tit. iii. 5, and 
 comp. Colleot for Christmas Day. 
 This interpr. is ably defended by BuU, 
 Disc. V. p. 477 (Engl. Worts, Oxf. 
 1844) ; see also Waterl. Regen. Vol. v. 
 p. 434, Usteri,icArJ. 11. 1. 3, p. 237, 
 and Fritz. Nov. Ojpusc, Acad. p. 224. 
 The only modification, or rather ex- 
 planation, which it has seemed neoes. 
 sary to add to the view in ed. i, is 
 that Ttfi Ily. (as above stated) is not 
 the Holy Spirit regarded exclusively 
 and per se, but as in a gracious union 
 with the human spirit. With this 
 slight rectification, the third interpr. 
 seems to have a very strong claim on 
 our attention: contra Wordsw. in loc; 
 comp. alsoDelit2;sch,Bi6i;.P8j)c/ioZ. iv. 
 
 5. P- 144- 
 
 24. KaX Iv8«(ra<r9ai] ' and that ye 
 put on:' further and more distinot 
 statement on the positive side corre- 
 sponding to the i,ro8i(T$ai on the nega- 
 tive; the change of tense (aor.) being 
 appy. intentional; see notes on ver, 
 22. The arguments of Anabaptists 
 based on this verse are answered by 
 Taylor, Liberty of Proph. § 18. ad. 31. 
 It is veryimprobable that there is here 
 
 any allusion to baptism ; the 'putting 
 on the new man' refers to the renova- 
 tion of the heart afterwards; comp. 
 Waterl. Begen. Vol. v. p. 434. The 
 metaphorical and dogmatical meaning 
 is investigated in Suicer, Tliesaur. s.v. 
 Vol. 1. p. 1113. t3v Kaiviv 
 
 av6p.] 't7i« new man.' It is scarcely 
 necessary to observe that the kmv. 
 av$p. is not Christ (Zauch. ap. Pol. 
 Syn.), but is in direct contrast to tov 
 traX. af9p., and denotes 'the holy 
 form of human life which results from 
 redemption,' Miiller, Doctr. of Sin, 
 TV. 3, ad. fin,. Vol. 11. p. 392 (Clark): 
 comp. Col. iii. lo, where phs avdp. 
 stands in contrast to a former state 
 (Wordsw. aptly compares Matth. ix. 
 17, Mark ii. 22, Luke v. 38), as (coiwcJs 
 here to one needing renewal; see notes 
 in loc.. Trench, Synon. Part 11. § lo, 
 and Harl. Ethih, § 22, p. 97. The 
 patristic interpretations are given in 
 Suicer, Tliesaur. Vol. i. p. 352. 
 riv Kara, 0. ktio-B.] 'which after God 
 hath been created, '^not 'is created,' 
 Auth., but 'qui ..creatus est,' Vulg., 
 Clarom., sim. Copt., with the proper 
 force of theaor.inref. to the ^ast crea- 
 tion in Christ : the new man is, as it 
 were, a holy garb or personality, not 
 created in the case of each individual 
 believer, but created once for all ('ini- 
 tio rei Ohriatian»,' Beng.), and then 
 individually assumed. The key to this 
 important passage is undoubtedly the 
 striking parallel. Col. iii. 10, top vdov 
 TOV dvaKaLVOvfieuov els iirlyvuffiv /car* 
 elKova TOV KrlnavTos a,6Tov ', from which 
 it would almost seem certain (i) that 
 KTicdivTa in our present passage con- 
 tains an allusion to Gen. i. 27, and 
 suggestsa spiritual connexionhetween 
 the first creation of man in Adam and 
 the second new creation in Christ ; and 
 
104 riP02 Ea)E2IOY2;. 
 
 25 ' Ato airoOefievoi to y^eOSos XaXeire 
 aX^Oeiav eKuaroi fxera tou TrXtjcrlov av- 
 
 Spea.k the truth, do 
 uot cherish anger.br 
 practise theft : utter 
 no corrupt speech ; 
 be Qot bitter. 
 
 (2) that Kara Qeov, as illustrated by 
 Kdr elK. K.T.\. Col. I.e., is rightly ex- 
 plained as ' ad exemplum Dei : ' comp. 
 Gal. iv. 28, and see Winer, Gr, § 49. 
 d. p. 358. Thus then from this passage 
 compared with that from Col. we may 
 appy . deduce the great dogmatic truth, 
 — ' nt quod perdideramus in Adam, id 
 est secundum imaginem et simiUtudi- 
 nem esse Dei, hoc in Christo Jesu 
 reciperemus,' Irenteus, JI-mi\ iii. 18. i 
 (ed. Mass.); see notes on Col. I. c. 
 The justice of this deduction is doubt- 
 ed by MuUer {Doctr. of Sin, iv. 3, Vol. 
 II. p. 392), but without sufficient rea- 
 son ; see esp. the admirable treatise of 
 Bp. Bull, State of Man, &e. p. 445 sq. 
 (English Works, Oxf. 1S44), and De- 
 litzsch, ZJiftZ. Psychol. 11. 2, p. 51. On 
 the nature and process of this revival 
 of the image of- God, see Jackson, 
 Creed, Book viii. 35. i. 
 «v SiKoioo-. Kol oo-uSt.] ' in righteous- 
 ness and holiness; ' tokens and charac- 
 teristics of the divine image; ec de- 
 fining the state in which a similitude to 
 that image consists and exhibits itself 
 (Olsh.). The usual distinction between 
 these two substantives, do-ioVi/s iiiv 
 irpbs 060//, SiKacotTVVT] d^ irpos aydpibirovs 
 BeuipeiTai (Philo, de Ahrah. Vol. 11. p. 
 30, ed. Mang., comp. Tittm. Synon. 
 p. 25), is not here wholly applicable: 
 as Harless shows from i Tim. ii. 8, 
 Heb. vii. 7, that the term oo-iorijs [on 
 the doubtful derivation, see Pott, Et. 
 Forsch. Vol. 1. p. 126, contrasted with 
 Benfey, Wurzellex. Vol. i. p. 436] in- 
 volves not merely the idea of 'piety,' 
 but of 'holy purity,' to KaBapov, Chrys. 
 There is thus a faint contrast suggest- 
 ed between aKaOapala, and v\coi/et,la 
 in ver. ig, and SiKMo<r. and oo-iot. in 
 the present verse. Olshauseu (in an 
 
 excellent note on this verse) comments 
 on this passage, Col. iii. 10, and Wis- 
 dom ii. 23 (also referred to by Bull), 
 as respectively alluding to the Divine 
 image under its ethieal, intellectual, 
 and physical aspects : this last refer- 
 ence however seems somewhat doubt- 
 ful; comp. Grimm, in loc. 
 Tijs d\T)66£ds] 'of Truth;' exactly 
 opp. to TTJs oTranjs, ver. 22, and of 
 course to be connected with both pre- 
 ceding nouns. The adjectival solution 
 (Beza, Auth.) wholly destroys the ob- 
 vious and forcible antithesis, and the 
 reading Kai akriBdq. [D*FG; Clarom., 
 Sang.,Boern-.;Cypr.,al.]hasno claims 
 on our attention. 
 
 25. Aio] ' Wherefore ;' in reference 
 to the truths expressed- in the verses 
 immediately preceding: dwuv tov ita- 
 Xaiw dv0piiiToi> KaBoXiKus, XoiTcv airov 
 Kal viroypd^ei Kara /iipor Chrys. The 
 previous mention of dXijSeio seems to 
 have suggested the first exhortation. 
 On the use of dio in the N.T., see notes 
 on Gal. iv. 31. diro6^)jiEvoi 
 
 t6 <|/6C8os] 'having put off (aor. with 
 ref. to the priority of the act; comp. 
 notes on ver. 8) lying,' or rather false- 
 hood, in a fully abstract sense (John 
 viii. 44), — not merely to ^eiSea-Bai, 
 scil. TO 'SaKelv ^euS^: falsehood in 
 every form is a chief characteristic of 
 the jraXaus ai/Bpairos, and, as Miiller 
 well shows, comes naturally from that 
 selfishness which is the essence of all 
 sin; see Doctr. 0/ Sin, Vol. i.pass. The 
 positive exhortation which follows is 
 considered by Jerome not improbably 
 a reminiscence of Zachar. viii. 16, Xa- 
 Xeire dXi^Beiav iKatrros wpbs [is the 
 change to /xcto. intentional, as better 
 denoting 'inter-communion,' etc.?] tok 
 ttXtjixio^ ayToD. For a short sermon 
 
IV. 25, 26. 
 
 105 
 
 Tou, oTi ea/xev aW^Xoou fJ-eXtj. 'Opyl^eaOe Ka\ fxrj 26 
 afJiapTai/ere' 6 'jjXioi fir] iiriSvirco eiri tw TrapopyKTfJLtp 
 
 on tliis text see August. Serm. olxvi. 
 Vol. V. p. 907 (ed. Migne). 
 oTi ka-fi^v K.T.X.] 'because we aremem- 
 bers one of another.'' The force of tlie 
 exhortation does not rest on any mere 
 ethical considerations of our obliga- 
 tions to society, or on any analogy that 
 may be derived from the body (Chrys.), 
 but on the deeper truth that in being 
 members of one another we are mem- 
 bers of the body of Christ (Rom. xii. 
 5), of Him who was ^ oK-^Seia xal 77 
 fw^ : see Harl. in loc. 
 
 16. 'OfTflXprii KaX (ii] diioprdvcTc] 
 'Be angry, and sin not:' a direct cita- 
 tion from Psalm iv. 5, LXX. The 
 original words are -IKDnj^'PSI •1t3"1j 
 which, though appy. more correctly 
 translated 'tremble and, t^c' (Gesen., 
 Ewald, J. Olsh., opp. to Hengst. and 
 Hitzig), are adduced by St Paul from 
 the Greek version, as best embodying 
 a salutary and practical precept; comp. 
 ver. ^s. The command itself has re- 
 ceived many different explanations, 
 though nearly all become ultimately 
 coincident, (i) The usual interpr. 'si 
 contingat vos irasci' ('though ye be 
 angry,' Butler, Serm. vrri. ; still main- 
 tained by Zyro, Stud. u. Krit. 1841, 
 p. 681 sq.) is founded on the union of 
 two imperatives in Hebrew (Gen. xlii. 
 18, Prov. XX. 13, Gesen. Gr. § 137. 2), 
 and in fact any cultivated language, 
 to denote condition and result. This 
 however is here inapplicable, for the 
 solution would thus be not ipyi^bii^voi 
 IXTj a/iap., but iav SpytjyiffOe ovx afw.p- 
 Tr/aere [not -a-eaSe in N. T.], which 
 cannot be intended. (3) Winer [Gr. 
 § 43. 2, p. 279) more plausibly con- 
 ceives the first imper. permissive, the 
 second jussive : comp. the version of 
 Symm. 6py. dWi /jirj a/aapr. It is true 
 indeed that a permissive imper. is 
 
 found occasionally in theN.T. (i Cor. 
 vii. 15, perhaps Matth. xxvi. 45), still 
 the close union by /col of two impera- 
 tives of similar tense, but with a dis- 
 similar imperatival force, is, as Meyer 
 has observed, logicaBy unsatisfactory. 
 (3) The following interpr. seems the 
 most simple : both imperatives axe jus- 
 sive; as however the second imper. is 
 used with /i^, its jussive force is there- 
 by enhanced, while the affirmative 
 command is by juxta-position so much 
 obscured, as to be in effect little more 
 than a participial member, though its 
 intrinsic jussive force is not to be 
 denied. There is undoubtedly an anger 
 against sin, for instance, against deli- 
 berate falsehood, as the context appy. 
 suggests (see Chrys.), which a good 
 man not only may, but ought to feel 
 (see Suicer, Thesaur. Vol. 11. p. 504), 
 and which is very different from the 
 6pyri forbidden in ver. 31: compare 
 Trench, Synon. § 37, and on the sub- 
 ject of resentment generally, Butler, 
 Serm. viii., and the good note of 
 Wordsw. in loc. 6 irjXios 
 
 K.T.X.] 'let not the sun go down on 
 your irritation.' The command is the 
 Christian parallel of the Pythagorean 
 custom cited by Hammond, Wetst., 
 and others, eiirore irpoaxSeiep els XoiSo- 
 ptas vtt' 6py7J^, irplv 17 rbf jp^iov 8dvac 
 TCLS Sefiais i/i^dWovres dXX'^Xois Koi 
 affiraffd/ievoi SteXOovTo' Plutarch, de 
 Am. Frat. 488 b [§ 17]. There does 
 not appear any allusion to the possible 
 effect of night upon anger, /iriwois ri 
 vb^ vXiov apaKaia-Q t4 irCp 6i4 t£v iv- 
 voiar- Theoph. (see Suicer, Thes. s. v. 
 ijX^os, III. 2), but to the fact that the 
 day ended with the sunlight ; ' quare 
 si quem irascentem nox occuparet, is 
 iram retiuebat in proximuni diem;' 
 Estius. T^ irapopYKTii^] 
 
106 
 
 nP02 E$E2I0YS. 
 
 27 
 28 
 
 vfxwv, f/LijSe SlSore tottou tw oia^okw, 'O KkeiTToov nrjK- 
 
 ' irntation,' 'exasperation,' and there- 
 fore to be distinguished from dpyri, 
 which expresses the more permanent 
 state. The word is non-olassioal and 
 rare, but is found i Kings xv. 30, 
 2 Kings xix. 3 (where it is joined with 
 0\l<pts and i\iyiJ.6s), ib. xxiii. 26, Ne- 
 hem. ix. 18, 26, and Jerem. xxi. 5 
 (Alex.) witlr 8viJ.bs and dpyri. The wa- 
 pA. is not merely intensive (Mey.), nor 
 even indicative of a deflection from a 
 right rule (Wordsw.), but probably 
 points to the irritating circumstance 
 or object which provoked the dpy-q: 
 comp. vapo^inu, and Kost u. Palm, 
 Lex. s. V. IV. I, Vol.' II. p. 670. 
 The article before irapopyurp^ is omit- 
 ted by Lachm. with ABXi ; al., — but 
 apj)y. without fully sufficient grounds, 
 as the external authority is not strong, 
 and as the omission may be accounted 
 for as a correction suggested both by 
 the frequent disappearance of the art. 
 after a prep, and by the apparently 
 sufficient definiteness of the v/miSv. 
 
 27. HT|S^] 'nor yet;' 'also do not;' 
 fiTjSi here serving to connect a new 
 clause with the preceding (Jelf, Gr. 
 § 776), on the principle that Si in ne- 
 gative sentences has often practically 
 much of the conjunctive force which 
 Kal has in affirmative sentences ; see 
 Wex, Antig. Vol. 11. p. 157. It must 
 surely however be very incorrect to 
 say that the clauses ' are closely con- 
 nected, and that p.'qSi indicates this 
 sequence' (Eadie); there is a con- 
 nexion between the clauses, and /nijS^ 
 has practically a conjunctive force (per 
 enumerationem), but it is always of 
 such a nature as di would lead us to 
 expect, 'sequentiaadjungit prioribus, 
 non apte connexa, sed potius fortuito 
 concursu accedentia,' Klotz, Devar. 
 Vol. II. p. 707 ; see esp. Franlce, de 
 
 Part. Neg. Part n. i, p. 6. On the 
 most appropriate translation of /i^... 
 p.riSi, see notes ore i Thess. ii. 3 
 (Transl.). The reading layre 
 
 [Bee. with a few mss.; Chrys. (j), 
 Theod.] seems clearly to be rejected 
 (opp. to Matth.), not only on critical, 
 but even on grammatical grounds, as 
 the position of p,ii in the previous 
 clause shows that it cannot be re- 
 garded as equivalent to n-qre, which 
 supposition, or the strictest union of 
 the clauses (Franke, § 25, p. 27), can 
 alone justify the abnormal sequence : 
 see Winer, Gr. % 55. 6, p. 433, Klotz, 
 Devar. Vol. 11. p. 709. 8C8ot« 
 
 T^TTOv] 'give room,' 'ne detis viam' 
 (fenot), MHa.; scU. 'give no room or 
 opportunity to the Evil One to be ac- 
 tive and operative;' comp. Rom. xii. 
 19, and see exx. of this use of to-h-ov 
 Sidovai in Wetst. Rom. I.e., and Loes- 
 ner, Obs. p. 263. to SiapoXcji] 
 
 'to the Devil' (ch. vi. 11); the con- 
 stant and regular meaning of i did^. 
 (subst.) in the N. T., not excluding 
 John vi. 70, and i Tim. iii. 6; see 
 esp. Stier, Red. Jesu, Vol. iv. p. 345. 
 It is obvious that Zaravas (iEth.) is 
 more a personal appellation ; 6 diip., 
 
 {\t:C)\'~)\J [calumniatori] Syr.) a 
 
 name derived from the fearful nature 
 and, so to say, office of the Evil One; 
 the usage however of the N. T. vrriters 
 is by no means uniform. St John 
 (in Gosp. and Epp.) once only uses 
 the former ; St Mark never the latter ; 
 St Paul more frequently the former, 
 the latter being only found in this and 
 the pastoral Epp. (and once in Heb.). 
 The former is not found in the Catho- 
 lic Epistles. The subject deserves ful- 
 ler investigation. On the nature of 
 this Evil Spirit generally, see the 
 
IV. 27, 28. 
 
 107 
 
 en (cXeTrreTO), naWov Se KOiriarw epyaXpiAevqi rati 
 lolaii ■)(epa-]v to ayadov, "iva €-)(ri neraSiSoiai T(fi YjOe/ai' 
 
 28. Tais ISlais x^P"^" ''^ iyMv^ The variations of reading in this passage 
 are great, and, considering the simplicity of the passage, difficult to account 
 for. The choice appears to lie between four, (a) That in the text -with ADE 
 FGXi; 37. al. 6; Vnlg., Clarom., Goth., Copt., Sahid., iEth., Arm.; Bas., 
 Naz., al. ; Hier., al. {Lachm., Tisch. ed. i, Eilck., Wordsw.): (6) t4 07. reus /S. 
 Xep. with K; 10 mss. ; Syr.-Phil. ; Theod. : (c) rats x^P- "^^ <*7- 'with EK''; 
 Amit. ; Ambrosiaster (Meyer) : (d) rb (17. t. x^P- ^i'l^ L; great majority of 
 mss.; Slav.; Chrys.,Dam., Theoph., CEcum. (Rec, Griesb., Scholz, Tisch. ei. 2 
 and 7, Alf.). Harless and Olshausen (see MUl, Prolegom. p. 168) favour a sth 
 and shorter reading toTs x«P-> after TertuU. de Besurr. 45, urging the probabi- 
 lity of 15. being interpolated from i Cor. iv. 12, and to a'7. from Gal. vi. 10. 
 It will be seen however that Gal. vi. 10 contains no such allusion to manual 
 labour as might have suggested a reference to it ; and if ISlai^ (see notes) is 
 maturely considered, it will seem to have a proper force in this place, though 
 not at first sight apparent. As it seems then more likely that lUats was an 
 intentional omission (its force not being perceived) than an interpolation from 
 I Cor. iv. 13, we retain (a) as not improbable on internal grounds, and as sup- 
 ported by a clear preponderance of external evidence. 
 
 curious and learned work of Mayer, 
 Historia Diaboli (ed. 2 .Tubing. 1780), 
 and in ref. to the question of his real 
 personal nature, the sound remarks on 
 p. 130 sq.; comp. notes on i Thess. 
 ii. 18. 
 
 28. 'O kX^tttuv] ' He who steals, 
 the stealer;' not imperf. 'qui furaba- 
 tur,' Vulg., Clarom., nor for /cW^as, 
 but a participial substantive; see 
 Winer, Gr. § 45. 7, p. 316, and notes 
 on Gal. i. 23. All attempts to dilute 
 the proper force of this word are 
 wholly untenable ; 6 kX^tttuv (not d 
 icX^TTTjs on the one hand, nor 6 /cX^- 
 <j/as on the other) points to 'the thiev- 
 ish character' ('qui furatur,' Copt.), 
 whether displayed in more coarse and 
 open, or more refined and hidden prac- 
 tices of the sin. Theft, though gene- 
 rally, was not universally condemned 
 by Paganism: see the curious and 
 valuable work of Pfanner, Tlieol. Gen- 
 tilis, XI. 25, p. 336. For a sermon 
 on this text, see Sherlock, Serm. 
 
 XXXVII. Vol. II . p. 227 (ed. Hughes). 
 liaXXov Si] 'but (on the contrary) 
 rather;' oi yd,p apKeX iraiaaadaL ttjs 
 a/iaprias, dXXd Kal tijV havrlav auT^s 
 oSbv p.iTiK6iiv' Theoph. ; see also 
 Kuhner, Xen. Mem. iii. 13. 6, and 
 notes on Gal. iv. 9, where however 
 the corrective force is more strongly 
 marked. rats I8£ats X'P"''''] 
 
 'with his own hands.' The pronomi- 
 nal adjective Wios (Donalds. Crat. 
 § 139), like okefos in the Byzantine 
 writers, and 'proprius' in later Latin 
 (see Krebs, Antibarb. p. 646), appears 
 sometimes in the N. T. to be nearly 
 pleonastic (see exx. in Winer, Gr. 
 § 22. 7, p. 139); here however an in- 
 tentional force appears to lie in the 
 use of the word. The thievish man 
 lives by the labours and hands of 
 others : he is now himself to labour, 
 and with 7ms own hands — those very 
 hands that robbed others (Beng.)— to 
 work, not at to kikov, but at to 070- 
 Oov : see Eiick. in loc. 
 
108 
 
 riPOS E$E2IOYS. 
 
 29 e^oiTi. Ila? Xoyoi irairpos eic tov aro/JLaroi vft-wv M 
 eKTTopeviaOw, aWa el Tiy ayaOos vpoi oIkoSomv t?j 
 
 TO d^aOiSv] 'that which is good,' 'that 
 which belongs to the category of what 
 is good and honest,' tov dkaior iropi- 
 a-jjov, Schol. ap. Cram. Caten.: 'to 
 dyad, antitheton ad furtum, prius ma- 
 nu piceata male commissum ;' Beng. 
 There may pej-liaps be also involved 
 in TO 0,7. the notion of what is bene- 
 ficial instead of detrimental to others ; 
 comp. notes on Gal. vi. 10. 
 tva K.T.X.] 'in order that he may 
 have,' — not merely 'what is enough 
 for his own wants,' but 'to yive to 
 him that needeth;' the true specific ob- 
 ject of all Christian labour (Olsh.) ; 
 comp. Schoettg. Hor. Heir. Vol. i. 
 p. 778. 
 
 2 9 . nds ... |M]] The negation must 
 be joined with the verb ; what is com- 
 manded is the non-utterance of every 
 \dyos ffaTpui. On this Hebraistic 
 structure, see Winer, Gr. § 26. i, p. 
 155, and notes ore Gal. ii. 16. 
 Xo-yos <rairp6s] ' corrupt, worthless 
 speech, ' 'sermo malus,'Vulg.,Clarom., 
 Copt., sim. Goth., — not necessarily 
 'filthy,' Hows. (comp. Bp. Taylor, 
 Serm. xxii., though he also admits 
 the more general meaning), as this is 
 specially forbidden in ch. v. 4, nor 
 again quite so strong as 'detestabiUs,' 
 Syr., but rather 'pravus,' .^th., esp. 
 in ref. to whatever is profitless and 
 unedifying (Chrys.), e.g. ahxpoXoyia, 
 \oi.Sopia, avKo^avrla, ^\aa<l>riixla, ^eu- 
 Sokoyia, leal Tci T0i!iT0ts TrpoffofxoLa' 
 Theod. The exact shade of meaning 
 will always be best determined by the 
 context. Here a-airpos is clearly op- 
 posed, not TV diSovTi. x^P'" (Kypke, 
 06s. Vol. II. p. 298), but to a7affds 
 irpos oIkoS. ttjs xP^'"' : Wetst. cites 
 Arrian, Epict. 11. 15, vyih opp. to 
 (raTTpof /cat KarairiirTov. On the gene- 
 ral metaphorical use, see Lobeclt, 
 
 Phryn. p. 377, and the exx. collected 
 by Kypke, loc. cit. d7a9ds] 
 
 'good,' i.e. 'suitable Iot,' owep oUodo- 
 /uef Toy TTkrjalov, Chrys. : instances of 
 this use of ayados with ds, irpos, and 
 the inf. , are of sufiiciently common oc- 
 currence ; see Bost u. Pahn, Lex. s. v., 
 exx. in Kypke, Obs. Vol. ii. p. 298, 
 and Eisner, Obs. Vol. 11. p. 219. 
 TTpds oiKoS. Ti^s xp^'O'S] 'for edifica- 
 tion in respect of the need, ' ' ad sedifi- 
 cationem opportunitatis, ' Amit. (' fi- 
 dei,' Vulg. ). Neither the article nor 
 the exact nature of the genitive has 
 been sufSoiently explained. It seems 
 clear that TTJs xpe'cs cannot be merely 
 'qua sit opus' (Erasm.), but must 
 specify the peculiar need in question 
 (observe el ns), the xpda which im- 
 mediately presses, — rrjt irapoiaris XP^^' 
 as, (Ecum. It would seem to follow 
 then that the gen. xpet'as is not a mere 
 gen. of quality (' seasonable edifica- 
 tion, ' Peile) nor in any way an abstr. 
 for coner. ('those who have need,' 
 Biickert, Olsh., comp. Eadie), nor, by 
 inversion, for an accus. (' use of edify- 
 ing,' Auth., comp. Syr.), but is simply 
 a gen. of ' remote reference ' (see 
 Winer, Gr. § 30. 2, p. 169), or, as 
 it has been termed, of ' the point of 
 view' (comp. Scheuerl. Synt. § 18, p. 
 129) — 'edifying as regards the need,' 
 i. e. which satisfies the need,a>'a7Ka«)c 
 OK Tj TtpoKeiiiivri xp^^f, as rightly para- 
 phrased by Theoph. On the practical 
 bearing of this passage, see esp. 4 
 sermons byBp. Taylor, Serm. xxii.— 
 XXV. Vol. I. p. 734 sq. (Lond. 1836), 
 and Harless, Ethik, § 50, p. 261. 
 The reading Trfo-Tcws, though found in 
 DiETG; Vulg. (not Amit.), and 
 some Latin Vv., Goth.; Bas., Naz., 
 al. (partially approved of by Griesb.), 
 is still certainly to be rejected, both 
 
IV. 29, 30- 
 
 109 
 
 jfjoet'av, ^Da Sw X"/"" '''O'"? afoiyouo'ii'' kq) pn) Xvvetre to 30 
 iLvevfia TO aytov tov Qeov, ev w etrcbpayicrOijTe ei'y 
 *lfi.epav atroXvTpaicrewi. 
 
 as inferior in external authority to 
 Xpffas, and as an almost self-evident 
 correction. 
 
 Su X^P'"] '"*"!/ iinpart u hlessing.' 
 The ambiguous term x"p's has been 
 explained (o) as x<^/"s Beou, (Ecum. 
 (who however does not refer to Eom. 
 i. II for a proof, as Eadie singularly 
 asserts), 'omnia salutis adminicula,' 
 Calv.; (5) as little more than BviiriSia; 
 soil, tva ipav-^ Se/cros rots aKoijovatj 
 Theod., ' ut invenietis gratiam, ' J5th.- 
 Pol., comp. Kypke, Obs. Vol. 11. p. 
 298, — but remove the ref. to Eur. 
 Suppl. 414, which is not in point; (c) 
 as retaining its simple and regular 
 meaning in connexion with Siddvai, 
 'favour, benefit' (Harl., Olsh., Mey.). 
 Of these (c) is much the most probable 
 (see Exod. iii. 21, Psalm Ixxxiv. 12, 
 and perliaps James iv. 6, i Pet. v. 5) : 
 still, as x<ip's tas so notably changed 
 its meaning in the N.T., it seems un- 
 critical, even in this phrase, to deny 
 the reference of x^P" to ^ spiritual 
 'benefit;' see Stier in loc. The most 
 exact transl. then here is 'blessing' 
 (' minister grace, 'Auth. , is ambiguous) , 
 as it hints at the theological meaning, 
 and also does not whoUy obscure the 
 classical and idiomatic meaning of the 
 phrase. 
 
 30. Kal (»■() Xviretre k. t. X.] 'and 
 gneve not the Holy Spirit of God;' 
 not a new, unconnected exhortation 
 (Lachm.), but a continued warning 
 against the use of irSs \6-yoi aaTpis by 
 showing its fearful results; iav eiirys 
 pjjp.a GaTpov KoX dva^tov tov Xpi(rrt- 
 avov irr6fJiaTos, ovk avdpuirov 4\i^Tr7j<Tas 
 aWA, Tb Uf. TOV Oeoii- Theoph. The 
 tacit assumption clearly is that the 
 Spirit dwelt within them (see Basil, 
 
 Spir. Sand. xix. 50, Hermas, Past. 
 Mand. 10), and that too, as the solemn 
 and emphatic title t6 ni". t6 ayiop tov 
 GeoC and the peculiar term Xutteite 
 further suggest, in His true holy per- 
 sonality; comp. Pearson, Greed, Art. 
 VIII. Vol. I. p. 366 (ed. Burt.), and for 
 an excellent sermon on this text, see 
 Andrewes, Serm. vi. Vol. ni. p. 201 
 sq. (A.-C. Libr. ) : see also a very good 
 practical sermon by Bp. HaJl, Serm, 
 xxxvi. Vol. V. p. 489 sq. (Talboys). 
 €v u lo-ffipaY^crBT^Te] ' in whom ye were 
 sealed,' — not 'quo,' Goth.,Arm. (comp. 
 'per quem,' Beza), but 'in quo,' 
 Vulg., Clarom., ' in whom, as the holy 
 sphere and element of the sealing.' 
 This clause seems intended to enhance 
 still more the warning by an appeal 
 to the blessings they had received 
 from the Holy Spirit; eha Kal -q 
 •jrpoffd^Ktj TTjs ei'epyetrias, tva fid^wv 
 yivTp-ai ■^ KaTTjyopia' Chrys. It does 
 not then seem that there is here any 
 reminiscence of Isaiah Ixiii. 10, irapw- 
 ^vvav rb IXi/. tA ay. airov (cited by 
 Harl.), which would have given the 
 warning a different tone. For the ex- 
 planation of these words, see notes on 
 ch. i. 13; and for the doctrinal appli- 
 cations, Hammond in loc, and Petav. 
 de Trin. viii. 5. 3, Vol. 11. p. 823 sq. 
 For some comments on this clause, 
 see Andrewes, Serm. vi. previously 
 cited, and another serm. by Bp. Hall, 
 (Serai. XXXVII. Vol. v. p. 504 (Tal- 
 boys). €ls iiiilpov airoVu- 
 Tpuo-eiBs] 'for the day of redemption,' 
 for the day on which the redemption 
 will he fuUy reaUzed : see exx. of this 
 use of the gen. in definitions of time 
 in Winei-, Gr. § 30. ■.:, p. 169. On the 
 meaning of diroXiTpaaii, see notes on 
 
no 
 
 riPOS E$E2IOY2. 
 
 31 Tlacra iriKpla kuI Ou/jlos kui opyrj koi Kpuvyrj Kai 
 
 32 ^\aa-(p>]fila apQ^ras a(p' vfjiwv crvv Tracrri KaKia' yl- 
 vecrOe §e eh aXX^Xovi -^pria-Tol, eva-Tr\ay)(yoi, y^apiXofievoi 
 eavTOti Kadwi Kal 6 Qeog eV Xpta-ra e-^apluaro vfiiv. 
 
 ch. i. 14, and on 'final perseverance,' 
 of whioli Eadie here finds an affirma- 
 tion (oomp. Cocc. in loc), see Thorn- 
 dike, Cov. of Grace, ch. xxxi. Vol. iii. 
 p. 615 sq. (A.-C. Libr.). 
 
 31. Ilao-a iriKpCa] 'All hitterness,' 
 i.e. ' every form of it ' (see notes on oh. 
 i. 8), and that not merely as shown in 
 expressions, ' sermo mordax,' but, as 
 the context suggests, in feehng and 
 disposition (see Acts viii. 23, Heb. xii. 
 li), TiKpla marking the prevailing 
 temperament and frame of mind; 6 
 ToiouTO^ Kal ^apddvfjios iart nal ou5^- 
 TTore avlrjfff. t^v ^fJX^^t ^^l (tvvvovs wv 
 Kal aKvdpunros' Chrys. The contrast 
 is not merely •yKvKVTrii (comp. Orig. 
 Cat.), but x/»;o'ToV);s : see Wetst. on 
 Horn. iii. 14, and for an able sermon 
 on this text (the obligations and ad- 
 vantages of good-will), Whiehcote, 
 Serm. lxxxii. Vol. iv. p. 19S sq. 
 6v|ji.6s Kal op7ij] 'wrath and anger;'' 
 the emanations from, and products of 
 the Tmpla ; (>L^a 8v/xov Kal dpyrj^ jriKpla' 
 Chrys. With regard to the distinction 
 between these two words, it may be 
 observed that Bviibs is properly the 
 agitation and commotion to which 
 iriKpta gives rise (^ ivapxoiiivr) inl 
 Tiva yiviadai. dpyl]' Orig. Cat.; comp. 
 Diog. Laert. vii. i. 63. 114), 6pyq the 
 more settled habit of the mind (t) 
 cTol/iTi Kal ivepytiTiKrj vpos t^v Ti/j,(aplav 
 Tov rihKr)Kivai vajxi^o/iipov, Orig. ib. ) ; 
 see Tittm. Synon. p. 132, Trench, 
 Synon. § 37, and notes on Gal. v. 20. 
 Kpav-yr) koI p\ao-<t>T)pi(a] 'clamour 
 and evil speaking;' outward manifes- 
 tations of the foregoing vices ; ?n-iros 
 yap lanv ava^drrfv <l>ipoiv -q Kpavyi) 
 77)1/ dpy/in- Chrys. The distinction 
 
 between the two words is suffici- 
 ently obvious. Kpavyr/ is the cry 
 of stiife ('in quern erumpunt ho- 
 mines irati,' Est.) ; ^\aa-4>ri/ila, a more 
 enduring manifestation of inward 
 anger, that shows itself in reviling, — 
 not, in the present case, God, but our 
 brethren, (XoLdopiai, Chrys.) ; it has 
 thus nearly the same relation to Kpau- 
 yij that ipyri has to Bvims: see Col. 
 iii. 8, I Tim. vi. 4, and comp. Eom. 
 iii. 8, Tit. iii. 2. For a good practical 
 sermon against evil speaking see Bar- 
 row, Serm. xvi. Vol. i. p. 447. 
 KaxCa] 'malice;' the genus to which 
 all the above-mentioned vices belong, 
 or rather the active principle to which 
 they are all due (comp. /ierd irlar. oh. 
 VI. 33, and notes), i.e. uncharitable- 
 ness in all its forms, 'animi pravitas, 
 humanitati et sequitati opposita,' 
 Calv.; comp. Eom. i. 29, Col. iii. 8, and 
 on the difference between this word 
 and TTovqpla (its outcoming and mani- 
 festation), see Trench, Synon. § 11. 
 
 32. yCvar6t 8f] 'but become ye;' 
 contrasted exhortation: not 'be ye,' 
 Auth., Alf., but 'vairjjaiduh' [fiatis] 
 Goth., — there were evil elements 
 among them that were yet to be taken 
 away; see ch. v. i. Lachm. omits 
 Si with B; 4 mss.; Clem., Dam., al. ; 
 but this omission as well as the vari- 
 ation oSv [DiFG; 2 mss. ; Clarom., 
 Sang., Boern.] seems due to a cor- 
 rector who did not perceive the anti- 
 tliesis between the commands in the 
 two verses. XP1<"o'. 
 
 6v<nrXo7xvoi] ' kind, tender-hearted.' 
 On the former of these words (' sweet 
 in disposition'), comp. notes on Gal. 
 V. 22, and Tittmann, Synon. p. 140. 
 
IV. 3T, 32. V. I. 
 
 Ill 
 
 strive then to imi- tta''' \ ^ r\ '^ f / -tT 
 
 tate uod, and, like I ivecrae OVV fXlfJl.tlTai TOU KJeou, to? TCKva V. 
 Christ, to walk in love. 
 
 The latter eS<rir'Kayxi>os occurs Orat. 
 Manass. 6, i Pet. iii. 8, and desig- 
 nates the exhibition of that merciful 
 feeling of -which the a-irXdyxva were 
 the imaginary seat; comp. Col. iii. 
 12, and notes in loc; for additional 
 exx., see Polyc. Phil. 5, 6, Clem. Bom. 
 Cor. I. 54, Test. XII. Pair. p. 537. 
 The substantive eiawXayxvia is found 
 in classical Greek, in the sense of 
 'good heart,' 'courage' (comp. Eurip. 
 Rhestis, '92), and also in the primary 
 and medical sense (comp. Hippoer. 
 89, ed. Foes.), but the adjective ap- 
 pears to be rare. 
 
 )(^apLjQ|j.€voi eauTois] 'forgiving each 
 other;' participle of concomitant act, 
 specifying the manner in which the 
 Xpyj^'TOTrjs and ed<Tir\ayx''i(t- were to 
 be manifested; comp. Col. iii. 13 and 
 notes in loc. Origen (Caten.) calls at- 
 tention to iavrots as involving the idea 
 that what was done to another was 
 really done to themselves ; it is how- 
 ever doubtful whether this can be 
 maintained ; see notes on Col. I.e., and 
 for exx. of the use of eauroJs for the 
 personal pronoun, Jelf, Gr. § 54. •.;. 
 KaOiJs Kal 6 ©eos] 'even as God,' 'as 
 God aUo;' xadois (as in ch. i. 4) having 
 a slightly argumentative force, while 
 Kal introduces a tacit comparison ; see 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 635 sq^., and 
 notes on Phil. iv. 12. The two com- 
 bined do not then simply compare, but 
 argue from an example (Harl.), — tov 
 9eoi' Trapdyei. els iirodeiyiM, Theoph. ; 
 comp. ch. V. -i, 25, 29. 4v 
 
 XpwTTu] 'in Christ;' not 'for Christ's 
 Bake,'Auth.,nDr 'per Christum,' Calv., 
 but 'in Him,' i.e. in giving Him to 
 be a propitiation for our sins, /hctoi tov 
 KivSvvov TOV vlov avTov Kcil rrjs a<payTJi 
 aiiTOv- Theoph.; comp. 2 Cor. v. 19. 
 i\ap. -uiiiv] The context seems clearly 
 to show that the meaning of X"/"^'- 
 
 nevoL (and hence of ^x'*?'"'*''''') is not 
 'donantes,' Vulg., Clarom., 'largien- 
 tes, libenter dantes,' Erasm. (comp. 
 Orig. i. ap. Cat.), but 'condonantes,' 
 Copt., Syr., Goth. ,(ru77J'u/iiKot, Chrys. : 
 they were not only to be xpwro^ ^'^^ 
 eSairXayxvoi, but also merciful and 
 forgiving, following the example of 
 Him who ' prsebuit se benignum, mi- 
 sericordem, — condonantem ;' Beng. 
 The reading is doubtful: Lachm . reads 
 liyu,?;' with B^DEKL; 25 mss.; Amit., 
 Syr. (both), al. ; Orig. Cat., Chrys. 
 (Comm.), Theod., al., — ^but scarcely 
 on suf&cient authority, as the pronoun 
 of the first person might have been 
 probably suggested by the TJ/tSs in oh. 
 V. 2 ; see crit. note in loc. 
 
 Chapteb V. I. Tlvtcrdf oiv k.t.X.] 
 
 'Become then followers {imitators) of 
 God;' resumption of the previous 
 y'aiecrBe, ch. iv. 32, the ovv deriving its 
 force and propriety from the conclud- 
 ing words of the last verse. Stier, on 
 rather insufficient grounds, argues a- 
 gainst the connection of these verses, 
 referring otv to the whole foregoing 
 subject, the new man in Christ. In 
 this latter case, oiv would have more of 
 what has been called its reflexive force 
 ('lectorem revocat ad id ipsnm quod 
 nunc agitur,' Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 
 717); that it is here however rather col- 
 lective ('adeaquseanteareveraposita 
 suntlectoremrevocat,'Klotz,i6.)seems 
 much more probable ; comp. Hartung, 
 Partik. ody, 3. 5, Vol. 11. p. 22. 
 dYairT|To] 'beloved;' not 'liebe Kin- 
 der,' Buck, (compare Chrys.), but 'ge- 
 hebte.' ThereasonisgivenbyCEcum., 
 who however does not appear to have 
 felt the fuU force of the word; toU 
 yap ToiovTois [dyairryrois) ej dydynris 
 Tivos 7) idp.7i(ni. The m/dyK-q consisted 
 in the ifact of God having loved them ; 
 
112 
 
 nPOS E*E2I0Y2. 
 
 2 aya-rrriTa' kui irepiiraTclTe ev ayair^, KoOwi kui 6 
 XpiCTTog riyavija-ev ^fJ.as Ka\ TrapeSwKev eavTOV vwep 
 fifjLwv "TrpotTipopav Koi Qvalav rip Qew eis otr/ULJjv €va)Sta(;. 
 
 ■i. -niM^I Tisch. (ed. 2 and ;) reads u/tSs with ABN'; 37. 73. n6, <&e.; 
 Sah., Mth. (botli) ; Clem. (2), Theoph., al. The text is supported by DEPGK 
 LK''; most mss. and Vv.; Chrys., Theod., Lat. Fathers. 
 
 iiir. -ijnuv] Here Tisch. (ed. 2 and 7) reads i!«tDy, which is supported by B ; 
 37. 73. 116; Sah., Mth. (both); but without sufficient reason, as it is plainly 
 a conformation to the preceding v/nSs. 
 
 love must be returned by love; and 
 in love alone can man imitate God : 
 see I Johniv. 10, and oomp. Charnoek, 
 Attrih. p. 618 (Bohn). For two prac- 
 tical sermons on this text, see Farin- 
 don, Serm. lxxxvii. (two parts), Vol. 
 III. p. 494 sq. (ed. Jackson). 
 
 2. Kttl irepnr. kv d'yairij] ' and walk 
 in love;' continuation of the foregoing 
 precept, Kal serving to append closely 
 a specification of that in which the 
 imitation of God must consist. 
 Ko6ils Kol 6 Xp. K.T.X..] ' even as Christ 
 also loved,' — not 'has loved;' the pure 
 aoristic sense is more appropriate and 
 more in accordance with the historic 
 aor. which follows. Kal 
 
 irape SuKcv lavT.] ' and gave up Him- 
 self;' specification of that wherein 
 ('non tantum ut Deus sed etiam ut 
 homo,'Est.)thislove was pre-eminent- 
 ly shown, Kaihavingashghtlyii'icjjtona- 
 tory force; see Gal. ii. 20, and oomp. 
 notes ore Phil. iv. 12. The supple- 
 mentary idea to wapiS. must surely be 
 ds Bavarov (Harl.), as in every case 
 where irapad. is used by St Paul in 
 ref. to Christ, els Bav. or some similar 
 idea seems naturally included in the 
 verb: see esp. Eom. iv. 25, where 
 rapiSoB-q is followed by iiyipB-ii, and 
 comp. Eom. viii. 32, Gal. ii. 20, Eph. 
 V. 25. For a sound and clear sermon on 
 this text (Christ's sacrifice of Himself), 
 see Waterl. Serm. xxxi. Vol. v. p. 737 
 sq. vTtkp ■f\f,S>v\ 'for «s,' — 
 
 and also, as the context indisputably 
 shows, 'in our stead:' on the mean- 
 ing of virip in this connexion, see 
 Usteri, Zehrb. 11. i. 1, p. 115 sq., and 
 notes ore Gal. iii. 13, comp. i. 4. 
 irpo(rc|>apdv Kal SiiirCav] 'are offering 
 and sacrifice;' not 'a sacrifice offered 
 up,' Bviriav ■irpoiT<f>epoii4vriv, Conyb., — 
 a mode of translation ever precarious 
 and insufficient. It may be doubtful 
 whether Bva: and irpoaip. are intended 
 to specify respectively bloody and un- 
 bloody sacrifices, for wpoix(p. is else- 
 where used in ref. to bloody (Heb. x. 
 10), and 6v(T. to unbloody offerings 
 (comp. Heb.xiii. 15, 16), and further, 
 the rough definition that dvaia implies 
 'the slaying of a victim' (Eadie) is by 
 no means of universal application ; see 
 esp. John Johnson, VnU. Sacr. i. i, 
 p. 73 sq. (A.-C. Libr.). EquaUy 
 doubtful, esp. in reference to Christ, is 
 the definition that a fluo-f a is a ' Trpotr^. 
 rite consumpta,' Outram, de Sacrif. 
 VIII. 1, p. 182 (ed. 1677). StiU it is 
 probable that a distinction was here 
 intended by St Paul, and that tt/joo-^., 
 as the more general term, relates not 
 only to the death, but to the life of 
 obedience of our blessed Lord (oomp. 
 Heb. V. 8), His Bvala ptra (Eom. xii. 
 I ) ; Bmla, as the more special, more 
 particularly to His atoning death. 
 On this accus., which in its apposition 
 to the foregoing is also practically 
 predicative, and serves to complete 
 
V. 2, 3. 
 
 113 
 
 Tlopveia Se Kal uKaOapa-ia iracra rj 3 
 
 Avoid fornication, 
 
 covetousnessandall -r -- r^- -« .. »» » -y 
 
 forms of impurity, o, «^9 v/> 
 
 tte ™ath^f"(Sd^ ■JTAeoi/e^ta /xijde ovoixaCecrQu) ev vfitv Kadwi 
 
 Ye were once in lieathen darkness, but now are 
 light ; reprove the works of darkness, awake and arise. 
 
 the notion of the verb, Bee Madvig, 
 Synt. § 24. Tip 
 
 06$ is commonly explained either 
 (a) asthe ordinary transmissive dative, 
 sc. wap^S. T(f Qeip (Mey. ; so appy. J. 
 Johns. Vol. I. p. 161), or (S) as a dat. 
 of limitation to els da-fi. answering to 
 the Heh. rm''b tfim nn (Stler). As 
 however the meaning of wapidaKev (see 
 above) and the distance of the dat. 
 (De W. compares Bom. xii. i, but 
 there n^ 9e$ is not joined with the 
 verb) do not harmonize with the for- 
 mer, and the prominent position of 
 Tip Oe(p is difficult to be explained on 
 the latter hypothesis, it seems more 
 simple to regard tQ Ge^ as an ethical 
 dative or dat. commodi appended to 
 the two substantives ; so Beng. and 
 appy., by their studied adherence to 
 the order of the original, all the an- 
 cient Vv. ; see Schenerl. Synt. § 23. i, 
 p. 186. els ocrp.. cvuSCas] 
 
 'for, so. to become, a savour of sweet 
 smell J' sc. a 6vtria. edirpdaSeKTos, 
 Chrys. ; see Phil. iv. 18, Lev. i. 9, 
 13, 17, ii. 12, iii. 5, oomp. Gen. viii. 
 21. The authors of the iJacoii. Caiccft. 
 (§ 8) have correctly explained the 
 constr., but have erroneously asserted 
 that these words ('qusB de pacifiois 
 creberrime, de expiatoriis autem vix 
 uspiam usurpantur,' — but seeDeyling, 
 Ois. Vol. I. p. 315, No. 65) do not re- 
 present Christ's death as an expiatory 
 sacrifice ; comp. even Ust. Lehrb, n. 
 I. I, p. 113. To this, without need- 
 lessly pressing iwip, we may simply 
 say with Waterland, that the contrary 
 'is as plain from the N. T. as words 
 can make it,' and that St Paul's per- 
 petual teaching is that Christ's death 
 was 'a true and proper expiatory 
 
 sacrifice for the sins of mankind ;' see 
 proof texts. Vol. iv. p. 513, and esp. 
 Jackson, Creed, Book ix. 55, Vol. ix. 
 p. 589 sq. (Oxf. 1844). The 
 
 nature of the gen. evuSlas is rightly 
 explained by Wordsw. as that of the 
 characterizing quality; see notes ore 
 Phil. iv. 18, and comp. Winer, Or. 
 § 34. 3. 6, note, p. 212. 
 
 3. IlopvcCa Si] 'But fornication;' 
 gentle transition to another portion of 
 the exhortation, with a resumption of 
 the negative and prohibitive form of 
 address (ch. iv. 31): the Si being 
 mainly neTa^aTtKdp (see on Gal. i. 11), 
 though perhaps not without some 
 slight indication of contrast to what 
 has preceded. On the Apostle's con- 
 stant and emphatic condemnation of 
 the deadly sin of iropvda, as one of 
 the things which the old Pagan world 
 deemed dSi64>opa, comp. Mey. on Acts 
 XV. 20. irao-o] 'of every kind:' 
 
 placed rightly after oKafla/xr/a by Tiscft. 
 with ABN ; mss. ; Copt., al. On the 
 use of jras with abstract nouns com- 
 pare notes on ch. i. 8. VJ 
 ir\eove|ii] 'or covetousness ; ' the ^ is 
 not explanatory (Herns. Exercit. p. 
 467), but has its full and proper dis- 
 jtmctive force, serving to distinguish 
 TrXeoc. from more special sins of the 
 flesh ; see notes on ch. iv. 19. 
 firfii ovofuiliiria] 'let it not be even 
 named,' — not, 'ut facta' (Beng. i), a 
 meaning which dm/m^. will scarcely 
 justify; but, 'let it not be even men- 
 tioned by name' (Beng. 2), ol yi,p 
 \6yoi Tu>v irpay/MTUv elalv idol' Chrys. ; 
 see ver. 12, and comp. Psalm xvi. 4. 
 Meyer cites Dio Chrys. 360 b, <rrdnv 
 Si oiSi ouo/Mt^etp a^iov Trap' ipXv. 
 Ka6(i5 irpeirei d^fois] 'as becometh 
 
 I 
 
114 
 
 nP02 E*E2I0YS. 
 
 4 irpeirei aycoti, Ka\ aicrxpoTii Kal [lOipoXoyia n eurpa- 
 
 Baints,' — sc. thus to avoid all mention 
 even by name of these sins ; kavffls ri 
 fivaapbv tCov elptjfiivuv i;ir^5ei|e, Kal 
 avT^LS avTuv irpoffTjyopias rrjs fiV^jxTis 
 i^oplffai KeXeiiffos* Theod. 
 
 4. KaV alirxpoTris] 'andfilthiness,' 
 not merely in words (^th., Theoph., 
 fficnm.), which would be alffxpoXoyla 
 (Col. iii. 8), but, as the abstract form 
 suggests, t6 alirxpov, whether actively 
 exhibited or passively approved, in 
 word, gesture, or deed. The context 
 obviously limits its reference to dxaS. 
 and sius of the flesh ; aiaxpor^^ Sk 
 Tis iariv KaO' eKaarov elSos aKoKairias " 
 Orig. Cat. Lachm. reads ^' al(rxp. 
 ■t\ /iupoh. with ADiETG ; 4 mss. ; 
 Clarom., Vulg., Sahid. ; Bas., al. 
 (Sley.), but in opp. to good external 
 authority [BD'E^KLK*; nearly all 
 mss.; Syr., Copt., .ffith. (both), al. ; 
 Clem., Chrys., al.], and to the inter- 
 nal probability of a conformation to 
 the following ij : K^ reads Kal alirxp. ^ 
 p,upo\, fuapoXoyla] 'foolish 
 
 te;imp,'stultiloquium,Vulg., Clarom., 
 
 |ZQ->-^.^) U^ [sermones stul- 
 
 titise] Syr.; a aira^ \ey6/j,. in the 
 N. T., of which the exact meaning 
 must be defined by the context. Of 
 the two definitions of Origen, the first, 
 ^ affKovjiivrj virii rdtv fitopoXoywv Kal 
 yeXuTowoiSiv, is too lax ; the second, 
 TO fj.o}p6v tlt/ac kv Tots SoyfiaTL^ofj^voiSt 
 too restrictive. The terms with which 
 it stands in connexion may at first 
 sight appear to preclude any idea of 
 positive profanity (comp. Calv.) ; how- 
 ever Trench is probably right in here 
 superadding to the ordinary meaning 
 of idle, aimless, and foolish talk, a 
 reference to that sin and vanity of 
 spirit which the talk of fools is cer- 
 tain to bewray; see Synon. § 34, and 
 Wordsw. in loc. evrpaireXCa] 
 
 'jesting,' 'wittiness:' a second fiTrof 
 \eybii. : iv0a yiXus &Katpos iKet r/ eu- 
 TpamXla- Chrys. The word, as its 
 derivation suggests, properly means 
 versatility, whether in motion, man- 
 ners, or talk (Dissen, Pind. Pyth. 1. 
 93) ; from which a more unfavoinrable 
 signification, ' polished jesting ' (eu- 
 Tpan-eXos, 6 Svvap.ei'os aKa\j/ai IpifieXQs' 
 Aristot. Moral, i. 31), 'use of witty 
 equivoque' ('ingenio nititnr,' Beng.), 
 is easily and naturally derived: see 
 Trench, Synon. § 34, and the excellent 
 sermon by Barrow on this text. Semi. 
 XIV. Vol. i. p. 383 sq. The disjunc- 
 tive TJ (surely not ' conjunctive,' Bp. 
 Taylor, Serm. xxiii.) marks it as a 
 different vice to yuwpoX., and thus appy. 
 as not only a siu of the tongue (Trench) , 
 but as including the evil 'urbanitas' 
 (in manners or words) of the witty, 
 godless, man of the world. The prac- 
 tical application may be found in 
 Taylor, Serm. xxin. (Gold. Grove), 
 and esp. in the latter part of Chrys. 
 Hovi. xvri. rd ouk 
 
 dviiKovTtt] ' things which are not con- 
 venient;' in apposition to the last two 
 words, to both of which eiix"/'-) as de- 
 noting oral expression yet implying 
 inward feeling, forms a clear contrast. 
 It is instructive to compare Eom. i. 28, 
 Tct fir] KaSriKovra : there the subjective 
 denial seems appropriately introduced 
 (' facere quae, si quse, essent indeeora,' 
 Winer, Gr. % 59. 4, p. 564, ed. 5); 
 here is a plain objective fact that such 
 things ovK AvTJKev. The reading a ovk 
 atnJKev is found in ABN ; 3 mss. ; 
 Clem., al. (Lachm.), and has consider- 
 able claims to attention, though appy. 
 not quite sufficient to justify its being 
 placed in the text. On the use of ou 
 and jxi) with participles, see Gayler, 
 Partic. Neg. p. 287, but observe 
 the caution suggested in notes on 
 
V. 4, 5, 6. 
 
 115 
 
 weXta, ra ovk ai/^KOvra, aWa fxaXXov ev-^apiarrla. tovto 5 
 yap 1(TTe yivwa-KOVTes on Traj vopvos tj aKaOapTos ^ 
 vXeoveKTiji, os ea-riv eiSaiXoXdrpiji, ovk ej^et Kkripovonlav 
 ev Tfj ^aa-iXela toC XptaTov Ka] Qeov. - ' '- ' "- 
 
 /ji.t]Seh 
 
 VfiUi 
 
 6 
 
 I Thess. ii. 15, iii. i. evxapi- 
 
 o-rCa] 'giving of thanks:' see Trench, 
 Synon. Part 11. § 1. The meaning 
 of this word adopted by Hammond, 
 several of the older, and some later 
 expositors, 'edifying discourse,' 'de- 
 voutness,' cannot be justified by St 
 Paul's use either of the verb or 
 the subst. ; oomp. Petav. Dissert. 
 Eccl. II. 10. 4, 5, and on the 
 true force of the ethical connexion, 
 see Harl. Ethik, § 32. a. On the 
 duty generally, so freq^uently incul- 
 cated by St Paul, see notes and reff. 
 on Phil. iv. 6, and ore Col. iii. 15. 
 The verb here omitted 'per braohy- 
 logiam' (Jelf, Gr. § 895) is differently 
 supplied; perhaps yiviaea in ifuv is 
 the supplement Tnost natural, dinJKei 
 (Beng.) that least so. 
 
 5. TOUTO ^dp foTj Yivuo-K.] 'FoT 
 this ye know, being aware, or as ye are 
 aware ;' confirmation of the preceding 
 prohibitions by an appeal to their own 
 knowledge of the judgment against 
 those who practise them. It is scarcely 
 critically exact to connect this with 
 the Hebraistic (but comp. also Jelf, 
 Gr. § 705. 3) mode of expression, ytnli- 
 OKuv yviha'^, Gen. xv. 13, 'thou shalt 
 know full well,' d:c. (Stier), as tare 
 and yivilxTK. are not portions of the 
 same verb. The part, must be joined 
 more immediately with Sti, and seems 
 used with a slightly causal force which 
 serves to elucidate and justify the ap- 
 peal; see Winer, Gr. § 45. 8, p. 318. 
 Whether Icrre be taken as imperative 
 or indicative must be left to individual 
 judgment. The former interpr. is 
 adopted by Vulg., Clarom., Arm, 
 (comp,, — but with different reading, 
 
 Syr., jEth.), and by some Ff., e.g.. 
 appy. Clem. Alex. (Pcedag. iii. 4), 
 but seems scarcely so impressive as 
 the latter (Copt.), and somewhat tends 
 to diminish the force of the now iso- 
 lated and emphatic imperative in ver. 
 6; comp. Alf. in loc. The reading 
 €<rT6 yii>. (Eec.) is supported by D* 
 EKL ; mss.; Syr. (both), al.; Theod., 
 Dam., but is altogether inferior to 
 toTe in external authority [ABD^FGX ; 
 30 mss. ; Vulg., Clarom., Copt., al.; 
 Clem., al.], and is rightly rejected by 
 nearly all recent editors. iras. . . 
 
 ouk] On this Hebraistic mode of ex- 
 pression, see notes on oh. iv. 29. 
 OS loTTiv refers immediately to ttXco- 
 vinT-qs, not to the three preceding sub- 
 stantives: comp. Col. iii. 5, tijc irXeo- 
 ve^lav TjTiS iarlv elddAoXarpeia. Co- 
 vetousness is truly a definite form of 
 idolatry, it is the worship of Mammon 
 (Matth. vi. 24) instead of God ; oomp. 
 Theod. To this therefore, rather than 
 to the other sins, which are veritable 
 but more subtle forms of the same sin, 
 the Apostle gives the above specific 
 designation. The passages adduced 
 by Wetst. and Schoettg. illustrate the 
 form of expression, but nothing more. 
 The reading S is found in BN; 3. 
 67**, al.; Cyr. (Lachm., Alf.), and, 
 followed by eldaXoXarpela, in PG; 
 Vulg. : as the less obvious reading it 
 deserves notice. ouk ?x- •'^'HP-] 
 
 'hath no inheritance;' a weighty pre- 
 sent, involving an indirect reference to 
 the eternal and enduring principles by 
 which God governs the world, — not so 
 much 'has no inheritance, and shall 
 have none' (Badie), as 'has. ..and can 
 have none;' comp. ver. 6, and Col. 
 
 I 2 
 
116 
 
 nP02 E$E2I0YS. 
 
 airaTaTW Kcvoii Xoyon' Sta ravra yap ep^erai fj opyi 
 
 iii. 6, Si' il Ipx'CTat. 57 6prfri toO Qeov : see 
 Winer, Gr. § 40. 2, p. 237. toS 
 
 Xp. Kal ©.] 'of Christ and God,' — not 
 ' of God,' Auth. This is the first decid- 
 ed instance (the reading being doubt- 
 ful in Acts XX. 2 8) adduced by Granville 
 Sharp to prove that the same Person 
 in Scripture is called Christ and God, 
 see Middleton, Greeli Art, p. 362 sq.. 
 (ed. Bose), and ch. 111. 4. -i, p. 57 sq. 
 When however we maturely weigh the 
 context, in which no dogmatic asser- 
 tions relative to Christ find a place 
 (as in Tit. ii. 13, 14), — when we 
 recall the frequent use of SeJs with- 
 out an article, even where it might 
 have been expected (compare Winer, 
 Gr. § 19. I, p. no), — and lastly, when 
 we observe that the presence of the 
 art. roO GeoC would really have even 
 suggested a thought of subordination 
 (as if it were necessary to specify that 
 the kingdom of Christ was also the 
 kingdom of God, — the inadvertence of 
 the Auth.), we seem forced to the con- 
 viction that Sharp's rule does not ap- 
 ply here. Christ and God are united 
 together in the closest way, and pre- 
 sented under a single oonception(comp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 19. 4, p. 116), — an in- 
 direct evidence of Christ's divinity of 
 no slight value, — still the identity of 
 the two substantives ('of Him who is 
 Christ and God,' Wordsw.) cannot be 
 safely or certainly maintained from 
 this passage. On the meaning of the 
 term §aciXila Geou, see notes and reff. 
 on Gal. V. 21. 
 
 6. |jir)8els {r|j.ds K.T.X.] 'Let no one 
 deceive you with vain words, i.e. so- 
 phistries :' emphatic warning (without 
 any particle) against all who sought 
 to deceive them as to the real nature 
 of the sins condemned. It does not 
 seem necessary to limit the regular 
 meaning of Key&s ('empty,' oidanQs 
 
 M Tu>v ^pyav SeiKm/xepot, Chrys.,^ 
 hence 'a veritate alieni,' Kypke, Obs. 
 Vol. II. p. 299), and to refer the Kevol 
 X47ois;)ecmJ!2/toheathenphilosophers 
 (Ghrot.), to Judaizers (Neand. Plant- 
 ing, Vol. I, p. 184, note, Bohn), or to 
 Christian Antinomians (Olsh.). The 
 Apostle generally condemns all apo- 
 logists for vice, whoever they might 
 be. These would of course be most 
 commonly found among the heathen, 
 and to them the passage most natu- 
 rally points. The palliation or tacit 
 tolerationofvice,espeoiallygensuality, 
 was one of the most fearful and repul- 
 sive features of heathenism ; see esp. 
 Tholuck, Influence of Heathenism, Part 
 IV. 2. Sid TaSra Yop] 
 
 'for on account of these sins:' confir- 
 mation of the preceding warning ; it 
 is on account of these things (obs. the 
 emphasis on St4 rauro) that God's 
 wrath and vengeance is directed a- 
 gainst the perpetrators. The reference 
 of Tavra is clearly to the sins above 
 mentioned {toOtiov eKatrrov ^dptav, 
 Theod.) ; comp. Col. iii. 6, Si a, and 
 Gal. V. 2 1 , d irpoKiyu v/jiiv, in reference 
 to a foregoing list of vices. The pro- 
 noun has been referred to the AirdTr] of 
 the Kevol \6yoi (Theoph. 2), or to the 
 iirdrri and the foregoing vices. The 
 first interpr. is not grammatically un- 
 tenable, as the plural ravra may be 
 idiomatically used to denote a single 
 object in its different manifestations 
 (see Bernhardy, Synt. vi. 8. d, p. 283, 
 Winer, Gr. § 23. j, p. 146), but, 
 equally with the second, is open to 
 the contextual objection that ver. 7 
 seems a general warning against Gen- 
 tile sins, to which consequently the 
 present verse will be more naturally 
 referred. 
 
 ■i] opY^ Toil @eov] 'the icrathof God; 
 certainly not to be restricted to this 
 
V. 7, 8. 
 
 117 
 
 Tov Qeov IttJ rovi vtoi/i rrji cnreiOetaf. (/.}/ ovv ylvea-Qe J 
 (TWfieTO)(^oi avTwv, ^re yap irore o-ko'to?, 8 
 
 vvv Ce (pSii iv Kupiai' wj reKva (pwroi irepitraTetTe, 
 
 life, 'ordinaria Dei judioia,' Calv., 
 but, as the solemn present (comp. Ixei, 
 ver. 5) indicates, to be extended also, 
 and perhaps more especially, to the 
 judgments iv tJ |8o<r. toO Xp. xai 
 ©eoC. Tovs DioOs TTJs dir«i6.] 
 
 'the song of disobedience;' soil, in 
 effect, Tois <r<p6dpa direiffeir, Chrys., 
 
 IXO^'TCS Tbv TTJs flTJTpoS X^P^^'^P^I 
 
 Orig.: see esp. notes on oh. ii. 2, and 
 Suicer, Thes. Vol. 11. p. 1357. The 
 iircld. here is disobedience to the prin- 
 ciples and practice of the Gospel; see 
 more on ch. ii. 2. 
 
 7. f.r[ ovv ^fvco-Se] ' Do not then 
 become;' ovv having its full collective 
 force (see on ver. i), and referring to 
 the previous statement that the -wrath 
 of God certainly does come on all 
 such. The ylveaBe ('nolite fieri, ' Cla- 
 rom. ; 'nolite effici,' Vulg., — perhaps 
 somewhat too strongly) is not to be 
 explained away : the Apostle does not 
 warn them only against ieing (Alf.), 
 but against becoming ('ni vairjjaijj,' 
 Goth.) partakers with them, against 
 allowing themselves to lapse into any 
 of theirprevailing sins and depravities. 
 oTivn^ox^oi avTcSv] 'partakers with 
 them;' not in their punishment 
 (Holzh.), nor their punishment and 
 sins (Stier), but, as the context, esp. 
 ver. 1 1, obviously suggests, their sins ; 
 'nolite simiUa facere;' Estius. On 
 aw/iiToxof, see notes ch. iii. 6, and on 
 the orthography (which has here the 
 authority of ABiDiFGN), oomp. 
 Tisch. Frolegom. p. xlvii. 
 
 8. i}t€ Yop] 'For ye weee ;' em- 
 phatic, the time is now past, Eom. vi. 
 1 7. It is this very difference between 
 the past and present state that con- 
 firms and proves (yip) the propriety 
 
 of the preceding warning; 'as that 
 state is past, do not recur to it, — do 
 not lapse again into a participation 
 in vices from which you have now 
 turned away;' comp. note on ylveffSe 
 (ver. 7), of which the present verse 
 seems tacitly confirmatory. 
 The assertion of Eiick. that in this 
 and several other passages in St 
 Paul's Epp. {e.g. Bom. v. 13, vi. 17, 
 I Cor. iii. 12, 21, Gal. ii. 6, 15, vi. 8) 
 /iiv ought to be inserted is sufficiently 
 refuted by Harless. The rule is 
 simple, — if the first clause is intended 
 to stand in connexion with and pre- 
 pare the reader for the opposition in 
 the second, p.iv is inserted; if not, 
 not: see the excellent remarks of 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 356 sq., 
 Fritz. Eom. x. 19, Vol. 11. p. 423, and 
 notes on Gal. ii. 15. 
 o-KoTos] ' darkness ;' not merely living 
 or abiding in it (comp. Eom. ii. ig, 
 r Thess. V. 4), but themselves actual 
 and veritable darkness ; for examples 
 of this vigorous and appropriate use 
 of the abstract term, see Jelf, Gr. 
 § 353. !• <t>"S iv Kvplif] 
 
 'light in the Lord;' not Smttjs delas 
 xdpiTos, Theoph., but 'in fellowship 
 with the Lord;' 'extra Christum 
 Satan Oinnia oocupat,' Calv. The 
 continued and corresponding use of 
 the abstr. for concr. (see above) suit- 
 ably prepares for the energetic exhor- 
 tation (without ovv) which follows. 
 They were 0ws, not only in themselves 
 (ir€<pi>!Tur/ji.ivoi.), but to others (comp. 
 Matth. V. 14), and were to pursue 
 their moral walk in accordance with 
 such a state of privilege. On the use 
 of the terms (pws and (TKiros, see 
 TJsteri, Lehrb. 11. i. 3, p. 229. 
 
118 
 
 nPOS E*ESI0Y2. 
 
 o yap Kapiroi toO (pceroi ev Trdcrtj ayaOanruvt] Ka) SiKaio- 
 
 10 (Tvvri Koi oiKriQela., SoKi/J-d^ovrei t'l eanv euapea-rov too 
 
 11 K.vp[cp- Kul fir] crvvKoivMvecre rois epyoti rois oKap- 
 
 «5s T^Kva i|m»tos irepiir.] ' walk as 
 children of light,' as those who stand 
 in nearest and truest connexion with 
 it; see notes on ch. il. 3. The ab- 
 sence of the article can hardly be 
 pressed (Alf.), as it appears due only 
 to that common principle of correla- 
 tion, by which, if the governing noun 
 is without the article, the governed 
 will be equally so; see Middleton, 
 Art. III. 3. 7, p. 49 (ed. Eose). On 
 the meaning of irfpiiraTeiv, which 
 however must not always be too 
 strongly pressed, see notes ore Phil, 
 iii. 18, and ore i Thess. iv. ii. 
 
 9. 6 7ap K.T.X.] 'for the fruit of 
 the %ftf;' parenthetic confirmation of 
 the foregoing command, and incite- 
 ment to follow it. Tap is thus not 
 simply explanatory (tiWe/) iipcp/ir/veiei, 
 tI ian rd riKva toO (f>o>T6s' Theoph.), 
 but, as the order seems to suggest, 
 confirms the propriety of using the 
 term irepiiraTetTe, and also supplies its 
 fuUer explanation; 'As children of 
 the light walk ye, for the fruit of 
 light is shown in a moral walk, in 
 practical instances of iyaOao-ivi).' 
 The modal participle SompA^ovTes (see 
 below) is thus closely joined with 
 irepHrareiTe, and ver. g is clearly 
 parenthetical in sense, though not 
 fully so in form: contra Stier, who 
 however f aUs to explain properly and 
 grammatically the use of the paiti- 
 eiple. The reading irveipuro^ 
 
 [Rec. with D^E^KL; great majority 
 of mss. ; Syr. -Phil., al.; Chrys., 
 Theod.] seems clearly a gloss from 
 Gal. v. 22, and is rightly rejected by 
 nearly all recent editors. 
 4v] 'consistit in,' Beng., or, more 
 exactly, 'oontinetur, ponitur in:' the 
 
 assertion that h is here the 'Beth 
 essentiaa ' (compare Gesen. § 151. 3. a) 
 is distinctly untenable; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 29. 3. obs. p. 166. 
 iraoTi a.'^aSaxriv^ ' all goodness' i. e. 
 all forms and instances of it; see 
 notes on ch. i. 8. On the meaning of 
 ayaS. see notes on Gal. v. 22. The 
 special appositions which Chrys. finds 
 in these three nouns, wpis rois 6pyt^o- 
 fiivovs, irpbs Toils v'KeoneKTOvvTas, irpJs 
 rriv ^cvSt] -q&ov/iii, are too limited. As 
 Meyer correctly observes, the whole 
 of Christian morality is presented 
 under its three great aspects, the 
 good, the right, the true ; the avH^ 
 crrot-x^ ^6 KaKia, dSiKia, :j/€v8os : comp. 
 Harl. in loc., and for a Sermon on 
 this text, see TUlotson, Serm. cxiiViii. 
 Vol. II. p. 311 (Lond. 1 717). 
 
 10. SoKijiaJovTes] 'proving,' 'test- 
 ing;' predication of manner appended . 
 to irepiirarelTe, defining its character 
 and distinctive features. The verb 
 SoKip&ieiv is not ' to have a just con- 
 ception of,' Peile, nor 'examinando 
 cognitum habere,' Borger, ad Bom. 
 p. 12 (cited by Fritz.) ; but in its 
 simple and primary sense, ' to prove, 
 to try,' the word marking the activity 
 and experimental energy that should 
 characterize the Christian life; see 
 Eom. xii. i, and Fritz, in loc. Trench, 
 Synon. Part 11. § 24, and notes on 
 Phil. i. 10, where the meanings of 
 this word are briefly discussed. The 
 sense then is well expressed by Eadie ; 
 'the one point of the Christian's 
 ethical investigation is. Is it well 
 pleasing to the Lord?' &pa dSoirf/iou 
 Kal TaLSiKTjs Stavotas ri a\Xa* CEcum. 
 
 ir. (iKJ onivKoivwvstre] 'have no 
 fellowship with,' Auth. — a good; 
 
V. 
 
 -12. 
 
 119 
 
 Trojy rou (TKOTOvf, /xaXkov Se koi iXey^^ere' to. yap 12 
 Kpvdnj yivofieva vir avToov ai(ryp6v etTTiv Kai \eyeiv' 
 
 and accurate translation; compaie 
 ^-i-aZoA-fciD [commercimn ha. 
 
 bentes] Syr., 'gadailaus,' Goth. The 
 version of Eadie and De W., 'take no 
 part in,' is questionable if not erro- 
 neous, as this would imply a genitive; 
 comp. Bom. xi. 17, i Cor. ix. 23, 
 Phil. i. 7. Though the sense is nearly 
 the same, there is stiU no reason, 
 either here, PhU. iv. 14, or Bev. xviii. 
 4, for departing from the exact trans- 
 lation. The form awKoiv. is 
 found in ABiDiPGLN ; and on such 
 evidence is appy. rightly adopted by 
 Tisch. (ed. 7) ; see Prolegom. p. xivn. 
 Tots Spyois Tois oKopir.] ' the unfruit- 
 ful works;' comp. Gal. v. 19, 22, 
 where there is a similar opposition be- 
 tween Ipya and KapT6s. The com- 
 ment of Jerome (cited by Harl.) is 
 very good, ' vitia in semet ipsa fini- 
 nntur et pereunt, virtutes frngibus 
 pullulant et redundant;' see notes on 
 Gal. y. 12. (laXXov Si xal 
 cannot be correctly considered as a 
 single formula, 'yea, much more,' 
 Eadie: iiJSXKov Sk is corrective (see 
 notes on Gal. iv. 9), while Kal is closely 
 connected with the verb, preserving 
 its fuU asoensive force, ' not only /t^ 
 ffvyx. but rather even iXiyxere,' 'non 
 satis abstinere est,' Beng.; comp. 
 Fritz. Rom. viii. 34, Vol. n. p. 216. 
 IXlYXere] 'reprove them,' ' redarguite, ' 
 Vulg., Clarom., — not by the passive 
 virtual reproof of your holy lives and 
 conversation (Peile),but,as St Paul's 
 use of the word (see esp. t Cor. xiv. 
 24, 2 Tim. iv. i, Tit. i. 9, 13, ii. 15), 
 and stm more the context, suggest, — 
 by active and oral reprobation. The 
 antithesis is thus most fully marked; 
 do not connive at them or pass them 
 over unnoticed, but take aggressive 
 
 measures against them ; try and raise 
 the Gentiles to your own Christian 
 standard ;' see Olsh. in loc. 
 
 12. Tdvdp K.T.X] 'For the things, 
 &o. ;' confirmatory reason for the com- 
 mand in the preceding clause. The 
 connexion of this verse with the pre- 
 ceding has been differently explained. 
 If the correct meaning of i\4yx. (see 
 above) be retained, there seems but 
 little difficulty; yap then gives the 
 reason for the koX iXiyxere, 'reproof 
 is indeed necessary, for some of their 
 sins, their secret vices for instance, 
 are such that it is a shame even to 
 speak of them, much less connive at 
 them or join in them.' Harl. refers 
 yap more to p-r] <twk. ; ' do not com- 
 mit these sins, for they are too bad 
 even to mention.' This however as- 
 sumes a perfect identity between ra 
 Spy. Tou (7K. and ra Kpvtpij yiv., which 
 (see below) is highly doubtful; and 
 also gives to the negative part of the 
 command (which, as the corrective 
 pJaXKov ik suggests, is obscured by the 
 positive) an undue and untenable 
 prominence. Td...Kpv(|>'i] k.t.X.] 
 
 'the things which are done in secret by 
 them,' se. by the viol ttjs aireiBeias, 
 ver. 6. There is not enough in the 
 context to substantiate a reference to 
 the mysteries and orgies of heathen- 
 ism (Eisner, 05s. Vol. n. p. 223). The 
 use of Kpv<prj (which obviously has 
 here a simple, and not an ethical 
 meaning like (tkotos), audits emphatic 
 position, seem alike to show that ra 
 Kpvipv ytv- are sins, not simply iden- 
 tical with TO Ipya t. (tkotovs, ver. 1 1 
 (Harl.), but a specific class of the 
 genus. These 'deeds done in secret' 
 then were all those ' peccata occulta' 
 which presented the worst features of 
 the genus, and which, from their 
 
120 
 
 nPOS E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 13 Ta ^6 Travra iXey^ofieva viro toO (pwrbi (pavepovTai' 
 
 nature and infamy, shunned tlie light 
 of day and judgment. 
 Kal X^Y'iv] ' even to speak of,' 'only^ to 
 mention.' This is an instance of what 
 may be termed the descemive force of 
 Kal ; see exx. in Hartung, Partik. koI, 
 2. 9, Vol. 1. p. 136; oomp. Klotz, 
 Devar. Vol. 11. p. 364, and notes on 
 Gal. iii. 4. Eisner compares, not in- 
 appropriately, Isoor. Demon, p. 5, a 
 iroietv alirxpiv, ravra vojxi^e /iriSk \iyuv 
 etvai. Ka\6v. 
 13. tA Zk irovTo] ' but all of 
 
 them,"they all,' . m\^ . \ rq 
 
 [ilia omnia] Syr.-Phil. ; continuation 
 of the reason for the command imWov 
 Si Kal iXfyx- — 'witl' antithetical refer- 
 ence to the Kpv(f>ri yivoiieva, Sk retain- 
 ing its proper force in the opposition 
 it suggests to any inference that might 
 have been deduced from ver. 12 ; 'it 
 is true these deeds are done in secret, 
 lut all of them, &o.;' see Klotz. Devar. 
 Vol. II. p. 363, 365. Ta Tracra is not 
 'aU things,' taken generally (Buck., 
 Alf.), but, as the antithesis between 
 Kpvij>TJ and fjiavep. (oomp. Mark iv. 22) 
 clearly suggests, ' all the Kpv^ri yivdfi. ,' 
 'hand dubie guin ea quse occulte 
 fiunt,' Jer. ; so rightly De W. and 
 Meyer in loc. 
 IXrYxo|JL£va] ' when they are reproved,' 
 
 ^.mm^ ASO ,2 [dum redaxgu- 
 
 1* 7 -n 7 
 
 untur] Syr.-Phil. ; predication of man- 
 ner or perhaps rather of time ap- 
 pended to TO, itavra. The absence of 
 the art. before i\pyx- distinctly pre- 
 cludes the translation 'qu£e arguun- 
 tur' (Vulg., Clarom., Auth., — comp. 
 Copt.), and shows that the participle 
 is not an epithet but a secondary pre- 
 dicate; see Soholef. Hints, p. 103. 
 4ir4 To« c|)WTis <|>av€po5Tai.] ' are made 
 •manifest by the light.' It is somewhat 
 
 diflSoult to decide whether these words 
 are to be connected with the part. 
 (Syr., Copt.), or with the finite verb 
 (^th., Syr.-Phil., — appy.): a con- 
 nexion with both (Scholef., comp. 
 Stier) is an evasion, but not an expla- 
 nation, of the difficulties. The follow- 
 ing positions will perhaps serve to 
 narrow the discussion, (a) 'EXeyxo- 
 fieva, both in tense as well as meaning 
 (oontr. Hamm., Peile), must stand in 
 closest reference to iXiyxere: it may 
 still be said however that the second- 
 ary meaning of the word (oomp. Clem. 
 Alex. Frotrept. n. p. 19, i\4yxei toi' 
 "laKxov TO 0i5s) may have suggested 
 the metaphorical language which fol- 
 lows. (6) *us (0aor, ipavepii) and 
 ipavepoa are closely allied terms ; the 
 one so obviously explains, elucidates, 
 and implies the other, that the con- 
 nexion of the two in the same clause 
 seems in a high degree natural and 
 probable, (c) $i3s must have the 
 same meaning in both clauses; if 
 simply metaphorical in the latter 
 clause, then also smxplj metaphorical 
 (not ethical, as in r^Kva Kparhs) in the 
 former, (d) The voice of (pavepia 
 must be the same in both clauses, and 
 is certainly ^ossi'ye; the verb occurs 
 49 times in the N. T., and never 
 in a middle sense; see Winer, Gr. 
 § 38. 6, p. 230. These 
 
 premises being applied, it seems clear 
 that if we adopt the first-mentioned 
 connexion, iXeyx- viro tou 0&jt. 
 (Chrys., al.), conditions (a) and (c) 
 cannot be fully satisfied; for either 
 i'Xeyx- must be taken as nearly syn- 
 onymous with ipavep. (De W.), or 
 0(3s must have an ethical reference 
 ('lux verbi,' Croc.) in the former 
 clause which it can scarcely bear in 
 the latter ; and further, iXeyxi/i. wiU 
 thus have a specification attached to 
 
V. 13, 14- 
 
 121 
 
 irav yap to (ftavepov/ievov <pS)g eariv. Sio Xeyet'EyeijOe 14 
 
 veKpwv, Koi eiricpavaet croi 
 
 o KaOevScav Kai avaa-ra eK roov 
 
 6 XjOilTTO?. 
 
 it, which is not in harmony with ver. 
 12, where the act alone is enjoined 
 without s,Tiy special oonoomitant men- 
 tion of the agent. It would thus seem 
 to be almost certain that iirh rod <j>ta- 
 t6s must be joined with (jtavepovrai, 
 which it somewhat emphatically pre- 
 cedes. We translate then, in ac- 
 cordance with (a), (6), (c), [d), as fol- 
 lows ; ' but all things (though so Kpv<t>ri 
 711'.) when reproved are made manifest 
 by the light (thus shed upon them), /or 
 everything that is made manifest is 
 light (becomes daylight, is of the na- 
 ture of light);' comp. Soholef.Z.c, and 
 "Wordsw. in loo. In a word, the rea- 
 soning depends on the logical proposi- 
 tion which Meyer has adduced, — 
 'quod est in effectu (0(3s iirH), id 
 debet esse in oaus^ {iwb toS <j>aT6s).' 
 That this ipavipiaim however does not 
 necessarily imply or involve a ' muta- 
 tio in melius' (Jer. oomp. Wordsw.), 
 seems clear from (c). All that is 
 asserted is that 'whatever is illumined 
 is Ught;' whether that tend to con- 
 demnation or the contrary depends 
 upon the nature of the case, and the 
 inward operation of the outwardly 
 illuminating influence ; see Alf. in loc, 
 14. 816] ' On which account; ' since 
 this ^Xey^is is so urgent and necessary 
 a duty , and its nature such as described. 
 On the use of 5i6, see notes on Gal. 
 iv. 31. \iyaj 'He saith;' 
 
 seU. 6 &e6s, according to the usual 
 form of St Paul's c[uotations; see notes 
 on ch. iv. 8, and on Gal. iii. 16. The 
 words here quoted are not found 
 exactly in the same form in the 0. T., 
 but certainly occur in substance in 
 Isaiah Ix. i sq. Meyer represents it 
 as a quotation from an apocryphal 
 writing which the Apostle introduces 
 
 by a lapse of memory ; De W. as an 
 appUoationfromapassageintheO.T., 
 which he had so constantly used as at 
 last to mistake for the original text. 
 Alii alia. It seems much more reve- 
 rent, as well as much more satisfactory, 
 to say that St Paul, speaking under 
 the inspiration of the Holy Spirit, is 
 expressing in a condensed and sum- 
 mary form the spiritual meaning of 
 the passage. The prophet's immediate 
 words supply in substance the first part 
 of the quotation, N3 ''2 niK iD-1p 
 "^QMi; while Kal iirup. k.t.X. is the 
 spiritual a.pplication of the remainder 
 
 oftheverse.viz.nnj '!\'hs nin» in?-ij 
 
 and of the general tenor of the pro- 
 phecy: see esp. Is. Ix. 19, and comp. 
 Surenhus. B/^X. KaraXX. p. 588. Any 
 attempt to explain X^ei impersonally 
 ('one may say,' Bornem. Schol. in 
 Luc. p. xLviii.) is not only opposed to 
 St Paul's constant use of X^yei, but 
 is grammatically unsupported : ipvja-l 
 (oomp. Lat. 'inquit')is soused, espe- 
 cially in later writers, but no instances 
 have been adduced of a similar use of 
 \iyei. : comp. Bernhardy, Synt. xii. 4, 
 p. 419. "E-yeipe] 'Awake' 
 
 'Up I' This expression is now gene- 
 rally correctly explained : it is not an 
 instance of an 'act. pro medio' (Per- 
 son, Eurip. Orest. 288), or of an ellip- 
 sis of aeavrbv, but simply a 'formula 
 exoitandi ;' consult the excellent note 
 of Fritz. Mark ii. 9, p. 55. The read- 
 ing of the Rec. lyeipai, found only in 
 some cursive mss., is undoubtedly a 
 correction, and is rejected by all the 
 best editors. dvdo-To] 'arise.' 
 
 This shortened form occurs Acts xii. 
 7, and may be compared with Kard^a, 
 Mark xv. 30, ai'd^a, Eev. iv. i"; sea 
 Winer, Or. § 14. i, p. 73. 
 
122 
 
 nP02 E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 15 BXeVeTe ovv x£f aKpi^wi irepnra- waik strictly: avoid 
 
 - . ^f5/ I ^■v^)f J. ' ' y excess, but be filled 
 
 10 Teire, u,n co? a<ro(poi aW wg cro<poL, eta- with the Spirit; sine 
 
 ' ' ' ^ ]3salins outwardly witu 
 
 your lips, and make melody with thankfulness in your hearts within. 
 
 Kal liri<|iatia-Ei k.t.X.] 'and Christ 
 shall shine upon thee,' — obviously not 
 in the derivative sense, 'Christus tibi 
 propitius erit' (Bretsoh.), but simply 
 'illueesoet tanquam sol' (Beng.), 'per 
 gratiam te iUuminabit ' (Est.) : otoc 
 ovv iyepBrj ris dtrb TTJs iiiaprlas, rbre 
 iiri(pai(r€L ai5r^ XptffTi?, TovriffTiv, 
 itn.\diJ.\l/€t w<nrep Kcd 6 ij'Xios tois i^ 
 vTTVov iyepBeiffiv Theoph. 
 
 15. B\itrertoivi' Take heed then;' 
 resumption of the preceding exhorta- 
 tions (ver.8) after the digression caused 
 by the latter part of ver. 11. It is 
 quite unnecessary to attempt to con- 
 nect this closely with the preceding 
 verse (Harless, Eadie); this resumptive 
 use of ou;' being by no means of rare 
 occurrence (see Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. 
 p. 718, notes onGaJ.iii. 5),andindeed 
 being involved in the nature of the 
 particle, -which nearly always implies 
 retrospective reference rather than di- 
 rect inference ; see Donalds. Gr. § 548. 
 31, p. 571. It is scarcely necessary to 
 add that /SX^Trere has no reference 
 whatever to the ^fflspreviously alluded 
 to (comp. Kst.), but simply implies 
 'take heed;' see i Cor. xvi. 10, Col. 
 iv. 1 7 and notes in loc. 
 irws oKpiPus irepiiraTetre] 'how ye 
 walk exactly, or with strictness,' scil. 
 'quomodo illud efficiatis ut provide 
 vivatis' (irffls t6 aKpi^Qs ipyd^evOe), 
 Fritz. Opusc. p. 208, 209, note, — 
 where this passage is carefully in- 
 vestigated; see also "Winer, Gr. § 41. 
 4. u. obs. p. 268, who has long since 
 given up the assumption that the text 
 is an abbreviated expression for /3X^- 
 vere ovv ttcSs irepiwaTetTe, Set Si u/iSs 
 ctKpijSws irepiTare^v, though cited by 
 Meyer (ed. 2, 1853) as retaining it. 
 Thus then the iudio. is not used for 
 
 the subj. (Grot.), which (if an admis- 
 sible structure) would be 'quomodo 
 provide vivere possitis ; ' nor for the 
 future, which would be 'quomodo 
 provide vitam sitis acturi;' but simply 
 calls attention to that in which to axpi- 
 /3(Ss irepnraTetv finds its present mani- 
 festation, and which is specified more 
 precisely in the clause which foUows. 
 As irepi-ir. appy. here implies little 
 more than ^v (see Fritz. Bom. xiii. 12, 
 Vol. III. p. 141, comp. notes on ver. 
 9), there is no necessity to depart from 
 the literal meaning of oKpi^Qs, — not 
 'caute,' Vulg., Syr., stiU less, 'with- 
 out stumbling,' Conyb., hut' exactly,' 
 'accurate,' Beza, 'tanquam ad regu- 
 1am et amussim,' Fritz. Opusc. I. c; 
 see Neander, Planting, Vol. i. p. 486 
 (Bohn). ijLi^ c&s d(ro(|>oi 
 
 K.T.X.] 'to wit, not as unwise but as 
 wiie;' more exact specification of the 
 terms of the preceding clause. It is 
 thus not necessary to supply either 
 irepiTraTowTcs to this clause (Harl.), 
 or vepiiraTTJTc to its second member 
 (as in effect Fritz., ' sed ut homines 
 sapientes [vitam instituatis '], loc cit., 
 p. 209): the clause is simply dependent 
 on TrepiTaretTc, explaining the fore- 
 going adverbs first on the negative 
 and then on the aflSrmative side; both 
 the strictness of their walk and the 
 way in which that strictness was to be 
 shown were to refieot the spirit of 
 wise men and not of fools: comp. 
 Gayler, Part. Neg. p. 63, where simi- 
 lar positions of the negative clause 
 are incidentally cited. 
 
 16. £|a7opa^o|iEvoi tov Kaipov] 
 ' buying up for yourselves (making your 
 own) tli£ opportunity, the fitting season;' 
 part, of manner exemplifying the wise 
 spirit of action specified in the fore- 
 
V. 15, i6, 17. 
 
 123 
 
 yopa^oiievoi tov Katpov, on at ^fiepai Trovtjpai eicriv. 
 Sia TOVTO fxri ylvearOe a<ppovei, aWa crvvtivTei t'l to IJ 
 
 going member. This expression occurs 
 twice in the N.T.; here with, and in 
 Col. iv. 5 without an appended causal 
 sentence: compare also Dan. ii. 8, km- 
 pov i^ayopa^ere {appy. 'hanc oppor- 
 tunitatem capiatis,' see Sohoettg. Hor. 
 Hebr. Vol. i. p. 780, not 'dUationem 
 quEeritis,' Sohleusn.). The numerous 
 and in most cases artificial explana- 
 tions of this passage arise from the 
 attempts to specify(o) those fromwhom 
 (comp. Beng., 'mali homines;' Calv., 
 'Diabolus') the (caipds is to be pur- 
 chased, or (6) the price (aU worldly 
 things, TO. iravTo., Chrys., Theoph., 
 Schrader) paid for it ; both of which 
 are left wholly undefined. The force 
 of iK does not appear intensive (Mey., 
 comp. Plutarch, Crass. § «), or simply 
 latent (a Lap.), but directs the thoughts 
 totheundefinedtime or circumstances 
 out of which in each particular case 
 the Katpbi was to be bought; comp. 
 Gal. iii. 13, iv. 5, where however the 
 meaning is more special, and the re- 
 ference of the preposition better de- 
 fined by the context. The expression 
 then seems simply to denote that we 
 are to make a wise use of circumstances 
 for our own good or that of others, 
 and, as it were, like prudent merchants 
 (comp. Beza, Com. a Lap.) to 'buy wp 
 the fitting season' for so doing; 'diH- 
 genter observare tempus, ut id tuum 
 facias, eique ut dominus imperes,' 
 Tittm. Synon. p. 42 ; so Sever, (ap. 
 Cram.Catc9i.),andin effect Origen(ib.), 
 though he has too much mixed up the 
 ideas of a right purchase of the time 
 and a right expenditure of it. For a 
 sermon on this text see August. Serm. 
 CLxvii. Vol. V. p. 909 sq. (ed. Migne). 
 r6v Koipo'v] 'the opportunity;' not 
 'hoc tempus, scil. tempus breve quod 
 restat huio sbvo,' Bretsoh. (Sever, d 
 
 Kitipos irapiiv, comp. Stier), but, as 
 rightly explained by Cornel, a Lap. 
 'occasionem et opportunitatem scil, 
 meroandi.' On the use of xai/jos ('tern, 
 pus, sen punctum temporis opportu 
 num') and its distinction from aiiiv, 
 Xpl^os, and cipa,, see Tittm. Synon. p. 
 39 sq., comp. Trench, Synon. Part. 11 
 § 7. iravi)paC] 'evil,' in a 
 
 moral sense (Gal. i. 4), not 'difficulta- 
 tum et asperitatisplena,'Beza (oomp, 
 Gen. xlvii. 9), which would introduce 
 an idea foreign to the context. Chris, 
 tians are bidden to walk aKpi/SSs, and 
 to seize every opportunity, because 
 'the days' (of their life, n»p^'n or of 
 the period in which they lived) were 
 marked by so much moral evil and 
 iniquity; iTrel oHv Kaipos SovXeiei 
 ToTs TTOvripois, i^ayopd,(Taa6e airov, 
 ilVre KaTaxpvi^a'^Sai. airif irpos €i<ri- 
 jSeioK" Sever, ap. Cram. Oaten. 
 
 17. Sid toBto] 'For this cause;' 
 commonly referred to the clause im- 
 mediately preceding, iTeiSi) i] iroviripia 
 avBel- CEoum., Theoph. (so De W., 
 Olsh.), but far more probably (see 
 Mey.) to ver. 15, 16, — 'for this cause, 
 so. because ye ought to walk with such 
 exactness;' el yb,p iaecrde a^poves ax- 
 pipds oi irepi)raTij(reTe • Schol. ap. 
 Cram. Caten. a4>pov6s] 'un- 
 
 wise,' senseless ; 'd(j>p(iiv est qui mente 
 nonreote ntitur, ' Tittm. Synon. p. 143, 
 — ^where the distinctions between this 
 word, c^TTios, av6riTos, and dinVeros 
 are investigated; but see notes ore Gal. 
 iii. J, o-uvUvTEs] 'understand- 
 
 ing;' '■pluaeBiffWihai.qnara.yivdiiTKeiv, 
 ut apparet ex hoc loco cum Luc. xii. 
 47 ; ya/iSiaKeiv est nosse,trvvUi'<u attente 
 expendere;' Grot. (Pol. Syn.). The 
 reading is perhaps doubtful. Lachm. 
 reads a-wUre with ABK ; 6 mss.; 
 Chrys. (ms.), but on external evidence 
 
124 
 
 nP02 E*E2I0YS. 
 
 o'lvw. 
 
 1 8 QeXrtfjLa rov K.vpiov, koc fxi] jueOucrKea-de oivcp, ep 
 
 19 ea-TiP acraoTia, aWa vKtjpovtrOe ev Ylveufiart, \a\ovi>- 
 reg eavroig •vJ^aX/xor? koc vfJivoig Ka\ wSaii irvevfjiaTiKaU, 
 
 hardly equal to that for the participle 
 [(rvvUvTes, D'EKL (ffw/ocres, DiPG; 
 Alf.); nearly all mss.; Claroiii.,Vulg., 
 Goth., Syr.-Phil., al., and many Ff.], 
 and in the face of the high probability 
 that the imper. is due to a conforma- 
 tion to ver. 18. 
 
 18. Kol (ii] ne6«<rK.] 'Atid be not 
 madedrunkwithviine;' speci&cationot 
 a particular instance ; jcai being here 
 used to append the special to the gene- 
 ral: on this and on the converse use, 
 see notes on Phil. iv. 1 2 , and comp. the 
 good note of Fritz. Marie i. 5, p. 11. 
 €V 4>] ^wherein,' Auth. ; referring not 
 simply to oTyos (Schoettg.), but to 
 /uefliiff/ceo-flai ohifi, scil., 'in inebria- 
 tione,' Beza; so rightly Orig. i, ap. 
 Cram. Cat. da-arCti] 'disso- 
 
 luteness,' Hamm., 'luxuria,' Vulg., 
 Clarom. ; not inappropriately Goth., 
 'usstiurei' [unyolieduess] ; rois dxpa- 
 TeiS Kal ds fXKoXafflav Sairavrjpovs a<r<5- 
 Tous Ka\ovf).ev Arist. Ethic. Nic. iv. 1 ; 
 comp. Cio. de Fin. n. 8. 'Airuros 
 
 (o-iifm) appears to have two meanings, 
 the rarer, 'qm servari non potest,' a 
 meaning which Clem. Alex. (Pcedag. 
 II. i, p. 184, ed. Pott.) apphes to this 
 place, TO &atj}(TTov ttjs fji^Oris did. t^s 
 oVurfas alvi^aixevoi, — and the more 
 common, 'qui servare nequit;' see 
 Trench, Si/noB. § 16. The latter mean- 
 ing passes naturally into that of ' dis- 
 soluteness,' the only sense in which 
 aaurla and affiirus are used in the 
 N. T., e.g. Luke xv. 13, Tit. i. 6, i Pet. 
 iv. 4 : the substantive is found Prov. 
 xxviii. 7 (Trench), to which add 2 
 Mace. vi. 4, where it is joined with 
 K&iioi; see alsoTittm. Synon. p. 152. 
 Iv nvc^noTi] 'with the Spirit;' h being 
 appy. primarily, though not exclu- 
 sively, instrumental (Vulg., Arm.; see 
 
 Orig. Cat.), — though an unusual con- 
 struction with irXripbij}: see however 
 ch. i. 23. Meyer cites also Phil. iv. 
 19, but this is a doubtful instance; 
 stillmore so are Col. ii. 10, iv. 12 (cited 
 by Eadie after Harl.), as in the first 
 of these passages iv is obviously 'in,' 
 and in the second the reading is more 
 than doubtful; see notes in loc. There 
 would seem to have been an inten- 
 tional inclusiveness in the use of this 
 prep., as Matthies (misrepresented by 
 Eadie) suggests: the Spirit is not the 
 bare instrument hy which, but that in 
 which and In/ which the true Christian 
 is fully filled. Whether the passive 
 irkripouaBe hints at our 'reluctant will' 
 (Mey.) seems doubtful: there is no 
 doubt however that the opposition is 
 not between dtvm and YlveSixa, but, as 
 the order of the words suggests, be- 
 tween the two states expressed by the 
 two verbs. On the omission of the 
 article (which is inserted in EG), see 
 notes on ch. ii. 20, and on Gal. v. 5. 
 19. XciXovvTES lavTots] 'speaking 
 to one another;' — ^not 'to yourselves,' 
 Auth.; ^aurois being used for aW^Xois, 
 asin ch. iv. 32 ; comp. Col. iii. t6, and 
 see Jelf, Gr. § 654. ^. Scholefield 
 (Hints, p. 103), and before him Bull 
 [Prim. Trad. i. 12), compare the well 
 known quotation, 'carmen Christo 
 quasi Deo dicere secum invicem, 'Pliny, 
 Epist. X. 97. Whether the reference 
 is here to social meetings (comp. Clem. 
 Mez. Pcedag. 11. 4, p. 194, Pott.), or 
 expressly to religions service (Olsh.), 
 or, as is more probable, to both, can 
 hardly be determined from the con- 
 text. i|/a\|iots K.T.X.] 'with 
 psalms and hymns and spiritual songs.' 
 The distinctions between these words 
 have been somewhat differently esti- 
 
V. i8, 19, 20. 
 
 125 
 
 aSovTes Ka) y^dWovres iv Ttj 
 eu^apia-Tovvres vavrore vwep 
 
 mated. Olsh, and Stier would confine 
 xj/aXn. to the Psalms of the Old Test., 
 v/ivos to any Christian song of praise : 
 this does not seem home out by i Cor. 
 xiv. ^6 (see Alf.), compare James v. 
 13. Harless refers the former to the 
 Jewish, the latter to Gentile Chris- 
 tians; Origen (Gat.) still more arbi- 
 trarily defines the \f/d\ii. as jrepl tQv 
 irpaKjiuv, the (jjSt; as irepl ttJs tov 
 kIxthov Tofeus Kal tUv \oiirQv Stj- 
 /uovpyr]ndToiv. In a passage so gene- 
 ral as the present, no such rigorous 
 distinctions seem called for : <|raX|jiis 
 most probably, as Meyer suggests, 
 denotes a sacred song of a character 
 similar to that of the Psalms (6 faX- 
 
 Clem. Alex. Pcedag, 11. 4, p. 194) ; 
 vfivos a song more especially of praise, 
 whether to Christ (ver. 19), or God 
 (ver. 20, comp. Acts xvi. 25, Heb. ii. 
 12); sfZr\ a definition generally of the 
 genus to which all such compositions 
 belonged {tfSrjv irvev/iaTtKiiv 6 'AttiS- 
 ffToXos etpriKe rbv xpaX/iov Clem. Alex. 
 I.e.): so Trench, Synon. Part n. § 28. 
 To this last the epithet irvevfiaTiKais is 
 added, — sc. not merely 'of religious 
 import,' Olsh. ('sancta,'^th.), 'having 
 to do with spiritual things, ' Trench, 
 but in accordance with the last clause 
 of ver. 18, 'such as the Holy Spirit 
 inspired and gave utterance to;' tf/dX- 
 XovTfS y&p Uvei/i. wXiipovVTai aylov' 
 Chrys. Much curious information 
 win be foimd in the article 'Hymni 
 a Christianis decantandi,' in Deyling, 
 06s. No. 44, Vol. in. p. 430 sij. : for 
 authorities, see Fabricius, Biiliogr. 
 Antiq. xi. 13, and for specimens of 
 ancient Siivoi, ib. Bibl. Grmca, Book v. 
 I. 24. Lachm. inserts iv in brackets 
 before faXfiots, but on authority [B ; 
 S mss.; Clarom., Sangerm., Vulg., 
 
 Kapola vfxwv tw Kvpiw, 
 iravTWv ev opo/auti tov 20 
 
 Goth.,al.; Chrys.]nearly the same and 
 apparently equally insufficient with 
 that [B ; Clarom., Sangerm.; Ambrst. 
 ed.] on which he (so Alf.) similarly 
 encloses the scarcely doubtful irvev- 
 IxariKois. 9180VTES Kal i|/a\- 
 
 XovTts K.T.X.] 'singing and making 
 melody in your heart;' participial 
 clause, co-ordinate with (Mey.) not 
 subordinate to (so as to specify the 
 moral quality of the psalmody, fierk 
 auvia-eas, Chrys. ) the foregoingXoXow- 
 TES K. T. X. Harl. very clearly shows 
 that iv ry KapSlq. even without i/iZv 
 could not indicate any antithesis be- 
 tween the heart and lips, much less 
 any qualitative definition, — 'without 
 lip-service' (comp. Theod., Eadie), or 
 'heartily,' like iK rijs xapdlas (Kara 
 TTiv KapS. CEcum.), but that simply 
 a7ioi7icr kind of psalmody ismentioned, 
 that of the inward heart; 'oanentes 
 intus in animis et cordibus vestris,' 
 Bulling, (cited by Harl.). The 
 
 reading iv rait KapSiais, though weU 
 supported [Lachm. with ADEFGK*; 
 47 ; Clarom., Vulg., Syr., Goth., 
 Copt.,Syr.-Phil.inmarg.;Bas.,Chry3. 
 (2), al.], is still properly rejected by 
 Tisch., as an emendation of iv tJ 
 KapSlq. [BSi(both omit iv)Sli ; nearly 
 all mss,; Syr.-Phil.; Chrys., Theod., 
 al.] derived from Col. iii. 16. 
 
 10. ti\a,p}.a~T. irovT.] 'giving thanks 
 always;' third, and more comprehen- 
 sive participial member, specifying the 
 great Christian accompaniment of this 
 and of all their acts (see notes on ver. 
 4, Phn. iv. 6, and Col. iv. 2), and pre- 
 paring the way for the further duty 
 expressed in ver. 21. It would thus 
 appear that the imperative irK-rip.iv Xlv. 
 has four participial clauses appended, 
 two of which specify more particular, 
 and the third a more pervading mani- 
 
126 
 
 nPOS E*ESI0Y2. 
 
 21 Kvpiou riixwv 'Iijcrov "KpicTTOv tw Qeip /cat irarpi, vtto- 
 TacrcTOfxevoi aWijXoii ev (po^w Xpicrrov. 
 
 A, . .10/ ' S ' WiTes be subject to 
 
 I 'VVfaiKes, rots lOlOli avopaaiV your husbands as the 
 ' ' Church is to Christ. 
 
 Husbands love your wives as Christ loved His Church. Mar- 
 riage is a type of the mystical union of Christ and the Church. 
 
 12. avSpaai,v\ Tiech. has with good judgment rejected the addition of uVo- 
 Tdtrffco-fie,— whether after ywiuKes viith. DEFG; Lect. 19; Syr., al.: or after 
 cwdpi<nv, with KL; very many Vv.; Chrys., al. (Rec, Scholz),— though sup- 
 ported in the omission only by B, all Gr. MSS. med by Jerome, and Clem. 
 (Harl., Mey., Be W.). Lachm. inserts ivmaaffiaOuirav after avSpaaw with 
 AK ; 10 mss.; Vulg., Copt., Goth.; Clem, (i), Bas., al.; the variations however, 
 and still more the absence of the word in the MSS. mentioned by Jerome, 
 render it in a very high degree probable that the original text had no verb in 
 the sentence. 
 
 festation of the fruits of the Holy 
 Spirit, viz. i^SaX xeiX^w;' (Ecclus.xxxix. 
 15), If Sal iv tJ Kapdlf, and evxapuT' 
 ria, while the fourth, {nvoraffir., passes 
 onward to another form of Christian 
 duty; see notes ver. 21, and for two 
 good sermons on this text, Barrow, 
 Serm. viii. ix. Vol. 1. p. 179 sq. 
 iirlp irdvTuv] 'for all things' Auth. ; 
 not masc, so. vir^p irdvTOjv twv t^s 
 eiepyealas fiiTeiKrjxoTOiV Theod. Meyer 
 needlessly limits the Tdin-a to bless- 
 ings ; surely it is better to say, with 
 Theoph. , oix inrip rav dyaSiSv iiovov, 
 dXXot KoX Ti2v "KvinipQv, Kal cSv ta^fv, 
 KoX uu ovK ttrp^v, KoX "yhp 5ti iravTiav 
 eiepyeroifieOa Kav d.'yvoQf/.ey, Numer- 
 ous instances of similar cumulation 
 and vaprixv^s are cited by Lobeck, 
 Paralipom. p. 56, 57. Iv 
 
 ovojittTi] 'in the name;' obviously not 
 'ad honorem' (Flatt ), nor even 'per 
 nomen,' scil. 'per Christum' (a Lap.), 
 but 'in nomine, ' Vulg., Clarom., Copt., 
 al. : the name of Christ is that general 
 and holy element, as it were, in which 
 everything (as Harless forcibly re- 
 marks) is tobereoeived, tobe enjoined, 
 to be done, and to be suffered; see 
 Col. iii. 17. The context will always 
 indicate the precise nature of the ap- 
 plication; see the exx. cited by Alf, 
 
 in loe. T^ 0ti3 Kal irarpC] 
 
 'to God and the Father;' see notes 
 on ch. i. 3, on Gal. i. 4, and on the 
 most suitable mode of translating this 
 special and august title, notes to Gal. 
 i. 4 [Transl.). 
 
 11, {nroTO(r(rd|i6voi oXXi^X.] 'sub- 
 mitting yourselves to one anotlier;' not 
 for the finite verb (Flatt. ; see contra 
 Hermann, Viger, No. 227, Winer, Gr. 
 § 45. 6, p. 314), but a fourth parti- 
 cipial clause appended to irXripoOaBe. 
 The first threenamethreeduties,more 
 or less special, in regard to God, the 
 last a comprehensive moral duty in 
 regard to man, which seems to have 
 been suggested by the remembrance of 
 the humble and loving spirit which is 
 the moving principle of eixapicrta. 
 In the following paragraph, and under 
 a somewhat similar form {iiraKO'q) in 
 vi. I sq. and vi. 5 sq., this general duty 
 is inculcated in particular instances : 
 iTetS-fj KOivTjV TTJv irepl ttjs uttotoy^s 
 vofiodetriav TvpoarjvsyKe Kar' eXdos, Xot^ 
 irov irapatvel rd /cardXXT^Xa* Theod. 
 On the distinction between iroTaacr, 
 {sponte) and ireiBapxeo' {coactus), see 
 Tittm. Synon. Part 11. p. 3. It 
 
 must be admitted that there is some 
 difiiculty in theconnexion between this 
 and the foregoing participial member. 
 
V. 2 1, 22, 23- 
 
 127 
 
 «S Tip 
 
 K.VI 
 
 1(0), OTt 
 
 avtjp 
 
 eariv 
 
 KecpaXr] 
 
 T^y 'yyi/at- 23 
 
 We canhowever hardly refer the clause 
 to the remote /ti) ix^eisK. (' don't blus- 
 ter, ... but be subject,' Eadie, Alf.), 
 but may reasonably retain the con- 
 nexion indicated above, the exact con- 
 necting Unk being perhaps the virip 
 vivTuv; 'thanking God for all things 
 (joys — yea sorrows, submitting your- 
 selves to Him, yea), submitting your- 
 selves to one another;' comp. Chrys., 
 ha wavTUiv KpaTiSiJ.ei> tQv TraBSai, "iva, 
 tQ 9e$ dovXeviofiev, iva rrpi irpos dXX?}- 
 Xous AyaTTiv Siaffd^/j.o'. iv 
 
 i|>ip<i> Xp.] ' in the fear of Christ:' the 
 prevailing feeling and sentiment in 
 which iiroTayrj is to be exhibited; 'ex 
 [in] timore Christi ; quia scilicet Chris- 
 tum reveremur, eumque timemus of- 
 fendere;' Corn, a Lap. The reading 
 GeoC {Bee.) is only supported by cur- 
 sive mss. ; Clem. , Theod.; and is rightly 
 rejected by all modem editors. 
 
 22. At ■yxvaiKCs] 'Wives, — sc. he 
 subject:' first of the three great ex- 
 emplifications (husbands and wives,— 
 parents and children, ch. vi. i sq., — 
 masters and servants, ch. vi. 5 sq.) 
 of the duty of subjection previously 
 specified. A verb can easily and ob- 
 viously be supplied from the pre- 
 ceding verse, — either vTroraiyaiaBiiKTai' 
 (Lachm.), or more probably, as the 
 imper. in ver. 25 and Col. iii. 18 sug- 
 gests, vT0Tair(rei7$e {Bee.). rots 
 I8C01S dvSpao-iv] 'your own husbands;' 
 those specially yours, whom feeling 
 therefore as well as duty must prompt 
 you to obey; comp. i Pet. iii. i. The 
 pronominal adject. Wiois is clearlymore 
 than a mere possess, pronoun (De W.) , 
 or, what is virtually the same, than 
 a formal designation of the husband, 
 'der Ehemann' (Harl., Winer), for 
 St Paul might have equally well used 
 ToXs i-phpanv, as in Col. iii. 18. It 
 seems rather to retain its proper force 
 
 both here and i Pet. iii. 1, and imply 
 by a latent antithesis the legitimacy 
 (comp. John iv. 16), exclusivenese (i 
 Cor. vii. 2), anispeciality (i Cor. xiv. 
 35) of the connexion; see esp. i Esd. 
 
 iv. 20), iyKaTa\€iT€l...TT]V Id. x^p^v KOX 
 
 irpos TTiv 15. ywaiKa /coXXSrai. We 
 may also adduce against Harl. his 
 own quotation, Stobeeus, Floril. p. 22, 
 Qeavoj... ipuT7]6eL(ra tI TrpQrov eitj yv- 
 yaiKi' TO Tip I5i(pf ^017, dpitTKetv dvdpi: 
 clearly 'her own husband, — no one 
 except in that proper and special re- 
 lationship.' It may still be remarked 
 that the use of idios in later writers is 
 such as to make us cautious how far 
 in all cases in the N. T. (see Matth. 
 xxii. 5, John i. 42) we press the usual 
 meaning: see Winer, Gr. § 22. 7, p. 
 139, and notes on ch. iv. 28. 
 ws T^ KvpCiji] 'as to the Lord;' clearly 
 not ' as to the lord and master,' which 
 perspicuity would require to be tois 
 Kvplois, but — to Christ;' 'vir Christi 
 imago,' Grot. , /caXov tjj yvvaiKl Xptcrrbv 
 aldelaSai. Sid. tou dvSpSs' Greg.-NaZi 
 The meaning of us is somewhat doubt- 
 ful. Viewed in its simplest gram- 
 matical sense as the pronoun of the 
 relative (Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 737), 
 the meaning would seem to be 'yield 
 that obedience to your husbands which 
 you yield to Christ ;' comp, Beng. As 
 however the immediate context and, 
 still more, the general current of the 
 passage (comp. ver. 32) represent mar- 
 riage in its typical aspect, «s will seem 
 far more naturally to refer (as in ch. 
 vi. 5, 6, comp. Col. iii. 23) to the aspect 
 under which the obedience is to be re- 
 garded (' quasi Christo ipsimet, cujus 
 locum et personam viri reprssentant,' 
 Corn, a Lap.), than to describe the 
 nature of it (Eadie), or the manner 
 (De Wette) in which it is to be ten- 
 dered; see notes on Co!, iii. 23. StiU 
 
128 
 
 nPOS E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 Kos 0)9 Kal 6 "Kpiaros Ke(pa\ri rrji eKKXtjcriai, avroi 
 24 awrrip Tov (jwfxaroi. aWa wf ^ SKKXricria vwoTacrcreTat 
 
 less probable is a reference merely to 
 the similarity between tbe duties of 
 the wife to the husband and the Church 
 to Christ (Eoppe, comp. Eadie), as 
 this interpr. would clearly require ws 
 il IkkX. tQ Kvp. : see Meyer. It 
 
 is thus well and briefly paraphrased 
 by Chrys., Srav irtreiKjis ti} i,vSpl, Cis 
 Tip Kvpiifi SovXevovaa 7)701? TeideaSat 
 (Sav.): see also Greg. -Naz. Orat. xxxi. 
 p. 500 (ed. Morell.). 
 
 23. dvTJp] 'a husband.' The omis- 
 sion of the article [with all the uncial 
 MSS., and nearly all modem editors] 
 does not affect the meaning of the pro- 
 position, but only modifies the form in 
 which it is expressed: 6 ivrip would 
 be 'the husband,' i.e. 'every husband' 
 (see notes ore Gal. iii. 20); av^p is ' a 
 husband,' i. e. any one of the class; 
 comp. Winer, Gr. § ig. i, p. 1 1 1 : yw-ri, 
 on the contrary, has properly the ar- 
 ticle as marking the definite relation 
 it bears to the avr/p ('his wife'), on 
 which thegeneral proposition is based. 
 «5s KoV 6 Xp. K.T.X.] 'as Christ also is 
 head — of the Church:' the 'being head' 
 is common to both m'^p and Xp. ; the 
 bodies to which they are so are dif- 
 ferent. In sentences thus composed of 
 correlative members, when the enun- 
 ciation assumes its most complete 
 form, Kal appears in both members, 
 e.g. Bom. i. 13; comp. Kiihner, Xen. 
 Mem. 1. I. 6. Frequently it appears 
 only in the demonstrative, or, as here, 
 only in the relative member ; see Har- 
 tung, Partik, Kal, -z. i, Vol. 1. p. 126. 
 In all these cases however the particle 
 Kal preserves its proper force. In the 
 former case, 'per aliquam cogitandi 
 celeritatem,' a double and reciprocal 
 comparison is instituted between the 
 two words to each of which koI is an- 
 nexed; see Fritz. Horn. Vol. i, p. 38: 
 
 in the two latter oases a single com- 
 parison only is enunciated between the 
 word qualified by koX and some other, 
 whether expressed or understood ; see 
 KlotZjDroar. Vol.ii. p.635,andcomp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 53. 5, p. 390, who how- 
 ever on this construction is not wholly 
 satisfactory. avrds o-wnjp] 
 
 'He Himself is the saviour of the 
 body :' declaration, apparently with a 
 paronomasia (<rwT^/)...(r(i/iaTos), of an 
 important particular in which the com- 
 parison did not hold ; the clause not 
 being appositional (Harl.), but, as the 
 use of dXXd in the following verse 
 seems distinctly to suggest (see notes 
 on ver. 24), independent and emphatic 
 (Mey.) ; ' He — and, in this full sense, 
 none other than He — is the (rioriip of 
 the body. ' The reading Kal airros im 
 [Rec. with jy^^^KLH* ; majority 
 of mss.; Syr. (both), Goth.,al.; many 
 Ff.]seemsclearly an explanatory gloss, 
 and is rightly rejected by nearly all 
 recent editors. 
 
 24. dWd] 'Nevertheless.' The ex- 
 planation of this particle is here by no 
 means easy. According to the usual 
 interpr. airos k.t.\. (ver. 23) forms 
 an apposition to the preceding words, 
 the pronoun oijtos (comp. Bemhardy, 
 Synt. VI. 10, p. 287) being inserted 
 with a rhetorical emphasis. The proof 
 is then introduced by dXKd, which, 
 according to De W., preserves its ad- 
 versative character in the fresh aspect 
 under which it presents the relation; 
 'But as the Church, dx. :' see Winer, 
 Gr. § 53. 10. I. a, p. 400. This is 
 plausible, but, as Meyer has ably 
 shown, cannot be fairly reconciled with 
 the clear adversative force of dWd, — 
 'aliud jam esse de quo sumus dio- 
 turi' (Klotz, Devar. Vol. n. p. 2): Si 
 or oJk would have been appropriate; 
 
V. 24, 25, 26. 
 
 129 
 
 Tta XpicTTw, ouTWf Koi at yvvaiKi^ Toli avSpdaiv ev 
 •TravTt. Oi avSpet, ayairare ray yuvaiicay (caflwf 25 
 Kat o Xpia-TOi ^yairija-ev Trjv eKK\r]aiav koi eavrov 
 •TrapeoieKev virep avriji, tva avT>]V dyidari Kadapicrai 26 
 
 iXXi, is wlioUy out of place. Euokert 
 and Harless explain it as resumptive 
 (Hartung, Partik. dWd, 2. 7, Vol. 11. 
 p. 40), but surely, after a digression of 
 only four words, this is inconceivable. 
 Eadie supposes an ellipsis, 'be not dis- 
 obedient, (6c.' an assumption Itere stUl 
 more untenable ; as in all such uses of 
 oXXii, and in all those which he has 
 adduced (some of which, e.g. Eom. 
 vi. 5,2 Cor. vii. 11, are not correctly 
 explained), the ellipsis is simple and 
 almost self-evident ; compare Klotz, 
 Devar. Vol. i. p. 7. Amid this 
 
 variety of interpretation, that of Calv., 
 Beng., Meyer, and recently Alf. , alone 
 seems simple and satisfactory. Airis 
 K.T.X. is to be considered as forming 
 an independent clause ; it introduces 
 u, particular peculiar to Christ, and 
 therefore in the conclusion is followed, 
 not by ovi> or Si, but by the fully ad- 
 versative dWd ; ' He is the saviour of 
 the body (man certainly is not tfiat), 
 nevertheless, as the Church is subject 
 unto Christ, so, d-c.' The various at- 
 tempts to explain the awripla in 
 reference to the other members of the 
 comparison, the husband and wife 
 (oomp. Bulling. , Beza, Hofm. Schriftb. 
 Vol. n. 2, p. lis), Sire all forced and 
 untenable. The reading wairep \B,ec. 
 with D'EKL; most mss.; Theod., 
 Dam.] for lis is rightly rejected by 
 most recent editors. ovrus 
 
 Koi K.T.X.] 'so let wives also be sub- 
 ject to their husbands in everything,' — 
 scU. iiroTa<iai(r9iatrav, supplied from 
 the preceding member. The Bee. in- 
 serts lUois before ivSpdinv with AD' 
 E^KL; many mss., Vv. and Ff., — but 
 in opp. to preponderant authority 
 
 [BDiEiFGN; Clarom., Sangerm., al.], 
 and to the internal objection that the 
 word was an interpolation taken from 
 ver. 22. 
 
 25. Oi avSpcs K.T.X.] 'Husbands, 
 love your wives ; ' statement of the re- 
 ciprocal duties of the husband ; wcoue 
 Kal irws ae irdXiv dvayKdl^a dyairav 
 a&rifjv, dkX o^xl deo'iroTiKQs trpofftpipC' 
 a6ai. dyd-jra yiip aiJri}*'' iroitfi fiirpifi] qj 
 Kal 6 X/). T^v iKKXfjfflav. Tpov6ei aiSr^s, 
 MS Kal 6 X/). ixeivris' Kav Siy n iraBeti', 
 Kav cnroBamv Si airijv, ii.^ irapaiT-fiaii, 
 Theoph. On this and the two fol- 
 lowing verses, see a good sermon by 
 Donne, Serm. lxxxv. Vol. iv. p. 63 sq. 
 (ed. Alf.). After ywaiKas Sec. in- 
 serts iavTuv with DEKL; most mss.; 
 al. EG read t4s 7i»'aiKas Ji/juk. It is 
 rightly omitted hyLachm. and Tisch., 
 with ABN ; mss. ; Vulg. (not all 
 codd.); Clem.-Alex., Orig., as being 
 probably an explanatory insertion. 
 KaSiis Ka£ K.T.X.] 'even as Christ also 
 loved the Church and gave Himself for 
 it;' nearly a repetition of the latter 
 part of ver. 2, where see the notes on 
 the different details. 
 
 26. tvo oirijv dy.] 'in order that 
 He might sanctify it; ' immediate, not 
 (as De W.) remote purpose of the irapa- 
 SiSivai, — sanctification of the Church 
 attendant on the remission of sins in 
 baptism ; see Pearson, Creed, Vol. i. 
 p. 435 (Burt.), Taylor, Bfl2)(. ix. 17, 
 Waterland, Eucharist, ix. 3, Vol. iv. 
 p. 645. Both sanctification and puri- 
 fication are dependent on the atoning 
 death of Christ, the former as an act 
 contemplated by it, the latter as an 
 act included mi it. There is thus no 
 necessity to modify the plain and 
 
 K 
 
130 
 
 nP02 E*E2IOY2. 
 
 27 Ta5 Xovrpifi Tov vSuTOi ev p^fnari, Iva -rrapaa-Ttjtrri 
 
 natural meaning of the verb ; ay 1.6.^. 
 here neither implies simple consecra- 
 tion (Eadie) on the one hand, nor ex- 
 piation, absolution (Matth.), on the 
 other, but the communication and in- 
 fusion of holiness and moral purity ; 
 see Pearson, Creed, Vol. i. p. 404, 
 comp. Suioer, Thesaur. s.v. 11. a, Vol. 
 I- p. 54. Ka6apC<ras] ' having 
 
 purified it;' temporal participle, here 
 more naturally denoting an act antece- 
 dent to ayid(Tii (Olsh., Mey.) than one 
 contemporaneous with it, as appy. 
 Syr., Vulg , al., and, as it would seem, 
 the Authorized Version. Eadie is far 
 too hasty in imputing ' error ' to Harl. 
 for maintaining the latter; it is clearly 
 tenable on grammatical (see Bernhar- 
 dy, Synt. x. 9, p. 383, and notes on ch. 
 i. 9), but less probable on dogmatical 
 grounds; comp. 1 Cor. yi. 11, oXXi 
 aTeXoiixairffe, oX\4 Tf/ilurSrfre, 
 T<3 XovTp^ TOV vSaTos] ' 6j/ the well- 
 known laver of the water; ' gen. ' ma- 
 terisB,' Scheuerl. Synt. § 11, p. 82; 
 comp. Soph. (Ed. Col. 1599. "^^^ 
 reference to baptism is clear and dis- 
 tinct (see Tit. iii. 5, and notes in loc), 
 and the meaning of \ovTpBv ('lava- 
 crum,' Vulg., Clarom., ] . k .^O 
 
 Syr., ');vahla,' Goth.)— indisputable : 
 instances have been urged in behalf 
 of the active sense oi\ovTp6v (adopted 
 by Auth., and perhaps by Copt., 
 ^th.), but in all that have yet 
 been adduced {e.g. Ecclus. xxxiv. 25 
 [30], tI <i<pi\7](Tev TV XovTp<f aiiToS;), 
 the peculiar force of the termination 
 (instrumental object; comp. Donalds. 
 Crat. § 267 ; Pott, Etym. Forsch. Vol. 
 II. p. 403) may be distinctly traced: 
 see exx. in Eost u. Palm, Lex. s.v. 
 Vol. II. p. 83, and comp. Suicer, 
 Thesaur. s.v. Vol. 11. p. 277. It seems 
 doubtful whether Olsh. is quite correct 
 
 in denying that there is here any allu- 
 sion to the bride'sbath before marriage 
 (Eisner, 06s. Vol. 11. p. 226); see 
 ver. 2 7, which considered in reference 
 with the context, and compared with 
 Eev. xxi. 2, makes such an allusion 
 far from improbable. Iv pijjuiTi] 
 
 'in the word,' 'in verbo,' Vulg., 
 Clarom., Copt., Goth. There is great 
 difficulty in determining (i) the exact 
 meaning, (2)the grammatical connexion 
 of these words. With regard (i) to the 
 meaning we may first remark that 
 pjj/ia occurs (excluding quotations) five 
 times in St Paul's Epp. and four in 
 Heb., and in all cases directly (Eom. 
 X. 17, Eph. vi. 17, Heb. vi. j, xi. 3) 
 or indirectly (Eom. x 8, 2 Cor. xii. 4, 
 Heb. i. 3, xii. 19) refers to words 
 proceeding ultimately or immediately 
 from God. The ancient and plausible 
 reference to the words used in baptism 
 (Chrys., Waterl. Justif. Vol. vi. p. 
 13) would thus, independently of the 
 omission of the article, scarcely seem 
 probable ; see Estius in loc. The same 
 observation applies with greater or less 
 force to every interpr. except the 
 Gospel, t4 pjj/ta T^s Trioreus, Eom. 
 X. 8, the word of God preached and 
 taught preliminary to baptism (comp. 
 notes on ch. i. 13); the omission of the 
 article being either referred to the 
 presence of the prep, (Middleton, Gr. 
 Art. VI. i), or more probably to the 
 fact that words of similarly definite 
 import (c. g. v6fios, x»P". "■ t. X.) 
 are frequently found anarthrous ; see 
 Winer, Gfr. § 19. i,p. 112. (2) 
 
 Three constructions obviously present 
 themselves;— (a) with dytaa-y (6) with 
 rlfi Xovrpij) roO SSaros' (c) with KaBa- 
 plo-as, or rather with the whole ex- 
 pression, Ka.9. T. \ovTp. r. SS. Of these 
 (a), though adopted by Jerome and 
 recently maintained by Etick., Winer 
 
V. 27. 
 
 131 
 
 auTO? eafTW evao^oi rr/v eKKKiivlav, fir] e-^^ovcrav aTrlXov r/ 
 pvTioa tj ri Tu>v TQiovToiv, aXX' 'ha p dyta Ka\ a/na)- 
 
 (Gr. § 20. 1, p. 125), and Meyer, ia 
 seriously opposed to tlie order of the 
 words, and (if iv be considered simply 
 instrumental) introduces an idea (dy. 
 Iv p-fi/i.) which is scarcely dootrinally 
 tenable. The second (6) is plainly in- 
 consistent with the absence of the 
 article, this being a case which is not 
 referable to any of the three cases 
 noticed on ch. i. 15, — appy. the only 
 ones in which, in constructions like 
 the present, the omission can be justi- 
 fied. The third (c), though not with- 
 out difficulties, is on the whole fairly 
 -satisfactory. According to this view 
 iv ji-fjliaTi. has neither a purely instru- 
 mental, nor certainly a simple modal 
 force ('verheissungsweise,' Harl.),but 
 specifies the necessary accompaniment, 
 that in which the baptismal purifica- 
 tion is vouchsafed (eomp. John xv. 3), 
 find without which it is not granted: 
 comp. Heb. ix. 22, iv aiiiari iravra. 
 KaSapl^eTU k.t.\. , where the force of 
 the prep, is somewhat similar. 
 
 2 7. iva iropooTiiirjj] ' in order that 
 He might present:' further and more 
 ultimate purpose of ^aurfc irapiSwK^ 
 iirip avTTit (ver. 25), the fuU accom- 
 plishment of which must certainly be 
 referred to i tdwv 6 /j,iW<jii> (August., 
 Est.), not to d oWi' ovTos (Chrys., 
 Beng., Harl.), see Pearson, Creed, 
 Vol. I. p. 406 (ed. Burt.). Schoettg. 
 appositely cites theBabbinicalinterpr. 
 of Cant. i. 5, HIXJI <:« mintJ', in 
 which the swarthiness is referred to 
 the Synagogue ntn D7IW [inhocse- 
 culo], the comeliness to it X3n d7ll/3 
 [in seculo future]; see Petersen, von 
 der Kirche, iil. 220. The verb irapa- 
 xTT-fiaTH is here used as in 2 Cor. xi. 2, of 
 the presentation of the bride to the 
 bridegroom,— not of an offering (Harl.; 
 
 Eom. xii. i), which would here be a 
 reference wholly inappropriate. 
 aiiros laiiT^] 'Himself to Himself;' 
 not 'for Himself,' i.e. for His joy 
 and glory (Olsh.), but, with local re- 
 ference, 'to Himself.' Christ permits 
 neither attendants nor handmaids to 
 present the Bride: He alone presents, 
 He receives. The reading irapaar. 
 aiTTjv iavT(fi [Rec. with D^EK; most 
 mss. ; Syr. (both); Chrys., Theod.] is 
 rightly rejected on conclusive evi- 
 dence [ABDiPGLN; 15 mss.; Cla- 
 rom., Vulg., Goth., al. ; Greek and 
 Lat. Ff.] by most modern editors. 
 ivSo^ov TTJv IkkXtio-Cov] 'the Church 
 glorious ; ' the tertiary predicate ?v8of ov 
 (Donalds. Gr. % 489) being placed em- 
 phatically forward and receiving its 
 further explanation from the partici- 
 pial clause which follows: so, with a 
 correct observance of the order, Copt., 
 JEth., probably Vulg., Clarom., and all 
 the best modern commentators. 
 |j,i^ EX'""'''"''' o'triKov'] 'not having a 
 spot.' The word ffTriXoJ {/juaatds, f)6- 
 jTos, Suid.) is a Sis \ey6fi. in the N.T. 
 (2 Pet. ii. 13), and belongs to later 
 Greek, the earlier expression being 
 K-nMs, see Lobeck, Phryn. p. 28. 
 Lachm., Tiseh., Bruder [Concord.], 
 Meyer and others stUl retain the ac- 
 centuation (TTTiXos. As the iota is . 
 short (comp. ou-ttiXos, Antiph. ap. 
 Anthol. Vol. VI. 252) the accentuation 
 in the text seems most correct ; comp. 
 Aroad. Accent, vi. p. 52 (ed. Barker). 
 ptirtSo] 'a wrinkle:' j>vtLs, t) o-weX- 
 Kva/ievr] (rdp^, Etym. M.; derived from 
 PTfi, ipio), see Benfey, Wurzellex. 
 Vol.11, p.317. Buga and 'wrinkle 'are 
 probably cognate forms; aeeib. p. 314, 
 and comp. Diffenbach, Lex. Vol. i. 
 p. 236. oXX' tvo ^] 'but in order 
 
 K 2 
 
a 32 
 
 nPOS E*E2I0YZ. 
 
 28 /xoj. ovTWi ScpelXova-tv 01 avSpei ayaTrau rai eavTWV 
 yvvaiKas wy ra eavTwv awfiara. o ayaTrwv t^v eavTov 
 
 that it might he;' change of conetruc- 
 tion, as if iva /jifi ixv ^^^ preceded : 
 similar exx. of 'oratio variata' are 
 cited by Winer, Gr. % 63. 11. 1, p. 509. 
 On the true meaning of ayla as ap- 
 plied to the Church, see Pearson, 
 Creed, Art. ix. Vol. i. p. 403 (Burt.), 
 Jackson, Creed, xn. 4. 3, and on Ajxa- 
 lios, see notes on ch. i. 4. The context 
 might here seem to favour the transla- 
 tion 'omni maouU carens' (comp. Cant. 
 iv. 7), but it seems more correct to say 
 that the first part of the verse presents 
 the conception of purity, <4c. in vieta- 
 phorical language, the second in words 
 of simply ethical meaning. 
 
 28. oiirms] 'Thus,' 'in like man- 
 ner;' 'ita, soUicet uti Christus dilexit 
 ecclesiam quemadmodum jam dixi,' 
 Corn, a Lap. Even should we retain 
 the reading of Rec. (ovrm 6<j>. ol avSp. 
 iy, K.T.X. ; see below), the reference 
 must still clearly be to Kaffws koX 6 
 Xp. K.T.X. ver. 25 — 27, not as Est. 
 (comp. De W.) suggests, to the fol- 
 lowing lis; this latter construction 
 being contrary, not necessarily 'to 
 grammatical law' (Eadie; for comp. 
 John vii. 46, i Cor. iv. i), but to the 
 natural use of outus, of which 'non 
 alia est vis quam quse naturaj ejus 
 consentanea est, ut eo confirmentur 
 prtEcedentia,' Herm. Viger, Append. 
 X. p. 747. In passages like i Cor. 
 I.e. there is an obvious emphasis, 
 which would here be out of place. 
 The reading is doubtful, as in addition 
 to the evidence in favour of the text 
 [KLN; nearly all mss. ; Syr., Arm.; 
 Chrys., Theod., al. (Rec.)] that of B 
 {6(peiK. Kal ol ctxiSpes) may be urged 
 for the inversion. The authority for 
 the longer and non-inverted reading, 
 kal'ol avSpes dipelXovai.i' , viz. ADEFG; 
 
 2 mss,; Clarom., Vulg., Goth., Copt.; 
 Clem., Lat. Ff. {Lachm.), is not 
 inconsiderable, but may be rightly 
 considered inferior to that for the 
 text. us tA eovTwv cr<u|i.aTo] 
 
 'as being their own bodies;' not 'wie 
 ihre eigenen Leiber,' Meier (comp. 
 Alf.), but 'aU ihre eigenen Leiber,' 
 Luth., Mey. The context clearly 
 implies that Christ loved the Church 
 not merely just as (comparatively) 
 He loved His own body (scil. loj 
 iavrSv, Schoettg.), but as being His 
 own body, the body of which He is 
 the Head. In the hortatory applica- 
 tion therefore m must have a simi- 
 larly semi- argumentative force ; other- 
 wise, as Harl. remarks, we should 
 have two comparisons, the one with 
 oSras, the other with is, which would 
 mar the perspicuity of the passage. 
 In the present view, on the contrary, 
 the distinction is logically preserved: 
 ourus alone introduces the compari- 
 son ; (is with its regular and proper 
 foree marks the aspects (see notes on 
 ver. 22) in which the wives were to 
 be regarded ('as being, in the light 
 of, their own bodies'), and thus 
 tacitly supplies to the exhortation an 
 argument arising from the acknow- 
 ledged nature of the case. For a 
 defence of the simple comparative 
 use of lis, see Alf. in loc. 
 i ayawav k.t.X.] 'He that loveth his 
 ou-n wife loveth himself;' explanation 
 of the preceding lij t4 iavrSiv a-iip.. 
 The Apostle's argument rests on the 
 axiom that a man's wife is a part of 
 his very self. Husbands are to love 
 them as being their own bodies: thus 
 their love to them is in fact selfr 
 love ; it is not Kor <i06iXi)i', but itorA 
 tpljffiv. 
 
V. 28, 29, 
 
 133 
 
 yvvaiKa eavrov ayaira' ovSeh jnp irore t>]v eavrov 29 
 a-apKU efjiiart]a-ev^ aXKa eKTpi<p€t Koi daXiret avr^P, KaOoni 
 /cat 6 XjOtTTOj T^v eKKXijariav on /ji.e\t] ea-fiev tov 30 
 
 39. ovSeVs yip K.T.X.] 'For no one 
 ei'er hated ; ' confirmation and proof of 
 tlie position just laid down, 6 dyoTrw^ 
 K.T.X. : first, it is ultimately based on 
 a general law of nature, oidels irore 
 K.T.X. ('insitam nobis esse corporis 
 nostri caritatem,' Senec. Epist, 14, 
 cited by Grot.) ; secondly, it is sug- 
 gested by the example of Christ, 
 KaBCjs Kal o Xp. k.t.\. The whole 
 argument then seems to run, 'Men 
 ought to love their wives as Christ 
 loves His Church, as being in fact (I 
 might add) their own {HvtQv) bodies ; 
 yes, I say the man who loves his wife 
 loves himself (eavrdv) ; for if he hated 
 her he would hate (according to the 
 axiom in ver. 28) his own flesh, where- 
 as on the contrary, unless he acts 
 against nature, henourishes it, even as 
 (to urge the comparison again) Christ 
 nourishes His Church.' 
 Ti^v ItttiToS o-(£pKa] ' His own flesh.' 
 Tliis word appears undoubtedly to 
 have been chosen in preference to 
 o-iS^ta, on account of the allusion to 
 Gen. ii. 23, which is still further sus- 
 tained by the longer reading of ver. 30 
 and the quotation in ver. 31. 
 dXXd «KTp6<^«i] 'but nourisheth,' 'mi- 
 nisters to its outward growth and 
 development.' The prep, does not ap- 
 pear intensive ('vaJdenutrit,' Beng.), 
 but marks the evolution and develop- 
 ment produced by the Tpitjieiv : comp. 
 Xen. (Econ, xvii. 10, iKvpiipciv nji' 
 ■yrjv TO anipiia els Kapirbv. 
 Kal 9d\ir€i] 'and cherisheth;' 'fovet,' 
 Vulg., Clarom., — more derivatively, 
 
 <2^0 [et curat] Syr., sim. .Slth.- 
 Platt, 'solicite conservat;' Meyer 
 
 maintains the literalmeaning, 'warm- 
 eth' (comp. Goth. 'varmei)5'), citing 
 Beng., 'id spectat amictum, ut nutrit 
 viotum.' This seems however here an 
 interpr. far too definite and realistic- 
 SaXTetv certainly primarily and pro- 
 perly implies ' to warm, ' but still may, 
 asits very etymological affinities (^t/Xtj, 
 ©aw) suggest, bear the secondary 
 meaning 'to cherish,' the fostering 
 warmth of the breast (comp. Theocr. 
 Idyll, xrv. 38) being the connecting 
 idea; see i Thess. ii. 7, tis i&v rpo^bs 
 
 KoOiJs KaC K.T.X.] 'even as Christ 
 the Church,' scil. iKTpi<f>et Koi BaKirei, 
 with general reference to the tender 
 love of Christ towards His Church. 
 Any special applications ('nutrit earn 
 verbo et Spiritu, vestit virtutibus,' 
 Grot.) seem doubtful and precarious. 
 The reading of Bee. Kiipios (for Xpi- 
 aros) rests only on D'KL; majority 
 of mss. ; Dam., CEcum., and is rightly 
 rejected by nearly aU modern editors. 
 30. oTi |i€\T| lo-pi^v] ' because we 
 are members;' reason why God thus 
 nourishes and cherishes His Church. 
 The position of fiiXr] seems emphatic; 
 'members,' — not accidental, but in- 
 tegral parts of His body (Mey . ) , united 
 to Him not only as members of Hia 
 mystical body the Church, but" by the 
 more mysterious marital relation in 
 which Christ in His natural and now 
 glorified body stands to His Church. 
 On the important dogmatical applica- 
 tion of this passage to the Holy Com- 
 munion, see Waterland, Eucharist, 
 ch. VII. Vol. IV. p. 600, 608, and 
 comp. J. Johnson, Works, Vol. n. p. 
 129 sq. (A.-C. L.). 
 
134 
 
 IIPOS E$E2I0YS. 
 
 aw/xaTOi aCrov, ex riji crapKOS avrou kui ck twc oarreMV 
 
 30. in TTjS crapKOS a^ou Kal 4k rOxi liariiiiv airov\ Tisch. (ed. 2) and Lachm. 
 omit these words, with ABKi; 17. 67*'; Copt., JEth. (both); Method. (?), 
 Ambrst. {Mill, Prolegom. p. 69). The external authorities for their insertion 
 are DEFGKLK<; nearly all mss., and Vv. ; Iren., Chrys., Theod., Dam., al. 
 Hier., al. {Rec, Scholz, Harl., Mey., De W. (?), Alf., Words.,— io which now 
 maybe added Tisch., ed. 7). The preponderance of external authority (owing 
 to the divided nature of the testimony of K) perhaps may still not be decisive ; 
 and paradiplomatic considerations (see Pref. to Galat. p. xxiv. ed. 4) also 
 suggest the probability of an accidental omission, from the transcriber's eye 
 having fallen on the third airov instead of the first ; and lastly, internal consi- 
 derations seem to suggest that the words, if inserted from the LXX, would 
 have been cited more exactly, while the omission might easily have arisen 
 from the appy. material conception presented by the clause. On these grounds 
 the longer reading is still retained. 
 
 Ik TTJs o-opKos K.T.X.] ' being of His 
 flesh and of His bones;' more exact 
 specification of the foregoing words, 
 ix with its primary and proper force 
 pointing to the origin to which we 
 owe our spiritual being ; comp. notes 
 on Gal. ii. 16. The true and proper 
 meaning of these profound words has 
 been much obscured by a neglect of 
 their strict reference to the context, 
 and by the substitution of deductions 
 and applications for the simple and 
 grammatical interpretation. We must 
 thus set aside all primary reference 
 to the Sacraments (Theod.), to the 
 Holy Communion (Olsh.), to Baptism 
 (comp. Chrys.), and certainly to the 
 Crucifixion ('per corporis ejus et san- 
 guinis pretium redempti,' Vatabl. ap. 
 Poll Syn.). A reference to the iua-ap- 
 Kuais (Iren. Hier. v. i) is plausible, 
 but untenable; for Christ, thus con- 
 sidered, is of our flesh, not we of His, 
 John i. 14; and even if this be ex- 
 plained away ('quia in hac natura ipse 
 caput est,' Est., comp. Stier), the 
 reference would have to be extended 
 to all mankind, not, as the context 
 requires, limited to the members of 
 Christ's Church. The most simple 
 
 and natural view then (comp. Chrys., 
 Beng., Mey.) seems to be this, that 
 the words are cited in substance from 
 Gen. ii. 23, to convey this profound 
 truth, — that our real spiritual being 
 and existence is as truly, as certainly, 
 and as actually (not wawep, Theod.- 
 Mops., but yvqfflas l^ avroO, Chrys.) 
 ' a true native extract from His own 
 body' (Hooker), as was the physical 
 derivation of Eve from Adam ; see esp. 
 the forcible language of Hooker, Eccl. 
 Pol. V. 56. 7, and comp. Bp. Hall, 
 Christ Mystical, eh. in. § 2, 3, and 
 the good note of Wordsw. in loc. This 
 is the general truth, which of course 
 admits aforoibles«conda)T/ application 
 to the Sacraments (comp. Eahnis, 
 Abendm, p. 143 sq.): we may truly 
 say with Waterland, 'the true and 
 firm basis for the economy of man's 
 salvation is this, that in the Sacra- 
 ments we are made and continued 
 members of Christ's body, of His flesh 
 and of His bones. Our union with 
 the Deity rests entirely in our mystical 
 union with our Lord's humanity, 
 which is personally united with His 
 divine nature, which is essentially 
 united with God the Father, the head 
 
V. 31. 
 
 135 
 
 avTov. 
 
 avTi Tovrov icaraXe/xf^et avQptoiro^ learepa Kai 3 1 
 fitlTepa Kai vpoiTKoXKijOija-eTai irpo^ rrjv yvvatKa avTov, 
 
 and fountain of all,' Charge, a.d. i 739, 
 Vol. V. p. 212. These are weighty 
 words. 
 
 31. dvrlTOVTov] ' For this cause;' 
 IfeKev To&rov, Gen. ii. 24. The mean- 
 ing is practically the same : dirrl passes 
 by a natural transition from its pri- 
 mary idea of local opposition (Xen. 
 Andb. IV. 7. 6) through that of counter- 
 change (see Winer, Gr. § 47. a, p. 326) 
 to that of mere ethical relation. It 
 can scarcely be doubted that this 
 verse is nothing more than a, free 
 citation from Gen. ii. 24, avTl taking 
 the place of iycKev, and referring to 
 the same fact, thederivation of woman 
 from man, which is clearly presup- 
 posed in the allusions of ver. 30. 
 Meyer with punctilious accuracy re- 
 fers ovtI tovtov to the words im- 
 mediately preceding, and gives the 
 passage a directly mystical interpreta- 
 tion in reference to the final and. future 
 union of Christ with His Church. 
 Somewhat difiterently and more pro- 
 bably, Chrys., Theod., Theoph., Jer., 
 refer to Christ's coming in the flesh : 
 compare Taylor, Serm. xvii. i, 'Christ 
 descended from His Father's bosom 
 and contracted His divinity with flesh 
 and blood, and married our nature, 
 and we became a Church;' see Beng. 
 in loc. To denounce summarily such 
 an interpr. as 'wild and visionary' 
 (Eadie), seems alike rash and incon- 
 siderate. That St Paul adduces the 
 verse as containing a definite alle- 
 gorical meaning, may perhaps be con- 
 sidered doubtful; but that St Paul 
 intended his readers to make some 
 such application, seems to have been 
 the general opinion of the early com- 
 mentators, is by no means incompa- 
 tible with the context, and cannot be 
 confidently denied: see Alf. in loc. 
 
 Thus then in a certain sense, we may 
 with Hofmann (Weiss, u. Erf. Vol. i. 
 p. 71) recognise in this the first Pro- 
 phecy in Scripture; 'primus vates 
 Adam,' Jer. KaTaXEC<|'<i k.t.X..] 
 
 ' shall a man leave father and mother.' 
 Mey. presses the tense somewhat un- 
 necessarily, as referring to something 
 yet to come. Even if in the original 
 passage it designate something posi- 
 tively future, there is no reason why 
 in this application and free citation it 
 may not state not only what will, but 
 whatever shall and ought to happen: 
 on this ethical force of the future, see 
 Winer, Gr. § 40. 6, p. 250, Thiersch, 
 de Pent. in. 11, p. 158 sq. 
 The longer reading of Rec. tw var. 
 airov koI rfiv fiTfr. is fairly supported 
 [AD3EKLN1 (omitting am.) N*: most 
 mss. ; Syr., Copt., al. ; Orig., al.], 
 but is rightly rejected by Lachm., 
 Tisch., Mey. , al., as a conformation to 
 the LXX; see especially the critical 
 comment of Origen, cited by Tisch. in 
 loc. irpoo-KoXX. irpis Tijv yvv. 
 
 a«T.] ' shall be closely joined unto his 
 wife:' comp. Matth. xix. 5, KoWrjS-^- 
 fferai ry yvvouKl cwtov, where the dat. 
 is used, but with little difference of 
 meaning. On the close affinity be- 
 tween the dat. and the accus. with els 
 and trpos, and their interchange in 
 many passages, see Winer, Gr. § 31. 
 5, p, igo. The reading is doubtful; 
 Lachm. for irphs rfiv yvvatKa main- 
 tains 7-5 yvyuKl with AD'E^FGN^ (om. 
 ouToS) ; 3 mss. ; Meth., Epiph. (comp, 
 I Cor. vi. 16) ; but owing to the good 
 evidence for the text [BDSEKLN^; 
 nearly all mss. ; Orig., Chrys., Theod.], 
 and the distinct notice by Origen (see 
 Tisch, in loc), the accus. with irpds 
 (Bee, Tisch., Mey., al.) is the more 
 probable reading. 
 
136 
 
 nPOS E<I>E2I0Y2. 
 
 32 Kai eaovrat 01 Suo eig adpKa fitav. ro nvarijpiov 
 TOUTO fieja ea-TLV, ejic ^e Xe'yft) eh XptcTTov Kat eh rriv 
 
 32. TO |iDorTijpiov K.T.X.] 'This 
 mystenj is great, so. deep:'' explanatory 
 comment on the preceding verse. But 
 ■what mystery? The answer is not 
 easy, as four antecedents are pos- 
 sible, (a) the text immediately pre- 
 ceding; TO (IpTiiiivov, TO yey pa/inivoy, 
 Stier, Meyer, comp. Chrys., Theodo- 
 rus. (6) The whole preceding sub- 
 ject, the strict parallelism between 
 the conjugal relation and that between 
 Christ and His Church, (c) The spi- 
 ritual purport, 'non matrimonium 
 humanum sed ipsa conjunctio Christi 
 et eoolesise,' Beng. (d) The simple 
 purport and immediate subject of the 
 text, 'arctissima iUa conjunctio yiri 
 et mulieris,' Est. Of these (a), though 
 not otherwise untenable, involves a 
 meaning of fi.virT'/jpiov which cannot 
 be substantiated by St Paul's use of 
 the word ; fiva-T. being only used by 
 the Apostle to imply either something 
 not cognizable by (oh. i. 9, iii. 4, and 
 appy. vi. 19), or not fully comprehen- 
 sible by unassisted human reason (i 
 Cor. xiv. 2, I Tim. iii. 9, 16), but not, 
 as here (compare Sohoettg. Hor. Hebr. 
 Vol. I. p. 783), 'a passage containing 
 an allegorical import : ' see Tholuok, 
 Horn. xi. 25, and comp. Lobeck, 
 Aglaoph. Vol. i. p. 85, 89. Of the 
 rest (6) and (c) are less plausible, as 
 in both oases — more especially in the 
 latter — the remark iyu Si X4ya k.t.X. 
 would seem superfluous and the force 
 of the pronoun obscure. On the whole 
 then {d) seems best to harmonize with 
 the context. Thus then ver. ■zg states 
 the exact similarity (koSws) of the 
 relationship; ver. 30 the ground of 
 the relation in regard of Christ and 
 the Church; ver. 31 the nature of the 
 conjugal relation, with a probable ap- 
 plication also to Christ; ver. 32 the 
 
 mystery of that conjugal relation in 
 itself, and still more so in its typi- 
 cal application to Christ and His 
 Church. It is needless to 
 
 observe that the words cannot possibly 
 be urged in favour of the sacramental 
 nature of marriage (Concil. Trid. 
 XXIV. init.), but it may fairly be said 
 that the very fact of the comparison 
 (seeOlsh.) doesplace marriage on a far 
 holier and higher basis than modem 
 theories are disposed to admit: see 
 Harl. in loc, and for two good ser- 
 mons on this text, Bp. Taylor, Serm. 
 XVII. XVIII. Vol. I. p. 705 sq. (Lond. 
 1836). eY» SJXeYw] 'but 
 
 I am speaking ;' antithetical comment 
 on the foregoing; iyii having no spe- 
 cial reference to his own celibacy 
 (comp. Stier), but, as De W. admits, 
 marking, and that with emphasis, the 
 subjective character of the application 
 and comparison (Winer, Gr. § 22. 6, 
 p. 138), while the slightly oppo- 
 sitive Si contrasts it with any other 
 interpretation that might have been 
 adduced (Mey.) : ' the mystery of this 
 closeness of the conjugal relation is 
 great, but I am myself speaking of it 
 in its still deeper application, in refe- 
 rence to Christ and the Church;' /leya 
 6vTUs fivtn-^ptoPy Tews pkvTOi eh XpLffTOV 
 iKXa/n^dveratf trap ifju)v tovto, <pT)(riVj 
 ws Tpo<l}'iinKWS irepl avrov ^XexOiv, 
 Theoph. On the general use of Xe7u 
 5e, formula 'explanandiatqnepressius 
 eloquendi ea quae an tea obscuriuserant 
 dicta,' see Baphel on i Cor.i. 12, and 
 notes on Gal. iv. i. els Xp.] 
 
 'in reference to;' not 'of,' Conyb., still 
 less ' in Christo, ' Vulg. , but ' in Chris- 
 tum,' Beza (comp. ^th., Syr.-Phil.), 
 the preposition correctly marking the 
 ethical direction of the speaker's 
 ■words; comp. Acts ii. 25, and see 
 
^- 32, 33/ VI. I. 
 
 137 
 
 eKK\t](nav. vXijv ku) u/jteij 01 Kad' eva e/cao-ro? t^v 33 
 eavTOv yvvatKa oi/twj ayaTraru) m eavrov, fj Se yvvrj Iva 
 <}}o^^Tai Tov avSpa. 
 
 Children, obey and ho- T^i _' _ ' ' " « f7T 
 
 nour yoilr parents ao- ■'^ « TeKVa, VTraKOveTS T0£? yoveuorivM. 
 
 cording to God's commandment : fathers, pro- 
 voke not your children, but educate them homy. 
 
 Winer, Gr. § 49. a, p. 354, and notes 
 on 2 Tkess. i. u. The prep, eis 
 
 before ttjv (kkX. is omitted by BK; 
 10 mss.; Iren., Epiph., Marc, and 
 is bracketed by Lachm.: but the ex- 
 ternal authority against it is not 
 strong, and the probability of its 
 omission, from its not being under- 
 stood, by no means slight. 
 
 35. wXrJv] 'Nevertheless,' i.e. not 
 to press the mystical bearings of the 
 subject any further ; the particle not 
 being resumptive (Beng., Olsh.), but 
 in accordance with its primary mean- 
 ing, comparative, and thence contrast- 
 ing and slightly adversative ; see esp. 
 Elotz, Devar. Vol. n. p. 725, Donalds. 
 Gr. § 548. 33, and also notes on Phil. 
 i. 18. Kal v|iEis 01 Ka6' tva,] 
 
 'ye also severally;' ye also — as well 
 as Christ towards His Church. The 
 plural thus specified by the distributive 
 0! Ko9' ha, 'vos singuli' (comp. i Cor. 
 xiv. 27,31, and see Winer, Gr. § 49. d. 
 b, p. 357), passes easily and naturally 
 into the singular in the concluding 
 member of the sentence. Onthestrik- 
 ing e(luivaIeDce of Kar& to avi, in 
 nearly all its meanings (here evinced 
 in the distributive use), see esp. Do- 
 nalds. Cratyl. § 183 sq. 
 (OS 4aiiTov] ' as himself' scil. ' as being 
 onewith himself.'see notes on ver. 28. 
 TJ hk 7»vij K.T.X.] ' and tlie wife I bid 
 that she fear her husiand:' emphatic 
 specification, with slight contrast, of 
 the duties of the wife ; 17 yw^ being a 
 simple andemphationominative abso- 
 lute (Mey.; contra Eadie, — but erro- 
 neously), though not of a kind so 
 definitely ijnsyntactio as Acts vii. 40 
 
 and exx. cited by Winer {Gr. % 28. 3; 
 p. 207, ed. 5 ; see p. 509, ed. 6), and 
 most probably dependent, not on an 
 imper., but on some verb of command 
 which can easily be supplied from the 
 context; see Meyer on 2 Cor. viii. 
 7, Fritz. Diss, in 2 Cor. p. 126, Winer, 
 -Gr. § 44. 4, p. 365, ed. 5. Alford sup- 
 plies 'I order,' or 'let her see,' refer- 
 ring to his note on 2 Cor. I. c. , where i 
 Cor. xvi. 10 is cited as illustrative: this 
 is not fully in point, as the subject of 
 the imperative and the subjunctive is 
 not the same : more pertinent is Soph. 
 (Ed. Col. 156, where, as Ellendt cor- 
 rectly observes, ' ^uXofai adsignifioa- 
 tum habet loquentis consilium; h<se 
 tibi dico ne, &c. ,' Lex. Soph. Vol. i. p; 
 840. 
 
 Chapter VI. I. 4iroKO«6Te k.t. X.] 
 ' obey your parents in the Lord; ' ij> 
 Kvplifi {Christ, — not God, as Chrys., 
 Theod. ; compare ch. iv. 7, v. 2 1) as 
 usuaJ denoting the sphere to which the 
 action is to be limited (not for kotcL 
 Kvp., Chrys.), and obviously belong- 
 ing, not to Tofs yovevaiv, nor to rofs 70;". 
 and to vraK. (comp. Grig. Cat.), but 
 simply to the latter, — serving thus to 
 define and characterize the nature and 
 possiblythe limits of the obedience; h 
 ois OK /iTJ irpiuTKpoicjis [Kvpiifi^, Chrys. 
 Onthemore exact nature of these limits 
 (here however perhaps not very defi- 
 nitely hinted at ; comp. Alf.), see Tay- 
 lor, Duct. Dub. III. 5, Bule i and 4 sq. 
 The reading is doubtful, as iv Kvptif 
 is omitted by Lachm. on strong au- 
 thority [BD'PG; Clarom., Sang., 
 Aug. , Boem. J Clem., al.]. The exter- 
 nal authorities however for its inser- 
 
138 
 
 nP02 E^ESIOYS. 
 
 2 vfxtioi/ ev Kvplo)' TOVTO yap ecrrtv SIkuiov. rtfia roi> 
 varepa crov Kai rrjv firjTepa, Tjrii ecrrtv evroKr) vpwTij 
 
 3 ii> e-Trayyekla, Iva ev aoi yei/tjTai Kal ecrri pLaKpo\p6vio^ 
 
 tion [AD^D^EKLX ; nearly all mss. 
 and Vv. ; Chrys. (expressly), Theod.] 
 are of great weigM, and the internal 
 arguments are in its favour, as it 
 would have been inserted after SUaiov 
 if it had come from Col. iii. io : see 
 Meyer, p. 238. tovto 
 
 7dp Io-tivSCk.] '/or this is right;' not 
 merely rpiTrov, nor merely kotoi rbv tov 
 Qeov pd/iov (Theod.), but 'in accord- 
 ance with nature' {T^Kva...yovevinv), 
 and, as the next verse shows, the law 
 of God : Kal (piaeL SiKaioi', Kal uTri rou 
 vS/jiov irp<>tTT&(T<TeTai., Theoph.; oomp. 
 Col. iii. 10. On the position of children 
 in the early Church, and the relation 
 such texts bear to infant baptism, see 
 Stier, Reden Jes. Vol. vi. p. 924 sq. 
 
 2. Tlf.a k.tX.] ' Honour thy father 
 and thy mother;' specification of the 
 commandment as an additional con- 
 firmation of the foregoingpreoept, and 
 as supplying the reason on which it 
 was based. Had SlKatov referred only 
 to this command, some causal particle 
 would more naturally have been ap- 
 pended. As it stands however, the 
 solemn recitation of the command- 
 ment blends the voice of God with that 
 of nature. tjtis] 'the which;' 
 
 the pronoun not having here a strong- 
 ly carnal, but rather an explanatonj 
 force; see notes on Gal. ii. 4, iv. 24. 
 irpuTT) Iv iirayyeKii^'] ' the first in re- 
 gard of promise,' Bcil. 'as a command 
 
 of promise;' oomp. Syr, I ' ^| H 
 p p 7 
 
 y t W) > [primumquodpromittiturl: 
 I 7 
 
 not exactly 'with promise,' Beza, Alf., 
 al., as the prep, here seems naturally 
 used not so much to state the accom- 
 paniment as to specify the exact point 
 
 in which the predication of irpiirii was 
 to be understood ; so rightly Chrys. 
 (oii T^ ra|et ['in regard of order,' 
 notes on Gal. i. 22] eXvcv aiTriv irpii- 
 Tr/v, aWd rf irayyeXlf), and expressly 
 Winer, Gr. § 48. a. obs. p. 349. Meyer 
 cites Diodor. Sic. xiii. 37, iv Si eiye- 
 ye/51 Kal irXovTif trpCyros. Some little 
 difficjilty has been found in the use of 
 irpuTi], owing to the 2nd command- 
 ment seeming to involve a kind of 
 promise; see Orig. Cat. K this be 
 considered as not a definite ^7ra77EXIa 
 (Calv.), still TrpuTij would seem un- 
 usual,asthefifth commandment would 
 then be the only one which has a pro- 
 mise: nor would the assumption that 
 it is 'first' on the second table (not such 
 a recent division as Meyer after Erasm. 
 seems to think, see Philo, de Special. 
 Legg. Vol. 11. p. 300, ed. Mang.) re- 
 lieve the difficulty, as the same objec- 
 tion would still remain. We may- 
 perhaps best explain the statement of 
 priority by referring it, not to all 
 other /orcpiomi/ commands (Hail.), but 
 to all the other Mosaic commands 
 (Mey.) of which the decalogue forms 
 naturally the chief and prominent 
 portion ; simply then ' the first com- 
 mand we meet with which involves a 
 promise. ' It may be observed 
 
 that the article is not needed with 
 irpuTo!, ordinals being from their na- 
 ture sufficiently definite ; oomp. Acts 
 xvi. 12, and see Middleton, Greek Art. 
 VI. 3, p. 100. 
 
 3. Xvaei <roi K.T.\.]'in order that 
 it may be well with thee ;' a slightly 
 varied citation from the LXX, Exod. 
 XX, 12, Deut. V. 16, ha ev <roi yiviyrai 
 Kal IVa /xaKpoxpivios yivy iwl t^s y^s 
 [t^s dyaBrjs, Exod.] ijs Kipios Ge6s 
 
VI. 2, 3, 4- 
 
 139 
 
 ewt T^f "yijy. KaJ ot irarepei, firj irapopylTere t(i 4 
 TSKva vfxwv, aXXa exTpecpere avTa ev iraiSela koj vou- 
 0Etrja K.vpiov. 
 
 (Tov SiSaa-t <rot. The omission of the 
 latter words can scarcely have arisen 
 from the Apostle's belief that his 
 Gentile hearers and readers were so 
 familiar with the rest of the quotation, 
 that it would be unnecessary to cite it 
 (see Mey.) ; for thus tvs 7^5 must be 
 translated 'the land' (of Canaan, — 
 simply and historically, Mey.) and the 
 promise denuded of all its Bignifioance 
 to Christian children. It is fax more 
 probable (see Eadie) that the omission 
 was intended to generalize the com- 
 mand, and that, not merely 'toti 
 genti' (Beng.), nor in typical ref. to 
 heaven (Hamm., Olsh., see Barrow, 
 Decal. Vol. vi. 524), but simply and 
 plainly to individuals, subject of 
 course to the conditions which always 
 belong to such temporal promises; see 
 Leighton, Expos, of Command, p. 487 
 (Edin. 1845). Kol ^o-T] |i.aKp.] 
 
 'and that thou be long-lived,' 'et sis 
 longsBvus,' Vulg. The future is com- 
 tuonly explained as a lapse into the 
 ' oratio directa ' (comp. Winer, Gr. 
 § 41. b. i; p. 258), but is more probably 
 to be regarded as dependent on ii/a (so 
 Vulg,, .^th.. Arm., all of which use 
 the subjunot.), — a construction which 
 though not found in Attic Greek (see 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 630) certainly 
 does occur in the N. T. (comp. i Cor. 
 ix. 18, Eev. xxii. 14, and see Winer, 
 I. c), harmonizes perfectly with the 
 classical use of oVus (see the nume- 
 rous exx. cited by Gayler, Partic. Neg, 
 p. 209, sq.), and is here eminently 
 simple and natural; comp. Mey. in 
 loc. Whether however we can here 
 recognise a 'logical climax' (Mey.), 
 is doubtful : the future undoubtedly 
 does often express the more lasting 
 and certain result (compare Eev. I.e., 
 
 where the single act is expressed by 
 the aor. subj., the lasting act by the 
 future) ; still, as the present formula 
 occurs in substance in Deut. xxii. 7 
 (A lex.), and might have thencebeoome 
 a known form of expression, it seems 
 better not to press the future further 
 than as representing the temporal evo- 
 lution of the eu yeviaBat. 
 
 4. Kal ot iraT^pes] 'And ye fathers;' 
 corresponding address to the parents 
 in the persons of those who bore the 
 domestic rule, the Taripei'. comp. 
 Meyer in loc. Bengel remarks on the 
 presence of the xal here and ver. 9, 
 audits absence in ch. v. 23 ; 'facilius 
 parentes et heri abutuntur potestate 
 suSquammariti.' This distinction is 
 perhaps over-pressed: khI here and 
 ver. 9 introduces a marked and quick 
 appeal (see Hartung, Fartik. khI, 5.7, 
 Vol. I. 149), and also marks that the 
 obligation was not all on one side, but 
 that the superior also had duties which 
 he owed to the inferior. The duty is 
 then expressed negatively and posi- 
 tively. (1,1] irapopYtJeTs] 
 'provoke not to wrath;' see Col. iii. 21, 
 /4i} ipiBliere tA, riKva {Bee, Tisch.) : 
 negative side of exhortation {oix drev 
 ayairare ai5ra, touto yhp Kal aK6vTuv 
 i] ^v<ris iincnrdTai., ^Chrys.), not with 
 reference to any stronger acts such as 
 disinheriting, d^c. (Chrys.), but, as 
 Alf. rightly suggests, all the vexa- 
 tious circumstances which may occur 
 in ordinary intercourse; Bepairevew Kal 
 liri \vTetv iKi\ev(re, Theod, 
 lK.Tpi^eri\ 'bring up, educate;' in an 
 ethical sense, KaXus iKrpe^ei iraTtip 
 Siraios, Prov. xxiii. 24; frequently so 
 in Plato; comp. Polyb. Hist. 1. 63. 7> 
 iv iraidelai! Kal vbnois iKTeBpa/i/ihiav 
 (Winer). In ch. v. 29 the reference 
 
140 
 
 nPOS E$E2I0YS. 
 
 Ol SoSXot, viraKoiere rok Kvplon |«™Sj°iiS?;^tai5f- 
 KUTCt rrioKa fiera <p6^ov Kat rpifiov, ku S?a*s rchriX 
 
 and ye shall receive your reward: masters, do the like in return. 
 
 is simply physical, but the force of the 
 compound is the same in both pas- 
 sages ; see notes in loe. 
 Iv irai.8EC9i Kal vov6eo-C(}] ' in the disci- 
 pline and admonition;' ' in disoiplina 
 et correptione, ' Vulg. ; not instrumen- 
 tal, but as usual 'in the sphere and 
 influence of ; ' see Winer, Gr. § 48. a, 
 p. 346 note. These two words are not 
 related to one another as the general 
 (wcuS.) to the special (Harl., Mey.), 
 but specify the two methods in the 
 Christian education of children, train- 
 ing by act and discipline, and training 
 byword; so Trench, Synon. § 32, and 
 before him Grot., ' ttoiS. hie signifioare 
 videtur institutionem jjsrpoenas; vovS. 
 autem est eainstitutio quae fit verbis.' 
 This Christian meaning of iraiSevoi and 
 iraiSeta, ' per molestias eruditio ' (Au- 
 gust.), seems occasionally faintly hint- 
 ed at in earlier writers ; comp. Xen. 
 Mem. I. 3. 5, and Polyb. Hist. n. 9. 6, 
 where the adverb d/3\a(3[3s marks that 
 the vaiSeveiv was a word that needed 
 limitation. On the latter form vovBeala 
 instead of i/ouffeTr/cris, see Moeris, Lex. 
 p. 248 (ed. Koch), Lobeck, Phryn. 
 p. 512, 520. Kvplov]'Of 
 
 the Lord;' suhjectl, — ^belonging to the 
 general category of the posgcssiue geni- 
 tive, and specifying the Lord Christ 
 as Him by whom the vovBeala and 
 waiSda were, so to say, prescribed, 
 and by whose Spirit they must be 
 regulated ; so Harl., Olsh. , Mey. The 
 gen. objecti 'about the Lord' ('monitia 
 ex verbo Dei petitis,' Beza), though 
 apparently adopted by all the Greek 
 commentators (comp. Theod. ra 8eia 
 TaiSticiv), seems far less satisfactory. 
 Meyer reads tou Kuplov, but, as it 
 would seem, by accident : there is no 
 traps of such a reading in any of the 
 
 critical editions. 
 
 g. Tots KvpCots Kara <rdpKa] 'your 
 masters according to the flesh;' kotA 
 a-apxa here, as in Col. iii. 22 (where 
 it precedes Kvp.), serving to define 
 and qualify Kvplois, 'your bodily, 
 earthly masters :' comp. notes on ch. 
 i. 19, ii. II. Both here and Col. I. c. 
 (where the mention of Kipios imme- 
 diately follows) the adverbial epithet 
 would seem to have been suggested by 
 the remembrance of the different re- 
 lation they stood in to another Master, 
 T^ Karh Tvev/ia Kal Karh aapKO. Kvp. 
 Whether anything consolatory ((ca-ri 
 capKa iffTLP Ti deffworelaj irpoffKaipos Kal 
 Ppaxeia, Chrys.) or alleviating ('ma- 
 nere illis nihilominus intactam liber- 
 tatem spiritualem,' Calv.) is further 
 couched in the addition, is perhaps 
 doubtful (see Harl.), still both, espe- 
 cially the latter, are obviously deduc- 
 tions which must have been, and 
 which the Apostle might possibly have 
 intended to be made. On the stricter 
 but here neglected distinction between 
 /n!piosand5ecr7ro7T;s, see Trench, Synon. 
 § 28. Lachm. places Karli, aapxa 
 
 before Kvplois with ABX ; 10 mss. ; 
 Clem., Chrys. (i),Dam., al., — ^but such 
 a position is rejected by Tisch. and 
 most recent editors, as a probable 
 conformation to Col. iii. 22. 
 Iicrd (|>6pov Kal rpofjiov] 'with fear 
 and trembling.' By comparing i Cor. 
 ii. 3, 2 Cor. vii. i5,Phil. ii. 12, where 
 the two words are united, it does not 
 seem that there is any allusion to the 
 ' durior servorum conditio ' (Wolf, 
 Beng., comp. Chrys.), but only to the 
 ' anxious solicitude ' they ought to feel 
 about the faithful performance of their 
 duties; comp. Hamm. on Phil. ii. 12, 
 where however the idea of raireivo- 
 
VI. 5, 6. 
 
 141 
 
 aTrXoTtjTi T^y KapSiag vjui.wi', to? tw XjOktt^ • /xi] /car 6 
 o(p6d\fi.ooovXeiav m afOpooTrapea-Koi, aXX' o)? SovXoi 
 XptaTov, iroiovvTes to QeXij/xa tov Qeov e/c "^vxnit 
 
 tfipoaivri (Hamm.) ig not so prominent 
 as that of distrust of their own powers, 
 anxiety that they could not do enough : 
 see notes in loc. 
 
 iv dirX6TT|Ti Tijs KapSCas] 'in single- 
 ness of heart;' 'in simplicitate cordis,' 
 Vulg., Clarom., Syr.; element in 
 which their anxious and solicitous 
 obedience was to be shown : it was to 
 be no hypocritical anxiety, but one 
 arisingfrom a sincere and single heart ; 
 KoKdi elTTev, Ivi, -yhp /ieri (j>. koL rp. 
 Sov\eu£iv, oiK e^ evvola^ 84, aW us av 
 ^|5i Chrys. The term av\6n]S occurs 
 seven times (2 Cor. i. 12 is doubtful) 
 in the N. T., always in St Paul's Epp., 
 and in all marks that openness and 
 sincerity of heart (not^jer se 'libera- 
 lity,' see the good note of Fritz. Bom. 
 Vol. III. p. 62) which repudiates dupli- 
 city in thought (2 Cor. xi. 3) or action 
 (Bom. xii. 8). It is joined with 
 aKada (Philo, Opif. § 41. P- 38. § 55. 
 .p. 61), and dyaSSrris (Wiad. i. i), and 
 is opposed to iroiKMa (Plato, Eep. 
 404 e), TToXuTpowla (comp. Hipp. Min. 
 365 B, where Achilles is contrasted 
 with Ulysses), KaKovpyla, and kukoti- 
 eda (Theoph., Theod., in loc); see 
 Suioer, Thesaur. Vol. i. p. 436, and 
 Trench, Sijnon. Part 11. § 6; comp. 
 Tittm. Synon. p. 29, and- on the scrip- 
 tural aspects of singleness of heart, 
 Beck, Seelenl. in. § 26, p. 105 sq. 
 
 6. [itj Kar o<t>6aX|iioSavXcCav] 'not 
 in the way of eye-service ;' further spe- 
 cificatioii on the negative side of the 
 preceding iv airKbr., the prep, with 
 its usual force designating the rule or 
 ' normam agendi, ' which in this case 
 they were not to follow ; see exx. in 
 Winer, Gr. § 49. d, p. 358. The word 
 i(ji6a\fioS. appears to have been coined 
 
 by St Paul, being only found here 
 and Col. iii. 22: the adj. dipSa'Kp.a- 
 SovXos occurs in Gonstitut. Apost. Vol. 
 I. p. 299 A (ed. Cotel.), but in refe- 
 rence to this passage. The meaning 
 is well expressed by Clarom., Vulg., 
 'non ad oculum servientes' (comp. 
 Syr.), the ref. being primarily to the 
 master's eye {p.ij pJ>vov irapovTUv tQv 
 SeffTOTuv KoX opwvruv dWci Kal airov- 
 Tuv, Theoph.; compare Xen. (Econ. 
 xn. 20) ; the word therefore meaning 
 generally as here, ■q ovk i^ elXiKpivovs 
 KapStas irpoaipepofiivTj Bepaireia, dWcL 
 rif axqiMn Kexp<^<rp.ivTi, Theod. The 
 more correct form is i<j>6aXp.odov\ta 
 [DBFGLS], see L. Dindorf in Steph. 
 Thesaur. Vol. v. p. 1088, 2446. 
 dvSpuirdpEo-Koi] 'men-pleasers;' Geos 
 biecrKopTicrev dura dv&pwirapicKOJv, Ps. 
 liii. 6. Lobeck (Phryn. p. 621) re- 
 marks on the questionable forms cud- 
 peaKos, Sv<ydpeffKos, but excepts dvdptt}- 
 irdpeffKos. oXX' (Ss 
 
 SovXoi Xp.] 'but as bondservants of 
 Christ;' contrasted term to dvBpa- 
 irdp.: tIs yhp Oeou 5ov\os wv dvdpib- 
 irois dpi(TKuv |8ou'\eTot; tIs Bk duffpiii- 
 TTOiS dpiffKtav Qeov dvvarai etfcu 5oy\os; 
 Chrys.: comp. ver. 7, where the op- 
 position is more fully seen. Bilckert 
 removes the stop after Xp., thus re- 
 garding TToiovvres as the principal 
 member in the opposition, Sov\oi Xp. 
 only a subordinate member which 
 gives the reason and foundation of it. 
 This, though obviously harsh, and 
 completely marring the studied an- 
 tithesis between mSpoyirdpeffKoi, and 
 SouXoi XpioToii, is reintroduced by 
 'fisch. (ed. 7), but properly rejected 
 by other recent editors. The article 
 before XpurroS {Rec. with D'EKL; 
 
142 
 
 nP02 E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 7 ner evvoius SovXevovrei wy toT Kvpicp ku) ovk avQpw- 
 
 most mss.; Chrys., Theod.] is rightly 
 omitted by Lachm., Tisch., al., on 
 preponderant external authority. 
 TTOioivres k.t.X.] 'doing the will of 
 God from the soul;' participial clause 
 defining the manner in which their 
 SovXela to Christ was to be exhibited 
 in action. The qualifying words ix 
 ^|/vxvs are prefixed by Syr., ^th.- 
 Platt, Arm., Chrys., and some recent 
 editors and expositors {Lachm., Alf., 
 De W., Harl., al.) to the participial 
 clause which follows, but more natu- 
 rally, and it would seem correctly , con- 
 nected by Clarom. (where iK ^vxvs 
 concludes the o-tIxos), Copt., ^th.- 
 Pol.,Syr.-Phil.,Auth.(2'isc?i.,jro)-(foio., 
 Mey., al.), with the present participial 
 clause. Far from there being thus 
 any tautology (De W.), there is rather 
 a gentle climactic explanation of the 
 characteristics of the Sov\. Xp. ; he 
 does his work heartily, and besides 
 feels a sincere good-will to his mas- 
 ter : oomp. Col. iii. 23, ix ^vxv^ ipyd- 
 feffSe, which, though claimed by De 
 W. as supporting the other punctua- 
 tion, is surely more in favour of that 
 of the text. On the varied uses of 
 ^uxij (here in ref. to the inner prin- 
 oipleof action), seeDelitzsoh,i's2/c7ioI. 
 IV. 6, p. 159 sq. 
 
 7. |Ji6T evvoCos 8o«X.] 'with good 
 will doing service;' further specifica- 
 tion of the nature and character of the 
 service; /ier' euVotos implying not 
 merely 'lubenti animo' (Grinf. N. T. 
 Ed. Hell.), but 'cum benignitate,' 
 Clarom., 'cum oogitationebon(l,'Copt., 
 in reference to the well-disposed ('well- 
 affected,' Eadie) mind with which the 
 service was to be performed. Eaphel 
 (06s. Vol. n. p. 489) very appositely 
 cites Xen. (Econ. xii. 5, wkovv eivoiav 
 irpoTov, (<l>riv iyd, Seijirei aVTov [tov 
 
 inirpoTTov] ^X'^^^ ^^^ '^^^ "^^^^ ^^"^^ ^^ 
 IjAWoi apKiauv avrl cov wapiiv' avev 
 yip eivola! tI 80e\os; k.t.\. This 
 quotation certainly seems to confirm 
 the distinction made by Harl, (to 
 which Mey. objects), that while (k 
 'j'vxv^ seems to mark the relation of 
 the servant to his work, /ler' eiyolas 
 points to his relation to his master : so 
 also the author of the Constit. Apost. 
 IV. 22, eSvoiav ela^ep^TW irpbs tov 
 Seo-TroTijx, Vol. 1. p. 302 (ed. Cotel.) : 
 see exx. in Eisner, Obs. Vol. i. p. 
 228. The Atticists define etv. as 
 both airo rov /lel^ovos Trpos tov Aot- 
 Tova and vice versd, (v/iiveia as only 
 the former, see Thorn. Mag. p. 368 
 (ed. Jacobitz), and exx. in Wetst. in 
 loc. The omission of as before 
 
 TiJ Kvp. by Rec. only rests on the 
 authority of D'EKL; mss.; Theod., 
 al. 
 
 8. elSoTts] 'seeing ye Tinow;' con- 
 cluding participial member, giving the 
 encouraging reason ((rtfmSpa Oappeiv 
 irepl Tr/s d/ioi/3^s, Chrys.) why they 
 were to act with this honesty and dili- 
 gence. The imperatival translation, 
 ' atque scitote ' (Eaphel, Annot. Vol. 11. 
 p. 49 1 ), is not grammatically tenable 
 (comp. Winer, Gr. § 45. 6, p. 313), 
 and mars the logical connexion of the 
 clauses. The translation of participles, 
 it may be observed, must always be 
 modified by the context; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 45. 2, p. 307, but correct there 
 what cannot be termed otherwise than 
 the erroneous observation that such 
 participles admit of a translation by 
 means of relatives: the observation so 
 often illustrated in these commenta- 
 ries — that a participle without the 
 article can never be strictly translated 
 as a part, with the article — appears 
 to be of universal application; see 
 
VI. 7, 8, 9. 
 
 143 
 
 TTOJ?, elSorei on o eav ti e/tao-TOj ■jroijjo-p ayaQov, 8 
 TOVTO KOftlaerai irapa K-vplov, e'lre SovXog ei're (Xev6e- 
 poi. Kal 01 Kvpioi, TO. avTo, iroieiTe Trpoi avrovg, 9 
 
 8. t iav n JkocttoS iroi^crj;] So Tisc/i. with KL ; most mss. ; Syr. (both), 
 al.; Chrys. (3) [but twice avdp. for ix.], Theod. (adds TJ/iSv) Dam., Theoph., 
 CEcum. (Bee, Griesb., Scholz, Be W., Meyer). The easiest and therefore sus- 
 picious reading Idiv Troiijo-. IxacrTos is found in N (S* 8 iav) : while of the invert- 
 ed readings, ?k. lav ti Trot, is supported by B : and Ik. 8 ii.v iroi. by good exter- 
 nal authority, viz. AE(DiFG dp); many mss.; Vulg., Clarom., al.; Bas., al. 
 {Lachm., BUck., Wordsw.); stiU the internal arguments derived from para- 
 diplomatic (see Pref. to Gal. p. xxiv. , ed. 4) considerations are so decided that 
 we seem authorized in retaining the reading of Tisch. The example is in- 
 Btructive, as it would seem the numerous variations can aU be referred either to 
 (a) correction, or (6) error in transcription, or both united. For example, 
 (a) the tmesis seems to have suggested a correction S ti im, and then, on 
 account of the juxtaposition of Srt S n, the further correction of AB, al. Again 
 it is (6) not improbable that owing to homoeoteleuton, 8 iav ti was in some 
 mss. accidentally omitted, and that the unintelligible reading on Skoo-t-os woi'^a-ri 
 then received various emendations : thus we may account for the insertion 
 of idv Tis (i. 27. 31), idi> Tts {62. 179), idv ti (46. 115), o ^o;' (23. 47), between 
 07-4 and Ik.; all which readings have this value, that they attest the position 
 of iKaffT, adopted in the text. 
 
 esp. Donalds. Gr. § 490. 
 fi sdv Ti K.T.X.] ' whatsoever good thing 
 each man shall have done;' iiv coa- 
 lescing with the relative and being in 
 such connexions used simply for av 
 both by writers in the N. T., LXX, 
 and late Greek generally. In the pas- 
 sages collected by Vigor {Idiom, viii. 
 6) from classical authors av clearly 
 must be written throughout; see 
 Herm. in loc. and Winer, Gr. § 42. 6. 
 obs. p. 277. The relative is separated 
 from n by a not uncommon 'tmesis,' 
 instances of which are cited by Meyer, 
 e.g. Plato, Legg. ix. 864 e, t)!/ av Tiva 
 KaTaPa<lni- [Lysias] Polystr. p. 160, 
 OS dv TIS v/ias cB ToiJ, — hut here some 
 edd. read otoj'. The form koiXieiTai 
 [Bee. with D^EELN*; most toss.; 
 Bas., Chrys., Theod.] is rightly re- 
 jected both on preponderant external 
 authority, and as derived from Col. I, c. 
 The ToO [Bee. with KL ; mss.] is also 
 rightly omitted before Kvplov. 
 
 TOUTO KO|i. Trapi KvpCov] 'this shall 
 he receive back from the hard Christ ;' 
 ' this, — and folly this,' expressed more 
 at length in Col. iii. 24, 25. The 'ap- 
 propriative' middle KoiilfeaBai (see 
 esp. Donalds. Gr. § 432 66, and § 434, 
 p. 450) refers to the receiving back 
 again as it were of a deposit; so that 
 in Ko/MeiTai 8 ■^dlKrjrev, Col. I. c. (oomp. 
 2 Cor. V. 10) there is no brachylogy; 
 see Wiuer, Gr. § 66. i. b, p. 547, and 
 compare notesin loc. The tense seems 
 obviously to refer to the day of final 
 retribution; iTreidrj eUos iari ttoXXoiJs 
 TcUv deffToTwv fi-rj dfiei^etrdat Trjs evvoiat 
 Toh SoiXois, ?K«i. aurois VTrKXXvciTai, Trjv 
 li/ioijS^i', CEcum. tin 
 
 SouXos efTt «\.] ' whether he be bond- 
 slave or free;' whatever be his social 
 condition here, the future will only 
 regard his moral state; ii-erk rr/v iv- 
 reddev ^KSr)fdav [^Set^e//] ovk ^Tt 5ov- 
 Xefas Sia^opiw, Theod. 
 
 g. KoV dt Kvpioi] 'And ye masters;' 
 
144 
 
 nP02 E*E2I0Y2. 
 
 avievTes r^v aireCK^v, eiSore} on Kai avToov /cat vfiwi' 
 6 Kvpios e(TTiv ev ovoavoii Kai irpoaroowoKrifxi^La ovk 
 ea-Tiv "Trap' avT(p» 
 
 ,„ rn^^ >>« " a ' V" ' Pu' on ^^^ panoply 
 
 lO lo AOiirOV evOVVafJLOVCrVe ev jS.Vpllp of God; arm your- 
 
 selves against your 
 spiritual foes with all the defensive portions of Christian ar- 
 mour, and the sword of the Spirit. Pray that we may be bold. 
 
 corresponding duties of masters simi- 
 larly enunciated positively and nega- 
 tively (awfrres T'fiv av.), concluding 
 with a similar participial clause ex- 
 pressing the motive. The negative 
 statement of the duty is omitted in 
 the parallel passage Col. iv. i . On the 
 use of Kol, see notes on ver. 4. 
 rd aird iroKiTt irpAs oiJt.] 'do the 
 same things towards them;' 'evince in 
 action the same principles and feelings 
 towards them ; preserve the jus ana- 
 logum (Calv.) in your relations to 
 them. ' It does not seem necessary to 
 restrict rh aiSrA to ner' evuotas 8ou- 
 Xtiiav (Chrys.), or to iroieiv rh 6i\. 
 K.T.X. (Eiick.), or on the other hand, 
 to extend it to 4v av\., as well as to 
 the other details (Orig. Cat.; comp. 
 Eadie) ; the reference being rather to 
 the general expression of feeling, the 
 (tvoia which was to mark all their 
 actions, iva ewotKuii — BepaTrevfftairi, 
 Theod., or, as more correctly modil3ed 
 by Stier, — Kvpicmuin; 'ca qusB bene- 
 volentia sunt compensate,' Beng. 
 dvievTts Ti)v dirtiXijv] 'giving up your 
 threatening,' ' the too habitual threat- 
 ening,' ' quemadmodum vulgus domi- 
 norum solet,' Erasm. Paraphr. (cited 
 by Meyer): explanatory participial 
 clause (De W., here wholly mis-cited 
 by Eadie), specifying a course of ac- 
 tion, or rather of non-action, in which 
 the feeling was to be particularly ex- 
 hibited. As oTreiXij expresses, by the 
 nature of the case, a certain and single 
 course of action, the article doss not 
 appear to be used, as with ddiKla, 
 aKoXaffla, al., to specify the particular 
 acts (Middleton, Art. v. i, i), but to 
 
 hint at the common occurrence of 
 oTreiXj), see ib. v. I. 4. It is thus not 
 necessary to modify the meaning of 
 air. ('hardness of heart,' Olsh.): St 
 Paul singles out the prevailing vice 
 and most customary exhibition of bad 
 feeling on the part of the master, and 
 in forbidding this naturally includes 
 every similar form of harshness. 
 cIS6t($ oTi K.T.X.] 'seeing ye know 
 that both their and your master is in 
 heaven;' causal participial member 
 exactly similar to that in ver. 8 ; see 
 notes in loc. Ree. reads koX iii.Qv 
 avruv with K; al. ; Syr. The text 
 is adopted by Lachm., Tisch. , and long 
 since by Simon CoUuEeus (ed. N.T. 
 1534) with ABD'N' (iavT.); mss.; 
 Vulg., Goth., Copt., al. ; Clem., al. 
 [Kai vpi.. Kai OUT. is given by LN* 
 (eavT.); 6 mss.; al.], — bat designated 
 by Mill, Prolegovi, p. 115, as 'argu- 
 tins quam verius.' This is not a 
 judicious criticism, for the probability 
 of an omission of koI inwv, owing to 
 homoeoteleuton, is far from small, and 
 seems very satisfactorily to account 
 for the various readings; see Meyer 
 in loc. (Grit. Notes), p. 239. 
 'irpo(r(inro\i))i.i)rCa] 'respect of persons;' 
 'persouarumacceptio,'Yulg.,Clarom., 
 'vilja-hatjjei,' Goth.: on the meaning 
 of this word, see notes on Gal. ii. 6, 
 and on the orthography, Tisch. Pro- 
 legom. p. xlvii. 
 
 10. To Xoiirfv] 'Finally,' 'as to 
 what remains for you to do ;' neri, to 
 dtard^at, <ptjfft, ri eUora tovto olko- 
 \ov9ov Kai vTToXoirror, CEcum. : 'for- 
 mula ooncludendi [see Chrys.] et ut ad 
 magnam rem excitandi,' Beng.; see f 
 
VI. 
 
 145 
 
 Kai ev Tt5 Kparei t^S itr)(voi avToS, evSv(Ta<r9e Trjv 1 1 
 iravoirXiav tov QeoO, ttjOoj to Svvaa-Qai vfiai (rrrivai 
 
 Cor. xiii. ii, PMl. iii. i (see notes), 
 iv. 8, 2 Thess. iii i. Ou the distinc- 
 tion between tA Xonriv and toC XoittoC 
 [adopted here by Lachm. with ABNi; 
 3 mss. ; Cyr., Dam., — evidence ob- 
 viously insufSoient], see notes on Gal. 
 vi. 17; and between it and t4 /iAXox 
 (merely 'in posterum') the brief dis- 
 tinctions of Tittmanu, Synon. p. 175. 
 The insertion of dSeX^of fwv before 
 ej-Su;-. [Rec, Wordsw. with KLN* (FG, 
 al. , Vulg. , omit /tow) ; most mss. ; Syr., 
 Copt , aL ; Theod., al.] has the further 
 support of A, which adds dSeX0ol after 
 ^"d., — but is appy. rightly rejected by 
 Laclim., Tisch., al. on good external 
 authority [BDEN'; Clarom., Sang., 
 Goth., ^th. (both), Arm.; Cyr., al.], 
 and as appy. alien to the style of an 
 Epistle in which the readers do not 
 elsewhere appear so addressed; see 
 Olsh. and Alf. iii he. 
 cvSwa|i,ovo-6e] 'be strengthened; ' 
 Q-^-»-*J^I [corroboremini] Syr., — 
 
 less definitely, 'be strong,' Auth.; not 
 middle, 'corroborate vos,' Pise,, but 
 (as always in the N. T.) passive; 
 comp. Acts ix. 22, Eom, iv. 20, 2 
 Tim. ii. i, Hebr. xi. 34, and see Fritz. 
 Rom. I. c. Vol. I. p. 245. The active 
 occurs in Phil. iv. 13, r Tim. i. 12, 2 
 Tim. iv. 17, in each case in reference 
 to Christ. The simple form [here 
 adopted by B ; 17; Orig. Cat.'\ is only 
 found in Col. i. 11, and Heb. xi. 34 
 [AD^Ni], see Lobeck, Phryn. p. 605. 
 KaV. kv T$ K.T.X.] 'and in the power of 
 His might;' not an iv dtd, SvoTv, Beng., 
 but with a preservation of the proper 
 sense of each substantive, on which 
 comp. notes ch. i. 19. This appended 
 clause (koI) serves to explain and 
 specify the principle in which our 
 strength was to be sought for, and 
 
 in which it dwelt ; comp. 2 Cor. xii. 
 9, tva iinnKiivdxrTd iir' i/ii ij Siva/us toO 
 Xpiarov. Ou the familiar iv Kvpl(ff 
 ('in the Lord,' our only element of 
 spiritual life), see notes ch. iv. i. 
 
 II. IvSvO-. TTJV TTovoirXCov] 'Put 
 on the whole armour, the panoply.' 
 The emphasis rests on this latter word 
 (Mey.), as the repetition in ver. 13 stiU 
 more clearly shows, not on ro!^ QeoO 
 (Harl.): 'signifioat debere nos omni 
 exparte instructos esse, ne quid nobis 
 desit,' Calv.; the term here clearly 
 denoting not merely the ' armatura,' 
 Vulg., but the 'universa armatura,' 
 Beza, the armour in all its parts, of- 
 fensive and defensive ; 'omnia armo- 
 rum genera, quibus totum militia cor- 
 pus tegitur,' Baphel, Annot. Vol. 11. 
 491 ; see Judith xiv. 3, iravoir\las, 
 compared with ver. ■.:, ri, trKeihi t& 
 iroXefUKo,, and comp. iravreKiis irav- 
 oTrXIa, Plato, Legg. vn. 796 e. It 
 has been doubted whether St Paul is 
 here aUuding to the armour of the 
 Hebrew or the Boman soldier; the 
 latter is most probable, but both were 
 substantially the same: seeesp.Polyb. 
 Hist. VI. 23, a good Art. in Kitto, 
 Cyclop. ('Arms, Armour'), and Winer, 
 RWB. Alt. 'Waffen,' Vol. 11. p. 667. 
 For a sermon on this text see Latimer, 
 Serm. in. p. 23 (Lend. 1858). 
 Tov@£ov] 'of God;' 'quseaDeodonan- 
 tur,'Zanch.; gen. of the source, origin, 
 whence the arms came (Hartung, 
 Casus, p. 23, notes on i Thess. i. 6), 
 well expressed by Theod. oVairic 5ia- 
 vi/iei TTiv /3o(7iXi(ff)<' vavTcvxlav. 
 irpAs TO Svvao-Sai k.t.\.] 'in order 
 that ye may he able to stand against;' 
 object and purpose contemplated in 
 the equipment ; see notes on ch. iii. 4, 
 iv. 12. The verb aTTJfv(u, as Baphel 
 (Annot, Vol. 11. p. 493) shows, is a 
 L 
 
14G 
 
 nPOS E*E2IOY2. 
 
 12 "TTpos ray fxeOoSeias tov Stal36\oV on ovic 'iariv rifAiv 
 Tj iraXri Tvpos ai/ma Koi crapKa, aXKa Trpoi Taj ajOj^ay, 
 
 military expression, 'to stand one's 
 ground,' opp. to ipevyav ; see esp. 
 Kypke, 06s. Vol. ii. p. 301. The 
 second irpis in tUs connexion has 
 thus the meaning 'adversus' (Vulg., 
 Clarom.), with the implied notion of 
 hostility ('contra'), which is other- 
 wise less usual, unless it is involved 
 in the verb; see Winer, Gr. § 49. h, 
 p. 361 note. Tcis luSoSeCas 
 
 Toi! Siap.] 'the wiles of the Devil,' — 
 or perhaps, as more in harmony with 
 the context, ' the stratagems ' (Eadie ; 
 fK6oSev(ral i<rn ri airaTij<raL Kal Slot 
 li-qxavris iXeXv Chiys.); the plural 
 denoting the various concrete forms 
 of the abstract singular; see notes 
 ore Gal. V. 20. On the form /leSoSlas, 
 which is here very strongly supported 
 [ABiDiEFGKLK ; many mss.], see 
 notes on ch. iv. 14. The only reason 
 for not accepting it is that in cases of 
 apparent itacism caution is always re- 
 quired in estimating the value of exter- 
 nal evidence. The number of those in 
 N, in this Ep. alone, is very great. 
 
 12. oTi ovK imv ijiitv T] ttoXti] 
 ' because our struggle is not,' ' the 
 struggle in which we are engaged:' 
 reason for the special mention of the 
 lie0oSetas tov dia^iXov, ver. 11. It is 
 commonly asserted that the metaphor 
 is not here fully sustained, on the 
 ground that irdXi] {irdWu) is properly 
 'lucta;' see Plato, ic^jr. vii. 796 a. 
 As however we find waKrj dopos (Eur. 
 HeracU 160), irdXtjii fii^avres \6yxv^ 
 (Lye. Cassand. 1358), it is clear such 
 a usage as the present can be justified: 
 indeed it is not unlikely that the word 
 (an air. \ey6/i. in N. T. , not found in 
 LXX) was designedly adopted to con- 
 vey the idea of the personal, individu- 
 alizing, nature of the encounter. 
 The reading i/up adopted by Lachm. 
 
 is well supported [BD^EG; 3 mss.; 
 Clarom., Sang., Aug., Boem., Syr., 
 Goth., al.; Lucif., Ambrst.], but appy. 
 less probable than ■^/uv [AD'EKLN; 
 nearly all mss.; Vulg., Copt., Syr.- 
 Phil.,al.; Clem., Orig., al.], for which 
 it might have been easily substituted 
 as a more individualizing address, 
 irpos at|j,a Kal irdpKa] 'against flesh 
 and blood,' mere feeble man; oi trpbs 
 roi/t Tvxovrai ?x°/^^'' ipri<nv, CL/Si irpos 
 iv$pit>Tovs bfiouyiraBeU tiiuv koX lao- 
 dvvdfwvs' Theoph. : comp. Polysenus, 
 Strateg. 111. 11, fi'q lis jroXe/tfais av/i- 
 pdWovTcs AW ajiBpiiiroiS aTp,a Kal 
 trdpKa ?x<»"''' [tli6 exhortation of Cha- 
 brias to his soldiers], and see notes ore 
 Gal. i. 16, where the formula is more 
 fully explained. aXXa] There 
 
 is here no ground for translating ote. . 
 oXXd 'non tam...quam;' comp. Glass, 
 Philolog. i. 5. 22, Vol. 1. p. 420 sq. 
 (ed. Dathe). The negation and affir 
 matiou are both absolute ; ' Tiore con 
 tra homines [' vasa sunt, alius utitur,' 
 August.], sedcontradsemones,' Cornel. 
 a Lap.; see esp. "Winer, Gr. § 55. 8, 
 p. 439, where this formula is very 
 satisfactorily discussed, and comp, 
 Eiihner on Xenoph. Mem. i. 6. 2 
 and notes on 1 Thess. iv. 8. In those 
 exx. where the negation cannot from 
 the nature of the ease be considered 
 completely absolute, it will be ob- 
 served, as Winer ably shows, that the 
 negation has designedly a rhetorical 
 colouring, which in a faithful and 
 forcible translation ought always to 
 be preserved without any toning down; 
 see Fritz. Mark, Excurs. 11. p. 773 sq., 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. n. p. g, 10. 
 irpis rds apx^s] 'against tht princi- 
 palities;' see esp. notes on oh. i. 21, 
 and observe that the same terms which 
 are there used to denote the classes 
 
VI. 12. 147 
 
 ■Jrpoi ras e^ovcrlas, irpos roiii KoarfAOKparopai tow ctko- 
 Tovs rovTov, irpoi ra irveu/j.artKa T?y vovijplai ev tois 
 
 and orders of good, are here similarly 
 applied to evil angels and spirits; 
 comp. Usteri, Lehrb. u. 2. b, p. 335. 
 Tois Koo-piOKpdTopas k.t.X.] 'the 
 world-rulers of this darkness;' those 
 who extend their world-wide sway over 
 the present (comp. ch. ii. i) spiritual 
 and moral darkness; voiov o-kotovs; 
 apa Trjs vvktos [oomp. Wetst.]; oida- 
 /tSs, dXKi, T^s irovtiplav Chrys., see 
 ch. V. 8. Meyer rightly maintains 
 (against Harless) the full meaning of 
 Koa-fioKp., as not merely ' rulers ' ('mag- 
 nates,' ^th.), ' fairwuhabandans,' 
 Goth., but 'rulers over the world,' 
 munditenentes, Tertull. {Marc. v. 18), 
 KoV/iios preserving its natural and pro- 
 per force. So even in the second of 
 the three exx. cited by Schoettg. Hor. 
 Hebr. Vol. i. p. 790, out of Eab- 
 binical writers ('qui vooem hanc 
 ^1t3^p1Dt1p civitate su^ donaruut'), 
 which Harl.here adduces, — 'Abraham 
 persecutus est quatuor t'lBlplDtlp, 
 Bc. reges,' — the word appears used 
 designedly with a rhetorical force : ex. 
 3 is perfectly distinct. Further exx. 
 from later writers are cited by Eisner, 
 Obs. Vol. i. p. 319. The dogmatical 
 meaning ig correctly explained by the 
 Greek commentators : the evil spirits 
 exercise dominion over the mir/tos, not 
 in its mere material nature (ou'xJ t^s 
 Krlffeus Kparovrrres, Theoph.), but in 
 its ethical and perhaps intellectual 
 character and relations (tas KaraKpa- 
 rouvrei rat/ ret, KocrfitKO. tppoyovvrujf, 
 (Ecum.), the depravation of which is 
 expressed by roO ax. tovtov: see 
 John xvi. ir, 6 dpx<^P rov k, tqvtov: 
 I John V. 19, 6 K. S\os h rif Hovqpt} 
 [see notes, ver. 1 6] /ceiTai : 2 Cor. iv. 
 4, b Geos Tou alSivos tovtov : comp. 
 John xiv. 30. On the meanings of 
 Koff/ios, see Bauer, de Regno Divine, 
 
 III. 2, 3 (Comment. Theol. Vol. 11. p. 
 144, 154), and comp. notes on GaZ. iv. 
 3. The insertion of tov alums before 
 Totlrov [Rec. with DSEKLN* ('sed 
 rursus abstersit'); majority of mss.; 
 Syr. -Phil, with an ast.; Orig., Chrys., 
 Theod., al.] seems clearly explanatory, 
 and is rightly rejected by nearly all 
 modern editors. ra Trveujio- 
 
 TiKd Trjs TTOvTipCas] ' thespiritual hosts, 
 communities, of wickedness,' sa. charac- 
 terized by essential irotiripla, gen. of 
 ' the characteristic quality' (Scheuerl. 
 Synt. § 16. 3, p. 115, Winer, Gr. 
 § 34- 3' ^1 P- 211); iireiSij ydp elai Kal 
 oi a77eXoi wvev/iaTa Trpoff^dTjKG ttjs 
 irovripla.r Theoph., comp. CEcum. in 
 loc. Td wveviMTiKa are not however 
 merely to, irvaip.ara (Elsn. i, comp. 
 Syr., iEth.), but, in accordance with 
 the force of the collective neut. adject. 
 (Bern. Sijnt. vr. 2, p. 326, Jelf, Gr. 
 § 436. i. 5), denote the bands, hosts, 
 or confraternities of e vU spirits : Winer 
 and Meyer aptly cite to, Xya-rpiKd 
 (' robber-hordes'), Polyffin. Strateg. v. 
 14. I [to Sov\a, TO alxfidXara, cited 
 by Mey. after Bernhardy, are not fully 
 appropriate; see Lobeok, Fhryn. p. 
 378]; comp. TO, Saipavia, and see esp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 34. 3. b. obs. 3, p. 213. 
 The gloss of Auth. (from Tynd.) 
 ' spiritual wickedness ' does not seem 
 tenable, for if ra TvevfrnTiicd be taken 
 as the abstract neuter (so perhaps 
 Copt., — which adopts the singular 
 irveviMTiKov) expressive of the proper- 
 ties or attributes (the ' dynamic neut. 
 adj.' of Kriiger, Sprachl. § 43. 4. 27; 
 comp. Stier), the meaning must be, 
 not 'spiiitalesmalignitateSj'Beza, but 
 ' spiritualia nequitia,' Vulg., Clarom. 
 (oomp. Goth.), i.e. 'spiritualelements, 
 properties, of wickedness' (see Jelf, 
 Gr. § 436. obs. 2), — an abstract mean- 
 
 L 2 
 
148 
 
 npos Ea>ESioYS. 
 
 13 eirovpavlons. Sia rovro ai/aXa/Sere r^jv iravowXtav tou 
 QeoO, tVa SvvtjO^Te avTiarnvai ev tJ ^f^epa tTj irovripa 
 
 ing whioli obviously does not harmo- 
 nize -with tlie context ; see Meyer in 
 loc. The concrete interpretation, on 
 the other hand, is grammatically cor- 
 rect, and far from unsuitable after the 
 definite rois KoaiioKpiTopas. 
 ev Tots lirovpovCois] 'in the heavenly 
 regions,' 'in the sky or air;' Dobree, 
 Adv. Vol. I. p. 574: see ch. i. lo, ii. 
 6. Here again we have at least three 
 interpretations: (a) that of Chrys. and 
 the Greek eonmaentators, who give to. 
 iTTovp. an ethical reference, 'heavenly 
 blessings;' (6) that of Euok., Matth., 
 Eadie, al., who refer the expression to 
 the scene, the locality of the combat, 
 'the celestial spots occupied by the 
 church ;' (c) the ancient interpr. (see 
 Jer. in loc. ; comp. Tertull. Marc. v. 
 18, where however the application is 
 too limited), according to which iv 
 ToTs iir. is to be joined with ra vv. t?s 
 jrov. as specifying the abode or rather 
 haunt of the to Tvev/xar. ; ' ciui infra 
 caBlum,' Mth. (both). Of these (o) is 
 opposed to the previous local interpre- 
 tations of the words, and involves an 
 explan. of iy { = iTr4p, Chrys., or TrcpJ, 
 Theod.) wholly untenable; (6) seems 
 vague and not fully intelligible ; (c) on 
 the contraryis both grammatically ad- 
 missible (as the clause thus presents a 
 single conception, 'supernal spirits of 
 evil,' see notes ou ch. i. 18) and exe- 
 getioally satisfactory. The haunt of 
 the evil spirits was indirectly specified 
 in ch. ii. » as being in the regions tou 
 dipos; here the latent opposition, — 
 al/ia Kal trdp^ on earth, and to irvevft. 
 in supernal regions,— suggests a word 
 of greater antithetical force, which 
 still can include the same lexical 
 meaning; comp. Matth. vi. 26, to 
 vereim tou ovpavov. As in ch. ii. 2 
 there was no reason for limiting the 
 
 term to the mere physical atmosphere, 
 so here stiU less need we adopt any 
 more precise specification of locality; 
 see notes in loc. , and comp. generally 
 Hofm. Schriftb. Vol. i. p. 401 sq. 
 The repetition of wpos before each of 
 the substantives is somewhat of a 
 rhetorical nature, designed to give 
 emphasis to the enumeration; see 
 Winer, Gr. % 50. 7. obs. p. 374. 
 
 13. Sid TouTo] 'On this account,' 
 'wherefore:' since we have such pow- 
 erful adversaries to contend with; 
 iweiB^ <prj<n xoXcttoI ol ixBpol' CEcum. 
 dvoXdpere] 'assume,' 'take up,' not 
 necessarily ' to the field of battle,' 
 Conyb., but with simple local refer- 
 ence, as opposed to KaraTldcaBai ; 
 oraKa/ip. to iirXa k.t.X. being the 
 technical expression: see Deut. i. 41, 
 Jer. xlvi. (xxvi.) 3, Judith xiv. 3, 2 
 Mace. X. 27, xi. 7, and exx. in Kypke, 
 Obs. Vol. II. p. 302, Eisner, 06s. Vol. 
 I. p. 231, and Wetst. in loc. 
 iv TQ i^ii^pfi T^ irovnp^] ' in the evil 
 day — of violent temptation,' Fell, 
 Coco.: Tiiiipav itovripav Tr\v rrjs irapa- 
 rd^eus ■qpUptw KoXei, ojrd tou ivep- 
 yoSvTos ouTj Siap6\ov to 6i'oiia ndei- 
 Ktis- Theod.; Schoettgen compares 
 nV"l nyB*! ' in hora mala, quando 
 periculum nobis imminet,' Hor. Hebr. 
 Vol. I. p. 793. The use of ■^pipa 
 rather than aliiy (Gal. i. 4) is opposed 
 to the interpr. of Chrys., (Ecum., 
 Theoph., Tov irapovra §lov iptial, and 
 the foregoing earnest tone of exhorta- 
 tion to the idea that any consolation 
 (soil. TO /Spax* i5i)Ka<re, Theoph., 
 comp. Chrys.) was implied in the use 
 of ripApa. Still more untenable is the 
 view of Meyer, that St Paul is here 
 specifying the day when the last great 
 Satanic outbreak was to take place 
 (comp. notes on Gal, i. 4) ; the Apo- 
 
VI. 13, 14- 
 
 149 
 
 Ka\ airavra KaTepyaa-dfievoi (TTijvai. CT^Te ovv vepiya- 1 4 
 crd/ievoi t>]v 6(r(pvv vfiZvev aXijdela, Kai evSvcrafJiet'Oi rov 
 
 Btle has at heart what he knew was 
 much more present and more con- 
 stantly impendmg ; 'helium est per- 
 petuum; pugna alio die minus, alio 
 die magis fervet;' Beng. 
 oiravTa KaTcp7a<rd|i.Evoi] ' having ac- 
 complished, fully done, all,' not merely 
 in preparing for the fight (Beng.), 
 but, as arrjuai ( 'to stand one's ground') 
 obviously suggests, in and appertain- 
 ing to the fight; all things that the 
 exigencies of the conflict required. 
 The special interpr. of CEoum. (comp. 
 Chrys.) Karefyyaa; = KarawoXefi'^a-avTei, 
 i.e. ' having overcome aU,' Auth. Marg. 
 (comp. Ezek. xxxiv. 4, 3 Esdr. iv. 4), 
 though adopted by Harl., is very doubt- 
 ful; for in the first place, the masc. 
 would have seemed more natural than 
 the neut. travra (Est., contr. Do W.) ; 
 and secondly, though Karepya^. occurs 
 20 times in St Paul's Epp., it is only 
 in one of two senses, either perficere 
 ('notat rem arduam,' Fritz.), as here, 
 Eom. vii. 18, Phil. ii. 12, al., or per- 
 petrare ('de rebus quse fiunt non ho- 
 neste'),Eom. i. 27,ii.9, al.:see Fritz. 
 Rom. ii. 9, Vol. i. p. 107, and the nu- 
 merous exx. cited by Eaphel, Annot. 
 Vol. ir. p. 495 sq. The concluding 
 (TTTJpat is then not ' stare tanquam tri- 
 umphatores' (Zanch. ap. Pol. Syn., 
 comp. even Meyer), but as in ver. ii, 
 ' to stand firm ' (the battle is life-long) , 
 'ut non cadatis aut loco cedere coga- 
 mini;' Est. 
 
 14. OTTJxe oiv] 'Stand then,' not 
 as in ver. 13, in the fight, but, as the 
 context obviously requires, ready for 
 the fight; ' kampfEertig,' De Wette. 
 The several portions of the iravowXia 
 are then specified in regular order; 
 Tapa0apff^va5 a&roiis \otirbv airois Kal 
 KoeoTXl^ef Chrys. irspijao-. 
 
 Ti^v oo-<|>iv v|j..] ' having girt your loins 
 
 about;' comp. Isaiah xi. 5, larai St- 
 KCLLoaivii i^fffi^vos T^v dff^iiy avrov, 
 Kal a\r]8et<i, etkiifjiivos rets vXcvpis. The 
 remark of Holz. , that the aorists are 
 improperly used forpresents,is wholly 
 mistaken ; the different acts specified 
 by the participles were all completed 
 before the soldier took up his position; 
 comp. notes on ch. iv. 8. It 
 
 may be observed that the girdle was 
 nomereornament(Harl.,oomp.Eadie), 
 but the first and most necessary part 
 of the equipment ; a ffTpanuiTris afw- 
 aros was, as Meyer observes, a very 
 'contradictio in adjecto.' Independ- 
 ently of serving to keep the armour in 
 its proper place, it appears also — ex- 
 cept in the Homeric age, when it 
 formed a part of the cuirass, and iu 
 later times, when ornamented 'baltei' 
 came into use (Smith, Diet, of Antiq. 
 Art. 'Balteus') — to have been com- 
 monly used to support the sword; see 
 plates in MonUauaon, L' Antiq. Expl, 
 Vol. IT. 1, p. igsq.ftaaiSuppl. Vol. rv. 
 p. 14 sq.. Smith, Die*. Art. 'Moua,'and 
 Winer, nWB. Art. 'Gfirtel,' Vol. i. 
 p. 448. fv d\ri9«Cij.] 'with 
 
 truth,' as the girdle which bound all 
 together, and served tomake the Chris- 
 tian soldier expedite and unencum- 
 bered for the fight ; ii> being instru- 
 mental, or perhaps rather semilocal, 
 with a ref. to the cincture and equip- 
 ment; comp. Psalm Ixv. 7, ire/jicfwo-- 
 li4vos iv Swajrelf, and see Green, 
 Gramm. p. 289. It has been doubted 
 (see CEoum. ire loc.) whether by dX^fcia 
 ismeantwhat is termed o6;ecti'yc truth 
 [iXriSeia Soyi).&Toiv, (Eoum. i), i.e.' the 
 orthodox profession of the Gospel' 
 (Hamm. on Luke xii. 35), ovsubjective 
 truth : the latter is most probable, pro- 
 vided it is not unduly limited to mere 
 'truthfulness' (Chrys, i) or sincerity 
 
150 
 
 nP02 E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 1 5 dwpaKa Tijs SiKuioa-vviji, Koi vTroSria-a/xevoi rovs iroSas ev 
 
 1 6 eroifiaa-ia rod euayyeXiov riji elpnvnr eir\ iracriv avaXa- 
 
 (Calv., Olsh.). It must be taken in 
 its widest sense dXrJS. iv rif 'Ii;(roO, oh. 
 iv. 21, the inward practical acknow- 
 ledgment of the truth as it is in Him ; 
 SivQ dk lis Tpbs ToV Xp. vorjiraL, rov 
 iPTitis d\ri9eiav CEoum. ; oomp. Eeuss, 
 Theol. Ghrit. iv. i6, Vol. ii. p. 169. 
 TTJs Si,Kaiocn!vt)s] '0/ righteousness ;' 
 gen. of apposition or identity; see 
 Winer, Gr. § 59. 8, p. 470, comp. 
 Seheuerl. Synt. § i^. i, p. 82 : so, simi- 
 larly in regard of sentiment, Isaiah lix. 
 1 7, Kol ipcSvixaTo SiKouoffivrip us Biipaxa' 
 Wisd. V. 19, ivSmerai Buipaxa Si/caio- 
 aivriv. This SifcatoffiJ)'?; is not 'righte- 
 ousness 'in its deeper scriptural sense, 
 Eoil.byfaithin Christ (Harl.), as vlaris 
 is mentioned independently in ver. 1 6, 
 but rather Christian moral rectitude 
 (Mey., Olsh., XJsteri, Lehrb. 11. i. 2, 
 p. 190 ; t6v KaBoKiKov koX iviperov piov, 
 Chrys.), or, more correctly speaking, 
 the righteousness which is the result 
 of the renovation of the heart by the 
 Holy Spirit; see Waterl. Eegen. Vol. 
 IV. p. 434. Eadie presses the article, 
 but without grammatical grounds; its 
 insertion is merely due to the common 
 principle of correlation; see Middl. 
 Art. III. I. 7, p. 36. 
 
 15. ■uiro8T)erd|i6voi Toiis iriSos] ' fta«- 
 ing shod your feet,' 'caloeati pedes,' 
 Vulg., Clarom. It does not seem ne- 
 cessary to refer this specially to the 
 Eomau 'oaUga' (Mey.; see Joseph. 
 Bell. Jud. VI. I. 8), as the reference to 
 the Eomau soldier, though probable, 
 is not certain: any strong military 
 sandal (Heb. )isp, Isaiah ix. 4, see 
 Gesen. Lex. s. v.) is perhaps all that is 
 implied; comp. Lydus, Synt. Sacr. iii. 
 ■i, p. 46 sq. Iv lT0i)i.a(rt^] ' with the 
 readiness;' not 'in praDparationem,' 
 Clarom., but ' in preoparatione,' Vulg. 
 (Amit.), Copt.; ii> being instrumental, 
 
 or semi-local, as in ver. 14. The some- 
 what peculiar form kroiixaala, used 
 principally in the LXX and eccl. 
 writers, denotes properly 'preparation' 
 in an active sense (Wisd. xiii. 12, 
 ^Toi/t. Tpo<pijs; Mart. Polyc. § 18, 
 dtTKifalv re xal ^roi/*.); then 'a state of 
 readiness,' whether outwardly consid- 
 ered (Joseph. Antiq. x. i. 2, tTnrovs els 
 iT01.11. irap^x^iv) or inwardly estimated 
 (Hippoor. de Dec. Hdbitu, Vol. 1. p. 
 74, ed. Kuhn; comp. Psalm x. 17, 
 iToifj.. KapSias, i.e. to i/ivapcuTKevov, 
 Chrys.) ; and thence by a conceivable 
 transition (esp. as ]^pri admits both 
 meanings, seeGesen.ieai.s.v.), 'some- 
 thing fixed, settled' (oomp. Prov. iv. 
 18 Theod., iToinaala ■}iiUpas=aTa8epb, 
 lj.eixrip.ppia), and further even 'a basis, 
 a foundation. ' Heb. jlDD (Dan. xi. 7 
 Theod., T^s filtv^ avTijs t^s iroipiaaias 
 ailroC* compare Ezra ii. 68, Psalm 
 Ixxxix. 15). This last meaning how- 
 ever ma?/ possibly have originated from 
 a misconception of the translator (see 
 Holzh. and Meyer in loc), but at any 
 rate is very inappropriate in this place. 
 There is then no reason to depart from 
 the more correct meaning, 'readiness,' 
 
 'preparedness' (m «-> .n ^ gy^.^ 
 
 'manvijja,' Goth.), not however dare 
 irolpovs etvai irpos to evayyiXiov 
 (Chrys.), but, as the context and me- 
 taphor suggest, ' ad militiam, impedi- 
 mentis omnibus soluti,' Calv. 
 Tov riaYy. rijs clpijvT|s] 'of the Gospel 
 of peace;' scU. caused by the evayy. 
 T^s elp. ; the first gen., eiayye\lov, 
 being that of the source or agent (see 
 notes on i Thess. i. 6, Scheuerl. Synt. 
 § 17, p. 126), the second, elprivris, that 
 of the purport and contents: compare 
 oh. i, 13, TO eiayyi\. t^s aarriplas, 
 where see notes, and Bernhardy, Synt. 
 
VL 15, 16, 17. 
 
 151 
 
 Ta jSe'Xi; tow •n-ovtjpov ra irewpwuiva a-^ea-at' Kai r>]V I J 
 
 III. 44, p. 161. The sum and sub- 
 stance of the Gospel was ■^ elf/iivq, 
 Peace, not with one another merely, 
 but with God (Est.), a peace that can 
 only be enjoyed and secured if we war 
 against His enemies: ox t$ Siap6\<f 
 ToKefiWfiev elpTjvevofiev vpos tov Qeov' 
 Chrys. On the different terms with 
 which iiayy. is associated in the N.T., 
 see Beuss, Thiol. Chrit. iv. 8, Vol. 11. 
 p. 81. 
 
 16. 6irl irao-iv] 'in addition to all;' 
 not, with local ref., 'super omnibus, 
 qusecunque induistis,' Beng. (comp. 
 Goth, 'ufar all'), nor, with ethical 
 ref., ' above all, ' Auth., — ^but simply in 
 ref. to the last accompaniment; comp. 
 Luke iii. 20, rpoffiSriKev xal toSto iirl 
 irSo-i, and see Winer, Gr. § 48. c, p. 
 350. Eadie cites Col. iii. 14, iirl iroo-i 
 TovTois, but neither this passage nor 
 Luke xvi. 26 are strictly similar, as 
 the addition of Toirois implies a re- 
 ference to what has preceded, while 
 ^Tri iroirty is general and unrestricted, 
 and more nearly approaches a ' for- 
 mula concludendi ;' seeHarl., and exx. 
 collected by Wetst. on Luke xvi. 26. 
 In both the force of iirl is the same, 
 'accession,' 'superadditionj' comp. 
 Donalds. Gi: § 483. aa. The 
 
 reading h> iraaiv, adopted by Lachm., 
 with BK; 10 msa. ; Clarom.; Vulg. 
 (appy.); Method., Greg.-Naz. ; al., 
 hasnotsufficienteztemalsupport, and 
 may have been a correction for the 
 ambiguous M. tov 6vpc6v] 
 
 'the shield,' 'scutum,' Vulg., Clarom. 
 The term flupeo's, as its derivation sug- 
 gests, is properly anything 'quod vi- 
 cem januce praestat ' (Homer, Od. ix. 
 240, 313, 340), thence in later writers 
 (see Lobeck, Fhryn. p. 366) a large 
 oblong or oval shield {old tis Ovrpa <pu- 
 \aTTb>v TO tru/ia' Theoph.), differing 
 
 both in form and dimensions from the 
 round and lighter dffjrls ('clypeus'): 
 see esp. Polyb. Hist. vi. 23. 2, comp. 
 Lips, de Milit. Bom. in, ■/, and exx. 
 in Kypke, Eisner, and Alberti in loc. 
 Harless doubts whether Bvpeoi was 
 intentionally used instead oiiffvls, and 
 cites the very similar passage, Wisd. 
 V. 20, XiJ^erat dff'iriSa...6(7i6T7jTa: it 
 is not however improbable that in the 
 time of St Paul (perhaps 150 years 
 later) the distiactionhad become more 
 commonly recognized; see Plutarch, 
 Flamin. § 12. ttjs irCoTecos] 
 
 'of faith;' appositional gen. similar 
 to TTJs diKai.offvi'Tjs, ver. 14. 
 iv & 8«viio-€o-8€] 'with which ye will be 
 able;' scU. as protected by and under 
 cover of which (comp. ver. 16), or, with 
 astill more definite instrumental force 
 (Goth., Aim.), as specifying the de- 
 fensive implement by which the ex- 
 tinction of the fire-tipt darts wiU be 
 facilitated and effected ; ri irlans o5» 
 ToSra apivvvaiv Theoph. The future 
 must not be unduly pressed (Mey.) ; 
 it points simply and generally to the 
 time of the contest, whenever that 
 might be: the future is only 'a con- 
 ditionedpresent ;' seeBemhardy, Synt. 
 X. 5, p. 377. Toii irovTipoii] 
 
 ' the wicked One;' 'nequissimi,' Vulg., 
 Clarom. ; not ' evil,' to irovripbv, but in 
 accordance with the individualizing 
 and personal nature of the conflict 
 which the context so forcibly depicts, 
 — the Devil ; nbvov iKeivot Trovrjpos kot' 
 HoXV" X^Yerai" Chrys. de Diab. 11. 
 Vol. II. p. 309 (ed. Ben. 1834), comp. 
 2 Thess. iii. 3 and notes, i John v. 1 8, 
 probably Matth. v. 37, John xvii. 15, 
 al., and see Suicer, Theaaur. s.v. Vol. 
 II. p. 807, and on the conflict gene- 
 rally, the instructive remarks of Mayer, 
 Hist. Diab. § 7, p. 681 sq.; comp. also 
 
152 
 
 nPOS E$E2I0Y2. 
 
 irepiKe^oKaiav rov o-aiTijplov Se^aade, kui r^v /ia'xat- 
 
 Eeuss, TMol. ChrSt. iv. ao, "Vol. ii. 
 p. 226 Bq. TttPS^il...Td 
 
 mirup.] ' the Jire-tipt, or fiery, darts;' 
 the addition of the epithet serving to 
 mark the fell nature of the attack, and 
 to warn the combatant; Tre-rr. 5^ out4 
 K^KXriKsv Sieyelpoiv Tois o-rpaTtuTa!, 
 Kal KiXevav drr^oXCs irepitppaTTcaBa.!.' 
 Theod. Allusion is here distinctly 
 made to the TvptpSpot. iXarol, arrows, 
 darts, de. tipt with some inflammable 
 substance, which were used both by 
 the Hebrews (Psalm vii. 14), Greeks 
 (Herod, vm. 52, Thucyd. n. 75, Ar- 
 rian, Alex. 11. 18), and Romans ('mal- 
 leoli, ' Cicerojjro Milone, 24 : ' falaricse,' 
 Livy XXI. 8, were much larger), in 
 Bieges,or,under certain circumstances, 
 against the enemy in the field; see 
 Vegetius, de Be Mil. it. 18, Winer, 
 HWB. Art. 'Bogen,' Vol. i. p. 190. 
 Any reference to 'poisoned' darts 
 (Hamm. , al. ) is not in accordance with 
 the meaning and tense of the part. 
 ireirvpaiiiva. It may be remarked that 
 the art. is not found in BD^FG, and 
 is rejected by Laehm, ; in which case 
 ireirvp. wiU become a 'tertiary' predi- 
 cate, and must be translated 'fire-tipt 
 as they are,' see esp. Donalds. Gr. 
 § 489 sc[., and comp. Winer, Gr. % 20. 
 I. obs. p. 122. It seems however much 
 more probable that the art. was omit- 
 ted by an oversight, than that the tran- 
 scriber felt any grammat. difficulty, 
 and sought to remedy it by insertion. 
 o-p^o-ai] 'to quench.' It seems too 
 much to say vriith Calv., in reference 
 to the metaphor, ' improprie loquitur.' 
 That the use of (r^iau was suggested 
 by TCTvp. is not improbable; as how- 
 ever it is certain that the larger shields, 
 whichfor lightness weremadeof wood, 
 were covered with hides {/ioa-xeiifi S4p- 
 /iaTi, Polyb. Hist. vi. 23. 3, Lips, de 
 Milit. III. 2) and similar materials 
 
 designed to prevent the full effect of 
 the ^Aij T€Tvp., the particular verb 
 cannot in any way be considered here 
 as inappropriate ; comp. Arrian, Alex. 
 n. 18. 
 
 17. KaV Tr[v K.T.X.] Meyer rightly 
 objects to the punctuation of Lachm. 
 and Tisch.: a comma, or perhaps 
 rather a colon (Wordsw.), is here far 
 more suitable than a period. We have 
 here only one of St Paul's rapid trans- 
 itions from the participial structure 
 to that of the finite verb ; see Col. i. 6, 
 and notes ch. i. 20. 8^a(r6e] 
 
 'receive,' as from Him who furnishes 
 the armour (ver. 13), and whose Spirit 
 puts in our hands the sword ; 'accipite, 
 oblatam a Domino,' Beng. The 
 
 verb is omitted by D^FG ; Clarom. ; 
 Cypr., TertuU.,al., and converted into 
 SiiaaBaL (but perhaps an itaoism) by 
 Matth. with AD3(E?)KL; mss.; Cypr. 
 (i), — ^but in neither case on sufficient 
 external evidence. toip 
 
 (rioTr|p£oii] 'of salvation;' gen. of ap- 
 position, as in ver. 14, 16. The use of 
 this abstract neuter is, with the ex- 
 ception of this place, confined to St 
 Luke (see Luke ii. 30, iii. 6, Acts xxviii. 
 2 8) , though sufficiently common in the 
 LXX; compare Isaiah Hx. 17, irepi- 
 Ketj). a-oirriptov, — a passage to which 
 its present occurrence may perhaps be 
 referred. There is no ground for sup- 
 posing that ToO auiT. is masculine 
 {'salutaris, i.e. Christij'Beng.), either 
 here or Acts I.e., nor can we say with 
 Mey. that to auTTipiov is 'any ideal 
 possession :' in i Thess. v. 8, the irepi- 
 mipaKaloL is the Attis (rwrriplas, in the 
 present case there is no such limita- 
 tion. Salvation in Christ, as Harl. 
 remarks, forms the subject of faith; 
 in faith (by grace, ch. ii. 5) it is appre- 
 hended, and becomes, in a certain 
 sense, even a present possession ; see 
 
VI. 1 8. 
 
 153 
 
 pav TOW TLpevfxaTOi, o icrriv prjfia Qeov. Sia wdo-J/y 1 8 
 "Trpoarevyri^ koL Se^arewi} -Trpoarev^ofievoi iv iravri KaipS ev 
 
 n 
 
 vevftart, Kat eis avTO aypvTrvovvTes ev iracrri irpoaKap- 
 
 notes, oh. ii. 8. toB 
 
 nvevfuiTos] 'of the Spirit;' so. given 
 by, supplied by the Spirit ; the gen. 
 of the source or origin, as in verse 13, 
 rriv iraiiinrX. toC GcoO. The gen. is 
 clearly not appositional ((Ecum. i, 
 Theoph. I, and even Harl., Olsh.), as 
 the explanatory olause would thus be 
 ■wholly out of place. Still less proba- 
 bly is it a gen. of quality, ^ /idxaipa 
 TTPiviuiTiK-fi (Chrys. i), or a simple gen. 
 of possession in reference to the ri/xoi- 
 priTiKii iuipyaa (Sever, ap. Cram. Gat.) 
 of the Spirit, both of which seem at 
 variance with the general tenor of the 
 passage, which represents the 'arma- 
 tura' as furnished to us by God. Thus 
 then it is from the Spirit that we re- 
 ceive the sword, that sword being the 
 Word of God, the Gospel (ver. 15), 
 which is the diva/us 6eou (Rom. i. 16, 
 I Cor. i. 18) to every one who be- 
 Ueveth; comp. Heb. iv. 12. 
 
 18. Bid irdcnis k. t. \.] 'with all 
 {every formof) prayerandsupplication 
 praying;' participial olause expressive 
 of the manner and accompaniments of 
 the action, dependent on the principal 
 imperative (rriJTe ovv, ver. 14 (Mey.), 
 not on the subordinate aor. imper. 
 S^iaaOe, which is only a variation of 
 the participial structure, and with 
 which the idea of duration expressed 
 in TTiio-Tjs and iravrl Kaip(f would not 
 be consistent. The seeming tautology 
 and an imaginary logical difficulty in 
 irpoffe&XJ^ffBai 5tct irdtrTjs Trpo<r, iv iravrl 
 Koipif have induced Mey. to disconnect 
 Sid, v&iTTis K.T.\. and irpoo'evxip'^voi. 
 This , though not inconsistent with the 
 use of Sm ('conditio in quS, looatus 
 aliquidfaoias,'Fritz.iJo7re.ii.27,Vol. I. 
 p. 138), is still neither necessary nor 
 
 satisfactory: Sii. ttoo-ijs k.t.\. simply 
 and correctly denotes the earnest, be- 
 cause varied, character of the prayer 
 (see Theoph.); iv iravrl xaipv the 
 constancy of it (^vSeXex^s, Theod., 
 comp. Luke xviii. i, i Thess. v. 17, 
 2 Thess. i. 11); (vllveipian{seeiidra,) 
 the holy sphere of it. Conyb. (comp. 
 Syr., but not ^th,, Syr.-Phil.) trans- 
 lates the part, as a simple imperat., 
 and makes ver. 18 the beginning of a 
 new paragraph; this however cannot 
 be justified; see Winer, Gr. § 45. 6, 
 p. 313. It has been doubted 
 
 whether there is here any exact dis- 
 tinction between irpoamxh (rl^SFl) 
 and5^i7ins(n3nn). Chrys. and Theod., 
 on I Tim. ii. i , explain irpoff. as atrti- 
 (Tis iyaBSiv (see Suioer, Thesaur. s. v. 
 i), SiTja. as inrhp &iraXKayrjs XvirijpQv 
 Uerela (so Grot., as &Trb toO Seovs, but 
 see 2 Cor. i. 11); comp. Orig. de Orat. 
 § 33, Vol. xvH. p. 292 (ed. Lomm.). 
 Alii alia. The most natural and ob- 
 vious distinction is that adopted by 
 nearly all recent commentators, viz. 
 that irpixrevxfi is a 'vocabulum sacrum' 
 (see Harl.) denoting 'pfayer' in gene- 
 ral, precatio; Sirj^is a 'vocabulum 
 commune' denoting a special charac- 
 ter or form of it, 'petition,' rogatio; 
 see Fritz. Ram. x. i. Vol. 11. p. 372, 
 Trench, Synon. Part 11. § i, and notes 
 on I Tim. ii. i. Iv ttovtI Katpu] 
 
 'in every season.' There is no necessity 
 to restrict this to 'every fitting season,' 
 Eadie: the mind of prayer (t6 ofu\eTv 
 tQ Qeifi, Theoph. on i Thess. v. 17) is 
 alluded to as much as the outward 
 act ; see Alf. ore Luke xviii. i. 
 iv nv««|iaTi] 'in the Spirit:' certainly 
 not the human spirit ('cum devoto 
 cordiseffeotu,' Est.), nor as in contrast 
 
154 
 
 EPOS E<|)E2I0Y2. 
 
 19 Tep^(rei /caJ Se^aet vep\ "Travriav tuv dytcov, Kat vvep 
 e/iov, 'Iva fJLOi So9^ Xoyoy ev avoi^ei toO crrofiaroi fiov iv 
 
 to ^aTToKoyetv (Chrys.), but the Holy 
 Spirit (Jude 10), in whose blessed and 
 indwelling influence, and by whose 
 merciful aid, we are enabled to pray 
 (Eom. viii. 15, Gal. iv. 6), yea, and 
 who Himself intercedes for us (Eom. 
 viii. 26). els ovTo] '/or it,' 
 
 'hereunto:' scil. rh vpo<rcvxeir0M iy 
 wavrl Ka,ip<fi iv Tlvei/iaTi, The refer- 
 ence is obviously not to what follows 
 (Holzh.), but to what precedes. It was 
 'for this ' (scarcely more than ' in re- 
 spect 0/ this,' Mey. ) that the Ephesians 
 were to be watchful; not that all 
 should abide in continual prayer 
 (Olsh., Harl.), for the prayer for the 
 Apostle (ver. ig) is to be for a different 
 spiritual grace, but that t^et/tftemseZves 
 might have that grace ('ut quotidie 
 oretis,' Est.), and exercise it in gene- 
 ral,persistent, and appropriate suppli- 
 cations for all saints. The 
 addition of tou70 after aM [Eec. with 
 D^EKL; mss.; Chrys.-text, Theod., 
 al.] is rightly rejected by Lachm., 
 Tisch., al., with ABDiFGK ; Clarom., 
 Vulg., Copt., al., as a mere explana- 
 tory addition: 'airbs saspius dicitur 
 de eo de quo cummaxime sermo est,' 
 Kiihn. Xen. Mem. iii. 10. 14, oomp. 
 Matth. Gr. % 469. 7. dypmr. 
 iv "irooTi irpoo-KapT. k.t.X.] 'watching 
 in all perseverance and supplication,' 
 'in omni instantia et obsecratione,' 
 Vulg. ; supplementary clause, specify- 
 ing a particular accompaniment to 
 their prayer and watchfulness in re- 
 gard to themselves, and a particular 
 phase and aspect which it was to as- 
 sume; 'in praying for themselves they 
 were uniformly to blend petitions for 
 all the saints,' Eadie : comp. Col. iv. 
 2, ypriyopoOvTes iv air^ {Tpoffevxv) if 
 evxapurrlq, where iv eu^. denotes the 
 accompanying act, one of the forms 
 
 which irpoffevxv 'was to assume. 
 The two substantives wpotrKapr. koI 
 Seij(r., though not merely equivalent 
 to 'precantes sedulo' (Syr., comp. 
 .£th.), still practically amount to a 
 'hendiadys.' According to the regu- 
 lar rule, the substantive which con- 
 tains the 'accidens' ought to follow 
 rather than precede (see Winer, de Hy- 
 pall. et Hendiad. p. 19), still here irpoaK. 
 so clearly receives its explanationfrom 
 Kal Se-^<rci, that the expression, though 
 not a strict and grammatical, is yet 
 a virtual, or what might be termed a 
 contextual (v Si4 Svotv: see esp. Fritz. 
 Matth. p. 857. On irpotrxapr. comp. 
 notes on Col. iv. 2. 
 
 19. KaC] ' an<i, to add a particular 
 case :' on this use of Kal in appending 
 a special example to a general classifi- 
 cation, see Winer, Gr. § 53. 3, p. 388, 
 notes on ch. v. 18, and on Phil. iv. 12. 
 iitlp ^(loC] 'fm me,' 'in behalf of me.' 
 Eadie (after Harl.) endeavours to trace 
 a distinction between iwip here and 
 vepl ver. 18, as if the former was 
 more special and individualizing, the 
 latter more general and indefinite; 
 ' sorgt um Alle, auch filr mich, ' Harl. 
 This in the present case, where the 
 two prepp. are so contiguous, is jjku- 
 sible; but as a general rule little more 
 can be said than that iirip in its ethi- 
 cal sense perhaps retainssome stronger 
 trace of its local meaning than irepl : 
 see notes on Gal. i. 4, on Phil. i. 7, and 
 oomp. Kriiger, Sprachl. § 68. 28. 3. 
 tva |ioi SoSjj] ' that there may he given 
 to me;' particular object of the iypvwv, 
 iv irpoffKapT., with an included refer- 
 ence to the subject of the prayer; 
 comp. notes on ch. i. 17. The SoS^, 
 asits position seems to indicate, is em- 
 phatic; it was a special gift of God, 
 and felt to be so by the Apostle, 'non 
 
VI. 
 
 19, 20. 
 
 155 
 
 vappija-ia yvwpiarai to ixvcrrripiov tow evayyeKiov, virep 20 
 
 nitebatur Panlus habitu suo,' Beng. 
 The reading of Rec. SoOdti (which 
 rests only on the authority of a few 
 oursive mss.) would give the purpose 
 a more subjective reference, and re- 
 present the feeling of a more depen- 
 dent realization; compare ch, i, 17, 
 and see esp. Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 
 62'2, Herm. Soph. Elect. 57. 
 ^v dvoC^Ei rov <rTO|i. |i.ov] Hn the 
 opening of my mouth;' act in which 
 and occasion at which the gift was to 
 be realized, the connexion clearly being 
 with the preceding (Syr., Chrys., al.), 
 not with the following words (Auth., 
 Kypke), and the meaning not 'ad a- 
 pertionem,' i.e. 'ut os aperiam' (Beza), 
 or in passive reference to himself and 
 active to God, 'ut Deus aperiat os 
 meum' (oomp. Mth.), i.e. 'that my 
 mouth maybe opened' (a Lap. , Dish. ; 
 comp. Psalm 1. 1 7), but simply 'in the 
 opening of my mouth' ('oocasione 
 data,' Grot.), 'dum os aperio,' Est.; 
 BO Mey., Eadie, al. ; see esp. Frit^. 
 Dissert. 11. ad 2 Cor. p. 99 sq. 
 The expression ivdyetr ardfia may be 
 briefly noticed. When not specially 
 modified or explained by the context 
 (compare 2 Cor. vl. 11), it does not, 
 on the one hand, appear to have any 
 prelusive reference to the nature or 
 equality of the discourse (oi)k dpa i/ne- 
 \^™ Hwep ^Keyev, Chrys., 'ore semi- 
 clauso proferuntur ambigua,' Calv.), 
 nor, on the other, is it to be considered 
 as merely graphic and unemphatic 
 (Fritz, loc. cit., and on Matth. v. 2), 
 but nearly always appears to specify 
 the solemnity of the act and the occa- 
 sion; comp. Matth. v. 2, Job iii. i, 
 Dan. X. 16, Acts viii. 32, and appy. 
 xviii. 14 [it was a grave answer before 
 a tribunal], and see Tholuck, Bergpr. 
 p. 60 sq. iv iro^pTio-Cfj. Tvapfo-oi] 
 
 'with boldness {of speech) to make 
 
 known,' 'cum flducifi notnm faoere,' 
 Vulg., Clarom. ; specification of the 
 result contemplated in the gift ('ut 
 mihi oontingat X670S, inde autem nas- 
 oaturrd iv vafi^. yvuplaai,' Fritz, ad 
 2 Cor. p. 100), and of the spirit by 
 which it was to be marked. As (v 
 dKoI|. Tou o-ri/j. hinted at the solemn 
 and responsible nature of the act, so 
 iv 5ro/5j6. refers qualitatively to the 
 character and spirit of the preaching; 
 Sdpcros KoX 'Koyov xop^^av Iva Kara tok 
 Btiov'Kor^ov TKr^piiaarbv ipoixov Theod. 
 On the meaning of Ta^j)iiaia, see notes 
 on I Tim. iii. 13. ri n«(rr. 
 
 TOU evoYyA.] 'the mystery of the 
 Oospel.' The gen. is somewhat differ- 
 ent to t6 fivffT. Tov BeK'^fiaros, ch, i, 
 9; there it was 'the mystery in the 
 matter of, concerning, the di\itiia, ' — 
 gen. objecti; here it is rather 'the 
 mystery which the eiayy^^. has, in- 
 volves,' — gen. siibjecti. The distinc- 
 tion between these two forms of gen, 
 is briefly but ably stated by Kriiger, 
 Sprachl. § 47. 7. On the meaning of 
 livarQpiov, comp. notes on oh. v, 32, 
 The concluding words tov eiayyeK. 
 are omitted by BFG ; Boern. ; Tert, , 
 Ambrst., and bracketed by Lachm., 
 but rightly retained by Tisch., Alf, 
 Wordsw., on distinctly preponderating 
 evidence, 
 
 20. iiirlpoij'incommodumcujus,' 
 ' to preach which.' The reference of 
 J is doubtful ; it can however scarcely 
 be ' to the preceding clause,' Eadie ; 
 for as this involves two moments of 
 thought, iv irajij). and yvup., and as 
 avri would certainly seem to have the 
 same reference as S, there would be an 
 inevitable tautology in iv oiIti? (soil. 
 TO iv Tafifi. K.T.\.) irafifiriffidaoiiJ.ai. 
 The reference must then be either 
 simply to to eiayyiX. (Harl.) or more 
 probably to to nvar, tou eiayye\. 
 
156 
 
 nPOS E*E2I0YX 
 
 ov irpea-^evw ev aXvcret, l.va ev avrw irapptjcriacraiixai «? 
 Set fie \aKri<rai, 
 21 "Iva Se Kal vneU eiSnre ra Kar e/xe, ""^S'Jourf 
 
 my state and to comfort you. 
 
 21. Ko! i/teis eW.] The reading is somewhat doubtful. The order in the 
 text is adopted with ADEFGX{ADTGK IS.) ; Clarom., Vulg., aJ. ; Theod., Lat. 
 Ff. (Lac/im.). In ed. 2 the order eiS^re Koi u/iers was followed with BEL; great 
 majority of mss.; Syr. (both), Basm. ; Chrys., Dam., Jer., al. (Thch., al.), 
 but is now reversed, the newly discovered N appearing to turn the scale. 
 
 (Mey.), as this was what the Apostle 
 iyvupujei/, and in the matter of which 
 he prayed for the grace of ira^^riffla. 
 •jrpea-peva Iv dXvo-ei] 'I am an am- 
 bassador in a chain,' 'in caten^,' 
 Vulg., Clarom., but ]A\.ii ■ n [in 
 
 catenis] Syr., and similarly Copt., 
 Goth., Arm. [gahanoJc, no sing.]; a 
 noticeable and appy. designedly anti- 
 tlietical collocation, 'I am an am- 
 bassador — ^in chains;' ' alias legati 
 jure gentium sancti et inviolabUes,' 
 Wetst., comp. Theoph. It seems 
 doubtful whether any historical allu- 
 sion to a ' oustodia militaris ' (Beza, 
 Grot. ; on which see esp. Wieseler, 
 Synops. p. 394, note), is actually in- 
 volved in the present use of the sin- 
 gular; comp. Acts xxviii. 20, 2 Tim. 
 i. 16, Joseph. Antiq. xviii. 6. 10, and 
 see Paley, Ilor. Paul. vi. 5, Wieseler, 
 Synops. p. 420. As the singular is 
 not conclusive, being often used, es- 
 pecially in the case of material ob- 
 jects, in a collective sense (see Kriiger, 
 Sprachl. § 44. i. i, Bernhardy, Synt. 
 II. 1, p. 58), and as the use of the word 
 in St Paul's Epp. (here and 2 Tim. i. 
 16) is confined to the singular, it 
 seems uncritical to press the allusion, 
 though it still may be regarded as by 
 no means improbable : aXuo-is is used 
 in the singular {els rqn HXmiv inirlw- 
 THv), but with the article and in a 
 more general sense, in Polyb. Hist. 
 XXI. 3. 3, IV. 76. 5. Xva... 
 
 TTof pT]ir.] ' in order that I may speak 
 boldly;' second purpose and object of 
 the dypvTTV. K.T.X., ver. 18. There 
 seems no reason to depart from the 
 ordinary interpr. ; the second iva k.t.X. 
 is not dependent on Tpea-p. h iXiaei 
 (Beng.), nor subordinate to tva So$y 
 (Harl.), but co-ordinate with it (comp. 
 Bom. vii. 13, Gal. iii. 14), and in- 
 volves no tautology. The first of the 
 two final sentences relates to the gift 
 of utterance and jrafip. generally, the 
 second, to the gift of a conditioned 
 irafi/)., — scil. us Sel jue \a\ijffai. 
 iv avT^] 'in it,' 'therein;' soil, iv tQ 
 ixmr. Tou eua77eX., — 'occupied with 
 it, engaged in preaching it.' 'Ej/ here 
 marks, not so much the (official) sphere 
 in which (see Eom. i. 9, \arpeiw...lv 
 Tif £ua77.), as the substratum on which 
 the ira^pTjcta was to be displayed and 
 exercised ; see Kriiger, Sprachl. § 68. 
 12. 6, and notes on Gal. i. 24. It can 
 scarcely denote the source or ground 
 of the irapfi., Harl.; for, — as i Thess. 
 ii. 2, iwafiprjaiaffd/ieda iv Tcp Geip 
 K.T.X. (cited by Harless) clearly shows 
 — God was the source and causal 
 sphere of the trafifi. (see notes in loc), 
 the Gospel (here ' the mystery of the 
 Gosp.') the object in which and about 
 which it was to be manifested: see 
 exx. in Bernhardy, Stjnt. v. 8. b, p. 
 212. 
 
 21. "Ivo 8{ KoV ifi.. tlSrJTt] 'But 
 in order that ye also may know;' trans- 
 ition by means of the 8i fieTa^anKbr 
 
VI. 21, 2 2. 
 
 157 
 
 Tt irpaacj-w, iravra vfiiv yvcopicrei Tuj^ikos 6 ayairtiTOi 
 aSe\(l>os Koi via-TOi Siolkovo^ ev Kvpio), ov e7re|U\|/^a 2 2 
 
 (see notes on Gal. i. ii) to the last 
 and valedictory portion of the Epistle. 
 In the words xal i/xeis the xai is cer- 
 tainly something more than a mere 
 ' partide of transition ' (Eadie, Eiick.). 
 It indisputably refers to others besides 
 the Ephesians, but who they were 
 cannot be satisfactorily determined. 
 If the Epistle to the Golossians was 
 written first, Kai might point to the 
 Golossians (Harl. Einleit. p. 6o, Wig- 
 gers. Stud. u. Krit. 1841, p. 453, 
 Meyer, JSinZciJ.p. j7,Wieseler, Synops. 
 p. 432), but as the priority of that 
 Ep., though by no means improbable 
 bothfromintemal (Neander,Ptoratim3, 
 Vol. I. p. 329 Bohn, comp. Schleierm. 
 Stud. u. Krit. 1833, p. 500) and per- 
 haps external considerations (see Wie- 
 seler, Syn. p. 450 sq.), is still verj^ 
 doubtful (see Credner, Einleit. § 157, 
 Beuss, Gesch. des N.T. § 119), all 
 that can be said is this, viz. that the 
 use of Kai is certainly noticeable, and 
 not to be explained away, and that 
 though ^crse it cannot safely be relied 
 upon as an argument in favour of the 
 priority of the Ep. to the Golossians, 
 it stm, on that hypothesis, admits of 
 an easy and natural explanation. The 
 article by Wiggers above referred to, 
 though in several points far from con- 
 clusive, deserves perusal. 
 tC irpao-vd)] 'how I fare j' not 'quid 
 (in carcere) agam' (Wolf), but simply 
 'quid agam,' Vulg., Clarom.,— in 
 simple explanation of ri xar i/ii: see 
 Arrian, Epict. i. 19, ri wpdurru irpii- 
 duv; iBlian, Var. Hist. u. 35, ■^pero 
 H TpiTTOi [0 iirb iadtvetas KaToKt}- 
 ipBeW^; comp. Hor. Sat. 1. 9. 4. Illus- 
 trations of ri KOT i/iA, 'res meas' 
 (Phil. i. 12, Gol. iv. 7), are cited by 
 Eisner, Ols. Vol. n. p. 234: seeWetst. 
 and Kypke. TvxI'Kos] Not 
 
 TuX"fi5s((Tj'ies6.,Tisc7i.ed.7),see'Winer, 
 Gr. § 6, p. 49. Tychicus was an 
 'A(riav6s, and is mentioned Acts xx. 
 4, Col. iv. 7, 2 Tim. iv. 12, Tit. iii. 12. 
 Tradition represents him as afterwards 
 bishop of Chalcedon in Bithynia, of 
 Colophon, or of Neapolis in Cyprus ; 
 see Acta Sanct. April 39, Vol. iii. p. 
 613. The order 7i'wpf(j-ei Uiaic, 
 
 though found in BDEFGX ; 3 mss. ; 
 Clarom., Sangerm., Aug., Boern., 
 Goth., al. ; Ambrst. (Lachm.), is per- 
 haps rightly reversed by Tisch., Alf., 
 Wordsw., on the evidence of AKL; 
 nearly all mss.; Vulg. (Amit., Demid., 
 —not Euld.), Syr.-Phil., al. ; Chrys., 
 Theod. , al. ; as being not unlikely a 
 conformation to Col. iv. 7. This how- 
 ever is one of those oases in which, 
 untU we know more of X, it seems hard 
 to decide. irio-ros] 'faithful,' 
 
 'trusty;' not A^idTurros, soil, oidiv ^eii- 
 fferat dXXa irdvra 6X7)6ei<reL, Chrys., 
 Beng. ; for, as Mey. remarks, he was 
 probably known to the Ephesians 
 (comp. Acts XX. 4), though probably 
 not to the Golossians. Sid- 
 
 Kovos ev KupCiji] ' minister in the Lord ; ' 
 Christ was the sphere of his ministra- 
 tions, Christ's Spirit animated and ac- 
 tuated his labours. It does not seem 
 necessary to refer the term didKovos to 
 any special ('sacrst ordinatione diaco- 
 num fuisse,' Est.), or even general 
 office ('qui Evangelic navat operam,' 
 Grot.) in relation to the Gospel, but 
 merely in reference to his services to 
 St Paul; see Col. iv. 7, marbs diaKovos 
 Kai ffMoiikos h Kvp., where, as Meyer 
 and Be W. observe, the latter term is 
 intended to heighten and dignify the 
 former; comp. also 2 Tim. iv. 11. 
 
 22. Sv 2ir{|i.»|»a irpis vjias] 'whom 
 I have sent to you;' not 'I send' 
 (Wordsw.),— which, though not appy. 
 
158 
 
 nP02 E$E2IOYS. 
 
 irpoi vfiai! a<s avro tovto, ha yvHore tu irepi ijfiwv Km 
 irapaKaXicrri rat KapSias vfiaiv. 
 23 Wip^vri Toh aS€\d>oit Ka) ayaTrtj fxera ^^XeXdV^e 
 
 to all true Christiana. 
 
 'conoordia,' Calv., 'peaceableness,' 
 Hamm. (comp. elpr/vevere, 2 Cor. xiii. 
 11), as the Epistle, though elpriviKis 
 (De Wette) in relation to the doctrinal- 
 aspects of the union of Jews and Gen- 
 tUes (see oh. ii. ), contains no special 
 exhortations on the subject of concord 
 generally. Wp^vij is however no mere 
 parting salutation (comp. notes ch. L 
 ■i, and on Gal. i, 3), hut ia in effect a 
 valedictory prayer for that yaX'^vrj xal 
 eidla \j/vxns (Orig. Cat.) which was the 
 blessed result of reconciliation with 
 God, and His Spirit's special gift ; see 
 Steiger ore i Pet. i. 2, Eeuss, TMol. 
 Chr4t. IV. 18, Vol. u. p. 300 sq. 
 TOts a8eX<j>ois] ' the brethren at Ephe- 
 Bus.' Wieseler [Syrups, p. 444) refers 
 &di\(p. specially to the Jewish Chris- 
 tians, TranTdin to the Gentile Christians. 
 This is surely a very doubtful, and 
 even improbable interpretation ; for is 
 it hkely that in an epistle so opposed 
 in its tenor to all national distinctions 
 any such special recognition of their 
 existence would be found? Clearly o£ 
 dSeX^oi can only mean 'the whole 
 Christian brotherhood. * 
 d'yoirt) [irrd, irCtrTecos] ' love with faith,' 
 not d^oin; koX vlffTis : the Apostle 
 does not simply pray for the presence 
 of each of these graces in his converts, 
 for, as Olsh. correctly observes, he 
 assumed irioris to be there already; 
 what he prays for is their co-existence. 
 As love (not here the divine love, 
 Beng.) is the characteristic of a true 
 faith, the medium by which its energy 
 is displayed (Gal. v. 6), so here faith is 
 represented as the perpetual concomi- 
 tant of a true love. If it had been 
 iyair. iriv vlaru it would rather have 
 conveyed the here scarcely realizable 
 
 inconsistent with the usage of the N.T. 
 (see Winer, Gr. §40. 5. 2, p. ■249), does 
 not sesm accordant with the probable 
 circumstances. Tyohicus appears to 
 have been sent with Onesimus to Co- 
 lossffi on a special mission (CoL iv. 8), 
 of which the Apostle availed himself 
 so far as to send this letter by him; 
 this mission however the Apostle na- 
 turally regards as an act belonging to 
 the past, and so probably uses ?7re/t^o 
 in its ordinary sense. els 
 
 ovrd toSto] 'for this very purpose, 
 and no other,' viz. in reference to what 
 follows; not 'for the same purpose,' 
 Auth.; comp. Phil. i. 6, Col. iv. 8 and 
 notes in loc. The preposition is some- 
 times omitted; see Plat. Sympos. 204 
 A, and StaUb. in loc. ; comp. ib. Legg. 
 in. 686 D, Protag. 310 e. 
 iva 7vwTe k.t.X.] ' in order that ye may 
 know the things concerning us;' ob- 
 viously similar in meaning to elSrjre 
 TO KOT iid, but perhaps with a more 
 inclusive reference both to himself and 
 those with him. irapaKoX^oTl] 
 
 'comfort,' 'consoletur,' Vulg. (comp. 
 Goth, 'gatjvasstjai'), here judiciously 
 changed from the ' exhorte[n]tur ' of 
 Clarom. ; see Col. iv. 8. The subject 
 of the TTopofcXijiris may have been ' ne 
 offenderetis in meis vinculis' (Bang.), 
 or 'ne animis deficiatis ob meas tri- 
 bulationes' (Est. ; comp. ch. iii. 13); so 
 also (Ecum., Theoph. : it is better how- 
 ever, owing to our ignorance of the 
 exact state of the church, to leave the 
 precise reference undefined, and to ex- 
 tend it generally to all particulars in 
 which they needed it. On the mean- 
 ing of the word, see notes on ch. iv. i, 
 and ore i Thess. v. 11. 
 23. ElpijvT)] 'Peace' simply; not 
 
VI. 23, 24. 
 
 159 
 
 TTio-Tecoy airo Qeov iraTpoi Koi Hvpiov 'I>](rov XpicTTOv. 
 H X°/"^ (/.era iravraiv twv ayaTrwvTwv tov Kvpiov 24 
 
 conception oitheir coherence; compare 
 ch. iv. 31, iriKpla...(riv KaKlq, [badness 
 of heart was the ' fermentum,' the ac- 
 tive principle]; i Cor. x. 13, aiv t(? 
 ■neipa<Tiuf Kal Trjv (K^afftv [not the one 
 without the other] : see Kruger, 
 Sprachl. § 68. 13. i. On theconnexiou 
 of love and faith, comp. Eeuss, Theol. 
 Chr4t. IV. 19, Vol. II. p. 205 ; and on 
 the whole verse, a short but not very 
 connected sermon of Augustine ,Serm. 
 CLXvni. Vol. V. p. gii (ed. Migne). 
 
 24. 'H xdpis] ' Grace,' Kar i^oxnv, 
 the grace of God in Jesus Christ 
 (Mey.). The use of the article is in 
 harmony with the immediately preced- 
 ing and succeeding mention of Him 
 through whom ^ xv" iyi'^ro, John 
 i. 17. yxrik iroMTav k.t. \.] 
 
 'vnth all that love our Lord J. C.;' 
 second and more comprehensive form 
 of benediction. Meyer compares the 
 similar maZcdictor^ form in i Cor. xvi. 
 22. iv d<f>6apcrCa] H'. 
 
 incorruption,' v,»~v . . jjj [sine 
 
 corruptione] Syr., 'in inoorruptione, ' 
 Vulg., Copt., 'incorruptione,' Cla- 
 rom., Arm., 'in unriurein,' Goth., 'in 
 non-iuteritu,' ^th.-Platt. The con- 
 nexion of this clause and the mean- 
 ing of the words are both somewhat 
 doubtful, and must be noticed sepa- 
 rately, (i) Meaning : excluding all ar- 
 bitrary interpretations of the preposi- 
 tion, e.g. vrep (Chrys. 2), Sia (Theoph.), 
 /teTo(Theod.), eis (Beza), and all doubt- 
 ful explanations of d<t>0ap<rif, whether 
 temporal (sc. els rhv al&va, Matth.), 
 braohylogical (fva ^utjv ^xmo-i)/ iv dtfiO; 
 Olsh.), abstr. for concrete — really {ii> 
 d4>Baprois, Chrys. 2) or virtually ('in 
 unverganglichem Wesen,' Harl.), — ^we 
 have three probable interpr.; (a) ethi- 
 
 cal, 'sincerity,' Auth., Chrys., comp. 
 I Pet. iii. 4 : (6) qtmsi-local, in refer- 
 ence to the sphere of the ayairi), comp. 
 iv iirovpavlois : (c) simply qualitative, 
 i.e. Hmperishableness,' (Ecum., Mey., 
 al. To (a) the lexical meaning of the 
 word is seriously opposed: see Meyer. 
 St Paul's use of d(j>eapirlq, is perhaps 
 rather in favour of (6), as in all the 
 six other passages where it occurs (Tit. 
 ii. 7 [Steph.} is extremely doubtful), 
 dip0. refers directly or indirectly to a 
 higher sphere than the present ; still 
 as d<p6. is anarthrous, and the expla- 
 nation difficult unless the unsatis- 
 factory construction (fi), see below, be 
 adopted, we decide in favour of (c), and 
 regard iv as marking the manner, or 
 rather conditioning sp/ifirc,inwhichthe 
 action takes place; comp. esp. Tit. iii. 
 15. (2) ConneaiioTi: three constructions 
 have been suggested; (a) with 'lijir. 
 Xp., soil. ' Christum immortalem non 
 humilem,' Wetst. ;— (/3) with ii x^P's. 
 Harl., Stier; — (-y) with dyairavTiav, 
 Chrys., Theod. Of these (a) is inad- 
 missible, being exegetically unsatisfac- 
 tory, and, on account of the absence 
 of the article, grammatically suspi- 
 cious ; ip) is harsh, especially in a 
 simple benediction, on account of the 
 intercalation of so many words between 
 the nom. and the modal factor of the 
 sentence; (7) is adopted by all the 
 Greek commentators, and seems most 
 simple and satisfactory; we translate 
 therefore, 'grace be with aU who love 
 our Lord Jesus Christ in incorruption, 
 i. e. in a manner and in an element 
 that knows neither change, diminu- 
 tion, nor decay;' r) yhp els rhv Xp. 
 dya/TTTj dtpBapros KoX d/xeiuros fioWov 
 Si KaS' iKotrrriv iirihSoma Trjv ij/iipav 
 <i(pe\ev elvaf CEcum, Thus then this 
 
160 nP02 Ea)E2I0YS. 
 
 ^/ucoj' lrj(rovv \pi(TT0V ev acpOapa-ia. 
 
 siguifioant clause not only defines most Vv. and Pf.] is rightly rejected 
 
 what the essence of the dyawq is, but by Lachm., Tisch., al. [with ABF 
 
 indicates that it ought to be perennial, GK^; ^ mss., Aug., Boem., Amit.*, 
 
 immutable, incorruptible. The con- Tol.,Basm.,iEth.-PoI.,andsomeFf.], 
 
 eluding aiirjv [Eeo. with DBKLN^ ; as a liturgical addition. 
 
TRANSLATION. 
 
 M 
 
NOTICE. 
 
 THE principles on which this translation is based are explained 
 in the general Preface to the commentary on the Galatiams, 
 and in the notice prefixed to the translation of that Epistle. The 
 English Versions with which the translation is compared, and the 
 editions which have been used, are the same as those used in the 
 Translation of the former Epistle, with this exception, that the 
 Version, here used and referred to as the Standard Genevan 
 Version, is not (as before) the Version of the New Testcmwnt 
 published in the year 1557 (reprinted in the English Hexapld) 
 but the Version of the whole Bible published in the year 1560. 
 This Version differs in many respects from the Version of 1557, 
 and appears alone entitled to be considered as Tbe Genrvan 
 Version. In the present edition the citations have been carefully 
 verified anew, some additions have been made, and errors, as far as 
 possible, removed. One unimportant change may be specified. 
 It has been suggested that it might be better to change ' unto * 
 into ' to,' wherever ' unto ' appears in the Authorized Version as 
 marking a simple dative, and to reserve the former for the trans- 
 lation of prepositions with the accusative. As this is professedly 
 a 'version for the closet,' and as rhythm (the usual reason for 
 the interchange in the A.V.) is thus of less consequence, the 
 suggestion has been adopted. [In this edition (1883) the transla- 
 tion adopted by the Revisers of 1881 is noted in its proper place.] 
 
THE EPISTLE TO THE EPHESIANS. 
 
 T)AUL, an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God, I. 
 J- to the saints which are [in Ephesus], and to the 
 faithful in Christ Jesus. Grace he to you, and peace, 2 
 from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ. 
 
 Blessed be God and the Father of our Lord Jesus 3 
 Christ, who blessed us with every blessing of the Spirit 
 in the heavenly regions in Christ : even as He chose us 4 
 
 Chapteb I. 1. Of Christ Jesm} 
 Of * Jesus Christ, Atjib.. In 
 
 Ephesus] At £phesus, Auth. and all 
 the other Vv. 
 
 2. And the Lord] Sim. WioL. , Gov. 
 Test., Bhem., Bev. : and from tJie 
 Lord, Auth. and remaining Vv. The 
 prep, in such oases as the present 
 should certainly be omitted, as it 
 tends to make that unity of source 
 from whence the grace and peace come 
 less apparent than it is in the Greek ; 
 oomp. note on Phil. i. 2 {Fransl.). 
 
 3. God and the Father] SoWiCL., 
 Gov. Test., Ehbm. : the God and 
 Father, Auth., Eev. ; God euen the 
 Father, Gen. ; God the father, Tynd. 
 and remaining Vv. Blessed us] 
 Sath blessed us, Atjth. and all the 
 other Vv. The aorist here ought cer- 
 tainly to be maintained in translation, 
 as the allusion is to the past act of 
 the redemption. The idiom of our 
 laugaagefrequently interferes with the 
 regular application of the rule, but it 
 is still no less certain that the English 
 priBterite is the nearest equivalent of 
 
 the Greek aor., see Latham, Engl. 
 Lang. §360, 361, and compare Scholef. 
 Hints (Pref.), p. xi. It is possible 
 that there are cases when the English 
 present, owing to its expressing an 
 habitual action(Latham, §573), might 
 seem to oorrespond to the Greek aor., 
 but as the iterative force of the latter 
 tense, even if admitted (see notes on 
 Gal. V. 24), seems radically to differ 
 from that of the Engl. pres. (the one 
 expressing indefinite recurrence in the 
 past, see Jelf, Gr. § 402. t, the other 
 indef. recurrence in th.e present) , it will 
 seem best not to venture on any such 
 translation. Every blessing] So Gov. 
 Test., Eev.: all maner of...blessinges, 
 Tynd. (blessynge, Oban., Gov.); al... 
 blessynge Wioi,., Gen., Bish., Ehem.; 
 all,. . blessings, Atits. Of the 
 
 Spirit] Spiritual, Auth. and all the 
 other Vv. ; see notes. The hea- 
 
 venly regions] Seavenly places, Auth., 
 Eev. ; calestials, Ehem. ; heuenli thin- 
 gis, WioL. and remaining Vv. 
 
 4. Even as] So Eev. : according 
 as, Auth., Tynd., Gov.,Cean., Bish.; 
 
 M2 
 
164 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 in Him before the foundation of the world, that we should 
 
 5 be holy and blameless before Him ; IN love having fore- 
 ordained us for adoption through Jesus Christ into Him- 
 
 6 self, according to the good pleasure of His will, to the 
 praise of the glory of His grace, wherein He bestowed 
 
 7 grace on us in the beloved ; in whom we have redemption 
 through His blood, the forgiveness of our transgressions, 
 
 8 according to the riches of His grace, which He made to 
 
 as, WiCL., Gov. Test., Gen., Ehem.: 
 see note ore i Thess. i. s (Traml.). 
 Chose] So Ehem., Eev. : hath chosen, 
 AtiTH., WicL., Gov. Test., Gen.; had 
 chosen, Tynd. , and remaining Vv. 
 Blameless'] Without blame, Auth., 
 Tynd., Gov., Gban., Gen., Bish. ; 
 without wemme, Wiol. ; unspotted, 
 Gov. Test.; mmacatoe, Ehem.; loith- 
 out ilemish, Bev. The slight change 
 has been made for the sake of retain- 
 ing the same translation both here 
 and ch. v. 27. On the distinction 
 between a/ia/jios ('in quo nihil est 
 quod reprehendas ') and a/ie/ZTrros ('in 
 quo nihil desiderari potest'), see 
 Tittm. Synon. p. 29. 
 
 5. In love having] Auth. and all 
 the other Vv. connect 'in love' with 
 the preceding verse; see notes. The 
 participle expresses probably a temr 
 ^oraZ relation, 'after He had, d'c.,' but 
 in so profound a subject it seems best 
 to retain the more undefined transl. of 
 Auth. Foreordained] So Eev. ; 
 
 bifore ordeyned, Wiol.; ordeyned... 
 before, Tynd., Gov., Gran.; predes- 
 tinated, Auth. and the remaining 
 Vv. For adoption] Unto the 
 
 adoption of children, Auth.; in to 
 adop. of sones, Wiol., Ehem. {vnto 
 the ad.), Eev. (unto); to be heyres, 
 Tynd., Gban. ; to receaue vs as chil- 
 dren. Gov.; to be adopted, Gen.,— a 
 good translation, but perhaps scarcely 
 sufficiently hteral. Through] So 
 
 Tynd. and other Vv. : by, Auth., 
 
 WiCL., Bish., Ehem. Into Him- 
 
 self] To himself, Auth. ; in to him, 
 Wiol.; vnto him silfe, Tynd., Gban., 
 Gen., Bish. , Ehem. , Eev. ; in hym- 
 selfe. Gov. Test. Whether we adopt 
 the translation 'into' or 'unto' mat- 
 ters but little, both approximating 
 to, but neither fully expressing the 
 meaning of the inclusive eh, perhaps 
 English idiom (' adopt into ') is slight- 
 ly in favour of the former. It seems 
 also best in English, for the sake of 
 perspicuity, to return to the reflexive 
 form: 'into Him' (ed. i), though 
 literal, perhaps may seem ambigu- 
 ous. 
 
 6. Bestowed grace on as] Sim. 
 Eev. : liath glorified us, Wicl.; hath 
 gratified vs, Ehem.; hath made us 
 accepted, Auth. and all other Vv. 
 
 7. Redemption] Here we must be 
 content to omit (with all the Vv. ex- 
 cept Eev., our red.) the expressive 
 article, our idiom seeming to require 
 some adject., e. g. 'the promised red.,' 
 to make the article perfectly intelli- 
 gible. Of our transgressions] Of 
 sins, Auth. and all Vv. except Eev., 
 of our trespasses. 
 
 8. Which He made to abound 
 tojoard Jis] So Eev. : which grace he 
 shed on us aboundantly, Tynd., and 
 sim. Gov. ; wher of he hath ministred 
 vnto vs aboundantly, Cean. ; whereby 
 he hathe bene abundant toward vs. 
 Gen. ; wherein he hath abounded to- 
 loard us, Auth., Bish. On this 
 
Chap. I, 5 — 11. 
 
 165 
 
 abound toward us in all wisdom and discernment ; having 
 made known to us the mystery of His will, according to 
 His good pleasure which He purposed in Himself in re- 
 gard of the dispensation of the fulness of times, to gather 
 up again together all things in Christ, the things that are 
 in heaven and the things that are on earth, even in Him ; 
 in whom we were also chosen as His inheritance, having 
 been foreordained according to the purpose of Him who 
 
 10 
 
 II 
 
 clause a friend and accurate scholar 
 has made the observation, that as all 
 verba of the character of irepura-eia 
 may practically be resolved into a, 
 'verbum faciendi' with an appended 
 aocus. elicited from the verb ('make 
 an abundance of), the gen. ^s may 
 here receive a simple explanation with- 
 out reference to the principles of attrac- 
 tion. This remark appears to deserve 
 some consideration. Discernment] 
 Prudence, Auth., Wiol., Gov. (both), 
 Ckan., Bish., Ehem., Eev. ; percea- 
 vaunce, Ttnd. ; understanding, Gen. 
 The transl. 'prudence ' appears to give 
 the word a more decided reference to 
 practice than the context wUl admit ; 
 'understanding,' on the other hand, 
 is too abstract, and fails to recognise 
 the distinction between aivean and 
 <j)pl>v7i(Ti.s. Perhaps the transl. in the 
 text, or 'intelligence,' as indicating an 
 application and exercise of the ippiiv, 
 and a result of (spiritual) iro^te (comp. 
 I Cor. ii. 13), approaches more nearly 
 to the true meaning of the word in 
 this passage. 
 
 9. Purposed] So Wiol., Ttnd., 
 Gov. Test., Ehem., Eev.: had purp., 
 Auth. and the remaining Vv. 
 
 10. In regard of the disp.] In 
 the disp., Aoth., Gov. Test., Gen., 
 Bish., Ehem. ; paraphrasticaUy, to 
 have it declared when the tyme were 
 full cojne, Tynd., Cean. (was), sim. 
 Gov. ; unto a disp. , Eev. The trans- 
 lation in the text, or 'with a view 
 to' (see notes), seems to make the 
 
 meaning a, little more distinct than 
 the more usual 'for.' To 
 
 gather up again together] That... he 
 might gather together in one, Auth., 
 Gen., Bish.; that he might setvp... 
 perfectly, Ckan., that...shuld be gad- 
 dered togedder, Tynd., Gov. ; to en- 
 store, Wiol. ;. to set up, Gov. Test.; to 
 sum up, Eev. The things that are 
 
 in heaven and the things that are] Si- 
 milarly Tynd., Gov., Cean., and also 
 Gov. Test., Eev. (om. that are) : both 
 which are in heaven and which are, 
 Auth., Gen., Bish. (heauens). The 
 repetition which the older translators 
 thus preserve is not without force in 
 this solemn enunciation of the eternal 
 purpose of God. 
 
 II. We were also chosen as His in- 
 heritance] Also we have obtained an 
 inheritance, Auth.; we ben clepid bi 
 sorte, Wiol., sim. Gov. Test., Ehem. ; 
 we are made heyres, Tynd., Cean.; 
 also we are come to the inheritaunce, 
 Gov. ; also we are chosen. Gen., Bish. ; 
 we were made «. heritage, Eev. It 
 may be observed that also is omitted 
 by Wiol., Tynd., Geau. 
 Having been foreordained] So Eev. : 
 being predestinated, Auth., Bish. 
 (-nate); and were therto predestinate, 
 Tynd., Cban.; bifor ordeyned, Wiol.; 
 predestinate, Gov. Test., Ehem. The 
 simpler translation in the text seems 
 decidedly preferable; see notes on 
 ver. 5. His will] So Wiol., 
 
 Ehem., Eev.: his ovm will, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. 
 
166 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 12 worketh all things after the counsel of His will; that we 
 should be to the praise of His glory, who have before hoped 
 
 13 in Christ: in whom ye too, having heard the word of 
 truth, the gospel of your salvation, — in whom, / say, hav- 
 ing also believed, ye were sealed with the holy Spirit of 
 
 14 promise, which is the earnest of our inheritance, for the 
 redemption of the purchased possession, unto the praise 
 of His glory. 
 
 1 5 For this cause I also, having heard of the faith which 
 is among you in the Lord Jesus, and the love which ye 
 
 16 have unto all the saints, cease not to give thanks for you, 
 
 17 making mention of you in my prayers; that the God of 
 
 12. Save before hoped] Sim. Eev. 
 {hac[j:firsttrusted,ATiTB.{koped,AvTB:. 
 marg.), Gen. ; han hopid bifor, WiOL.; 
 afore haue hoped, Gov. Test., Ehem. 
 before; before beleved, Tynd., Oban., 
 BiSH. The force of the perf. part, 
 should be retained in transl., es- 
 pecially as this can so easily be done 
 by the inserted 'have,' as Gov. Test., 
 Bhem. ; the EngUsh perfect expresses 
 the past in connexion, by its effects or 
 consequences, with the present: see 
 Latham, Engl. Lang. § 579 (ed. 3). 
 
 13. Ye too, having heard] Sim. 
 Eev. : you alio, when you had heard, 
 Bhem., with a similarly suspended 
 member; ye also trusted after that ye 
 heard, &o., Auth., sim. Gen.; also 
 ye beleued after that ye herde. Gov., 
 sim. Gov. Test.; also we beleue for 
 asmoch as we Jmue hearde, Gran. ; 
 also ye [hoped] after that ye heard, 
 BisH. Tynd. connects, ye also (after 
 that ye hearde...) were sealed. 
 
 I say, having also] Also after that ye, 
 AuiH., and sim. Eev. The change 
 to the partioip. structure in both 
 members seems to make the sentence 
 a little more distinct, and to pre- 
 serve in the latter the close con- 
 nexion of Kal with wiaTeiaayTes ; see 
 notes. The holy] So all the 
 
 Vv. except Auth., that holy. 
 
 14. Which] On the form 'which,' 
 see notes on Gal. i. 1 (Transl.). 
 For] So Gov. Test., Oban.: until, 
 AuiH., Gen.; in to, Wicl. ; unto, 
 BisH., Eev. ; to, Ehem. The trans- 
 lation of Tynd. (to redetne) is para- 
 phrastic. 
 
 15. For this cause] So Eev.: 
 wherefore, Auth., Tynd., Gov. (both), 
 Cean., Bish. ; Jftere/ore, 'Wicl. , Gen., 
 Ehem. The transl. 'for this cause' 
 is more consonant with the general 
 style of Auth. than the equally 
 literal and correct 'on this account,' 
 and so is substituted for it. 'Where- 
 fore' (Auth.) is rather the transl. of 
 5io'. Having heard] So Eev.: 
 after I heard, Auth.; herynge,'V^ioii., 
 Gov. Test. , Ehem. ; after that I heard, 
 Tynd., Gban., Gen., Bish.; in so 
 moch as I haue herde. Gov. The 
 faith, &o.] SoB^v.: your faith, Auth., 
 WiOL., Ehem.; the fayth which ye 
 have,TYm).,CoY., Gban., Gen., Bish.; 
 yourf. whych is. Gov. Test. 
 
 The love which ye have] Love, Auth. 
 and the other Vv. except Wiol., the 
 love, and Gov., of youre love. Eev. 
 omits *the love. 
 
 17. Would give] May give, Auth. , 
 Gov. (both), Gban., Bish., Eev.; myght 
 
Chap. I. 12 — 20. 
 
 167 
 
 our Lord Jesus Christ, the Father of glory, would give to 
 you the Spirit of wisdom and revelation in full knowledge 
 of Him; having the eyes of your heart enlightened, that 18 
 ye may know what is the hope of His calling, and what 
 the riches of the glory of His inheritance are among the 
 saints, and what the surpassing greatness of His power is 19 
 to US-ward who believe, according to the operation of the 
 power of His might, which He wrought in Christ, when 20 
 He raised Him from the dead, — and He set Him on His 
 
 geve, Tynd., Gen. The change in the 
 text is made as an attempt to express 
 the conditioned, hoped for , realization 
 ('would please to give') expressed by 
 the opt. difni; comp. Latham, Engl. 
 Lang. § 592, Wallis, Gramm. Angl. 
 p. 107. Hermann (Soph. Elect. 57) 
 asserts that in German the distinction 
 may be observed by translating the 
 Greek subj. by the German ind. pres., 
 the opt. by the German imperf. sub- 
 junctive. The transl. of Tynd., al., 
 though practically preserving the cor- 
 rect shade of meaning, violates the 
 law of ' the succession of tenses ;' see 
 Latham, Engl. Lang. § 616. 
 Fullknowledge] The knowledge, A.VTB.. 
 and all the other Vv. (knowynge, 
 WiOL.). It may be doubted whether 
 this stronger translation can in all 
 cases be maintained. That there is 
 generally a clear recognition of the in- 
 creased force of the compound may 
 be inferred from a comparison of the 
 passages in which the simple and com- 
 pound forms are respectively used. 
 Cautionhowever is required in exhibit- 
 ing this in translation. 
 
 18. Having the eyes of your heart 
 enlightened] So Ebv. : the eyes of your 
 * understanding being inlightened, 
 AuTH. ; and lighten the eyes of youre 
 myndes, Tynd., Ckan. {vnderstond- 
 inge, Gov.); the eyes of yowre harte 
 beynge lyghtened, Gov. Test, (myndes, 
 BisH.) ; that y' eyes of your vnd. 
 
 may be lightened, Gen. ; the eies of 
 your hart illuminated, Bhem., sim. 
 WiOL. Are am^ng] Apon Tynd. , 
 
 Oov., Ckan.; in, Adih. and the re- 
 maining Vv. It may be observed 
 that Tynd., Gov., Gen., Bish., simi- 
 larly insert the auxiliary verb im- 
 mediately before the prep. (Wiol., 
 Gov. Test., Ehem. before the riches ; 
 Ckan. after the glorye), showing that 
 they did not consider h tois dviots 
 as merely appended to t^s KXripovo- 
 fiUas airov ; see notes. 
 
 19. What the. ..power is] Sim. 
 Ebv. : whatisthe,&o., Auth., andthe 
 same order is kept by the other Vv. 
 Surpassing] Excellent, Wioii. ; pass- 
 ing, Ehem.; exceeding, Auth. and 
 the other Vv. To us-ward] So 
 AuxH., Tynd., Ckan., Bish., Eev. : in 
 to us, Wicii. ; towarde vs. Gov. (both), 
 Gen., Ehem. 
 
 Operation] So Ehem, : working, Auth. 
 and the remaining Vv. ; see notes on 
 oh. iii. 7. The power of His might] 
 His mighty power, A.V1B.., Coy., Gen., 
 Bish. ; the myght of his vertu, Wiol. ; 
 that his mighty power, Tynd., Ckan. ; 
 the myght of hys power. Gov. Test., 
 Ehem.; the strength of his might, Eev. 
 
 20. And He set] And set, Auth. ; 
 the change in the original from the 
 participial structure to that of the aor. 
 indie, is better preserved by inserting 
 the pronoun. On His] So Wiol., 
 Tynd., Gov., Ckan., Bish., Ehem. 
 
168 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 2 1 right hand in the heavenly regions, over above all Princi- 
 pality, and Power, and Might, and Dominion, yea and 
 every name that is named, not only in this world, but also 
 
 22 in that which is to come ; and put all things under His 
 feet, and gave Him as Head over all things to the church, 
 
 23 which indeed is His body, the fulness of Him that filleth 
 all with all. 
 
 II. And you also being dead by your trespasses and your 
 
 at his own, Auth. ; at hys. Gov. Test., 
 Gen., Bev. The heavenly regions] 
 The heavenly places, Adth., Gen., 
 BisH. (om. the), Ebv. ; heuenli thingis, 
 WioL., Tynd., Gov. (both), Cban.; 
 celestials, Bhem. 
 
 2 1 . Over above] Far above, AniH., 
 Gen., Bish., Bev. ; aboue, Wiol. and 
 the remaining Vv. Vea and] 
 And, Auth. ; see notes. 
 
 22. Put] Sim. Bev. : hath put, 
 Auth., Ttind., Gov., Ckan., Bish.; 
 hath he subdued. Gov. Test., Bhem. 
 {he hath) ; hathe made.. .subiect, Gen. ; 
 made...suget, WiOL., — the only ver- 
 sion which omits the auxihary verb. 
 Gave Him, &a.] Gave him to be the 
 head over all things to, Auth., Bish., 
 Bev. (om. tlu) ; hath made him abcme 
 all thynges, the heed of, Tynd., Gov., 
 Gkan. ; made hym heads ouer all. Gov. 
 Test.; hathe appointed him ouer all 
 things to be the heade to, Gen. ; hath 
 made him head ouer al, Bhem. The 
 emphatic position of airov in the 
 original should not be left unnoticed. 
 
 23. Which indeed] Which, Adth. 
 and the other Vv. except Wiol. (tliat). 
 If the distinction usually made be- 
 tween 'that' and 'which' is correct, 
 viz. that the former is restrictive, the 
 latter resumptive (see Brown, Gramm. 
 of Grammars, 11. 5, p. •zps, and notes 
 on Col. iii. i, Transl.), 'that' will often 
 be a correct translation of ^ns when 
 used differentially (see notes on Gal. 
 iv. 24), e.g. ii irAXis ijrts iv A4X<j>oi.s 
 
 KTi^erai: in the present case however 
 Wiol. is not correct, as tp-is appears 
 here to be used explicatively , 
 With all] In all, Adth., Gov. (both), 
 Cean., Bish., Bhem., Bev.; in alle 
 thingis, Wiol., Ttnd., Gen. 
 
 Ghaptee n. I. You also being dead] 
 You hath he quickened loho were 
 dead, Adth. The participle ovras has 
 been differently translated: toJw were, 
 Adth. ; that were, Tynd., Gen., Bish.; 
 whan ye were. Gov. (both), Bev.; where 
 as ye were, Gban. Of these the last two 
 translations, though more correct in 
 point of grammar than Tynd., al., 
 which tacitly supply an article, seem 
 scarcely so satisfactory as the more 
 simple one in the text, esp. if the 
 present verse be compared with verse 
 5. The part, ovras obviously marks 
 the state in which they were at the 
 time when God quickened them. 
 While in verse 5 this is brought 
 prominently forward by the raJ, here, 
 on the contrary, the (cai is joined 
 with, and gives prominence to i/iSs. 
 ]ji the present case then, a simple in- 
 dication of their state without any 
 temporal or causal adjunct, 'when,' 
 'whereas,' d;c., seems most suitable 
 to the context, as less calling away 
 the attention from the more emphatic 
 vfias. By your] So Bhem. : in, 
 
 Adth., Tynd., Gban., Gen., Bibh.; 
 thorow, Gov. ; in youre, Wiol. ; tho- 
 rowe your, Gov. Test., Bev. 
 
Chap. I. 21 — II. 4. 
 
 169 
 
 sins, — wherein ye once walked according to the course of 2 
 this world, according to the prince of the empire of the 
 air, of the spirit that now worketh in the sons of disobedi- 
 ence; among whom even we all once had our conversation in 3 
 the lusts of our flesh, doing the desires of the flesh and of the 
 thoughts, and we were children by nature — of wrath, even 
 as the rest : — but God, being rich in mercy, because of His 4 
 
 Your sins] Sins, Auth. and all the 
 other Vv. {synne, Tynb.). 
 
 ■i. Te once walked] In timepastye 
 walked, Auth., Tynd., Gov., Cban., 
 Gen., Bish. ; ye wandriden sumtyme, 
 Wicia.; ye walked somtyme. Gov. Test.; 
 sometime you w.,^ssM.; aforetime ye 
 walked, Eev. Of the empire of] 
 
 Of the power of, Auth., Wicl., Gov. 
 Test. (om. the), Ehem,, Eev.; that 
 ruleth in, Tynd., Gov., Oban., Gen., 
 Bish. The somewhat modern form 
 of expression in the text seems the 
 only one that exactly represents the 
 view taken in the notes of the col- 
 lective term i^ovaias. Of the spirit] 
 So WiCL., Ehem., Eev.: the spirit, 
 AniH., Tynd., Gov. Test., Cran., 
 Bisn.;nam£ly, after ysp.. Gov.; euen 
 the sp.. Gen. Sons] So WiOL., 
 
 Eev. i children, Atjth. and the other 
 Vv. 
 
 3. Even we} Also we, Auth., Wiol., 
 Gov. Test., Ehem.; we also, Tynd., 
 Gov., Gen., Eev.; we, Gban., Bish., 
 but see next note. Once had our 
 
 convers.] Had our convers. in times 
 past, Auth.; lyueden sumtyme, Wiol.; 
 had oure conversacion in tyme past, 
 Tynd., Gov., Gen. (Gean.,Bish. insert 
 also before in); haue led our conuer- 
 sacion somtyme. Gov. Test.; conuersed 
 sometime, Ehem.; once lived, Eev. 
 This lighter translation of iror^ seems 
 preferable both here and in ver. 2. 
 The order of the Greek wotdd seem 
 to require 'had our conversation 
 once,' but this would lead to am- 
 
 biguity when read in connexion with 
 the succeeding words. 
 Doing] So Wiol., Gov. Test., Ehem., 
 Eev.; fulfilling, Auth., Bish.; and 
 fullfilled, Tynd., 0-RA.T<i.;and dyd,GoY.; 
 in fulfilling. Gen. Thoughts] So 
 
 Wiol., Gov. Test., Ehem.; mind, 
 Auih. and the remaining Vv. 
 We were] So Wiol. : were, Auth. and 
 all the other Vv. except Gov. Test., 
 were we. Children] So Eev. : the 
 
 children, Auth. and all the other Vv. 
 except Wiol., the sones. Children 
 by nature — of wrath] By nature the 
 children of wrath, Auth., Ckan.,Gen., 
 Bish., Bhem., Eev. (omits the), and 
 sim. Gov. Test.; M kynde the sones of 
 wraththe, Wiol. ; naturally the chil- 
 dren of wrath, Tynd., Gov. All at- 
 tempts to explain away the simple 
 and ordinary meaning of these words 
 must be, somewhat summarily, pro- 
 nounced to be both futile and unten- 
 able. Such a translation as ' children 
 of impulse' (Maurice, Unity, p. 538) 
 has only to be noticed to be rejected. 
 The substantive dpyq is used in thirty- 
 four other places in the N.T., and in 
 none does it appear even to approach 
 to the meaning thus arbitrarily as- 
 signed to it. The rest] So 
 Ehem., Eev.: others, Auth., Gen.; 
 other men, Wiol. ; other, Tynd. and 
 the remaining Vv. 
 
 4. Being rich] So Eev.: who is rich, 
 Auth. ; that is riche, Wiol. ; which is 
 rich, Tynd. and the remaining Vv. 
 Because of. ..love] For, &a., Auih., 
 
170 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 5 great love wherewith He loved us, even while we were 
 dead by our trespasses, quickened us together with Christ 
 
 6 (by grace have ye been saved), and raised us up with 
 Him, and made us sit with Sim in the heavenly regions, 
 
 7 in Christ Jesus ; that He might shew forth in the ages 
 that are coming the surpassing riches of His grace in 
 
 8 kindness towards us in Christ Jesus. For by GBACE have 
 ye been saved through faith ; and this cometh not of your- 
 
 WiOL., Cban., Bish., Ehem., Eev. ; 
 thorow, &o., Ttnd., Gov., Gen.: /or... 
 loues sake, Gov. Test. 
 
 5. While} When, Auth. and all 
 Vv. The change is only made to ex- 
 press more forcibly the existing state ; 
 see notes. By our trespasses] In 
 sins, AtiiH., WiOL., Gov.; thorow 
 synnes. Gov. Test. ; through our tres- 
 passes, Eev. The remaining Vv. give 
 what seems the more correct transl. 
 of the dative; by synne, Tynd.; by 
 synnes. Gran., Gen., Bish., Ehem. 
 Quickened] So Wicl., Gkan., Ehem., 
 Eev. : hath quickened, Atjth. and the 
 remaining Vv. Have ye been] 
 So Eev.: ye are, Auth., Gov. Test., 
 Gen. , Bish. ; ye ben, Wiol. ; are ye, 
 Ttnd., Gov., Gkan.; you are, Ehem. 
 On the simplest practical rule of 
 choosing between 'am' and 'have 
 been ' in the translation of the Greek 
 perf. pass., see notes on Col. i. i6 
 (Transl.). 'Are' might indeed be re- 
 tained on the ground that 'am' with 
 the part, does involve an essentially 
 past element (Latham, Eng. Lang. 
 § 568) ; still the change seems a little 
 more in harmony with the context. 
 
 6. Baised] So Wiol. (agenreisid) 
 Gran., Ehem., Eev.; hath raised, 
 AnTH. and the remaining Vv. Up 
 with Him] So Gov. (both), Ehem., 
 Eev. . to gidre, Wioi. ; vp tog. wyth 
 hym. Gran.; up together, AuiH. and 
 the remaining Vv. With Him (2)] 
 So Gov. (both), Ehem., Eev.; together 
 
 with him, Cban. : together, Auth. and 
 the remaining Vv. In the 
 
 heavenly regions] In h. places, Auth.; 
 in the h. places. Gen., Eev.; in h. 
 thingis, Wicl., Ttnd., Gov. (both), 
 Bish.; amonge them of heauen. Gran.; 
 in the celestials, Ehem. 
 
 7. That He might, &o.] So, as to 
 order, Wicl., Ttnd., Gen., Ehem.: 
 tliat in the ages to coine, he might, 
 Auth., Eev., and sim. Gov. (both), 
 Cran.,Bish. Shew forth] 
 Shew, Auth. and all the other Vv. 
 That are coming] Aboue corny ng, 'Wicl. ; 
 SMCccdinj, Ehem. ; to com.e, Atjtk. and 
 the other Vv. Surpassing] 
 Plenteuous, Wicl. ; abundaunte, Gov. 
 Test., Rhem. ; exceeding, Auth. and 
 the remaining Vv. In kindness] 
 So Ttnd., Gov., Gran., Eev.: in his 
 kindness, Auth., Bish.; in goodnes, 
 Wicl., Gov. Test. ; through his kind- 
 nes, Gen.; in bountie, Ehem. In 
 Chr. Jes.] So all the Vv. except 
 Auth., Cban., Bish., through Chr. 
 Jes. 
 
 8. Have ye been] So Eev. : are ye 
 Auth. ; see notes on ver. 5. And 
 this cometh] And this, Wicl.; and 
 that, Auth. and all remaining Vv. It 
 does not seem necessary to change 
 ' of ' into ' from,' the former being fre- 
 ijuently a very suitable translation of 
 ^k; see notes on Gal. ii. 16. T]te 
 gift is God's] It is the gift of God, 
 Auth. and all the other Vv. The 
 emphasis is maintained, appy. more 
 
Chap. II. 5 — 13. 
 
 171 
 
 selves, the gift is God's; not of works, that no man should 9 
 boast: for we are His workmanship, created in Christ 10 
 Jesus for good works, which God before prepared that we 
 should walk in them. 
 
 Wherefore remember, that aforetime ye, Gentiles in 
 the flesh, who are called the Uncircumcision by the so- 
 called Circumcision, performed by hand in the flesh, — 
 that ye were at that time without Christ, being aliens 
 from the commonwealth of Israel, and strangers from the 
 covenants of the promise, having no hope, and without 
 God in the world : but now in Christ Jesus ye who once 13 
 
 II 
 
 12 
 
 in aoeordanoe with English idiom, by 
 placing the gen. at the end rather 
 than at the beginning. 
 
 9. That no\ So Wicl., Ehem., 
 Eev. : lest any, Auth. and the re- 
 maining Vv. 
 
 10. For good works] So Eev.: in 
 g. w., WiOL., Gov. Test., Ehem.; unto 
 g. w., Auth. and the remaining Vv. 
 Which] Vnto the wh., Ttnd., Gov. (to). 
 Before prepared] Sim. Eev. : hath he- 
 fore ordained, Auth., Bish.; hath 
 ordeyned, Wiol., Gen. ; ordeyned vs 
 before, Ttnd., Gov.; hath prepared, 
 Gov. Test., Ehem. ; ordeyned, Gkan. 
 
 11. That aforetime ye] So Eev.: 
 *that ye being in time past, Adth. 
 This translation of iroTi (Gov.) is 
 perhaps a little simpler than that of 
 Auth. (and remainiag Vv. except 
 Wiol., Gov. Test., Ehem., sumtyme), 
 and serves equally well to keep up 
 the antithesis between irori and riji 
 Kaiplfi ixdvifi in ver. 12. The so- 
 called] That which is caUed, Auth. 
 (adding the), Gban., Bish., Ehem., 
 and sim. the remaining Vv. 
 Performed by hand in the flesh] So, 
 as to order, Wiol., made bi hand in 
 jleisch, and sim. Gov. Test., made 
 wyth hande in tltefkshe: in the flesh 
 made by hands, Auth. , Gen. {with h.), 
 Bish., Eev.; in the flesslie, which 
 
 circumcision is made by hondes, 
 Ttnd., Cban. ; after the flesh, whiche 
 circ. is made with the hande. Gov. 
 The transposition in the text seems 
 desirable, as marking that iv trapxl is 
 not to be closely connected with Xeyo- 
 fiivrts irepiT. (the error of Tynd., 
 Gkan., Gov., and sim. remaining Vv. ; 
 Eev, prefixes a comma), but rather 
 to be regarded as a separate member 
 qualifying what has preceded, and in 
 more immediate connexion with x«- 
 poTToi'/frov : see notes in loc. 
 
 12. Ye were ot tAat time] So Ttnd., 
 Eev., sim. Wicl., Ehem. -. ye were, I 
 say, at y' time, Gen. ; ye at the same 
 tyme were. Gov. ; at that time ye were, 
 Auth., Gran., Bish. 
 
 The promise] So Gban., Gov. Test., 
 Ehem., Eev.: ftifteest, Wiol.; promise, 
 Auth. and the remaining Vv. 
 
 13. Once] So Gen., Eev.: some- 
 times, Auth.; sumtyme, Wicl., Gov. 
 Test., Cban. , Bish. , Ehem. ; a whyle 
 agoo, Ttnd.; afore tyme. Gov. 
 
 Are become] Are now made, Gov. 
 (both) ; are made, Auth. and the 
 other Vv. The change however 
 
 seems desirable, if only to obviate 
 the supposition that iycvifiSiiTe is 
 here used with » passive force; see 
 notes on ch. iii. 7. The aorist can- 
 not be preserved in English when in 
 
172 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 14 were far off are become nigh by tbe blood of Christ. For 
 He is our Peace, who made both one, aad broke down the 
 
 15 middle wall of the partition — to wit, the enmity — in His 
 flesh, having abolished the law of commandments ex- 
 pressed in decrees ; that He might make the two in Him- 
 
 16 self into one new man, so making peace, and might recon- 
 cile again both of us in one body to God by the cross, 
 
 17 having slain the enmity thereby. And He came and 
 preached peace to you which were afar off, and peace to 
 
 1 8 them that were nigh ; since through Him we both in one 
 
 association with tlie particle of pre- 
 sent time (vvrC) ; oomp. notes on oh. 
 iii. 5. 
 
 14. Made] So Wicl., Eev. : Mth 
 made, Aoth. and all the remaining 
 Vv. Broke down] Vnbyndynge, 
 
 Wicl. ; hath broken down, Auth. , 
 TiND., Gov., Oban., Bish.; broken 
 downe. Gov. Test.; hathe broken. 
 Gen. ; dissoluing, Ehem. ; bi'ake down, 
 Eev. The middle wall of the 
 
 partition] So Ehem., Eev. (omits 
 the): the middle wall of partition 
 between us, Auth. ; the myddil walle 
 of a wal with out morter, Wicl. ; the 
 wall that was a stoppe bitwene vs, 
 Ttnd., Gov., Gkan., Bish. (my die 
 wal); the myd wall of y' stoppe, Gov. 
 Test.; the stoppe of the particion 
 wall, Gen. 
 
 15. Towit,th£enmity,&a.]IIaving 
 abolished in his flesh the enmity, even, 
 Auth., Bev., and similarly as to con- 
 nexion the other Vv. except Wicl., 
 Cov. Test., Ehem., which, as follow- 
 ing the Vulg., appy. connect iv <rap. 
 with T^v ix0p., and iv Sdy/i.. with 
 xarapy. -. see notes. Ex- 
 
 pressed, &o.] Gontaineiin ordinances, 
 Auth., Bish., Eev.; contayned m 
 the lawe written, Ttnd., Gov., Gean. ; 
 which standeth in ordinances. Gen. ; 
 bi domes, Wicl.; by judgementes. 
 Gov. Test.; in decrees, Ehem., see 
 previous note. Tliat he might 
 
 make] So Gov. Test. (that. ..he myght 
 make); for to make, Auth., Ttnd., 
 Gban., Gen., Bish.; that he make, 
 Wicl.; that. ..he mighte create, Gov.; 
 that he may cr., Ehem. ; that he 
 might create in himself, Eev. 
 The two in Himself] So Ehem.; ij. in 
 hym silf, Wicl.; in hymselfe...two. 
 Gov. Test.;OT himself, of twain, Kvtb.; 
 oftwayne...in him silfe, Tynd., Gov., 
 Gean., Gen., Bish. Into one] So 
 
 Wicl., Ehem.; in one, Gov. Test.; 
 one, Auth. and the remaining Vv. 
 
 16. And might] So Eev.: and 
 that he might, Auth. Reconcile 
 again] Reconcile, Auth. and all the 
 other Vv. ; see notes in loc. Both 
 of us] Both, Auth. and all the other 
 Vv. except Eev., them both. 
 
 In one body unto God] So Eev., and 
 sim. Gov. Test.: in bodi to god, 
 Wicl., Ehem. ; unto God in one body, 
 Auth. and the remaining Vv. 
 
 17. And He came and] So Eev.: 
 and he comynge, Wicl., Gov. Test. ; 
 and camming he, Ehem. ; and came 
 and, Auth. and the remaining Vv. 
 And peace to] And *to, Auth., Eev. 
 
 18. Since] For, Auth. and all the 
 other Vv. Both in one Spirit] So 
 Ehem.: both... by one Spirit, Auth., 
 and similarly, as to order, all the re- 
 maining Vv. The only two Vv. that 
 adopt the translation 'by' are Gen. 
 and Auth., all the rest more correctly 
 
Chap. II. 14— III. 4. 
 
 173 
 
 Spirit have our admission unto the Father. So then ye 19 
 are no more strangers and sojourners, hut ye are fellow- 
 citizens with the saints, and of the household of God, 
 built up upon the foundation of the apostles and pro- 20 
 phets, Jesus Christ Himself being the chief comer stone ; 
 in whom all the building being fitly framed together 21 
 groweth unto an holy temple in the Lord ; in whom ye 22 
 also are builded together for an habitation of God in the 
 Spirit. 
 
 For this cause I Paul, the prisoner of Christ Jesus for III. 
 you Gentiles, — if indeed ye have heard of the dispensation 2 
 of the grace of God which was given me to you -ward ; how 3 
 that BY REVELATION the mystery was made known to me, 
 as I have before written in few words ; in accordance with 4 
 
 adopt 'in.' Our admissio7i\ An 
 
 access, Auth. ; ni/g comynge, Wiol. ; 
 an open waye in, Ttnd.; intraunce. 
 Gov.; an intr.. Gov. Test., Gran., 
 Gen., Bish.; accesse, Ehem. ; mir 
 access, Rev. 
 
 19. So then] So Rev. : therfor 
 now, WicL.; therfor. Gov. Test.; 
 now then, Rhem. ; now therefore, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. Stran- 
 gers and sojourners] So Ret.: gestis 
 and straungers, Wicl., Gov. (both) ; 
 str. and foreigners, Auth. and all 
 other Vv. But ye are] So Gov. 
 Test., Wicl., Rhem. {you), Rev. ; 
 * but, Auth. and all other Vv. 
 
 20. Built up] Abouebildid, Wicl. ; 
 buylded. Gov. (both); built, Rhem., 
 Rev.; and are built, Auth. and the 
 other Vv. 
 
 21. All the building] So Auth., 
 Gen., Bish.; eche bildynge, Wicl.; 
 every bildynge, Ttnd., Cot. (both); 
 what buyldyng soeuer, Gban. ; al 
 building, Rhem. ; each several build- 
 ing, Ret. ; see notes. Being fitly] 
 Fitly, Auth., Ret. 
 
 22. Ye also] You also, Auth. 
 
 In the Spirit] So Ttnd., Cot., Rev. ; 
 in the honli gooste, WioL., Cot. Test., 
 
 Cran. {thorow), Rhem. : through the 
 Sp., Auth., Bish. ; by the Sp., Gen. 
 
 Chapter m. i . Christ Jesus] So 
 Wiol., Ret.; Jesus Christ, Adth.' 
 and all the other Vt., but ■without 
 any difference of reading ia the Rec. 
 Text. 
 
 ■i. If indeed] If, Auth., Ttnd., 
 Cban., Gen., Bish.; if netheless, 
 Wicl. ; accordinge as, Gov. ; yf so be 
 yet that, Got. Test., Ret. (omits yet); 
 if yet, Rhem. Which, &o.] It 
 
 is nearly impossible (without para- 
 phrase) to imply that 'which' refers 
 to 'grace.' In the edition of 1611 
 'God' was followed by a comma: 
 that grace, Ret. Was given] 
 
 So Ret. : is given, Auth. and all the 
 other Vt. 
 
 3. The mystery, &o.] So Rev.: 
 * he made knewn unto me the mystery, 
 Auth. Have before written] 
 Wrote afore, Auth., Gov. Test., 
 Cran., Bish., Rev.; aboue wrote, 
 Wiol. ; wrote above, Ttnd., Gov., 
 Gen.; haue written before, Rhem. 
 
 4. In accordance with which] As, 
 Wicl.; like as. Gov. Test.; according 
 as, Rhem.; whereby, Auth. and the 
 
174 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 which, when ye read, ye can perceive my understanding 
 
 5 in the mystery of Christ, which in other generations was 
 not made known to the sons of men, as it hath now been 
 revealed to His holy apostles and prophets by the Spirit ; 
 
 6 to wit, that the Gentiles are fellow-heirs, and of the same 
 body, and joint-partakers of the promise, in Christ Jesus, 
 
 7 through the Gospel; whereof I became a minister, ac- 
 cording to the gift of the grace of God, which was given 
 
 8 to me according to the operation of His power. To me, 
 
 remaining Vv. Can} May, Auth. 
 
 and all the otlier Vv., but not cor- 
 rectly; tlie rule apparently being, 'may 
 et can potentiam innuunt, cum hoc 
 tamen disorimine, may et might vel de 
 jure vel saltern de rei possibilitate di- 
 cuntur, at can et could de viribus a- 
 gentis ;' Wallis, Gramm. Angl. p. 107. 
 Perceive my understandingi So Gov., 
 Eev. : wnderstand my knowledge, 
 AuiH., Cean., Bish. ; knowe myne 
 vnderstondynge, Tynd., Gen.; vndur- 
 stonde my prudence, Wicl., Gov. 
 Test. ; vnd. my vvisedom, Rhem. 
 
 5. Other generations] So Wicl., 
 Gov. Test., Ehem., Eev. : other ages, 
 Auth., Geh., Bish.; tymes passed, 
 Tynd., Gov. {past), Gean. It 
 hath now been] So Eev. ; it is now, 
 Atjih. and the other Vv. except 
 Ehem., now it is. This is a case 
 where the strict translation cannot 
 be maiatained: in English the aorist 
 has no connexion with pres. time 
 (Latham, Engl. Lang. § 579), and 
 therefore cannot here properly be con- 
 nected with vOv ; in Greek this is pos- 
 sible, from the greater temporal lati- 
 tude of the tense; comp. notes on 
 I Tim. V. 15 [Transl.). 
 
 6. To wit, that] So Eev., and 
 similarly Gov., namely, tliat; how y'. 
 Gov. Test. ; that, Auth. and the re- 
 maining Vv. except Ehem. (which is 
 excessively harsh), the Gentils to 
 be. Are] So Wiol., Gov. Test., 
 
 Eev.: should be, Auth. and the re- 
 maining Vv. except Ehem., to be; see 
 above. Joint-partakers] Sim. 
 
 Gov. Test., lyke partakers, and Eev. 
 fellow partakers ; parteneris to gidre, 
 Wicl. ; comparticipant, Ehem. ; par- 
 takers, Auth. and the remaining 
 Vv. The promise] So Eev. : * his 
 
 promise, Auth. Christ Jesus] 
 
 So Eev. : * Christ, Auth. 
 Through] So Gov. Test., Eev.: by the 
 meanes of, Tynd., Gkan. ; by, Auth. 
 and the remaining Vv. 
 
 7. I became] I was made, Auth., 
 Bish,, Eev. ; I am made, Wicl. and 
 all the remaining Vv. Which 
 was given] So Eev. : whiche is gouun, 
 Wicl., Gov. (both), Gkan., Bish., 
 Ehem. ; given, Auth. and the re- 
 maining Vv. According to (2)] 
 So Gov., Ehem., Eev.: by, Auth., 
 Wicl.; thorow, Tynd., Gen.; after. 
 Gov. Test, Gran., Bish. 
 Operation] So Ehem. : effectual work- 
 ing, Auth. ; worchynge, Wiol. and all 
 the remaining Vv. This word is al- 
 ways difficult to translate: ' effec- 
 tual working' is perhaps too strong; 
 'working' alone is appy. too weak. 
 Perhaps the term in the text as mark- 
 ing a more formal nature of working 
 is slightly preferable ; comp. notes on 
 2 Thess. ii. 11, where however the 
 present translation would seem less 
 suitable. 
 
 8. Was] So Eev. : is, Auth. and 
 
Chap. III. 5 — 15. 
 
 175 
 
 who am less than the least of all saints, was this grace 
 given, — to preach among the Gentiles the unsearchable 
 riches of Christ, and to make all men see what is the dis- 9 
 pensation of the mystery, which from the ages hath been 
 hid in God, who created all things ; to the intent that 10 
 now to the Principalities and the Powers in the heavenly 
 regions might be made known through the church the 
 manifold wisdom of God, according to the purpose of the 1 1 
 ages which he made in Christ Jesus our Lord; in whom 12 
 we have our boldness and our admission, in confidence, 
 through the faith in Him. Wherefore I entreat you not 1 3 
 to lose heart in my tribulations for you, seeing it is your 
 
 glory- 14 
 
 For this cause I bow my knees unto the Father, from j - 
 
 all the other Vv. To preach] So 
 
 Wicii., Gov. Test., Eet. ; to euange- 
 lize, Ehem.: tJiat I should preach, 
 AuTH. and aU the remaimng Vv. 
 The change is made to preserve a 
 similar translation of the two in- 
 finitives ; see Scholef. Hints, p. 
 100. 
 
 9. Dispensatiori] * Fellowship, 
 Adth. From the ages] Sim. Eev. : 
 fro worldis, Wicl., Bhem.; sence the 
 ■worlde beganne. Gov. Test. ; from the 
 beginning of the world, Auth. and 
 the other Vv. All things] 'All 
 things by J. C, Atjth. 
 
 10. The powers] So Eev. : powers, 
 AuTH. and the other Vv. except Wicl., 
 Bhem., potestatis. The heavenly 
 regions]Heavenly places,AiiTs,,GsN,, 
 Eev. (inserts the) ; heuenli thingis, 
 Wici,., Gov. Test., Ckan., Bish. ; 
 heven, Tynd., Gov.; the celestials, 
 Bhem. Might be made known] 
 So Bev. : might be hnown, Anin. 
 and the other Vv. except Wicl., be 
 hnowun, and Bhem., may be noti- 
 fied. Through] So Eev.: by, 
 AuiH. and all the other Vv. 
 
 11. Purpose of the ages] Eter- 
 nal purpose, AuTH. and the other 
 
 Vv. except Wicl., bifor ordenaunce 
 of worldis, and Ehem., prefinition 
 of worldes. Made] So Wicl., 
 
 Bi^^TH..; purposed, Auth., Tynd., Eev.; 
 wrought, Cban., Gen., Bish.; hath 
 shewed, Gov. (both). 
 
 12. Have our boldness] Save bold- 
 ness, AniH., Gov., OKiN., Gen., 
 Bish., Bev.; lian trist, Wicl., Gov. 
 Test.; are bolde, Tynd. ; hau£ affiance, 
 Ehem. 
 
 And our admission] And access, Adth. , 
 Ehem. ; and nyg comynge, Wicl. ; to 
 drawe nye, Tyhd. ; and intraunce, 
 Gov. (both), Gean., Gen., Bish. 
 In confidenAie] So Eev., and so, as re- 
 gards the prep., Wicl., Gov. (both), 
 Bish., Ehem.: with, Auth., Cban., 
 Gen. The words rriv TpoffayojyTjv iv 
 ireToLBriffei are joined together by 
 Tynd. and appy. all the Vv. except 
 Wicl., and Auth. (ed. 1611). 
 
 13. I entreat you, &a.] I desire 
 that ye {you, Ehem.) faint not, Adth. 
 and the remaining Vv. except Wicl. , 
 I axe : that ye faile not. Seeing 
 it is] Which is, Auth., and aU the 
 other Vv. except Bev. , which are. 
 
 14. The Father] The Father *of 
 our Lord Jesus Christ, Auth. 
 
17G 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 whom every race in heaven and on earth is ihiis named, 
 
 1 6 that He would grant you, according to the riches of His 
 glory, to be strengthened with might through His Spirit 
 
 17 in the inner man, so that Christ may dwell in your hearts 
 
 1 8 by faith, — ye having been rooted and grounded in love, — 
 that ye may be fully able to comprehend with all saints 
 what is the breadth, and length, and depth, and height, 
 
 19 and to know the love of Christ which passeth knowledge, 
 that ye may be filled up to all the fulness of God. 
 
 20 Now to Him that is able to do beyond all things, 
 abundantly beyond what we ask or think, according to 
 
 21 the power that worketh in us, to Him he glory in the 
 church, and in Christ Jesus, to all the generations of the 
 age of the ages. Amen. 
 
 ye, WiOL., Ehem. (you) ; that ye (you. 
 Cot. Test.) being, Auth. and the re- 
 maining Vv. ; to the end that, Eev. 
 May be fully able to] May be able to, 
 Auth., Gov., Gen., Ehem. ; mown, 
 WiCL., Gov. Test. ; myght be able to, 
 Ttnd., Gean., Bish. ; may be strong, 
 Eev. 
 
 19. May] So Gov. (both), Gen., 
 Ehem., Eev.: might, Auth., Ttnd., 
 Gkan., Bish. ; omitted hy Wicl. The 
 change is made to avoid the violation 
 of the law of ' the succession of tenses;' 
 see Latham, JEngl. Lang. % 616. 
 Up to] In, Wicl.; into, Gov. Test.; 
 vnto, Ehem., Eev. ; with, Auth. and 
 the remaining Vv. 
 
 20. Beyond all things, &o.] Alle 
 thingis more plenteuortsli (abundaunt- 
 ly. Gov. Test., Ehem.) tftamne, Wicl,, 
 exceeding abundantly above all that, 
 Auth. and the other Vv. 
 
 21. And in Ghr. Jes.] So Wicl., 
 Gov. Test., Ehem., Eev.: *by Chr. 
 </cs.,Auih. {Jes. Gftr., Ttnd., Oban.), 
 Gen., Bish.; which is in Chr. Jes., 
 Gov. To all the generations, 
 &a.] Throughout all ages, world with- 
 out end, Auth., Bish. ; in to alle the 
 generacioum of the worldis, Wicl. ; 
 
 1 5. From] So Eev. : of, Auth. and 
 the other Vv. except Tynd., Gov., 
 Oran., which paraphrase. Every 
 race] The whole family, Auth., Gen.; 
 eche fadirheed, Wicl.; al fatherhode. 
 Gov. Teat. ; all that ys called father, 
 Ttnd., Gov., Oban.; al the familie, 
 Bish. ; al paternitie, Ehem. ; every 
 family, Eev. On the difficulty of 
 properly translating this clause, see 
 Trench on Auth. Ver. ch. 11. p. 26 
 (ed. 2). And on earth] So Eev. : 
 and earth, Auth. Is thus 
 named] Is named, Auth. The word 
 thus is introduced only to make the 
 paronomasia in the original a little 
 more apparent. 
 
 16. Through] So Eev.: by, Auth. 
 and all the other Vv. In the 
 inner man] In the former edd. 'into' 
 was adopted, as designed to mark 
 that inflowing of spiritual strength 
 which is so clearly implied in the 
 original. It seems however contrary 
 to the idiom of our language, and so 
 has heen altered. 
 
 17. So that] That, Auth. and the 
 other Vv. except Ehem., Ghr. to 
 dvvel, 
 
 18. Te having heen . , . tliat ye] That 
 
Chap. III. i6— IV. i— 8. 
 
 177 
 
 I exhort you therefore, I the prisoner in the Lord, that IV. 
 ye walk worthy of the calling wherewith ye were called, 
 with all lowliness and meekness, with longsuffering, for- 2 
 bearing one another in love ; giving diligence to keep the 3 
 unity of the Spirit in the bond of peace. There is one 4 
 body, and one Spirit, even as ye were called in one hope 
 of your calling ; one Lord, one faith, one baptism ; one S 
 God and Father of all, who is over all, and through aU, ° 
 and in all. 
 
 But to each one of us the grace which he has was 7 
 given according to the measure of the gift of Christ. 
 Wherefore He saith. When He ascended on high. He led 8 
 
 thorowout all gen. from tyme to tyme, 
 Ttnd., Cran.; at all tymes for euer 
 and euer, Gov.; into all gen. of the 
 worlde ofworldes, Gov. Teat.; through- 
 out all gen. for euer, Gen. ; vnto al 
 gen. world without end, Bhem. ; unto 
 all generations for ever and ever, Eev. 
 
 GsASTER rV. I. / exhort you, &c.] 
 I therefore the prisoner. ..beseech you 
 that, AniH., and in similar order all 
 the other Vv. It seems however de- 
 sirable to maintain the emphatic col- 
 location ('ad excitandum affectum, 
 quo sit efficacior exhortatio,' Est.) of 
 the original. There is some variation 
 in the translation of wapaKaXw. The 
 translation in the text is found in 
 Tynd., Gov., Cean., Bish. : beseech, 
 AuTH., WiOL., Gov. Test., Ehem., 
 Eev.; praye. Gen. In the 
 
 Lord} So Gov. (both), Gen., Bish., 
 Ehem. {our X.), Eev.; of the Lord, 
 AuTH. ; of the Lordes, Cean. ; for the 
 lord, Wioii.; for the lordes sake, 
 TiHD. Calling] So WiOL. 
 
 (clepynge). Gov. (both), Eev.: voca- 
 tion, AuTH. and the remaining Vv. 
 Were called] So Eev. : are called, 
 AuTH. and all the other Vv. 
 
 3. Giving diligence] So Eev., and 
 sim. Tynd., Cean. ; bisie, Wicl. ; 
 beynge carefull. Gov. Test.; careful, 
 
 Ehem. ; endeavowring, AuiH., Gen. , 
 Bish. The present current use of 
 the verb 'endeavour' seems to fall so 
 short of the real meaning of (rirovdi- 
 j^eiv as to warrant the change in the 
 text, as more clearly indicative of the 
 airovBii and zeal that was evinced in 
 the matter; see Trench ore Auth. Ver. 
 ch. in. p. 43. 
 
 4. There is, &c.] It can scarcely be 
 doubted that Auth., Eev. are right 
 in retaining (after Gen.) this asser- 
 tory form. Some of the older Vv., 
 Wicl., Gov. (both), Bish., Ehem., 
 supply nothing; others, Tynd., Cean., 
 supply the particle beynge; both of 
 which forms fail to convey the force 
 of the original; see notes. Were 
 called] So Eev.: are called, Auth. 
 and aU the other Vv. 
 
 6. Over] So Ehem., Eev.: above, 
 Auth. and aU the remaining Vv. 
 
 In aU] In *you all, Auth. 
 
 7. Eaeh one] So Eev., and sim. 
 'Wicl., eche: every one, Atjih. and 
 the remaining Vv. This change 
 seems desirable to avoid a confusion 
 with the usual translation of vaprl. 
 The grace which, &c.] Is given grace, 
 Auth. and the other Vv. except 
 Wicl., grace is gouun; Eev., was 
 the grace given. 
 
 8. Ascended] So Eev.: ascended 
 
 N 
 
178 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 9 captivity captive, He gave gifts to men. Now that He 
 ascended, what doth it imply but that He also descended 
 
 10 into the lower parts of the earth ? He that descended, 
 He it is that ascended above all the heavens, that He 
 
 1 1 might fill all things. And Himself gave some to he 
 Apostles ; and some. Prophets ; and some. Evangelists ; 
 
 12 and some. Pastors and Teachers; with a view to the per- 
 fecting of the saints, for the work of ministration, for the 
 
 13 building up of the body of Christ; till we all arrive at 
 the unity of the faith and of the full knowledge of the 
 Son of God, unto a full-grown man, unto the measure of 
 
 up, AuTH. Se gave] * And gave. Of ministration] So Bish., and aim. 
 
 AUTH. 
 
 9. What doth it imply'] What is it? 
 AniH., WioL., Cov. (both), Gen., 
 Bish., Ehbm., Ehv. ; what meaneth 
 it? Ttnd., Cran. Descended] 
 Descended * first, Auth. 
 
 10. He it is] So WiOL. : is the same 
 also, Auth., Bev. ; the same is he... 
 also, Cov. Test. ; the same is also he, 
 Ehem. ; is even the same also, Ttnd., 
 Cban., Bish.; is euen the same, Cov., 
 Gen. 
 
 Ascended] So Ebv. : ascended up, 
 Auth. 
 
 Above] So Cov. (both), Cean., Bhem. : 
 far above, Auth., Eev. The hea- 
 
 vens] So Cov. Test., Ehem., Eev. : 
 heavens, Auth. and the remaining Vv. 
 
 11. And Himself] And he, Auth., 
 Wioii., Gov. Test., Bish., Ehem., 
 Eev.; and the very same, Tynd., 
 Cban.; and y same, Cov.; he there- 
 fore, Gen. 
 
 To be Apostles] So Gov., Gen., Eev. ; 
 Apostles, Auth. and the remaining 
 Vv. The insertion of the words in 
 italics seems necessary to make the 
 sense perfectly clear. 
 
 12. With u, view to] For, Auth., 
 Cov. Test., Gen., Eev.; to, Wiol., 
 Gban., Bish., Ehem. The two re- 
 maining Vv., TxND. and Gov., here 
 paraphrase. 
 
 Cov. Test., of tlie ministration: of 
 the ministry, Auth., Gen., Ehem. ; 
 of mynysteri, Wiol. ; and minystra- 
 cyon, Gban. ; of ministering, Eev. , 
 Ttnd. and Cov. paraphrase. The 
 building up] So Eev.: the edifying, 
 Auth. and the other Vv. except 
 Wiol., edificacioun, and Gen. the 
 edification. This translation is per- 
 haps slightly preferable to that of 
 Auth. and to that adopted in ed. i 
 ('edification'), as both verb and sub- 
 stantive are now commonly associated 
 with what is simply instructive or im- 
 proving, without necessarily suggest- 
 ing the wider sense which seems to 
 prevail in the present passage. The 
 article is required by the principles of 
 English idiom, though confessedly 
 thus not in exact harmony with the 
 Greek. 
 
 13. All arrive at] Allcome in, Auth.; 
 rennen alle in to, Wiol. ; all came 
 vnto. Gov., (into) Gov. Test., (to) 
 Gran. ; all mete together in. Gen., (in- 
 to) Bish.; meete al into, Ehem.; all 
 attain unto, Eev., Tynd., inverting 
 the ordei', every one (in the vnitie...) 
 growe vp vnto, &o. 
 
 The full knowledge] The knowledge, 
 Auth., Eev. : all the other Vv. omit 
 the article. Full-grown] So Eev. : 
 perfect, Auth. and all the other Vv. 
 
Chap. IV. 9 — 16. 
 
 179 
 
 the stature of the fulness of Christ: that we may no 14 
 longer be children, tossed to and fro and borne about by 
 every wind of doctrine, in the sleight of men, in crafti- 
 ness tending to the settled system of Error ; but holding 1 5 
 the truth may in love grow up into Him in all things, 
 which is the head, even Christ : from whom the whole 16 
 body being fitly framed together and compacted by means 
 of every joint of the spiritvxil supply, according to active 
 working in the measure of each single part, promoteth 
 the increase of the body for the building up of itself in 
 love. 
 
 14. May no longer be] Sim. Eev. 
 (6e no longer) : henceforth be no more, 
 AuTH. Borne about by] Borun 
 
 aboute with, Wici/. ; caryed with, 
 Tynd. ; carried about with, Auth. 
 and the remaining Vt. In... in] 
 
 So WioL., Gov. Test., Bish., Ehem. : 
 by... and, Auth. , Ttnd. ; thorow ...and, 
 Gov.; by...thorow,GitAs.; 6i/...in,EEV. 
 Craftiness] So all Vv. except the fol- 
 lowing : cunning c, Auth. ; sutilwitte, 
 WiOL. ; sutylte, Gov. Test. 
 Tending, &B.] Whereby they lie in wait 
 to deceive, Auth., Gen.; to the dis- 
 ceyuynge of errour, WiOL. ; wherby 
 they laye a wayte for vs to deeeave vs, 
 Tynd. , Gov., Gran. ; to the deceatful- 
 nes of erroure, Gov. Test. ; to the laye- 
 ing wayte of deceipt, Bish. ; to the 
 circumuention of errour, Ehem. ; after 
 the wiles of error, Eev. It is by no 
 means easy to devise a literal and at 
 the same time perfectly intelligible 
 translation of the last clause of this 
 verse. The difficulty lies mainly in 
 the brief and almost eUiptioal form 
 of expression introduced by the prep. : 
 of the translations that have hitherto 
 been proposed, that in the text, or 
 'furthering, promoting the system, 
 i^c' (but see notes on Phil. iv. 17, 
 Transl.), or more simply, 'with a view 
 to the system, d;c.,' seems the most 
 suitable. 
 
 15. Molding the truth] SpeaTting the 
 truth, Auth., Eev. (omits the); do we 
 
 truthe and, Wicl.; let vs folowe 
 
 the trueth...and, Tvnd., Gov., Gran., 
 Gen. ; perfowmynge the truth. Gov. 
 Test. ; folowing trueth, Bish. ; doing 
 the truth, Ehem. May in love] 
 
 In love, may, Auth., Eev. 
 
 16. Being fitly framed together] 
 Sim. Eev. : fitly joined together,Ax!TB.. 
 It seems desirable to retain the same 
 translation here and in ch. iL 21. 
 Compacted] So Auth. The trans- 
 lation of several of the older Vv., 
 knet togedder (Ttnd., Gov. Test., 
 Gban., Gen., Bish., Eev.), is not un- 
 satisfactory; 'compacted' however 
 has the advantage of preserving the 
 crvv in each verb without repetition, 
 otherwise 'knit together' would per- 
 haps have been a more genuinely 
 EngUsh translation. By means of, 
 &B.] By that which every joint suppli- 
 eth, Auth., Eev. {through that c&c.) 
 bi eche ioynture of vndir seruynge, 
 Wicl.; in every ioint wherwith one 
 ministreth to another, Ttnd., and 
 similarly Cean. {thorow out euery, 
 &c.); thorow out all y' ioyntes. 
 Wherby one mynistreth vnto another, 
 Gov. ; thorowe out euery joynt of sub- 
 ministration. Gov. Test. ; by euerie 
 joynt, for the furniture thereof, Gen.; 
 
 by euery joynt, yeeldyng nourishment, 
 
 N 2 
 
180 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 17 This then I say, and testify in the Lord, that ye must 
 no longer walk as the Gentiles also walk, in the vanity of 
 
 18 their mind, being darkened in their understanding, 
 alienated from the life of God because of the ignorance 
 that is in them, because of the hardness of their heart : 
 
 19 who as men past feeling have given themselves over 
 unto Wantonness, for the working of all manner of un- 
 
 BiSH.; iy al ivncture of suhministra- 
 tion, Ehem. Active working] 
 
 The effectual working, Auth.; worcli- 
 ynge, Wicl. ; the operacion, Ttnd., 
 Gov. (both), Ckan., Ehem.; the ef- 
 fectiml power, Gen., Bish. ; the work- 
 ing. The addition of the epithet 
 'active' or 'vital,' All, — if in italics 
 (see notes on ch. iii. 7, and on 1 
 Thess. ii. 11), may perhaps here be 
 rightly admitted as serving slightly 
 to clear up the meaning. 
 Each single] Sim. Wiol., eche, Eev., 
 each several: every, Auth. and all 
 the remaining Vv. ; see notes on 
 verse 7. Promoteth the increase] 
 
 Maketh increase, Aviu., Gov. Test., 
 Bish.; makith encreesynge, "Wiol.; 
 receiueth increase, Gen.; maketh the 
 increase, Ehem., Eev.; Ttnd., Gov., 
 Gean., slightly paraphrase. The more 
 modern term 'promoteth,' seems ad- 
 missible as both literal and also 
 tending to clear up the sense. 
 For the building up] Sim. Eev., unto 
 the edifying, Auth. It seems de- 
 sirable, for the sake of uniformity, 
 to preserve the same translation as 
 in ver. 12 ; the simplest (paraphrastic) 
 translation would be 'so as to build 
 itself up in love.' 
 
 17. This then I say] This I say 
 therefore, Auth. and the other Vv. 
 except Wiol., therfor I seie, and 
 Ehem., this therfore I say. The re- 
 sumptive character of the address is 
 appy. here best preserved by the more 
 literal translation of oii/ ; oomp. notes 
 on 1 Tim. ii. i. Ye must no 
 
 longer walk] Sim. Eev., Ye no longer: 
 ye henceforth walk not, Auxh., Tynd., 
 Gran., Gen., Bish.; ye walke not 
 now, Wiol., Gov. Test.; ye walhe 
 nomore, Gov. ; now you walke not, 
 Ehem. The Gentiles] So Ehem., 
 
 Eev. : The * other Gentiles, Auth. 
 AUo walk] So Eev.: sim. Gov. Test., 
 also do walke: walk, Auth. and the 
 other Vv. except Ehem., which in- 
 serts also, but before the Gentiles. 
 
 18. Being darkened in their 
 understanding] So Eev. : having the 
 understanding darkened, Auth. ; that 
 han vndirstondynge derknedwith derk- 
 nessis, Wicl. ; blynded in their vnd., 
 Tynd. , Gov. ; hauynge an und. blynded 
 through darknesse, Gov. Test. ; whyle 
 they are blynded in their vnd., Cean. ; 
 hauing their cogitation darkened. 
 Gen. ; darkened in cogitation, Bish. ; 
 hauing their vnd. obscured with 
 darkenes, Bhem. 
 
 Alienated] So Eev. : being alienated, 
 Auth. On account of the absence 
 of Svres in the second member, it 
 seems best to omit the part, of the 
 verb substantive. Became of (i)] 
 
 So Rev. : through, Auth. 
 Hardness] So Gen. and sim. Rev., 
 hardening: blindness, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv.; see Trench on Auth. 
 Ver. ch. vii. p. 117. 
 
 19. Who as men] Who being, 
 Auth., Eev., and sim., as to the 
 translation of oirives, all the other Vv. 
 Wantonness] So Tynd., Gov., Cean., 
 Gen., Bish.: lascimousness, Auth., 
 Eev. ; vnchastite, Wiol. ; vnclennesse. 
 
Chap. IV. 17 — 24. 
 
 181 
 
 cleanness in greediness. But TE did not so learn Christ ; 20 
 if indeed ye heard Him and were taught in Him, as is 21 
 truth in Jesus, that ye must put off, as concerns your 22 
 former conversation, the old man, which waxeth corrupt 
 according to the lusts of Deceit, and rather become re- 23 
 newed by the Spirit of your mind, and put on the new 24 
 man, which after God's image hath been created in righte- 
 ousness and holiness of Truth. 
 
 Gov. Test. ; impudicitie, Ehem. The 
 article joined ■with it tends ahnost to 
 personify it, hence the capital in the 
 Text. For the working of] 
 
 Sim. WicL., in to the worchynge of; 
 in the workynge of, Gov. Test. ; vnto 
 the operation of, Ehem.: to work, 
 AuTH. and the remaining Vv. 
 All manner of] So Tynd., Gov., 
 Cban. : all, Auih. and the remainiag 
 Vv.; see notes on ver 31. 
 Uncleanness] So aU Vv. except Gov. 
 Test., fylthynesse. In 
 
 greediness] In coueitise, Wiol. ; unto 
 gr.. Gov. Test.; vnto auarice, Ehem.; 
 with greediness, Auth., Bish., Eev. ; 
 even with gr., Tynd. and remaining 
 Vv. This translation of ir\eoveila 
 may be retained if qualified by the 
 remarks in loc, and not understood 
 as indicating a mere general anerpla. 
 The true idea of ir'Keove^la is 'amor 
 habendi : ' the objects to which it is 
 directed will be defined by the con- 
 text. 
 
 20. Did not so learn] So Eev.: 
 have not so learned, Auth. and all 
 the other Vv. 
 
 21. If indeed] If so be that, Auth. , 
 Gov., Gean., Bish., Eev.; ifnetheles, 
 WiCL. ; if so be, Tthd. , Gen. ; yf so 
 be yet that, Gov. Test.; if yet, 
 Ehek. 
 
 Heard] So Wicl., Eev. : have heard, 
 Auth. and aU the remaining Vv. 
 Were taught in Him] So Eev. : have 
 been taught by him, Auth., Gen ; 
 
 ben taugte in hym, Wicl., Tynd., 
 Gov. ; be instructe in hym. Gov. Test. ; 
 haue bene taught in him, Gean. and 
 the remaining Vv. As is truth] 
 
 So Wiol. : even as the tr. is, Tynd., 
 Gov., Eev. (omits tfte); as the truth 
 is, Auth. and the remaining Vv. 
 
 32. That ye must] That ye, Auth., 
 Eev. As concerns your] Con- 
 
 cerning the, Auth.; as concerning 
 your, Eev. Waxeth corrupt] So 
 
 Eev.: is corrupt, Auth. and the 
 other Vv. except Gov. , marreth him- 
 selfe, and Ehem., is corrupted. 
 Lusts of Deceit] So Eev. : deceitful 
 lusts, Auth. ; desiris of errour, Wiol., . 
 Ehem. ; deceavable lustes, Tynd., Gov., 
 Gban., Gen. ; lustes of erroure, Gov. 
 Test., Bish. 
 
 23. And rather] And, Auth., Eev. 
 Become renewed] Be renewed, Auth., 
 Eev. This change is made as an 
 attempt to express the contrast be- 
 tween the pres. dvaveovaBai, and the 
 aor. hSiaaaBai. 
 
 By the Spirit] In the spirit, Auth. 
 and all the other Vv. 
 
 24. And put on] So Gov. (both), 
 Gen., Eev. : and that yeput on, Auth. 
 After God's image] Sim. Tynd., after 
 the ymage of God: after God, Auth. 
 and the other Vv. except Ehem., ac- 
 cording to God. The order of the 
 Greek riv Kara Qehv Kno-B. is simi- 
 larly retained by all the Vv. except 
 Wicl., Gov. (both). It may be ob- 
 served that the transl. of Ehem., 'ac- 
 
182 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 25 Wherefore, having put away Falsehood, speak truth 
 each man with his neighbour ; because we are members 
 
 26 one of another. Be angry, and sin not : let not the sun 
 
 27 go down upon your angered mood ; nor yet give place to 
 
 28 the devil. Let the stealer steal no more : but rather let 
 him labour, working with his own hands the thing that 
 is good, that he may have whereof to give to him that 
 
 29 needeth. Let no corrupt speech proceed out of your 
 
 cording to,' has the advantage of pre- 
 serving the antithesis Karli ras iiriB. 
 K.T.\ (ver. 23), and Kari, Qe6v, but 
 fails in bringing out clearly the great 
 doctrinal truth appy. implied in the 
 latter words. Hath been 
 
 created] So Eev. : is created, Adth. 
 and (as to the auxiliary) all the other 
 Vv. The transl. 'hath been,' is per- 
 haps here slightly preferable to 'was,' 
 as the latter tends to throw the Krlffis 
 further back than is actually in- 
 tended; the ref. being to the new 
 ktIitis in Christ. Holiness of 
 
 Truth] So WicL., Gov. Test., Bish., 
 Eev. and sim. Ehem. [the tr.) : true 
 holiness, Atith. and the remaining 
 Vv. except Gov. , where it is rtwre cor- 
 rectly true righteousnes and holynes. 
 
 25. Having put away] Putting 
 away, Auth., Eev. False- 
 hood] So Eev. : lying, Auth. and the 
 other Vv. (lesynge, WicL.). 
 
 Truth each man] So Wiol. and sim. 
 Eev. [each one) : the truth euery 
 man, Gov. Test.; truth euery one, 
 Ehem.; euery man the trueth. Gov.; 
 every man truth, Auth. and the re- 
 maining Vv. Because] 
 So Gov. Test., Ehem. ; for, Auth., 
 Wiol., Gen., Eev. ; for as moche as, 
 Tynd., Gov., Gban., Bish. 
 
 26. Be angry] So Tynd., Gov., 
 Gkan., Gen., Ehem.; be ye angry, 
 Auth., Gov. Test., Bish., Eev. ; be ye 
 wrooth, Wioi,. Angered 
 mood] Wrath, Auth. and all the other 
 
 Vv. except Ehem., anger. The 
 change may perhaps be considered 
 scarcely necessary, as the expression 
 has become so familiar : still irapop- 
 ylff/ios, 'exacerbatio,' 'exasperation,' 
 cannot strictly be translated 'wrath.' 
 
 27. Nor yet] * Neither, Auth. : see 
 notes on i Thess. ii. 3. (Transl.). 
 
 28. The stealer] Him that stole, 
 Auth., Tynd., Gban., Gen., Bish., 
 Bev. ; he that stal, WiCL., Ehem. ; 
 he that hath stollen, Gov. ; he y' dyd 
 steale. Gov. Test. The Auth. in ver. 
 29 supplies a precedent for this 
 idiomatic translation of the present 
 part, with the article. His own] 
 His, Auth. and all the other Vv. 
 The thing that is good] So Eev. the 
 thing which is 3. , Auth. , Gran., Gen., 
 Bish. ; that that is g., Wiol. ; some 
 g. thinge, Tynd.; some good. Gov.; 
 that whych is g.. Gov. Test., Ehem. 
 The slight change to 'that' is per- 
 haps more critically exact ; see Brown, 
 Gram, of Gramm. n. 5, p. 293, and 
 notes on oh. i. 23. Have whereof 
 to give] So Gov. Test., Eev. and very 
 sim. Wiol., h. wherof he schal geue, 
 and Ehem., ft. whence to giue: geue, 
 Gkan. , Bish. ; have to give, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. The slight change 
 is made for the sake of preserving the 
 idea of ' sharing ' or ' imparting' appa- 
 rently conveyed by the compound verb. 
 
 29. Speech] So Ehem., Eev.; 
 word, Wiol. : communication, Auth. 
 and the remaining Vv. WliaUver 
 
Chap. IV. 25 — 32. 
 
 183 
 
 mouth, but whatever is good for edification of the need, 
 that it may minister a blessing to the hearers ; and grieve 30 
 not the holy Spirit of God, in whom ye were sealed for 
 the day of redemption. Let all bitterness, and wrath, 
 and anger, and clamour, and evil speaking, be pixt away 
 from you, with all malice ; but become kind one to an- 
 other, tender-hearted, forgiving one another, even as God 
 also in Christ forgave you. 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 is] If ony is, WiOL. ; yf any be, Gov. 
 Test.; if there be any, Ehem. ; such 
 as is. Bet.; that which is, Auth. 
 and the remaming Vv. For 
 
 edification of the need] To the use of 
 edifying, Auih., Gen.; toedefye with 
 all, when {as oft as, Crau.) nede ys, 
 Tynd., Gov., Bish.; for edifying as 
 the need may be, Eev. On the 
 difficulty of properly translating these 
 words, see Trench on Auth. Ver. 
 eh. X. p. 178. Minister a 
 
 blessing to] Geue grace to, Wiol. , 
 Gov. Test., Ehem., Eev. ; havefaveour 
 with, Ttnd. ; be gracious to. Gov. ; 
 minister grace unto, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. 
 
 30. In whom] So Eev., and sim. 
 Wioii., Ehem., in whiche: whereby, 
 Auth.; by whome, Tynd., Chan., 
 Gen., Bish. ; wherwith, Gov. ; where 
 in. Gov. Test. Were] So Eev. : 
 are, Auth. and all the other Vv. 
 For tfte] Unto the, Auth. and aU the 
 other Vv. except Wicl., in the, and 
 Cot. Test., agaynst the. 
 
 31. All bitterness] So Auth., Eev. 
 It is not always desirable to preserve 
 the more literal transl. of ttos ('all 
 manner of), esp. when it is prefixed 
 to more than one abstract substantive, 
 as it tends to load the sentence with- 
 out being much more expressive. 
 When the adj. follows, as in ver. 19, 
 the longer translation wiU often be 
 found more admissible. Wrath] So 
 Auth., WioIi., Gov. Test., Eev.: 
 
 fearsness, Tynd., Gov., Gkan., Bish.; 
 anger. Gen., Ehem. The translation 
 may be retained, whenever Bv/ios and 
 6py^ occur together, as sufficiently 
 exact, provided that by 'wrath' we 
 understand rather the outbreak ('ex- 
 candesceutia, ' Gicero, Tusc. Disput. 
 IV. 9), by 'anger' the more settled 
 and abiding habit. It is perhaps 
 doubtful whether 'wrath' does not 
 imply a greater permanence than 
 8v/i6s; see Gogan ore the Passions, 
 1. I. 2. 3, p. in; stm as Ov/iis is 
 several times ascribed to God as well 
 as to man, the above seems generally 
 the most proper and satisfactory 
 translation. Malice] So Auth., 
 
 Wicl., Gov. Test., Ehem., Eev. : 
 naughtinesse, Bish. ; maliciousness, 
 Tynd. and the remaining Vv. As 
 Kada points rather to the OTil 
 habit of the mind, as distinguished 
 from Tovrjpia, the outcoming of the 
 same (Trench, Synon. § 11), — 'ma- 
 lice,' which is defined by Crabb {Syn- 
 on. s.T.) as 'the essence of badness 
 lying in the heart,' would appear a 
 correct translation ; see Gogan on the 
 Passions, i. 3. 2. i, p. 159. 
 
 32. But] So Gov. (both) : and, 
 Auth., Wiol., Ehem. Eev.; omitted 
 by Tynd., Cean., Gen., Bish. 
 Become] Be ye, Auth. and all the 
 other Vv. (om. ye. Gov. Test. , Ehem.); 
 corresponding to dpS^Ta o^' v/iwy, 
 ver. 31. God also] 
 
 So Gov. Test. Eev.; also God, Wicl., 
 
184 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 V. Become then followers of God, as beloved children; 
 
 2 and walk in love, even as Christ also loved us, and gave 
 Himself for us, an offering and a sacrifice to God, for a 
 savour of sweet smell. 
 
 3 But fornication, and all manner of uncleanness or 
 covetousness, let it not be even named among you, as be- 
 
 4 cometh saints; and no filthiness, and foolish talking or 
 jesting, — things which are unbecoming, — but rather giving 
 
 Ehem. : God, AuiH. and the remain- 
 ing Vv. In Christ'] 
 So WiOL., Gov. (both), Ehem., Eev. : 
 for Christ's sake, Abih. and the re- 
 maining Vv. Forgave] So 
 WiOL., Tym)., Gen., Eev.: hath for- 
 given, Atjih. and the remaining Vv. 
 except Ehbm., hath pardoned. The 
 aorist seems more exact, as pointing 
 to the past act of God's mercy and 
 forgiveness displayed in 'Christ,' i.e. 
 in giving Him to die for the sins of 
 the world. 
 
 Chastee V. I. Become then] Be 
 ye therefore, Auth. {Jbe ye...therfore, 
 Cov.) and the other Vv. except Wiol., 
 therfor be ye. Ttnd. leaves the ovv 
 untranslated. The more literal transl. 
 of yiveirBe might perhaps be here dis- 
 pensed with, as necessarily involved 
 in the action implied in miairal; as 
 however it seems an echo and resump- 
 tion of the preceding ylveade (ch. iv. 
 32), it wiU be most exact to retain 
 this more literal tran'slation. 
 Beloved] So Eev. : moost dereworthe, 
 WiCL. ; most deare, Cov. Test. , Ehem.; 
 dear, Acih. and the remaining Vv. 
 
 i. Even as Christ also] So Eev, : 
 as Chr. also, Auth., Ehem. ; as or., 
 Wiol.; lyke as Chr., Cov. Test.; even 
 as Ch., Tynd. and remaining Vv.: see 
 notes on i Thess. i. 5 {Transl.). 
 Loved] So Wiol., Tynd., Gov., Cban., 
 Ehem., Eev.; Iiath loved, Acth. and 
 
 the remaining Vv. Gave] 
 
 So WiGL., Tynd., Cov., Cban., Eev. : 
 delivered, Ehem.; geuen, Cov. Test. : 
 hath given Auth., Gen., Bish. 
 A savour of sweet smell] A sweet smell- 
 ing savour, Auth., Gen., Bish.; the 
 odour of awetnesse, Wiol.; a twete 
 saver, Tynd., Cov., Ckan.; an odoure 
 of swetnesse, Cov. Test., Ehem; are 
 odour of a sweet smell, Eev. 
 
 3. All manner of uncleanness] All 
 uncleanness, Axii:b.,'B,ey.; see notes on 
 oh. iv. 31 {Transl.). Not be 
 even] Sim. Eev. (710* even be) : Not be 
 once, Auth., Ckan., Gen., Bish.; 
 be not once, Tynd.; not so much as 
 be, Ehem. Wiol. and Cov. (both) 
 leave the Kal untranslated. 
 
 4. And no. ..and] Neither... nor, 
 Auth.; nor — nor, Eev. As several 
 MSS., ADiEiPG; 4 mss.; Vulg., 
 Clarom., al. (Lachm., Meyer, al), read 
 ■5...^, it seems desirable to mark in 
 the translation the reading adopted. 
 Or] So Eev. : nor, Auth. Jesting] 
 So Auth. and all the other Vv. ex- 
 cept Wiol., harlotrie, and Ehem., 
 scurrilitie. Things which are 
 unbecoming] Which are not convenient, 
 Auth. ; that perteyneth not to projiyt, 
 WicL. ; which are not comly, Tynd., 
 Cov., Chan., Bish.; which thynges 
 pertayne not to the matter, Cov. Test.; 
 which are things not comelie. Gen.; be- 
 ing to no purpose, Ehem.; which are 
 not befitting, Eev. 
 
Chap. V. i — 13. 
 
 185 
 
 of thanks. For this ye know, being aware that no whore- 5 
 monger, nor unclean person, nor covetous man who is an 
 idolater, hath an inheritance in the kingdom of Christ 
 and God. Let no man deceive you with vain words: for 6 
 because of these sins cometh the wrath of God upon the 
 sons of disobedience. Do not then become partakers 7 
 with them. For ye were oQce darkness, but now are ye 8 
 light in the Lord : walk as children of light, — for the fruit 9 
 of the light is in all goodness and righteousness and 
 truth, — proving what is well-pleasing to the Lord. And ^° 
 have no fellowship with the unfruitful works of darkness, 
 but rather even reprove them. For the things which are 12 
 done by them in secret it is a shame even to speak of. 
 But all these things, when they are reproved, are made 13 
 manifest BY the light; for every thing that is made 
 
 5. YeltnoWflieingawareY'Ye'kno'U), 
 AuiH.; Tcnow of a surety, Eev. An 
 inheritance^ Any inheritance, Auth. 
 and the other Vv. except Wira., Gov. 
 (both), Ehem., which leave the sub- 
 stantive -without any prefix. 
 
 Of Christ and God] So Eev.: of 
 Christ and of God, AniH. and all the 
 other Vv. 
 
 6. Thesesins'\Thesethings,AT]TS., 
 Eev. Sons] So Wiol., Eev. : 
 children, Auth. and the remaining 
 Vv. 
 
 7. Do not then become] Sim. Ehem., 
 become not therfore: benotyetherefore, 
 Auth., Gov. (both), Gran., Bish. Eev. ; 
 therfor nyle ye be made, Wicl.; be 
 not therfore, Tynd., Gen.: the in- 
 sertion of 'ye' is not in accordance 
 with the original. 
 
 8. Once] So Tynd., Gen., Rev.: 
 sometimes, Auth., Bish.; sumtyme, 
 Wicl., Gov. (both), Crau., Ehem. 
 
 9. The lights So Eev. : the *Spirit, 
 Auth. 
 
 10. Well-pleasing] SoWicij., Co\. 
 Test., Ehem., Eev. : acceptable, Auth., 
 
 Bish.; pleasinge, Tynd. and the re- 
 maining Vv. 
 
 11. But rather even] So Bish., 
 Eev.; similarly, but rather awk- 
 wardly. Gen., but even. ..rather: but 
 rather, Auth. and remaining Vv. ex- 
 cept Wicii., but more. 
 
 12. For the things, &o.] So Eev., 
 and so, as to order, Wiol., Ehem.: 
 far it is a shame even to speak of 
 those things which are done of them 
 in secret, Auth. and, in similar order, 
 the remaining Vv. 
 
 13. All these] All, Auth., Eev. 
 When they are] So Tynd., Gov. , Cean. , 
 Gen., Bish., Rev.: that are, Auth., 
 Wiol., Gov. Test., Ehem. Every- 
 thingthatismAide,&,e.] So Rev. : what- 
 soever doth make manifest, is light, 
 Auth. ; althing that is schewid: is ligt, 
 Wiol. ; whatsoever is rfianifest, that 
 sam£ is light, Tysi).,Go\., Ckan. ; euery 
 thynge y' is manifest, is lyghte, Gov. 
 Test. ; it is light that maketh all 
 things manifest. Gen. ; al that whiche 
 dooth make manifest, is light, Bish.; 
 al that is manifested, is light, Ehem. 
 
186 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 14 manifest is light. Wherefore He saith, Up ! thou that 
 sleepest, and arise from the dead, and Christ shall shine 
 upon thee. 
 
 1 5 Take heed then how ye walk with strictness, not as 
 
 16 fools, but as wise, buying up for yourselves the oppor- 
 
 17 tunity, because the days are evil. For this cause do not be- 
 come unwise, but understanding what the will of the Lord 
 
 18 is. And be not made drunk with wine, wherein is disso- 
 
 19 luteness, but be filled with the Spirit; speaking to one 
 another in psalms and hymns and spiritual songs, singing 
 
 20 and making melody in your heart to the Lord, giving 
 thanks always for all things to God and the Father in the 
 
 21 name of our Lord Jesus Christ, submitting yourselves 
 one to another in the fear of Christ. 
 
 22 Wives, submit yourselves to your own husbands, as 
 
 23 to the Lord ; for a husband is head of his wife, as Christ 
 also is head of the Chiirch; He is the saviour of the 
 
 14. Vpl] So Gov. Test.: rise, 
 Wioii., Ehem.; awake, Auth. and 
 the remaining Vv. Shine 
 vjpm, thee] So Eev. : ligtne thee, 
 WiOL. ; illuminate thee, Ehem. : 
 give thee light, Auth. and remain- 
 ing Yv. 
 
 15. Take heed] So all tlie other 
 Vv. except Wiol. {se ye) ; Ehem., 
 Auth., see; look, Eev. How ye\ 
 So Gov. (hoth), Cean., Ehem. {you), 
 Eev., and sim. WiCL. {hou warli ye): 
 that ye, Auth. and the remaining 
 Vv. With strictness] Circum,- 
 spectly, Auth. and the other Vv. ex- 
 cept Wiol., Ehem., warli (warily); 
 Eev., carefully. 
 
 16. Buying up, &o.] Agenbiynge 
 tyme, Wiol. ; and redeme the tyme. 
 Gov. ; avoydyng occasyon, Cean.; re- 
 deeming the time, Auth. and remain- 
 ing Vv. 
 
 17. For this cause] Wherefore, 
 Auth. and all the other Vv. except 
 Wiol., Ehem., therfor. Do 
 
 not become] Sim. Ehem., become not: 
 be ye not, Auth. and the remaining 
 Vv. except Wicl., nyU ye be made, 
 and Gov. (both), he not ye. 
 
 18. Be not made drunk] Nyle ye 
 be drunken, Wicl. ; be not dronken. 
 Gov. ; be not ye drunken. Gov. Test., 
 Eev. (omits ye); be not drunk, Auth. 
 and the remaining Vv. Disso- 
 luteness] Leccherie, Wicl.; volup- 
 tuousnesse, Gov. Test. ; rioteousnes 
 Ehem.; riot, Eev. ; excess, Auth. and 
 the remaining Vv. 
 
 19. One an/)ther] Yourselves, Auth. 
 and all the other Vv. except Eev., 
 one to another. 
 
 21. Of Christ] Of *God, Auth. 
 
 22. Submit yourselves]ltaMoB,aja6i 
 sim. Eev. ; but not so in Auth. which 
 adopts the insertion. 
 
 23. A husband] *The husband, 
 Auth., Eev., Head of his] Tlie 
 head of the, Auth., Eev. As 
 Christ also] So Eev. : as Chr., Wiol., 
 Gov. Test., Ehem. ; euen as Chr. also. 
 
Chap. V. 14 — 30. 
 
 187 
 
 body. Nevertheless as the church is subject unto Christ, 24 
 so let the wives also he to their husbands in every thing. 
 Husbands, love your wives, even as Christ also loved the 25 
 church, and gave Himself for it ; that He might sanctify 26 
 it, having cleansed it by the laver of the water in the 
 word, that He might Himself present to Himself the 27 
 church in glorious beauty, not having spot, or wrinkle, or 
 any such thing; but that it should be holy and blameless. 
 Thus ought husbands to love their own wives as being 28 
 their own bodies. He that loveth his own wife loveth 
 himself. For no man ever hated his own flesh; but 29 
 nourisheth it and cherisheth it, even as Christ also doth 
 the church : because we are members of His body, of His 30 
 
 Gov.; even as Ghr., Auth. and the 
 remaining Vv. 
 
 He is] * And he is, Auth. ; being him- 
 self, Eev. 
 
 24. Nevertheless] Therefore, Auth. 
 and the other Vv. except WiOL., Gov. 
 Test., BisH., Bhem., Bey., but. 
 Also be] So Eev.: he, Auth. 
 Their husbands] So Bev. : Their 
 * own husbands, Auth. 
 
 26. That he might sanctify it, hav- 
 ing cleansed it] So Bev. : that he 
 might sanctify and cleanse it, Auth. , 
 Gen. ; to make it holi, and clensid it, 
 WiOL. ; to sanctifie it, and clensed it, 
 Tynd., Gov., Cham.; to sanctifie it, 
 when he had cleamsed [it], BiSH. ; 
 that he might sanctifie it, cleansing it, 
 Gov., Test., Bhem. By the 
 
 laver of the water in the word] So 
 Bhem. {of water): with the washing 
 of water by the word, Auth.; with 
 the waischynge of watir in the word 
 of liif, Wioii.; in the faimtayne of 
 water thorow the worde, Tynd., Gran.; 
 in the f. of w. by the worde. Gov. ; 
 with the f. of w. in the worde of lyfe. 
 Gov. Test. ; by the washing of water 
 through y' worde. Gen.; in the f own- 
 tayne of water in the woorde, Bish.; 
 
 by the washing of water with the 
 word, Bev. 
 
 27. That Se might Himself ,&o.] 
 That he might present* it {the Church, 
 B,TiY.)to{vnto, Bish.) himself a glorious 
 Church, Auth.; to geue the chirche 
 glorious to him silf, WiCL. ; to make it 
 vnto himselfe, a glorious congrega- 
 cion, Tynd., Gov., Gban., and sim. 
 Gov. Test., that he myght make it, &c. 
 Blameless] Without blemish, Auth., 
 Bev.; vndefoulid, WiOL., Gov. Test. ; 
 vnspotted, Bhem. ; with out blame, 
 Tynd. and the remaining Vv.: see 
 notes on eh. i. 4 {Transl.). 
 
 28. Thus ou^ht husbands] So ov^ht 
 men, Auth. ; even so oughi husbands, 
 Bev. Own wives. ..wife] So Eev. : 
 Auth. omits own. As being] 
 Euen as. Gov, ; as Auth. and all the 
 other. 
 
 29. Ever] So Wiol., Bhem., Bev.: 
 ever yet, Auth. and the remain- 
 ing Vv. except Gov. Test., at ony 
 tyme. 
 
 Christ also, &o.] Sim. Bev.: *the 
 Lord the Church, Auth. 
 
 30. Because] So Bhem. , Bev. : for, 
 Auth. and the remaining Vv. except 
 Wiol., and. 
 
188 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 3 1 flesh, and of His bones. For this cause shall a man leave 
 father and mother, and shall be joined unto his wife, and 
 
 32 they two shall be one flesh. This mystery is a great one ; 
 I however am speaking in reference to Christ, and to the 
 
 33 church. Nevertheless ye also severally, let each one of 
 you thus love his own wife as himself; and the wife, let 
 her reverence her husband. 
 
 VI. Children, obey your parents, in the Lord ; for this is 
 
 2 right. Honour thy father and thy mother, the which is 
 
 3 the first commandment in regard of promise ; that it may 
 be well with thee, and that thou mayest live long upon the 
 
 4 earth. And ye fathers, provoke not your children to 
 wrath ; but bring them up in the discipline and admoni- 
 tion of the Lord. 
 
 5 Bond-servants, obey your masters according to the 
 
 31. Father\ *HU father, AuiH., 
 Eev. 
 
 32. This mystery, &o.] Sim. Eev., 
 this mystery is great: this is a great 
 mystery, Auth., Gov. Test.; this 
 sacrament is greet, WiOL.; this is a 
 great secrete, Ttnd., Gov., Gban., 
 Gen. , BisH. ; this is a great sacr. , 
 Ehem. I however am, &o.] Ye 
 I seie, WiOL. ; but I say, Gov. Test. ; 
 but I speak, Atjth. and the remaining 
 Vv. In reference to] Concerning, 
 Adih., Gen.; in, WioL., Gov. Test., 
 Ehem.; bitwene, Tynd.; of, Gov., 
 Gran., Gen., Bish.; in regard of, 
 Eev. And to] And, Auth., Ttnd., 
 Gov. ; and in, Wiol., Gov. Test., 
 Ehem. ; and of, Gban., Bish., Eev. ; 
 and conceifiing, Gen. 
 
 33. Ye also severally, &o.] Sim. 
 Eev. do ye also severally love: let 
 everyone of you in particular, Atjtb., 
 ye alle, eche man, Wiol.; do ye so 
 that every one of you, Tynd., Gov., 
 Gkan. (om. of you) ; you also let euery 
 one. Gov. Test. ; euerie one of you, do 
 ye so: let euerie one. Gen., so Bish., 
 adding of you. The slight asyndeton 
 
 in the original is perhaps best retained. 
 Thus love his own wife as] So love 
 his wife even as, AuiH. ; each one his 
 own wife, Eev. Ths wife, let 
 
 her reverence] The wife, see that she 
 reverence, Auth.; let the wyfe se that 
 she f ears, Tynd., Gen., Eev. ; let the 
 wyfe feare. Gov. (both), Gban., Ehem.; 
 [let] the wyfe reuerence, Bish. 
 
 Ghapteb VL 2. Thy mother] So 
 "Wiol., Gov. (both), Ehem.: mother, 
 Auth. and the remaining Vv. 
 The which] Which, Auth., Gov. Test., 
 Gen., Bish., Ehem., Eev; (fta(,"WiCL., 
 Tynd., Gov. ; the same, Gban. 
 In regard of promise] With promise, 
 Auth., Gen., Eev. ; in biheest, WiCL.; 
 that hath eny promes, Tynd., Gov.; 
 in the promyse. Gov. Test., Gban., 
 Ehem. ; in promise, Bish. 
 
 3. And that tliou] And thou, Auth. , 
 Eev. Upon] On, Auth., Eev. 
 
 4. Discipline] So Ehem. ; nurture, 
 Auth., Tynd., Gov. (both), Gban.; 
 techynge, Wiol.; instruction. Gen., 
 Bish.; chastening, Eev. 
 
 5. Bond-servants] Servants, Adth. 
 
Chap. V. 31— VI. 12. 
 
 189 
 
 flesh with fear and trembling, in singleness of your heart, 
 as unto Christ ; not with eye-service as men-pleasers, but 6 
 as bond-servants of Christ ; doing the will of God from 
 the soul; with good will doing service, as to the Lord, 7 
 and not to men: seeing ye know that whatsoever good 8 
 thing each man shall do, this shall he receive of the 
 Lord, whether he he bond or free. And ye masters, do the 9 
 same things unto them, giving up your threatening; 
 seeing ye know that both their Master and yours is in 
 heaven, and there is no respect of persons with Him. 
 
 Finally, be strengthened in the Lord, and in the power 10 
 of His might. Put on the whole armour of God, that 1 1 
 ye may be able to stand against the stratagems of the 
 devil: because our wrestling is not against flesh and 12 
 blood, but it is against Principalities, against Powers, 
 
 Eev. : change to maintain the oppo- 
 sition in ver. 8. Oiey] So Gov. 
 (both), BisH., and sim. WicL. (ohei- 
 sche ye to) : be obedient to (al. unto), 
 AuTH. and the remaining Tv. Your] 
 Them that are your, AtiTH., sim. 
 Eev. 
 
 6. Bomfd-servants] The servants, 
 Adth., Eev. (omits the). From 
 
 the souX\ From the mynde. Gov. Test. : 
 from the heart, Auih. and the re- 
 maining Vv. except Wiol., bi dis- 
 crescioun. 
 
 8. Seeing ye know] Knowing, Auth. , 
 WicL. (witynge), Gov. Test., Bish., 
 Ehem., Eev. ; knowynge this, Cban. ; 
 and remember, Ttnd. ; aiid be sure, 
 Gov. ; and know ye. Gen. Each 
 
 man] So Wiol. : a man, Gov. ; euery 
 man, Gov. Test., each one, Ehem., 
 Eev.; any man, Auth. and the re- 
 maining Vv. Shall do] So Wiol., 
 Ehem. : doeth, Auth. and the remain- 
 ing Vv. The more exact ' shall have 
 done' is not sufficiently in accordance 
 with our usual mode of expression to 
 make it desirable in translation, ex- 
 cept where it is obviously necessary 
 
 that the relation of time should be 
 very exactly defined. 
 This] So Wiol. : the same, Auth., 
 Gov. Test., Gran., Eev.; that, Tynd., 
 Bish. ; it, Gov. ; that same. Gen. 
 
 9. Giving up your] Forbearing, 
 Auth. ; forgeuynge, Wiol. ; puttinge 
 awaye, Tynd., Gov., Gban., Gen., 
 Bish.; remitting, Ehem.; and forbear, 
 Eev. Seeing ye Tmow, &o. [Know- 
 ing that *your master also is in 
 heaven, neither is there, Auth. 
 
 10. Finally] So Eev. : * finally my 
 brethren, Auth. Be strengthened] 
 So Ehem. : be ye stronge, Gov. Test.; 
 be strong, Auth. and the remaining 
 Vv. except Wiol., be ye coimfortide. 
 
 11. Stratagems]Wiles,AvTS.,'BiSY.: 
 aspiyngis, WicL. ; crafty assautes, 
 Tynd., Gov. ; assaultes, Gov. Test., 
 Ckan., Gen., Bish. ; deceites, Ehem. 
 The translation in the text seems 
 better calculated to convey the idea 
 of a fixed and settled plan: see notes 
 on ch. iv. 14. 
 
 1 2. Because our wrestling is not] 
 For our wrestling is not, Ehem., 
 Eev. ; for we wrestle not, Auth. and 
 
190 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 against the World-Rulers of this darkness, against the 
 spiritual hosts of wickedness in the heavenly regions. 
 
 13 For this cause take up THE whole armoue of God, that 
 ye may be able to withstand in the evil day, and having 
 
 14 fully done all, to stand. Stand therefore, having girt your 
 loins about with truth, and having put on the breast- 
 
 15 plate of righteousness, and having shod your feet with 
 
 16 the preparedness of the gospel of peace; in addition to 
 all, having taken up the shield of faith, wherewith ye 
 shall be able to quench all the fiery darts of the wicked 
 
 remaining Vv. except Wicl., for why 
 stryuynge is not to us. But it is] 
 
 But, AuTH., Eev. The World- 
 
 Rulers'] So Eev.: the rulers, Auth. ; 
 governouris, WiOL., Cov. Test. ; the 
 rulers of the worlde, Cov. ; worldy 
 rulars, Tynd., Cban. ; the worldlie 
 gouernours, Gen., Bish. (omitting 
 the) ; the rectors, Bhem. 
 Of this darkness] So Bev.: '0/ tlie 
 darkness of this world, Auth. The 
 spiritual hosts of wickedness] So Rev. 
 ('hosts' ital.): spiritual wickedness, 
 Auth., Bish. ; spiritual thingis of 
 wickidinesse, Wicl., Cov. Test, (the 
 sp.) ; spretuall w,, Tynd. ; y" spretes of 
 w., Cov.; spretuall crafty nes, Cean. ; 
 spiritual wickednesses, GEif.;thespiri- 
 tuals ofvv., Ehem. In the hea- 
 
 venly regions] In high places, Auth. ; 
 in heuenli thingis, Wicl., Tynd. [for), 
 Cov. Test., Ckan. ; vnder the heauen, 
 Cov. ; which are in the hie places. Gen. ; 
 in heauenly [places], Bish. ; in the 
 celestials, Rhbm. ; in the heavenly 
 places. Rev. 
 
 13. For this catise] So Tynd., 
 Cov., Gen. : wherefore, Auth., Cov. 
 Test., Cban., Bish., Rev. ; therfor, 
 WiOL. , Ehem. Take up] Take, 
 
 Ehem. ; take ye, Wiol., Gov. (both) ; 
 take unto you, Auth. and the re- 
 maining Vv. Having fully, 
 &a.] Having done all, to stand, Auth., 
 Rev. ; in alle thingis stonde parfigt. 
 
 Wicl. ; to (cm. to, Cov., Cban.) stonde 
 perfect in all thinges, Tynd., Cov. 
 Test. ; stand in al things perfect, 
 Ehem. ; hauing finished all things, 
 standfast, Gen., Bish. (to st.). 
 
 14. Having girt, &o.] So Eev. 
 (girded) : having your loins girt about, 
 Auth., Bish. ; and be ye girde aboute 
 youre leendis, Wicl. ; and youre 
 loynesgyrd aboute, Tynd., Cov., Cban. 
 (om. aboute). Gen. ; hauing your 
 loines girded, Ehem. 
 
 Having put on] So Eev. : having on, 
 Auth. and all Vv. except Wiol., 
 Ehem., clothid with. 
 
 15. Having shod your feet] So 
 Eev. : your feet shod, Auth., Wiol., 
 Cov. Test., Gen., Bish. ; s/iood, Tynd. ; 
 shod vpon youre fete, Cov. ; hauyng 
 shoes on your fete, Oba}s, , hauing your 
 feete shod, Ehem. With the 
 preparedness of] With the preparation 
 of, Auth., Gen., Eev. ; in the pr. of, 
 Bish. ; to the pr. of, Rhem. ; in 
 makynge redi of, Wiol. ; with showes 
 prepared by, Tynd. ; into the pre- 
 parynge of, Cov. Test. ; that ye maye 
 be prepared for, Cban. Cov. transposes, 
 with the gospell of peace, that ye 
 maye be prepared. 
 
 16. In addition to] 45oDe, Auth. 
 and the other Vv. except Wiol., Cov. 
 Test., Rhem., in., Eev., with- 
 al. Having taken up] Taking, 
 Auth. , Cov. Test., Bish., Rhem. ; 
 
Chap. VI. 13 — 21. 
 
 lyi 
 
 One; and receive the helmet of salvation, and the sword 17 
 of the Spirit, which is the word of God ; with all prayer 18 
 and supplication praying always in the Spirit, and watch- 
 ing thereunto, with all perseverance and supplication for 
 all the saints; and in particular for me, that utterance 19 
 may be given to me in the opening of my mouth, so that 
 with boldness I may make known the mystery of the 
 gospel, for which I am an ambassador in a chain; that 20 
 therein I may speak boldly, as I ought to speak. 
 
 But that ye also may know my condition, how I fare, 2 1 
 Tychicus, the beloved brother and faithful minister in the 
 
 take ye, Wicl. ; take to you, Tynb. , 
 Cran. ; take holde of. Gov. -take. Gen. ; 
 taking up, Bev. Wicked One] 
 
 Sim. Bhem., most wicked one : worst, 
 Wicl.; moost wicked, Gov. Test.; evil 
 one, Eev. ; wicked, Auth. and the 
 remaining Vv. The addition in the 
 text seems desirable as marking the 
 personality of tov irovripov. 
 
 17. Receive] Take, Auth. and all 
 the other Vv. : Wiol., Gov. Test., add 
 ye, and Ehem., vnto you. 
 
 18. With all prayer, &c.] So 
 ^wi. [at all seasons) ; Praying always 
 with all prayer, Auth. 
 
 All the Saints] So Ehem., Eev. : all 
 Saints, Auth. and the remaining Vv. 
 except Wicl. , alle holi men. 
 
 19. Andinparticular]And,Aii'i:B., 
 Eev. : use of Kal to add the particular 
 to the general ; see Fritz, ore Mark, p. 
 
 11, 713, and comp. notes on Phil. iv. 
 
 12. In the opening of my mouth] 
 So Gov. Test. , Ehem. , and Wicl. (omits 
 the) : in opening my mouth, Eev. ; 
 that 1 may open my mouth, Auth, and 
 the remaining Vv., all of which (so 
 too Gov. Test., Ehem.) except Gen., 
 which leaves it open, connect in irap- 
 pricrlq, with what precedes ; see below. 
 So that with boldness I may make 
 known] Boldly, to make known, Auth. ; 
 with trist to make knowun, Wicl. ; 
 
 holdly, to vtter, Tynd., Gov.; with 
 boldnesse, to declare. Gov. Test. ; frely, 
 to vtter. Gran., Bish. ; boldely to pub- 
 lish. Gen.; with confidence, to make 
 knowen,B.3sm. ; withboldness to make 
 known, Eev. 
 
 20. In a chain] So Wiol., Eev. 
 marg., Auth. marg. ; in thys cheyne. 
 Gov. Test., Ehem. : in bonds, Auth. 
 and the remaining Vv., except Eev., 
 in chains. 
 
 21. My condition] Sim. Ttnd., 
 Cran. what condicion I am in: my 
 affairs, Auth., Gen. (mine), Bish., 
 Eev.; what thingis ben about me, 
 Wicl. ; what case I am in. Gov. ; the 
 thyngesthat are aboute me, Gov, Test., 
 Ehem. (om. that are) : change merely 
 to avoid the homoeotelenton. 
 
 How I fare] And how I do, Auth., 
 Eev. (omits 'and') ; what I do, Wicl., 
 Gov. Test., Ehem. ; and what I do, 
 Tynd. and the remaining Vv. : but 
 as the I do might be misunder- 
 stood and referred to what the Apostle 
 was actually engaged in (see Wolf in 
 loc), it seems best, with Harl., to 
 refer t4 Kar i/jii to 'meine Lage,' H 
 Tpdiraa to 'mein Befindeu.' 
 Thebeloved]So'BEY.: abeloved,Av'is.; 
 my moost dere, Wicl. ; my deare, 
 Tynd., Gov., Gen. ; y' moost deare, 
 Gov. Test. ; the deare, Gran. ; a deare. 
 
192 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 22 Lord, shall make known to you all things : whom I have 
 sent unto you for this very purpose, that ye may know 
 our affairs, and that he may comfort your hearts. 
 
 23 Peace he to the brethren, and love with faith, from 
 
 24 God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ. Grace he 
 with all them that love our Lord Jesus Christ in incor- 
 ruption. 
 
 BisH. ; my deerest, Ehem. : a ourioue 
 variety of renderings of two simple 
 words. 
 
 22. This very] So Eev. : this 
 same, Wiol., Ehem. ; the same, Acth. 
 and all the other Vv. May... 
 
 may] So Eev. : might... might, Auth. ; 
 change in accordance with the law 
 
 of the succession of tenses; see 
 Latham, Engl. Lang, § 616, 
 
 23. In incorruption] So Wiol., 
 Ehem., Eev. and similarly Auth. 
 marg. , withincorruption : in sincerity, 
 Auth. , Bish. ; in puemes, Tynd. ; vn- 
 faynedly, Cov.,Cban.; syncerely, Cov. 
 Test. ; to [their] immortalitie, Gen. 
 
 THE END. 
 
 OAMBttlDOE : PKINTBD BY 0. J. CLAY, M.A. AND SON, AT THE UNIVEBSITY PHESS.